SYSMAC CJ Series CJ1H CPU__H R, CJ1G/H CPU__H, CJ1G CPU__P, CPU__, CJ1M CPU__ Programmable C... CJManual

User Manual: CJManual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 734 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

OPERATION MANUAL
Cat. No. W393-E1-14
SYSMAC CJ Series
CJ1H-CPU@@H-R,
CJ1G/H-CPU@@H, CJ1G-CPU@@P,
CJ1G-CPU@@, CJ1M-CPU@@
Programmable Controllers
SYSMAC CJ Series
CJ1H-CPU@@H-R,
CJ1G/H-CPU@@H, CJ1G-CPU@@P,
CJ1G-CPU@@, CJ1M-CPU@@
Programmable Controllers
Operation Manual
Revised September 2009
iv
v
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures
by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this
manual. Always heed the information provided with them. Failure to heed pre-
cautions can result in injury to people or damage to property.
!DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
!WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
!Caution Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury, or property damage.
OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also
capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not
it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON
products, often means “word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in
this sense.
The abbreviation “PLC” means Programmable Controller. “PC” is used, how-
ever, in some Programming Device displays to mean Programmable Control-
ler.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you
locate different types of information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient opera-
tion of the product.
1,2,3... 1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.
OMRON, 2001
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, o
r
by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission o
f
OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is con-
stantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without
notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility
for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in
this publication.
vi
Unit Versions of CS/CJ-series CPU Units
Unit Versions A “unit version” has been introduced to manage CPU Units in the CS/CJ
Series according to differences in functionality accompanying Unit upgrades.
This applies to the CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D CPU Units.
Notation of Unit Versions
on Products
The unit version is given to the right of the lot number on the nameplate of the
products for which unit versions are being managed, as shown below.
• CS1-H, CJ1-H, and CJ1M CPU Units manufactured on or before Novem-
ber 4, 2003 do not have a unit version given on the CPU Unit (i.e., the
location for the unit version shown above is blank).
• The unit version of the CJ1-H-R CPU Units begins at version 4.0.
• The unit version of the CS1-H, CJ1-H, and CJ1M CPU Units, as well as
the CS1D CPU Units for Single-CPU Systems, begins at version 2.0.
• The unit version of the CS1D CPU Units for Duplex-CPU Systems, begins
at version 1.1.
• CPU Units for which a unit version is not given are called Pre-Ver. @.@
CPU Units, such as Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units and Pre-Ver. 1.1 CPU Units.
Confirming Unit Versions
with Support Software
CX-Programmer version 4.0 can be used to confirm the unit version using one
of the following two methods.
•Using the PLC Information
• Using the Unit Manufacturing Information (This method can be used for
Special I/O Units and CPU Bus Units as well.)
Note CX-Programmer version 3.3 or lower cannot be used to confirm unit versions.
PLC Information
• If you know the device type and CPU type, select them in the Change
PLC Dialog Box, go online, and select PLC - Edit - Information from the
menus.
• If you don't know the device type and CPU type, but are connected
directly to the CPU Unit on a serial line, select PLC - Auto Online to go
online, and then select PLC - Edit - Information from the menus.
In either case, the following PLC Information Dialog Box will be displayed.
CS1H-CPU67H
CPU UNIT
Lot No. 040715 0000 Ver.3.0
OMRON Corporation MADE IN JAPAN
CS/CJ-series CPU Unit Product nameplate
Lot No. Unit version
Example for Unit version 3.0
vii
Use the above display to confirm the unit version of the CPU Unit.
Unit Manufacturing Information
In the IO Table Window, right-click and select Unit Manufacturing informa-
tion - CPU Unit.
The following Unit Manufacturing information Dialog Box will be displayed.
Unit version
viii
Use the above display to confirm the unit version of the CPU Unit connected
online.
Using the Unit Version
Labels
The following unit version labels are provided with the CPU Unit.
These labels can be attached to the front of previous CPU Units to differenti-
ate between CPU Units of different unit versions.
Unit version
ix
Unit Version Notation In this manual, the unit version of a CPU Unit is given as shown in the follow-
ing table.
Product nameplate
Meaning
CPU Units on which no unit version is
given
Units on which a version is given
(Ver. @.@)
Designating individual
CPU Units (e.g., the
CS1H-CPU67H)
Pre-Ver. 2.0 CS1-H CPU Units CS1H-CPU67H CPU Unit Ver. @.@
Designating groups of
CPU Units (e.g., the
CS1-H CPU Units)
Pre-Ver. 2.0 CS1-H CPU Units CS1-H CPU Units Ver. @.@
Designating an entire
series of CPU Units
(e.g., the CS-series CPU
Units)
Pre-Ver. 2.0 CS-series CPU Units CS-series CPU Units Ver. @.@
Lot No. XXXXXX XXXX
OMRON Corporation MADE IN JAPAN
Lot No. XXXXXX XXXX
Ver. @
@
.@
x
Unit Versions
CJ Series
NSJ Series
Units Models Unit version
CJ1-H CPU Units CJ1H-CPU@@H-R Unit version 4.2
Unit version 4.1
Unit version 4.0
CJ1@-CPU@@H
CJ1@-CPU@@P
Unit version 4.0
Unit version 3.0
Unit version 2.0
Pre-Ver. 2.0
CJ1M CPU Units CJ1M-CPU12/13
CJ1M-CPU22/23
Unit version 4.0
Unit version 3.0
Unit version 2.0
Pre-Ver. 2.0
CJ1M-CPU11/21 Unit version 4.0
Unit version 3.0
Unit version 2.0
Units Unit version
NSJ@-TQ@@(B)-G5D
NSJ@-TQ@@(B)-M3D
Unit version 3.0
xi
Function Support by Unit Version
• Functions Supported for Unit Version 4.0 or Later
CX-Programmer 7.0 or higher must be used to enable using the functions
added for unit version 4.0.
Additional functions are supported if CX-Programmer version 7.2 or higher is
used.
CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Units
User programs that contain functions supported only by CPU Units with unit
version 4.0 or later cannot be used on CS/CJ-series CPU Units with unit ver-
sion 3.0 or earlier. An error message will be displayed if an attempt is made to
download programs containing unit version 4.0 functions to a CPU Unit with a
unit version of 3.0 or earlier, and the download will not be possible.
If an object program file (.OBJ) using these functions is transferred to a CPU
Unit with a unit version of 3.0 or earlier, a program error will occur when oper-
ation is started or when the unit version 4.0 function is executed, and CPU
Unit operation will stop.
Function CJ1H-CPU@@H-R, CJ1@-CPU@@H,
CJ1G-CPU@@P, CJ1 M - C P U @@
Unit version 4.0 or
later
Other unit versions
Online editing of function blocks
Note This function cannot be used for simulations on the
CX-Simulator.
OK ---
Input-output variables in function blocks OK ---
Text strings in function blocks OK ---
New application
instructions
Number-Text String Conversion Instructions:
NUM4, NUM8, NUM16, STR4, STR8, and STR16
OK ---
TEXT FILE WRITE (TWRIT) OK ---
ST programming in task programs OK with CX-Program-
mer version 7.2 or
higher
---
SFC programming in task programs OK with CX-Program-
mer version 7.2 or
higher
---
xii
• Functions Supported for Unit Version 3.0 or Later
CX-Programmer 5.0 or higher must be used to enable using the functions
added for unit version 3.0.
CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Units
User programs that contain functions supported only by CPU Units with unit
version 3.0 or later cannot be used on CS/CJ-series CPU Units with unit ver-
sion 2.0 or earlier. An error message will be displayed if an attempt is made to
download programs containing unit version 3.0 functions to a CPU Unit with a
unit version of 2.0 or earlier, and the download will not be possible.
If an object program file (.OBJ) using these functions is transferred to a CPU
Unit with a unit version of 2.0 or earlier, a program error will occur when oper-
ation is started or when the unit version 3.0 function is executed, and CPU
Unit operation will stop.
Function CJ1H-CPU@@H-R
CJ1@-CPU@@H,
CJ1G-CPU@@P,
CJ1M-CPU@@
Unit version 3.0 or
later
Other unit versions
Function blocks OK ---
Serial Gateway (converting FINS commands to CompoWay/F
commands at the built-in serial port)
OK ---
Comment memory (in internal flash memory) OK ---
Expanded simple backup data OK ---
New application
instructions TXDU(256), RXDU(255) (support no-protocol
communications with Serial Communications
Units with unit version 1.2 or later)
OK ---
Model conversion instructions: XFERC(565),
DISTC(566), COLLC(567), MOVBC(568),
BCNTC(621)
OK ---
Special function block instructions: GETID(286) OK ---
Additional
instruction func-
tions
PRV(881) and PRV2(883) instructions: Added
high-frequency calculation methods for calculat-
ing pulse frequency. (CJ1M CPU Units only)
OK ---
xiii
• Functions Supported for Unit Version 2.0 or Later
CX-Programmer 4.0 or higher must be used to enable using the functions
added for unit version 2.0.
CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Units
Function CJ1-H CPU Units CJ1M CPU Units
(CJ1H-CPU@@H-R)
(CJ1@-CPU@@H)
(CJ1G-CPU@@P)
CJ1M-CPU12/13/22/23 CJ1M-
CPU11/21
Unit version
2.0 or
later
Other unit
versions
Unit version
2.0 or
later
Other unit
versions
Other unit
version 2.0
or later
Downloading and Uploading Individual Tasks OK --- OK --- OK
Improved Read Protection Using Passwords OK --- OK --- OK
Write Protection from FINS Commands Sent
to CPU Units via Networks
OK --- OK --- OK
Online Network Connections without I/O
Ta b le s
OK --- (Sup-
ported if I/O
tables are
automatically
generated at
startup.)
OK --- (Sup-
ported if I/O
tables are
automatically
generated at
startup.)
OK
Communications through a Maximum of 8
Network Levels
OK --- OK --- OK
Connecting Online to PLCs via NS-series
PTs
OK OK from lot
number
030201
OK OK from lot
number
030201
OK
Setting First Slot Words OK for up to
64 groups
OK for up to 8
groups
OK for up to
64 groups
OK for up to 8
groups
OK for up to
64 groups
Automatic Transfers at Power ON without a
Parameter File
OK --- OK --- OK
Automatic Detection of I/O Allocation Method
for Automatic Transfer at Power ON
OK --- OK --- OK
Operation Start/End Times OK --- OK --- OK
New Applica-
tion Instructions
MILH, MILR, MILC OK --- OK --- OK
=DT, <>DT, <DT, <=DT,
>DT, >=DT
OK --- OK --- OK
BCMP2 OK --- OK OK OK
GRY OK OK from lot
number
030201
OK OK from lot
number
030201
OK
TPO OK --- OK --- OK
D S W, T K Y, H K Y, M T R ,
7SEG
OK --- OK --- OK
EXPLT, EGATR, ESATR,
ECHRD, ECHWR
OK --- OK --- OK
Reading/Writing CPU Bus
Units with IORD/IOWR
OK --- OK --- OK
PRV2 --- --- OK, but only
for CPU Units
with built-in
I/O
--- OK, but only
for CPU Units
with built-in
I/O
xiv
User programs that contain functions supported only by CPU Units with unit
version 2.0 or later cannot be used on CS/CJ-series Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units.
An error message will be displayed if an attempt is made to download pro-
grams containing unit version s.0 functions to a Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Unit, and
the download will not be possible.
If an object program file (.OBJ) using these functions is transferred to a Pre-
Ver. 2.0 CPU Unit, a program error will occur when operation is started or
when the unit version 2.0 function is executed, and CPU Unit operation will
stop.
xv
Unit Versions and Programming Devices
The following tables show the relationship between unit versions and CX-Pro-
grammer versions.
Unit Versions and Programming Devices
Note 1. As shown above, there is no need to upgrade to CX-Programmer version
as long as the functions added for unit versions are not used.
2. CX-Programmer version 7.1 or higher is required to use the new functions
added for unit version 4.0 of the CJ1-H-R CPU Units. CX-Programmer ver-
sion 7.22 or higher is required to use unit version 4.1 of the CJ1-H-R CPU
Units. CX-Programmer version 7.0 or higher is required to use unit version
4.2 of the CJ1-H-R CPU Units. You can check the CX-Programmer version
using the About menu command to display version information.
3. CX-Programmer version 7.0 or higher is required to use the functional im-
provements made for unit version 4.0 of the CS/CJ-series CPU Units. With
CX-Programmer version 7.2 or higher, you can use even more expanded
functionality.
Device Type Setting The unit version does not affect the setting made for the device type on the
CX-Programmer. Select the device type as shown in the following table
regardless of the unit version of the CPU Unit.
Note Select one of the following CPU types: CPU67-R, CPU66-R, CPU65-R, or
CPU64-R.
CPU Unit Functions (See note 1.) CX-Programmer Program-
ming Con-
sole
Ver. 3.3
or lower
Ver. 4.0 Ver. 5.0
Ver. 6.0
Ver. 7.0
or higher
CS/CJ-series unit
version 4.0
Functions added
for unit version
4.0
Using new functions --- --- --- OK (See
notes 2
and 3.)
No
restrictions
Not using new functions OK OK OK OK
CS/CJ-series unit
version 3.0
Functions added
for unit version
3.0
Using new functions --- --- OK OK
Not using new functions OK OK OK OK
CS/CJ-series unit
version 2.0
Functions added
for unit version
2.0
Using new functions --- OK OK OK
Not using new functions OK OK OK OK
Series CPU Unit group CPU Unit model Device type setting on
CX-Programmer Ver. 4.0 or higher
CJ Series CJ1-H CPU Units CJ1G-CPU@@H
CJ1G-CPU@@P
CJ1G-H
CJ1H-CPU@@H-R
(See note.)
CJ1H-CPU@@H
CJ1H-H
CJ1M CPU Units CJ1M-CPU@@ CJ1M
xvi
Troubleshooting Problems with Unit Versions on the CX-Programmer
Problem Cause Solution
After the above message is displayed, a compiling
error will be displayed on the Compile Tab Page in the
Output Window.
An attempt was made to down-
load a program containing
instructions supported only by
later unit versions or a CPU Unit
to a previous unit version.
Check the program or change
to a CPU Unit with a later unit
version.
An attempt was to download a
PLC Setup containing settings
supported only by later unit ver-
sions or a CPU Unit to a previous
unit version.
Check the settings in the PLC
Setup or change to a CPU Unit
with a later unit version.
“????” is displayed in a program transferred from the
PLC to the CX-Programmer.
An attempt was made to upload a
program containing instructions
supported only by higher versions
of CX-Programmer to a lower ver-
sion.
New instructions cannot be
uploaded to lower versions of
CX-Programmer. Use a higher
version of CX-Programmer.
xvii
CJ1-H-R CPU Units (High-speed)
Overview The CJ1-H-R CPU Units (CJ1H-CPU@@H-R) are high-speed versions of unit
version 4.0 of the CJ1-H CPU Units (CJ1H-CPU@@H).
Models
Note In the CX-Programmer, set the device type to CJ1H-H and the CPU type to
CPU67-R, CPU66-R, CPU65-R, or CPU64-R.
Differences Compared to
CJ1-H CPU Units
The CJ1-H-R CPU Units (CJ1H-CPU@@H-R) have the following differences
in comparison to the CJ1-H CPU Units (CJ1H-CPU@@H).
Note 1. Refer to the CX-Integrator Operation Manual (Cat. No. W445) and the
Communication Unit operation manuals for details.
2. The 0.01 s Clock Pulse cannot be used with unit version 4.1 of the CJ1-HR
CPU Units. The 0.01 s Clock Pulse can be used with all other unit versions.
Model Unit version Specifications
CJ1H-CPU67H-R Ver. 4.2 Equivalent to CJ1H-CPU67H
(Program capacity: 250K steps)
CJ1H-CPU66H-R Equivalent to CJ1H-CPU66H
(Program capacity: 120K steps)
CJ1H-CPU65H-R Equivalent to CJ1H-CPU65H
(Program capacity: 60K steps)
CJ1H-CPU64H-R Equivalent to CJ1H-CPU64H
(Program capacity: 30K steps)
Item CJ1-H-R CPU Units
(CJ1H-CPU@@H-R)
CJ1-H CPU Units
(CJ1H-CPU@@H)
Instruc-
tion exe-
cution
time
Basic instructions 0.016 µs min. 0.02 µs min.
Special instructions 0.048 µs min. 0.06 µs min.
Floating-point math calcu-
lations (e.g., FLOATING-
POINT ADD (+F(454))
0.24 µs8 µs
I/O
refreshing
Basic I/O Units (e.g., 16-
point Input Unit)
1.4 µs3 µs
Special I/O Units (e.g.,
Analog Input Unit)
50 µs 120 µs
New
instruc-
tions
Timer instructions •TENTH-MS TIMER (TIMU/TIMUX)
•HUNDREDTH-MS TIMER
(TIMUH/TMUHX)
Not supported.
I/O Unit Instructions •SPECIAL I/O UNIT I/O REFRESH
(FIORF(225))
Not supported.
Floating-point math and
conversion instructions
•SINQ
•COSQ
•TANQ
•MOVF
Not supported.
Overhead processing time 0.13 ms 0.3 ms
Unit for setting scheduled interrupt
intervals
0.1, 1, or 10 ms 1 or 10 ms
Software interval response time 40 µs 124 µs
Function block startup time 3.3 µs6.8 µs
Clock pulses 0.1 ms, 1 ms, 0.01 s (See note 2.),
0.02 s, 0.1 s, 0.2 s, 1 s, 1 min
0.02 s, 0.1 s, 0.2 s, 1 s, 1 min
Maximum number of relay networks
that can be set in routing tables
(See note 1.)
64 20
xviii
CJ1H-CPU@@H-R Version 4.1 Specifications Change
The following specifications changes have been made for CJ1H-CPU@@H-R
version 4.1.
The following specifications for unit version 4.2 and later are the same as the
specifications for unit version 4.0.
Functionality Changes
• If ONE-MS TIMER instructions (TMHH(540)/TMHHX(552)) with timer
numbers 0 to 15 are used in existing programs with CJ1H-CPU@@H-R
version 4.1, the timer numbers must be changed to timer numbers
between 0016 and 4095.
Performance Changes
Note 1. The timing precision of version 4.0 and version 4.1 are different. Be sure
to check the effect on the application.
2. There have been no changes in the timing precision of TEN-MS TIMER in-
structions (TIMH(015)/TIMHX(551)) and TENTH-MS TIMER instructions
(TIMU(541)/TIMUX(556)) since version 4.0. Use TEN-MS TIMER instruc-
tions and TENTH-MS TIMER instructions if accuracy is a problem when
using HUNDRED-MS TIMER instructions and ONE-MS TIMER instruc-
tions.
■Programming Devices
Use CX-Programmer version 7.1 or higher for the CJ1-H-R CPU Units. Set
the device type to CJ1H-H and the CPU type to one of the CPU types ending
in “-R.” Use the following procedure.
1,2,3... 1. Select New from the File Menu.
2. Select CJ1H-H in the Change PLC Dialog Box.
3. Select one of the following for the CPU type: CPU67-R, CPU66-R, CPU65-
R, or CPU64-R.
Note 1. If CX-Programmer version 7.0 or lower is used, the new features of the
CJ1-H-R CPU Units will not be supported, i.e., functionality will be the
same as the CJ1-H CPU Units.
CPU Unit version CJ1-H
Ver. 4.0
CJ1-H-R
Ver. 4.0
CJ1-H-R
Ver. 4.1
Timer numbers that can be used with ONE-MS
TIMER instructions
0000 to
0015
0000 to
4095
0016 to
4095
0.01-s clock pulse Not sup-
ported
Sup-
ported
Not sup-
ported
CPU Unit version CJ1-H
Ver. 4.0
CJ1-H-R
Ver. 4.0
CJ1-H-R
Ver. 4.1
Timing precision of HUNDRED-MS TIMER
instructions (TIM/TIMX(550))
−10 to
0ms
−10 to
0ms
−100 to
0ms
Timing precision of ONE-MS TIMER instruc-
tions (TMHH(540)/TMHHX(522))
−1 to
0ms
−1 to
0ms
−10 to
0ms
Model Device type CPU type
CJ1H-CPU67H-R CJ1H-H CPU67-R
CJ1H-CPU66H-R CPU66-R
CJ1H-CPU65H-R CPU65-R
CJ1H-CPU64H-R CPU64-R
xix
2. CX-Programmer version 7.22 or higher is required to use unit version 4.1
of the CJ1-H-R CPU Units. CX-Programmer version 7.0 or higher is re-
quired to use unit version 4.2 of the CJ1-H-R CPU Units. CX-Programmer
version 7.22 or higher has added functionality that will provide a warning
when performing a program check or when transferring the program if a
ONE-MS TIMER instruction ((TMHH(540)/TMHHX(552)) is set to timer
numbers 0000 to 0015 or if a 0.01-second clock pulse is used. Version 7.22
or higher can be obtained using the auto-update function. If you are not
sure how to obtain CX-Programmer version 7.22, contact your OMRON
representative.
xx
Loop-control CPU Units
Overview Loop-control CPU Units are CPU Units with a pre-installed Loop Controller
functional element.
Note The Loop Controller functional element is an inseparable part of the CPU Unit
and cannot be removed.
Model Numbers,
Functional Elements,
and Versions
The CJ1G-CPU@@P Loop-control CPU Unit is comprised of a CPU Unit ele-
ment with the same functionality as a CJ1G-CPU@@H CPU Unit with version
3.0 or later (see note) and a Loop Controller element. The following table lists
the model numbers for CJ1G Loop-control CPU Units, the types of CPU Unit
element, Loop Controller element, and the functional element version codes.
Note A single unit version for the Loop-control CPU Unit as a whole is not provided.
The unit versions for the CJ1-H CPU Unit with unit version 3.0 or later and the
functional element version code.
Differences between
CJ1G-CPU@@H and
CPU Unit Elements
The differences between the CPU Unit element in the Loop-control CPU Unit
and the CJ1G-CPU@@H CPU Unit are shown here. The two types of CPU
Unit are otherwise the same.
Note The functions added in the version upgrade for unit version 3.0 and later are
also the same.
Additional Auxiliary Area
Flags and Bits
Loop-control CPU Units can use the following Auxiliary Area flags and bits,
which are not supported for CJ1G-CPU@@H CPU Units.
For details on the Auxiliary Area bits and flags, refer to the section on SYS-
MAC CS/CJ Series Loop Control Boards, Process-control CPU Units, Loop-
control CPU Units Operation Manual (W406).
Product name Product model
number
Configuration
CPU Unit element Loop Controller element
CPU Unit model
with same function-
ality
Functional ele-
ment unit ver-
sion
Functional ele-
ment name
Functional ele-
ment version
Loop-control
CPU Units
CJ1G-CPU45P CJ1G-CPU45H Ver. 3.0 or higher LCB03 Ver. 2.0
CJ1G-CPU44P CJ1G-CPU44H Ver. 3.0 or higher LCB03 Ver. 2.0
CJ1G-CPU43P CJ1G-CPU43H Ver. 3.0 or higher LCB03 Ver. 2.0
CJ1G-CPU42P CJ1G-CPU42H Ver. 3.0 or higher LCB01 Ver. 2.0
Address Name
Word Bit
A424 00 Inner Board WDT Error Flag (fatal error)
01 Inner Board Bus Error Flag (fatal error)
02 Cyclic Monitor Error Flag (fatal error)
03 Flash Memory Data Error Flag (fatal error)
04 Incompatible CPU Unit Error Flag (non-fatal error)
08 Loop Controller High Load Flag (non-fatal error)
11 Backup Data (Flash Memory) Error Flag
12 Specified EM Bank Unusable Error Flag
A608 00 Inner Board Restart Bit
A609 01 Start Mode at Power ON: Hot Start
A609 02 Start Mode at Power ON: Cold Start
xxi
Loop-control CPU Unit
Dimensions
Indicators
Product name and model W
(mm)
H
(mm)
D (mm)
CJ1G-CPU45P/44P/43P/42P
Loop-control CPU Unit
69 90 65 (not including connector)
73.9 (including connector)
CJ1G-CPU45H/44H/43H/42H
CJ1-H CPU Unit (reference)
62
CONTROLLER
CJ1G-CPU44P
SYSMAC
PROGRAMMABLE
ERR/ALM
RUN
COMM
INH
PRPHL
OPEN
PERIPHERAL
BUSY
MCPWR
PORT
65
69 73.9
2.7
2.7
90
LCB03 EXEC
RDY
INNER LOOP CONTROLLER
RDY
EXEC
Indicator Name Color Status Description
RDY Ready Green Not lit The Loop Control Board is not operating for one of the fol-
lowing reasons:
• A Fatal Inner Board Error occurred (A40112 ON.)
• Initialization is not completed yet.
• A fatal error occurred.
• The flash memory backup data is invalid.
• The Loop Control Board is initializing.
• A hardware failure occurred in the Loop Control Board.
• Power is not being supplied from the Power Supply Unit.
• A Loop Control Board WDT error occurred.
Flashing • A WDT error occurred in the CPU Unit.
Lit The Loop Control Board is ready for operation.
xxii
Current Consumption and
Weight
Common Processing Time
(Overhead Time)
Battery Backup Time At 25°C, the battery life (maximum service life) for batteries is five years
whether or not power is supplied to the CPU Unit while the battery is installed.
This is the same as for CJ1G-CPU@@H CPU Units. The following table shows
the approximate minimum lifetimes and typical lifetimes for the backup battery
(total time with power not supplied).
Note The minimum lifetime is the memory backup time at an ambient temperature
of 55°C. The typical lifetime is the memory backup time at an ambient temper-
ature of 25°C.
EXEC Running Green Not lit The system is stopped for one of the following reasons:
• The Loop Control Board is initializing.
• A hardware failure occurred in the Loop Control Board.
• Power is not being supplied from the Power Supply Unit.
• A Loop Control Board WDT error occurred.
• The Loop Control Board is not running.
• Data is being written to flash memory.
Flashing
(at 0.5-s
intervals)
Erasing flash memory.
Flashing
(0.2-s
intervals)
Backup operation to function block flash memory in
progress
Lit The Loop Control Board is not running.
Indicator Name Color Status Description
Product name and model Current consumption Weight
CJ1G-CPU45P/44P/43P/42P
Loop-control CPU Unit
1.06 A 220 g max.
CJ1G-CPU45H/44H/43H/42H
CJ1-H CPU Unit (reference)
0.91 A 190 g max.
Product name and model Common processing time
CJ1G-CPU45P/44P/43P/42P
Loop-control CPU Unit
0.8 ms max.
CJ1G-CPU45H/44H/43H/42H
CJ1-H CPU Unit (reference)
0.3 ms
Model Approx.
maximum
lifetime
Approx.
minimum
lifetime
(See note.)
Typical lifetime
(See note.)
CJ1G-CPU45P/44P/43P/42P
Loop-control CPU Unit
5 years 5,600 hours
(approximately
0.64 years)
43,000 hours
(approximately
5 years)
CJ1G-CPU45H/44H/43H/42H
CJ1-H CPU Unit (reference)
5 years 6,500 hours
(approximately
0.75 years)
43,000 hours
(approximately
5 years)
xxiii
Programming Devices
Loop Controller Element Using CX-Process Tool Ver. 4.0 or later, select the Loop-control CPU
Unit/Process-control CPU Unit from the LC Type field in the LCB/LC001 Dia-
log Box. Then select either CJ1G-CPU42P, CJ1G-CPU43P, CJ1G-CPU44P,
orCJ1G-CPU45P, from the Number-Model pull-down list in the Unit Informa-
tion field.
CPU Unit Element Use CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0 or later. The CPU Unit functions are the same
as the CJ1G-CPU@@H, except for the differences provided in the previous
table. Therefore, select CJ1G-H as the device type when using CX-Program-
mer.
1,2,3... 1. Select New from the File Menu.
2. Select one of the following CPU Unit types in the Change PLC Dialog Box.
Reference Manuals • The CPU Unit functions are the same as the CJ1G-CPU@@H, except for
the differences provided in the previous table. Therefore, for details on the
CPU Unit functions, refer to the SYSMAC CJ Series Programmable Con-
trollers Operation Manual (W393), SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Programmable
Controllers Programming Manual (W394), SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Pro-
grammable Controllers Instructions Reference Manual (W340), and Com-
munications Commands Reference Manual (W342).
• For details on the Loop Controller functions (LCB@@ functional element)
refer to the section on SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Loop Control Boards, Pro-
cess-control CPU Units, Loop-control CPU Units Operation Manual
(W406).
Loop-control CPU Unit Device type CPU Unit type
CJ1G-CPU45P CJ1G-H CPU45
CJ1G-CPU44P CPU44
CJ1G-CPU43P CPU43
CJ1G-CPU42P CPU42
xxiv
xxv
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxxvii
1 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxviii
2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxviii
3 Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxviii
4 Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xl
5 Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xli
6 Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xlv
SECTION 1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1-2 CJ-series Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1-3 CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Unit Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1-4 CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 4.0 Upgrades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1-5 CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 Upgrades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1-6 CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
1-7 CJ1-H-R, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CJ1 CPU Unit Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
1-8 Function Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
1-9 CJ1M Functions Arranged by Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
1-10 Comparison to CS-series PLCs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
SECTION 2
Specifications and System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
2-1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
2-2 CPU Unit Components and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
2-3 Basic System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
2-4 I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
2-5 Expanded System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
2-6 Unit Current Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
2-7 CPU Bus Unit Setting Area Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
2-8 I/O Table Settings List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
SECTION 3
Nomenclature, Functions, and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
3-1 CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
3-2 File Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
3-3 Programming Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
3-4 Power Supply Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
3-5 I/O Control Units and I/O Interface Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
3-6 CJ-series Basic I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
3-7 B7A Interface Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
xxvi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 4
Operating Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
4-1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
4-2 Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
SECTION 5
Installation and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
5-1 Fail-safe Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
5-2 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
5-3 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
SECTION 6
DIP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
6-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
6-2 Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
SECTION 7
PLC Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
7-1 PLC Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
7-2 Explanations of PLC Setup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
SECTION 8
I/O Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
8-1 I/O Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
8-2 Creating I/O Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
8-3 Allocating First Words to Slots and Reserving Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
8-4 Allocating First Words to Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
8-5 Detailed Information on I/O Table Creation Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
8-6 Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
SECTION 9
Memory Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
9-1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
9-2 I/O Memory Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
9-3 I/O Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
9-4 Data Link Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
9-5 CPU Bus Unit Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
9-6 Special I/O Unit Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
9-7 Serial PLC Link Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
9-8 DeviceNet Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
9-9 Internal I/O Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
9-10 Holding Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
9-11 Auxiliary Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
xxvii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
9-12 TR (Temporary Relay) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
9-13 Timer Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
9-14 Counter Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
9-15 Data Memory (DM) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
9-16 Extended Data Memory (EM) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
9-17 Index Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
9-18 Data Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
9-19 Task Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
9-20 Condition Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
9-21 Clock Pulses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
9-22 Parameter Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
SECTION 10
CPU Unit Operation and the Cycle Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
10-1 CPU Unit Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
10-2 CPU Unit Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
10-3 Power OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
10-4 Computing the Cycle Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
10-5 Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
SECTION 11
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
11-1 Error Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
11-2 Error Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
11-3 Troubleshooting Racks and Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
SECTION 12
Inspection and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
12-1 Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
12-2 Replacing User-serviceable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Appendices
A Specifications of Basic I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
B CJ1M CPU Unit Built-in I/O Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
C Auxiliary Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
D Memory Map of PLC Memory Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
E PLC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
F Connecting to the RS-232C Port on the CPU Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
G CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
xxviii
xxix
About this Manual:
This manual describes the installation and operation of the CJ-series Programmable Controllers
(PLCs) and includes the sections described on the following page. The CS Series, CJ Series and NSJ
Series are subdivided as shown in the following figure.
NSJ-series Controller Notation
For information in this manual on the Controller Section of NSJ-series Controllers, refer to the informa-
tion of the equivalent CJ-series PLC. The following models are equivalent.
NSJ-series Controllers Equivalent CJ-series CPU Unit
NSJ@-TQ@@(B)-G5D CJ1G-CPU45H CPU Unit with unit version 3.0
NSJ@-TQ@@(B)-M3D CJ1G-CPU45H CPU Unit with unit version 3.0 (See note.)
Note: The following points differ between the NSJ@-@@@@(B)-M3D and the CJ1G-CPU45H.
Item CJ-series CPU Unit
CJ1G-CPU45H
Controller Section in
NSJ@-@@@@(B)-M3D
I/O capacity 1280 points 640 points
Program capacity 60 Ksteps 20 Ksteps
No. of Expansion Racks 3 max. 1 max.
EM Area 32 Kwords x 3 banks
E0_00000 to E2_32767
None
Function blocks Max. No. of definitions 1024 128
Max. No. of instances 2048 256
Capacity in built-in
file memory
FB program memory 1024 KB 256 KB
Variable tables 128 KB 64 KB
CS1H-CPU@@H
CS1G-CPU@@H
CS1-H CPU Units
CS Series
CS1 CPU Units
CS1H-CPU@@(-V1)
CS1G-CPU@@(-V1)
CS1D CPU Units
CS1D CPU Units for
Duplex Systems
CS1D-CPU@@H
CS1D CPU Units for
Simplex Systems
CS1D-CPU@@S
CS1D Process-control CPU Units
CS1D-CPU@@P
CS-series Basic I/O Units
CS-series Special I/O Units
CS-series CPU Bus Units
CS-series Power Supply Units
Note: A special Power Supply Unit must
be used for CS1D CPU Units.
CJ-series Power Supply Units
CJ-series CPU Bus Units
CJ-series Special I/O Units
CJ-series Basic I/O Units
CJ1G-CPU@@
CJ1 CPU Units
CJ1M CPU Units
CJ1M-CPU@@
CJ1H-CPU@@H-R
CJ1H-CPU@@H
CJ1G-CPU@@H
CJ1G -CPU@@P
(Loop-control CPU Units)
CJ1-H CPU Units
CJ Series NSJ Series
NSJ Controllers
NSJ5-TQ@@(B)-G5D
NSJ5-SQ@@(B)-G5D
NSJ8-TV@@(B)-G5D
NSJ10-TV@@(B)-G5D
NSJ12-TS@@(B)-G5D
NSJ Controllers
NSJ5-TQ@@(B)-M3D
NSJ5-SQ@@(B)-M3D
NSJ8-TV@@(B)-M3D
NSJ-series Expansion Units
CJ2 CPU Units
CJ2H-CPU@@-@@@
xxx
Please read this manual and all related manuals listed in the following table and be sure you under-
stand information provided before attempting to install or use CJ-series CPU Units CPU Units in a PLC
System.
Name Cat. No. Contents
SYSMAC CJ Series
CJ1H-CPU@@H-R, CJ1G/H-CPU@@H, CJ1G-CPU@@P,
CJ1G-CPU@@, CJ1M-CPU@@
Programmable Controllers Operation Manual
W393
(This
manual)
Provides an outlines of and describes the design,
installation, maintenance, and other basic opera-
tions for the CJ-series PLCs.
SYSMAC CS/CJ/NSJ Series
CS1G/H-CPU@@-EV1, CS1G/H-CPU@@H,
CS1D-CPU@@H, CS1D-CPU@@S, CJ1H-CPU@@H-R,
CJ1G-CPU@@, CJ1G/H-CPU@@H, CJ1G-CPU@@P,
CJ1M-CPU@@, NSJ@-@@@@(B)-G5D,
NSJ@-@@@@(B)-M3D
Programmable Controllers Programming Manual
W394 This manual describes programming and other
methods to use the functions of the CS/CJ-series
and NSJ-series PLCs.
SYSMAC CJ Series
CJ1M-CPU21/22/23
Built-in I/O Operation Manual
W395 Describes the functions of the built-in I/O for
CJ1M CPU Units.
SYSMAC CS/CJ/NSJ Series
CS1@-CPU-@@@-@@, CJ1@-CPU-@@@-@@@,
CJ2H-CPU-@@@-@@@, NSJ@@-@@@@@-@@@
Programmable Controllers Instructions Reference Manual
W474 Describes the ladder diagram programming
instructions supported by CS/CJ-series and NSJ-
series PLCs.
SYSMAC CS/CJ Series
CQM1H-PRO01-E, C200H-PRO27-E, CQM1-PRO01-E
Programming Consoles Operation Manual
W341 Provides information on how to program and
operate CS/CJ-series PLCs using a Programming
Console.
SYSMAC CS/CJ/NSJ Series
CS1G/H-CPU@@-EV1, CS1G/H-CPU@@H,
CS1D-CPU@@H, CS1D-CPU@@S, CJ1G-CPU@@,
CJ1M-CPU@@, CJ1G-CPU@@P, C J 1 G / H - C P U @@H,
CS1W-SCB@@-V1, CS1W-SCU@@-V1,
CJ1W-SCU@@-V1, CP1H-X@@@@-@,
CP1H-XA@@@@-@, CP1H-Y@@@@-@,
NSJ@-@@@@(B)-G5D, NSJ@-@@@@(B)-M3D
Communications Commands Reference Manual
W342 Describes the C-series (Host Link) and FINS
communications commands used with CS/CJ-
series PLCs.
NSJ5-TQ@@(B)-G5D
NSJ5-SQ@@(B)-G5D
NSJ8-TV@@(B)-G5D
NSJ10-TV@@(B)-G5D
NSJ12-TS@@(B)-G5D
NSJ Series Operation Manual
W452 Provides the following information about the NSJ-
series NSJ Controllers:
Overview and features
Designing the system configuration
Installation and wiring
I/O memory allocations
Troubleshooting and maintenance
Use this manual in combination with the following
manuals: SYSMAC CS Series Operation Manual
(W339), SYSMAC CJ Series Operation Manual
(W393), SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Programming
Manual (W394), and NS-V1/-V2 Series Setup
Manual (V083)
SYSMAC WS02-CX@@-V@
CX-Programmer Operation Manual
W446 Provides information on how to use the CX-Pro-
grammer for all functionality except for function
blocks.
xxxi
This manual contains the following sections.
Precautions provides general precautions for using the CJ-series Programmable Controllers (PLCs)
and related devices.
Section 1 introduces the special features and functions of the CJ-series PLCs and describes the dif-
ferences between these PLCs and the earlier C200HX/HG/HE PLCs.
Section 2 provides tables of standard models, Unit specifications, system configurations, and a com-
parison between different Units.
Section 3 provides the names of components and their functions for various Units. Unit dimensions
are also provided.
Section 4 outlines the steps required to assemble and operate a CJ-series PLC System.
Section 5 describes how to install a PLC System, including mounting the various Units and wiring the
System. Be sure to follow the instructions carefully. Improper installation can cause the PLC to mal-
function, resulting in very dangerous situations.
Section 6 describes the initial hardware settings made on the CPU Unit’s DIP switch.
Section 7 describes initial software settings made in the PLC Setup.
Section 8 describes I/O allocations to Basic I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units, and data
exchange with CPU Bus Units.
Section 9 describes the structure and functions of the I/O Memory Areas and Parameter Areas.
Section 10 describes the internal operation of the CPU Unit and the cycle used to perform internal
processing.
Section 11 provides information on hardware and software errors that occur during PLC operation.
Section 12 provides inspection and maintenance information.
The Appendices provide Unit specifications, current/power consumptions, Auxiliary Area words and
bits, internal I/O addresses, and PLC Setup settings, and information on RS-232C ports,.
SYSMAC WS02-CX@@-V@
CX-Programmer Operation Manual
Function Blocks
(CS1G-CPU@@H, CS1H-CPU@@H,
CJ1G-CPU@@H, CJ1H-CPU@@H,
CJ1M-CPU@@, CP1H-X@@@@-@,
CP1H-XA@@@@-@, CP1H-Y@@@@-@
CPU Units)
W447 Describes the functionality unique to the CX-Pro-
grammer and CP-series CPU Units or CS/CJ-
series CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later
based on function blocks. Functionality that is the
same as that of the CX-Programmer is described
in W446 (enclosed).
SYSMAC CS/CJ Series
CS1W-SCB@@-V1, CS1W-SCU@@-V1,
CJ1W-SCU@@-V1
Serial Communications Boards/Units Operation Manual
W336 Describes the use of Serial Communications Unit
and Boards to perform serial communications
with external devices, including the usage of stan-
dard system protocols for OMRON products.
SYSMAC WS02-PSTC1-E
CX-Protocol Operation Manual
W344 Describes the use of the CX-Protocol to create
protocol macros as communications sequences
to communicate with external devices.
CXONE-AL@@C-V3/ CXONE-AL@@D-V3
CX-Integrator Operation Manual
W464 Describes operating procedures for the CX-Inte-
grator Network Configuration Tool for CS-, CJ-,
CP-, and NSJ-series Controllers.
CXONE-AL@@C-V3/AL@@D-V3
CX-One FA Integrated Tool Package Setup Manual
W463 Installation and overview of CX-One FA Inte-
grated Tool Package.
Name Cat. No. Contents
xxxii
xxxiii
Read and Understand this Manual
Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your OMRON
representative if you have any questions or comments.
Warranty and Limitations of Liability
WARRANTY
OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a
period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON.
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING NON-
INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE
PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS
DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR
INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS,
WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT
LIABILITY.
In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which
liability is asserted.
IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS
REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS
WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO
CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.
xxxiv
Application Considerations
SUITABILITY FOR USE
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the
combination of products in the customer's application or use of the products.
At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying
ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a
complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine,
system, or other application or use.
The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not
intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses
listed may be suitable for the products:
• Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or
uses not described in this manual.
• Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical
equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate
industry or government regulations.
• Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property.
Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR
PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO
ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED
FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS
OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any
consequence thereof.
xxxv
Disclaimers
CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other
reasons.
It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when
significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed
without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key
specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any
time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when
tolerances are shown.
PERFORMANCE DATA
Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does
not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must
correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and
Limitations of Liability.
ERRORS AND OMISSIONS
The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no
responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.
xxxvi
xxxvii
PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the CJ-series Programmable Controllers (PLCs) and related devices.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of Programmable
Controllers. You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or
operate a PLC system.
1 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxviii
2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxviii
3 Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxxviii
4 Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xl
5 Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xli
6 Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xlv
6-1 Applicable Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xlv
6-2 Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xlv
6-3 Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xlvi
6-4 Relay Output Noise Reduction Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xlvi
xxxviii
Intended Audience 1
1 Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have
knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of installing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
2 General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifica-
tions described in the operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the
manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems,
aviation systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amuse-
ment machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines, and equip-
ment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used
improperly, consult your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide
the systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for programming and operating the Unit. Be
sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Unit and keep this man-
ual close at hand for reference during operation.
!WARNING It is extremely important that a PLC and all PLC Units be used for the speci-
fied purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in applications that
can directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with your OMRON
representative before applying a PLC System to the above-mentioned appli-
cations.
3 Safety Precautions
!WARNING The CPU Unit refreshes I/O even when the program is stopped (i.e., even in
PROGRAM mode). Confirm safety thoroughly in advance before changing the
status of any part of memory allocated to I/O Units, Special I/O Units, or CPU
Bus Units. Any changes to the data allocated to any Unit may result in unex-
pected operation of the loads connected to the Unit. Any of the following oper-
ation may result in changes to memory status.
• Transferring I/O memory data to the CPU Unit from a Programming
Device.
• Changing present values in memory from a Programming Device.
• Force-setting/-resetting bits from a Programming Device.
• Transferring I/O memory files from a Memory Card or EM file memory to
the CPU Unit.
• Transferring I/O memory from a host computer or from another PLC on a
network.
!WARNING Do not attempt to take any Unit apart while the power is being supplied. Doing
so may result in electric shock.
xxxix
Safety Precautions 3
!WARNING Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while the power is being
supplied. Doing so may result in electric shock.
!WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify any Units. Any attempt to do
so may result in malfunction, fire, or electric shock.
!WARNING Do not touch the Power Supply Unit while power is being supplied or immedi-
ately after power has been turned OFF. Doing so may result in electric shock.
!WARNING Provide safety measures in external circuits (i.e., not in the Programmable
Controller), including the following items, to ensure safety in the system if an
abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the PLC or another external factor
affecting the PLC operation. Not doing so may result in serious accidents.
• Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety
measures must be provided in external control circuits.
• The PLC will turn OFF all outputs when its self-diagnosis function detects
any error or when a severe failure alarm (FALS) instruction is executed.
Unexpected operation, however, may still occur for errors in the I/O con-
trol section, errors in I/O memory, and other errors that cannot be
detected by the self-diagnosis function. As a countermeasure for all such
errors, external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the
system.
• The PLC outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposition or burning of
the output relays or destruction of the output transistors. As a counter-
measure for such problems, external safety measures must be provided
to ensure safety in the system.
• When the 24-V DC output (service power supply to the PLC) is over-
loaded or short-circuited, the voltage may drop and result in the outputs
being turned OFF. As a countermeasure for such problems, external
safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system.
!Caution Confirm safety before transferring data files stored in the file memory (Mem-
ory Card or EM file memory) to the I/O area (CIO) of the CPU Unit using a
Programming Device. Otherwise, the devices connected to the output unit
may malfunction regardless of the operation mode of the CPU Unit.
!Caution Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the
event of incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal lines,
momentary power interruptions, or other causes. Serious accidents may
result from abnormal operation if proper measures are not provided.
!Caution Execute online edit only after confirming that no adverse effects will be
caused by extending the cycle time. Otherwise, the input signals may not be
readable.
!Caution Confirm safety at the destination node before transferring a program to
another node or changing contents of the I/O memory area. Doing either of
these without confirming safety may result in injury.
xl
Operating Environment Precautions 4
!Caution Tighten the screws on the terminal block of the AC Power Supply Unit to the
torque specified in the operation manual. The loose screws may result in
burning or malfunction.
!Caution A CJ1-H or CJ1M CPU Unit automatically back up the user program and
parameter data to flash memory when these are written to the CPU Unit. I/O
memory (including the DM, EM, and HR Areas), however, is not written to
flash memory. The DM, EM, and HR Areas can be held during power interrup-
tions with a battery. If there is a battery error, the contents of these areas may
not be accurate after a power interruption. If the contents of the DM, EM, and
HR Areas are used to control external outputs, prevent inappropriate outputs
from being made whenever the Battery Error Flag (A40204) is ON. Areas
such as the DM, EM, and HR Areas, the contents of which can be held during
power interrupts, is backed up by a battery. If a battery error occurs, the con-
tents of the areas that are set to be held may not be accurate even though a
memory error will not occur to stop operation. If necessary for the safety of the
system, take appropriate measures in the ladder program whenever the Bat-
tery Error Flag (A40204) turns ON, such as resetting the data in these areas.
!Caution When connecting a personal computers or other peripheral devices to a PLC
to which a non-insulated Power Supply Unit (CJ1W-PD022) is mounted, either
ground the 0 V side of the external power supply or do not ground the external
power supply at all ground. A short-circuit will occur in the external power sup-
ply if incorrect grounding methods are used. Never ground the 24 V side, as
shown below.
4 Operating Environment Precautions
!Caution Do not operate the control system in the following locations:
• Locations subject to direct sunlight.
• Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified
in the specifications.
• Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in tem-
perature.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
• Locations subject to shock or vibration.
!Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in
the following locations:
24 V
0 V
FG CPU Unit
0 V
Wiring in Which the 24-V Power Supply Will Short
Non-insulated
DC power supply
Power Supply
Unit
Peripheral
cable
Peripheral device (e.g.,
personal computer)
xli
Application Precautions 5
• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
• Locations close to power supplies.
!Caution The operating environment of the PLC System can have a large effect on the
longevity and reliability of the system. Improper operating environments can
lead to malfunction, failure, and other unforeseeable problems with the PLC
System. Be sure that the operating environment is within the specified condi-
tions at installation and remains within the specified conditions during the life
of the system.
5 Application Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the PLC System.
• You must use the CX-Programmer (programming software that runs on
Windows) if you need to program more than one task. A Programming
Console can be used to program only one cyclic task plus interrupt tasks.
A Programming Console can, however, be used to edit multitask pro-
grams originally created with the CX-Programmer.
!WARNING Always heed these precautions. Failure to abide by the following precautions
could lead to serious or possibly fatal injury.
• Always connect to a ground of 100 Ω or less when installing the Units. Not
connecting to a ground of 100 Ω or less may result in electric shock.
• A ground of 100 Ω or less must be installed when shorting the GR and LG
terminals on the Power Supply Unit.
• Always turn OFF the power supply to the PLC before attempting any of
the following. Not turning OFF the power supply may result in malfunction
or electric shock.
• Mounting or dismounting Power Supply Units, I/O Units, CPU Units, or
any other Units.
• Assembling the Units.
• Setting DIP switches or rotary switches.
• Connecting cables or wiring the system.
• Connecting or disconnecting the connectors.
!Caution Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation of
the PLC or the system, or could damage the PLC or PLC Units. Always heed
these precautions.
• A CJ-series CPU Unit is shipped with the battery installed and the time
already set on the internal clock. It is not necessary to clear memory or
set the clock before application, as it is for the CS-series CPU Units.
• The user program and parameter area data in CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Units is
backed up in the internal flash memory. The BKUP indicator will light on
the front of the CPU Unit when the backup operation is in progress. Do
not turn OFF the power supply to the CPU Unit when the BKUP indicator
is lit. The data will not be backed up if power is turned OFF.
xlii
Application Precautions 5
• If, when using a CJ-series CPU Unit, the PLC Setup is set to specify using
the mode set on the Programming Console and a Programming Console
is not connected, the CPU Unit will start in RUN mode. This is the default
setting in the PLC Setup. (A CS1 CPU Unit will start in PROGRAM mode
under the same conditions.)
• When creating an AUTOEXEC.IOM file from a Programming Device (a
Programming Console or the CX-Programmer) to automatically transfer
data at startup, set the first write address to D20000 and be sure that the
size of data written does not exceed the size of the DM Area. When the
data file is read from the Memory Card at startup, data will be written in
the CPU Unit starting at D20000 even if another address was set when
the AUTOEXEC.IOM file was created. Also, if the DM Area is exceeded
(which is possible when the CX-Programmer is used), the remaining data
will be written to the EM Area.
• Always turn ON power to the PLC before turning ON power to the control
system. If the PLC power supply is turned ON after the control power sup-
ply, temporary errors may result in control system signals because the
output terminals on DC Output Units and other Units will momentarily turn
ON when power is turned ON to the PLC.
• Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the
event that outputs from Output Units remain ON as a result of internal cir-
cuit failures, which can occur in relays, transistors, and other elements.
• Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the
event of incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal
lines, momentary power interruptions, or other causes.
• Interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety measures in external cir-
cuits (i.e., not in the Programmable Controller) must be provided by the
customer.
• Do not turn OFF the power supply to the PLC when data is being trans-
ferred. In particular, do not turn OFF the power supply when reading or
writing a Memory Card. Also, do not remove the Memory Card when the
BUSY indicator is lit. To remove a Memory Card, first press the memory
card power supply switch and then wait for the BUSY indicator to go out
before removing the Memory Card.
• If the I/O Hold Bit is turned ON, the outputs from the PLC will not be
turned OFF and will maintain their previous status when the PLC is
switched from RUN or MONITOR mode to PROGRAM mode. Make sure
that the external loads will not produce dangerous conditions when this
occurs. (When operation stops for a fatal error, including those produced
with the FALS(007) instruction, all outputs from Output Unit will be turned
OFF and only the internal output status will be maintained.)
• The contents of the DM, EM, and HR Areas in the CPU Unit are backed
up by a Battery. If the Battery voltage drops, this data may be lost. Provide
countermeasures in the program using the Battery Error Flag (A40204) to
re-initialize data or take other actions if the Battery voltage drops.
• Always use the power supply voltages specified in the operation manuals.
An incorrect voltage may result in malfunction or burning.
• Take appropriate measures to ensure that the specified power with the
rated voltage and frequency is supplied. Be particularly careful in places
where the power supply is unstable. An incorrect power supply may result
in malfunction.
xliii
Application Precautions 5
• Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-cir-
cuiting in external wiring. Insufficient safety measures against short-cir-
cuiting may result in burning.
• Install Units as far as possible away from devices that generate strong,
high-frequency noise.
• Do not apply voltages to the Input Units in excess of the rated input volt-
age. Excess voltages may result in burning.
• Do not apply voltages or connect loads to the Output Units in excess of
the maximum switching capacity. Excess voltage or loads may result in
burning.
• Separate the line ground terminal (LG) from the functional ground termi-
nal (GR) on the Power Supply Unit before performing withstand voltage
tests or insulation resistance tests. Not doing so may result in burning.
• Change the applied voltage gradually using the adjuster on the Tester. If
full dielectric strength voltage is applied or turned OFF using the switch on
the Tester, the generated impulse voltage may damage the Power Supply
Unit.
• Install the Units properly as specified in the operation manuals. Improper
installation of the Units may result in malfunction.
• Do not apply a force greater than 100 N on the terminal block when tight-
ening the terminals.
• Do not drop the product or subject it to excessive vibration or shock.
• Be sure that all the terminal screws, and cable connector screws are tight-
ened to the torque specified in the relevant manuals. Incorrect tightening
torque may result in malfunction.
• Leave the label attached to the Unit when wiring. Removing the label may
result in malfunction if foreign matter enters the Unit.
• Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dis-
sipation. Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction.
• Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires
directly to terminals. Connection of bare stranded wires may result in
burning.
• Wire all connections correctly.
• Double-check all wiring and switch settings before turning ON the power
supply. Incorrect wiring may result in burning.
• Mount Units only after checking terminal blocks and connectors com-
pletely.
• Be sure that the terminal blocks, Memory Units, expansion cables, and
other items with locking devices are properly locked into place. Improper
locking may result in malfunction.
• Check switch settings, the contents of the DM Area, and other prepara-
tions before starting operation. Starting operation without the proper set-
tings or data may result in an unexpected operation.
• Check the user program for proper execution before actually running it on
the Unit. Not checking the program may result in an unexpected opera-
tion.
• Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting
any of the following. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
• Changing the operating mode of the PLC (including the setting of the
startup operating mode).
xliv
Application Precautions 5
• Force-setting/force-resetting any bit in memory.
• Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory.
• Resume operation only after transferring to the new CPU Unit the con-
tents of the DM Area, HR Area, and other data required for resuming
operation. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
• Do not pull on the cables or bend the cables beyond their natural limit.
Doing either of these may break the cables.
• Do not place objects on top of the cables or other wiring lines. Doing so
may break the cables.
• Do not use commercially available RS-232C personal computer cables.
Always use the special cables listed in this manual or make cables
according to manual specifications. Using commercially available cables
may damage the external devices or CPU Unit.
• Do not connect pin 6 (+5 V power supply line) of the RS-232C port on the
CPU Unit to any external device except the CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A
Adapter, NT-AL001 RS-232C/RS-422A Adapter, or NV3W-M@20L Pro-
grammable Terminal. Doing so may damage the external device or CPU
Unit.
• When replacing parts, be sure to confirm that the rating of a new part is
correct. Not doing so may result in malfunction or burning.
• Before touching a Unit, be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object in
order to discharge any static build-up. Not doing so may result in malfunc-
tion or damage.
• When transporting or storing circuit boards, cover them in antistatic mate-
rial to protect them from static electricity and maintain the proper storage
temperature.
• Do not touch circuit boards or the components mounted to them with your
bare hands. There are sharp leads and other parts on the boards that
may cause injury if handled improperly.
• Do not short the battery terminals or charge, disassemble, heat, or incin-
erate the battery. Do not subject the battery to strong shocks. Doing any
of these may result in leakage, rupture, heat generation, or ignition of the
battery. Dispose of any battery that has been dropped on the floor or oth-
erwise subjected to excessive shock. Batteries that have been subjected
to shock may leak if they are used.
• UL standards required that batteries be replaced only by experienced
technicians. Do not allow unqualified persons to replace batteries.
• Dispose of the product and batteries according to local ordi-
nances as they apply. Have qualified specialists properly
dispose of used batteries as industrial waste.
• After connecting Power Supply Units, CPU Units, I/O Units, Special I/O
Units, or CPU Bus Units together, secure the Units by sliding the sliders at
the top and bottom of the Units until they click into place. Correct opera-
tion may not be possible if the Units are not securely properly. Be sure to
attach the end cover provided with the CPU Unit to the rightmost Unit. CJ-
series PLCs will not operate properly if the end cover is not attached.
• Unexpected operation may result if inappropriate data link tables or
parameters are set. Even if appropriate data link tables and parameters
have been set, confirm that the controlled system will not be adversely
affected before starting or stopping data links.
xlv
Conformance to EC Directives 6
• CPU Bus Units will be restarted when routing tables are transferred from
a Programming Device to the CPU Unit. Restarting these Units is required
to read and enable the new routing tables. Confirm that the system will
not be adversely affected before allowing the CPU Bus Units to be reset.
• When wiring crossovers between terminals, the total current for both ter-
minals will flow in the line. Check the current capacities of all wires before
wiring crossovers.
• When wiring crossovers between terminals, the total current for both ter-
minals will flow in the line. Check the current capacities of all wires before
wiring crossovers.
• The following precautions apply to Power Supply Units with Replacement
Notification.
• When the LED display on the front of the Power Supply Unit starts to
alternately display “0.0” and “A02” or the alarm output automatically
turns OFF, replace the Power Supply Unit within 6 months.
• Separate the alarm output cables from power lines and high-voltage
lines.
• Do not apply a voltage or connect a load to the alarm output that ex-
ceeds the rated voltage or load.
• Maintain an ambient storage temperature of −20 to 30°C and humidity
of 25% to 70% when storing the product for longer than 3 months to
keep the replacement notification function in optimum working condi-
tion.
• Always use the standard installation method. A nonstandard installa-
tion will decrease heat dissipation, delay the replacement notification
signal, and may degrade or damage the internal elements.
• Design the system so that the power supply capacity of the Power Supply
Unit is not exceeded.
• Do not touch the terminals on the Power Supply Unit immediately after
turning OFF the power supply. Electric shock may occur due to the resid-
ual voltage.
6 Conformance to EC Directives
6-1 Applicable Directives
•EMC Directives
• Low Voltage Directive
6-2 Concepts
EMC Directives
OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives also conform to the related
EMC standards so that they can be more easily built into other devices or the
overall machine. The actual products have been checked for conformity to
EMC standards (see the following note). Whether the products conform to the
standards in the system used by the customer, however, must be checked by
the customer.
EMC-related performance of the OMRON devices that comply with EC Direc-
tives will vary depending on the configuration, wiring, and other conditions of
the equipment or control panel on which the OMRON devices are installed.
The customer must, therefore, perform the final check to confirm that devices
and the overall machine conform to EMC standards.
xlvi
Conformance to EC Directives 6
Note Applicable EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) standards are as follows:
EMS (Electromagnetic Susceptibility): EN61000-6-2
EMI (Electromagnetic Interference): EN61000-6-4
(Radiated emission: 10-m regulations)
Low Voltage Directive
Always ensure that devices operating at voltages of 50 to 1,000 V AC and 75
to 1,500 V DC meet the required safety standards for the PLC (EN61131-2).
6-3 Conformance to EC Directives
The CJ-series PLCs comply with EC Directives. To ensure that the machine or
device in which the CJ-series PLC is used complies with EC Directives, the
PLC must be installed as follows:
1,2,3... 1. The CJ-series PLC must be installed within a control panel.
2. You must use reinforced insulation or double insulation for the DC power
supplies used for the communications power supply and I/O power sup-
plies.
3. CJ-series PLCs complying with EC Directives also conform to the Com-
mon Emission Standard (EN61000-6-4). Radiated emission characteris-
tics (10-m regulations) may vary depending on the configuration of the
control panel used, other devices connected to the control panel, wiring,
and other conditions. You must therefore confirm that the overall machine
or equipment complies with EC Directives.
6-4 Relay Output Noise Reduction Methods
The CJ-series PLCs conforms to the Common Emission Standards
(EN61000-6-4) of the EMC Directives. However, noise generated by relay out-
put switching may not satisfy these Standards. In such a case, a noise filter
must be connected to the load side or other appropriate countermeasures
must be provided external to the PLC.
Countermeasures taken to satisfy the standards vary depending on the
devices on the load side, wiring, configuration of machines, etc. Following are
examples of countermeasures for reducing the generated noise.
Countermeasures
(Refer to EN61000-6-4 for more details.)
Countermeasures are not required if the frequency of load switching for the
whole system with the PLC included is less than 5 times per minute.
Countermeasures are required if the frequency of load switching for the whole
system with the PLC included is more than 5 times per minute.
xlvii
Conformance to EC Directives 6
Countermeasure Examples
When switching an inductive load, connect an surge protector, diodes, etc., in
parallel with the load or contact as shown below.
When switching a load with a high inrush current such as an incandescent
lamp, suppress the inrush current as shown below.
Circuit Current Characteristic Required element
AC DC
Yes Yes If the load is a relay or solenoid, there is
a time lag between the moment the cir-
cuit is opened and the moment the load
is reset.
If the supply voltage is 24 or 48 V, insert
the surge protector in parallel with the
load. If the supply voltage is 100 to
200 V, insert the surge protector
between the contacts.
The capacitance of the capacitor must
be 1 to 0.5 µF per contact current of
1 A and resistance of the resistor must
be 0.5 to 1 Ω per contact voltage of 1 V.
These values, however, vary with the
load and the characteristics of the
relay. Decide these values from experi-
ments, and take into consideration that
the capacitance suppresses spark dis-
charge when the contacts are sepa-
rated and the resistance limits the
current that flows into the load when
the circuit is closed again.
The dielectric strength of the capacitor
must be 200 to 300 V. If the circuit is an
AC circuit, use a capacitor with no
polarity.
No Yes The diode connected in parallel with
the load changes energy accumulated
by the coil into a current, which then
flows into the coil so that the current will
be converted into Joule heat by the
resistance of the inductive load.
This time lag, between the moment the
circuit is opened and the moment the
load is reset, caused by this method is
longer than that caused by the CR
method.
The reversed dielectric strength value
of the diode must be at least 10 times
as large as the circuit voltage value.
The forward current of the diode must
be the same as or larger than the load
current.
The reversed dielectric strength value
of the diode may be two to three times
larger than the supply voltage if the
surge protector is applied to electronic
circuits with low circuit voltages.
Yes Yes The varistor method prevents the impo-
sition of high voltage between the con-
tacts by using the constant voltage
characteristic of the varistor. There is
time lag between the moment the cir-
cuit is opened and the moment the load
is reset.
If the supply voltage is 24 or 48 V, insert
the varistor in parallel with the load. If
the supply voltage is 100 to 200 V,
insert the varistor between the con-
tacts.
---
CR method
Power
supply
Inductive
load
Diode method
Power
supply
Inductive
load
Power
supply
Varistor method
Inductive
load
OUT
COM
R
OUT
COM
R
Countermeasure 1 Countermeasure 2
Providing a dark current of
a
pprox. one-third of the rated
v
alue through an incandescent
lamp
Providing a limiting resisto
r
xlviii
Conformance to EC Directives 6
1
SECTION 1
Introduction
This section introduces the special features and functions of the CJ-series PLCs and describes the differences between these
PLCs and the earlier C200HX/HG/HE PLCs.
1-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1-2 CJ-series Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1-2-1 Special Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
1-2-2 Versatile Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1-3 CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Unit Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1-3-1 CJ1-H-R CPU Unit Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1-3-2 CJ1-H CPU Unit Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1-3-3 CJ1M CPU Unit Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1-4 CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 4.0 Upgrades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1-4-1 Online Editing of Function Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1-4-2 Input-Output Variables in Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1-4-3 Text String Support in Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1-5 CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 Upgrades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1-5-1 Function Blocks (FB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1-5-2 Serial Gateway (Converting FINS to CompoWay/F Via Serial Port). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1-5-3 Comment Memory (in Internal Flash Memory). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1-5-4 Simple Backup Data Expanded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1-5-5 Free-running Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1-5-6 New Special Instructions and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
1-6 CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
1-6-1 Downloading and Uploading Individual Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
1-6-2 Improved Read Protection Using Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1-6-3 Write Protection from FINS Commands Sent to CPU Units via Networks. . . . . . . . . 38
1-6-4 Online Network Connections without I/O Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
1-6-5 Communications through a Maximum of 8 Network Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
1-6-6 Connecting Online to PLCs via NS-series PTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
1-6-7 Setting First Slot Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
1-6-8 Automatic Transfers at Power ON without a Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
1-6-9 Operation Start/End Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
1-6-10 Automatic Detection of I/O Allocation Method for Automatic Transfer at Power ON 52
1-6-11 New Application Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
1-7 CJ1-H-R, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CJ1 CPU Unit Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
1-8 Function Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
1-8-1 Functions Arranged by Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
1-8-2 Communications Functions (Serial/Network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
1-9 CJ1M Functions Arranged by Purpose. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
1-9-1 High-speed Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
1-9-2 Controlling Pulse Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
1-9-3 Receiving Pulse Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
1-9-4 Serial PLC Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
1-9-5 Comparison with the CJ1W-NC Pulse Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
1-10 Comparison to CS-series PLCs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2
Overview Section 1-1
1-1 Overview
The CJ-series PLCs are very small-sized Programmable Controllers that fea-
ture high speed and advanced functions with the same architecture as the
CS-series PLCs.
• Only 90 x 65 mm (H x D) for mounting in small spaces in machines and
on the same DIN Track as components, contributing to machine downsiz-
ing, increased functionality, and modularization.
• Basic instructions executed at 0.016 µs min. and special instructions at
0.048 µs min (for the CJ1H-CPU@@H-R Units).
• Support the DeviceNet open network and protocol macros (for serial com-
munications) to enable information sharing in machines. Machine-to-
machine connections with Controller Link and host connections with
Ethernet are also supported for even more advanced information sharing,
including seamless message communications across Ethernet, Controller
Link, and DeviceNet networks.
CJ-series PLC
I/O refreshing method selection
PLC Setup functions
Protocol Macro Function Serves
Multiple Ports
Up to 32 ports can be connected (Serial
Communications Units).
Different Protocol Macros can be allocated to
each port.
Structured Programming
The program is divided into tasks. Symbols
can be used in programming.
The overall performance of the system is im-
proved by executing only the required tasks.
Modification and debugging are simplified.
The program arrangement can be changed.
Step control and block programming instruc-
tions can be used.
Comments can be added to make the pro-
gram easier to understand.
Program Task
Task
Task
Remote Programming, Monitoring
and Seamless Links between Net-
works
FINS commands allow communications be-
tween nodes in different networks: Ethernet,
Controller Link, and DeviceNet
Remote programming and monitoring can be
performed.
Minimum (fixed) cycle time function
Use Windows tools to create multiple environments in a
single personal computer.
CONTROLLER
CJ1G-CPU44
SYSMAC
PROGRAMMABLE
ERR/ALM
RUN
COMM
INH
PRPHL
OPEN
PERIPHERAL
BUSY
MCPWR
PORT
POWER
PA205R
DC24V
AC240V
OUTPUT
RUN
INPUT
AC100-240V
L2/N
L1
CPU Unit
Memory Card
Other Units
Basic instructions: 0.016 µs
Special instructions: 0.048 µs
(using CJ1H-CPU@@H-R)
Same high-speed CPU bus
as CS Series.
Large data memory:
256 Kwords
Program compatibility with
CS-series PLCs
Same or Better
Performance as CS-
series PLCs
Personal
computer Programmable
Terminal or
other device
Programming
Console
General-
purpose I/O
device
Full Complement of Versatile Functions
Memory Card and file processing functions
Simplify programs with specialized instructions such as
the table data and text string processing instructions
Troubleshooting functions
Data tracing function
3
CJ-series Features Section 1-2
The CJ-series PLCs support the same task-based programming structure,
instructions, high-speed instruction execution, I/O memory, functionality, and
message communications as the CS-series PLCs. The main differences of
the CJ-series in comparison to the CS-series PLCs are as follows (refer to
page 67 for details):
• No Backplanes are required.
• Screw mounting is not supported (only DIN Track mounting).
• Smaller size (30% to 35% in terms of volume).
• Inner Boards are not supported.
• I/O interrupt tasks and external interrupt tasks are not supported by CJ1
CPU Units. (They are supported by CJ1-H CPU Units.)
• C200H Special I/O Units are not supported (e.g., SYSMAC BUS Remote
I/O Units).
• It is not necessary to create I/O tables unless desired, i.e., I/O tables can
be created automatically when power is turned ON.
• The startup mode when a Programming Console is not connected is RUN
mode (rather than PROGRAM mode, as it is for CS1 CPU Units).
• Only version 2.04 or higher versions of CX-Programmer can be con-
nected for CJ1 CPU Units, version 2.1 or higher for CJ1-H CPU Units,
and version 3.0 or higher for CJ1M CPU Units.
1-2 CJ-series Features
1-2-1 Special Features
Improvements in Basic Performance
The CJ Series provides high speed, high capacity, and more functions in
micro-size PLCs.
Only 30% to 35% of the
Volume of CS-series PLCs
At 90 x 65 mm (height x depth), the CJ-series Units have on 70% the height
and half the depth of CS-series Units, contributing to machine downsizing.
Mount to DIN Track The CJ-series PLCs can be mounted to DIN Track along with power supplies
and other components when there is limited installation space in a machine
(e.g., limited space between top and bottom ducts).
Faster Instruction
Execution and Peripheral
Servicing
Processing for overhead, I/O refreshes, and peripheral servicing is also much
faster.
Ample Programming
Capacity
With up to 250 Ksteps of program capacity, 256 Kwords of DM Memory, and
2,560 I/O points, there is sufficient capacity for added-value programs includ-
ing machine interfaces, communications, data processing, etc.
Instructions CJ1-H-R
CPU Units
CJ1-H CPU Units CJ1M CPU Units CJ1 CPU
Units
CJ1H-
CPU6@H-R
CJ1H-
CPU6@H
CJ1H-
CPU4@H
CJ1M-CPU@@ CJ1G-
CPU@
Basic 0.016 µs 0.02 µs0.04 µs0.10 µs0.08 µs
Special 0.048 µs 0.06 µs0.08 µs0.40 µs0.29 µs
Floating-point
calculations
0.24 µs8.0 µs9.2 µs CPU11/21: 15.7 µs
Other: 13.3 µs
10.2 µs
4
CJ-series Features Section 1-2
Program and PLC Setup
Compatibility with CS-
series CPU Units
There is almost 100% compatibility with CS-series CPU Units for program-
ming and internal settings (PLC Setup).
Note Because of physical differences in the CJ-series PLCs, they do not
support all of the features of the CS-series PLC.
No Backplanes for Greater
Space Efficiency
A flexible system configuration that requires less space is made possible
because Backplanes are not required for CJ-series PLCs.
Up to 3 Expansion Racks
and 40 Units
By connecting an I/O Control Unit to the CPU Rack and I/O Interface Units to
Expansion Racks, up to three Expansion Racks (but only one for CJ1M CPU
Units) can be connected. The CPU Rack can contain up to 10 Units, as can
each of the three Expansion Racks, enabling a total of up to 40 Units.
Two I/O Allocation
Methods
The need for Backplanes was eliminated, enabling the following two methods
for allocating I/O.
1. Automatic I/O Allocation at Startup
I/O is allocated to the connected Units each time the power is turned ON
(same as CQM1H PLCs).
2. User-set I/O Allocation
If desired, the user can set I/O tables in the same way as for the CS-series
PLCs.
The default setting is for automatic I/O allocation at startup, but the user can
set the PLC to automatically use I/O tables to enable checking for Unit con-
nection errors or to allocate unused words.
Allocate Unused Words The CX-Programmer can be used to allocate unused words in I/O tables for
transfer to the CPU Unit. This enables keeping words unallocated for future
use or to enable system standardization/modularization.
Structured Programming
Division of the Program
into Tasks
When the program is divided into tasks that handle separate functions, control
systems, or processes, several programmers can develop these separate
tasks simultaneously.
There can be up to 32 normal (cyclic) tasks and 256 interrupt tasks. There are
four types of interrupts: the Power OFF Interrupt, Scheduled Interrupts, I/O
Interrupts, and External Interrupts (interrupts from Special I/O Units or CPU
Bus Units).
When a new program is being created, standard programs can be combined
as tasks to create an entire program.
Earlier program
Task
Task
Task
Task
5
CJ-series Features Section 1-2
Using Symbols Arbitrary symbols (names up to 32 characters) that are independent of I/O ter-
minal allocations can be used in programming. Standard programs created
with symbols are more general and easier to reuse as tasks in different pro-
grams.
Global and Local Symbols
Supported
I/O names are handled as symbols which can be defined as global symbols,
which apply to all of the programs in all tasks, or as local symbols, which apply
to just the local task.
When the symbols are defined, you can choose to have the local symbols
allocated to addresses automatically.
Improve Overall System
Response Performance
The response performance of the system can be improved by dividing the
program into a system-management task and tasks used for control, and exe-
cuting only those control tasks that need to be executed.
Simplify Program Modification
• Debugging is more efficient when the job of modifying and debugging the
tasks can be divided among several individuals.
• Program maintenance is easier because only the tasks affected by
changes have to be modified when there are changes (such as changes
in specifications).
• Several consecutive program lines can be modified with online editing.
• The amount the cycle time is extended during online editing has been
reduced.
Change Program
Arrangement Easily
When separate tasks have been programmed for different production models,
the task control instructions can be used to switch the program quickly from
production of one model to another.
Step Control and Block
Programming
The step control and block programming instructions can be used to control
repetitive processes that are difficult to program with ladder programming
alone.
Comments Several types of comments can be added to the program to make it easier to
understand, including Rung comments, and I/O comments.
Section Function The section function can be used to make the program easier to visualize
(CX-Programmer version 2.0 or higher).
Standard programs
Program ABC Program ABD
Task 1 (A)
Task 2 (B)
Task 3 (C)
Task 1 (A)
Task 2 (B)
Task 3 (D)
SW1 VALVE
Symbols specified for bit address:
6
CJ-series Features Section 1-2
Port-specific Protocol Macros
Create Protocol Macros
for All Ports
Protocol macros can be used to create versatile communications functions for
any of the PLC’s communications ports. The communications functions can
have host link, NT Link, or protocol macro configurations and can be directed
to RS-232C and RS-422/485 ports on any of the Units.
All together, a CPU Unit can support a maximum of 32 ports.
Standard Serial Communications with External Devices
Messages can be transferred to and from standard serial devices with the pro-
tocol macro function (according to preset parameter settings). The protocol
macro function supports processing options such as retries, timeout monitor-
ing, and error checks.
Symbols that read and write data to the CPU Unit can be included in the com-
munications frames, so data can be exchanged with the CPU Unit very easily.
OMRON components (such as Temperature Controllers, ID System Devices,
Bar Code Readers, and Modems) can be connected to a Serial Communica-
tions Unit with the standard system protocol. It is also possible to change the
settings if necessary.
Note The Serial Communications Unit must be purchased separately to take
advantage of this function.
Multilevel Network Configurations
Different network levels can be connected as shown in the following diagram.
The multilevel configuration provides more flexibility in networking from the
manufacturing site to production management.
OA network: Ethernet
FA network: Controller Link
Open network: DeviceNet
Host Computer Programming Device
CPU Unit
Serial Communications
Unit
Up to 32 ports are possible
PT
External device
with serial port
Transmit or receive data with just one instruction.
External device
7
CJ-series Features Section 1-2
Remote Monitoring and Programming
1,2,3... 1. The host link function can operate through a modem, which allows moni-
toring of a distant PLC’s operation, data transfers, or even online editing of
a distant PLC’s program by phone.
2. PLCs in a network can be programmed and monitored through the Host
Link.
3. It is possible to communicate through 3 network levels even with different
types of networks.
CS-series PLC
Message communications
possible among Ethernet,
Controller Link, and DeviceNet.
Ethernet
CJ-series PLC CJ-series PLC
Controller Link
DeviceNet
CJ-series PLC
Robot, etc.Temperature
Controller
I/O Terminal
Remote programming/monitoring
of a distant PLC
Remote programming/monitoring of a
PLC on the network through Host Link
Modem Modem
Controller Link Network
Network 3
Network 2
Network 1
Remote programming/monitoring of a PLC on a network up to
3 levels away (including the local net-work) for the same or
different types of networks is possible through Host Link.
8
CJ-series Features Section 1-2
Note 1. With CS/CJ-series CPU Units Ver. 2.0 or later, remote programming/mon-
itoring is possible up to 8 levels away. Refer to 1-6-2 Improved Read Pro-
tection Using Passwords for details.
2. NT Link communications between an NT31/NT631-V2 PT and a CJ-series
PLC are now possible at high speed.
1-2-2 Versatile Functions
Memory Card and File Management Functions
Transfer Data to and from
Memory Cards
Data area data, program data, and PLC Setup data can be transferred as files
between the Memory Card (compact flash memory) and a Programming
Device, program instructions, a host computer, or via FINS commands.
Convert EM Area Banks to
File Memory (CJ1-H and
CJ1 CPU Units Only)
Part of the EM Area can be converted to file memory to provide file manage-
ment capabilities without a Memory Card and with much faster access time
than a Memory Card. (The EM Area can be very useful for storing data such
as trend data as files.)
Automatic File Transfer at
Start-up
The PLC can be set up to transfer the program and/or PLC Setup files from
the Memory Card when the PLC is turned ON. With this function, the Memory
Card provides a flash-ROM transfer. This function can also be used to store
and change PLC configurations quickly and easily.
I/O Memory Files in CSV
and Text Format
It is now possible to save production results and other data (hexadecimal)
from the CPU Unit I/O memory in a Memory Card in CSV or text format. The
data can then be read and edited using personal computer spreadsheet soft-
ware by means of a Memory Card Adapter.
File Operations (Format,
Delete, etc.) from Ladder
Programs
It is possible to format files, delete, copy, change file names, create new direc-
tories, and perform similar operations on a Memory Card from the ladder pro-
gram during PLC operation.
Network 1
Network 2
Network 3
Message transfer between PLCs on a network 3 levels away (including
the local network) for the same or different types of networks.
Seamless message communications are possible across Ethernet, Controller Link, and DeviceNet networks,
enabling easy information integration on machine, machine-to-machine, and machine-to-host levels.
I/O Memory, program,
and parameter areas
stored as files.
I/O memory data stored
in CSV or text format
FWRIT Via Memory Card Adapter
Memory Card
Spread sheet software
9
CJ-series Features Section 1-2
Program Replacement
during Operation
It is now possible to replace the entire user program in the CPU Unit from the
Memory Card during operation. In this way, it is possible to switch PLC opera-
tion without stopping the PLC.
Easy Backups It is now possible to back up all data (user programs, parameters, and I/O
memory) to the Memory Card by pressing the Memory Card power supply
switch. In this way, if a malfunction arises, it is possible to back up all data in
the CPU Unit at the time without using a Programming Device.
Specialized Instructions Simplify Programming
Text String Instructions The text string instructions allow text processing to be performed easily from
the ladder program. These instructions simplify the processing required when
creating messages for transmission or processing messages received from
external devices with the protocol macro function.
Loop Instructions The FOR(512), NEXT(513), and BREAK(514) instructions provide a very
powerful programming tool that takes up little program capacity.
Index Registers Sixteen Index Registers are provided for use as pointers in instructions. An
Index Register can be used to indirectly address any word in I/O memory. The
CJ-series PLCs also support the auto-increment, auto-decrement, and offset
functions.
The Index Registers can be a powerful tool for repetitive processing (loops)
when combined with the auto-increment, auto-decrement, and offset func-
tions. Index Registers can also be useful for table processing operations such
as changing the order of characters in text strings.
Table Data Processing Instructions
Stack Instructions
A region of I/O memory can be defined as a stack region. Words in the stack
are specified by a stack pointer for easy FIFO (first-in first-out) or LIFO (last-in
first-out) data processing.
Range Instructions
These instructions operate on a specified range of words to find the maximum
value or minimum value, search for a particular value, calculate the sum or
FCS, or swap the contents of the leftmost and rightmost bytes in the words.
.OBJ
PLC operation
Replacement
Processing of text string
data
External device with
standard serial port
Pointer
Stack region
10
CJ-series Features Section 1-2
Record-table Instructions
Record-table instructions operate on specially defined data tables. The record
table must be defined in advance with DIM(631), which declares the number
of words in a record and the number of records in the table. Up to 16 record
tables can be defined.
Record tables are useful when data is organized in records. As an example, if
temperatures, pressures, or other set values for various models have been
combined into a table, the record-table format makes it easy to store and read
the set values for each model.
The SETR(635) can be used to store the first address of the desired record in
an Index Register. Index Registers can then be used to simplify complicated
processes such as changing the order of records in the record table, search-
ing for data, or comparing data.
Troubleshooting Functions
Failure Diagnosis:
FAL(006) and FALS(007)
The FAL(006) and FALS(007) can be used to generate a non-fatal or fatal
error when the user-defined conditions are met. Records of these errors are
stored in the error log just like system-generated errors.
Failure Point Detection:
FPD(269)
Diagnoses a failure in an instruction block by monitoring the time between
execution of FPD(269) and execution of a diagnostic output and finding which
input is preventing an output from being turned ON.
Error Log Functions The error log contains the error code and time of occurrence for the most
recent 20 errors (user-defined or system-generated errors).
Maintenance Functions The CJ-series PLCs record information useful for maintenance, such as the
number of power interruptions and the total PLC ON time.
Data
Search, find maximum,
find minimum, etc.
Range specified
in the instruction
Record 2
Table
Record 3
Record 2
Set values for model A
Temperature setting
Pressure setting
Time setting
User-defined
error condition FAL(006) or FALS(007) error
FPD
Input preventing
diagnostic output
from going ON
11
CJ-series Features Section 1-2
Other Functions
Data Trace Function The content of the specified word or bit in I/O memory can be stored in trace
memory by one of the following methods: scheduled sampling, cyclic sam-
pling, or sampling at execution of TRSM(045).
Fixed Cycle Time Function
A fixed (minimum) cycle time can be set to minimize variations in I/O response
times.
I/O Refreshing Methods
I/O refreshing can be performed cyclically and immediately by programming
the immediate-refreshing variation of the instruction.
PLC Setup Functions
PLC operation can be customized with PLC Setup settings, such as the maxi-
mum cycle time setting (watch cycle time) and the instruction error operation
setting, which determines whether instruction processing errors and access
errors are treated as non-fatal or fatal errors.
Binary Refreshing of Timer/Counter Instruction PVs
Present values of timer/counter instructions can now be refreshed in binary, in
addition to the existing BCD capability. (Binary refreshing, however, can be
specified with only CX-Programmer Ver. 3.0 and higher.) This allows the timer/
counter setting time to be expanded to a range of 0 to 65535 (from the exist-
ing 0 to 9,999). Also, results calculated by other instructions can be used as is
for timer/counter set values.
Windows-based Support Software
The single-port multiple-access (SPMA) function can be used to program and
monitor other CPU Bus Units on the same bus (CPU Rack or Expansion
Specified address
in I/O memory
Trace memory
The PLC’s initial settings can be
customized with the PLC Setup.
12
CJ-series Features Section 1-2
Racks) or other CPU Units on the same network from a serial port on the CPU
Unit.
Power Supply Units with Replacement Notification
The CJ1W-PA205C Power Supply Units with Replacement Notification pro-
vide six display levels using a 7-segment display on the front panel of the Unit
to indicate the remaining service life of the Power Supply Unit. An alarm out-
put also notifies when the estimated remaining service life drops to 6 months
or shorter. This function enables Power Supply Unit replacement before the
power supply reaches the end of its service life resulting in a system failure.
Controller Link
Programming Device
Several CPU Bus Units on the same
bus or other CPU Units on the same
network can be accessed from a
single port.
POWER
Years
CJ1W-PA205C
TEST
NC
NC
AC100-240V
L2/N
L1
L+
ALARM
OUTPUT
DC30V,50mA
NORMAL:ON
ALARM :OFF
CJ1W-PA205C Power
Supply Unit with
Replacement Notification
Alarm output turns OFF
when remaining service
life is 6 months.
13
CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Unit Features Section 1-3
1-3 CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Unit Features
1-3-1 CJ1-H-R CPU Unit Features
The CJ1-H-R (high-speed) CPU Units (CJ1H-CPU@@H-R) have the following
features.
The CJ1-H-R CPU Units are completely upwardly compatible from the CJ1H-
CPU@@H Units, and yet they are much faster overall.
Example 1: A program consisting of 30K steps of only basic instructions with
128 inputs and 128 outputs executes in 0.7 ms, or 1.43 times faster (1 ms for
a CJ1-H CPU Unit).
Example 2: A program consisting of 30K steps of basic and special instruc-
tions in a 7:3 ratio with 128 inputs and 128 outputs executes in 0.9 ms, or 1.33
times faster (1.2 ms for a CJ1-H CPU Unit).
Example 3: A program consisting of 30K steps of basic, special, and floating-
point math instructions in a 6:3:1 ratio with 128 inputs, 128 outputs, two Ana-
log Input Units, and Two Position Control Units (4 axes) executes in 1.5 ms, or
5.4 times faster (8.1 ms for a CJ1-H CPU Unit).
High-speed Overhead Processing (Less Than Half of Previous Models)
Overhead processing time has been reduced from 0.3 to 0.13 ms.
High-speed I/O Refreshing (Less Than Half of Previous Models)
On average, the refresh time for Basic I/O Units and Special I/O Units has
been cut in half or more.
Examples:
16-point Input Unit: Reduced from 3 µs to 1.4 µs
Analog Input Unit: Reduced from 120 µs to 50 µs
High-speed Interrupts (Approximately Three Times Faster Than Previous Models)
The software interrupt response time has been reduced from 124 µs to 40 µs.
Scheduled Interrupts Set in Increments of 0.1 ms
A setting unit 0.1 ms has been added for scheduled interrupts.
High-speed Timer Instructions (Ten Times Faster Than Previous Models)
Although high precision was provided for the previous 1-ms timer instruction,
0.1-ms and 0.01-ms timer instructions have been added.
High-speed Clock Pulses (More Than Five Times Faster Than Previous Models)
Clock pulses of 0.1 ms, 1 ms, and 0.01 s (see note) have been added to the
previous pulses of 0.02 s, 0.1 s, 0.2 s, 1 s, and 1 min.
Note The 0.01 s Clock Pulse cannot be used with unit version 4.1 of the
CJ1-H-R CPU Units. The 0.01 s Clock Pulse can be used with all oth-
er unit versions.
High-speed Floating-point Math (Up to 70 Times Faster Than Previous Models
Floating-point calculations of sine, cosine, and tangent functions are up to 70
times faster than previous models.
Example: SIN: 42.0 µs reduced to 0.59 µs (71 times faster), COS: 31.5 µs
reduced to 0.59 µs (53 times faster), TAN: 16.3 µs reduced to 1.18 µs (13.8
times faster).
14
CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Unit Features Section 1-3
New Instruction Added
The following instructions have been added.
• High-speed sine calculation: SINQ(475)
• High-speed cosine calculation: COSQ(476)
• High-speed tangent calculation: TANQ(462)
• Floating-point move: MOVF(469)
• High-speed Special I/O Unit refresh: FIORF(225)
More Relays in Relay Network Tables in Routing Tables
The number of relays that can be set in a relay network table has been
increased from 20 to 64. Refer to the CX-Integrator Operation Manual (W445)
and the Communication Unit operation manuals for details.
1-3-2 CJ1-H CPU Unit Features
Faster in Essentially Every Way
Ultra High-speed Cycle
Time
The CJ1-H CPU Units provide a cycle time that is three to four times faster
than that of the CJ1 CPU Units.
For example, a program consisting of 38 Ksteps of only basic instructions with
128 inputs and 128 outputs executes in 1 ms (4.9 ms for the CJ1 CPU Units);
a program consisting of 20 Ksteps of basic and special instructions in a 1:1
ratio with 128 inputs and 128 outputs executes in 1 ms (2.7 ms for the CJ1
CPU Units); and a program consisting of 8 Ksteps of basic and special
instructions in a 1:2 ratio with 64 inputs and 64 outputs executes in 0.5 ms
(1.4 ms for the CJ1 CPU Units).
The following factors give the CJ1-H CPU Units their high speed.
1,2,3... 1. Instruction execution times: Only about 1/2 the time required for basic in-
structions, and only about 1/3 the time required for special instructions.
2. Better bus performance: Data transfers between the CPU Unit and Special
I/O or Communications Units is about twice as fast, providing greater over-
all system performance.
3. Instruction execution is performed in parallel with peripheral servicing.
4. Other factors, including background execution of text string processing and
table data processing instructions.
15
CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Unit Features Section 1-3
Faster Execution of
Common Instructions
Extensive research on applications of CJ1 CPU Units was used to identify the
20 most commonly used instructions of the more than 400 supported instruc-
tions (see below), and execution speed for these instructions was increased
by 10 to 20 times previous performance.
CPS (SIGNED BINARY COMPARE)
JMP (JUMP)
CPSL (DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY COMPARE)
CJP (CONDITIONAL JUMP)
XFER (BLOCK TRANSFER)
BCNT (BIT COUNTER)
MOVB (MOVE BIT)
MLPX (DATA DECODER)
MOVD (MOVE DIGITS)
BCD (BINARY-TO-BCD)
BSET (BLOCK SET)
SBS/RET (SUBROUTINE CALL/RETURN)
System Bus Speed
Doubled
The speed of transferring data between the CPU Unit and CPU Bus Units has
been doubled to increase overall system performance.
Parallel Processing of
Instructions and
Peripheral Servicing
A special mode is supported that enables parallel processing of instruction
execution and peripheral device servicing to support the following types of
application.
• Extensive data exchange with a host not restricted by the program capac-
ity in the CJ1-H CPU Unit
• Consistently timed data exchange with SCADA software
• Eliminating the effects on cycle time of future system expansion or
increases in communications
Less Cycle Time
Fluctuation for Data
Processing
Table data processing and text string processing, which often require time,
can be separated over several cycles to minimize fluctuations in the cycle time
and achieve stable I/O response.
Better Data Link and
Remote I/O Refreshing
CPU Bus Unit refresh response has been increased both by reductions in the
cycle time itself and by the addition of an immediate I/O refresh instruction for
CPU Bus Units (DLNK(226)). This instruction will refresh data links,
DeviceNet remote I/O, protocol macros, and other special data for CPU Bus
Units.
The response of a CJ1-H CPU Unit is approximately 2.4 times that of a CJ1
CPU Unit. And, for a cycle time of approximately 100 ms or higher, the
increase in the data link response is comparable to that for the cycle time.
Immediate Refreshing for
CPU Bus Units
Although previously, I/O refreshing for CPU Bus Units was possible only after
program executions, a CPU BUS I/O REFRESH instruction (DLNK(226)) has
been added to enable immediate I/O refreshing for CPU Bus Units. Data links,
DeviceNet remote I/O, an other unique CPU Bus Unit refreshing can be
refreshed along with words allocated to the CPU Bus Unit in the CIO and DM
Areas whenever DLNK(226) is executed. This is particularly effective for
longer cycle times (e.g., 100 ms or longer). (Data exchange for data links,
DeviceNet remote I/O, and other network communications are also affected
by the communications cycle time, i.e., DLNK(226) refreshes data only
between the CPU Bus Units and the CPU Unit, not the data on the individual
networks.)
16
CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Unit Features Section 1-3
Function Block (FB)
When using a CPU Unit with unit version 3.0 or later, standard processes can
be encapsulated as easily reusable function blocks as long as those pro-
cesses only exchange I/O data externally. The function blocks can be written
in ladder language or ST (structured text) language. Mathematical processing
that is difficult to write in ladder language can be written easily in the ST lan-
guage.
OMRON function blocks can be written in ladder language or ST (structured
text) language, and conform to IEC 61131-3 standards (JIS B3503). The func-
tion blocks provide functions for more efficient design and debugging of the
user equipment, as well as easier maintenance.
Smart FB Library The Smart FB Library is a set of function blocks that improve interoperability
between OMRON PLC Units and FA components. Since it isn't necessary to
create a ladder program to use basic Unit and FA component functions, the
user can concentrate on more important work, such as determining how to
make the most of device functions.
Online Editing of FB
Definitions
FB definitions can be changed during operation, so FB definitions can be
edited quickly during debugging. In addition, FBs can be used with confidence
even in equipment that must operate 24 hours/day. (Requires CPU Unit unit
version 4.0 or later and CX-Programmer version 7.0 or higher.)
Nesting Not only can programs be created with nested OMRON FBs, it is possible to
make easy-to-understand, stress-free operations by switching displays under
preset conditions and displaying structures in a directory-tree format.
(Requires CX-Programmer version 6.0 or higher.)
Protecting FB Definitions It is possible to prevent unauthorized manipulation, editing, or misappropria-
tion of the program by setting passwords for the function block definitions allo-
cated in the project file and protecting the definitions based on their purpose.
(Requires CX-Programmer version 6.1 or higher.)
Offline Debugging with
the Simulator
The Simulator enables checking the PLC program's operation on the desktop,
so program quality can be improved and verified early on. Both the ladder and
ST programming can be executed in the computer application.
Variable Support for
String Operations (CPU
Units with Unit Version 4.0
or Later)
The functions that perform string data operations in ST language not only
support string variables, they also strengthen the functions used to communi-
cate with string data I/O. This feature simplifies the creation of programs that
send and receive communications commands. (Requires CPU Unit unit ver-
sion 4.0 or later and CX-Programmer version 7.0 or higher.)
FB Generation Function Existing PLC programming can be reused by easily converting it to FBs.
(Requires CX-Programmer version 7.0 or higher.)
High-speed Structured Programming
To further aid standardized programming, program structuring functions have
been improved, as has program execution speed.
Function Blocks Required programming can be “encapsulated” in function blocks using either
ladder diagrams or structure text. (Requires CPU Unit unit version 3.0 or
later.)
More Cyclic Tasks Tasks provide better efficiency by enabling programs to be separated by func-
tion or for development by different engineers. The CJ1-H CPU Units support
up to 288 cyclic tasks, an incredible increase over the previous maximum of
32 tasks.
17
CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Unit Features Section 1-3
Common Processing from
Multiple Tasks
Global subroutines that can be called by any task are now supported. These
can be used for common processing from more than one task, for greater
standardization.
Faster Subroutine
Instructions
Subroutine instruction are executed approximately 9 or 17 times faster to
enable greater program modularization without having to be concerned about
increasing the cycle time.
Shared Index and Data
Registers between Tasks
Although separate index and data registers can still be used in each task, they
have been joined by shared index and data registers that can be used
between tasks to reduce the time required to switch between tasks.
Download/Upload Tasks
Individually (Unit Version
2.0 or Later)
The CX-Programmer can be used to upload or download only the required
tasks. This enables the member of a development team to work separately
and then upload/download tasks after debugging them, helping to eliminate
the need for unification work by a manager as well as mistakes that can easily
occur in such work.
Battery-free Operation with Flash Memory
Any user program or parameter area data transferred to the CPU Unit is auto-
matically backed up in flash memory in the CPU Unit to enable battery-free
operation without using a Memory Card.
Note Refer to information on flash memory in the CS/CJ Series Programming Man-
ual (W394) for precautions on this function.
Store Comment/Section
Data in CPU Unit’s Flash
Memory (Unit Version 3.0
or Later)
The CX-Programmer can be used to save I/O comments and other comment/
section data in the comment memory contained in the CPU Unit’s flash mem-
ory. When the simple backup operation is used, the comment/section data in
flash memory can also be backed up.
Many Protection Functions
Improved Read Protection
Using Passwords with CX-
Programmer Version 4.0
or Higher
Read Protection for Specific Tasks
Passwords can be set to read-protect individual groups of tasks. This enables
creating black boxes in the program.
Enabling/Disabling Creating File Memory Program Files
When read protection is set, an optional setting allows you to enable or dis-
able creating program backup files (.OBJ). This setting can be used to prevent
programs from being disclosed.
Program Write Protection
The user program can be protected without using the DIP switch setting. This
helps prohibit unauthorized or accidental program changes.
Protection for CPU Units
from FINS Write
Commands Sent via
Networks
Write operations to a CPU Unit using FINS commands across networks can
be enabled for specific nodes and disabled for all other nodes. This can be
used to enable monitoring data via networks while eliminating the possibility
of accidental mistakes caused by careless writing operations.
More Instructions for Specific Applications
Very specific control can be easily programmed for a much wider range of
applications with the many new special instructions added to the CJ1-H CPU
Units.
High-speed Positioning
for XY Tables
Double-precision floating-point calculations are supported for the CJ1-H CPU
Units to provide even better precision for position control operations.
18
CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Unit Features Section 1-3
Convert between Floating
Point and Text String Data
To display floating-point data on PTs, the CJ1-H CPU Units provide conver-
sion instructions from floating-point data to text strings (ASCII). Conversion
between ASCII and floating-point data is also possible so that ASCII data from
serial communications with measurement devices can be used in calcula-
tions.
Accurate Line
Approximations
Unsigned 16-bit binary/BCD data, signed 16/32-bit binary data, or floating-
point data can be used for line data, enabling precise (high data resolution)
conversions, such as from a level meter (mm) to tank capacity (l) based on the
shape of the tank.
Realtime Workpiece Data
Management
When loading and unloading workpieces from conveyor lines, stack instruc-
tions can be used to manage workpiece information in realtime in table for-
mat.
PID Autotuning Autotuning is now supported for PID constants with the PID CONTROL
instruction. The limit cycle method is used to ensure rapid autotuning. Very
effective for multiloop PID control.
System Debugging
through Error Simulation
A specified error status can be created with the FAL/FALS instructions. This
can be used effectively when depending systems. For example, errors can be
simulated to produce corresponding displays on a PT to confirm that the cor-
rect messages are being displayed.
Program Simplification
with More Specific Basic
Instructions
Programs that use a high quantity of basic instructions can be simplified
though the use of differentiated forms of the LD NOT, AND NOT and OR NOT
instructions, and through the use of OUT, SET, and RSET instructions that
can manipulate individual bits in the DM or EM Area.
Delayed Power OFF
Processing for Specified
Program Areas
The DI and EI instructions can be used to disable interrupts during specific
portions of the program, for example, to prevent the power OFF interrupt from
being executed until a specific instruction has been executed.
Multiple Interlock
Instructions (MILH(517),
MILR(518), and MILC(519))
for Nested Interlocks
These instruction enable easy creation of nested interlocks. For example, cre-
ate one interlock to control the entire program (e.g., for an emergency stop)
and then nest other interlocks for separate portions of the program (e.g., con-
veyor operation, alarms, etc.).
TIME-PROPORTIONAL
OUTPUT (TPO(685))
Instruction for Time-pro-
portional Operation with
Temperature Controllers
or Variable-duty Lighting/
Power Control
This instruction is used in combination with PID instructions to create a time-
proportional output based on the manipulated variable output by the PID
instruction. This enables easily connecting an SSR to a Transistor Output Unit
to achieve time-proportional operation of a Temperature Controller. Variable-
duty pulse outputs can also be created for lighting or power control.
Symbol Time Comparison
Instructions for Easy
Calendar Timers
Two times/dates can be compared to continue operation to the next instruction
in the ladder program rung when the results of comparison is true. Opposed
to normal comparison instructions, comparisons are by byte and the bytes
that are compared in the time/date data can be controlled. This enables com-
paring built-in clock data with set times/dates to easily create a calendar timer,
for example, on the hour (when the minutes is 0) or on a specific date each
year).
19
CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Unit Features Section 1-3
GRAY CODE CONVER-
SION (GRY(474)) for Easy
Conversion of Parallel
Inputs from Absolute
Encoders to Binary, BCD,
or Angle Data
This instruction converts Gray binary codes to binary, BCD, or angle data.
This enables easily handling position or angle data input as parallel signals
(2n) from an Absolute Encoder with a Gray code output using a DC Input Unit.
EXPANDED BLOCK COM-
PARE (BCMP2(502)) for
Comparison Judgements
for Up to 256 Ranges
(Upper/Lower Limits) with
One Instruction
This instruction determines if a value is within any of up to 256 ranges defined
by upper and lower limits. When used with the GRAY CODE CONVERSION
(GRY(474)) instruction, the same operation as a cam switch can be achieved
by determining if an angle input from an Absolute Encoder is in a comparison
table.
Easier Processing of I/O
Devices with Special I/O
Instructions
Previously many instructions were required to read or write data for external
input devices such as digital switches and 7-segment displays connected to
Basic I/O Units. Now, I/O processing for these devices can be achieved with a
single instruction. These are sometimes call Combination Instructions.
These instructions are the same as those supported by the C200HX/HG/HE
and CQM1H PLCs, with the exception that more than one of each of these
instructions can be executed in a single user program.
TEN KEY INPUT (TKY(211))
Sequentially reads numbers input from a ten-key connected to an Input Unit.
HEXADECIMAL KEY INPUT (HKY(212))
Sequentially reads numbers input from a hexadecimal keypad connected to
an Input Unit and an Output Unit for a maximum of 8 digits.
DIGITAL SWITCH INPUT (DSW(213))
Reads numbers input from a digital switch or thumbwheel switch connected to
an Input Unit and an Output Unit. Either 4 or 8 digits are read.
MATRIX INPUT (MTR(210))
Sequentially reads 64 input points input from a 8 x 8 matrix connected to an
Input Unit and an Output Unit.
7-SEGMENT DISPLAY OUTPUT (7SEG(214))
Converts 4-digit or 8-digit values to data for a 7-segment display and outputs
the result.
Read/Write CPU Bus Unit
Memory Areas with
IORD(222)/IOWR(223)
Although INTELLIGENT I/O READ (IORD(222)) and INTELLIGENT I/O
WRITE (IOWR(223)) could previously be used only for Special I/O Units,
these instructions can now be used to read and write data for CPU Bus Units.
Easier Network Connections and More-advanced Seamless Network Communications
Online Connections via
Networks without I/O
Tables
Online connection is possible to any PLC in the local network from a Program-
ming Device, such as the CX-Programmer, as soon as the network is con-
nected. It’s not necessary to create the I/O tables to enable connection;
automatic I/O allocation at startup is used. This eliminates the need to use a
serial connection to create I/O tables before the CX-Programmer can be con-
nected via Ethernet. Only an Ethernet connection through a CJ1W-ETN21
Ethernet Unit is required to go online and create I/O tables.
Work Across Up to Eight
Networks with CX-Net in
CX-Programmer Version
4.0 or Higher
FINS commands can be sent across up to 8 network levels (including the local
network). This enables a wider range of communications between devices on
Ethernet and Controller Link Networks.
20
CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Unit Features Section 1-3
FINS commands can only be sent across up to 8 network levels when the
destination is a CPU Unit. FINS commands can be sent to other destinations
up to 3 network levels away.
Online Connections to
PLCs via NS-series PTs
Downloading, uploading, and monitoring of ladder programs or other data is
possible to a PLC connected serially to an NS-series PT from the CX-Pro-
grammer connected to the NS-series PT by Ethernet.
Easier Implementation of
Explicit Messages with
Explicit Message
Instructions
Special Explicit Message Instructions are now supported to simplify using
explicit messages. (Previously, CMND(490) had to be used to send a FINS
command of 2801 hex to enable sending explicit messages.) The new instruc-
tions include the following: EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND (EXPLT(720)),
EXPLICIT GET ATTRIBUTE (EGATR(721)), EXPLICIT SET ATTRIBUTE
(ESATR(722)), EXPLICIT WORD READ (ECHRD(723)), and EXPLICIT
WORD WRITE (ECHWR(724)). Of these, EXPLICIT WORD READ
(ECHRD(723)) and EXPLICIT WORD WRITE (ECHWR(724)) enable easily
reading and writing data in CPU Units on networks with the same type of
notation as used for SEND(290) and RECV(298). (Does not apply to C200HX/
HG/HE and CV-series PLCs.)
Incorporate CompoWay/F-compatible OMRON Components into FINS Network Via
Serial Gateway
Using the Serial Gateway mode for the CPU Unit’s serial port enables flexible
access to CompoWay/F-compatible OMRON components from devices on
the network (e.g., PTs, PLC CPU Units, personal computers).
Use No-protocol Communications at Multiple Ports
No-protocol communications can be performed via the serial ports of Serial
Communications Boards/Units with unit version 1.2 or later. This enables no-
protocol communications at multiple ports.
Greater Flexibility in I/O Allocations
First Word Address
Settings for Slots (Using
CX-Programmer Version
3.1 or Higher)
When editing I/O tables for CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Units, the first word address
can be set for up to 64 slots. This can be used, for example, to create fixed
starting addresses for Input Units and Output Unit to separate I/O allocations
from the program and increase the efficiency of program maintenance.
Automatic Transfer at Power ON
Automatic Transfers at
Power ON without a
Parameter File (.STD)
The user program can be automatically transferred to the CPU Unit at power
ON without a parameter file (.STD) if the name of the program file (.OBJ) is
changed to REPLACE on the CX-Programmer and the file is stored on a
Memory Card. This can be used, for example, to enable transferring a pro-
gram to a CPU Unit by creating the program offline and sending it as an email
attachment, without a local Programming Device.
Automatic Detection of I/O
Allocation Method for
Automatic Transfer at
Power ON
(CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU
Units Ver. 2.0 or Later)
The method used to create the parameter file (AUTOEXEC.STD) for auto-
matic transfer at power ON (automatic I/O allocation at startup or user-set I/O
allocation) is recorded. When an automatic transfer at power ON is executed
from the Memory Card, the recorded method is automatically detected and
used to create the I/O tables.
For example, this method can be used to create files for automatic transfer at
power ON in an office where Units are not mounted yet. The files can be
stored in a Memory Card, which can then be taken and installed in a CJ-
series CPU Unit at the remote site. When automatic transfer at power ON is
21
CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Unit Features Section 1-3
executed, the I/O will be allocated by the CPU Unit according to the method
recorded in the Memory Card.
Operation Start/End Times
The times that operation is started and ended are automatically stored in
memory in the Auxiliary Area (A515 to A517). This enables easier manage-
ment of the operating times of the PLC System.
Free-running Timers
The system timers used after the power is turned ON are contained in the fol-
lowing Auxiliary Area words.
Better Compatibility with Other SYSMAC PLCs
C200HE/HG/HX PLCs The AREA RANGE COMPARE (ZCP) and DOUBLE AREA RANGE COM-
PARE (ZCPL) instructions are supported in the CJ1-H CPU Units to provide
better compatibility with the C200HE/HG/HX PLCs.
CVM1/CV-series PLCs The CONVERT ADDRESS FROM CV instruction allows real I/O memory
addresses for the CVM1/CV-series PLCs to be converted to addresses for the
CJ-series PLCs, enabling programs with CVM1/CV-series addresses to be
quickly converted for use with a CJ-series CPU Unit.
Name Address Function Access
10-ms Incrementing
Free Running Timer
A000 This word contains the system timer
used after the power is turned ON.
“A value of 0000 hex is set when the
power is turned ON and this value is
automatically incremented by 1
every 10 ms. The value returns to
0000 hex after reaching FFFF hex
(655,350 ms), and then continues to
be automatically incremented by 1
every 10 ms.
(Unit version 3.0 or later)
Read-only
100-ms Incrementing
Free Running Timer
A001 This word contains the system timer
used after the power is turned ON.
A value of 0000 hex is set when the
power is turned ON and this value is
automatically incremented by 1
every 100 ms. The value returns to A
value of 0000 hex after reaching
FFFF hex (6,553,500 ms), and then
continues to be automatically incre-
mented by 1 every 100 ms.
(Unit version 3.0 or later)
Read-only
1-s Incrementing Free
Running Timer
A002 This word contains the system timer
used after the power is turned ON.
A value of 0000 hex is set when the
power is turned ON and this value is
automatically incremented by 1
every second. The value returns to
0000 hex after reaching FFFF hex
(65,535 s), and then continues to be
automatically incremented by 1
every second.
(Unit version 4.0 or later)
Read-only
22
CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Unit Features Section 1-3
Power Supply Units with Replacement Notification
The CJ1W-PA205C Power Supply Units with Replacement Notification pro-
vide six display levels using a 7-segment display on the front panel of the Unit
to indicate the remaining service life of the Power Supply Unit. An alarm out-
put also notifies when the estimated remaining service life drops to 6 months
or shorter. This function enables Power Supply Unit replacement before the
power supply reaches the end of its service life resulting in a system failure. It
also enables planning Power Supply Unit replacement. For details refer to
Power Supply Units with Replacement Notification on page 12.
1-3-3 CJ1M CPU Unit Features
Built-in I/O
The CJ1M CPU Units are high-speed, advanced, micro-sized PLCs equipped
with built-in I/O. The built-in I/O have the following features.
General-purpose I/O Immediate Refreshing
The CPU Unit's built-in inputs and outputs can be used as general-purpose
inputs and outputs. In particular, immediate I/O refreshing can be performed
on the I/O in the middle of a PLC cycle when a relevant instruction is exe-
cuted.
Stabilizing Input Filter Function
The input time constant for the CPU Unit's 10 built-in inputs can be set to 0 ms
(no filter), 0.5 ms, 1 ms, 2 ms, 4 ms, 8 ms, 16 ms, or 32 ms. Chattering and
the effects of external noise can be reduced by increasing the input time con-
stant.
Interrupt Inputs High-speed Interrupt Input Processing
The CPU Unit's 4 built-in inputs can be used for high-speed processing as
regular interrupt inputs in direct mode or interrupt inputs in counter mode. An
interrupt task can be started at the interrupt input's rising or falling edge (up or
down differentiation.) In counter mode, the interrupt task can be started when
the input count reaches the set value (up-differentiated or down-differentiated
transitions.)
High-speed Counters High-speed Counter Function
A rotary encoder can be connected to a built-in input to accept high-speed
counter inputs.
Trigger Interrupts at a Target Value or in a Specified Range
Interrupts can be triggered when the high-speed counter’s PV matches a tar-
get value or is within a specified range.
Measure the Frequency of High-speed Counter Inputs
The PRV(881) instruction can be used to measure the input pulse frequency
(one input only.)
Maintain or Refresh (Selectable) High-speed Counter PVs
The High-speed Counter Gate Bit can be turned ON/OFF from the ladder pro-
gram to select whether the high-speed counter PVs will be maintained or
refreshed.
Pulse Outputs Fixed duty ratio pulses can be output from the CPU Unit's built-in outputs to
perform positioning or speed control with a servo driver that accepts pulse
inputs.
23
CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Unit Features Section 1-3
CW/CCW Pulse Outputs or Pulse + Direction Outputs
The pulse output mode can be set to match the motor driver's pulse input
specifications.
Automatic Direction Selection for Easy Positioning with Absolute
Coordinates
When operating in absolute coordinates (origin defined or PV changed with
the INI(880) instruction), the CW/CCW direction will be selected automatically
when the pulse output instruction is executed. (The CW/CCW direction is
selected by determining whether the number of pulses specified in the
instruction is greater than or less than the pulse output PV.)
Triangular Control
Triangular control (trapezoidal control without a constant-speed plateau) will
be performed during positioning executed by an ACC(888) instruction (inde-
pendent) or PLS2(887) instruction if the number of output pulses required for
acceleration/deceleration exceeds the specified target pulse Output Amount.
Previously, an error would have occurred under these conditions and the
instruction would not have been executed.
Change Target Position during Positioning (Multiple Start)
When positioning was started with a PULSE OUTPUT (PLS2(887)) instruc-
tion and the positioning operation is still in progress, another PLS2(887)
instruction can be executed to change the target position, target speed, accel-
eration rate, and deceleration rate.
Switch from Speed Control to Positioning (Fixed Distance Feed Interrupt)
A PLS2(887) instruction can be executed during a speed control operation to
change to positioning mode. This feature allows a fixed distance feed interrupt
(moving a specified amount) to be executed when specific conditions occur.
Change Target Speed and Acceleration/Deceleration Rate during
Acceleration or Deceleration
When trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration is being executed according to a
pulse output instruction (speed control or positioning), the target speed and
acceleration/deceleration rate can be changed during acceleration or deceler-
ation.
Use Variable Duty Ratio Pulse Outputs for Lighting, Power Control, Etc.
The PULSE WITH VARIABLE DUTY RATIO instruction (PWM(891)) can be
used to output variable duty ratio pulses from the CPU Unit's built-in outputs
for applications such as lighting and power control.
Origin Search Use a Single Instruction for Origin Search and Origin Return Operations
A precise origin search can be executed with one instruction that uses various
I/O signals, such as the Origin Proximity Input Signal, Origin Input Signal,
Positioning Completed Signal, and Error Counter Reset Output.
Also, an origin return operation can be performed to move directly to the
established origin.
Quick-response Inputs Receive Input Signals Shorter than the Cycle Time
With quick-response inputs, inputs to the CPU Unit's built-in inputs (4 inputs
max.) with an input signal width as short as 30 µs can be received reliably
regardless of the cycle time.
24
CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Unit Features Section 1-3
Improved Functions for
PRV(881) and PRV2(883)
(CJ1M Only)
High-frequency calculation methods have been added to the pulse frequency
calculation methods for PRV(881) (HIGH-SPEED COUNTER PV READ) and
PRV2(883) (PULSE FREQUENCY CONVERT) instructions (minimizes the
error in high frequencies of 1 kHz or higher). PRV(881) can also be used to
read the pulse output frequency.
Pulse Frequency
Conversions
The pulse frequency input to high-speed counter 0 can be converted to a rota-
tional speed (r/min.) or the PV of the counter can be converted to the total
number of rotations.
Serial PLC Link Function
Data links (9 max.) can be set up between PLCs using the CPU Unit’s RS-
232C port. NT Link (1:N connection) can also be incorporated in a Serial PLC
Link network, allowing the existing NT Link (1:N mode) and the Serial PLC
Link to be used together.
Note 1: PTs are included in the number of links.
Note 2: The Serial PLC Link cannot be used for PT data links.
Scheduled Interrupt Function Used as High-precision Timer
Scheduled interrupts in units of 0.1 ms have been added for CJ1M CPU Units.
An internal PV reset start function for scheduled interrupts has also been
added, so it is possible to standardize the time to the first interrupt without
using the CLI instruction. It is also possible to read the elapsed time from
either a scheduled interrupt start or from the previous interrupt. This allows
the interval timer (STIM instruction) in the CQM1H Series to be easily used for
the CJ Series.
25
CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 4.0 Upgrades Section 1-4
1-4 CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 4.0 Upgrades
This section summarizes the upgrades made for CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Units with
unit version 4.0. CX-Programmer version 7.0 or higher must be used to
enable using the following functions.
Functional Upgrades for Unit Version 4.0
1-4-1 Online Editing of Function Blocks
Unit Version 3.0 or Earlier Function block definitions could not be changed during operation.
Unit Version 4.0 or Later Function block definitions can be changed during operation. This allows func-
tion block definitions to be quickly corrected during debugging. It also allows
function blocks to be used more easily in systems that operate 24 hours a day.
1-4-2 Input-Output Variables in Function Blocks
Unit Version 3.0 or Earlier The data size of parameters that could be passed to and from function blocks
was limited to four words maximum. It was thus necessary to separate ele-
ments with large data sizes, such as data tables.
Unit Version 4.0 or Later Input-output variables can be used to passed large quantities of data, such as
table data.
Function Section
Online Editing of Function Blocks 1-4-1 Online Editing of Function
Blocks
Input-Output Variables in Function Blocks 1-4-2 Input-Output Variables in
Function Blocks
Text String Support in Function Blocks 1-4-3 Text String Support in
Function Blocks
Pattern A
Pattern B
Pattern C
Pattern D
Pattern E
D100
D101
D102
D103
D104
D100
D101
D102
D103
D104
FB
(INT) (INT)
Para1i Para1o
(INT) (INT)
Para2i Para2o
(INT) (INT)
Para3i Para3o
(INT) (INT)
Para4i Para4o
(INT) (INT)
Para5i Para5o
D100
D101
D102
D103
D104
Pattern A
Pattern B
Pattern C
Pattern D
Pattern E
D100
D101
D102
D103
D104
D100
FB
(INT)[]
Para1 --- Para1 D10
0
26
CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 Upgrades Section 1-5
1-4-3 Text String Support in Function Blocks
Unit Version 3.0 or Earlier To program text string processing for communications commands and display
data in ladder diagrams, it was necessary to know the ladder string instruc-
tions and ASCII codes. Also, several instructions had to be combined to con-
verted from numbers to text strings or text strings to numbers.
Unit Version 4.0 or Later Text strings can be used in ST programming to easily create text string pro-
cessing programs.
1-5 CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 Upgrades
The following table shows the functional upgrades for CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit
Ver. 3.0.
Functional Upgrades for CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 3.0
MOV
#426C
stBlack[0]
MOV
#6163
stBlack[1]
" Bl" is #426C in ASCII
.
" ac" is #6163 in ASCII.
06/05/28
Black: 9
White: 18
Blue: 7
Pink: 30
Black
White
Blue
Pink
9
18
7
30
Production
log file
created.
File name
LineA.txt
FB to Create Date Text
FB to Create Production Log File
(* Convert black quantity to string *)
(* Convert white quantity to string *)
(* Convert blue quantity to string *)
(* Convert pink quantity to string *)
(* Get date text *)
GetDate(stDay)
Name: Generate Date Text
Function: To create text data for yy/mm/dd
(* Create yymm text *)
(* Create ddhh text *)
(* Insert / between yy and mm; extract only dd and combine *)
(* Create production log LineA.txt *)
Function Section
Function blocks (when using CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0 or higher) 1-5-1
Serial Gateway (converting FINS commands to CompoWay/F com-
mands at the built-in serial port)
1-5-2
Comment memory (in internal flash memory) 1-5-3
Expanded simple backup data 1-5-4
27
CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 Upgrades Section 1-5
1-5-1 Function Blocks (FB)
Unit Ver. 2.0 or Earlier Earlier Units did not support function blocks (FB).
Unit Ver. 3.0 or Later Function blocks (FB) conforming to IEC 61131-3 are supported. Use of func-
tion blocks is determined by the user.
Note IEC 61131-3 is an international standard for programmable logic
controllers (PLC) established by the International Electro-technical
Commission (IEC). This standard is divided into seven parts, of
which Part 3 Programming Languages (IEC 61131-3) provides reg-
ulations for programming PLCs.
Function blocks can be created with CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0 or higher by the
user and pasted into normal programs. The standard function blocks provided
by OMRON in the OMRON FB Library can also be pasted into normal pro-
grams. Function blocks enable standard processing to be simply inserted into
a program as a single unit. Function blocks provide the following features.
• Function block algorithms can be written using ladder programming or
structured text (see note).
Note Structured text is a high level textual language designed for industrial
control (primarily PLCs) stipulated in IEC 61131-3. The structured
text supported by CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0 conforms to IEC 61131-1.
• A single function block that has been created can be stored in a library for
easy reuse of standard processing.
• Programs that contain function blocks (ladder programming or structured
text), can also be uploaded or downloaded in the same way as normal
programs that do not contain function blocks. Tasks that include function
blocks, however, cannot be downloaded in task units (although they can
be uploaded).
• Array (one-dimensional) variables are supported, making it easier to han-
dle data specific to an application.
1-5-2 Serial Gateway (Converting FINS to CompoWay/F Via Serial Port)
Unit Ver. 2.0 or Earlier Temperature Controllers, Digital Panel Meters, and other CompoWay/F-com-
patible OMRON Components previously could be accessed by sending user-
specified CompoWay/F commands from the PLC. This required, however, the
use of a Serial Communications Board/Unit protocol macro, execution of the
PMCR(260) instruction in the ladder program of the CPU Unit on the same
PLC, and implementation of the standard system protocol (CompoWay/F
Master). The use of protocol macros prevented access across networks.
Free running timer (system timer after power is turned ON) 1-5-5
New instructions
added
TXDU(256) and RXDU(255) instructions (sup-
port no-protocol communications with Serial
Communications Units with unit version 1.2 or
later)
1-5-6
Model conversion instructions: XFERC(565),
DISTC(566), COLLC(567), MOVBC(568), and
BCNTC(621)
Special function block instruction: GETID(286)
Additional instruc-
tion functions
TXD(236) and RXD(235) instructions (support
no-protocol communications with Serial Com-
munications Boards with unit version 1.2 or
later)
Function Section
28
CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 Upgrades Section 1-5
Note Specific data could be shared without communications instructions if
user-specified CompoWay/F commands were not required, however,
by using the CJ1W-CIF21 Basic Communications Unit.
Unit Ver. 3.0 or Later FINS commands (CompoWay/F commands encapsulated in FINS frames)
received by the CPU Unit at the built-in serial port (RS-232C port or peripheral
port) are converted automatically into CompoWay/F command frames and
transmitted on the serial line. This enables access to CompoWay/F-compati-
ble OMRON components that are connected to the CPU Unit’s built-in serial
port via either an NS-series Programmable Terminal (PT) or by using the
CMND(490) instruction.
1-5-3 Comment Memory (in Internal Flash Memory)
Unit Ver. 2.0 or Earlier Comment data and section data could not be stored in the actual PLC when a
project was downloaded from the CX-Programmer to the CPU Unit unless
both a Memory Card and EM file memory were available.
Unit Ver. 3.0 or Later A comment memory is provided within the CPU Unit’s internal flash memory.
Therefore, the following comment/section data can be stored in and read from
comment memory even if neither Memory Card nor EM file memory are avail-
able.
• Symbol table files (including CX-Programmer symbol names and I/O
comments)
• Comment files (CX-Programmer rung comments and other comments)
• Program index files (CX-Programmer section names, section comments,
and program comments)
FINS
CompoWay/F
FINS System
Network
Serial
Serial
Network
CMND(490)
Network
Serial
CS/CJ-series CPU Unit with
unit version 3.0 or later
Protocol
conversion
CompoWay/F-compatible
components can be ac-
cessed via the network from
personal computers, PTs,
or PLCs.
CompoWay/F-compatible
components
29
CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 Upgrades Section 1-5
CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0 When downloading projects using the CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0, either of the
following storage locations can be selected as the transfer destination for
comment data and section data.
•Memory Card
• EM file memory
• Comment memory (in CPU Unit’s internal flash memory)
CX-Programmer Ver. 4.0 or
Earlier
When using CX-Programmer Ver. 4.0 or earlier, data is stored in either the
Memory Card or EM file memory, whichever is available. If neither the Mem-
ory Card nor EM file memory is available, the comment/section data is stored
in comment memory (in CPU Unit’s internal flash memory).
1-5-4 Simple Backup Data Expanded
Unit Ver. 2.0 or Earlier The simple backup function could not be used to back up comment data or
section data.
Unit Ver. 3.0 or Later The following files stored in comment memory can be backed up to a Memory
Card when a simple backup operation is executed, or the files can be restored
to comment memory from the Memory Card.
• Symbol table files (including CX-Programmer symbol names and I/O
comments)
• Comment files (CX-Programmer rung comments and other comments)
• Program index files (CX-Programmer section names, section comments,
and program comments)
CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0 or later
Project
Transfer Symbol table file
Comment file
Program index file
CPU Unit
Memory Card
EM file memory
Comment/section data can be stored in this area.
Comment/section data can be stored in the actual PLC
when downloading projects.
Comment
memory
30
CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 Upgrades Section 1-5
This enables backup/restoration of all data in the CPU Unit including I/O com-
ments if an error occurs or when adding a CPU Unit with the same specifica-
tions without requiring a Programming Device.
1-5-5 Free-running Timers
The system timers used after the power is turned ON are contained in the fol-
lowing Auxiliary Area words.
CPU Unit
Simple backup executing
Memory Card
CS/CJ Series
• User program
• Parameters
• I/O memory
Symbol table file
(In comment memory)
Comment file
Program index file
These files can also be backed up using simple backup.
Name Address Function Access
10-ms Incrementing
Free Running Timer
A000 This word contains the system timer
used after the power is turned ON.
A value of 0000 hex is set when the
power is turned ON and this value is
automatically incremented by 1
every 10 ms. The value returns to
0000 hex after reaching FFFF hex
(655,350 ms), and then continues to
be automatically incremented by 1
every 10 ms.
(Unit version 3.0 or later)
Read-only
100-ms Incrementing
Free Running Timer
A001 This word contains the system timer
used after the power is turned ON.
A value of 0000 hex is set when the
power is turned ON and this value is
automatically incremented by 1
every 100 ms. The value returns to
0000 hex after reaching FFFF hex
(6,553,500 ms), and then continues
to be automatically incremented by 1
every 100 ms.
(Unit version 3.0 or later)
Read-only
1-s Incrementing Free
Running Timer
A002 This word contains the system timer
used after the power is turned ON.
A value of 0000 hex is set when the
power is turned ON and this value is
automatically incremented by 1
every second. The value returns to
0000 hex after reaching FFFF hex
(65,535 s), and then continues to be
automatically incremented by 1
every second.
(Unit version 4.0 or later)
Read-only
31
CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades Section 1-6
Note The timer will continue to be incremented when the operating mode is
switched to RUN mode.
Example: The interval can be counted between processing A and processing
B without requiring timer instructions. This is achieved by calculat-
ing the difference between the value in A000 for processing A and
the value in A000 for processing B. The interval is counted in 10 ms
units.
CPU Units with unit version 4.0 and later also have a 1-s timer in
A002, which is incremented by 1 every 1 s.
1-5-6 New Special Instructions and Functions
The following new instructions and instruction functions have been added. For
details, refer to the CS/CJ Series Instructions Reference Manual (W340).
These new instructions are supported by the CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0 or
higher only.
• Serial Communications Instructions:
Supporting no-protocol communications with Serial Communications
Units with unit version 1.2 or later:
TXDU(256): TRANSMIT VIA SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS UNIT
RXDU(255): RECEIVE VIA SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS UNIT
Supporting no-protocol communications with Serial Communications
Boards with unit version 1.2 or later:
TXD(236): TRANSMIT
RXD(235): RECEIVE
• Model Conversion Instructions:
When using CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0 or higher to convert a C-series lad-
der program for use in a CS/CJ-series CPU Unit, the C-series
XFER(070), DIST(080), COLL(081), MOVB(082), and BCNT(067)
instructions will be automatically converted to the following instructions.
The operands do not require editing.
XFERC(565) BLOCK TRANSFER
DISTC(566) SINGLE WORD DISTRIBUTE
COLLC(567) DATA COLLECT
MOVBC(568) MOVE BIT
BCNTC(621) BIT COUNTER
• High-speed Counter/Pulse Output Instructions (CJ1M Only):
High-frequency calculation methods have been added to the pulse fre-
quency calculation methods for PRV(881) (HIGH-SPEED COUNTER PV
READ) and PRV2(883) (PULSE FREQUENCY CONVERT) instructions.
PRV(881) can also be used to read the pulse output frequency.
1-6 CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades
The following table shows the functional upgrades for CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit
Ver. 2.0.
Functional Upgrades for CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0
Function Reference
Downloading and Uploading Individual Tasks Page 32
Improved Read Protection Using Passwords Page 33
Write Protection from FINS Commands Sent to CPU Units via Networks Page 38
Online Network Connections without I/O Tables Page 43
Communications through a Maximum of 8 Network Levels Page 45
32
CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades Section 1-6
1-6-1 Downloading and Uploading Individual Tasks
Previous CPU Units (Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units)
With the Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units, individual program tasks could not be down-
loaded from the CX-Programmer. It was only possible to download the entire
user program.
For example, if several programmers were developing the program, the
project manager had to unify each program after debugging and then down-
load the entire user program. Furthermore, the entire user program had to be
downloaded even if just a few changes were made.
Note It was possible to upload individual program tasks with CS/CJ-series PLCs.
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0
Overview With CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later CPU Units, individual program tasks can be
uploaded and downloaded from the CX-Programmer.
Connecting Online to PLCs via NS-series PTs Page 47
Setting First Slot Words Page 48
Automatic Transfers at Power ON without a Parameter File Page 50
Operation Start/End Times Page 51
Automatic Detection of I/O Allocation Method for Automatic Transfer at Power ON Page 52
New Application Instructions Page 53
Function Reference
CX-Programmer
CX-Programmer
CX-Programmer
Developer A
Developer C
Developer B
Manager
Unification
Entire user program
CS/CJ Series
Individual tasks can be uploaded.
Download
END
END
END
CX-Programmer Individual tasks (programs)
Download individual tasks (programs).
CS/CJ-series
CPU Unit Ver.2.0 or higher
33
CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades Section 1-6
Usage When several programmers are developing a program, it isn't necessary for a
project manager to unify the data because just the debugged tasks can be
downloaded/uploaded. Also, transferring individual tasks can help avoid mis-
takes.
Restrictions to Function
Block Use
Individual tasks cannot be downloaded for programs containing function
blocks (unit version 3.0 or later only) (uploading is possible).
1-6-2 Improved Read Protection Using Passwords
Read Protection for Individual Tasks Using Passwords
Previous CPU Units (Pre-
Ver. 2.0 CPU Units)
With the pre-Ver. 2.0 CS/CJ-series CPU Units, it was possible to read-protect
the entire PLC with a password (referred to as “UM read protection” below),
but it was not possible to protect individual tasks.
UM read protection prevented anyone from displaying, editing, or uploading
the entire user program from CX-Programmer without inputting the correct
password.
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or Later
and CX-Programmer
Ver. 4.0 or Higher
Overview
With the CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later CPU Units, it is possible to read-protect
individual program tasks (referred to as “task read protection” below) or the
entire PLC. same password controls access to all of the read-protected tasks.
Task read protection prevents anyone from displaying, editing, or uploading
the read-protected set of tasks from CX-Programmer without inputting the cor-
rect password. In this case, the entire program can be uploaded, but the read-
protected tasks cannot be displayed or edited without inputting the correct
password. Tasks that are not read-protected can be displayed, edited, or mod-
ified with online editing.
Note Task read protection cannot be set if UM read protection is already set. How-
ever, it is possible to set UM read protection after task read protection has
been set.
CX-Programmer
CX-Programmer
CX-Programmer
Developer A
Developer C
Developer B
Edited
Unchanged
Unchanged
Upload individual tasks.
Just the edited tasks can be downloaded.
CS/CJ-series
CPU Unit Ver.2.0 or later
34
CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades Section 1-6
Operating Procedure
1,2,3... 1. Display the Protection Tab of the PLC Properties Window and register a
password in the Task read protection Box.
2. Select the tasks that will be password-protected and select the Ta s k r e a d
protect Option in the Program Properties Ta b.
3. Connect online and execute either step a or b below.
a) Transferring the Program and Setting Password Protection:
Select PLC - Transfer - To PLC to transfer the program. The tasks reg-
istered in step 2 will be password-protected.
b) Setting Password Protection without Transferring the Program:
Select PLC - Protection - Set Password and click the OK button. The
tasks registered in step 2 will be password-protected.
Usage
Apply read protection to tasks when you want to convert those tasks (pro-
grams) to “black box” programs.
END
END
END
CX-Programmer
Password?
Set a password for particular tasks in the project directory.
Those tasks cannot be displayed without inputting the password.
CS/CJ-series CPU Unit Ver.2.0 or higher
The entire user program can be uploaded, but password-
protected tasks will not be displayed until the password is input.
The other tasks can be displayed/edited and are also accessible
through online editing.
Right-click
Properties
Right-click
Properties
35
CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades Section 1-6
Note 1. If CX-Programmer Ver. 3.2 or a lower version is used to read a task with
task read protection applied, an error will occur and the task will not be
read. Likewise, if a Programming Console or the PT Ladder Monitor func-
tion is used to read a password protected task, an error will occur and the
task will not be read.
2. The entire program can be transferred to another CPU Unit even if individ-
ual tasks in the program are read-protected. It is also possible to connect
online and create a program file (.OBJ file) with file memory operations. In
both cases, the task read protection remains effective for the password-
protected tasks.
3. When the CX-Programmer is used to compare a user program in the com-
puter's memory with a user program in the CPU Unit, password-protected
tasks will be compared too.
Restrictions to Function
Block Use
Function block definitions can be read even if the entire program or individual
tasks in a program containing function blocks (CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 or later only)
are read-protected.
Enabling/Disabling Creating File Memory Program Files
Previous CPU Units (Pre-
Ver. 2.0 CPU Units)
With the pre-Ver. 2.0 CS/CJ-series CPU Units, it was possible use file mem-
ory operations to transfer a program file (.OBJ file) to a Memory Card even if
the program was protected with UM read protection. (Consequently, illegal
copies could be made.)
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or Later
and CX-Programmer
Ver. 4.0 or Higher
Overview
When the entire program or individual tasks in a CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later are
read-protected from the CX-Programmer, an option can be set to enable or
disable the creation/backup of .OBJ program files. It will not be possible to
create program files (.OBJ files) with file memory operations if the creation/
backup of program files is prohibited with this setting. (This setting prohibits
both online transfers to a Memory Card/EM file memory as well as offline stor-
age of PLC data that was uploaded to the CX-Programmer.)
Disabling the creation of file memory program files can help prevent illegal
copying of the user program.
END
END
END
Tas k 0
Tas k 1
Tas k 2
Password applied.
Task converted to "black box."
Accessable
Not accessable
Accessable
36
CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades Section 1-6
Operating Procedure
1,2,3... 1. When registering a password in the UM read protection password Box or
Task read protection Box, select the Prohibit from saving into a protected
memory card Option.
2. Either select PLC - Transfer - To PLC to transfer the program or select
PLC - Protection - Set Password and click the OK button.
Usage
This option can be used to prevent the program from being transferred out of
the PLC using the password.
Note 1. The simple backup operation can still be performed when the creation of
program files is prohibited, but the backup program file (BACKUP.OBJ) will
not be created.
2. The program can be copied when program read protection is not enabled.
3. The setting to enable/disable creating file memory program files will not
take effect unless the program is transferred to the CPU Unit. Always trans-
fer the program after changing this setting.
Enabling/Disabling Write Protection for Individual Tasks Using Passwords
Previous CPU Units (Pre-
Ver. 2.0 CPU Units)
With the pre-Ver. 2.0 CS/CJ-series CPU Units, the CPU Unit's user program
memory (UM) can be write-protected by turning ON pin 1 of the CPU Unit's
DIP switch. In this case, it is possible to overwrite the user program memory
by turning OFF pin 1.
CX-Programmer
CX-Programmer
Password?
When a password is being registered for the entire user program or
selected tasks, the creation of backup program files (.OBJ files) can be
enabled/disabled with an option setting.
Online creation of backup program files
(.OBJ files) prohibited by option setting.
CPU Unit
Backup program files (.OBJ files) cannot be
created with file memory operations.
Uploading of all PLC
data is prohibited.
Properties
37
CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades Section 1-6
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or Later
and CX-Programmer
Ver. 4.0 or Higher
With the CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 and later CPU Units, the CPU Unit's UM area can
be write protected by turning ON pin 1 of the CPU Unit's DIP switch. The pro-
gram (or selected tasks) can also be write-protected if the write protection
option is selected from the CX-Programmer when a password is being regis-
tered for the entire program or those selected tasks. The write protection set-
ting can prevent unauthorized or accidental overwriting of the program.
Note 1. If the selected tasks or program are write-protected by selecting this option
when registering a password, only the tasks (program) that are password-
protected will be protected from overwriting. It will still be possible to over-
write other tasks or programs with operations such as online editing and
task downloading.
2. All tasks (programs) can be overwritten when program read protection is
not enabled.
3. The setting to enable/disable creating file memory program files will not
take effect unless the program is transferred to the CPU Unit. Always trans-
fer the program after changing this setting.
Operating Procedure
1,2,3... 1. When registering a password in the UM read protection password Box or
Task read protection Box, select the Prohibit from overwriting to a protect-
ed program Option.
2. Either select PLC - Transfer - To PLC to transfer the program or select
PLC - Protection - Set Password and click the OK button.
CX-Programmer
Password?
When a password is being registered for the entire user
program or selected tasks, program write-protection can be
enabled/disabled with an option setting.
The user program cannot be overwritten.
CPU Unit
Overwriting can be prohibited with password protection,
regardless of the DIP switch setting.
Memory Card
The user program cannot be overwritten.
Properties
38
CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades Section 1-6
Auxiliary Area Flags and Bits related to Password Protection
1-6-3 Write Protection from FINS Commands Sent to CPU Units via
Networks
Previous CPU Units (Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units)
With the pre-Ver. 2.0 CS/CJ-series CPU Units, there was no way to prohibit
write operations and other editing operations sent to the PLC's CPU Unit as
FINS commands through a network such as Ethernet, i.e., connections other
than direct serial connections.
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or Later
Summary With the CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 and later CS/CJ-series CPU Units, it is possible to
prohibit write operations and other editing operations sent to the PLC's CPU
Unit as FINS commands through a network (including write operations from
CX-Programmer, CX-Protocol, CX-Process, and other applications using Fin-
sGateway). Read processes are not prohibited.
FINS write protection can disable write processes such as downloading the
user program, PLC Setup, or I/O memory, changing the operating mode, and
performing online editing.
It is possible to exclude selected nodes from write protection so that data can
be written from those nodes.
An event log in the CPU Unit automatically records all write processes sent
through the network and that log can be read with a FINS command.
Example:
Name Bit
address
Description
UM Read Protection
Flag
A09900 Indicates whether or not the PLC (the entire user
program) is read-protected.
0: UM read protection is not set.
1: UM read protection is set.
Task Read Protec-
tion Flag
A09901 Indicates whether or not selected program tasks
are read-protected.
0: Task read protection is not set.
1: Task read protection is set.
Program Write Pro-
tection for Read Pro-
tection
A09902 Indicates whether or not the write protection
option has been selected to prevent overwriting
of password-protected tasks or programs.
0: Overwriting allowed
1: Overwriting prohibited (write-protected)
Enable/Disable Bit
for Program Backup
A09903 Indicates whether or not a backup program file
(.OBJ file) can be created when UM read protec-
tion or task read protection is set.
0: Creation of backup program file allowed
1: Creation of backup program file prohibited
39
CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades Section 1-6
Note This function prohibits writing by FINS commands only, so it has no effect on
write operations by functions other than FINS commands, such as data links.
Example Write Protection Patterns
PLC #1 PLC #2 PLC #3
Computer #1
Network
Write operations by FINS com-
mands are prohibited from some
nodes in the network (in this exam-
ple, computer #1, PLC #1, and
PLC #2).
Network
Write access to this PLC
is enabled/disabled.
Network
Computer #2
Write operations by FINS com-
mands are not prohibited from
selected nodes in the network
(in this example, computer #2
and PLC #3).
Connection pattern Diagram (example) Write
protection
From a com-
puter through
a direct serial
connection
Direct con-
nection to
PLC
Cannot be
applied.
Gateway con-
nection
(Serial-to-net-
work) to PLC
Can be
applied.
PLC
Computer
Write-protection not effective
Peripheral port
RS-232C port
Serial connection
(Peripheral bus or
host link) RS-232C port or 422A/485 port
on a Communications Board/Unit
PLC #1 PLC #2
Computer
Serial connection
(Peripheral bus
or host link)
Network
The CPU Unit in PLC #2
can be write-protected.
40
CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades Section 1-6
Operation With the CX-Programmer, open the PLC Setup's FINS Protection Tab a n d
select the Use FINS Write Protection Option. When this option is selected, it
will not be possible to execute write operations for that CPU Unit with FINS
commands sent through a network. To permit write operations from particular
nodes, enter network addresses and node addresses for the node under Pro-
tection Releasing Addresses. (Up to 32 nodes can be excluded from FINS
Write Protection).
From a computer through a
direct network connection
Can be
applied.
From another PLC in the net-
work
Can be
applied.
Connection pattern Diagram (example) Write
protection
PLC #1 PLC #2
Computer
Network
The CPU Unit in PLC #2
can be write-protected.
PLC #1 PLC #2
CMND
If the CMND instruction is used to send
a FINS command (requesting a write
operation) to the CPU Unit of PLC #2,
the operation is not performed.
The CPU Unit in PLC #2
can be write-protected.
Network
41
CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades Section 1-6
PLC Setup
Usage The system can be configured so that a PLC can be written only from autho-
rized nodes in the network. (For example, use this function when the system's
control/monitoring computer is the only node allowed to write to a Controller
within a piece of equipment.)
By limiting the number of nodes that can write to the PLC, it is possible to pre-
vent system problems caused by unintentional overwrites during data moni-
toring.
Item Address in
Programming
Console
Description Settings Default setting
Use FINS Write Pro-
tection
Word 448, bit 15 Sets whether the CPU Unit is
write-protected from FINS com-
mands sent through the network.
(Does not prohibit FINS com-
mands sent through a direct serial
connection).
0: Write protection
disabled
1: Write protection
enabled
0: Write protection
disabled
Nodes Excluded
from Write Protec-
tion (Protection
Releasing
Addresses)
Words 449 to
480
This area lists the nodes in the
network that are not restricted by
FINS write protection. Up to 32
nodes can be specified.
Note These settings are effective
only when FINS write pro-
tection is enabled.
Bits 08 to
15
Network address:
Network address of the FINS com-
mand source
00 to 7F hex
Bits 00 to
07
Node address:
Node address of the FINS com-
mand source
01 to FE hex, or FF
hex
(FF hex: node
address unspecified)
Number of Nodes
Excluded from FINS
Write Protection
(Do not set this
value. It is automati-
cally calculated by
the CX-Program-
mer.)
Word 448, bits
00 to 07
Contains the number of nodes that
are not subject to the FINS write
protection.
If 0 is specified (no nodes
excluded from write protection),
FINS write commands are prohib-
ited from all nodes other than the
local node.
Note This setting is effective only
when FINS write protection
is enabled.
0 to 32
(00 to 20 hex)
(A value of 0 indi-
cates that all nodes
are subject to write
protection.)
0
(All nodes subject to
write protection.)
42
CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades Section 1-6
Operations Restricted by
Network FINS Write
Protection
FINS Write Commands
The following FINS commands are restricted by FINS write protection when
sent to the CPU Unit through the network.
CS/CJ-series PLC
Equipment
Network
Controller
Allowed to
write/con-
trol PLC
Network
Network
System control/monitoring computer
Allowed to
write/control PLC
Monitoring computer
Not allowed to
write/control PLC
Code Command name Code Command name
0102 hex MEMORY AREA WRITE 2101 hex ERROR CLEAR
0103 hex MEMORY AREA FILL 2103 hex ERROR LOG POINTER CLEAR
0105 hex MEMORY AREA TRANSFER 2203 hex SINGLE FILE WRITE
0202 hex PARAMETER AREA WRITE 2204 hex FILE MEMORY FORMAT
0203 hex PARAMETER AREA FILL (CLEAR) 2205 hex FILE DELETE
0307 hex PROGRAM AREA WRITE 2207 hex FILE COPY
0308 hex PROGRAM AREA CLEAR 2208 hex FILE NAME CHANGE
0401 hex RUN 220A hex MEMORY AREA-FILE TRANSFER
0402 hex STOP 220B hex PARAMETER AREA-FILE TRANSFER
0702 hex CLOCK WRITE 220C hex PROGRAM AREA-FILE TRANSFER
0C01 hex ACCESS RIGHT ACQUIRE 2215 hex CREATE/DELETE DIRECTORY
2301 hex FORCED SET/RESET
2302 hex FORCED SET/RESET CANCEL
43
CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades Section 1-6
Operations from CX-Programmer (including CX-Net) through the Network
The following CX-Programmer (including CX-Net) operations are restricted by
FINS write protection when performed on the CPU Unit through the network.
Note 1. FINS write protection does not prevent CX-Programmer operations from a
computer connected through a direct serial connection.
2. FINS write protection does not prevent the following file memory write op-
erations.
• Automatic transfer from the Memory Card at startup
• Simple backup function (including backup operations to selected
Units/Boards)
• Writing files with the FWRIT (WRITE DATA FILE) instruction
Operations from Other Support Software
FINS write protection also prevents the following operations performed
through the network by the CX-Protocol and CX-Process.
• Changing the CPU Unit's operating mode, writing memory areas,
transferring PLC Setup settings, transferring the I/O table, forced set/
reset, and clearing the CPU Unit's error log
Operations from Applications That Use FinsGateway
FINS write protection prevents all write operations addressed to the CPU Unit
from applications that use FinsGateway, such as PLC Reporter and Compo-
let.
1-6-4 Online Network Connections without I/O Tables
Summary With CJ-series CPU Units, the CPU Unit can recognize a CPU Bus Unit (such
as a Network Communications Unit, see note) even if the I/O tables have not
been created and there is no registered I/O tables as a result of using auto-
matic I/O allocation at startup.
Operations not
allowed through the
network when FINS
write protection is
enabled.
• Changing the Operating Mode
• Transferring the ladder program to the CPU Unit
• Transferring parameter area data (PLC Setup, I/O table, and
CPU Bus Unit Setup) to the CPU Unit
• Transferring memory area data (I/O memory data) to the
CPU Unit
• Transferring the variable table, comments, or program index
to the CPU Unit
• Forced Set/Reset
• Changing timer/counter set values
• Online editing
• Writing file memory
• Clearing the error log
• Setting the clock
• Releasing the access right
• Transferring the routing table
• Transferring the data link table
44
CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades Section 1-6
Note Network Communications Units include Ethernet Units, Controller Link Units,
SYSMAC Link Units, and DeviceNet Units.
Usage If the nodes are connected to the network, this function allows a computer-
based Programming Device (such as the CX-Programmer) to connect online
to PLCs in the network even if the I/O tables have not been created. Since a
network connection is established with the PLCs, setup operations can be
performed such as creating the I/O tables (or editing and transferring I/O
tables), transferring the user program, transferring the PLC Setup, and trans-
ferring the CPU Bus Unit Setup.
This function is particularly useful when connecting the CX-Programmer via
Ethernet (using a CS1W-ETN21), because the I/O tables can be created
through Ethernet so a serial cable isn't required and it isn't necessary to
spend extra time establishing a serial connection.
Details
• Applicable Units: All CS/CJ-series CPU Bus Units
• Applicable computer-based Programming Devices: CX-Programmer and
CX-Protocol only
• Applicable functions: Online connections from CX-Programmer and CX-
Protocol, and online functions of the applicable CPU Units and CPU Bus
Units
Note When a CS1W-ETN21 or CJ1W-ETN21 Ethernet Unit is being used, the
Ethernet Unit's IP address is automatically set to the default value of
192.168.250.xx, where xx is the FINS node address. After connecting the eth-
ernet cable between the CX-Programmer and PLC (without making a direct
CPU Bus Unit
(including Network Communications Units) CS/CJ-series CPU Unit Ver.2.0 or higher
Network
Online connection
can be made.
CPU Bus Units (including Network Communications Units)
can be recognized before I/O tables are created (I/O allo-
cation at startup is used).
CX-Programmer
Ethernet
Ethernet
CX-Programmer
1:1 Computer-to-PLC connection 1:N Computer-to-PLC connection
Even without an I/O table, it is
possible to make an online con-
nection, create the I/O table,
transfer the program, and per-
form other operations.
CS/CJ-
series
CPU Unit
Ver.2.0
CS/CJ-
series
CPU Unit
Ver.2.0
CS/CJ-
series
CPU Unit
Ver.2.0
I/O table not registered I/O table not registered I/O table not registered
Even without an I/O table, it is possible to make an online
connection, create the I/O table, transfer the program, and
perform other operations.
CS/CJ-
series
CPU Unit
Ver.2.0
I/O table not
registered
45
CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades Section 1-6
serial connection and creating the I/O tables), manually set the computer's IP
address in the Windows Local Area Connection Properties (example:
192.168.250.55). An online connection can be established just by setting the
Ethernet Unit's IP address (192.168.250.xx) and node in the CX-Programmer.
1-6-5 Communications through a Maximum of 8 Network Levels
Previous CPU Units (Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units)
With the pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units, it was possible to communicate through 3
network levels max. (see note), including the local network. It was not possible
to communicate through 4 or more levels.
Note A Gateway to the network via serial communications was not counted as a
level.
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or Later
Summary With the CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 and later CS/CJ-series CPU Units, it is possible to
communicate through 8 network levels max. (see note), including the local
network.
Note 1. FINS commands can only be sent across up to 8 network levels when the
destination is a CPU Unit. FINS commands can be sent to other destina-
tions up to 3 network levels away.
2. This functionality is enabled only after setting routing tables with the CX-
Net in CX-Programmer version 4.0 or higher.
3. A Gateway to the network via serial communications was not counted as a
level.
Compatible Networks
Only the following 2 kinds of networks can be used when communicating
through a maximum of 8 networks. The network levels can be combined in
any order.
• Controller Link
• Ethernet
Note Communications are restricted to a maximum of 3 networks through
DeviceNet and SYSMAC Link networks.
Configuration of Compatible Models
All of the CPU Units must be CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 and later CS/CJ-series CPU
Units. Also, the Gateway Counter Setting must be made with the CX-Net.
OR
FINS command
source
Serial
connection
Network 1
This connection is not counted as a network level.
Level count = 1
Network 2
Level count = 2
Network 3
FINS command
destination
46
CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades Section 1-6
Internal Structure The Gateway Counter (GCT) is in the FINS header of the FINS command/
response frame. This counter value is decremented (−1) each time a network
level is crossed.
FINS Command Frame
Example:
Operating Procedure There is no special procedure that must be performed for CS/CJ-series CPU
Units Ver. 2.0 or later. Just set normal routing tables to enable communicating
across up to 8 network levels.
Note 1. When using communications only for up to 3 network levels, the CS/CJ-se-
ries CPU Units Ver. 2.0 or later can be used together with other CPU Units.
When using communications for to 4 to 8 network levels, use only CS/CJ-
series CPU Units Ver. 2.0 or later. Other CPU Units cannot be used. Rout-
ing errors (error codes 0501 to 0504 hex) may occur in the relaying PLCs,
preventing a FINS response from being returned.
2. With CS/CJ-series CPU Units with unit version 2.0 or later, the Gateway
Counter (GCT: Number of allowed bridge passes) for FINS command/re-
sponse frames is the value decremented from 07 hex (variable). (In earlier
versions, the value was decremented from 02 hex.) With unit version 3.0
or later, the default GCT for FINS command/response frames is the value
decremented from 02 hex. CX-Net can be used to select 07 hex as the val-
ue from which to decrement.
3. Do not use the Gateway Counter (GCT: Number of allowed bridge passes)
enclosed in the FINS header of the FINS command/response frame in ver-
OR
FINS command
source
Serial
connection
This connection is not counted as a network level.
Network 1
Network 2
Level
count = 1
Level
count = 4
Level
count = 3
Level
count = 2
Network 4
Network 3
Network 8
Network 7
Level
count = 7 FINS command
destination
ICF RSV GCT
FINS header Command code Text
GCT (Gateway counter: Number of allowed bridge passages)
The standard setting is 02 hex when sending, but this value can be
user-set from 07 hex.
The count is decremented by one each time a network level is passed.
FINS command
source
FINS command
Network 1
Network 2
Network 3
FINS command
At this
p
oint, the
g
atewa
y
counter = 7 hex
At this point, the gateway counter = 6 hex
FINS command
FINS command
Network 4
At this
p
oint, the
g
atewa
y
counter = 5 hex
At this point, the gateway counter = 4 hex
FINS command
At this
p
oint, the
g
atewa
y
counter = 0 he
x
Network 8
FINS command
destination
47
CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades Section 1-6
ification checks performed by user applications in host computers. The
GCT in the FINS header is used by the system, and a verification error may
occur if it is used to perform verification checks in user applications, partic-
ularly when using CS/CJ-series CPU Units with unit version 2.0 or later.
1-6-6 Connecting Online to PLCs via NS-series PTs
Summary The CX-Programmer can be connected online to a PLC connected via a serial
line to an NS-series PT that is connected to the CX-Programmer via Ethernet
(see note 2). This enables uploading, downloading, and monitoring the ladder
program and other data.
Note 1. The NS-series PT must be version 3.0 or higher and the CX-Programmer
must be version 3.1 or higher.
2. Connection is not possible through an NS-series PT connected serially to
the CX-Programmer.
Connection Method In CX-Programmer, open the Change PLC Window and set the Network Type
to Ethernet. Click the Settings Button and set the IP address of the NS-series
PT on the Driver Tab Page. Also make the following settings on the Network
Tab Page.
• FINS Source Address
Set the local network address of the NS-series PT for the Network (exam-
ple network address: 1).
• FINS Destination Address
Network: Set the address to 111 if the PLC is connected to serial port A
on the NS-series PT and to 112 if it is connected to serial port B.
Node: Always set to 1
• Frame Length: 1,000 (See note.)
• Response Timeout: 2
Note Do not set the frame length higher than 1,000. If any higher value is used, the
program transfer will fail and a memory error will occur.
PLC #1
CX-Programmer
(Example IP address: 192.168.0.1)
Ethernet (See note 1.)
(Example network address: 1)
CS/CJ-series
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0
Connect online to PLC #1 to enable
programming, monitoring, and other operations.
NS-series PT
(Example IP address:
192.168.0.22)
1:N NT Link
(Example network address: 111)
48
CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades Section 1-6
1-6-7 Setting First Slot Words
Previous CPU Units (Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units)
With CX-Programmer Ver. 3.0 or lower, only the first addresses on Racks
could be set. The first address for a slot could not be set.
CX-Programmer Ver. 3.1 or Higher
Summary Starting with CX-Programmer Ver. 3.1, the first addresses for slots can be set
when editing the I/O tables for CS/CJ-series CPU Units (CS1D CPU Units for
Single-CPU Systems, and CS1-H, CJ1-H, and CJ1M CPU Units). The first
address can be set for up to eight slots. (See note.)
Note This function is supported only for CS1-H/CJ1-H CPU Units manufactured on
June 1, 2002 or later (lot number 020601@@@@ or later). It is supported for all
CJ1M CPU Units regardless of lot number. It is not supported for CS1D CPU
Units for Duplex CPU Systems.
Operating Procedure Select Option - Rack/Slot Start Addresses in the PLC IO Table - Traffic Con-
troller Window. This command will enable setting both the first Rack
addresses and the first slot addresses.
0 1 2
01 234
01 2
CIO 0100
CIO 0000
CIO 0200
CX-Programmer
Ver. 3.0 or earlier
First addresses on Racks
Rack No.
CPU Rack
Rack 1
Rack 2
Rack 3
Rack 4
Rack 5
Rack 6
Rack 7
First address
100
0
200
Example:
CPU Rack slot
Rack 1 slot
Rack 2 slot
49
CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades Section 1-6
This function can be used, for example to allocate fixed addresses to Input
Units and Output Units. (With CQM1H PLCs, input bits are from IR 000 to
IR 015 and output bits are from IR 100 to IR 115. First slot addresses can be
set when replacing CQM1H PLCs with CS/CJ-series PLCs to reduce conver-
sion work.)
Note The first address settings for Racks and slots can be uploaded/downloaded
from/to the CPU Unit.
Double-click
Select Option - Rack/Slot Start Addresses.
100
0
102
1
105
5
012
01 2
01 2
34
Slot No.
Slot No. 00
Slot No. 02
Slot No. 00
Slot No. 02
Slot No. 00
Slot No. 01
CIO 0005
CIO 0105
CIO 0001
CIO 0102
CIO 0000
CIO 0100
CX-Programmer
Ver. 3.2 or higher
Rack No.
CPU Rack
CPU Rack
Rack 1
Rack 1
Rack 2
Rack 2
Example:
CPU Rack slot
Rack 1 slot
Rack 2 slot
Up to 8 settings
can be made.
First slot addresses
50
CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades Section 1-6
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or Later and CX-Programmer Ver. 4.0 or Higher
Summary When using CX-Programmer Ver.4.0 or higher with CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later,
the first address can be set for up to 64 slots.
Note This function is supported only for CS1-H, CJ1-H, and CJ1M CPU Units
Ver. 2.0 or later. It is not supported for CS1D CPU Units for Duplex-CPU Sys-
tems.
1-6-8 Automatic Transfers at Power ON without a Parameter File
Previous CPU Units (Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units)
Previously with the CS/CJ-series CPU Units, both the program file for auto-
matic transfer at power ON (AUTOEXEC.OBJ) and the parameter file for auto-
matic transfer at power ON (AUTOEXEC.STD) had to be stored on the
Memory Card to enable automatic transfers to the CPU Unit at power ON.
Also, the parameter file for automatic transfer at power ON (AUTOEXEC.STD)
could not be created without the actual PLC (regardless of whether it was
made in online operations from the CX-Programmer or a Programming Con-
sole or by using the easy backup operation).
Even if a program file (.OBJ) was created offline without the actual PLC and
then sent to a remote PLC as an email attachment, the program file could not
be transferred to the CPU Unit without a Programming Device.
100
0
102
1
105
5
50
012
01 2
01 2
34
01 2
Slot No.
Slot No. 00
Slot No. 02
Slot No. 00
Slot No. 02
Slot No. 00
Slot No. 01
Slot No. 01
Example:
CIO 0005
CIO 0105
CIO 0001
CIO 0102
CIO 0000
CIO 0100
CIO 0050
CIO 0155
CX-Programmer
Ver. 4.0 or higher
Rack No.
CPU Rack
CPU Rack
Rack 1
Rack 1
Rack 2
Rack 2
Rack 7
CPU Rack slot
Rack 1 slot
Rack 2 slot
Up to 64 settings
can be made.
Rack 7 slot
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0
or higher
First slot addresses
51
CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades Section 1-6
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or Later
Summary With CS/CJ-series CPU Unit Ver. 2.0, the user program can be automatically
transferred to the CPU Unit at power ON without a parameter file (.STD) if the
name of the program file (.OBJ) is changed to REPLACE.OBJ on the CX-Pro-
grammer and the file is stored on a Memory Card. If data files are included
with the program file using this function, the following data file names are
used: REPLACE.IOM, REPLCDM.IOM, REPLCE@.IOM.
Note 1. If the Memory Card contains a REPLACE.OBJ file, any parameter file on
the Memory Card will not be transferred.
2. If the Memory Card contains both a REPLACE.OBJ file and a AUTOEX-
EC.OBJ file, neither will be transferred.
Note With CX-Programmer Ver. 3.0 or higher, a program file (.OBJ) can be created
offline and saved on a computer storage media. Select Transfer - To File
from the PLC Menu. This enable creating a program file offline without a PLC
so that the name can be changed to enable sending the program file.
1-6-9 Operation Start/End Times
Previous CPU Units (Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units)
The time that operation started and the time operation ended were not stored
in the CPU Unit.
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or Later
The times that operation started and ended are automatically stored in the
Auxiliary Area.
Personal
computer
Mail
Mail
Internet
Program file (.OBJ) sent
as mail attachment.
CPU Unit
Local site (no Programming Device)
Program cannot be transferred
(see note).
Program file
(AUTOEXEC.OBJ)
Note: Transfer is not possible because
there is no parameter file
(AUTOEXEC.STD).
Personal
computer
Mail
Mail
Internet
Program file created on CX-
Programmer (see note), file name
changed to REPLACE.OJB, and
file sent as mail attachment.
CPU Unit
Remote site (no Programming Device)
Program can be transferred
(see note).
REPLACE.OBJ
Note: Transfer is possible even
without a parameter file
(AUTOEXEC.STD).
52
CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades Section 1-6
• The time that operation started as a result of changing the operating
mode to RUN or MONITOR mode is stored in A515 to A517 of the Auxil-
iary Area. The year, month, day, hour, minutes, and seconds are stored.
• The time that operation stopped as a result of changing the operating
mode to PROGRAM mode or due to a fatal error is stored in A518 to
A520 of the Auxiliary Area. The year, month, day, hour, minutes, and sec-
onds are stored.
This information simplifies managing PLC System operating times.
1-6-10 Automatic Detection of I/O Allocation Method for Automatic
Transfer at Power ON
Previous CPU Units (Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units)
Previously with the CJ-series CPU Units, when a parameter file for automatic
transfer at power ON (AUTOEXEC.STD) was recorded in a Memory Card, the
user-set I/O allocation method was automatically used when an automatic
transfer at power ON was executed from the Memory Card, and I/O was allo-
cated according to the parameter file for automatic transfer at power ON. As a
result, the following case occurred:
1,2,3... 1. In an office where Units were not mounted, the CX-Programmer was con-
nected online to just the CPU Unit, and files for automatic transfer at power
ON were created (without creating/transferring I/O tables).
2. These files for automatic transfer at power ON were then saved in the
Memory Card, which was then taken to the remote site where automatic
transfer at power ON was executed.
3. When automatic transfer at power ON was executed, I/O tables were cre-
ated based on the parameter file for automatic transfer at power ON saved
in the Memory Card (i.e., the file created when Units were not mounted to
the PLC). As a result, the registered I/O tables did not match the Units ac-
tually mounted in the CPU Unit, causing an I/O setting error.
CX-Programmer
Memory Card
Remote site
Office
I/O not allocated according to settings in mounted Units
User-set I/O allocation
Units are mounted
CJ-series CPU Unit
Program file for automatic
transfer at power ON
(AUTOEXEC.OBJ)
Parameter file for automatic
transfer at power ON
(AUTOEXEC.STD)
Mail
Automatic I/O allocation at startup
Units not mounted.
Create program files for automatic
transfer at power ON
(AUTOEXEC.OBJ) and parameter
files for automatic transfer at
power ON (AUTOEXEC.STD). Program file for automatic
transfer at power ON
(AUTOEXEC.OBJ)
Parameter file for automatic
transfer at power ON
(AUTOEXEC.STD)
Note: The parameter file for automatic transfer
at power ON (AUTOEXEC.STD) is
present, and this file is used to allocated
I/O instead of the I/O allocations in the
mounted Units.
Mis-match
(See note.)
53
CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Upgrades Section 1-6
CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or Later
Overview
With CJ-series CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later, the I/O allocation method that was
used (automatic I/O allocation at startup or user-set I/O allocation) is recorded
in the parameter file for automatic transfers at power ON (AUTOEXEC.STD),
and when automatic transfer at power ON is executed from the Memory Card,
the recorded method is automatically detected and used to create the I/O
tables.
• When the parameter file for automatic transfer at power ON is created
using automatic I/O allocation at startup, the I/O tables in the parameter
file for automatic transfer at power ON in the Memory Card are disabled,
and I/O is allocated using automatic I/O allocation at startup from the
actual mounted Units.
• When the parameter file for automatic transfer at power ON is created
using user-set I/O allocation, the I/O tables in the parameter file for auto-
matic transfer at power ON in the Memory Card is enabled, and the regis-
tered I/O tables are transferred to the CPU Unit.
As a result, in the above diagram for example, files for automatic transfer at
power ON are created in an office where the Units are not mounted. The files
are then saved in a Memory Card, which is taken and installed in a CJ-series
CPU Unit at the remote site, where automatic transfer at power ON is exe-
cuted and I/O is allocated according to the I/O allocations in the mounted Unit
using the method recorded in the Memory Card.
1-6-11 New Application Instructions
The following instructions have been added. Refer to the Programming Man-
ual (W340) for details.
• Multiple Interlock Instructions:
MULTI-INTERLOCK DIFFERENTIATION HOLD (MILH(517)), MULTI-
INTERLOCK DIFFERENTIATION RELEASE (MILR(518)), and MULTI-
INTERLOCK CLEAR (MILC(519))
• TIME-PROPORTIONAL OUTPUT (TPO(685))
• GRAY CODE CONVERSION (GRY(474))
• COUNTER FREQUENCY CONVERT (PRV2(883)) (CJ1M CPU Unit only)
CX-Programmer
Create program files for automatic transfer
at power ON (AUTOEXEC.OBJ) and
parameter files for automatic transfer
at power ON (AUTOEXEC.STD).
Office Remote site
Units mounted.
I/O is allocated according to settings in mounted Units.
Program file for automatic
transfer at power ON
(AUTOEXEC.OBJ)
Parameter file for automatic
transfer at power ON
(AUTOEXEC.STD)
Units not mounted.
Parameter file for automatic
transfer at power ON
(AUTOEXEC.STD)
Program file for automatic
transfer at power ON
(AUTOEXEC.OBJ)
Memory Card
CJ1-H, CJ1M CPU Unit
with Unit Ver. 2.0 or higher.
Note: The parameter file for automatic transfer at power ON
(AUTOEXEC.STD) is present, but I/O is allocated by
the I/O allocations in the mounted Units.
Parameter file for automatic transfer at power ON
(AUTOEXEC.STD)
Automatic I/O
allocation at
startup
CJ1-H, CJ1M CPU Unit with Unit Ver. 2.0 or higher.
Match
(See note.)
Automatic I/O allocation at startup
54
CJ1-H-R, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CJ1 CPU Unit Comparison Section 1-7
• Combination Instructions:
TEN KEY INPUT (TKY(211)), HEXADECIMAL KEY INPUT (HKY(212)),
DIGITAL SWITCH INPUT (DSW(213)), MATRIX INPUT (MTR(210)), and
7-SEGMENT DISPLAY OUTPUT (7SEG(214))
• Time Comparison Instructions: =DT, <>DT, <DT, <=DT, >DT, >=DT
• Explicit Message Instructions:
EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND (EXPLT(720)), EXPLICIT GET ATTRIBUTE
(EGATR(721)), EXPLICIT SET ATTRIBUTE (ESATR(722)), EXPLICIT
WORD READ (ECHRD(723)), and EXPLICIT WORD WRITE
(ECHWR(724))
• EXPANDED BLOCK COMPARE (BCMP2(502)) (This instruction, previ-
ously supported by only the CJ1M PLCs, is now supported by the CS1-H
and CJ1-H.)
• INTELLIGENT I/O READ (IORD(222)) and INTELLIGENT I/O WRITE
(IOWR(223)) (These instructions could previously be used only for Spe-
cial I/O Units, but they can now be used to read and write data for CPU
Bus Units.)
1-7 CJ1-H-R, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CJ1 CPU Unit Comparison
Item CJ1-H-R CPU
Unit
CJ1-H CPU Unit CJ1M CPU Unit CJ1 CPU Unit
CJ1H-CPU6@H-R CJ1H-CPU6@H CJ1G-CPU4@H CJ1M-CPU2@/1@CJ1G-CPU4@
Instruc-
tion exe-
cutions
times
Basic
instructions
LD 0.016 µs 0.02 µs 0.04 µs 0.10 µs 0.08 µs
OUT 0.016 µs 0.02 µs 0.04 µs 0.35 µs 0.21 µs
Special
instructions
Examples
XFER 240.1 µs
(for 1,000 words)
300.1 µs
(for 1,000 words)
380.1 µs
(for 1,000 words)
650.2 µs
(for 1,000 words)
633.5 µs
(for 1,000 words)
BSET 140.2 µs
(for 1,000 words)
200.1 µs
(for 1,000 words)
220.1 µs
(for 1,000 words)
400.2 µs
(for 1,000 words)
278.3 µs
(for 1,000 words)
BCD
arithmetic
7.6 µs min. 8.2 µs min. 8.4 µs min. •CPU11/21
21.5 µs min.
•Other CPU Units
18.9 µs min.
14.0 µs min.
Binary
arithmetic
0.18 µs min. 0.18 µs min. 0.20 µs min. 0.30 µs min. 0.37 µs min.
Floating-
point math
0.24 µs min. 8.0 µs min. 9.2 µs min. •CPU11/21
15.7 µs min.
•Other CPU Units
13.3 µs min.
10.2 µs min.
SBS/RET 1.33 µs 2.12 µs 3.56 µs 3.84 µs 37.6 µs
Overhead time Normal mode:
0.13 ms
Parallel mode:
0.28 ms
Normal mode:
0.3 ms
Parallel mode:
0.3 ms
0.5 ms •CPU11/21
0.7 ms
•Other CPU Units
0.5 ms
0.5 ms
55
CJ1-H-R, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CJ1 CPU Unit Comparison Section 1-7
Execution
timing
CPU execution process-
ing modes
Any of the following four modes:
1. Normal (instructions and peripheral servicing per-
formed consecutively)
2. Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode (instruction execu-
tion interrupted to service peripherals at a specific
cycle and time; consecutive refreshing also per-
formed)
3. Parallel Processing Mode with Synchronous Memory
Access (instruction executed and peripheral services
in parallel while synchronizing access to I/O memory)
4. Parallel Processing Mode with Asynchronous Memory
Access (instruction executed and peripheral services
in parallel without synchronizing access to I/O mem-
ory)
Either of following two modes:
1. Either of following two modes: Normal
(instructions and peripheral servicing
performed consecutively)
2. Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode
(instruction execution interrupted to
service peripherals at a specific cycle
and time; consecutive refreshing also
performed)
CPU Bus
Unit spe-
cial
refreshing
Data links During I/O refresh period or via special CPU BUS UNIT I/O REFRESH instruc-
tion (DLNK(226))
During I/O
refresh period
DeviceNet
remote I/O
Protocol
macro
send/
receive
data
Refreshing of CIO and
DM Areas words allo-
cated to CPU Bus Unit
Tasks Cyclic execution of
interrupt tasks via
TKON instruction
(called “extra cyclic
tasks”)
Supported.
(Up to 256 extra cyclic tasks, increasing the total number of cyclic tasks to 288
max.)
Not supported.
(No extra cyclic
tasks; 32 cyclic
tasks max.)
Independent/shared
specifications for index
and data registers
Supported.
The time to switch between tasks can be reduced if shared registers are used.
Not supported.
(Only indepen-
dent registers for
each task.)
Initialization when tasks
are started
Supported.
Task Startup Flags supported.
Only Task Flag
for first execu-
tion.
Starting subroutines
from multiple tasks
Global subroutines can be defined that can be called from more than one task. Not supported.
Scheduled interrupt
interval for scheduled
interrupt tasks
0.2 ms to 999.9 ms
(in increments of
0.1 ms), 1 ms to
9,999 ms (in incre-
ments of 1 ms), or
10 ms to 99,990
ms (in increments
of 10 ms)
1 ms to 9,999 ms (in increments of
1 ms) or 10 ms to 99,990 ms (in
increments of 10 ms)
0.5 ms to 999.9 ms
(in increments of
0.1 ms), 1 ms to
9,999 ms (in incre-
ments of 1 ms), or
10 ms to 99,990 ms
(in increments of
10 ms)
1 ms to 9,999 ms
(in increments of
1 ms) or 10 ms
to 99,990 ms (in
increments of
10 ms)
Interrupt
task execu-
tion timing
during
instruction
execution
For
instruc-
tions other
than the
following
ones
Any instruction that is being executed is interrupted when interrupt task conditions are met to start
the interrupt task. If the cyclic task (including extra cyclic tasks) accesses the same data area
words as the instruction that was interrupted, data may not be concurrent. To ensure data concur-
rency, the DI and EI instructions must be used to disable and enable interrupts during a specific
part of the program.
For BIT
COUNTE
R (BCNT)
or BLOCK
TRANS-
FER
(XFER)
instruc-
tions
Interrupt tasks are started only after execution of the instruction has been com-
pleted, ensuring data concurrency even when the same data area words are
accessed from the instruction and the interrupt task.
Debug-
ging
Backup to Memory
Cards (simple backup
function)
In addition to the data listed at the right, data from Units mounted to the CPU
Rack or Expansion Racks can also be backed up to the Memory Card (via push-
button on front panel). This is very effective when replacing Units. Backup data
includes scan lists for DeviceNet Units, protocol macros for Serial Communica-
tions Units, etc.
Only the user
program, param-
eters, and I/O
memory in the
CPU Unit.
Automatic user program
and parameter area
backup to flash memory
Supported (enabling battery-free operation without a Memory Card)
The user program and parameter area data are automatically backed up the
flash memory whenever they are transferred to the CPU Unit from the CX-Pro-
grammer, file memory, etc.
Not supported.
Item CJ1-H-R CPU
Unit
CJ1-H CPU Unit CJ1M CPU Unit CJ1 CPU Unit
CJ1H-CPU6@H-R CJ1H-CPU6@H CJ1G-CPU4@H CJ1M-CPU2@/1@CJ1G-CPU4@
56
CJ1-H-R, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CJ1 CPU Unit Comparison Section 1-7
I/O tables Detailed information on
I/O table creation errors
Detailed I/O table error information is stored in A261 whenever the I/O tables
cannot be created for any reason.
Not supported.
Displaying presence of
first rack word setting
on Programming Con-
sole
It’s possible to confirm if the first rack word has been specified for the system on
the Programming Console display.
The first rack word is specified from the CX-Programmer, making it previously
impossible to confirm the setting from the Programming Console.
Not supported.
Built-in I/O Not supported. CJ1M-CPU2@Not supported.
Serial PLC Link Not supported. Supported. Not supported.
Scheduled interrupts set in incre-
ments of 0.1 ms
Supported. Not supported. Supported. Not supported.
Battery CPM2A-BAT01 CJ1W-BAT01 CPM2A-BAT01
Opera-
tion when
Unit
doesn’t
complete
startup
process
CPU Unit startup Starting or not starting (standby) the CPU Unit in MONITOR or RUN mode even
if a Unit has not completed startup processing can be specified in the PLC
Setup.
CPU Unit
standby (fixed)
Sequence
instruc-
tions
Differentiated LD NOT,
AND NOT, and OR NOT
instructions
Supported. Not supported.
(The same
results can be
achieved by
combining differ-
entiated LD,
AND, and OR
instructions with
the NOT instruc-
tion.)
OUTB, SETB, and
RSTB instructions to
manipulate individual
bits in DM and EM Area
words
Supported. Not supported.
Timer/
counter
instruc-
tions
TIMU (0.1-ms, BCD),
TIMUX (0.1-ms, binary),
TMUH (0.01-ms, BCD),
TMUHX (0.01-ms,
binary)
Supported.
Either BCD or
binary can be
selected (with CX-
Programmer Ver.
7.1 or higher).
Not supported.
Format for updating
PVs for TIM, TIMH,
TMHH, TTIM, TIML,
MTIM, CNT, CNTR,
CNR, TIMW, TMHW,
CNTW instructions
Supported.
Either BCD or binary can be selected (with CX-Programmer Ver. 3.0 or higher).
BCD only
Special
math
instruc-
tions
32-bit signed data line
coordinates and X axis
starting point specifica-
tion for APR instruction
Supported. Not supported.
Floating-
point deci-
mal
instruc-
tions
High-speed trigonomet-
ric functions: SINQ,
COSQ, and TANQ
instructions
Supported (with
CX-Programmer
Ver. 7.1 or higher).
Not supported.
Single-precision calcu-
lations and conversions
Supported (enabling standard deviation calculations). Not supported.
Conversions between
single-precision float-
ing point and ASCII
Supported.
Floating point can be converted to ASCII for display on PTs.
ASCII text strings from measurement devices can be converted to floating-point
decimal for use in calculations.
Not supported.
Double-precision calcu-
lations and conversions
Supported (enabling high-precision positioning). Not supported.
Text
string,
table
data, and
data shift
instruc-
tions
Text string and table
data processing instruc-
tion execution
Data processing can be performed normally or in the background (specified for
each instruction).
(Using time slices to process instruction over several cycles reduces the effect
of these instructions on the cycle time.).
Normal process-
ing only.
Stack insertions/dele-
tions/replacements and
stack counts with table
processing instructions
Supported.
Effective for tracking workpieces on conveyor lines.
Not supported.
Item CJ1-H-R CPU
Unit
CJ1-H CPU Unit CJ1M CPU Unit CJ1 CPU Unit
CJ1H-CPU6@H-R CJ1H-CPU6@H CJ1G-CPU4@H CJ1M-CPU2@/1@CJ1G-CPU4@
57
CJ1-H-R, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CJ1 CPU Unit Comparison Section 1-7
Data con-
trol
instruc-
tions
PID with autotuning Supported (eliminating the need to adjust PID constants). Not supported.
Subrou-
tine
instruc-
tions
Global subroutines Supported (GSBS, GSBN, and GRET instructions)
Enables easier structuring of subroutines.
Not supported.
Failure
diagnosis
instruc-
tions
Error log storage for
FAL
Supported.
FAL can be executed without placing an entry in the error log. (Only system FAL
errors will be placed in the error log.)
Not supported.
Error simulation with
FAL/FALS
Supported.
Fatal and nonfatal errors can be simulated in the system to aid in debugging.
Not supported.
Data com-
parison
instruc-
tions
AREA RANGE COM-
PARE (ZCP) and DOU-
BLE RANGE
COMPARE (ZCPL)
Supported. Not supported.
Index reg-
ister real I/
O address
conver-
sion for
CVM1/CV
Program and real I/O
memory address com-
patibility with CVM1/CV-
series PLCs
CVM1/CV-series real I/O memory addresses can be converted to CJ-series
addresses and placed in index registers or CJ-series real I/O memory
addresses in index registers can be converted to CVM1/CV-series addresses.
Not supported.
Condition
Flag sav-
ing and
loading
Compatibility with
CVM1/CV-series PLCs
Condition Flag status can be saved or loading using the SAVE CONDITION
FLAGS (CCS) and LOAD CONDITION FLAGS (CCL) instructions, enabling
applications where Condition Flag status must be passed between different pro-
gram locations, tasks, or cycles.
Not supported.
Disabling power interruptions in pro-
gram sections
Supported.
Instructions between DI and EI are executed without performing power OFF pro-
cessing even if a power interruption has been detected and confirmed.
Not supported.
Condition Flag operation The statuses of the Equals, Negative, and Error Flags are maintained for execu-
tion of the following instructions.
TIM, TIMH, TMHH, CNT, IL, ILC, JMP0, JME0, XCHG, XCGL, MOVR, symbol
comparison instructions, CMP, CMPL, CPS, CPSL, TST, TSTN, STC, and CLC.
The Equals,
Negative, and
Error Flags are
turned OFF after
executing the fol-
lowing instruc-
tions.
TIM, TIMH,
TMHH, CNT, IL,
ILC, JMP0,
JME0, XCHG,
XCGL, MOVR,
symbol compari-
son instructions,
CMP, CMPL,
CPS, CPSL,
TST, and TSTN.
Item CJ1-H-R CPU
Unit
CJ1-H CPU Unit CJ1M CPU Unit CJ1 CPU Unit
CJ1H-CPU6@H-R CJ1H-CPU6@H CJ1G-CPU4@H CJ1M-CPU2@/1@CJ1G-CPU4@
58
Function Tables Section 1-8
1-8 Function Tables
The following tables list functions for the CJ-series CPU Units (including the
CJ1, CJ1M, and CJ1-H CPU Units).
1-8-1 Functions Arranged by Purpose
Purpose Function Manual Reference
Basic Opera-
tion and Sys-
tem Design
Studying system configura-
tion
--- Operation
Manual
SECTION 2
Specifica-
tions and
System
Configura-
tion
Studying I/O allocations --- SECTION 8
I/O Alloca-
tions
Installation size --- 5-2-3
Assembled
Appear-
ance and
Dimensions
Installation methods --- 5-2 Installa-
tion
Setting DIP switches --- 3-1-2 Com-
ponents
Setting the PLC Setup --- 7-1 PLC
Setup
Using Auxiliary Bits --- Appendix B
CJ1M CPU
Unit Built-in
I/O Specifi-
cations and
9-11 Auxil-
iary Area
Studying the cycle time --- Parallel Pro-
cessing
Mode (CJ-H
CPU Units
Only)
Troubleshooting --- 11-2-5 Error
Messages
Structured
Programming
Standardizing programs as
modules.
Program with tasks to divide the pro-
gram, use function blocks (FBs), spec-
ify symbols, and define local and
global symbols.
Use ST (Structured Text) language.
Programming
Manual
(W394)
4-1 Tasks
Developing a program with
several programmers work-
ing in parallel.
Making the program easier
to understand.
Creating step programs. Use the step instructions. Instructions
Reference
Manual
(W340)
Step Pro-
gramming
Instructions
Using BASIC-like mne-
monic instructions to pro-
gram processes that are
difficult to enter in the lad-
der diagram format (such
as conditional branches
and loops).
Use the block programming instruc-
tions.
Use ST (Structured Text) language.
Block Pro-
gramming
Instructions
59
Function Tables Section 1-8
Simplifying
the Program
Creating looped program
sections.
Use FOR(512) and NEXT(513) or
JMP(004) and JME(005).
Instructions
Reference
Manual
(W340)
Sequence
Control
Instructions
Indirectly addressing DM
words.
All words in the DM and EM Areas can
be indirectly addressed.
Programming
Manual
(W394)
6-2 Index
Registers
Simplifying the program by
switching to PLC memory
address specification.
Use Index Registers as pointers to
indirectly address data area
addresses.
The Index Registers are very useful in
combination with loops, increment
instructions, and table data process-
ing instructions. The auto-increment,
auto-decrement, and offset functions
are also supported.
Consolidating instruction
blocks with the same pat-
tern but different addresses
into a single instruction
block.
Use function blocks (FBs). CX-Programmer Operation
Manual Function Blocks
(W438)
Use MCRO(099). Instructions
Reference
Manual
(W340)
MCRO(099)
in the Sub-
routine
Instructions
Purpose Function Manual Reference
60
Function Tables Section 1-8
Managing the
Cycle Time
Reducing the cycle time. • Use tasks to put parts of the pro-
gram that don’t need to be executed
into “standby” status.
• Use JMP(004) and JME(005) to
jump parts of the task that don’t
need to be executed.
• Convert parts of the task to subrou-
tines if they are executed only under
particular conditions.
• Disable a Unit’s Special I/O Unit
refreshing in the PLC Setup if it isn’t
necessary to exchange data with
that Special I/O Unit every cycle.
• Setting index and data registers to
be shared by all tasks when these
registers are not being used.
Programming
Manual
(W394)
6-1 Cycle
Time/High-
speed Pro-
cessing
Setting a fixed (minimum)
cycle time.
• Variations in I/O
response times can be
eliminated by suppress-
ing processing variations.
Set a minimum cycle time in the PLC
Setup.
Setting a maximum cycle
time.
(Generating an error for a
cycle time exceeding the
maximum.)
Set a maximum cycle time (watch
cycle time) in the PLC Setup. If the
cycle time exceeds this value, the
Cycle Time Too Long Flag (A40108)
will be turned ON and PLC operation
will be stopped.
Operation
Manual
7-1 PLC
Setup
Reducing the I/O response
time for particular I/O
points.
Use immediate refreshing or
IORF(097).
Programming
Manual
(W394)
6-1 Cycle
Time/High-
speed Pro-
cessing
Finding I/O refresh times
for individual Units
--- Operation
Manual
Parallel
Processing
Mode (CJ-H
CPU Units
Only)
Studying the I/O response
time
--- 10-4-6 I/O
Response
Time
Finding the increase in the
cycle time for online editing
--- 10-4-5
Online Edit-
ing Cycle
Time Exten-
sion
Purpose Function Manual Reference
61
Function Tables Section 1-8
Using Inter-
rupt Tasks
Monitoring operating sta-
tus at regular intervals.
• Monitoring operating sta-
tus at regular intervals.
Use a scheduled interrupt task. Programming
Manual
(W394)
4-3 Inter-
rupt Tasks
Issuing an interrupt to the
CPU when data is received
through serial communica-
tions.
Use a Serial Communications Units
and external interrupt task.
Performing interrupt pro-
cessing when an input
goes ON.
• Executing processing
immediately with an
input.
Use an I/O interrupt task.
Executing an emergency
interrupt program when the
power supply fails.
Use a power OFF interrupt task.
Enable the power OFF interrupt task
in the PLC Setup.
Studying the interrupt
response time
--- Operation
Manual
10-4-7 Inter-
rupt
Response
Times
Knowing the priority of
interrupt tasks
--- Programming
Manual
(W394)
4-3-2 Inter-
rupt Task
Priority
Data Pro-
cessing
Operating a FIFO or LIFO
stack.
Use the stack instructions (FIFO(633)
and LIFO(634)).
Instructions
Reference
Manual
(W340)
Table
Processing
Instructions
Performing basic opera-
tions on tables made up of
1-word records.
Use range instructions such as
MAX(182), MIN(183), and
SRCH(181).
Performing complex opera-
tions on tables made up of
1-word records.
Use Index Registers as pointers in
special instructions.
Performing operations on
tables made up of records
longer than 1 word.
(For example, the tempera-
ture, pressure, and other
manufacturing settings for
different models of a prod-
uct could be stored in sepa-
rate records.)
Use Index Registers and the record-
table instructions.
Programming
Manual
(W394)
6-2 Index
Registers
System
Configura-
tion and
Serial Com-
munications
Monitoring several differ-
ent kinds of devices
through the RS-232C port.
Multiple serial ports can be installed
with Serial Communications Units
(protocol macros).
Operation
Manual
2-5
Expanded
System
Configura-
tion
Changing protocol during
operation (from a modem
connection to host link, for
example).
Use STUP(237), the CHANGE
SERIAL PORT SETUP instruction.
Instructions
Reference
Manual
(W340)
Serial Com-
munica-
tions
Instructions
Purpose Function Manual Reference
62
Function Tables Section 1-8
Connecting
Program-
ming Devices
Connecting a Programming
Console.
Connect to the peripheral port with pin
4 of the CPU Unit’s DIP switch OFF.
Operation
Manual
3-3 Pro-
gramming
Devices
Connecting a Programming
Device (e.g., the CX-Pro-
grammer).
Connect to the peripheral port with pin
4 of the CPU Unit’s DIP switch OFF or
with pin 4 ON and the communica-
tions mode set to “peripheral bus”
under Peripheral Port settings in the
PLC Setup.
Connect to the RS-232C port with pin
5 of the CPU Unit’s DIP switch ON or
with pin 5 OFF and the communica-
tions mode set to “peripheral bus”
under RS-232C Port settings in the
PLC Setup.
Connecting a host com-
puter.
Connect to the RS-232C port or
peripheral port. (Set the communica-
tions mode to “host link” in the PLC
Setup.)
2-5
Expanded
System
Configura-
tion
Connecting a PT. Connect to the RS-232C port or
peripheral port. (Set the communica-
tions mode to “NT Link” in the PLC
Setup.)
Set the PT communications settings
for a 1:N NT Link.
Connecting a standard
serial device to the CPU
Unit (no-protocol mode).
Connect to the RS-232C port.
(Set the communications mode to “no-
protocol” in the PLC Setup.)
Controlling
Outputs
Turning OFF all outputs on
basic Output Units and
High-density Output Units
(a type of Special I/O Unit).
Turn ON the Output OFF Bit
(A50015).
Programming
Manual
(W394)
6-4-2 Load
OFF Func-
tions
Maintaining the status of all
outputs on Output Units
when PLC operation stops
(hot start).
Turn ON the IOM Hold BIt (A50012). 6-4-1 Hot
Start/Hot
Stop Func-
tions
Controlling
I/O Memory
Maintaining the previous
contents of all I/O Memory
at the start of PLC opera-
tion (hot start).
Turn ON the IOM Hold BIt (A50012). Programming
Manual
(W394)
6-4-1 Hot
Start/Hot
Stop Func-
tions
Maintaining the previous
contents of all I/O Memory
when the PLC is turned on.
Turn ON the IOM Hold BIt (A50012)
and set the PLC Setup to maintain the
status of the IOM Hold Bit at start-up.
(IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup)
Purpose Function Manual Reference
63
Function Tables Section 1-8
File Memory Automatically transferring
the program, I/O Memory,
and PLC Setup from the
Memory Card when the
PLC is turned on.
• Easily replacing the pro-
gram onsite.
• Operating without a bat-
tery.
Enable the “automatic transfer at
start-up” function by turning ON pin 2
of the CPU Unit’s DIP switch and cre-
ate an AUTOEXEC file.
Programming
Manual
(W394)
SECTION 5
File Memory
Functions
Creating a library of pro-
grams for different pro-
gram arrangements.
Memory Card functions (Program
Files)
Creating a library of param-
eter settings for various
PLC Racks and models.
Memory Card functions (Parameter
Files)
Creating a library of data
files with settings for vari-
ous PLC Racks and CPU
Bus Units.
Memory Card functions (Data Files)
Storing I/O Comment data
within the Memory Card.
Memory Card functions
(Symbol Table Files)
Storing operating data
(trend and quality data)
within the CPU Unit during
program execution.
EM File Memory Functions and the
FREAD(700)/FWRIT(701) instructions
Replacing the program
without stopping operation.
Memory Card functions (Program
Replacement during PLC Operation)
Reading and writing I/O
memory data with a
spreadsheet.
Read/write data files using instruc-
tions in CSV or text format. Instructions
Reference
Manual
(W340)
3-26 File
Memory
Instructions
Creating data that can be
read with a text editor.
Use the WRITE TEXT FILE instruction
(TWRIT(704)).
Instructions
Reference
Manual
(W340)
3-26 File
Memory
Instructions
Text string
processing
Performing string process-
ing at the PLC which was
performed at the host com-
puter previously and reduc-
ing the program load at the
host computer (operations
such as read, insert,
search, replace, and
exchange).
• Easily replacing the program onsite.
• Operating without a battery.
Combine the Host Link function with
the text string processing instructions.
Instructions
Reference
Manual
(W340)
Text String
Processing
Instructions
Performing string process-
ing operations such as
rearranging text strings.
Replacing the program without stop-
ping operation.
Use the string comparison instructions
and index registers.
Receiving data from exter-
nal devices (such as bar
code readers) through
serial communications,
storing the data in DM, and
reading just the required
string when it is needed.
Use the WRITE TEXT FILE instruction
(TWRIT(704)).
Combine the protocol macro function
with the text string processing instruc-
tions.
Purpose Function Manual Reference
64
Function Tables Section 1-8
Maintenance
and Debug-
ging
Changing the program
while it is being executed.
Use the online editing function from a
Programming Device.
(Several instruction blocks can be
changed with CX-Programmer.)
Programming
Manual
(W394)
7-2-3 Online
Editing
Sampling I/O Memory data.
• Periodic sampling
• Sampling once each
cycle
• Sampling at specified
times
Data trace at regular intervals
Data trace at the end of each cycle
Data trace each time that TRSM(045)
is executed
7-2-4 Data
Tr a c i n g
Confirming there are no
errors in instruction execu-
tion.
Set the PLC Setup to specify the
desired operating mode at start-up.
(Startup Mode)
6-4 Startup
Settings and
Mainte-
nance
Recording the time that
power was turned on, the
last time that power was
interrupted, the number of
power interruptions, and
the total PLC ON time.
Read the Auxiliary Area words con-
taining power supply information.
Startup Time: A510 and A511
Power Interruption Time: A512 and
A513
Number of Power Interruptions: A514
6-4-5 Clock
Functions
Replacing the program
without stopping operation.
Reading the time/date
when the user program
was changed.
Reading the time/date
when the parameter area
was changed.
Set the PLC Setup so that instruction
errors are treated as fatal errors.
(Instruction Error Operation)
2-3-3
Checking
Programs
Programming/monitoring
the PLC remotely.
• Programming or monitor-
ing a PLC on the network
through Host Link.
• Programming or monitor-
ing a PLC through
modems.
Host Link → Network Gateway func-
tion
Host Link through modems
Operation
Manual
2-5
Expanded
System
Configura-
tion
Programming/monitoring
PLCs in other networks
Communicate with PLCs up to two
network levels away through Control-
ler Link or Ethernet.
Error Pro-
cessing and
Troubleshoot-
ing
Generating a non-fatal or
fatal error for user-defined
conditions.
• Non-fatal errors (PLC
operation continues.)
• Fatal errors (PLC opera-
tion stops.)
• Not recording user-
defined alarms and errors
in the error log.
FAILURE ALARM: FAL(006)
SEVERE FAILURE ALARM:
FALS(007)
Set the PLC Setup so that user-
defined FAL errors are not recorded in
the error log.
Programming
Manual
(W394)
6-5 Diag-
nostic and
Debugging
Functions
Analyzing time and logic in
execution of an instruction
block.
FAILURE POINT DETECTION:
FPD(269)
Recording the time/date of
errors and error details.
Reading recorded error
details.
Use the error log function. Up to 20
error records can be stored.
Purpose Function Manual Reference
65
Function Tables Section 1-8
1-8-2 Communications Functions (Serial/Network)
Other Func-
tions
Allocating words in the I/O
Area by specifying the first
word allocated to a Rack.
Set the first word allocated to a Rack
by registering the I/O table from the
CX-Programmer. (Words must be allo-
cated to Racks in the order that the
Racks are connected.)
Programming
Manual
(W394)
6-7 Other
Functions
Allocating words in the I/O
Area freely by specifying
the word allocated to a slot.
Set the first word allocated to a slot by
registering the I/O tables from the CX-
Programmer.
Operation
Manual
8-5 Allocat-
ing First
Words to
Slots
Reducing input chattering
and the effects of noise.
Specify the input response times for
Basic I/O Units in the PLC Setup.
(Basic I/O Unit Input Response Time)
Programming
Manual
(W394)
6-7 Other
Functions
Purpose Protocol: Required Equipment Reference
Monitoring from
the Host Com-
puter
RS-232C or RS-422/485 Host Link:
Port in the CPU Unit or Serial Com-
munications Unit
2-5 Expanded
System Con-
figuration
Host Link communications from the
PLC
Enclose a FINS command with a
Host Link header and terminator and
issue it from the PLC as a network
communications instruction.
Network communications through
RS-232C or RS-422/485
Controller Link and Ethernet commu-
nications are possible through the
Host Link. (Enclose a FINS command
with a Host Link header and termina-
tor and issue it from the PLC as a net-
work communications instruction.)
Network Control system Controller Link:
Controller Link Unit
Information sys-
tem
Ethernet: Ethernet Unit
Connecting to a
Standard Serial
Device
Creating a simple protocol Protocol Macros:
Serial Communications Unit
High-speed data exchange
No protocol No protocol:
CPU Unit’s RS-232C port, or Protocol
Macro
Communicating
with a PT
Direct access NT Link:
Port in the CPU Unit or Serial Com-
munications Unit
Data Link
between PLCs
High capacity or free word allocation Controller Link: Controller Link Unit
Data Link between PLC and computer Controller Link:
Controller Link Unit
Message
communications
between PLCs
Normal or high capacity Controller Link: Controller Link Unit
Information system Ethernet: Ethernet Unit
Message
communications
between PLC
and computer
Control system Controller Link:
Controller Link Unit
Information system Ethernet: Ethernet Unit
Purpose Function Manual Reference
66
Function Tables Section 1-8
Remote I/O
between PLC
and Slaves
High-density I/O DeviceNet:
DeviceNet Master Unit and required
Slave Units
2-5-3 Com-
munications
Network Sys-
tem
Free word allocation
Multi-vendor capability
Analog I/O capability
Multi-level architecture
High-speed Remote I/O CompoBus/S:
CompoBus/S Master Unit and
required Slave Units
Purpose Protocol: Required Equipment Reference
67
CJ1M Functions Arranged by Purpose Section 1-9
1-9 CJ1M Functions Arranged by Purpose
In general, CJ1M CPU Units have basically the same functions as CJ1-H
CPU Units. The functions described in the following tables are unique to the
CJ1M.
1-9-1 High-speed Processing
Purpose I/O used Function Description
Execute a special process very
quickly when the correspond-
ing input goes ON (up differen-
tiation) or OFF (down
differentiation).
(For example, operating a cut-
ter when an interrupt input is
received from a Proximity Sen-
sor or Photoelectric Sensor.)
Built-in
Inputs
Interrupt inputs
0 to 3
Interrupt inputs
(Direct mode)
Executes an interrupt task at the rising or
falling edge of the corresponding built-in
input (CIO 2960 bits 00 to 03).
Use the MSKS(690) instruction to specify
up or down differentiation and unmask the
interrupt.
Count the input signals and
execute a special process very
quickly when the count
reaches the preset value.
(For example, stopping the
supply feed when a preset
number of workpieces have
passed through the system.)
Built-in
Inputs
Interrupt inputs
0 to 3
Interrupt inputs
(Counter mode)
Decrements the PV for each rising or fall-
ing edge signal at the built-in input
(CIO 2960 bits 00 to 03) and executes the
corresponding interrupt task when the
count reaches 0. (The counter can also be
set to increment up to a preset SV.)
Use the MSKS(690) instruction to refresh
the counter mode SV and unmask the
interrupt.
Execute a special process at a
preset count value.
(For example, cutting material
very precisely at a given
length.)
Built-in
Inputs
High-speed
counters 0 and
1
High-speed
counter inter-
rupt (Target
value compari-
son)
Executes an interrupt task when the high-
speed counter's PV matches a target
value in the registered table.
Use the CTBL(882) or INI(880) instruction
to start target value comparison.
Execute a special process
when the count is within a pre-
set range.
(For example, sorting material
very quickly when it is within a
given length range.)
Built-in
Inputs
High-speed
counters 0 and
1
High-speed
counter inter-
rupt (Range
comparison)
Executes an interrupt task when the high-
speed counter's PV is within a certain
range in the registered table.
Use the CTBL(882) or INI(880) instruction
to start range comparison.
Reliably read pulses with an
ON time shorter than the cycle
time, such as inputs from a
photomicrosensor.
Built-in
Inputs
Quick-response
inputs 0 to 3
Quick-response
inputs
Reads pulses with an ON time shorter
than the cycle time (as short as 30 µs) and
keeps the corresponding bit in I/O memory
ON for one cycle.
Use the PLC Setup to enable the quick-
response function for a built-in input
(CIO 2960 bits 0 to 3).
68
CJ1M Functions Arranged by Purpose Section 1-9
1-9-2 Controlling Pulse Outputs
Purpose I/O used Function Description
Perform simple posi-
tioning by outputting
pulses to a motor driver
that accepts pulse-train
inputs.
Built-in
Outputs
Pulse out-
puts 0 and
1
Pulse output functions
• Single-phase pulse
output without accel-
eration/deceleration
Controlled by SPED.
• Single-phase pulse
output with accelera-
tion/deceleration
(equal acceleration
and deceleration
rates for trapezoidal
form)
Controlled by ACC.
• Single-phase pulse
output with trapezoi-
dal for (Supports a
startup frequency
and different acceler-
ation /deceleration
rates.)
Controlled by
PLS2(887).
The built-in outputs (bits 00 to 03 of
CIO 2961) can be used as pulse outputs 0
and 1.
Target frequency: 0 Hz to 100 kHz
Duty ratio: 50%
The pulse output mode can be set to CW/
CCW pulse control or Pulse plus direction
control, but the same output mode must be
used for pulse outputs 0 and 1.
Note The PV for pulse output 0 is stored in
A276 and A277. The PV for pulse
output 1 is stored in A278 and A279.
Perform origin search
and origin return opera-
tions.
Built-in
Outputs
Pulse out-
puts 0 and
1
Origin functions (Origin
search and origin
return)
Origin search and origin return operations
can be executed through pulse outputs.
• Origin search:
To start the origin search, set the PLC
Setup to enable the origin search opera-
tion, set the various origin search parame-
ters, and execute the ORIGIN SEARCH
instruction (ORG(889)). The Unit will
determine the location of the origin based
on the Origin Proximity Input Signal and
Origin Input Signal. The coordinates of the
pulse output's PV will automatically be set
as the absolute coordinates.
• Origin return:
To return to the predetermined origin, set
the various origin return parameters and
execute the ORIGIN SEARCH instruction
(ORG(889)).
Change the target posi-
tion during positioning.
(For example, perform
an emergency avoid
operation with the Multi-
ple Start feature.)
Built-in
Outputs
Pulse out-
puts 0 and
1
Positioning with the
PLS2(887) instruction
When a positioning operation started with
the PULSE OUTPUT (PLS2(887)) instruction
is in progress, another PLS2(887) instruction
can be executed to change the target posi-
tion, target speed, acceleration rate, and
deceleration rate.
Change speed in steps
(polyline approxima-
tion) during speed con-
trol.
Built-in
Outputs
Pulse out-
puts 0 and
1
Use the ACC(888)
instruction (continuous)
to change the accelera-
tion rate or decelera-
tion rate.
When a speed control operation started with
the ACC(888) instruction (continuous) is in
progress, another ACC(888) instruction (con-
tinuous) can be executed to change the
acceleration rate or deceleration rate.
Change speed in steps
(polyline approxima-
tion) during positioning.
Built-in
Outputs
Pulse out-
puts 0 and
1
Use the ACC(888)
instruction (indepen-
dent) or PLS2(887) to
change the acceleration
rate or deceleration
rate.
When a positioning operation started with
the ACC(888) instruction (independent) or
PLS2(887) instruction is in progress, another
ACC(888) (independent) or PLS2(887)
instruction can be executed to change the
acceleration rate or deceleration rate.
69
CJ1M Functions Arranged by Purpose Section 1-9
Perform fixed distance
feed interrupt.
Built-in
Outputs
Pulse out-
puts 0 and
1
Execute positioning
with the PLS2(887)
instruction during an
operation started with
SPED(885) (continu-
ous) or ACC(888) (con-
tinuous).
When a speed control operation started with
the SPED(885) instruction (continuous) or
ACC(888) instruction (continuous) is in
progress, the PLS2(887) instruction can be
executed to switch to positioning, output a
fixed number of pulses, and stop.
After determining the
origin, perform position-
ing simply in absolute
coordinates without
regard to the direction
of the current position
or target position.
Built-in
Outputs
Pulse out-
puts 0 and
1
The positioning direc-
tion is selected auto-
matically in the absolute
coordinate system.
When operating in absolute coordinates
(with the origin determined or INI(880)
instruction executed to change the PV), the
CW or CCW direction is selected automati-
cally based on the relationship between the
pulse output PV and the pulse Output
Amount specified when the pulse output
instruction is executed.
Perform triangular con-
trol.
Built-in
Outputs
Pulse out-
puts 0 and
1
Positioning with the
ACC(888) instruction
(independent) or
PLS2(887) instruction.
When a positioning operation started with
the ACC(888) instruction (independent) or
PLS2(887) instruction is in progress, triangu-
lar control (trapezoidal control without the
constant-speed plateau) will be performed if
the number of output pulses required for
acceleration/deceleration exceeds the speci-
fied target pulse Output Amount.
(The number of pulses required for accelera-
tion/deceleration equals the time required to
reach the target frequency x the target fre-
quency.)
Use variable duty ratio
outputs for time-propor-
tional temperature con-
trol.
Built-in
Outputs
PWM(891)
outputs 0
and 1
(CPU21:
PWM out-
put 0 only)
Control with analog
inputs and the variable
duty ratio pulse output
function (PWM(891))
Two of the built-in outputs (bits 04 and 05 of
CIO 2961) can be used as PWM(891) out-
puts 0 and 1 by executing the PWM(891)
instruction.
(CPU21: bits 04 of CIO 2961 only)
Purpose I/O used Function Description
70
CJ1M Functions Arranged by Purpose Section 1-9
1-9-3 Receiving Pulse Inputs
Purpose I/O
used
Function Description
Receive incremental rotary encoder inputs to calculate length or position.
• Counting at low-
speed frequen-
cies (1 kHz max.)
Built-in
Inputs
Interrupt inputs
0 to 3
Interrupt inputs (Counter
mode)
Max. count frequency of
1 kHz (single-phase
pulses only) in increment
mode or decrement mode
Built-in inputs (bits 00 to 03 of
CIO 2960) can be used as counter
inputs.
The interrupt inputs must be set to
counter mode.
The PVs for interrupt inputs 0 through 3
are stored in A536 through A539,
respectively.
• Counting at high-
speed frequen-
cies (30 kHz or
60 kHz max.)
Built-in
Inputs
High-speed
counters 0 and
1
High-speed counter func-
tions
• Differential phase input
(4x multiplication)
30 kHz (50 kHz)
• Pulse + direction input
60 kHz (100 kHz)
• Up/down pulse input
60 kHz (100 kHz)
• Increment input
60 kHz (100 kHz)
Note The figures in
parentheses are
for line driver
inputs.
Built-in inputs (bits 02, 03, and 06 to 09
of CIO 2960) can be used as high-
speed counter inputs.
The PV for high-speed counter 0 is
stored in A270 and A271. The PV for
high-speed counter 1 is stored in A272
and A273.
The counters can be operated in ring
mode or linear mode.
Measure a workpiece's
length or position.
(Start counting when a
certain condition is
established or pause
counting when a certain
condition is estab-
lished.)
Built-in
Inputs
High-speed
counters 0 and
1
High-speed Counter Gate
Bits (bits A53108 and
A53109)
The high-speed counter can be started
or stopped (PV held) from the Unit's pro-
gram by turning ON/OFF the High-
speed Counter Gate Bits (bits A53108
and A53109) when the desired condi-
tions are met.
Measure a workpiece's
speed from its position
data (frequency mea-
surement.)
Built-in
Inputs
High-speed
counter 0
PRV(881) (HIGH-SPEED
COUNTER PV READ)
instruction
The PRV(881) instruction can be used
to measure the pulse frequency.
• Range with differential phase inputs:
0 to 50 kHz
• Range with all other input modes:
0 to 100 kHz
PRV2(883) (COUNTER
FREQUENCY CON-
VERT) instruction
The PRV2(883) instruction can be used
to measure pulse frequency, and con-
vert the frequency to a rotational speed
(r/min.) or convert the counter PV to the
total number of revolutions (for high-
speed counters only). The result is cal-
culated from the number of pulses per
revolution.
71
CJ1M Functions Arranged by Purpose Section 1-9
1-9-4 Serial PLC Link
Note The CJ1W-CIF11 is not insulated, so the total transmission distance for the
whole transmission path is 50 m max. If the total transmission distance is
greater than 50 m, use the insulated NT-AL001, and do not use the CJ1W-
CIF11. If only the NT-AL001 is used, the total transmission distance for the
whole transmission path is 500 m max.
1-9-5 Comparison with the CJ1W-NC Pulse Outputs
Purpose I/O used Function Description
Share alarm information among
multiple CJ1M CPU Units.
None. Serial PLC Links Use the PLC Setup to set the serial communica-
tions mode for the RS-232C communications
port to Serial PLC Link Polling Unit or Polled
Unit.
Connect a CJ1W-CIF11 Converter to the built-in
RS-232C port to connect multiple CPU Units via
RS-422A/485. (RS-232C can also be used for a
1:1 connection.)
In this way, up to 10 words of data can be
exchanged per CPU Unit.
When an OMRON PT is connected
to a CJ1M CPU Unit by NT Link
(1:N mode), share the connection
for the above Serial PLC Link.
The PT can be connected via RS-422A/485 at
the Serial PLC Link, and made to communicate
with the CPU Unit through a 1:N NT Link.
Item CJ1M CJ1W-NC Position Control Unit
Control method Controlled with the ladder program's Pulse
Output instructions (SPED(885), ACC(888),
and PLS2(887)).
Controlled with the Start Command Bit (Rel-
ative Movement Command Bit or Absolute
Movement Command Bit).
Changing the speed during
positioning
When the SPED(885) instruction (indepen-
dent), ACC(888) instruction (independent),
or PLS2(887) instruction is in progress,
each instruction can be executed again to
change the speed.
Override
Changing the speed during
speed control
When the SPED(885) instruction (continu-
ous) or ACC(888) instruction (continuous) is
in progress, each instruction can be exe-
cuted again to change the speed.
Override
Jog operation External inputs can be used in the ladder
program to start and stop operation with the
ACC(888) instruction (continuous) and
SPED(885) instruction (continuous).
Controlled with the Jog Start Bit, Jog Stop
Bit, and Direction Specification Bit.
Origin search Controlled with the ladder program's
ORG(889) instruction.
Performed with the Origin Search Bit.
Origin return Controlled with the ladder program's
ORG(889) instruction.
Performed with the Origin Return Bit.
Teaching Not supported. Performed with the Teaching Start Bit.
Fixed distance feed interrupt
(Continuous output with posi-
tioning)
Execute positioning with the PLS2(887)
instruction during a speed control operation
started with SPED(885) (continuous) or
ACC(888) (continuous).
Performed with the Fixed Distance Feed
Interrupt Start Bit.
Change the target position
during positioning.
(Multiple Start)
When a PLS2(887) instruction is being exe-
cuted, another PLS2(887) instruction can
be started.
Performed with the Start Command Bit (Rel-
ative Movement Command Bit or Absolute
Movement Command Bit) during direct
operation.
Decelerate to a stop during
positioning.
Execute an ACC(888) (independent)
instruction during a positioning operation
started with ACC(888) (independent) or
PLS2(887).
Performed with the Decelerate to Stop Bit.
72
CJ1M Functions Arranged by Purpose Section 1-9
Decelerate to a stop during
speed control.
Execute an ACC(888) (continuous) instruc-
tion during a speed control operation
started with SPED(885) (continuous) or
ACC(888) (continuous).
Performed with the Decelerate to Stop Bit.
External
I/O
Origin Input Sig-
nal
A built-in input is used. Input through the Position Control Unit's
input terminal.
Origin Proximity
Input Signal
A built-in input is used. Input through the Position Control Unit's
input terminal.
Positioning Com-
pleted Signal
A built-in input is used. Input through the Position Control Unit's
input terminal.
Error Counter
Reset Output
A built-in output is used. Output through the Position Control Unit's
output terminal.
CW/CCW Limit
Input
A separate Input Unit is used and an Auxil-
iary Area bit is controlled from the program.
Input through the Position Control Unit's
input terminal.
Item CJ1M CJ1W-NC Position Control Unit
73
Comparison to CS-series PLCs Section 1-10
1-10 Comparison to CS-series PLCs
The CS-series and CJ-series PLCs use the same architecture and are basi-
cally the same in terms of program structure (tasks), instruction system, I/O
memory, and other functionality. They do differ, however in that the CJ-series
PLCs have a different Unit structure, support different Units, do not support
Inner Boards, have different Expansion Racks, have a different I/O allocation
method, etc. These differences are outlined in the following table.
Item CJ-series CS-series
CJ1-H-R CPU Unit
(High-speed)
CJ1-H CPU Unit CS1-H CPU Unit
Dimensions: Height × width 90 × 65 mm 130 × 123 mm
Unit connections Connected to each other via connectors without Back-
plane. End Cover connected to right end to indicate
end of Rack.
Mounted to Backplanes.
Maximum I/O capacity 2,560 I/O points 5,120 I/O points
Maximum program capacity Same
Maximum data memory (DM and
EM Areas combined)
Same
Instructions system Same
I/O memory Same
PLC Setup Same
Cyclic task functionality Same
Interrupt tasks Same (Power OFF interrupt task, schedule interrupt tasks, I/O interrupt, and exter-
nal interrupt tasks)
Programming Devices CX-Programmer (versions 2.1 or higher) (See note 1.) and Programming Consoles
Instruction
execution time
Basic instructions 0.016 µs min. 0.02 µs min.
Special instruc-
tions
0.048 µs min 0.06 µs min.
Overhead time Normal mode: 0.13 ms Normal mode: 0.3 ms
Parallel processing mode:
0.28 ms
Parallel processing mode: 0.3 ms
Mounting DIN Track (not mountable with screws) DIN Track or screws
Inner Boards Not supported. Supported.
Special I/O Units and CPU Bus
Units
Structure of allocations is the same.
Special I/O Units: 96 Units max. (restrictions on mounting positions)
CPU Bus Units: 16 Units max.
CPU Rack mounting positions 10 Units max. (11 Units or more will cause an error) 3, 5, 8, or 10 slots
Expansion Rack mounting positions 10 Units max. (11 Units or more will cause an error) 2, 3, 5, 8, or 10 slots
Expansion Racks One I/O Control Unit required on CPU Rack and one
I/O Interface Unit required on each Expansion Rack.
Either C200H or CS-series
Expansion Racks can be
connected without an I/O
Control Unit or I/O Inter-
face Units.
Maximum number of Expansion
Racks
3 7
Maximum total cable length to
Expansion Racks
12 m
Maximum number of Units 40 80
SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Not supported. Supported.
File Memory (Memory Cards or EM
Area)
Same
Trace Memory Same
74
Comparison to CS-series PLCs Section 1-10
Note 1. CX-Programmer version 7.1 or higher is required to use the new function-
ality of CJ1-H-R CPU Units.
2. Use a CJ1W-BAT01 Battery for the CJ1M CPU Unit.
I/O allocation Automatic allocation from right to left starting at Unit
closest to CPU Unit and then right to left on Expansion
Racks.
Automatic allocation from
right to left starting at Unit
closest to CPU Unit and
then right to left on Expan-
sion Racks.
Registered
I/O tables
Support Supported (but operation is possible without creating
I/O tables from a Programming Device).
Supported (must be cre-
ated from Programming
Device).
Modes Either user-set I/O tables or automatic I/O allocation at
startup (no I/O table verification).
The default setting is for Automatic I/O Allocation at
Startup. User-set I/O tables can be automatically used
by setting and transferring I/O tables (or parameter file).
If the I/O tables are deleted from a CPU Unit from the
CX-Programmer, Automatic I/O Allocation at Startup
will be used again.
Only user-specified I/O
tables (I/O tables can be
verified against actual I/O).
Allocating unused
words
Possible only by using user-set I/O tables (set by edit-
ing I/O tables on the CX-Programmer and transferring
them to the CPU Unit).
Always possible. (Set by
editing I/O tables on the
CX-Programmer and
transferring them to the
CPU Unit.)
Discrepancies between registered
I/O tables and actual I/O
I/O setting error occurs (fatal error). (Without Back-
planes and due to the physical connection method, it is
essentially impossible for a Unit to fall off or for an
empty position to be created. Discrepancies between
the registered I/O tables and actual I/O are thus consid-
ered to be far more serious.)
I/O verify error occurs
(non-fatal error).
Setting first word on each Rack Supported.
Startup Mode when a Programming
Console is not mounted and the
PLC Setup is set to use operating
mode specified on the Program-
ming Console
RUN mode
Serial communications ports Same: One peripheral port and one RS-232C port.
Serial commu-
nications
modes
Peripheral port Same: Peripheral bus, Programming Console, Host Link, 1:N NT Link
RS-232C port Same: Peripheral bus, Host Link, 1:N NT Link, no protocol
Communications commands FINS commands, Host Link commands
Index registers Same
Diagnostic functions Same
Error log function Same
Debugging functions Same (Force-set/reset, differential monitor, data traces, instruction error traces)
I/O response time setting functions Same
Battery CPM2A-BAT01 (See note 2.) CS1W-BAT01
Item CJ-series CS-series
CJ1-H-R CPU Unit
(High-speed)
CJ1-H CPU Unit CS1-H CPU Unit
75
SECTION 2
Specifications and System Configuration
This section provides tables of standard models, Unit specifications, system configurations, and a comparison between
different Units.
2-1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
2-1-1 Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
2-1-2 General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
2-2 CPU Unit Components and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
2-2-1 CPU Unit Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
2-2-2 CPU Unit Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
2-2-3 Units Classifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
2-2-4 Data Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
2-3 Basic System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
2-3-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
2-3-2 CJ-series CPU Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
2-3-3 CJ-series Expansion Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
2-3-4 Connectable Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
2-3-5 Maximum Number of Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
2-4 I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
2-4-1 CJ-series Basic I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
2-4-2 CJ-series Special I/O Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
2-4-3 CJ-series CPU Bus Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
2-5 Expanded System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
2-5-1 Serial Communications System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
2-5-2 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
2-5-3 Communications Network System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
2-6 Unit Current Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
2-6-1 CJ-series CPU Racks and Expansion Racks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
2-6-2 Example Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
2-6-3 Current Consumption Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
2-7 CPU Bus Unit Setting Area Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
2-8 I/O Table Settings List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
2-8-1 CJ-series Basic I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
2-8-2 CJ-series Special I/O Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
2-8-3 CJ-series CPU Bus Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
76
Specifications Section 2-1
2-1 Specifications
2-1-1 Performance Specifications
CJ1-H CPU Units
Note 1. CX-Programmer version 7.1 or higher is required to use the new function-
ality of CJ1-H-R CPU Units.
2. The values displayed in the table are valid when a CPU Unit with unit ver-
sion 4 or later is combined with CX-Programmer 7.0 or higher.
The following table shows the flash memory capacities for CPU Units with unit version 3.
Earlier CPU Units (unit version 2 or earlier) are not equipped with the function that stores data such as
comment files in flash memory.
CPU CJ1H-
CPU67H-R
(See note 1.),
CPU67H
CJ1H-
CPU66H-R
(See note 1.),
CPU66H
CJ1H-
CPU65H-R
(See note 1.),
CPU65H
CJ1H-
CPU64H-R
(See note 1.)
CJ1G-
CPU45H
CJ1G-
CPU44H
CJ1G-
CPU43H
CJ1G-
CPU42H
I/O bits 2,560 1,280 960
User program memory 250 Ksteps 120 Ksteps 60 Ksteps 30 Ksteps 60 Ksteps 30 Ksteps 20 Ksteps 10 Ksteps
Data Memory 32 Kwords
Extended Data Memory 32 Kwords ×
13 banks
E0_00000 to
EC_32767
32 Kwords ×
7 banks
E0_00000 to
E6_32767
32 Kwords ×
3 banks
E0_00000 to
E2_32767
32 Kwords ×
1 bank
E0_00000 to
E0_32767
32 Kwords × 3
banks
E0_00000 to
E2_32767
32 Kwords × 1 bank
E0_00000 to E0_32767
Function
blocks
Maximum No.
of definitions
1024 1024 128
Maximum No.
of instances
2048 2048 256
Flash memory
(unit version 4
or later, see
note 2.)
Total (Kbytes)
for FB program
memory, com-
ment files, pro-
gram index
files, and sym-
bol tables
2048 1280 1280 704
Current consumption 0.99 A at 5 V DC 0.91 A at 5 V DC
Connector (provided) One RS-232C Connector (Plug: XM2A-0901, Hood: XM2S-0911-E) provided with CPU Unit as standard
CPU CJ1H-
CPU67H-R,
CPU67H
CJ1H-
CPU66H-R,
CPU66H
CJ1H-
CPU65H-R,
CPU65H
CJ1H-
CPU64H-R
CJ1G-
CPU45H
CJ1G-
CPU44H
CJ1G-
CPU43H
CJ1G-
CPU42H
Flash memory
(unit version 3)
FB program
memory
(Kbytes)
1664 1664 1024 512 1024 512 512 512
Comment files
(Kbytes)
128 128 64 64 64 64 64 64
Program index
files (Kbytes)
128 128 64 64 64 64 64 64
Symbol tables
(Kbytes)
128 128 128 64 128 64 64 64
77
Specifications Section 2-1
CJ1M CPU Units
Item Specification
CPU Units with Built-in I/O CPU Units without Built-in I/O
Model CJ1M-CPU23 CJ1M-CPU22 CJ1M-CPU21 CJ1M-CPU13 CJ1M-CPU12 CJ1M-CPU11
I/O points 640 320 160 640 320 160
User program
memory
20 Ksteps 10 Ksteps 5 Ksteps 20 Ksteps 10 Ksteps 5 Ksteps
Maximum number of
Expansion Racks
1 max. Not supported. 1 max. Not supported.
Data Memory 32 Kwords
Extended Data
Memory
Not supported.
Pulse output startup
time
•46 µs (without acceleration/
deceleration)
•70 µs (with acceleration/
deceleration)
•63 µs (with-
out accelera-
tion/
deceleration)
• 100 µs (with
acceleration/
deceleration)
---
Interrupt inputs 2121
PWM output points 2 1 None
Maximum subroutine
number
1,024 256 1,024 256
Maximum jump
number for JMP
instruction
1,024 256 1,024 256
Built-in inputs 10
• Interrupt inputs (quick-response): 4 inputs
• High-speed counter: 2 inputs (differential-
phase at 50 kHz or single-phase at 100 kHz)
---
Built-in outputs 6
• Pulse outputs: 2 at 100 kHz
• PWM outputs: 2
6
• Pulse out-
puts: 2 at
100 kHz
•PWM out-
puts: 1
---
Function
blocks
Maxi-
mum No.
of defini-
tions
128
Maxi-
mum No.
of
instances
256
Flash
memory
(Unit
version 4
or later,
see note)
Total
(Kbytes)
for FB
program
memory,
com-
ment
files, pro-
gram
index
files, and
symbol
tables
704
78
Specifications Section 2-1
Note The values displayed in the table above are valid when a CPU Unit with unit
version 4 or later is combined with CX-Programmer 7.0 or higher.
The following table shows the flash memory capacities for CPU Units with unit version 3.
Earlier CPU Units (unit version 2 or earlier) are not equipped with the function that stores data such as
comment files in flash memory.
CJ1 CPU Units
Note The number of steps in a program is not the same as the number of instruc-
tions. For example, LD and OUT require 1 step each, but MOV(021) requires
3 steps. The program capacity indicates the total number of steps for all
instructions in the program. Refer to 10-5 Instruction Execution Times and
Number of Steps for the number of steps required for each instruction.
Current
consumption
(supplied by Power
Supply Units)
0.64 A at 5 V DC 0.58 A at 5 V DC
Connector
(provided)
One RS-232C Connector (Plug: XM2A-0901, Hood: XM2S-0911-E) provided with CPU Unit as
standard
Item Specification
CPU Units with Built-in I/O CPU Units without Built-in I/O
Model CJ1M-CPU23 CJ1M-CPU22 CJ1M-CPU21 CJ1M-CPU13 CJ1M-CPU12 CJ1M-CPU11
Flash
memory
FB pro-
gram
memory
(Kbytes)
256
Com-
ment files
(Kbytes)
64
Program
index
files
(Kbytes)
64
Symbol
tables
(Kbytes)
64
CPU CJ1G-CPU45 CJ1G-CPU44
I/O bits 1,280
User program memory
(See note.)
60 Ksteps 30 Ksteps
Data Memory 32 Kwords
Extended Data Memory 32 Kwords x 3 banks
E0_00000 to E2_32767
32 Kwords x 1 bank
E0_00000 to E0_32767
Current consumption 0.91 A at 5 V DC
Item Specification
CPU Units with Built-in I/O CPU Units without Built-in I/O
79
Specifications Section 2-1
Common Specifications
Item Specifications Reference
Control method Stored program ---
I/O control method Cyclic scan and immediate processing are both possible. ---
Programming • Ladder diagrams
• SFC (sequential function charts)
• ST (structured text)
• Mnemonics
---
CPU processing mode CJ1-H CPU Units: Normal Mode, Parallel Processing Mode with Asyn-
chronous Memory Access, Parallel Processing Mode with Synchro-
nous Memory Access, or Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode
CJ1M CPU Units: Normal Mode or Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode
CJ1 CPU Units: Normal Mode or Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode
---
Instruction length 1 to 7 steps per instruction 10-5 Instruction Execu-
tion Times and Num-
ber of Steps
Ladder instructions Approx. 400 (3-digit function codes) ---
Execution time CJ1-H-R CPU Units:
Basic instructions: 0.016 µs min.
Special instructions: 0.048 µs min.
CJ1-H CPU Units:
Basic instructions: 0.02 µs min.
Special instructions: 0.06 µs min.
CJ1M CPU Units (CPU12/13/22/23):
Basic instructions: 0.10 µs min.
Special instructions: 0.15 µs min.
CJ1M CPU Units (CPU11/12):
Basic instructions: 0.1 µs min.
Special instructions: 0.15 µs min.
CJ1 CPU Units:
Basic instructions: 0.08 µs min.
Special instructions: 0.12 µs min.
10-5 Instruction Execu-
tion Times and Num-
ber of Steps
Overhead time CJ1-H-R CPU Units:
Normal mode: 0.13 ms min.
Parallel processing: 0.28 ms min.
CJ1-H CPU Units:
Normal mode: 0.3 ms min.
Parallel processing: 0.3 ms min.
CJ1M CPU Units (CPU12/13/22/23): 0.5 ms min.
CJ1M CPU Units (CPU11/12): 0.7 ms min.
CJ1 CPU Units: 0.5 ms min.
---
Unit connection
method
No Backplane: Units connected directly to each other. ---
Mounting method DIN Track (screw mounting not possible) 5-2-6 DIN Track Instal-
lation
Maximum number of
connectable Units
• CJ1-H and CJ1 CPU Units:
Per CPU or Expansion Rack: 10 Units including Basic I/O Units,
Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units.
Total per PLC: 10 Units on CPU Rack and 10 Units each on 3
Expansion Racks = 40 Units total
• CJ1M CPU Units:
Total of 20 Units in the System, including 10 Units on CPU Rack and
10 Units on one Expansion Rack.
---
80
Specifications Section 2-1
Maximum number of
Expansion Racks
• CJ1-H and CJ1 CPU Units:
3 max. (An I/O Control Unit is required on the CPU Rack and an I/O
Interface Unit is required on each Expansion Rack.)
• CJ1M CPU Units (CPU 13/23 only):
1 max. (An I/O Control Unit is required on the CPU Rack and an I/O
Interface Unit is required on the Expansion Rack.)
• CJ1M CPU Units (CPU11/12/21/22):
Expansion is not possible.
2-3-3 CJ-series Expan-
sion Racks
Number of tasks 288 (cyclic tasks: 32, interrupt tasks: 256)
With CJ1-H or CJ1M CPU Units, interrupt tasks can be defined as
cyclic tasks called “extra cyclic tasks.” Including these, up to 288 cyclic
tasks can be used.
Note 1 Cyclic tasks are executed each cycle and are controlled with
TKON(820) and TKOF(821) instructions.
Note 2 The following 4 types of interrupt tasks are supported.
Power OFF interrupt tasks: 1 max.
Scheduled interrupt tasks: 2 max.
I/O interrupt tasks: 32 max.
External interrupt tasks: 256 max.
Programming Manual:
1-3 Programs and
Tasks
Programming Manual:
SECTION 4: Tasks
Interrupt types Scheduled Interrupts:
Interrupts generated at a time scheduled by the CPU Unit’s built-in
timer. (See note. 1)
I/O Interrupts:
Interrupts from Interrupt Input Units.
Power OFF Interrupts (See note 2.):
Interrupts executed when the CPU Unit’s power is turned OFF.
External I/O Interrupts:
Interrupts from the Special I/O Units or CPU Bus Units.
Note 1 CJ1-H and CJ1 CPU Units: Scheduled interrupt time interval
is either 1 ms to 9,999 ms (in increments of 1 ms) or 10 ms to
99,990 ms (in increments of 10 ms)
CJ1-H-R CPU Units: Scheduled interrupt time interval is
0.2 ms to 999.9 ms (in increments of 0.1 ms), 1 ms to 9,999
ms (in increments of 1 ms), or 10 ms to 99,990 ms (in incre-
ments of 10 ms)
CJ1M CPU Units: Scheduled interrupt time interval is 0.5 ms
to 999.9 ms (in increments of 0.1 ms), 1 ms to 9,999 ms (in
increments of 1 ms), or 10 ms to 99,990 ms (in increments of
10 ms)
Note 2 Not supported when the CJ1W-PD022 Power Supply Unit is
mounted.
Programming Manual:
4-3 Interrupt Tasks
Calling subroutines
from more than one
task
CJ1-H CPU Units: Supported (called “global subroutines”).
CJ1 CPU Units: Not supported.
Tasks: Programming
Manual (W394)
Function blocks (CPU
Unit with unit version
3.0 or later only)
Languages in function block definitions: ladder programming, struc-
tured text
Refer to the CX-Pro-
grammer Operation
Manual Function Blocks
(W438).
Item Specifications Reference
81
Specifications Section 2-1
CIO
(Core
I/O)
Area
I/O Area 1,280: CIO 000000 to CIO 007915 (80 words from CIO
0000 to CIO 0079)
The setting of the first word can be changed from the
default (CIO 0000) so that CIO 0000 to CIO 0999 can be
used.
I/O bits are allocated to Basic I/O Units.
The CIO
Area can
be used
as work
bits if the
bits are
not used
as shown
here.
9-3 I/O Area
Link Area 3,200 (200 words): CIO 10000 to CIO 119915 (words CIO
1000 to CIO 1199)
Link bits are used for data links and are allocated to Units
in Controller Link Systems.
9-4 Data Link Area
2-5-3 Communications
Network System
Controller Link Unit
Operation Manual
(W309)
CPU Bus Unit
Area
6,400 (400 words): CIO 150000 to CIO 189915 (words CIO
1500 to CIO 1899)
CPU Bus Unit bits store the operating status of CPU Bus
Units.
(25 words per Unit, 16 Units max.)
9-5 CPU Bus Unit Area
Operation Manual for
each CPU Bus Unit
Special I/O Unit
Area
15,360 (960 words): CIO 200000 to CIO 295915 (words
CIO 2000 to CIO 2959)
Special I/O Unit bits are allocated to Special I/O Units.
(10 words per Unit, 96 Units max.)
Note Special I/O Units are I/O Units that belong to a spe-
cial group called “Special I/O Units.” Example:
CJ1W-AD081 Analog Input Unit
9-6 Special I/O Unit
Area
Operation Manual for
each Special I/O Unit
Serial PLC Link
Area (CJ1M
CPU Units
only)
1,440 (90 words): CIO 310000 to CIO 318915 (words
CIO 3100 to CIO 3189)
9-7 Serial PLC Link
Area
DeviceNet Area 9,600 (600 words): CIO 320000 to CIO 379915 (words CIO
3200 to CIO 3799)
DeviceNet bits are allocated to Slaves for DeviceNet Unit
remote I/O communications when the Master function is
used with fixed allocations.
The following words are allocated to the Master function
even when the DeviceNet Unit is used as a Slave.
DeviceNet Unit Opera-
tion Manual (W380)
Internal I/O
Area
4,800 (300 words): CIO 120000 to CIO 149915 (words CIO 1200 to
CIO 1499)
37,504 (2,344 words): CIO 380000 to CIO 614315 (words CIO 3800 to
CIO 6143)
These bits in the CIO Area are used as work bits in programming to
control program execution. They cannot be used for external I/O.
9-2-2 Overview of the
Data Areas
Item Specifications Reference
Fixed allocation
setting 1
Outputs: CIO 3200 to CIO 3263
Inputs: CIO 3300 to CIO 3363
Fixed allocation
setting 2
Outputs: CIO 3400 to CIO 3463
Inputs: CIO 3500 to CIO 3563
Fixed allocation
setting 3
Outputs: CIO 3600 to CIO 3663
Inputs: CIO 3700 to CIO 3763
Fixed allocation
setting 1
Outputs: CIO 3370 (Slave to Master)
Inputs: CIO 3270 (Master to Slave)
Fixed allocation
setting 2
Outputs: CIO 3570 (Slave to Master)
Inputs: CIO 3470 (Master to Slave)
Fixed allocation
setting 3
Outputs: CIO 3770 (Slave to Master)
Inputs: CIO 3670 (Master to Slave)
82
Specifications Section 2-1
Work Area 8,192 bits (512 words): W00000 to W51115 (W000 to W511)
Controls the programs only. (I/O from external I/O terminals is not pos-
sible.)
Note When using work bits in programming, use the bits in the Work
Area first before using bits from other areas.
9-2-2 Overview of the
Data Areas
9-7 Serial PLC Link
Area
Holding Area 8,192 bits (512 words): H00000 to H51115 (H000 to H511)
Holding bits are used to control the execution of the program, and
maintain their ON/OFF status when the PLC is turned OFF or the
operating mode is changed.
Note The Function Block Holding Area words are allocated from
H512 to H1535. These words can be used only for the function
block instance area (internally allocated variable area).
9-2-2 Overview of the
Data Areas
9-10 Holding Area
Auxiliary Area Read only: 7,168 bits (448 words): A00000 to A44715 (words A000 to
A447)
Read/write: 8,192 bits (512 words): A44800 to A95915 (words A448 to
A959)
Auxiliary bits are allocated specific functions.
9-2-2 Overview of the
Data Areas
9-11 Auxiliary Area
Temporary Area 16 bits (TR0 to TR15)
Temporary bits are used to temporarily store the ON/OFF execution
conditions at program branches.
9-2-2 Overview of the
Data Areas
9-12 TR (Temporary
Relay) Area
Timer Area 4,096: T0000 to T4095 (used for timers only) 9-2-2 Overview of the
Data Areas
9-13 Timer Area
Counter Area 4,096: C0000 to C4095 (used for counters only) 9-2-2 Overview of the
Data Areas
9-14 Counter Area
DM Area 32 Kwords: D00000 to D32767
Used as a general-purpose data area for reading and writing data in
word units (16 bits). Words in the DM Area maintain their status when
the PLC is turned OFF or the operating mode is changed.
Internal Special I/O Unit DM Area: D20000 to D29599 (100 words ×
96 Units)
Used to set parameters for Special I/O Units.
CPU Bus Unit DM Area: D30000 to D31599 (100 words × 16 Units)
Used to set parameters for CPU Bus Units.
9-2-2 Overview of the
Data Areas
9-15 Data Memory
(DM) Area
EM Area (CJ1-H and
CJ1 CPU Units only)
32 Kwords per bank, 13 banks max.: E0_00000 to EC_32767 max.
(depending on model of CPU Unit)
Used as a general-purpose data area for reading and writing data in
word units (16 bits). Words in the EM Area maintain their status when
the PLC is turned OFF or the operating mode is changed.
The EM Area is divided into banks, and the addresses can be set by
either of the following methods.
Changing the current bank using the EMBC(281) instruction and set-
ting addresses for the current bank.
Setting bank numbers and addresses directly.
EM data can be stored in files by specifying the number of the first
bank.
9-2-2 Overview of the
Data Areas
9-16 Extended Data
Memory (EM) Area
Index Registers IR0 to IR15
Store PLC memory addresses for indirect addressing. Index registers
can be used independently in each task. One register is 32 bits (2
words).
CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Units: Setting to use index registers either
independently in each task or to share them between tasks.
CJ1 CPU Units: Index registers used independently in each task.
9-17 Index Registers
Programming Manual:
6-2 Index Registers
Item Specifications Reference
83
Specifications Section 2-1
Function Specifications
Task Flag Area 32 (TK0000 to TK0031)
Task Flags are read-only flags that are ON when the corresponding
cyclic task is executable and OFF when the corresponding task is not
executable or in standby status.
9-19 Task Flags
Programming Manual:
4-2-3 Flags Related to
Cyclic Tasks
Trace Memory 4,000 words (trace data: 31 bits, 6 words) Programming Manual:
7-2-4 Tracing Data
File Memory Memory Cards: Compact flash memory cards can be used (MS-DOS
format).
EM file memory (CJ1-H and CJ1 CPU Units only): Part of the EM Area
can be converted to file memory (MS-DOS format).
OMRON Memory Cards can be used.
Programming Manual:
SECTION 5: File Mem-
ory Functions
Item Specifications Reference
Constant cycle time 1 to 32,000 ms (Unit: 1 ms)
When a Parallel Processing Mode is used for a CJ1-H CPU
Unit, the cycle time for executing instructions is constant.
10-4 Computing the
Cycle Time
Programming Manual:
6-1-1 Minimum Cycle
Time
Cycle time monitoring Possible (Unit stops operating if the cycle is too long): 10 to
40,000 ms (Unit: 10 ms)
When a Parallel Processing Mode is used for a CJ1-H CPU
Unit, the instruction execution cycle is monitored. CPU Unit
operation will stop if the peripheral servicing cycle time
exceeds 2 s (fixed).
10-4 Computing the
Cycle Time
Programming Manual:
6-1-2 Maximum Cycle
Time (Watch Cycle
Time) and 6-1-3 Cycle
Time Monitoring
I/O refreshing Cyclic refreshing, immediate refreshing, refreshing by
IORF(097).
IORF(097) refreshes I/O bits allocated to Basic I/O Units and
Special I/O Units.
With CJ1-H-R CPU Units the SPECIAL I/O UNIT I/O
REFRESH instruction (FIORF(225)) can be used to refresh
Special I/O Units whenever required (including allocated DM
Area words).
With the CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Units, the CPU BUS UNIT
I/O REFRESH (DLNK(226)) instruction can be used to
refresh bits allocated to CPU Bus Units in the CIO and DM
Areas whenever required.
10-4 Computing the
Cycle Time
Programming Manual:
6-1-6 I/O Refresh Meth-
ods
Timing of special refreshing
for CPU Bus Units
Data links for Controller Link Units and SYSMAC LINK Units,
remote I/O for DeviceNet Units, and other special refreshing
for CPU Bus Units is performed at the following times:
CJ1 CPU Units: I/O refresh period
CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Units: I/O refresh period and when
the CPU BUS UNIT I/O REFRESH (DLNK(226)) instruction
is executed.
10-4 Computing the
Cycle Time
I/O memory holding when
changing operating modes
Depends on the ON/OFF status of the IOM Hold Bit in the
Auxiliary Area.
SECTION 9 Memory
Areas
9-2-3 Data Area Prop-
erties
Programming Manual:
6-4-1 Hot Start/Cold
Start Function
Load OFF All outputs on Output Units can be turned OFF when the
CPU Unit is operating in RUN, MONITOR, or PROGRAM
mode.
Programming Manual:
6-5-2 Load OFF Func-
tion and 7-2-3 Online
Editing
Item Specifications Reference
84
Specifications Section 2-1
Timer/Counter PV refresh
method
CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Units: BCD or binary (CX-Program-
mer Ver. 3.0 or higher).
CJ1 CPU Units: BCD only.
Programming Manual:
6-4 Changing the
Timer/Counter PV
Refresh Mode
Input response time setting Time constants can be set for inputs from Basic I/O Units.
The time constant can be increased to reduce the influence
of noise and chattering or it can be decreased to detect
shorter pulses on the inputs.
10-4-6 I/O Response
Time
Programming Manual:
6-6-1 I/O Response
Time Settings
Mode setting at power-up Possible (By default, the CPU Unit will start in RUN mode if a
Programming Console is not connected.)
7-1-2 PLC Setup Set-
tings
Programming Manual:
1-2 Operating Modes
and 1-2-3 Startup Mode
Flash memory (CJ1-H and
CJ1M CPU Units only)
The user program and parameter area data (e.g., PLC
Setup) are always backed up automatically in flash memory.
(automatic backup and restore.)
CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later only:
When downloading projects from CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0 or
higher, symbol table files (including CX-Programmer symbol
names, I/O comments), comment files (CX-Programmer rung
comments, other comments), and program index files (CX-
Programmer section names, section comments, or program
comments) are stored in comment memory within the flash
memory.
---
Memory Card functions Automatically reading pro-
grams (autoboot) from the
Memory Card when the
power is turned ON.
Possible 3-2 File Memory
Programming Manual:
SECTION 5 File Mem-
ory Functions, 5-1-3
Files, and 5-2-2 CMND
Instruction
Program replacement during
PLC operation
Possible Programming Manual:
5-2-3 Using Instruction
in User Program
Format in which data is
stored in Memory Card
User program: Program file
format
PLC Setup and other param-
eters: Data file format
I/O memory: Data file format
(binary format), text format,
or CSV format
Programming Manual:
5-1 File Memory
Functions for which Memory
Card read/write is supported
User program instructions,
Programming Devices
(including CX-Programmer
and Programming Con-
soles), Host Link computers,
AR Area control bits, easy
backup operation
Programming Manual:
5-2 File Memory Oper-
ations
Filing Memory Card data and the EM (Extended Data Memory)
Area can be handled as files.
Programming Manual:
SECTION 5 File Mem-
ory Functions
Debugging Control set/reset, differential monitoring, data tracing (sched-
uled, each cycle, or when instruction is executed), instruction
error tracing, storing location generating error when a pro-
gram error occurs.
Programming Manual:
7-2 Trial Operation and
Debugging
Item Specifications Reference
85
Specifications Section 2-1
Online editing When the CPU Unit is in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode,
multiple program sections (“circuits”) of the user program can
be edited together. This function is not supported for block
programming areas.
(With the CX-Programmer is used, multiple program sections
of the user program can be edited together. When a Pro-
gramming Console is used, the program can be edited in
mnemonics only.)
Programming Manual:
1-2 Operating Modes
and 7-2-3 Online Edit-
ing
Program protection Overwrite protection: Set using DIP switch.
Copy protection: Password set using CX-Programmer or Pro-
gramming Consoles.
Programming Manual:
6-4-6 Program Protec-
tion
Error check User-defined errors (i.e., user can define fatal errors and
non-fatal errors)
The FPD(269) instruction can be used to check the execution
time and logic of each programming block.
FAL and FALS instructions can be used with the CJ1-H and
CJ1M CPU Units to simulate errors.
11-2-5 Error Messages
Programming Manual:
6-5 Diagnostic Func-
tions and 6-5-3 Failure
Alarm Functions
Error log Up to 20 errors are stored in the error log. Information
includes the error code, error details, and the time the error
occurred.
A CJ1-H or CJ1M CPU Unit can be set so that user-defined
FAL errors are not stored in the error log.
Programming Manual:
6-4-1 Error Log
Serial communications Built-in peripheral port: Programming Device (including Pro-
gramming Console) connections, Host Links, NT Links
Built-in RS-232C port: Programming Device (excluding Pro-
gramming Console) connections, Host Links, no-protocol
communications, NT Links, Serial Gateway (CompoWay/F
master)
2-5-1 Serial Communi-
cations System
Programming Manual:
6-3 Serial Communica-
tions Functions
Serial Communications Unit (sold separately): Protocol mac-
ros, Host Links, NT Links, Modbus-RTU slave, No-Protocol,
Serial Gateway (CompoWay/F master or Modbus master)
Clock Provided on all models.
Accuracy: Ambient temperature Monthly error
55°C−3.5 min to +0.5 min
25°C−1.5 min to +1.5 min
0°C−3 min to +1 min
Note Used to store the time when power is turned ON and
when errors occur.
Programming Manual:
6-4-5 Clock Functions
Power OFF detection time AC Power Supply Unit: 10 to 25 ms (not fixed)
DC Power Supply Unit PD025: 2 to 5 ms; PD022: 2 to 10 ms
10-3 Power OFF Oper-
ation
Power OFF detection delay
time
0 to 10 ms (user-defined, default: 0 ms)
Note Not supported when the CJ1W-PD022 Power Supply
Unit is mounted.
Programming Manual:
6-4-4 Power OFF
Detection Delay Time
Memory protection Held Areas: Holding bits, contents of Data Memory and
Extended Data Memory, and status of the counter Comple-
tion Flags and present values.
Note If the IOM Hold Bit in the Auxiliary Area is turned ON,
and the PLC Setup is set to maintain the IOM Hold Bit
status when power to the PLC is turned ON, the con-
tents of the CIO Area, the Work Area, part of the Auxil-
iary Area, timer Completion Flag and PVs, Index
Registers, and the Data Registers will be saved for up
to 20 days.
9-2-3 Data Area Prop-
erties
Sending commands to a Host
Link computer
FINS commands can be sent to a computer connected via
the Host Link System by executing Network Communications
Instructions from the PLC.
2-5-2 Systems
Item Specifications Reference
86
Specifications Section 2-1
Remote programming and
monitoring
Remote programming and remote monitoring are possible for
PLCs on Controller Link, Ethernet, DeviceNet or SYSMAC
LINK networks.
2-5-3 Communications
Network System
Programming Manual:
6-4-7 Remote Program-
ming and Monitoring
Communicating across net-
work levels
Remote programming and monitoring from Support Software
and FINS message communications can be performed
across different network levels, even for different types of net-
work.
Pre-Ver. 2.0: Three levels
Version 2.0 or later: Eight levels for Controller Link and Ether-
net networks (See note.), three levels for other networks.
Note To communicate across eight levels, the CX-Integra-
tor or the CX-Net in CX-Programmer version 4.0 or
higher must be used to set the routing tables.
2-5-2 Systems
Storing comments in CPU Unit I/O comments can be stored as symbol table files in the
Memory Card, EM file memory, or comment memory (see
note).
Note Comment memory is supported for CX-Programmer
version 5.0 or higher and CS/CJ-series CPU Units
with unit version 3.0 or later only.
I/O comments: CX-Pro-
grammer Ver. 5.0 Oper-
ation Manual (W437)
Storing comments in
CPU Unit: Program-
ming Manual (W394)
Program check Program checks are performed at the beginning of operation
for items such as no END instruction and instruction errors.
CX-Programmer can also be used to check programs.
Programming Manual:
2-3 Checking Programs
Control output signals RUN output: The internal contacts will turn ON (close) while
the CPU Unit is operating (CJ1W-PA205R).
Programming Manual:
6-4-3 RUN Output
Battery life Refer to 12-2 Replacing User-serviceable Parts.
Battery Set for CJ1-H and CJ1 CPU Units: CPM2A-BAT01
Battery Set for CJ1M CPU Units: CJ1W-BAT01
12-1-2 Unit Replace-
ment Precautions
Self-diagnostics CPU errors (watchdog timer), I/O bus errors, memory errors,
and battery errors.
11-2-5 Error Messages
Other functions Storage of number of times power has been interrupted.
(Stored in A514.)
10-3 Power OFF Oper-
ation
Item Specifications Reference
87
Specifications Section 2-1
Functions Provided by CJ1M CPU Units Only
Item Specifications Reference
Built-in
I/O
Built-in
inputs
General-pur-
pose inputs
As with Input Units, ordinary input signals are handled
according to the I/O refresh timing, and are reflected in
I/O memory.
Built-in I/O Operation Manual:
5-1-2 General-purpose Inputs
Interrupt
inputs
Interrupt inputs (Direct mode):
Interrupt task numbers 140 to 143 are started at the ris-
ing or falling edge of bits 00 to 03 of CIO 2960.
Response time: 0.3 ms
Interrupt inputs (Counter mode):
Interrupt task numbers 140 to 143 are started by incre-
menting or decrementing counters for bits 00 to 03 of
CIO 2960).
Response frequency: 1 kHz
Built-in I/O Operation Manual:
5-1-3 Interrupt Inputs
High-speed
counters
The signal inputs to the built-in input terminals are
counted. The following four types of high-speed counter
inputs can be used:
Phase-differential pulse inputs:
30 kHz (for open collector) and 50 kHz (for line driver)
Pulse + direction inputs:
60 kHz (for open collector) and 100 kHz (for line driver)
Up/down pulse inputs:
60 kHz (for open collector) and 100 kHz (for line driver)
Increment pulse inputs:
60 kHz (for open collector) and 100 kHz (for line driver)
The interrupt task can be started when the comparison
condition for the count of the high-speed counter is met.
There are two methods of comparison with the PV of
the high-speed counter:
1) Target value comparison
2) Range comparison
It is also possible to prohibit counting input signals
(gate function).
Built-in I/O Operation Manual:
5-1-4High-speed Counter
Inputs
Quick-
response
inputs
Read, as input signals, pulse signals shorter than the
cycle time (minimum pulse width: 50 µs).
Built-in I/O Operation Manual:
5-1-5 Quick-response Inputs
Built-in
outputs
General-pur-
pose outputs
As with Output Units, the contents of I/O memory are
output according to the I/O refresh timing.
Built-in I/O Operation Manual:
5-2-2 General-purpose Out-
puts
Pulse out-
puts
Fixed duty ratio pulse signals (duty ratio: 50%) are out-
put from the built-in output terminal. Speed control
(continuous output of pulses at a specified frequency)
and positioning (output of a specified number of pulses
at a specified frequency, and then stopping) are possi-
ble.
Built-in I/O Operation Manual:
5-2-3 Pulse Outputs
Variable duty
pulse out-
puts
(PWM(891)
outputs)
Execute pulse outputs with a set duty ratio (the ratio of
ON time and OFF time in one pulse cycle).
Built-in I/O Operation Manual:
5-2-4 Variable Duty Ratio Pulse
Outputs (PWM(891) Outputs)
Estab-
lishing
the ori-
gin
Origin
search
Establishes the mechanical origin by pulse outputs
based on a pattern specified in the origin search
parameters.
Built-in I/O Operation Manual:
5-3-2 Origin Search
Origin return Moves to the origin from any position. Built-in I/O Operation Manual:
5-3-5 Origin Return
Serial PLC Link Uses the built-in RS-232C port to exchange data
among CPU Units with no need for a program. The
Serial PLC Link can also include PTs set for NT Links
(1:N mode) combined with CPU Units.
Programming Manual:
6-4-3 Serial PLC Links
88
Specifications Section 2-1
2-1-2 General Specifications
Sched-
uled
inter-
rupts
Scheduled interrupts
in units of 0.1 ms
Starts scheduled interrupt tasks with a minimum inter-
val of 0.5 ms, at a precision of 0.1 ms. (Set in the PLC
Setup.)
Programming Manual:
6-5 Using a Scheduled Inter-
rupt as a High-speed Timer
Reset start by MSKS
instruction
When MSKS is executed, reset starts the internal timer
and standardizes the time to first interrupt.
Internal timer PV
reading by MSKS
instruction
When MSKS is executed, reads the time elapsed from
the start of the scheduled interrupt or the previous
scheduled interrupt.
Item Specifications
Power Supply Unit CJ1W-PA205R CJ1W-PA205C CJ1W-PA202 CJ1W-PD025 CJ1W-PD022
Supply voltage 100 to 240 V AC (wide-range), 50/60 Hz 24 V DC
Operating voltage and
frequency ranges
85 to 264 V AC, 47 to 63 Hz 19.2 to 28.8 V DC 21 to 26.4 V DC
Power consumption 100 VA max. 50 VA max. 50 W max. 35 W max.
Inrush current
(See note 3.)
At 100 to 120 V AC:
15 A/8 ms max. for cold start
At 200 to 240 V AC:
30 A/8 ms max. for cold start
At 100 to 120 V AC:
20 A/8 ms max. for
cold start
At 200 to 240 V AC:
40 A/8 ms max. for
cold start
At 24 V DC:
30 A/20 ms max. for
cold start
At 24 V DC:
30 A/20 ms max. for
cold start
Output capacity
(See note 7.)
5.0 A, 5 V DC (including supply to CPU
Unit)
2.8 A, 5 V DC
(including supply to
CPU Unit)
5.0 A, 5 V DC
(including supply to
CPU Unit)
2.0 A, 5 V DC
(including supply to
CPU Unit)
0.8 A, 24 V DC
Total: 25 W max.
0.4 A, 24 V DC
Total: 14 W max.
0.8 A, 24 V DC
Total: 25 W max.
0.4 A, 24 V DC
Total: 19.6 W max.
Output terminal (ser-
vice supply)
Not provided
RUN output
(See note 2.)
Contact configura-
tion: SPST-NO
Switch capacity:
250 V AC, 2 A (resis-
tive load)
120 V AC, 0.5 A
(inductive load), 24 V
DC, 2A (resistive
load)
24 V DC, 2 A (induc-
tive load)
Not provided.
Replacement notifica-
tion function
Not provided. With
Alarm output (open-
collector output)
30 VDC max., 50 mA
max.
Not provided.
Insulation resistance 20 MΩ min. (at
500 V DC) between
AC external and GR
terminals
(See note 1.)
20 MΩ min. (at 500 V
DC) between all
external terminals and
GR terminal, and
between all alarm out-
put terminals.
20 MΩ min. (at 250 V
DC) between all
alarm output termi-
nals and GR terminal.
20 MΩ min. (at
500 V DC) between
AC external and GR
terminals
(See note 1.)
20 MΩ min. (at
500 V DC) between
DC external and GR
terminals (See note
1.)
--- (See note 6.)
Dielectric strength 2,300 V AC 50/60 Hz
for 1 min between
AC external and GR
terminals (See notes
1 and 5.)
Leakage current:
10 mA max.
2,300 V AC, 50/60 Hz
for 1 minute between
all external terminals
and GR terminal and
between all alarm
output terminals with
a leakage current of
10 mA max.
2,300 V AC 50/60 Hz for 1 min between AC
external and GR terminals
Leakage current: 10 mA max.
--- (See note 6.)
1,000 V AC 50/60 Hz
for 1 min between
AC external and GR
terminals (See notes
1 and 5.)
Leakage current:
10 mA max.
1,000 V AC, 50/60 Hz
for 1 minute between
all alarm output ter-
minals and GR termi-
nal with a leakage
current of 10 mA
max.
1,000 V AC 50/60 Hz for 1 min between AC
external and GR terminals
Leakage current: 10 mA max.
Item Specifications Reference
89
Specifications Section 2-1
Note 1. Disconnect the Power Supply Unit’s LG terminal from the GR terminal
when testing insulation and dielectric strength. Testing the insulation and
dielectric strength with the LG terminal and the GR terminals connected
will damage internal circuits in the CPU Unit.
2. Supported only when mounted to CPU Rack.
3. The inrush current is given for a cold start at room temperature. The inrush
control circuit uses a thermistor element with a low-temperature current
control characteristic. If the ambient temperature is high or the PLC is hot-
started, the thermistor will not be sufficiently cool, and the inrush currents
given in the table may be exceeded by up to twice the given values. When
selecting fuses or breakers for external circuits, allow sufficient margin in
shut-off performance.
4. Maintain an ambient storage temperature of −25 to 30°C and relative hu-
midity of 25% to 70% when storing the Unit for longer than 3 months to
keep the replacement notification function in optimum working condition.
5. Change the applied voltage gradually using the adjuster on the Tester. If
the full dielectric strength voltage is applied or turned OFF using the switch
on the Tester, the generated impulse voltage may damage the Power Sup-
ply Unit.
6. CJ1W-PD022 is not insulated between the primary DC power and second-
ary DC power.
7. Internal components in the Power Supply Unit will deteriorate or be dam-
aged if the Power Supply Unit is used for an extended period of time ex-
ceeding the power supply output capacity or if the outputs are shorted.
Noise immunity 2 kV on power supply line (conforming to IEC61000-4-4)
Vibration resistance 10 to 57 Hz, 0.075-mm amplitude, 57 to 150 Hz, acceleration: 9.8 m/s2 in X, Y, and Z directions for 80 minutes
(Time coefficient: 8 minutes ×coefficient factor 10 = total time 80 min.) (according to JIS C0040)
Shock resistance 147 m/s2 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions (Relay Output Unit: 100 m/s2) (according to JIS C0041)
Ambient operating
temperature
0 to 55°C
Ambient operating
humidity
10% to 90% (with no
condensation)
10% to 90% (with no
condensation) (See
note 4.)
10% to 90% (with no condensation)
Atmosphere Must be free from corrosive gases.
Ambient storage tem-
perature
–20 to 70°C (exclud-
ing battery)
–20 to 70°C (exclud-
ing battery) (See
note 4.)
–20 to 70°C (excluding battery)
Grounding Less than 100 Ω
Enclosure Mounted in a panel.
Weight All models are each 5 kg max.
CPU Rack dimen-
sions
90.7 to 466.7 × 90 × 65 mm (W x H x D) (not including cables)
Note: W = a + b +20 x n + 31 x m + 14.7
a: Power Supply Unit: PA205R and PA205C = 80; PA202 = 45; PD025 = 60; PD022=27
b: CPU Unit: CJ1-H or CJ1 = 62; CJ1M-CPU1@ = 31; CJ1M-CPU2@ = 49
The total width is given by the following: W = 156.7 + n × 20 + m × 31, where n is the number of 32-point I/O Units
or I/O Control Units and m is the number of other Units.
Safety measures Conforms to cULus and EC Directives.
Item Specifications
Power Supply Unit CJ1W-PA205R CJ1W-PA205C CJ1W-PA202 CJ1W-PD025 CJ1W-PD022
90
CPU Unit Components and Functions Section 2-2
2-2 CPU Unit Components and Functions
2-2-1 CPU Unit Components
PERIFHERAL
ERR/ALM
RUN
INH
COMM
PRPHL
CONTROLLER
CJ1G-CPU44
SYSMAC
PROGRAMMABLE
PORT
OPEN
BUSY
MCPWR
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
ON
Peripheral Port
Connector
Connected to the next Unit.
Memory Card Eject Button
Press the eject button to
remove the Memory Card
from the CPU Unit.
RS-232C Port
Memory Card
Memory Card
Connector
Connects the Memory
Card to the CPU Unit
LED Indicators
Refer to following table.
Memory Card Indicators
MCPWR (green): Lit when
power is supplied to Memory
Card.
BUSY (orange): Lit when
Memory Card is being
accessed.
Slider
Secures the next Unit.
Inside the battery compartment
DIP Switch
Refer to following table.
Memory Card Power
Supply Switch
Press the power supply switch
to disconnect power before
removing the Memory Card.
Also, press the Memory Card
Power Supply Switch to
perform an easy backup
operation.
Connected to Programming Devices,
such as a Programming Console or
host computers. Refer to 3-1 CPU
Units for details.
Connected to Programming Devices
(excluding Programming Consoles),
Host Computers, general-purpose
external devices, Programmable
Terminals, and other devices. Refer
to 3-1 CPU Units for details.
91
CPU Unit Components and Functions Section 2-2
Indicators The following table describes the LED indicators on the front panel of the CPU
Unit.
DIP Switch The CJ-series CPU Unit has an 8-pin DIP switch that is used to set basic
operational parameters for the CPU Unit. The DIP switch is located under the
cover of the battery compartment. The DIP switch pin settings are described
in the following table.
Indicator Meaning
RUN (green) Lights when the PLC is operating normally in MONITOR or
RUN mode.
ERR/ALM (red) Flashes if a non-fatal error occurs that does not stop the CPU
Unit. If a non-fatal error occurs, the CPU Unit will continue
operating.
Lights if a fatal error occurs that stops the CPU Unit or if a
hardware error occurs. If a fatal or hardware error occurs, the
CPU Unit will stop operating, and the outputs from all Output
Units will turn OFF.
INH (orange) Lights when the Output OFF Bit (A50015) turns ON. If the
Output OFF Bit is turned ON, the outputs from all Output Units
will turn OFF.
PRPHL
(orange)
Flashes when the CPU Unit is communicating via the periph-
eral port.
BKUP (orange;
CJ1-H and
CJ1M CPU
Units only)
Lights when data is being backed up from RAM to the flash
memory.
Do not turn OFF the CPU Unit when this indicator is lit.
COMM (orange) Flashes when the CPU Unit is communicating via the RS-
232C port.
MCPWR
(green)
Lit while power is supplied to the Memory Card.
BUSY Lit while the Memory Card is being accessed.
Pin Setting Function
1 ON Writing disabled for user program memory.
OFF Writing enabled for user program memory.
2 ON User program automatically transferred when power is turned ON.
OFF User program not automatically transferred when power is turned ON.
3 ON Not used.
4 ON Use peripheral port parameters set in the PLC Setup.
OFF Auto-detect Programming Console or CX-Programmer parameters at
the peripheral port.
5 ON Auto-detect CX-Programmer parameters at the RS-232C port.
OFF Use RS-232C port parameters set in the PLC Setup.
6 ON User-defined pin.
Turns OFF the User DIP Switch Pin Flag (A39512).
OFF User-defined pin.
Turns ON the User DIP Switch Pin Flag (A39512).
7 ON Easy backup: Read/write to Memory Card.
OFF Easy backup: Verify contents of Memory Card.
8 OFF Always OFF.
92
CPU Unit Components and Functions Section 2-2
2-2-2 CPU Unit Capabilities
CJ1-H CPU Units
Note The available data memory capacity is the sum of the Data Memory (DM) and
the Extended Data Memory (EM) Areas.
CJ1M CPU Units
Model I/O bits Program
capacity
Data Memory
capacity
(See note.)
Ladder
instruction
processing
speed
Internal com-
munications
ports
Optional
products
CJ1H-CPU67H-R 2,560 bits
(Up to 3 Expan-
sion Racks)
250 Ksteps 448 Kwords 0.016 µs Peripheral port
and
RS-232C port
Memory Cards
CJ1H-CPU66H-R 120 Ksteps 256 Kwords
CJ1H-CPU65H-R 60 Ksteps 128 Kwords
CJ1G-CPU64H-R 30 Ksteps 64 Kwords
CJ1H-CPU67H 250 Ksteps 448 Kwords 0.02 µs
CJ1H-CPU66H 120 Ksteps 256 Kwords
CJ1H-CPU65H 60 Ksteps 128 Kwords
CJ1G-CPU45H 1280 bits
(Up to 3 Expan-
sion Racks)
60 Ksteps 128 Kwords 0.04 µs
CJ1G-CPU44H 30 Ksteps 64 Kwords
CJ1G-CPU43H 960 bits
(Up to 2 Expan-
sion Racks)
20 Ksteps 64 Kwords
CJ1G-CPU42H 1 0Ksteps 64 Kwords
Model I/O bits Program
capacity
Data Mem-
ory capacity
(See Note.)
Ladder
instruction
processing
speed
Internal
communica-
tions ports
Optional
products
Pulse I/O
CJ1M-
CPU23
640 bits (1
Expansion
Rack)
20 Ksteps 32 Kwords
(No EM)
0.1 µs Peripheral
port and
RS-232C
port
Memory
Cards
Supported.
CJ1M-
CPU22
320 bits (No
Expansion
Racks)
10 Ksteps
CJ1M-
CPU21
160 bits (No
Expansion
Racks)
5 Ksteps
CJ1M-
CPU13
640 bits (1
Expansion
Rack)
20 Ksteps Not sup-
ported.
CJ1M-
CPU12
320 bits (No
Expansion
Racks)
10 Ksteps
CJ1M-
CPU11
160 bits (No
Expansion
Racks)
5 Ksteps
93
CPU Unit Components and Functions Section 2-2
CJ1 CPU Units
2-2-3 Units Classifications
The CJ-series CPU Units can exchange data with CJ-series Basic I/O Units,
CJ-series Special I/O Units, and CJ-series CPU Bus Units, as shown in the
following diagram.
Model I/O bits Program
capacity
Data Memory
capacity
(See Note.)
Ladder
instruction
processing
speed
Internal com-
munications
ports
Optional
products
CJ1G-CPU45 1,280 bits
(Up to 3
Expansion
Racks)
60 Ksteps 128 Kwords 0.08 µs Peripheral port
and
RS-232C port
(one each)
Memory Cards
CJ1G-CPU44 30 Ksteps 64 Kwords
CJ-series
CPU Unit
CJ-series
Basic I/O Units
CJ-series
Special I/O Units
CJ-series
CPU Bus Units
94
Basic System Configuration Section 2-3
2-2-4 Data Communications
CPU Unit Data Communications
CPU Unit Connections
Note 1. The maximum number of Units on CPU Rack and Expansion Racks is 40.
There are other restrictions for the number of I/O points.
2. The maximum number of Units that can be connected is 40.
3. Some CPU Bus Units cannot be mounted to an Expansion Rack.
4. CJ1-H-R CPU Units only.
2-3 Basic System Configuration
2-3-1 Overview
CJ-series CPU Rack
A CJ-series CPU Rack can consist of a CPU Unit, a Power Supply Unit, Basic
I/O Units, Special I/O Units, CPU Bus Units, and an End Cover. A Memory
Card is optional. An I/O Control Unit is required to connect an Expansion
Rack.
CJ-series Expansion Racks
A CJ-series Expansion Rack can be connected to the CPU Rack or other CJ-
series Expansion Racks. An Expansion Rack can consist of an I/O Interface
Unit, a Power Supply Unit, Basic I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus
Units, and an End Cover.
Unit Data exchange during cyclic
servicing (allocations)
Event service data
communications
(IORD/IOWR
instruction)
I/O refreshing
using IORF
instruction
I/O refreshing
using FIORF
(See note 4.)
I/O
refresh-
ing using
DLNK
CJ-series
Basic I/O
Units
According to I/O
allocations
(Words are allo-
cated in order
according to the
position the Unit
is mounted.)
I/O refreshing Not provided. Yes No No
CJ-series
Special
I/O Units
Unit No. alloca-
tions
Special I/O Unit Area
(CIO): 10 words/Unit
Special I/O Unit Area
(DM): 100 words/Unit
Ye s
(Not supported for
some Units.)
Ye s
(Not supported
for some Units.)
Ye s
(Not supported
for some Units.)
No
CJ-series
CPU Bus
Units
CJ-series CPU Bus
Unit Area (CIO): 25
words/ Unit
CJ-series CPU Bus
Unit Area (DM): 100
words/Unit
Not provided. No No Yes
Unit Maximum number of
Units on CPU Racks and
Expansion Racks
Racks to which Unit can be mounted
CJ-series CPU
Rack
CJ-series Expan-
sion Racks
CJ-series Basic I/O Units 40 (20 for CJ1M CPU Units)
(See note 1.)
Ye s Ye s
CJ-series Special I/O Units 40 (20 for CJ1M CPU Units)
(See note 2.)
Ye s Ye s
CJ-series CPU Bus Units 16 Yes Yes
(See note 3.)
95
Basic System Configuration Section 2-3
Note Although the CJ-series PLCs do not require Backplanes, the term “slot” is still
used to refer to the relative position of a Unit in the Racks. The slot number
immediately to the right of the CPU Unit is slot 1, and slot numbers increase
toward the right side of the Rack.
2-3-2 CJ-series CPU Rack
A CJ-series CPU Rack consists of a CPU Unit, a Power Supply Unit, various
I/O Units, and an End Cover. Up to 10 I/O Units can be connected.
CPU Rack
Power Supply Unit CPU Unit (I/O Control Unit)
I/O Units
(Basic I/O Units, Special
I/O Units, CPU Bus Units)
I/O Units
(Basic I/O Units,
Special I/O Units,
CPU Bus Units)
Expansion Rack
Power Supply Unit (I/O Interface Unit)
End Cover
Memory Card
End Cover
POWER
PA205R
DC24V
AC240V
OUTPUT
RUN
INPUT
AC100-240V
L2/N
L1
CONTROLLER
CJ1G-CPU44
SYSMAC
PROGRAMMABLE
ERR/ALM
RUN
COMM
INH
PRPHL
OPEN
PERIPHERAL
BUSY
MCPWR
PORT
CPU UnitPower Supply Unit End Cover
(I/O Control Unit, See note.)
Memory Card
I/O Units (10 max.)
(Basic I/O Units, Special I/O Units, CPU Bus Units)
96
Basic System Configuration Section 2-3
Note The I/O Control Unit is required only to connect an Expansion Rack. It must
be connected next to the CPU Unit.
Units
Name Configuration Remarks
CJ-series
CPU Rack
CJ-series CPU Unit One of each Unit required for
every CPU Rack.
Refer to the following table for
details on applicable models.
CJ-series Power Supply Unit
CJ-series Basic I/O Units A total of up to 10 Units can be
connected. (An error will occur if
11 or more Units are connected.)
CJ-series Special I/O Units
CJ-series CPU Bus Units
End Cover (CJ1W-TER01) Must be connected to the right end
of the CPU Rack. One End Cover
is provided with the CPU Unit.
A fatal error will occur if the End
Cover is not connected.
Memory Card Install as required.
Refer to the following table for
details on applicable models.
I/O Control Unit (CJ1W-IC101) Required to connect an Expansion
Rack. Must be connected next to
the CPU Unit.
Name Model Specifications
CJ1-H-R CPU Units CJ1H-CPU67H-R I/O bits: 2,560, Program capacity: 250 Ksteps
Data Memory: 448 Kwords (DM: 32 Kwords, EM: 32 Kwords × 13 banks)
CJ1H-CPU66H-R I/O bits: 2,560, Program capacity: 120 Ksteps
Data Memory: 256 Kwords (DM: 32 Kwords, EM: 32 Kwords × 7 banks)
CJ1H-CPU65H-R I/O bits: 2,560, Program capacity: 60 Ksteps
Data Memory: 128 Kwords (DM: 32 Kwords, EM: 32 Kwords × 3 banks)
CJ1G-CPU64H-R I/O bits: 2,560, Program capacity: 30 Ksteps
Data Memory: 64 Kwords (DM: 32 Kwords, EM: 32 Kwords × 1 bank)
CJ1-H CPU Units CJ1H-CPU67H I/O bits: 2,560, Program capacity: 250 Ksteps
Data Memory: 448 Kwords (DM: 32 Kwords, EM: 32 Kwords × 13 banks)
CJ1H-CPU66H I/O bits: 2,560, Program capacity: 120 Ksteps
Data Memory: 256 Kwords (DM: 32 Kwords, EM: 32 Kwords × 7 banks)
CJ1H-CPU65H I/O bits: 2,560, Program capacity: 60 Ksteps
Data Memory: 128 Kwords (DM: 32 Kwords, EM: 32 Kwords × 3 banks)
CJ1G-CPU45H I/O bits: 1,280, Program capacity: 60 Ksteps
Data Memory: 128 Kwords (DM: 32 Kwords, EM: 32 Kwords × 3 banks)
CJ1G-CPU44H I/O bits: 1,280, Program capacity: 30 Ksteps
Data Memory: 64 Kwords (DM: 32 Kwords, EM: 32 Kwords × 1 bank)
CJ1G-CPU43H I/O bits: 960, Program capacity: 20 Ksteps
Data Memory: 64 Kwords (DM: 32 Kwords, EM: 32 Kwords × 1 bank)
CJ1G-CPU42H I/O bits: 960, Program capacity: 10 Ksteps
Data Memory: 64 Kwords (DM: 32 Kwords, EM: 32 Kwords × 1 bank)
97
Basic System Configuration Section 2-3
Note The HMC-EF183 cannot be used with some CPU Units. Before ordering the
HMC-EF183, confirm applicability using the information in Precautions on
Applicable Units on page 150.
CJ1M CPU Units CJ1M-CPU23 I/O bits: 640, Program capacity: 20 Ksteps
Data Memory: 32 Kwords (DM: 32 Kwords, EM: None), built-in pulse I/O
CJ1M-CPU22 I/O bits: 320, Program capacity: 10 Ksteps
Data Memory: 32 Kwords (DM: 32 Kwords, EM: None), built-in pulse I/O
CJ1M-CPU21 I/O bits: 160, Program capacity: 5 Ksteps
Data Memory: 32 Kwords (DM: 32 Kwords, EM: None), built-in pulse I/O
CJ1M-CPU13(-ETN) I/O bits: 640, Program capacity: 20 Ksteps
Data Memory: 32 Kwords (DM: 32 Kwords, EM: None)
CJ1M-CPU12(-ETN) I/O bits: 320, Program capacity: 10 Ksteps
Data Memory: 32 Kwords (DM: 32 Kwords, EM: None)
CJ1M-CPU11(-ETN) I/O bits: 160, Program capacity: 5 Ksteps
Data Memory: 32 Kwords (DM: 32 Kwords, EM: None)
CJ1 CPU Units CJ1G-CPU45 I/O bits: 1,280, Program capacity: 60 Ksteps
Data Memory: 128 Kwords (DM: 32 Kwords, EM: 32 Kwords × 3 banks)
CJ1G-CPU44 I/O bits: 1,280, Program capacity: 30 Ksteps
Data Memory: 64 Kwords (DM: 32 Kwords, EM: 32 Kwords × 1 bank)
CJ-series
Power Supply Units
CJ1W-PA205R 100 to 240 V AC (with RUN output), Output capacity: 5 A at 5 V DC
CJ1W-PA205C 100 to 240 V AC (with replacement notification), Output capacity:
5 A at 5 V DC, 0.8 A at 24 V DC
CJ1W-PA202 100 to 240 V AC, Output capacity: 2.8A at 5 V DC
CJ1W-PD025 24 V DC, Output capacity: 5 A at 5 V DC
CJ1W-PD022 24 V DC (non-insulated type),
Output capacity: 2.0 A at 5 V DC, 0.4 A at 24 V DC
Memory Cards HMC-EF372 Flash memory, 30 MB
HMC-EF672 Flash memory, 64 MB
HMC-EF183 Flash memory, 128 MB (See note.)
HMC-AP001 Memory Card Adapter
Name Model Specifications
98
Basic System Configuration Section 2-3
Note A peripheral bus connection is not possible when connecting the CX-Pro-
grammer via an RS-232C Connecting Cable. Use the Host Link (SYSMAC
WAY) connection.
Name Model Specifications
I/O Control Unit CJ1W-IC101 Required to connect an Expansion Rack. Must be connected next to the
CPU Unit. Connect to the I/O Interface Unit (CJ1W-II101) on the first
Expansion Rack with a CS/CJ-series I/O Connecting Cable.
End Cover CJ1W-TER01 Must be connected to the right end of the CPU Rack. One End Cover is
provided with the CPU Unit and with an I/O Interface Unit.
A fatal error will occur if the End Cover is not connected.
DIN Track PFP-50N Track length: 50 cm, height: 7.3 mm
PFP-100N Track length: 1 m, height: 7.3 mm
PFP-100N2 Track length: 1 m, height: 16 mm
PFP-M Stopper to prevent Units from moving on the track. Two each are provided
with the CPU Unit and with an I/O Interface Unit.
Programming Con-
soles
CQM1H-PRO01-E An English Keyboard Sheet (CS1W-KS001-E) is required.
CQM1-PRO01-E
C200H-PRO27-E
Programming Con-
sole Keyboard Sheet
CS1W-KS001-E For CQM1H-PRO01-E, CQM1-PRO01-E, or C200H-PRO27-E.
Programming Con-
sole Connecting
Cables
CS1W-CN114 Connects the CQM1-PRO01-E Programming Console.
(Length: 0.05 m)
CS1W-CN224 Connects the CQM1-PRO27-E Programming Console.
(Length: 2.0 m)
CS1W-CN624 Connects the CQM1-PRO27-E Programming Console.
(Length: 6.0 m)
Programming Device
Connecting Cables
(for peripheral port)
CS1W-CN118 Connects DOS computers
D-Sub 9-pin receptacle (For converting between RS-232C cable and
peripherals)
(Length: 0.1 m)
CS1W-CN226 Connects DOS computers
D-Sub 9-pin (Length: 2.0 m)
CS1W-CN626 Connects DOS computers
D-Sub 9-pin (Length: 6.0 m)
Programming Device
Connecting Cables
(for RS-232C port)
XW2Z-200S-CV Connects DOS computers
D-Sub 9-pin (Length: 2.0 m), Static-resistant connector used.
XW2Z-500S-CV Connects DOS computers
D-Sub 9-pin (Length: 5.0 m), Static-resistant connector used.
XW2Z-200S-V Connects DOS computers
D-Sub 9-pin (Length: 2.0 m) (see note)
XW2Z-500S-V Connects DOS computers
D-Sub 9-pin (Length: 5.0 m) (see note)
USB-Serial Conver-
sion Cable
CS1W-CIF31 Converts USB connector to a D-Sub 9-pin connector
(Length: 0.5 m)
Battery Set CPM2A-BAT01 Used for CJ1-H and CJ1 CPU Units, and also for CPM2A and CQM1H.
(Cannot be used with CS-series CPU Units.)
CJ1W-BAT01 Used for CJ1M CPU Units. (Cannot be used with CJ1-H and CJ1 CPU
Units.)
99
Basic System Configuration Section 2-3
Connecting Programming Devices
Connecting Personal Computers Running Support Software
Connecting to Peripheral Port
Connecting to RS-232C Port
DOS CS1W-CN118
CS1W-CN226
CS1W-CN626
RS-232C
XW2Z-200S-@@: 2 m
XW2Z-500S-@@: 5 m
0.1 m
2.0 m
6.0 m
Computer
Note
Connecting Cables for Peripheral Port
Cable Length Computer
connector
D-Sub,
9-pin
DOS computer
(RS-232C, 9-pin)
Peripheral
port The CS1W-CN118 Cable is used with an RS-232C
cable to connect to the peripheral port on the CPU Unit
as shown below. The CS1W-CN118 Cable cannot be
used with an RS-232C cable whose model number
ends in -V for a peripheral bus connection and must be
used for a Host Link (SYSMAC WAY) connection.
RS-232C Cable
CS1W-CN118 Cabl
e
Peripheral
port
DOS 2.0 m
5.0 m
Cable
Note
DOS version
(RS-232C, 9-pin)
RS-232C Cable
XW2Z-200S-CV
or XW2Z-200S-V: 2 m
XW2Z-500S-CV
or XW2Z-500S-V: 5 m
Connecting Cables for RS-232C Port
Computer Length Computer
connector
D-Sub,
9-pin
XW2Z-500S-CV
or XW2Z-500S-V
XW2Z-200S-CV
or XW2Z-200S-V
The XW2Z-200S-CV and XW2Z-500S-CV use static-
resistant connectors and can be connected to the
peripheral bus or the Host Link. The XW2Z-200S-V
and XW2Z-500S-V, however, can only be connected
to the Host Link, not the peripheral bus.
RS-232C port
100
Basic System Configuration Section 2-3
Programming Software
Connecting Personal Computers Running Programming Devices
(Using USB-Serial Conversion Cable)
Connecting to the Peripheral Port
OS Name
Windows CX-Programmer
CJ1 CPU Units: Version 2.04 or higher
CJ1-H CPU Units: Version 2.1 or higher
CJ1M CPU Units: Version 3.0 or higher
CD-ROM
Cable Connection Diagram
Using a CS1W-
CN226/626 cable
Using a CQM1-
CIF02 cable
Note With a CS/CJ-series PLC, the connection must be a host link connection.
CS1W-CIF31
USB type A plug, male
Peripheral port
D-sub Connector
(9-pin male)
D-sub Connector
(9-pin female)
CS/CJ-series PLC connection
Customizable Counter Unit connection
CS/CJ-series peripheral connector
Recommended cable:
CS1W-CN226/626
CS1W-CN114
CS1W-CIF31
Peripheral port
CS/CJ-series PLC connection (see note)
USB type A plug, male
D-sub Connector
(9-pin male)
D-sub Connector
(9-pin female)
C-series peripheral
connector
CS/CJ-series peripheral
connector
Recommended cable:
CQM1-CIF02
101
Basic System Configuration Section 2-3
Connecting to the RS-232C Port
Programming Console
When using a Programming Console, connect the Programming Console to
the peripheral port of the CPU Unit and set pin 4 of the DIP switch on the front
panel of the Unit to OFF (automatically uses default communications parame-
ters for the peripheral port).
Using a XW2Z-
200S-CV/500S-CV
or XW2Z-200S-V/
500S-V cable for an
RS-232C connection
Note With a CS/CJ-series PLC, the connection must be a host link connection.
Cable Connection Diagram
Using a XW2Z-
200S-CV/500S-CV
or XW2Z-200S-V/
500S-V cable for an
RS-232C connection
Note With a CS/CJ-series PLC, the connection must be a host link connection.
Cable Connection Diagram
CS1W-CN118
CS1W-CIF31
Peripheral port
D-sub Connector (9-pin male)
CS/CJ-series peripheral connector
USB type A plug, male
D-sub Connector
(9-pin male)
D-sub Connector
(9-pin female)
CS/CJ-series PLC connection
Customizable Counter Unit connection
XW2Z-200S-CV/500S-CV
or XW2Z-200S-V/500S-V
(See note.) D-sub Connector
(9-pin female)
CS1W-CIF31
CS/CJ-series PLC connection
USB type A plug, male
D-sub Connector
(9-pin male)
D-sub Connector
(9-pin female)
D-sub Connector
(9-pin male)
RS-232C port
D-sub Connector
(9-pin female)
Recommended cable:
XW2Z-200S-CV/500S-CV
or XW2Z-200S-V/500S-V
(See note.)
102
Basic System Configuration Section 2-3
CQM1H-PRO01-E/CQM1-PRO01-E
The Programming Console can be connected only to the peripheral port.
C200H-PRO27-E
The Programming Console can be connected only to the peripheral port.
Note When an OMRON Programmable Terminal (PT) is connected to the RS-232C
port and Programming Console functions are being used, do not connect the
Programming Console at the same time.
CS1W-CN114
CQM1-PRO01-E
CQM1H-PRO01-E
0.05 m
Not required. ---
Note
Peripheral port
Set pin 4 of the DIP switch on the
front panel of the CPU Unit to OFF.
CS1W-KS001-E
English Keyboard
Sheet required.
CQM1H-PRO01-E,
CQM1-PRO01-E
Programming
Console
The following cable is included with the
CQM1-PRO01-E Programming Console
Programming Console Cable Length
2.0 m
6.0 m
CQM1-PRO27-E CS1W-CN224
CS1W-CN624
Note
Length
CS1W-KS001-E
English Keyboard
Sheet required.
C200H-PRO27-E
Programming Console
Peripheral port
Set pin 4 of the DIP switch on the
front panel of the CPU Unit to OFF.
Cable
Programming Console
103
Basic System Configuration Section 2-3
2-3-3 CJ-series Expansion Racks
To expand the number of Units in the system, CJ-series Expansion Racks can
be connected to CPU Racks.
Note 1. Connect the I/O Control Unit directly to the CPU Unit. Proper operation
may not be possible if it is connected any other location.
2. Connect the I/O Interface Unit directly to the Power Supply Unit. Proper op-
eration may not be possible if it is connected any other location.
3. The total length of CS/CJ-series I/O Connecting cable between all Racks
must be 12 m or less.
4. A maximum of 9 Units can be connected to a CPU Rack that uses a CJ1M-
CPU1@-ETN CPU Unit. (The built-in Ethernet port on the CPU Unit is al-
located slot 0 and is counted as one Unit, making the total 9 Units instead
of 10.)
5. A maximum of one Expansion Rack can be used with a CJ1M CPU Unit.
(No Expansion Racks can be connected to some CJ1M CPU Unit models.)
Power Supply Unit
0.3 m
0.7 m
2 m
3 m
5 m
10 m
12 m
CS1W-CN313
CS1W-CN713
CS1W-CN223
CS1W-CN323
CS1W-CN523
CS1W-CN133
CS1W-CN133B2
Power Supply Unit
CPU Unit
CJ-series Expansion
Rack
CPU Rack
Power Supply Unit
CS/CJ I/O Connecting Cables
Cable Length
CJ-series Expansion Rack
CS/CJ-series I/O Connecting Cable
(See note 3.)
30 cm, 70 cm, 2 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m, 12 m
Expansion
Racks
3 maximum
(See note 5.)
Total cable
length:
12 m
End Cover
10 I/O Units max.
(See note 4.)
I/O Control Unit (See note 1.)
I/O Interface Unit (See note 2.)
I/O Interface Unit (See note 2.)
10 I/O Units max.
CS/CJ-series I/O Connecting Cable
(See note 3.)
30 cm, 70 cm, 2 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m, 12 m
104
Basic System Configuration Section 2-3
Maximum Expansion Racks
Rack Configurations
Configuration Device List
2-3-4 Connectable Units
Each Unit can be connected to the CPU Rack or an Expansion Rack, except
for Interrupt Input Units, which must be mounted on the CPU Rack. Refer to 2-
4 I/O Units for details on the limitations on each Unit.
Expansion pattern Rack Maximum No. of Racks Remarks
CJ-series CPU Rack with
CJ-series Expansion Racks
CJ-series Expansion Racks 3 Racks (1 Rack for CJ1M
CPU Units)
The total cable length must
be 12 m or less.
Rack Configuration Remarks
CJ-series
Expansion Racks
CJ-series Power Supply Unit One of each Unit required for every Expansion Rack.
Refer to the following table for details on applicable models.
I/O Interface Unit (one End
Cover included.)
CJ-series Basic I/O Units A total of up to 10 Units can be connected. (An error will occur if 11 or
more Units are connected.)
CJ-series Special I/O Units
CJ-series CPU Bus Units
End Cover (CJ1W-TER01) Must be connected to the right end of the Expansion Rack. One End
Cover is provided with the I/O Interface Unit.
A fatal error will occur if the End Cover is not connected.
CS/CJ-series I/O Connecting
Cable
Required to connect the I/O Interface Unit to the I/O Control Unit or
previous I/O Interface Unit. Proper operation may not be possible if
the total length of I/O Connecting Cable between all Racks is more
than 12 m.
Name Model Specifications Cable
length
CJ-series
Power Supply
Unit
CJ1W-PA205R 100 to 240 V AC (with RUN output), Output capacity: 5 A at 5 V DC ---
CJ1W-PA205C 100 to 240 VAC (with replacement notification), Output capacity: 5 A at 5
VDC, 0.8 A at 24 VDC
CJ1W-PA202 100 to 240 V AC, Output capacity: 2.8A at 5 V DC
CJ1W-PD025 24 V DC, Output capacity: 5 A at 5 V DC
CJ1W-PD022 24 VDC (non-insulated type), Output capacity: 2.0 A at 5 VDC, 0.4 A at
24 VDC
I/O Interface
Unit
CJ1W-II101 One Interface Unit is required for each CJ-series Expansion Rack. One
End Cover is provided with each Unit. (Connect to an I/O Control Unit
mounted on a CJ-series CPU Rack or an Interface Unit mounted on an
Expansion Rack using an I/O connecting cable.)
End Cover CJ1W-TER01 Must be connected to the right end of the CPU Rack. One End Cover is
provided with the CPU Unit and with an I/O Interface Unit.
A fatal error will occur if the End Cover is not connected.
CS/CJ-series
I/O Connecting
Cables
CS1W-CN313 Connects Expansion Racks to CPU Racks or other Expansion Racks. 0.3 m
CS1W-CN713 0.7 m
CS1W-CN223 2 m
CS1W-CN323 3 m
CS1W-CN523 5 m
CS1W-CN133 10 m
CS1W-CN133B2 12 m
105
Basic System Configuration Section 2-3
2-3-5 Maximum Number of Units
The maximum number of Units that can be connected in a PLC is calculated
as follows: Max. No. of Units on CPU Rack (a) + (Max. No. of Units on one
Expansion Rack (b) x Max. No. of Expansion Racks).
Do not connect any more than the maximum number of Units to any one PLC.
The total number of each type of Unit is not limited according to connection
locations.
Note A fatal error will occur and the CPU Unit will not operate more than the maxi-
mum number of Units given above are connected to the CPU Rack or any
Expansion Rack.
CPU Unit model Max. No. of
Units on CPU
Rack (a)
Max. No. of Units
on one Expan-
sion Rack (b)
Max. No. of
Expansion
Racks
Max.
No. of
Units
CJ1H-CPU@@H(-R)
CJ1G-CPU45H/44H
CJ1G-CPU45/44
10 10 3 40
CJ1G-CPU43H/42H 10 10 2 30
CJ1M-CPU23/13 10 10 1 20
CJ1M-CPU22/21/12/11 10 --- --- 10
CJ1M-CPU13-ETN 9 10 1 19
CJ1M-CPU12-ETN
CJ1M-CPU11-ETN
9 --- --- 9
106
I/O Units Section 2-4
2-4 I/O Units
2-4-1 CJ-series Basic I/O Units
Basic Input Units
Name Specifications Model Number
of bits
allocated
Mountable Racks
CJ-series
CPU Rack
CJ-series
Expansion
Racks
DC Input Units Terminal block
12 to 24 V DC, 8 inputs
CJ1W-ID201 16 (See
note 2.)
Ye s Ye s
Ter m i na l b l o c k
24 V DC, 16 inputs
CJ1W-ID211 16 Yes Yes
Fujitsu-compatible connector
24 V DC, 32 inputs (See note 1.)
CJ1W-ID231 32 Yes Yes
MIL connector
24 V DC, 32 inputs (See note 1.)
CJ1W-ID232 32 Yes Yes
Fujitsu-compatible connector
24 V DC, 64 inputs (See note 1.)
CJ1W-ID261 64 Yes Yes
MIL connector
24 V DC, 64 inputs (See note 1.)
CJ1W-ID262 64 Yes Yes
AC Input Units 200 to 240 V AC, 8 inputs CJ1W-IA201 16 (See
note 2.)
Ye s Ye s
100 to 120 V AC, 16 inputs CJ1W-IA111 16 Yes Yes
Interrupt Input
Units
24 V DC, 16 inputs CJ1W-INT01 16 Yes (See
note 3.)
No
Quick-response
Input Units
24 V DC, 16 inputs CJ1W-IDP01 16 Yes Yes
B7A Interface
Units
64 inputs CJ1W-B7A14 64 Yes Yes
107
I/O Units Section 2-4
Basic Output Units
Name Specifications Model Number
of bits
allocated
Mountable Racks
CJ-series
CPU Rack
CJ-series
Expansion
Racks
Relay Output Units Terminal block, 250 V AC/24 V DC, 2 A;
8 points, independent contacts
CJ1W-OC201 16 (See
note 2.)
Ye s Ye s
Terminal block, 250 V AC, 0.6 A; 8 points CJ1W-OC211 16 Yes Yes
Triac Output Unit Terminal block, 250 V AC, 0.6 A/24 V DC,
2 A; 8 points, independent contacts
CJ1W-OA201 16 (See
note 2.)
Ye s Ye s
Transis-
tor Out-
put Units
Sinking
outputs
Terminal block, 12 to 24 V DC, 2 A, 8 outputs CJ1W-OD201 16 (See
note 2.)
Ye s Ye s
Terminal block, 12 to 24 V DC, 0.5 A,
8 outputs
CJ1W-OD203 16 (See
note 2.)
Ye s Ye s
Terminal block, 12 to 24 V DC, 0.5 A,
16 outputs
CJ1W-OD211 16 Yes Yes
Fujitsu-compatible connector, 12 to 24 V DC,
0.5 A, 32 outputs (See note 1.)
CJ1W-OD231 32 Yes Yes
MIL connector, 12 to 24 V DC, 0.3 A,
32 outputs (See note 1.)
CJ1W-OD233 32 Yes Yes
Fujitsu-compatible connector, 12 to 24 V DC,
0.3 A, 64 outputs (See note 1.)
CJ1W-OD261 64 Yes Yes
MIL connector, 12 to 24 V DC, 0.3 A,
64 outputs (See note 1.)
CJ1W-OD263 64 Yes Yes
Sourcing
outputs
Terminal block, 24 V DC, 2 A, 8 outputs, load
short-circuit protection and disconnected line
detection
CJ1W-OD202 16 (See
note 2.)
Ye s Ye s
Terminal block, 24 V DC, 0.5 A, 8 outputs,
load short-circuit protection
CJ1W-OD204 16 (See
note 2.)
Ye s Ye s
Terminal block, 24 V DC, 0.5 A, 16 outputs,
load short-circuit protection
CJ1W-OD212 16 Yes Yes
MIL connector, 24 V DC, 0.5 A, 32 outputs,
load short-circuit protection (See note 1.)
CJ1W-OD232 32 Yes Yes
MIL connector, 12 to 24 V DC, 0.3 A, 64 out-
puts (See note 1.)
CJ1W-OD262 64 Yes Yes
B7A Interface Units 64 outputs CJ1W-B7A04 64 Yes Yes
108
I/O Units Section 2-4
Mixed I/O Units
Note 1. The cable-side connector is not provided with Units equipped with cables.
Purchase the cable separately (page 264), or use an OMRON Connector-
Terminal Block Conversion Unit or I/O Terminal (page 267).
2. Although 16 I/O bits are allocated, only 8 of these can be used for external
I/O. This Unit is also treated as a 16-point I/O Unit in the I/O tables.
3. The Unit must be connected in one of the five positions (for CJ1-H CPU
Units) or three positions (for CJ1M CPU Units) next to the CPU Unit on the
CPU Rack. An I/O setting error will occur if the Unit is connected to other
positions on the CPU Rack or to any position on an Expansion Rack.
Name Specifications Model Number
of bits
allocated
Mountable Racks
CJ-series
CPU Rack
CJ-series
Expansion
Racks
24-V DC
Input/
Transis-
tor Out-
put Units
Sinking Fujitsu-compatible connector
Inputs: 24 V DC,16 inputs
Outputs: 12 to 24 V DC, 0.5 A, 16 outputs
(See note 1.)
CJ1W-MD231
(See note 1.)
32 Yes Yes
Fujitsu-compatible connector
Inputs: 24 V DC, 32 inputs
Outputs: 12 to 24 V DC, 0.3 A, 32 outputs
(See note 1.)
CJ1W-MD261
(See note 1.)
64 Yes Yes
MIL connector
Inputs: 24 V DC,16 inputs
Outputs: 12 to 24 V DC, 0.5 A, 16 outputs
(See note 1.)
CJ1W-MD233
(See note 1.)
32 Yes Yes
MIL connector
Inputs: 24 V DC, 32 inputs
Outputs: 12 to 24 V DC, 0.3 A, 32 outputs
(See note 1.)
CJ1W-MD263
(See note 1.)
64 Yes Yes
Sourcing MIL connector
Inputs: 24 V DC, 16 inputs
Outputs: 24 V DC, 0.5 A, 16 outputs,
load-short circuit protection (See note 1.)
CJ1W-MD232
(See note 1.)
32 Yes Yes
TTL I/O Units MIL connector
Inputs: TTL (5 V DC), 32 inputs
Outputs: TTL (5 V DC, 35 mA),
32 outputs
CJ1W-MD563
(See note 1.)
64 Yes Yes
B7A Interface Units 32 inputs, 32 outputs CJ1W-B7A22 64 Yes Yes
109
I/O Units Section 2-4
2-4-2 CJ-series Special I/O Units
Name Specifications Model Number of
words
allocated
(CIO 2000
to
CIO 2959)
Number
of words
allocated
(D20000
to
D29599)
Mountable Racks Unit No.
CJ-series
CPU Rack
CJ-series
Expansion
Racks
Analog Input
Unit
8 inputs (4 to 20 mA, 1 to
5 V, etc.)
CJ1W-AD081
(-V)
10 words 100
words
Yes Yes 0 to 95
4 inputs (4 to 20 mA, 1 to
5 V, etc.)
CJ1W-AD041 10 words 100
words
Yes Yes 0 to 95
Analog Out-
put Unit
4 outputs (1 to 5 V, 4 to
20 mA, etc.)
CJ1W-DA041 10 words 100
words
Yes Yes 0 to 95
2 outputs (1 to 5 V, 4 to
20 mA, etc.)
CJ1W-DA021 10 words 100
words
Yes Yes 0 to 95
8 outputs (1 to 5 V, 0 to
10 V, etc.)
CJ1W-DA08V 10 words 100
words
Yes Yes 0 to 95
8 outputs (4 to 20 mA) CJ1W-DA08C 10 words 100
words
Yes Yes 0 to 95
Analog I/O
Units
4 inputs (1 to 5 V, 4 to
20 mA, etc.)
2 outputs (1 to 5 V, 4 to
20 mA, etc.)
CJ1W-MAD42 10 words 100
words
Yes Yes 0 to 95
Isolated-type
Thermocou-
ple Input
Unit
Thermocouple 4 inputs CJ1W-PTS51 10 words 100
words
Yes Yes 0 to 95
Thermocouple 2 inputs CJ1W-PTS15 10 words 100
words
Yes Yes 0 to 95
Isolated-type
Resistance
Thermome-
ter Input Unit
Resistance 4 inputs CJ1W-PTS52 10 words 100
words
Yes Yes 0 to 95
Resistance 2 inputs CJ1W-PTS16 10 words 100
words
Yes Yes 0 to 95
Direct Cur-
rent Input
Unit
DC voltage or DC current,
2 inputs
CJ1W-PDC15 10 words 100
words
Yes Yes 0 to 95
110
I/O Units Section 2-4
Te m p e ra -
ture Control
Units
4 control loops, thermo-
couple inputs, NPN out-
puts
CJ1W-TC001 20 words 200
words
Yes Yes 0 to 94
(uses words
for 2 unit
numbers)
4 control loops, thermo-
couple inputs, PNP out-
puts
CJ1W-TC002 20 words 200
words
Yes Yes 0 to 94
(uses words
for 2 unit
numbers)
2 control loops, thermo-
couple inputs, NPN out-
puts, heater burnout
detection
CJ1W-TC003 20 words 200
words
Yes Yes 0 to 94
(uses words
for 2 unit
numbers)
2 control loops, thermo-
couple inputs, NPN out-
puts, heater burnout
detection
CJ1W-TC004 20 words 200
words
Yes Yes 0 to 94
(uses words
for 2 unit
numbers)
4 control loops, tempera-
ture-resistance thermom-
eter inputs, NPN outputs
CJ1W-TC101 20 words 200
words
Yes Yes 0 to 94
(uses words
for 2 unit
numbers)
4 control loops, tempera-
ture-resistance thermom-
eter inputs, PNP outputs
CJ1W-TC102 20 words 200
words
Yes Yes 0 to 94
(uses words
for 2 unit
numbers)
2 control loops, tempera-
ture-resistance thermom-
eter inputs, NPN outputs,
heater burnout detection
CJ1W-TC103 20 words 200
words
Yes Yes 0 to 94
(uses words
for 2 unit
numbers)
2 control loops, tempera-
ture-resistance thermom-
eter inputs, PNP outputs,
heater burnout detection
CJ1W-TC104 20 words 200
words
Yes Yes 0 to 94
(uses words
for 2 unit
numbers)
Position
Control
Units
1 axis, pulse output; open
collector output
CJ1W-NC113 10 words 100
words
Yes Yes 0 to 95
2 axes, pulse outputs;
open collector outputs
CJ1W-NC213 10 words 100
words
Yes Yes 0 to 95
4 axes, pulse outputs;
open collector outputs
CJ1W-NC413 20 words 200
words
Yes Yes 0 to 94
(uses words
for 2 unit
numbers)
1 axis, pulse output; line
driver output
CJ1W-NC133 10 words 100
words
Yes Yes 0 to 95
2 axes, pulse outputs; line
driver outputs
CJ1W-NC233 10 words 100
words
Yes Yes 0 to 95
4 axes, pulse outputs; line
driver outputs
CJ1W-NC433 20 words 200
words
Yes Yes 0 to 94
(uses words
for 2 unit
numbers)
Space Unit (See note.) CJ1W-SP001 None None Yes Yes ---
ID Sensor
Units
V600-series single-head
type
CJ1W-
V600C11
10 words 100
words
Yes Yes 0 to 95
V600-series two-head
type
CJ1W-
V600C12
20 words 200
words
Yes Yes 0 to 94
(uses words
for 2 unit
numbers)
Name Specifications Model Number of
words
allocated
(CIO 2000
to
CIO 2959)
Number
of words
allocated
(D20000
to
D29599)
Mountable Racks Unit No.
CJ-series
CPU Rack
CJ-series
Expansion
Racks
111
I/O Units Section 2-4
Note The Space Unit is for Position Control Units.
High-speed
Counter Unit
Two-axis pulse input,
counting rate: 500 kcps
max., line driver compati-
ble
CJ1W-CT021 40 words 400
words
Yes Yes 0 to 92
(uses words
for 4 unit
numbers)
CompoBus/
S Master
Units
CompoBus/S remote I/O,
256 bits max.
CJ1W-SRM21 10 words
or 20
words
None Yes Yes 0 to 95 or
0 to 94
CompoNet
Master Unit
CompoNet remote I/O CJ1W-CRM21 None Yes Yes
Communications mode
No. 0: 128 inputs/128
outputs for Word Slaves
20 words None Yes Yes 0 to 94
(uses words
for 2 unit
numbers)
Communications mode
No. 1: 256 inputs/256
outputs for Word Slaves
40 words None Yes Yes 0 to 92
(uses words
for 4 unit
numbers)
Communications mode
No. 2: 512 inputs/512
outputs for Word Slaves
80 words None Yes Yes 0 to 88
(uses words
for 8 unit
numbers)
Communications mode
No. 3: 256 inputs/256
outputs for Word Slaves
and 128 inputs/128 out-
puts for Bit Slaves
80 words None Yes Yes 0 to 88
(uses words
for 8 unit
numbers)
Communications mode
No. 8: 1,024 inputs/
1,024 outputs for Word
Slaves and 256 inputs/
256 outputs for Bit
Slaves maximum
10 words Depends
on setting
Yes Yes 0 to 95
(uses words
for 1 unit
number)
Name Specifications Model Number of
words
allocated
(CIO 2000
to
CIO 2959)
Number
of words
allocated
(D20000
to
D29599)
Mountable Racks Unit No.
CJ-series
CPU Rack
CJ-series
Expansion
Racks
112
Expanded System Configuration Section 2-5
2-4-3 CJ-series CPU Bus Units
Note 1. Slave I/O are allocated in DeviceNet Area (CIO 3200 to CIO 3799).
2. Some CJ-series CPU Bus Units are allocated words in the CPU Bus Unit
Setting Area. The system must be designed so that the number of words
allocated in the CPU Bus Unit Setting Area does not exceed its capacity.
Refer to 2-7 CPU Bus Unit Setting Area Capacity for details.
2-5 Expanded System Configuration
2-5-1 Serial Communications System
The CJ-series system configuration can be expanded by using the following
serial communications ports.
• CPU Unit built-in ports × 2 (peripheral port and RS-232C port)
• Serial Communications Unit ports × 2 (RS-232C and RS-422A/485)
Name Specifications Model Number
of words
allocated
(CIO 1500 to
CIO 1899)
Mountable Racks Unit No.
CJ-series
CPU Rack
CJ-series
Expansion
Racks
Controller Link Units Wired CJ1W-CLK21-V1 25 words Yes Yes 0 to F
(4 Units
max.)
Serial Communications
Unit
One RS-232C port and
one RS-422A/485 port
CJ1W-SCU41-
V1
25 words Yes Yes 0 to F
Two RS-232C ports CJ1W-SCU21-
V1
Two RS-422A/485 ports CJ1W-SCU31-
V1
Ethernet Unit 10Base-T, FINS com-
munications, socket ser-
vice, FTP server, and
mail communications
CJ1W-ETN11 25 words Yes Yes 0 to F
(4 Units
max.)
100Base-TX CJ1W-ETN21
FL-net Unit 100Base-TX cyclic
transmissions and mes-
sage transmissions
CJ1W-FLN22 25 words Yes Yes 0 to F
(4 Units
max.)
DeviceNet Unit DeviceNet remote I/O,
2,048 points; Both Mas-
ter and Slave functions,
Automatic allocation
possible without Config-
urator
CJ1W-DRM21 25 words
(See note 1.)
Yes Yes 0 to F
Position Control Units
supporting MECHA-
TROLINK-II communi-
cations
MECHATROLINK-II,
16 axes max.
CJ1W-NCF71 25 words Yes Yes 0 to F
Motion Control Units
supporting MECHA-
TROLINK-II communi-
cations
MECHATROLINK-II,
Real axes: 30 max.,
Virtual axes: 2 max.,
Special motion control
language
CJ1W-MCH71 25 words Yes
Each Unit
uses three
slots on the
Rack.
Ye s
Each Unit
uses three
slots on the
Rack.
0 to F
SYSMAC SPU Unit
(High-speed Storage
and Processing Unit)
One CF card type I/II
slot (used with OMRON
HMC-EF@@@ Memory
Card), one Ethernet
port
CJ1W-SPU01 Not used. Yes Yes 0 to F
113
Expanded System Configuration Section 2-5
1,2,3... 1. If the CPU Unit built-in ports or Serial Communications Unit ports are used,
various protocols can be allocated, such as Host Link and protocol macros.
2. Up to 16 Serial Communications Units can be connected for one CPU Unit.
The system configuration can then be expanded by connecting devices
with RS-232C or RS-422/485 ports, such as Temperature Sensor Units,
Bar Code Readers, ID Systems, personal computers, Board Computers,
Racks, and other companies’ PLCs.
Expanding the system configuration as shown above allows a greater number
of serial communications ports, and greater flexible and simpler support for
different protocols.
3. The Serial Gateway is supported for CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or lat-
er and Serial Communications Boards/Units with unit version 1.2 or later.
• CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later: Gateway from FINS network to
serial communications (CompoWay/F only) is possible through the
peripheral port and RS-232C port.
• Serial Communications Boards/Units with unit version 1.2 or later: Gate-
way from FINS network to serial network (CompoWay/F, Modbus, or Host
Link) is possible. Using a Gateway to Host Link enables Host Links with
the PLC as master.
• • • • •
CPU Unit
Serial Communications Units
(16 max.)
Peripheral port
RS-232C port
Communications port 1
Communications port 2
114
Expanded System Configuration Section 2-5
System Configuration Example
Refer to page 120 for a table showing which communications protocols are
supported by each Unit.
2-5-2 Systems
The serial communications port mode (protocol) can be switched in the CPU
Unit’s PLC Setup. Depending on the protocol selected, the following systems
can be configured.
Protocols
The following protocols support serial communications.
PT
OR
CompoWay/F master
Modbus master
Host Link master
CPU Unit
Serial Communications Unit
Peripheral
port
RS-232C port
Host Link slave
Communications settings
automatically detected
CX-Programmer
RS-232C port
General-purpose external devices
(such as Temperature Sensor
Units, Bar Code Readers)
Programming
Console
Host computer
NT Link
Protocol macro
Serial Communications Unit with unit Ver. 1.2 or later
CPU Unit Host Link slave
CompoWay/F
or Modbus-
compatible
device
Protocol Main connection Use Applicable commands,
communications
instructions
Host Link (SYSMAC WAY)
slave
Personal computer
OMRON Programmable Ter-
minals
Communications between
the Host computer and the
PLC. Commands can be
sent to a computer from the
PLC.
Host Link commands/ FINS
commands. Commands can
be sent to a computer from
the PLC.
No-protocol (customer) com-
munications
General-purpose external
devices
No-protocol communica-
tions with general-purpose
devices.
TXD(236) instruction,
RXD(235) instruction,
TXDU(256) instruction,
RXDU(255) instruction
Protocol macro General-purpose external
devices
Sending and receiving mes-
sages (communications
frames) according to the
communications specifica-
tions of external devices.
(SYSMAC-PST is used to
create protocols by setting
various parameters.)
PMCR(260) instruction
115
Expanded System Configuration Section 2-5
Note 1. The Peripheral Bus Mode is used for Programming Devices excluding Pro-
gramming Console. If Programming Console is to be used, set pin 4 of the
DIP switch on the front panel of the Unit to OFF so that the default periph-
eral port communications parameters are used instead of those specified
in the PLC Setup.
2. CPU Unit with version 3.0 or later (peripheral port and RS-232C port) and
Serial Communications Board/Unit with unit version 1.2 or later only.
3. Serial Communications Board/Unit with unit version 1.2 or later only.
Host Link System
(SYSMAC WAY Mode 1:N)
The Host Link System allows the I/O memory of the PLC to be read/written,
and the operating mode to be changed from a Host computer (personal com-
puter or Programmable Terminal) by executing Host Link commands or FINS
commands that are preceded by a header and followed by a terminator. Alter-
natively, FINS commands (preceded by a header and followed by a termina-
tor) can be sent to a computer connected via the Host Link System by
executing Network Communications Instructions (SEND(090)/RECV(098)/
CMND(490)) from the PLC.
NT Links (1: N) OMRON Programmable Ter-
minals
High-speed communica-
tions with Programmable
Terminals via direct access.
None
Peripheral bus (See note 1.) Programming Devices CX-
Programmer
Communications between
Programming Devices and
the PLC from the computer.
None
Serial Gateway OMRON Component
PLC
Converts FINS commands
that are received into Com-
poWay/F, Modbus, or Host
Link protocols, and then
transmits the converted com-
mand to the serial line.
---
CompoWay/F Master
(See note 2.)
CompoWay/F slave Converts FINS commands
(encapsulated CompoWay/F
commands) received at the
serial port into CompoWay/F
commands.
FINS command
2803 hex received
(including sending FINS
command using
CMND(490))
Modbus Master (See
note 3.)
Modbus slave Converts FINS commands
(encapsulated Modbus com-
mands) received at the serial
port into Modbus commands.
FINS command
2804 hex or 2805 hex
received
(including sending FINS
command using
CMND(490))
Host Link FINS
(SYSWAY) Master (See
note 3.)
Host Link FINS (SYSWAY)
slave (PLC)
Converts FINS commands
into FINS commands encap-
sulated in Host Link
Any FINS command
received except those sent
to serial port
(including sending FINS
command using
CMND(490))
Protocol Main connection Use Applicable commands,
communications
instructions
116
Expanded System Configuration Section 2-5
Note 1. Set pin 4 of the DIP switch on the front panel of the CPU Unit to ON, and
set the serial communications mode in the PLC Setup to Host Link.
2. Set pin 5 of the DIP switch on the front panel of the CPU Unit to OFF, and
set the serial communications mode in the PLC Setup to Host Link.
3. Host Link master functions can be performed by sending the CMND(490)
instruction via the Serial Gateway when using Serial Communications
Boards/Units with unit version 1.2 or later.
No-protocol (Custom)
Communications System
No-protocol communications allow simple data transmissions, such as input-
ting bar code data and outputting printer data using communications port I/O
instructions. The start and completion codes can be set, and RS and CS sig-
nal control is also possible with no-protocol communications.
The following table shows the usage of each communications port I/O
instruction, based on the communications port being used and the direction of
the data transfer (sending or receiving).
RS-232C
Host computer
FINS commands sent via
SEND/RECV/CMND
instructions from the PLC
Host Link commands
or FINS commands
Applicable port
Peripheral port
Yes
(See note 1.)
RS-232C port
Yes
(See note 2.)
CPU Unit
Yes
Serial
Communi-
cations
Unit
FINS
FINS
CMND(490) FINS command sent
PLC (Host Link Master)
PLC Host Link slave)
Serial
Gateway
Serial Communications
Board/Unit
Host Link
header
Host Link
terminator
Communica-
tions port
CPU Unit's built-in
RS-232C port
Serial port on a Serial
Communications Unit
(unit version 1.2 or later)
Send TXD(236) TXDU(256)
Receive RXD(235) RXDU(255)
117
Expanded System Configuration Section 2-5
Note 1. Set pin 5 of the DIP switch on the front panel of the CPU Unit to OFF, and
set the serial communications mode in the PLC Setup to no-protocol com-
munications.
2. No-protocol communications are supported for Serial Communications
Units with unit version 1.2 or later only.
NT Link System
(1:N Mode)
If the PLC and Programmable Terminal (PT) are connected together using
RS-232C ports, the allocations for the PT’s status control area, status notify
area, objects such as touch switches, indicators, and memory maps can be
allocated in the I/O memory of the PLC. The NT Link System allows the PT to
be controlled by the PLC, and the PT can periodically read data from the sta-
tus control area of the PLC, and perform necessary operations if there are any
changes in the area. The PT can communicate with the PLC by writing data to
the status notify area of the PLC from the PT. The NT Link system allows the
PT status to be controlled and monitored without using PLC ladder programs.
The ratio of PLCs to PTs is 1: n (n ≥ 1).
Set the PT communications settings for a 1:N NT Link. Either one or up to
eight PTs can be connected to each PLC.
Applicable port
Peripheral port
No
RS-232C port
Yes
(See note 1.)
CPU Unit
Yes
Serial
Communi-
cations
Unit
(See note 2.)
CPU SCU
RXD
TXD
RXDU
TXDU
General-purpose
external device
General-purpose
external device
RS-232C
118
Expanded System Configuration Section 2-5
Note 1. The PLC can be connected to any PT port that supports 1:N NT Links. It
cannot be connected to the RS-232C ports on the NT30 or NT30C, be-
cause these ports support only 1:1 NT Links.
2. The NT20S, NT600S, NT30, NT30C, NT620S, NT620C, and NT625C can-
not be used if the CPU Unit’s cycle time is 800 ms or longer (even if only
one of these PTs is connected).
3. The Programming Console functionality of a PT (Expansion Function) can
be used only when the PT is connected to the RS-232C or peripheral port
on the CPU Unit. It cannot be used when connected to an RS-232C or RS-
422A/485 port on a Serial Communications Unit.
4. A PT implementing Programming Console functionality and a PT imple-
menting normal PT functionality cannot be used at the same time.
5. When more than one PT is connected to the same PLC, be sure that each
PT is assigned a unique unit number. Malfunctions will occur if the same
unit number is set on more than one PT.
6. The 1:1 and 1:N NT Link protocols are not compatible with each other, i.e.,
they are separate serial communications protocols.
Protocol Macros
The CX-Protocol is used to create data transmission procedures (protocols)
for general-purpose external devices according to the communications speci-
fications (half-duplex or full-duplex, asynchronous) of the general-purpose
external devices. The protocols that have been created are then recorded in a
Serial Communications Unit, enabling data to be sent to and received from
the external devices by simply executing the PMCR(260) instruction in the
CPU Unit. Protocols for data communications with OMRON devices, such as
Temperature Controller, Intelligent Signal Processors, Bar Code Readers, and
Modems, are supported as standard protocols. (See note.)
RS-232C
RS-422A/485
PT PT PT
RS-232C
1:N Mode
PT
1:N Mode
RS-232C to RS-422/485
Conversion Adapter
Applicable port
Peripheral port
Yes
(See note 1.)
RS-232C
Yes
(See note 2.)
Serial
Communi-
cations
Unit
Yes
CPU Unit
Note 1. Turn ON pin 4 on the DIP switch on
the front of the CPU Unit and set the
serial communications mode in the
PLC Setup for an NT Link.
2. Turn OFF pin 5 on the DIP switch on
the front of the CPU Unit and set the
serial communications mode in the
PLC Setup for an NT Link.
119
Expanded System Configuration Section 2-5
Note The standard protocols are provided with the CX-Protocol and Serial Commu-
nications Unit.
CompoWay/F
(Host Function)
The CJ-series CPU Unit can operate as a host to send CompoWay/F com-
mands to OMRON components connected in the system. CompoWay/F com-
mands are executed by using the CompoWay/F send/receive sequences in
the standard protocols of the protocol macro function.
Serial Gateway Mode
When using CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later (peripheral port and RS-
232C port), the received FINS message is automatically converted into Com-
poWay/F according to the message (see note). When Serial Communications
Boards/Units with unit version 1.2 or later are used, the received FINS mes-
sage is automatically converted into either CompoWay/F, Modbus-RTU, Mod-
bus-ASCII, or Host Link FINS according to the message.
Note CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later (peripheral port and RS-232C port)
support automatic conversion into CompoWay/F only (automatic conversion
into Modbus-RTU, Modbus-ASCII, and Host Link FINS is not possible).
+
Messages
General-
p
ur
p
ose external device
Messages
Applicable port
Peripheral port RS-232C port
Serial
Communi-
cations
Unit
CPU Unit
Host computer
CX-Protocol or PSS Support
software for protocol macro
function
Protocol
NoNo Yes
CompoWay/F command
Protocol macro
CompoWay/F
OMRON
components
120
Expanded System Configuration Section 2-5
CompoWay/F, Modbus-RTU, Modbus-ASCII
Host Link FINS
Unit/Protocol Compatibility
Note 1. The Peripheral Bus Mode is used for Programming Devices excluding Pro-
gramming Consoles. If Programming Console is to be used, set pin 4 of the
DIP switch on the front panel of the Unit to OFF so that the communica-
tions settings are automatically detected instead of using those specified
in the PLC Setup.
Unit Model Port Periph-
eral bus
(See
note.)
Host
Link
No-proto-
col (cus-
tomer)
communi-
cations
Proto-
col
macro
NT Link
(1:N
Mode)
Serial
Gate-
way (See
note 2.)
CPU Units CJ1H-
CPU@@H-R
CJ1G/H-
CPU@@H
CJ1M-CPU@@
CJ1G-
CPU@@
Peripheral Yes Yes --- --- Yes Yes
RS-232C Yes Yes Yes --- Yes Yes
Serial
Communications
Unit
CJ1W-
SCU41-V1
CJ1W-
SCU31-V1
CJ1W-
SCU21-V1
RS-422A/485 --- Yes Yes (See
note 2.)
Ye s Ye s Ye s
RS-232C --- Yes Yes (See
note 2.)
Ye s Ye s Ye s
FINS
CompoWay/F
(See note.)
CompoWay/ F
(See note.)
FINS CompoWay/F
(See note.)
CMND(490)
Network
FINS command sent
CPU Unit with unit
version 3.0 or later
(peripheral port or RS-
232C port)
Serial Communications
Board/Unit with unit
version 1.2 or later
CompoWay-compatible OMRON
Component, or Modbus-RTU-
compatible or Modbus-ASCII-
compatible device
Note: Or Modbus-RTU command or Modbus-ASCII command.
These commands cannot be sent to the CPU Unit.
Serial
Gateway
CMND(490)
FINS
FINS
FINS
FINS
Network
PLC (Host Link slave)
PLC (Host Link Master)
Serial Communications
Board/Unit with unit
version 1.2 or later
Note: Not supported
for CPU Units Serial
Gateway
Host Link
header
Host Link
terminator
FINS command
sent
Host Link
header
Host Link
terminator
CX-Programmer or other
Programming Device that
uses CX-Server as the
communications driver
121
Expanded System Configuration Section 2-5
2. Supported for CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later and Serial Commu-
nications Boards/Units with unit version 1.2 or later only. For CPU Units,
however, only automatic CompoWay/F connection is possible.
Host Link System Slave
The following system configurations are possible for a Host Link System.
C-mode Commands
FINS Commands
Note In Host Link mode, FINS commands contained between a header and termi-
nator can be sent from the host computer to any PLC on the Network. Com-
munications are possible with PLCs on the same or different types of
interconnected Networks up to two levels away (three levels including the
local level but not including the Host Link connection).
Host Link
Host Link commands
FINS
Host Link header
Host Link terminato
r
Host Link
FINS FINS
Host Link
Host Link header
Host Link
Controller Link Network
Bridge
Controller Link
Network Gateway
Ethernet
Controller Link Network
or Ethernet
Host Link
terminator
122
Expanded System Configuration Section 2-5
Communications from Host Computer
Note In Host Link mode, FINS commands contained between a header and termi-
nator can be sent from the host computer to any PLC on the Network. Com-
munications are possible with PLCs on the same or different types of
interconnected Networks up to two levels away (three levels including the
local level but not including the Host Link connection).
Host Link Master Using a Serial Communications Board/Unit with unit version 1.2 or later and
Serial Gateway mode enables received FINS commands to be enclosed in a
Host Link header and terminator and transmitted to the PLC on the serial line
(Host Link slave).
SEND/RECV
CMND
FINS
Host Link
SEND(090): Sends data to the Host computer.
RECV(098): Receives data from the Host computer.
CMND(490): Executes a specified FINS command.
Host Link header
Host Link terminator
FINS
SEND(090)/
RECV(098)
CMND(490)
FINS
Host Link
Controller Link
Network
Host Link header
Host Link
terminator
SEND(090)/
RECV(098)
CMND(490)
Host Link
Controller Link Network
Controller Link Network
Bridge
Ethernet
Gatewa
y
123
Expanded System Configuration Section 2-5
FINS Messages
FINS (Factory Interface Network Service) messages are commands and
responses that are used as a message service in an OMRON Network. FINS
messages enable the user to control operations such as sending and receiv-
ing data and changing operating modes when necessary. The features of
FINS messages are as follows:
Flexible Communications
FINS messages are defined in the application layer and do not rely on the
physical layer, data link layer, or other lower-level layers. This enables flexible
communications on the CPU bus and different types of networks. Basically,
communications with Ethernet, Controller Link, or Host Link Networks, and
between the CPU Unit and CPU Bus Units is possible via the CPU bus.
Note A TCP/IP header must be attached to the FINS command for an Ethernet Net-
work, and a Host Link header must be attached to the FINS command for a
Host Link Network
Supports Network Relay
Up to three network levels (eight levels for unit version 2.0 or later), including
the local network, can be bypassed to access other Racks.
CMND(490)
FINS
FINS
FINS
FINS
Network
PLC (Host Link slave)
Serial Communications
Board/Unit with unit
version 1.2 or later
Serial
Gateway
PLC (Host Link Master)
Host Link
header
Host Link
terminator
Host Link
header
Host Link
terminator
FINS command
sent
CX-Programmer or other
Programming Device
that uses CX-Server as
the communications
driver
FINS
TCP/IP
FINS
FINS
FINS
Controller Link
Host Link
Ethernet
CPU Bus Uni
t
124
Expanded System Configuration Section 2-5
Note With CS/CJ-series CPU Units Ver. 2.0 or later, remote programming/monitor-
ing is possible up to 8 levels away. Refer to 1-6-2 Improved Read Protection
Using Passwords for details.
Access to CPU Unit Plus Other Devices on Racks
The CPU Unit, CPU Bus Units, personal computers (boards), and other
devices can be identified and specified using unit addresses.
Network-to-Serial Conversion or Network-to-Serial-to-Network
Conversion
Using a Serial Communications Board/Unit with unit version 1.2 or later and
Serial Gateway mode enables received FINS commands to be automatically
converted into CompoWay/F, Modbus-RTU, Modbus-ASCII, or Host Link FINS
commands according to the FINS message. FINS commands that have been
converted into Host Link FINS commands can also be converted back into
Host Link FINS commands.
Network 1 Network 3
Network 2
CPU Bus Unit
CPU Unit
Personal
computer
board
FINS
FINS FINS FINS
FINS
Serial Communications
Unit with unit version 1.2
or later
Network
Serial (Host Link)
PLC
(Host Link slave)
Network
Network
Serial
Gateway
125
Expanded System Configuration Section 2-5
2-5-3 Communications Network System
Communications Networks
The following network systems can be configured when using CJ-series Units.
Ethernet
If an Ethernet Unit is connected to the system, FINS messages can be used
to communicate between the Host computer connected to the Ethernet and
Ethernet
Message Communications
Host computer to PLC
PLC to PLC or Host computer
FTP Server Function
Host computer to PLC
Transmission of files to Memory
Card installed in CPU Unit
Ethernet Unit
Socket Service
Sends/receives data using TCP
or UDP protocol
Controller Link Unit
Controller Link Support Board
Controller Link
Simple Network configuration
(twisted-pair cables/ optical fiber cables)
Data link and message communications
Large-capacity, flexible, and effective
data links
Message communications and large-
capacity data transmission
Links between PLC and personal
computer
Optical Controller Link Units provide a
bypass function when a node fails.
DeviceNet
Multi-vendor network DeviceNet
Remote I/O message communications
Remote I/O: Many points, free allocation
Message communications between PLCs,
DeviceNet and Explicit messages
Multi-level network
Various connection methods
Superior Slaves
Remote I/O Terminals, Remote Adapters,
Analog I/O Terminals, Sensor Terminals,
I/O Link Units, Temperature Input Terminal,
High-density I/O Terminals
Configurator
Information SystemsControl Systems
DeviceNet
High-speed remote I/O
Various connection methods
Many Master Units:
Communications Unit and
CPU Units with Master function
Superior Slaves
Remote I/O Terminals, Remote
I/O Modules, Sensor Amplifier
Terminals, Sensor Terminals,
Bit Chain Terminals
126
Expanded System Configuration Section 2-5
the PLC, or between PLCs. By executing FTP commands for the PLC from
the Host computer connected to the Ethernet, the contents of the files on the
Memory Card installed in the CPU Unit can be read or written (transferred).
Data can be sent and received using UDP and TCP protocols. These func-
tions enable a greater compatibility with information networks.
Controller Link
The Controller Link Network is the basic framework of the OMRON PLC FA
Network. Connecting a Controller Link Unit to the network enables data links
between PLCs, so that data can be shared without programming, and FINS
message communications between PLCs, which enable separate control and
data transfer when required. The Controller Link Network connections use
either twisted-pair cables or optical fiber cables. Data links and message com-
munications are also possible between the PLC and personal computer. Data
links enable large-capacity and free allocations. FINS message communica-
tions also allow large-capacity data transfer.
DeviceNet
DeviceNet is a multi-vendor network consisting of multi-bit control and infor-
mation systems and conforms to the Open Field DeviceNet specification.
Connecting a DeviceNet Master Unit to the network enables remote I/O com-
munications between the PLC and the Slaves on the network. Remote I/O
communications enable large-capacity I/O and user-set allocations. Analog
I/O Terminals are used for the Slaves. Message communications are possible
between PLCs and between the PLC and DeviceNet devices manufactured by
other companies.
FINS FINS
Host computer
FTP command
Ethernet Unit Ethernet Unit
Ethernet
Controller Link Unit Controller Link Unit
Messages
Controller Link
Data link
Free
allocation
Control-
ler Link
Support
Board
127
Expanded System Configuration Section 2-5
CompoBus/S
CompoBus/S is a high-speed ON/OFF bus for remote I/O communications.
Connecting a CompoBus/S Master Unit to the network allows remote I/O
communications between the PLC and Slaves. High-speed communications
are performed with 256 points in a cycle time of 1 ms max.
PROFIBUS-DP
PROFIBUS (PROcess FIeldBUS) is an open fieldbus standard for a wide
range of applications in manufacturing, processing, and building automation.
The Standard, EN 50170 (the Euronorm for field communications), to which
PROFIBUS adheres, ensures vendor independence and transparency of
operation. It enables devices from various manufacturers to intercommunicate
without having to make any special interface adaptations.
Messages
Remote I/O DeviceNet Slaves
DeviceNet
Master Unit
DeviceNet
Master Unit
CompoBus/S Master Unit
CompoBus/S
Remote I/O
PROFIBUS-DP
PROFIBUS-DP Master Unit
Remote I/O
128
Expanded System Configuration Section 2-5
Communications Network Overview
System Network Function Communications Communications
Device
Information
networks
Ethernet Between Host computer
and PLC.
FINS message communica-
tions
Ethernet Unit
Between PLCs.
Between Host computer
and Memory Card installed
in CPU Unit.
FTP server
Between PLC and nodes
with socket service, such as
UNIX computers.
Socket service
Controller Link Between PLC and personal
computer directly con-
nected to the Network.
FINS message communica-
tions
Controller Link Unit
Data link (offset, simple set-
tings)
RS-232C → Control-
ler Link
Between Host Link com-
puter and PLC on the Net-
work.
Host Link commands and
gateway.
RS-232C cables and
Controller Link Unit
Control net-
works
Controller Link Between PLCs. FINS message communica-
tions
Controller Link Unit
DeviceNet FINS message communica-
tions in an open network.
DeviceNet Master Unit
and Configurator
DeviceNet PLC and Network devices
(Slaves).
Large-capacity remote I/O
(fixed or free allocation) in
an open network
CompoBus/S High-speed remote I/O in a
network with OMRON
devices only (fixed alloca-
tions).
CompoBus/S Master
Unit
PROFIBUS-DP Large-capacity remote I/O
(user-set allocation) in an
open network
PROFIBUS-DP Master
Unit and Configurator
129
Unit Current Consumption Section 2-6
Communications Specifications
2-6 Unit Current Consumption
The amount of current/power that can be supplied to the Units mounted in a
Rack is limited by the capacity of the Rack’s Power Supply Unit. Refer to the
following tables when designing your system so that the total current con-
sumption of the mounted Units does not exceed the maximum current for
each voltage group and the total power consumption does not exceed the
maximum for the Power Supply Unit.
2-6-1 CJ-series CPU Racks and Expansion Racks
The following table shows the maximum currents and power that can be sup-
plied by Power Supply Units in CPU Racks and Expansion Racks.
When calculating current/power consumption in a CPU Rack, be sure to
include the power required by the CPU Unit itself, as well as the I/O Control
Unit if one or more Expansion Racks is connected. Likewise, be sure to
include the power required by the I/O Interface Unit when calculating current/
power consumption in an Expansion Rack.
Network Communications Max. baud rate Commu-
nica-
tions
distance
Max.
No.
of
Units
Commu-
nica-
tions
medium
Data link
capacity
(per net-
work)
Max.
remote
I/O
points
Connectable devices
Mes-
sages
Data
link
Re-
mote
I/O
Ethernet Yes --- --- 10 Mbps 2.5 km --- Twisted-
pair
--- --- Host computer-to-
PLC, PLC-to-PLC
100 Mbps 100 m --- --- ---
Controller
Link
Yes Yes --- 2 Mbps Twisted-
pair
cables:
500 m
32 Special
(twisted-
pair)
cables
32,000
words
--- PLC-to-PLC, personal
computer-to-PLC
DeviceNet Yes --- Yes 500 Kbps
Communications
cycle: Approx.
5 ms (128 inputs,
128 outputs)
100 m 63 Special
cables
--- 2,048 PLC-to-Slave
(Slaves: Remote I/O
Terminals, Remote
Adapters. Sensor Ter-
minals, CQM1 I/O Link
Units, Analog Output
Terminals, Analog
Input Terminals)
Compo-
Bus/S
--- --- Yes 750 Kbps
Communications
cycle: Approx.
1 ms max. (128
inputs, 128 out-
puts)
100 m 32 Two-core
wires,
special
flat
cables
--- 256 PLC-to-Slave
(Slaves: Remote I/O
Terminals, Remote I/O
Modules, Sensor Ter-
minals, Sensor Amp
Terminals, Bit Chain
Te r m i n a l s )
PROFI-
BUS-DP
--- --- Yes 12 Mbps Commu-
nications cycle:
Approx. 3.5 ms
max. (128 inputs,
128 outputs)
100 m 125 Special
cables
--- 7,168
words
PLC-to-Slave (Slaves:
All PROFIBUS-DP
slaves)
Power Supply
Unit
Max. current consumption Max. total
power
consumption
5-V group
(Internal logic)
24-V group
(Relays)
24-V group
(Service)
CJ1W-PA205R 5.0 A 0.8 A None 25 W
CJ1W-PA205C 5.0 A 0.8 A None 25 W
CJ1W-PA202 2.8 A 0.4 A None 14 W
130
Unit Current Consumption Section 2-6
2-6-2 Example Calculations
Example 1: CPU Rack In this example, the following Units are mounted to a CPU Rack with a CJ1W-
PA205R Power Supply Unit.
Current Consumption
Power Consumption
1.92 A × 5 V + 0.096 A × 24 V
= 9.60 W + 2.304 W
= 11.904 W (≤25 W)
Example 2: Expansion
Rack
In this example, the following Units are mounted to a CJ-series Expansion
Rack with a CJ1W-PA205R Power Supply Unit.
Current Consumption
Power Consumption
1.41 A × 5 V = 7.05 W (≤25 W)
CJ1W-PD025 5.0 A 0.8 A None 25 W
CJ1W-PD022 2.0 A 0.4 A None 19.6 W
Power Supply
Unit
Max. current consumption Max. total
power
consumption
5-V group
(Internal logic)
24-V group
(Relays)
24-V group
(Service)
Unit Model Quantity Voltage group
5-V DC 24-V DC
CPU Unit CJ1G-CPU45H 1 0.910 A ---
I/O Control Unit CJ1W-IC101 1 0.020 A
Input Units CJ1W-ID211 2 0.080 A ---
CJ1W-ID231 2 0.090 A ---
Output Units CJ1W-OC201 2 0.090 A 0.048 A
Special I/O Unit CJ1W-DA041 1 0.120 A ---
CPU Bus Unit CJ1W-CLK21 1 0.350 A ---
Group Current consumption
5 V DC 0.910 A + 0.020 A + 0.080 × 2 + 0.090 A × 2 + 0.090 A × 2 +
0.120 A + 0.350 A = 1.92 A (≤5.0 A)
24 V DC 0.048 A x 2 = 0.096 (≤0.8 A)
Unit Model Quantity Voltage group
5-V DC 24-V DC
I/O Interface Unit CJ1W-II101 1 0.130 A ---
Input Units CJ1W-ID211 2 0.080 A ---
Output Units CJ1W-OD231 8 0.140 A ---
Group Current consumption
5 V DC 0.130 A + 0.080 A × 2 + 0.140 A × 8 = 1.41 A (≤5.0 A)
24 V DC ---
131
Unit Current Consumption Section 2-6
2-6-3 Current Consumption Tables
5-V DC Voltage Group
Note The NT-AL001 Link Adapter consumes 0.15 A/Unit when used.
Add 0.04 A for each CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter that is used.
Add 0.20 A for each NV3W-M@20L Programmable Terminal that is used.
CJ-series Basic I/O Units
Name Model Current consumption (A)
CPU Units (including power
supplied to Programming
Console)
CJ1H-CPU67H-R 0.99 (See note.)
CJ1H-CPU66H-R 0.99 (See note.)
CJ1H-CPU65H-R 0.99 (See note.)
CJ1G-CPU64H-R 0.99 (See note.)
CJ1H-CPU67H 0.99 (See note.)
CJ1H-CPU66H 0.99 (See note.)
CJ1H-CPU65H 0.99 (See note.)
CJ1G-CPU45H 0.91 (See note.)
CJ1G-CPU44H 0.91 (See note.)
CJ1G-CPU43H 0.91 (See note.)
CJ1G-CPU42H 0.91 (See note.)
CJ1M-CPU23 0.64 (See note.)
CJ1M-CPU22 0.64 (See note.)
CJ1M-CPU21 0.64 (See note.)
CJ1M-CPU13 0.58 (See note.)
CJ1M-CPU12 0.58 (See note.)
CJ1M-CPU11 0.58 (See note.)
CJ1G-CPU45 0.91 (See note.)
CJ1G-CPU44 0.91 (See note.)
I/O Control Unit CJ1W-IC101 0.02
I/O Interface Unit CJ1W-II101 0.13
End Cover CJ1W-TER01 Included with CPU Unit or I/O Inter-
face Unit power supply.
Category Name Model Current
consumption (A)
Basic Input Units DC Input Units CJ1W-ID201 0.08
CJ1W-ID211 0.08
CJ1W-ID231 0.09
CJ1W-ID232 0.09
CJ1W-ID261 0.09
CJ1W-ID262 0.09
AC Input Units CJ1W-IA111 0.09
CJ1W-IA201 0.08
Interrupt Input Unit CJ1W-INT01 0.08
Quick-response
Input Unit
CJ1W-IDP01 0.08
B7A Interface Unit CJ1W-B7A14 0.07
132
Unit Current Consumption Section 2-6
CJ-series Special I/O Units
Basic Output Units Transistor Output
Units
CJ1W-OD201 0.09
CJ1W-OD202 0.11
CJ1W-OD203 0.10
CJ1W-OD204 0.10
CJ1W-OD211 0.10
CJ1W-OD212 0.10
CJ1W-OD231 0.14
CJ1W-OD232 0.15
CJ1W-OD233 0.14
CJ1W-OD261 0.17
CJ1W-OD262 0.17
CJ1W-OD263 0.17
Relay Output Units CJ1W-OC201 0.09
CJ1W-OC211 0.11
Triac Output Units CJ1W-OA201 0.22
B7A Interface Unit CJ1W-B7A04 0.07
Basic Mixed I/O Units 24-V DC Input/Tran-
sistor Output Units
CJ1W-MD231 0.13
CJ1W-MD232 0.13
CJ1W-MD233 0.13
CJ1W-MD261 0.14
CJ1W-MD263 0.14
TTL I/O Unit CJ1W-MD563 0.19
B7A Interface Unit CJ1W-B7A22 0.07
Category Name Model Current
consumption (A)
Category Name Model Current
consumption (A)
Special I/O Units Analog Input Units CJ1W-AD081/
AD081-V1
0.42
CJ1W-AD041-V1 0.42
Analog Output
Units
CJ1W-DA041 0.12
CJ1W-DA021 0.12
CJ1W-DA08V 0.14
CJ1W-DA08C 0.14
Analog I/O Units CJ1W-MAD42 0.58
Isolated-type Ther-
mocouple Input
Units
CJ1W-PTS51 0.25
CJ1W-PTS15 0.18
Isolated-type Tem-
perature Resis-
tance Input Units
CJ1W-PTS52 0.25
CJ1W-PTS16 0.18
DC Input Unit CJ1W-PDC15 0.18
Temperature Con-
trol Units
CJ1W-TC@@@ 0.25
Position Control
Units
CJ1W-NC113/NC133/
NC213/NC233
0.25
CJ1W-NC413/NC433 0.36
High-speed
Counter Unit
CJ1W-CT021 0.28
ID Sensor Units CJ1W-V600C11 0.26
CJ1W-V600C12 0.32
133
Unit Current Consumption Section 2-6
CJ-series CPU Bus Units
Note The NT-AL001 Link Adapter consumes 0.15 A/Unit when used.
Add 0.04 A for each CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter that is used.
Add 0.20 A for each NV3W-M@20L Programmable Terminal that is used.
Special I/O Units CompoBus/S Mas-
ter Unit
CJ1W-SRM21 0.15
CompoNet Master
Unit
CJ1W-CRM21 0.40
Category Name Model Current
consumption (A)
Category Name Model Current
consumption (A)
CPU Bus Units Controller Link
Unit
CJ1W-CLK21-V1 0.35
Serial Communi-
cations Unit
CJ1W-SCU41-V1 0.38 (See note.)
CJ1W-SCU21-V1 0.28 (See note.)
CJ1W-SCU31-V1 0.38
Ethernet Unit CJ1W-ETN11 0.38
CJ1W-ETN21 0.37
FL-net Unit CJ1W-FLN22 0.37
DeviceNet Unit CJ1W-DRM21 0.29
Position Control
Units supporting
MECHATROLINK-
II communications
CJ1W-NCF71 0.36
Motion Control
Units supporting
MECHATROLINK-
II communications
CJ1W-MCH71 0.6
SYSMAC SPU
Unit (High-speed
Storage and Pro-
cessing Unit)
CJ1W-SPU01 0.56
134
CPU Bus Unit Setting Area Capacity Section 2-7
CJ-series
Communications
Adapters
Current Consumptions for 24-V Supply
2-7 CPU Bus Unit Setting Area Capacity
Settings for most CPU Bus Units are stored in the CPU Bus Unit Setting Area
in the CPU Unit. Refer to 9-22 Parameter Areas for details. The CPU Bus
Units are allocated the required number of works for settings from this area.
There is a limit to the capacity of the CPU Bus Unit Setting Area of 10,752
bytes (10 Kbytes). The system must be designed so that the number of words
used in the CPU Bus Unit Setting Area by all of the CPU Bus Units not exceed
this capacity. If the wrong combination of Units is used, the capacity will be
exceeded and either Units will operate from default settings only or will not
operate at all.
The following table shows the number of bytes required in the CPU Bus Unit
Setting Area by each Unit. Any Unit with a usage of “0” does not use the CPU
Bus Unit Setting Area at all.
Category Name Model Current consump-
tion (A)
Communica-
tions Adapters
RS-422A Converter CJ1W-CIF11 0.04
Category Name Model Current consumption (A)
Basic Output
Units
Relay Contact
Output Units
CJ1W-OC201 0.048
(0.006 x number of ON points)
CJ1W-OC211 0.096
(0.006 x number of ON points)
Special I/O
Units
ID Sensor Units CJ1W-V600C11 0.12
CJ1W-V600C12 0.24
Advanced
Motion Control
Unit
CJ1W-MCH71 0.3
Name Model number Capacity in bytes
Controller Link Unit CJ1W-CLK21-V1 512
Serial Communications Unit CJ1W-SCU21/31/
41-V1
0
Ethernet Unit CJ1W-ETN11 412
CJ1W-ETN21 994
FL-net Unit CJ1W-FLN21 998
DeviceNet Unit CJ1W-DRM21 0
Position Control Unit CJ1W-NCF71 0
Motion Control Unit CJ1W-MCH71 0
Storage and Processing Unit CJ1W-SPU01 0
135
I/O Table Settings List Section 2-8
2-8 I/O Table Settings List
The following settings are used in the I/O tables on the CX-Programmer.
2-8-1 CJ-series Basic I/O Units
Note If the selected Unit is incorrect, an I/O Table Setting error will be generated.
Name Model Unit type setting Addresses
per Unit
Input
Words
Output
Words
DC Input Units CJ1W-ID201 8pt Unit − 8pt Input --- 1 0
CJ1W-ID211 16pt Unit − 16pt Input --- 1 0
CJ1W-ID231 32pt Unit − 32pt Input --- 2 0
CJ1W-ID232 32pt Unit − 32pt Input --- 2 0
CJ1W-ID261 64pt Unit − 64pt Input --- 4 0
CJ1W-ID262 64pt Unit − 64pt Input --- 4 0
AC Input Units CJ1W-IA111 16pt Unit − 16pt Input --- 1 0
CJ1W-IA201 16pt Unit − 16pt Input --- 1 0
24-V DC Input/Transistor Output Units CJ1W-MD231 32pt Unit − 32pt Mixed --- 1 1
CJ1W-MD232 --- 1 1
CJ1W-MD233 --- 1 1
CJ1W-MD261 64pt Unit − 64pt Mixed --- 2 2
CJ1W-MD263 --- 2 2
TTL I/O Unit CJ1W-MD563 64pt Unit − 64pt Mixed --- 2 2
B7A Interface Unit CJ1W-B7A14 64pt Unit − 64pt Input --- 4 0
CJ1W-B7A04 64pt Unit − 64pt Output --- 0 4
CJ1W-B7A22 64pt Unit − 64pt Mixed --- 2 2
Interrupt Input Unit CJ1W-INT01 Interrupt Unit (16 Bit) --- 1 0
High-speed Input Units CJ1W-IDP01 16pt Unit − 16pt Input --- 1 0
Relay Output Units CJ1W-OC201 8pt Unit − 8pt Output --- 0 1
CJ1W-OC211 16pt Unit − 16pt Output --- 0 1
Triac Output Unit CJ1W-OA201 8pt Unit − 8pt Output --- 0 1
Transistor Output Units with sinking outputs CJ1W-OD201 8pt Unit − 8pt Output --- 0 1
CJ1W-OD203 8pt Unit − 8pt Output --- 0 1
CJ1W-OD211 16pt Unit − 16pt Output --- 0 1
CJ1W-OD231 32pt Unit − 32pt Output --- 0 2
CJ1W-OD233 32pt Unit − 32pt Output --- 0 2
CJ1W-OD261 64pt Unit − 64pt Output --- 0 4
CJ1W-OD263 64pt Unit − 64pt Output --- 0 4
Transistor Output Units with sourcing out-
puts
CJ1W-OD202 8pt Unit − 8pt Output --- 0 1
CJ1W-OD204 8pt Unit − 8pt Output --- 0 1
CJ1W-OD212 16pt Unit − 16pt Output --- 0 1
CJ1W-OD232 32pt Unit − 32pt Output --- 0 2
CJ1W-OD262 64pt Unit − 64pt Output --- 0 4
136
I/O Table Settings List Section 2-8
2-8-2 CJ-series Special I/O Units
Note If the selected Unit, the number of input words, or the number of output words
is incorrect, a Special I/O Unit Setup error will be generated.
Name Model Unit type setting Addresses
per Unit
Input
Words
Output
Words
Analog Input Unit CJ1W-AD041 CS/CJ SIO Unit − Analog Input Unit 1 9 1
CJ1W-AD081(-V1) 1 9 1
Analog Output Unit CJ1W-DA021 CS/CJ SIO Unit − Analog Output Unit 1 1 9
CJ1W-DA041 1 1 9
CJ1W-DA08V 1 1 9
Analog I/O Units CJ1W-MAD42 CS/CJ SIO Unit − Analog Input/Output Unit 1 5 5
Temperature Control
Units
CJ1W-TC001 CS/CJ SIO Unit − Temperature Control
Unit
2146
CJ1W-TC002 2 14 6
CJ1W-TC003 2 14 6
CJ1W-TC004 2 14 6
CJ1W-TC101 2 14 6
CJ1W-TC102 2 14 6
CJ1W-TC103 2 14 6
CJ1W-TC104 2 14 6
Position Control Units CJ1W-NC113 CS/CJ SIO Unit − Numerical Control Unit 1 3 2
CJ1W-NC213 1 6 4
CJ1W-NC413 2 12 8
CJ1W-NC133 1 3 2
CJ1W-NC233 1 6 4
CJ1W-NC433 2 12 8
PROFIBUS-DP Slave
Unit
CJ1W-PRT21 CS/CJ SIO Unit − Other SIO Unit 4 26 14
ID Sensor Units CJ1W-V600C11 CS/CJ SIO Unit − Other SIO Unit 1 10 ---
CJ1W-V600C12 2 20 ---
High-speed Counter
Unit
CJ1W-CT021 CS/CJ SIO Unit − High Speed Counter
Unit
42614
CompoBus/S Master
Unit
CJ1W-SRM21 CS/CJ SIO Unit − CompoBus/S Master
Unit
164
2128
CompoNet Master Unit CJ1W-CRM21 CS/CJ SIO Unit − CompoNet
Master Unit
Comm.
Mode
No. 0
2119
No. 1 4 21 17
No. 2 8 41 33
No. 3 8 45 25
No. 8 1 Variable Variable
137
I/O Table Settings List Section 2-8
2-8-3 CJ-series CPU Bus Units
Note The DeviceNet Unit is not support by CX-Programmer version 2.0 or earlier,
and I/O tables containing the DeviceNet Unit cannot be created with these
versions. Create the tables online.
Unit type setting Name Model
Communications Controller Link Unit CJ1W-CLK21-V1
CJ1W-CLK21
Serial Communications Unit CJ1W-SCU41-V1
CJ1W-SCU31-V1
CJ1W-SCU21-V1
CJ1W-SCU41
CJ1W-SCU21
Ethernet Unit CJ1W-ETN11
CJ1W-ETN21
FL-net Unit CJ1W-FLN22
DeviceNet Unit CJ1W-DRM21
Position Control Unit Position Control Unit CJ1W-NCF71
Motion Controllers Motion Control Unit CJ1W-MCH71
General-purpose
Devices
Storage and Processing Unit CJ1W-SPU01
138
I/O Table Settings List Section 2-8
139
SECTION 3
Nomenclature, Functions, and Dimensions
This section provides the names of components and their functions for various Units. Unit dimensions are also provided.
3-1 CPU Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
3-1-1 Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
3-1-2 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
3-1-3 CPU Unit Memory Block Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
3-1-4 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
3-2 File Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
3-2-1 Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
3-2-2 Files Handled by CPU Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
3-2-3 Initializing File Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
3-2-4 Using File Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
3-2-5 Memory Card Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
3-2-6 Installing and Removing the Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
3-3 Programming Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
3-3-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
3-3-2 Programming Consoles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
3-3-3 CX-Programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
3-3-4 Peripheral Port Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
3-3-5 RS-232C Port Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
3-4 Power Supply Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
3-4-1 Power Supply Units Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
3-4-2 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
3-4-3 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
3-4-4 Power Supply Confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
3-4-5 Replacement Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
3-5 I/O Control Units and I/O Interface Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
3-5-1 Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
3-5-2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
3-5-3 Component Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
3-5-4 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
3-6 CJ-series Basic I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
3-6-1 CJ-series Basic I/O Units with Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
3-6-2 CJ-series 32/64-point Basic I/O Units with Connectors. . . . . . . . . . 186
3-7 B7A Interface Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
3-7-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
3-7-2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
3-7-3 Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
3-7-4 B7A Communications Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
3-7-5 Common Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
3-7-6 I/O Memory Allocations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
3-7-7 Transmission Error Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
3-7-8 Parts and Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
3-7-9 Preparing and Connecting Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
3-7-10 Connection Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
3-7-11 Dimensions (Unit: mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
140
CPU Units Section 3-1
3-1 CPU Units
3-1-1 Models
CJ1-H CPU Units
CJ1M CPU Units
CJ1 CPU Units
I/O points Expansion
Racks
Program
capacity
Data Memory
(DM + EM)
LD instruction
processing
time
Model Weight
2,560 3 max. 250 Ksteps 448 Kwords 0.016 µs CJ1H-CPU67H-R 200 g
max.
120 Ksteps 256 Kwords CJ1H-CPU66H-R
60 Ksteps 128 Kwords CJ1H-CPU65H-R
30 Ksteps 64 Kwords CJ1G-CPU64H-R
250 Ksteps 448 Kwords 0.02 µs CJ1H-CPU67H
120 Ksteps 256 Kwords CJ1H-CPU66H
60 Ksteps 128 Kwords CJ1H-CPU65H
60 Ksteps 128 Kwords 0.04 µs CJ1G-CPU45H 190 g
max.
1,280 3 max. 30 Ksteps 64 Kwords CJ1G-CPU44H
960 2 max. 20 Ksteps 64 Kwords CJ1G-CPU43H
10 Ksteps 64 Kwords CJ1G-CPU42H
I/O points Expansion
Racks
Program
capacity
Data Memory
(DM + EM)
LD instruction
processing
time
Pulse I/O Model Weight
640 1 20 Ksteps 32 Kwords 0.1 µs Yes CJ1M-
CPU23
170 g
max.
320 None 10 Ksteps CJ1M-
CPU22
160 5 Ksteps CJ1M-
CPU21
640 1 20 Ksteps No CJ1M-
CPU13
120 g
max.
320 None 10 Ksteps CJ1M-
CPU12
160 5 Ksteps CJ1M-
CPU1
I/O points Expansion
Racks
Program
capacity
Data Memory
(DM + EM)
LD instruction
processing
time
Model Weight
1,280 3 max. 60 Ksteps 128 Kwords 0.08 µs CJ1G-CPU45 200 g
max.
30 Ksteps 64 Kwords CJ1G-CPU44
141
CPU Units Section 3-1
3-1-2 Components
CJ1-H and CJ1 CPU Units
Note Always connect the connector covers to protect them from dust when not
using the peripheral or RS-232C port.
CONTROLLER
CJ1G-CPU44
SYSMAC
PROGRAMMABLE
ERR/ALM
RUN
COMM
INH
PRPHL
OPEN
PERIPHERAL
BUSY
MCPWR
PORT
LED Indicators
DIP Switch
(Inside the battery compartment)
Used for initial settings.
Battery Compartment
Memory Card Power
Supply Switch
Press the power supply
switch to disconnect
power before removing
the Memory Card. Also,
press the Memory Card
Power Supply Switch to
perform an easy backup
operation.
Memory Card Eject Button
Press the eject button to remove the
Memory Card from the CPU Unit.
Memory Card Indicators
MCPWR (green): Lit when power is
supplied to Memory Card.
BUSY (orange): Lit when Memory
Card is being accessed.
Peripheral Port
Connected to Programming Devices,
such as a Programming Console or host computers.
Memory Card Connector
Connects the Memory Card to the CPU Unit
RS-232C Port
Connected to Programming Devices
(excluding Programming Consoles),
Host Computers, general-purpose external
devices, Programmable Terminals, and other
devices.
142
CPU Units Section 3-1
CJ1M CPU Units
Models without Built-in I/O (CJ1M-CPU1@)
Note The nomenclature and functions are the same as for the CJ1 and CJ1-H CPU
Units above.
Models with Built-in I/O (CJ1M-CPU2@)
COMM
BATTERY
SW SETTING
OPEN
CONTROLLER
CPU12
BKUP
SYSMAC
PROGRAMMABLE INH
PRPHL
CJM1 ERR/ALM
RUN
PERIPHERAL
PORT
MCPWR
BUSY
PERIPHERAL
PORT
MCPWR
BUSY
IN
OUT
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
5
8
9
3
4
5
6
7
SYSMAC
PROGRAMMABLE
ERR/ALM
RUN
COMM
INH
PRPHL
BKUP
CPU22
CONTROLLER
OPEN
CJ1M
SW SETTING
BATTERY
OUT
IN
I/O Indicator
Indicates ON/OFF status
of signals to actual built-in
inputs and outputs.
Built-in I/O
MIL connector (40 pins)
143
CPU Units Section 3-1
Note All nomenclature and functions other than those shown in the above diagram
are the same as for CJ1 and CJ1-H CPU Units.
Indicators The following table describes the LED indicators located on the front panel of
the CPU Units.
Indicator Color Status Meaning
RUN Green ON PLC is operating normally in MONITOR or RUN mode.
Flashing System download mode error or DIP switch settings error.
OFF PLC has stopped operating while in PROGRAM mode, or has stopped operating
due to a fatal error, or is downloading data from the system.
ERR/ALM Red ON A fatal error has occurred (including FALS instruction execution), or a hardware
error (watchdog timer error) has occurred.
The CPU Unit will stop operating, and the outputs from all Output Units will turn
OFF.
Flashing A non-fatal error has occurred (including FAL instruction execution)
The CPU Unit will continue operating.
OFF CPU Unit is operating normally.
INH Orange ON Output OFF Bit (A50015) has been turned ON. The outputs from all Output Units
will turn OFF.
OFF Output OFF Bit (A50015) has been turned OFF.
PRPHL Orange Flashing CPU Unit is communicating (sending or receiving) via the peripheral port.
OFF CPU Unit is not communicating via the peripheral port.
COMM Orange Flashing CPU Unit is communicating (sending or receiving) via the RS-232C port.
OFF CPU Unit is not communicating via the RS-232C port.
BKUP
(CJ1-H CPU
Units only)
Orange ON User program and parameter area data is being backed up to flash memory in the
CPU Unit or being restored from flash memory.
Note Do not turn OFF the power supply to the PLC while this indicator is lit.
OFF Data is not being written to flash memory.
ERR/ALM
RUN
COMM
INH
PRPHL
BKUP
Indicator Color Status Meaning
MCPWR Green ON Power is being supplied to the Memory Card.
Flashing Flashes once: Easy backup read, write, or verify normal
Flashes five times: Easy backup write malfunction
Flashes three times: Easy backup write warning
Flashes continuously: Easy backup read or verify malfunction
OFF Power is not being supplied to the Memory Card.
BUSY Orange Flashing Memory Card is being accessed.
OFF Memory Card is not being accessed.
OPEN
PERIPHERAL
BUSY
MCPWR
144
CPU Units Section 3-1
DIP Switch The CJ-series CPU Unit has an 8-pin DIP switch that is used to set basic
operational parameters for the CPU Unit. The DIP switch is located under the
cover of the battery compartment. The DIP switch pin settings are described
in the following table.
Note 1. The following data cannot be overwritten when pin 1 is ON:
• All parts of the user program (programs in all tasks)
• All data in the parameter area (such as the PLC Setup and I/O table)
When pin 1 is ON, the user program and parameter area will not be cleared
when the memory clear operation is performed from a Programming De-
vice.
2. The CPU Unit will not enter any mode except PROGRAM mode after back-
ing up data to a Memory Card using DIP switch pin 7. To enter RUN or
MONITOR mode, turn OFF the power supply, turn OFF pin 7, and then re-
start the PLC. This will enable changing the operating mode as normal.
Pin no. Setting Function Usage Default
1 ON Writing disabled for user program memory.
(See note.)
Used to prevent programs from being acci-
dently overwritten from Programming
Devices (including Programming Console).
OFF
OFF Writing enabled for user program memory.
2 ON The user program is automatically trans-
ferred from the Memory Card when power is
turned ON.
Used to store the programs in the Memory
Card to switch operations, or to automatically
transfer programs at power-up (Memory
Card ROM operation).
Note When pin 7 is ON, easy backup read-
ing from the Memory Card is given pri-
ority, so even if pin 2 is ON, the user
program is not automatically trans-
ferred from the Memory Card when
power is turned ON.
OFF
OFF The user program is not automatically trans-
ferred from the Memory Card when power is
turned ON.
3 --- Not used. --- OFF
4 ON Peripheral port communications parameters
set in the PLC Setup are used.
Turn ON to use the peripheral port for a
device other than Programming Console or
CX-Programmer (Peripheral bus only).
OFF
OFF Peripheral port communications parameters
set using Programming Console or CX-Pro-
grammer (Peripheral bus only) are used.
5 ON RS-232C port communications parameters
set using a CX-Programmer (Peripheral bus
only) are used.
Turn ON to use the RS-232C port for a Pro-
gramming Device.
OFF
OFF RS-232C port communications parameters
set in the PLC Setup are used.
6 ON User-defined pin. Turns OFF the User DIP
Switch Pin Flag (A39512).
Set pin 6 to ON or OFF and use A39512 in
the program to create a user-defined condi-
tion without using an I/O Unit.
OFF
OFF User-defined pin. Turns ON the User DIP
Switch Pin Flag (A39512).
7 ON Writing from the CPU Unit to the Memory
Card.
Press and hold the Memory Card Power
Supply Switch for three seconds.
OFF
Restoring from the Memory Card to the CPU
Unit.
To read from the Memory Card to the CPU
Unit, turn ON the PLC power.
This operation is given priority over automatic
transfer (pin 2 is ON) when power is ON.
OFF Verifying contents of Memory Card. Press and hold the Memory Card Power
Supply Switch for three seconds.
8 OFF Always OFF. OFF
145
CPU Units Section 3-1
Note The language displayed for the CJ-series CPU Units is not set on the DIP
switch, but rather is set using Programming Console keys.
3-1-3 CPU Unit Memory Block Map
The memory of CJ-series CPU Units is configured in the following blocks.
• I/O Memory: The data areas accessible from the user program
• User Memory: The user program and parameter areas (See note 1.)
CPU Unit memory is backed up as shown in the following table.
Areas Backed Up by Battery
If the battery voltage is low, the data in these areas will not be stable. The
CPM2A-BAT01 Battery is used for CJ1-H and CJ1 CPU Units and the CJ1W-
BAT01 Battery is used for CJ1M CPU Units.
Areas Backed Up by Flash Memory
The data in these areas will be held even if the battery voltage is low. The
CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Units have an internal flash memory to which the user
program and parameter area data are backed up whenever the user memory
is written to, including data transfers and online editing from a Programming
Device (CX-Programmer or Programming Console), data transfers from a
Memory Card, etc. The user program and the parameter area data will be
held when using a CJ1-H or CJ1M CPU Unit.
The internal flash memory of CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Units with unit version
3.0 also contains a comment memory and FB source memory area. The com-
ment memory is used to store symbol table files, comment files, and program
index files (if comment memory is selected as the transfer destination when
transferring projects from a CX-Programmer Ver. 5.0). The FB program mem-
ory area is used to store function block program data.
CONTROLLER
CJ1G-CPU44
SYSMAC
PROGRAMMABLE
ERR/ALM
RUN
COMM
INH
PRPHL
OPEN
BUSY
MCPWR
ON
Area CJ1-H CPU Units CJ1M CPU Units CJ1 CPU Units
User memory Flash memory Flash memory Battery
I/O memory Battery Battery Battery
146
CPU Units Section 3-1
Note 1. The Parameter Area stores system information for the CPU Unit, such as
the PLC Setup. An attempt to access the Parameter Area by an instruction
will generate an illegal access error.
CJ1 CPU Unit
Built-in RAM
Parameter Area
(See note 1.)
I/O Memory Area
Drive 1: EM file
memory (See note 2.)
Battery
Backup
Drive 0: Memory
Card
(flash memory)
File memory
User program
The battery life is 5
years at an ambient
temperature of 25°C.
CJ1-H or CJ1M CPU Unit
Built-in RAM
I/O Memory Area
Battery
Backup
Drive 0: Memory
Card
(flash memory)
File memory
User program
User program
Parameter Area
Flash memory
(CJ1-H and CJ1M
CPU Units only)
Auto
write The battery life is 5 years at an
ambient temperature of 25°C.
Auto
write Parameter Area
(See note 1.)
Drive 1: EM file
memory (See note 2.)
Comment memory area
FB source memory area
Automatically backed up to flash memory whenever a write
operation for the user memory area (user program or parameter
area) is performed from a Programming Device.
Used to store symbol table files, comment files, and program
index files. CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later, Memory
Card, EM file memory, or comment memory can be selected as
the destination when transferring projects from CX-Programmer
Ver. 5.0.
For CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later, when transferring
projects containing function blocks from the CX-Programmer,
the function block program information is automatically stored
in the FB program memory area.
147
CPU Units Section 3-1
2. Part of the EM (Extended Data Memory) Area can be converted to file
memory to handle data files and program files in RAM memory format,
which has the same format as Memory Cards. Both EM file memory or
memory cards can be treated as file memory (i.e., can be used to store
files).
Opening the Battery
Compartment Cover
Insert a small flat-blade screwdriver into the opening at the bottom of the bat-
tery compartment cover and lift open the cover.
Insert a small flat-blade
screwdriver into the opening
at the bottom of the battery
compartment cover and lift
open the cover.
ON
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Battery
DIP switch
Orient the battery as shown below.
Place the cable so that it is at
an angle to the upper right.
148
CPU Units Section 3-1
3-1-4 Dimensions
CJ1-H and CJ1 CPU Units
CJ1M CPU Units
CPU Units without Built-in I/O (CJ1M-CPU1@)
CONTROLLER
CJ1G-CPU44
SYSMAC
PROGRAMMABLE
ERR/ALM
RUN
COMM
INH
PRPHL
OPEN
PERIPHERAL
BUSY
MCPWR
PORT
65
62 73.9
2.7
2.7
90
90 2.7
2.7
31
65
73.9
149
File Memory Section 3-2
CPU Units with Built-in I/O (CJ1M-CPU2@)
3-2 File Memory
For CJ-series CPU Units, the Memory Card and a specified part of the EM
Area can be used to store files. All user programs, the I/O Memory Area, and
the Parameter Area can be stored as files.
Note 1. A Memory Card can be written up to approximately 100,000 times.
2. The HMC-AP001 Memory Card Adapter is shown below.
2.7 2.7
9
48.75
83.7
6
83.6
File memory Memory
type
Memory capacity Model
Flash
memory
30 Mbytes HMC-EF372
64 Mbytes HMC-EF7672
128 Mbytes HMC-EF7183
(See note 3.)
RAM The maximum capac-
ity of the CPU Unit’s
EM Area (e.g., the
maximum capacity for
a CPU66 is
448 Kbytes)
The specified bank
(set in the PLC Setup)
to the last bank of the
EM Area in the I/O
Memory.
Comment memory
(CS/CJ-series CPU Units
with unit version 3.0 or
later only)
CPU Unit’s
internal
flash mem-
ory
Comment files
CPU66H/67H:
128 Kbytes
Other CPU Units:
64 Kbytes
CX-Programmer rung
comments and other
comments
Program index files
CPU66H/67H:
128 Kbytes
Other CPU Units:
64 Kbytes
CX-Programmer sec-
tion names, section
comments, and pro-
gram comments
Symbol table files
CPU45H/65H66H/
67H: 128 Kbytes
Other CPU Units:
64 Kbytes
CX-Programmer glo-
bal symbol tables,
local symbol tables,
and settings for auto-
matically allocated
areas.
Memory Card
Bank 0
Bank n
Bank 6
EM file
memory
EM file memory
(CJ1 and CJ1-H
CPU Units only.)
150
File Memory Section 3-2
3. The HMC-EF183 cannot be used with some CPU Units. Before ordering
the HMC-EF183, confirm applicability using the information in Precautions
on Applicable Units on page 150.
3-2-1 Memory Card
Basic Specifications
Precautions on Applicable Units
The HMC-EF183 Memory Card cannot be used with the following CPU Units
and PTs. Confirm applicability when ordering.
1. CS-series CPU Units
• All CS1G-CPU@@H and CS1H-CPU@@H CPU Units manufactured
before January 9, 2002 (lot number 020108 and earlier)
• All CS1G-CPU@@, CS1G-CPU@@-V1, CS1H-CPU@@, and CS1H-
CPU@@-V1 CPU Units (i.e., those without an H in the model number suf-
fix: CPU@@H)
2. CJ-series CPU Units
• All CJ1G-CPU@@H and CJ1H-CPU@@H CPU Units manufactured before
January 9, 2002 (lot number 020108 and earlier)
• All CJ1G-CPU@@ CPU Units (i.e., those without an H in the model num-
ber suffix: CPU@@H)
3. NS7-series PTs
All NS7-SV0@ PTs manufactured before May 9, 2002 (lot number 0852
and earlier)
Memory Card Recognition Time
Several seconds is normally required for the CPU Unit to recognize the Mem-
ory Card after it is inserted. The required time depends on the PLC's cycle
time, the Memory Card Capacity, the number of files stored on the Memory
Card, and other factors.
Item Previous products
Model number HMC-EF183 HMC-EF672 HMC-EF372
Memory Card
capacity
128 Mbytes 64 Mbytes 30 Mbytes
Common
specifications
Dimensions 42.8 × 36.4 × 3.3 mm (W × H × T)
Weight 15 g max.
Current consumption Approx. 30 mA (when used with PLC)
Environmental specifi-
cations
Same a general specifications of PLC
No. of writes 100,000 (guaranteed value)
Factory
specifications
No. of files writable to
root directory
511
File system FAT16
151
File Memory Section 3-2
The recognition times given in the following table are guidelines for a CS1H-
CPU@@H CPU Unit with a PLC cycle time of 0.4 ms and all PLC Setup
parameters set to the default values.
3-2-2 Files Handled by CPU Unit
Files are ordered and stored in the Memory Card or EM file memory accord-
ing to the file name and the extension attached to it.
General-use Files
Files Transferred
Automatically at Startup
Including Parameter File
Excluding Parameter File (CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or Later)
Model HMC-EF183 HMC-EF672 HMC-EF372
Recognition time 8 s 5 s 3 s
File type Contents File name Extension
Data files Specified
range in I/O
memory
Binary ********
(See note 1.)
.IOM
Text .T XT
CSV .CSV
Program files All user programs .OBJ
Parameter
files
PLC Setup, registered I/O
tables, routing tables, CPU Bus
Unit settings, and Controller
Link data link tables
.STD
File type Contents File name Extension
Data files DM area data (stores data for
specified number of words start-
ing from D20000)
AUTOEXEC .IOM
DM area data (stores data for
specified number of words start-
ing from D00000)
ATEXECDM .IOM
EM area for bank No. @ (stores
data for specified number of
words starting from E@_00000)
ATEXECE@.IOM
Program file All user programs AUTOEXEC .OBJ
Parameter file PLC Setup, registered I/O tables,
routing tables, CPU Bus Unit set-
tings, and Controller Link data
link tables
AUTOEXEC .STD
File type Contents File name Extension
Data files DM area data (stores data for
specified number of words start-
ing from D20000)
REPLACE
(CPU Unit Ver.
2.0 or later only)
.IOM
DM area data (stores data for
specified number of words start-
ing from D00000)
REPLCDM
(CPU Unit Ver.
2.0 or later only)
.IOM
EM area for bank No. @ (stores
data for specified number of
words starting from E@_00000)
REPLCE@
(CPU Unit Ver.
2.0 or later only)
.IOM
Program file All user programs REPLACE
(CPU Unit Ver.
2.0 or later only)
.OBJ
Parameter
file
--- Not needed ---
152
File Memory Section 3-2
Easy Backup Files
Note 1. Specify 8 ASCII characters. For a file name with less than 8 characters,
add spaces (20 hex).
2. Always specify the name of files to be transferred automatically at power-
up as AUTOEXEC.
3. Easy backup file names must be named BACKUP@@.
4. Supported for CS/CJ-series CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later only.
3-2-3 Initializing File Memory
File type Contents File name Extension
Data files Words allocated to Special I/O
Units, and CPU Bus Units in the
DM area
BACKUP .IOM
CIO area BACKUPIO .IOR
General-purpose DM area BACKUPDM .IOM
General-purpose EM area BACKUPE@.IOM
Program files All user programs BACKUP .OBJ
Parameter files PLC Setup, registered I/O tables,
routing tables, CJ-series CPU
Bus Unit settings, and Controller
Link data link tables
.STD
Unit backup
files (CJ1-H
CPU Units
only)
Data from specific Units (e.g.,
protocol macro data for a Serial
Communications Unit)
BACKUP@@ .PRM
Symbol table
files (See note
4.)
CX-Programmer global symbol
tables, local symbol tables, set-
tings for automatically allocated
areas
BKUPSYM .SYM
Comment files
(See note 4.)
CX-Programmer rung com-
ments and comments
BKUPCMT .CMT
Program index
files (See note
4.)
CX-Programmer section names,
section comments, and program
comments
CKUPPRG .IDX
File memory Initializing procedure Data capacity after
initialization
Memory Card 1.Install Memory Card into
CPU Unit.
2.Initialize the Memory
Card using a Program-
ming Device (including the
CX-Programmer and Pro-
gramming Consoles).
Essentially the specific capacity
of the Memory Card
EM file memory 1.Convert the part of the
EM Area from the specified
bank No. to the last bank
No. to file memory in the
PLC Setup.
2.Initialize the EM file
memory using a Program-
ming Device (including the
CX-Programmer and Pro-
gramming Consoles).
1 bank: Approx. 61 KB
7 banks: Approx. 445 KB
153
File Memory Section 3-2
3-2-4 Using File Memory
Note For details on using file memory, refer to the CS/CJ Series Programming Man-
ual.
Memory Card
Reading/Writing Files
Using Programming
Device (CX-Programmer
or Programming Console)
1,2,3... 1. Install the Memory Card into the CPU Unit.
2. Initialize the Memory Card if necessary.
3. Name the file containing the data in the CPU Unit and save the contents in
the Memory Card.
4. Read the file that is saved in the Memory Card to the CPU Unit.
Automatically Transferring
Memory Card Files to the
CPU Unit at Power-up
Including Parameter File
1,2,3... 1. Install the Memory Card into the CPU Unit.
2. Set pin 2 of the DIP switch to ON.
3. Turn ON the power to the PLC. The files will be read automatically when
the power is turned ON.
Excluding Parameter File
1,2,3... 1. Install the Memory Card into the CPU Unit.
2. Set pin 2 of the DIP switch to ON.
3. The files are read automatically when the power is turned ON.
Reading/Writing Data
Files Using
FREAD(700)and
FWRIT(701)
1,2,3... 1. Install the Memory Card into the CPU Unit.
2. Initialize the Memory Card using a Programming Device.
3. Using the FWRIT(701) instruction, name the file of the specified I/O mem-
ory area, and save to the Memory Card.
File File name and extension Data transfer direction
Program files ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.OBJ Between CPU Unit and Mem-
ory Card,
Data files ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.IOM
Parameter files ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.STD
File File name and extension Data transfer direction
Program files AUTOEXEC.OBJ From Memory Card to CPU Unit
Data files AUTOEXEC.IOM
ATEXECDM.IOM
ATEXECE@.IOM
Parameter files AUTOEXEC.STD
File File name and extension Data transfer direction
Program file REPLACE.OBJ From Memory Card to CPU Unit
I/O memory files REPLACE.IOM
REPLCDM.IOM
REPLCE@.IOM
Parameter file Not needed
File File name and extension Data transfer direction
Data files ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.IOM
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.TXT
∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.CSV
Between CPU Unit and
Memory Card
154
File Memory Section 3-2
4. Using the FREAD(700) instruction, read the I/O memory files from the
Memory Card to the I/O memory in the CPU Unit.
Note When using spreadsheet software to read data that has been written to the
Memory Card in CSV or text format, it is now possible to read the data using
Windows applications by mounting a Memory Card in the personal computer
card slot using a HMC-AP001 Memory Card Adapter.
Reading and Replacing
Program Files during
Operation
1,2,3... 1. Install a Memory Card into the CPU Unit.
2. Set the following information: Program File Name (A654 to A657) and Pro-
gram Password (A651).
3. Next, from the program, turn ON the Replacement Start Bit (A65015).
Backing Up or Restoring
CPU Unit Data and (for
CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU
Units only) Special Data
for CPU Bus Units
1,2,3... 1. Install a Memory Card into the CPU Unit.
2. Turn ON pin 7 on the DIP switch.
3. To back up data, press and hold the Memory Card Power Supply Switch
for three seconds. To restore data, turn ON the PLC power.
Transferring Files between
Memory Cards and the
CX-Programmer
The following files can be transferred between a Memory Card and the CX-
Programmer.
1,2,3... 1. Insert a formatted Memory Card into the CPU Unit.
2. Place the CX-Programmer online and use the file transfer operations to
transfer the above files from the personal computer to the PLC or from the
PLC to the personal computer.
File File name and extension Data transfer direction
Program files ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.OBJ Memory Card to CPU Unit
File File name and extension Data transfer direction
Program files BACKUP.OBJ CPU Unit to Memory Card
(when backing up)
Memory Card to CPU Unit
(when restoring)
Data files BACKUP.IOM
BACKUPIO.IOR
BACKUPDM.IOM
BACKUPE@.IOM
Parameter files BACKUP.STD
Unit backup files
(CJ1-H CPU Units
only)
BACKUP@@.PRM
Symbol table files BKUPSYM.SYM (Unit version 3.0 or later only)
Comment files BKUPCMT.CMT (Unit version 3.0 or later only)
Program index files BKUPPRG.IDX (Unit version 3.0 or later only)
File File name and extension Data transfer direction
Symbols file SYMBOLS.SYM Between CX-Programmer and
Memory Card
Comment file COMMENTS.CNT
Program Index file PROGRAM.IDX
155
File Memory Section 3-2
Reading/Writing EM File Memory Files Using Programming Device (CJ1 and CJ1-H CPU Units Only)
(CX-Programmer or Programming Console)
1,2,3... 1. Convert the part of the EM Area specified by the first bank number into file
memory in the PLC Setup.
2. Initialize the EM file memory using a Programming Device.
3. Name the data in the CPU Unit and save in the EM file memory using the
Programming Device.
4. Read the EM file memory files to the CPU Unit using the Programming De-
vice.
Reading/Writing Data Files in EM File Memory Using FREAD(700)and FWRIT(701)
1,2,3... 1. Convert the part of the EM Area specified by the first bank number into file
memory in the PLC Setup.
2. Initialize the EM file memory using a Programming Device.
3. Using the FWRIT(701) instruction, name the specified area in I/O memory
with a file name and save in the EM file memory.
4. Using the FREAD(700) instruction, read the I/O memory files from the EM
file memory to the I/O memory in the CPU Unit.
Note The following files can be transferred between EM file memory and the CX-
Programmer.
1,2,3... 1. Format the EM Area in the CPU Units as file memory.
2. Place the CX-Programmer online and use the file transfer operations to
transfer the above files from the personal computer to the PLC or from the
PLC to the personal computer.
Comment Memory (Unit Version 3.0 or Later Only)
The internal flash memory in CS/CJ-series CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or
later contains a comment memory area. If neither a Memory Card nor EM file
memory are available, the comment data and section data (symbol table files,
comment files, and program index files) can be stored in or read from the
comment memory.
Note When using CX-Programmer version 5.0 to download projects, either of the
following locations can be selected as the transfer destination for comment
data and section data.
•Memory Card
• EM file memory
• Comment memory (in CPU Unit’s internal flash memory)
File File name and extension Data transfer direction
Program files ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.OBJ Between CPU Unit and EM
file memory
Data files ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.IOM
Parameter files ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.STD
File File name and extension Data transfer direction
Data files ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗.IOM Between CPU Unit and EM
file memory
File File name and extension Data transfer direction
Symbols file SYMBOLS.SYM Between CX-Programmer
and EM file memory
Comment file COMMENTS.CNT
Program Index file PROGRAM.IDX
156
File Memory Section 3-2
3-2-5 Memory Card Dimensions
3-2-6 Installing and Removing the Memory Card
Installing the Memory Card
1,2,3... 1. Pull the top end of the Memory Card cover forward and remove from the
Unit.
2. Insert the Memory Card with the label facing to the left. (Insert with the ∆
on the Memory Card label and the ∆ on the CPU Unit facing each other.)
3. Push the Memory Card securely into the compartment. If the Memory Card
is inserted correctly, the Memory Card eject button will be pushed out.
Product label
157
File Memory Section 3-2
Removing the Memory Card
1,2,3... 1. Press the Memory Card power supply switch.
2. Press the Memory Card eject button after the BUSY indicator is no longer
lit.
3. The Memory Card will eject from the compartment.
4. Install the Memory Card cover when a Memory Card is not being used.
OPEN
MCPWR
BUSY
Memory Card power supply switch
Memory Card eject button
BUSY indicator
MCPWR
BUSY
158
Programming Devices Section 3-3
Note 1. Never turn OFF the PLC while the CPU is accessing the Memory Card.
2. Never remove the Memory Card while the CPU is accessing the Memory
Card. Press the Memory Card power supply switch and wait for the BUSY
indicator to go OFF before removing the Memory Card. In the worst case,
the Memory Card may become unusable if the PLC is turned OFF or the
Memory Card is removed while the Card is being accessed by the CPU.
3. Never insert the Memory Card facing the wrong way. If the Memory Card
is inserted forcibly, it may become unusable.
Installing the Memory Card into a Personal Computer
Note 1. When a Memory Card is inserted into a computer using a Memory Card
Adapter, it can be used as a standard storage device, like a floppy disk or
hard disk.
2. When deleting all of the data in a Memory Card or formatting it in any way,
always place it in the CPU Unit and perform the operation from the CX-Pro-
grammer or a Programming Console.
3-3 Programming Devices
3-3-1 Overview
There are 2 types of Programming Devices that can be used: Any of three
models of Hand-held Programming Consoles or the CX-Programmer, which is
operated on a Windows computer. The CX-Programmer is usually used to
write the programs, and a Programming Console is then used to change the
operating modes, edit the programs, and monitor a limited number of points.
HMC-AP001 Memory Card Adapter
Memory Card
Personal computer PC card slot
159
Programming Devices Section 3-3
The following table provides a comparison between the CX-Programmer func-
tions and the Programming Console functions.
Function Programming Console CX-Programmer
Editing and referencing I/O tables Yes Yes
Deleting I/O tables No Yes
Selecting tasks Yes Yes
Writing pro-
grams
Inputting instructions Writes instructions one at a time using
mnemonics
Writes multiple blocks using mnemon-
ics or ladder programs
Inputting addresses Addresses only Addresses or symbols
I/O comment, rung com-
ment
No Yes
Setting global/local sym-
bols
No Yes (Automatic allocation of local sym-
bols)
Editing programs Inserts instructions and searches for
program addresses
Ye s
(Cutting, pasting, inserting within pro-
grams; searching/exchanging instruc-
tions, addresses, and symbols;
displaying cross-references)
Checking programs No Yes
Monitoring programs Monitors in program address units Monitors multiple blocks
Monitoring I/O memory Simultaneous, 2 points max. Monitors multiple points
Changing I/O memory present values Changes 1 point at a time Yes
Online editing Edits in instruction units Edits multiple adjacent blocks
Debugging Changing timer and
counter settings
Ye s Ye s
Control set/ reset Executes 1 point at a time (or resets all
at once)
Ye s
Differentiation monitoring Yes Yes
Reading cycle time Yes Yes
Data tracing No Yes
Time chart monitoring No Yes
Reading error information Yes (error message display) Yes
Reading error log No Yes
Reading/setting timer information Yes Yes
Reading/setting PLC parameters Yes Yes
Setting CPU Bus Unit parameters No Yes
File mem-
ory opera-
tions
Initializing Memory Card Yes Yes
Initializing EM file mem-
ory
Ye s Ye s
Transferring files between
CPU Unit and file mem-
ory
Ye s Ye s
Remote pro-
gramming
and monitor-
ing
Between Host Link and
Network PLC
No Yes
Via modem No Yes
Setting password protection No Yes
Managing files No Manages files by project.
Printing No Yes
160
Programming Devices Section 3-3
3-3-2 Programming Consoles
There are three Programming Consoles that can be used with the CJ-series
CPU Units: The CQM1H-PRO01-E, CQM1-PRO01-E, and C200H-PRO27-E.
These Programming Consoles are shown here.
CQM1H-PRO01-E Programming Console
CQM1-PRO01-E Programming Console
PRO01
PRO01
PROGRAMMING CONSOLE
PROGRAMMING CONSOLE
RUN
MONITOR
PROGRAM
LCD area
Connection
Mode selector switch
Operation keys (Install the
CS1W-KS001-E Key Sheet
Cable included with CQM1H-PRO01-E
Programming Console
CQM1H-PRO01-E Programming Console
PRO01
PRO01
PROGRAMMING CONSOLE
PROGRAMMING CONSOLE
RUN
MONITOR
PROGRAM
RUN
MONITOR
PROGRAM
LCD area
Connection
Mode selector switch
Operation keys (Install the
CS1W-KS001-E Key Sheet
CS1W-CN114 (cable length: 0.05 m)
Cable included with CQM1-PRO01-E
Programming Console
CQM1-PRO01-E Programming Console
Connect the CPU Unit to the Programming Console with the following cables.
CS1W-CN114 (Cable length: 0.05 m)
161
Programming Devices Section 3-3
C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console
Note The cassette jacks are not used with CJ-series CPU Units.
3-3-3 CX-Programmer
Item Details
Applicable PLC CS/CJ-series (See note 1.), CP-series, NSJ-series, CV-series, C200HX/HG/HE
(-Z), C200HS, CQM1, CPM1, CPM1A, SRM1, C1000H/2000H
Operating system Microsoft Windows 95 (See note 2.), 98, Me, 2000, XP, or NT 4.0
Personal computer DOS version, IBM PC/AT or compatible
Connection method CPU Unit’s peripheral port or built-in RS-232C port
Communications
protocol with PLC
Peripheral bus or Host Link
Offline operation Programming, I/O memory editing, creating I/O tables, setting PLC parameters,
printing, program changing
Online operation Transmitting, referencing, monitoring, creating I/O tables, setting PLC parame-
ters
Basic functions 1.Programming: Creates and edits ladder programs and mnemonic programs for
the applicable PLC.
2.Creating and referencing I/O tables.
3.Changing the CPU Unit operating mode.
4.Transferring: Transfers programs, I/O memory data, I/O tables, PLC Setup, and
I/O comments between the personal computer and the CPU Unit.
5.Program execution monitoring: Monitors I/O status/present values on ladder
displays, I/O status/present values on mnemonic displays, and present values on
I/O memory displays
PRO27
PRO27
PROGRAMMING CONSOLE
PROGRAMMING CONSOLE
EAR MIC
RUN
MONITOR
PROGRAM
LCD area
Mode selector switch
Operation keys (Install
the CS1W-KS001-E
Key Sheet
Casette jacks (See note.)
CS1W-CN224 (Cable length: 2.0 m)
CS1W-CN624 (Cable length: 6.0 m)
C200H-PRO27-E
Connect the CPU Unit to the Programming Console with the following cables.
CS1W-CN224 (Cable length: 2.0 m)
CS1W-CN624 (Cable length: 6.0 m)
162
Programming Devices Section 3-3
Note 1. The following versions of CX-Programmer are required for the different
CPU Units
2. Windows 95 cannot be used when the CX-Programmer is connected via a
Controller Link or SYSMAC LINK Support Board (PCI Bus).
3. CX-Programmer version 7.1 or higher is required to use the new function-
ality of CJ1-H-R CPU Units.
Connections
Note 1. The CJ1W-CN118 Cable is used with one of the RS-232C Cables shown
on the right (XW2Z-@@@@-@@) to connect to the peripheral port on the
CPU Unit.
2. If cables with model numbers ending in -V instead of -CV are used to con-
nect the computer running the CX-Programmer to the RS-232C port (in-
cluding when using a CJ1W-CN118 Cable), a peripheral bus connection
cannot be used. Use a Host Link (SYSMAC WAY) connection. To connect
to the port using a peripheral bus connection, prepare an RS-232C cable
as described in 3-3-5 RS-232C Port Specifications.
CPU Unit CX-Programmer version
CS1 CPU Units Version 1.0 or higher
CJ1 CPU Units Version 2.04 or higher
CS1-H CPU Units Version 2.10 or higher
CJ1-H CPU Units Version 2.10 or higher (See
note 3.)
CJ1M CPU Units excluding
CPU11/CPU21
Version 3.0 or higher
CJ1M CPU Units CPU11/CPU21 Version 3.3 or higher
Personal computer Peripheral port connection RS-232C port connection
IBM PC/AT or com-
patible
NEC
PC-9801
BX
10-pin
9-pin
male
9-pin
female
CS1W-CN118 (0.1 m) (See note 1.)
CS1W-CN226 (2.0 m)
CS1W-CN626 (6.0 m)
CS1W-CN118 (See note 1.)
CS1W-CN226
CS1W-CN626
Peripheral port
10-pin female
9-pin
female
NEC
PC-9801
BX
9-pin
female 9-pin
male
9-pin
male
9-pin
female
RS-232C port
9-pin female
XW2Z-200S-CV/200S-V (2.0 m) (See note 2.)
XW2Z-500S-CV/500S-V (5.0 m) (See note 2.)
XW2Z-200S-
CV/200S-V or
XW2Z-500S-
CV/500S-V
NEC
PC-9801
BX
CS1W-CN118 Cable
Peripheral port
RS-232C Cable
163
Programming Devices Section 3-3
CX-Programmer Connecting Cables
Note Before connecting a connector from the above table to the RS-232C port,
touch a grounded metal object to discharge static electricity from your body.
The XW2Z-@@@S-CV Cables have been strengthened against static
because they use a static-resistant connector hood (XM2S-0911-E). Even so,
always discharge static electricity before touching the connectors.
Do not use commercially available RS-232C personal computer cables.
Always use the special cables listed in this manual or make cables according
to manual specifications. Using commercially available cables may damage
the external devices or CPU Unit.
RS-232C Cables for a Peripheral Port
Using a CQM1-CIF01/02 Cable for a Peripheral Port
Unit Unit port Com-
puter
Computer
port
Serial
communications
mode
Model Length Cable notes
CPU Units Built-in
peripheral
port
DOS D-Sub, 9-pin,
male
Peripheral Bus or
Host Link
CJ1W-CN226 2.0 m ---
CJ1W-CN626 6.0 m
Built-in
RS-232C
port
D-Sub,
9-pin,
female
DOS D-Sub, 9-pin,
male
Peripheral Bus or
Host Link
XW2Z-200S-CV 2 m Use a static-
resistant con-
nector.
XW2Z-500S-CV 5 m
XW2Z-200S-V 2 m
XW2Z-500S-V 5 m
Serial Com-
munications
Units
RS-232C
Port
D-Sub,
9-pin,
female
DOS D-Sub, 9-pin,
male
Host Link XW2Z-200S-CV 2 m Use a static-
resistant con-
nector.
XW2Z-500S-CV 5 m
Unit Unit port Com-
puter
Computer
port
Serial
communications
mode
Model Length Cable notes
CPU Units Built-in
periph-
eral port
DOS D-Sub, 9-pin,
male
Peripheral Bus or
Host Link
CJ1W-CN118 +
XW2Z-200S-CV/
500S-CV
0.1 m+
(2 m or
5m)
XW2Z-
@@@S-CV
models use a
static -resis-
tant connector
Unit Unit port Com-
puter
Computer
port
Serial
communications
mode
Model Length Cable notes
CPU Units Built-in
periph-
eral port
DOS D-Sub, 9-pin,
male
Host Link CJ1W-CN114 +
CQM1-CIF02
0.05 m +
3.3 m
---
164
Programming Devices Section 3-3
Using a RS-232C Cable for a IBM PC/AT or Compatible
Communications Modes when Connecting a CX-Programmer to a CS-series CPU Unit
Connection Method for USB-Serial Conversion Cable
Unit Unit port Com-
puter
Computer
port
Serial
communications
mode
Model Length Cable notes
CPU Units Built-in
RS-232C
port
D-Sub,
9-pin,
female
DOS D-Sub, 9-pin,
male
Host Link XW2Z-200S-V 2 m ---
XW2Z-500S-V 5 m
Serial Communi-
cations Units
RS-232C
port
D-Sub,
9-pin,
female
DOS D-Sub, 9-pin,
male
Host Link XW2Z-200S-V 2 m
XW2Z-500S-V 5 m
Serial communications mode Characteristics
Peripheral Bus High-speed communications are possible. Conse-
quently, connecting via a peripheral bus is recom-
mended when using a CX-Programmer.
Only 1:1 connection is possible.
When using a CS-series CPU Unit, the baud rate of
the communications devices can be automatically
recognized for connection.
Host Link This is a communications protocol with a general-
purpose host computer.
Either 1:1 or 1:N connections are possible.
Host Link communications are slow compared with
the Peripheral Bus communications.
The following connections are possible: Via a
modem or optical fiber adapter, over long distance
using a RS-422A/485, and 1:N.
Computer CS1W-CIF31 Cable 1 Cable 2 PLC
++
CS1W-CIF31 USB
Connecting Cable
OR
OR
CS1W-CN226/626 CS/CJ-series
Peripheral Port Programming
Device Connecting Cable
CQM1-CIF02 C-series
Peripheral Port Programming
Device Connecting Cable
XW2Z-@@@ RS-232C
Programming Device
Connecting Cable
CS1W-CN114 C-series Peripheral-
CS/CJ-series Peripheral
Conversion Cable
CS1W-CN118 RS-232C-CS/CJ-
series Peripheral Conversion
Cable
165
Programming Devices Section 3-3
CX-Programmer Connecting Cables
Cables Connecting to CPU Units
Cables Connecting to Serial Communications Boards/Units
Note The CX-Programmer can be used for remote programming and monitoring. It
can be used to program and monitor not only the PLC to which it is directly
connected, but also to program and monitor any PLC connected through a
Controller Link or Ethernet network to which the PLC that the CX-Programmer
is connected to is a part of. All programming and monitoring functionality for
the directly connected PLC is supported for remote programming and moni-
toring, the PLC can be connected though either the peripheral or an RS-232C
port, and either the peripheral bus or Host Link bus can be used. Remote pro-
gramming is possible for up to three levels of networks (counting the local net-
work but not counting the peripheral bus or Host Link connection between the
CX-Programmer and the local PLC).
USB
Con-
necting
Cable
Model
Cable 1 Cable 2 Unit port Serial
communications
mode
(network)
Connec-
tor
Cable model Connec-
tor
Connec-
tor
Cable model Connec-
tor
CS1W-
CIF31
D-sub, 9-
pin
female
CS1W-CN226/626
(length: 2 m/6 m)
CS/CJ-
series
periph-
eral
Not required. CS/CJ-
series
periph-
eral
Peripheral Bus
(Toolbus) or Host
Link (SYSWAY)
CQM1-CIF02
(length: 3.3 m)
C-series
periph-
eral
C-series
periph-
eral
CS1W-CN114
(length: 5 cm)
CS/CJ-
series
periph-
eral
Host Link
(SYSWAY)
XW2Z-200S-V/
500S-V (length: 2 m/
5 m)
D-sub, 9-
pin male
D-sub, 9-
pin
female
CS1W-CN118
(length: 0.1 m)
CS/CJ-
series
periph-
eral
Peripheral Bus
(Toolbus) or Host
Link (SYSWAY)
XW2Z-200S-V/
500S-V (length: 2 m/
5 m)
D-sub, 9-
pin male
D-sub, 9-
pin
female
CS1W-CN118
(length: 0.1 m)
CS/CJ-
series
periph-
eral
Host Link
(SYSWAY)
XW2Z-200S-CV/
500S-CV (length:
2 m/5 m)
RS-232C
D-sub, 9-
pin male
Not required. RS-232C
D-sub, 9-
pin
female
Peripheral Bus
(Toolbus) or Host
Link (SYSWAY)
XW2Z-200S-V/
500S-V (length: 2 m/
5 m)
RS-232C
D-sub, 9-
pin male
Not required. Host Link
(SYSWAY)
USB
Con-
necting
Cable
Model
Cable 1 Cable 2 Unit port Serial
communications
mode
(network)
Connec-
tor
Cable model Connec-
tor
CS1W-
CIF31
D-sub, 9-
pin
female
XW2Z-200S-CV/
500S-CV (length:
2 m/5 m)
RS-232C
D-sub, 9-
pin male
Not required. RS-232C
D-sub, 9-
pin
female
Host Link
(SYSWAY)
CS1W-
CIF31
D-sub, 9-
pin
female
XW2Z-200S-V/
500S-V (length: 2 m/
5 m)
RS-232C
D-sub, 9-
pin male
Not required.
166
Programming Devices Section 3-3
Communications Modes when Connecting a CX-Programmer to a CJ-series CPU Unit
Note The CX-Programmer can be used for remote programming and monitoring. It
can be used to program and monitor not only the PLC to which it is directly
connected, but also to program and monitor any PLC connected through a
Controller Link or Ethernet network to which the PLC that the CX-Programmer
is connected to is a part of. All programming and monitoring functionality for
the directly connected PLC is supported for remote programming and moni-
toring, the PLC can be connected though either the peripheral or an RS-232C
port, and either the peripheral bus or Host Link bus can be used. Remote pro-
gramming is possible for up to three levels of networks (counting the local net-
work but not counting the peripheral bus or Host Link connection between the
CX-Programmer and the local PLC).
Serial communications mode Characteristics
Peripheral Bus High-speed communications are possible. Conse-
quently, connecting via a peripheral bus is recom-
mended when using a CX-Programmer.
Only 1:1 connection is possible.
When using a CJ-series CPU Unit, the baud rate of
the communications devices can be automatically
recognized for connection.
Host Link This is a communications protocol with a general-
purpose host computer.
Either 1:1 or 1:N connections are possible.
Host Link communications are slow compared with
the Peripheral Bus communications.
The following connections are possible: Via a
modem or optical fiber adapter, over long distance
using a RS-422A/485, and 1:N.
FINS
CX-Programmer
Peripheral bus
or Host Link
Peripheral port or
RS-232C port
Controller Link or Ethernet Network
Remote programming
and monitoring
CX-Programmer
Peripheral bus or
Host Link Bridge Ethernet Network
Controller Link Network
Gateway
Controller Link Network
167
Programming Devices Section 3-3
3-3-4 Peripheral Port Specifications
Communications Mode Selection Flowchart
Peripheral Port Communications Settings
Note Set from the CX-Programmer or Programming Console.
3-3-5 RS-232C Port Specifications
Connector Pin Arrangement
Connection Communications Settings
Pin 4 of Front-panel
DIP Switch
PLC Setup peripheral port
setting (See note.)
1. Peripheral bus
(auto-detect)
OFF (factory setting) ---
2. Peripheral bus ON Peripheral bus
3. Host Link ON Host Link (default setting)
4. NT Link ON NT Link
5. Serial Gateway ON Serial Gateway
OMRON PT
Programming Console 1. Peripheral bus (auto-detect)
5. Serial Gateway
CX-Programmer Peripheral bus connection
2. Peripheral bus
Communicate with the PLC Setup's
communications settings
(peripheral bus).
Host Link connection
Host computer
OMRON component (CompoWay/F)
4. NT Link
3. Host Link
Communicate with the
CX-Programmer's communications
settings (peripheral bus).
Connecting Device (Protocol) Communications Mode
Pin No. Signal Name Direction
1 FG Protection earth ---
2 SD (TXD) Send data Output
3 RD (RXD) Receive data Input
4 RS (RTS) Request to send Output
5 CS (CTS) Clear to send Input
6 5 V Power supply ---
7 DR (DSR) Data set ready Input
8 ER (DTR) Data terminal ready Output
1
5
6
9
168
Programming Devices Section 3-3
Note Do not use the 5-V power from pin 6 of the RS-232C port for anything other
than an NT-AL001, CJ1W-CIF11 Link Adapter, or NV3W-M@20L Programma-
ble Terminal. Using this power supply for any other external device may dam-
age the CPU Unit or the external device.
Connection between CJ-series CPU Unit and Personal Computer
The following connections are in Host Link serial communications mode.
Note Refer to Connection Examples on page 655 when converting between RS-
232C and RS-422A/485 to connect multiple nodes. Refer to Recommended
Wiring Methods on page 660 when making your own RS-232C cable.
The following connections are in Peripheral Bus serial communications mode.
Use the connectors and cables described below when making an RS-232C
cable to connect to the RS-232C port.
Applicable Connectors CPU Unit Connector
9 SG (0 V) Signal ground ---
Connector hood FG Protection earth ---
Pin No. Signal Name Direction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CD
RD
SD
ER
SG
DR
RS
CS
CI
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
FG
SD
RD
RS
CS
5V
DR
ER
SG
Personal computer
RS-232C
interface
CPU Unit
D-SUB, 9-pin connector
Female connector on cable
D-sub, 9-pin connector
Male connector on cable
RS-232C
interface
Signal Pin
No.
Pin
No.
Signal
Signal Signal
CPU Unit
D-Sub, 9-pin connector
Male connector on cable
D-Sub, 9-pin connector
Female connector on cable
RS-232C
interface
RS-232C
interface
Personal computer
Pin
No.
Pin
No.
Item Model Specifications
Plug XM2A-0901 9-pin male Used together (One
of each provided
with CPU Unit.)
Hood XM2S-0911-E 9-pin, millimeter
screws, static-resis-
tant
169
Programming Devices Section 3-3
Personal Computer Connector
Note Use the special cables provided from OMRON for all connections whenever
possible. If cables are produced in-house, be sure they are wired correctly.
External devices and the CPU Unit may be damaged if general purpose (e.g.,
computer to modem) cables are used or if wiring is not correct.
Recommended Cables Fujikura Ltd.: UL2464 AWG28 × 5P IFS-RVV-SB (UL product)
AWG 28 × 5P IFVV-SB (non-UL product)
Hitachi Cable, Ltd.: UL2464-SB(MA) 5P × 28AWG (7/0.127) (UL product)
CO-MA-VV-SB 5P × 28AWG (7/0.127) (non-UL product)
RS-232C Port Specifications
Note Baud rates for the RS-232C are specified only up to 19.2 kbps. The CJ Series
supports serial communications from 38.4 kbps to 115.2 kbps, but some com-
puters cannot support these speeds. Lower the baud rate if necessary.
Item Model Specifications
Plug XM2D-0901 9-pin female Used together
Hood XM2S-0913 9-pin, inch screws
IBM PC/AT or compatible
(9-pin male connector)
Plug: XM2D-0901
(9-pin female)
CJ-series CPU Unit
Hood: XM2S-0913
Recommended
cable
Provided with CPU Unit
Hood: XM2S-0911-E Plug: XM2A-0901 (9-pin male)
RS-232C
port
Item Specification
Communications method Half duplex
Synchronization Start-stop
Baud rate 0.3/0.6/1.2/2.4/4.8/9.6/19.2/38.4/57.6/115.2 kbps
(See note.)
Transmission distance 15 m max.
Interface EIA RS-232C
Protocol Host Link, NT Link, 1:N, No-protocol, or Peripheral Bus
170
Power Supply Units Section 3-4
Communications Mode Selection Flowchart
RS-232C Port Communications Settings
Note Set from the CX-Programmer or Programming Console.
3-4 Power Supply Units
3-4-1 Power Supply Units Models
Connection Communications Settings
Pin 5 of Front-panel
DIP Switch
PLC Setup RS-232C port
setting (See note.)
1. Peripheral bus
(auto-detect)
ON ---
2. Peripheral bus OFF (factory setting) Peripheral bus
3. Host Link OFF (factory setting) Host Link (default setting)
4. NT Link OFF (factory setting) NT Link
5. No-protocol OFF (factory setting) No-protocol
6. Serial Gateway OFF (factory setting) Serial Gateway
Power supply voltage Output Power
output
terminals
RUN
output
Replacement
notification
function
Model Weight
100 to 240 V AC
(allowable: 85 to 264 V AC)
50/60 Hz
(allowable: 47 to 63 Hz)
5 A at 5 V DC
0.8 A at 24 V DC
Total: 25 W
No Yes Without CJ1W-PA205R 350 g max.
5 V DC, 5.0 A
24 V DC, 0.8 A
To t a l 2 5 W
No No Display: Sup-
ported
Output: Sup-
ported
CJ1W-PA205C 400 g max.
2.8 A at 5 V DC
0.4 A at 24 V DC
Total: 14 W
No No Without CJ1W-PA202 200 g max.
OMRON PT
1. Peripheral bus (auto-detect)
5. No-protocol
CX-Programmer Peripheral bus connection
2. Peripheral bus
Communicate with the PLC Setup’s
communications settings
(peripheral bus).
Host Link connection
Host computer
General-purpose external serial device
4. NT Link
3. Host Link
Communicate with the
CX-Programmer’s communications
settings (peripheral bus).
Connecting Device (Protocol)
6. Serial Gateway
OMRON component (CompoWay/F)
Communications Mode
171
Power Supply Units Section 3-4
3-4-2 Components
(Example: CJ1W-PA205C)
24 V DC
(allowable:19.2 to 28.8 V DC)
5 A at 5 V DC
0.8 A at 24 V DC
Total: 25 W
No No Without CJ1W-PD025 300 g max.
24 V DC (allowable: 21.6 to
26.4 VDC) (non-insulated)
5 V DC, 2.0 A
24 V DC, 0.4 A
To t a l 2 5 W
No No Without CJ1W-PD022 130 g max.
Power supply voltage Output Power
output
terminals
RUN
output
Replacement
notification
function
Model Weight
POWER
PA205R
DC24V
AC240V
OUTPUT
RUN
INPUT
AC100-240V
L2/N
L1
LG
GR
POWER Indicator
Lit when 5 V are being output from the Power Supply Unit.
External connection terminals
AC input
RUN output
POWER
Years
CJ1W-PA205C
TEST
NC
NC
AC100-240V
INPUT
L2/N
L1
L+
ALARM
OUTPUT
DC30V,50mA
NORMAL:ON
ALARM :OFF
Replacement notification display
POWER indicator
Lit: 5-V output from Power Supply Unit.
Alarm output
(replacement notification output)
LG
AC input
GR
Terminals
external connect
TEST switch
The TEST switch can be used to
temporarily turn OFF the alarm output
that notifies when replacement is
needed.
172
Power Supply Units Section 3-4
(Example: CJ1W-PD022)
AC Input Supply 100 to 240 V AC (allowable: 85 to 264 V AC). (Voltage selection is not
required.)
DC Input Supply 24 V DC.
LG Ground to a resistance of 100 Ω or less to increase noise resistance and
avoid electric shock.
GR Ground to a resistance of 100 Ω or less to avoid electric shock.
RUN Output (CJ1W-
PA205R Only)
The internal contact turns ON when the CPU Unit is operating (RUN or MON-
ITOR mode). The Power Supply Unit must be in the CPU Rack to use this out-
put.
Alarm Output (CJ1W-
PA205C Only)
The alarm output is used to notify when Power Supply Unit replacement is
required. The output is normally ON. The output turns OFF when the time
until replacement is 6 months or less.
POWER
PD022
+
−
NC
NC
NC
DC24V
INPUT
+
NC
GR
POWER indicator
Lit: 5-V output from Power Supply Unit.
DC input
Terminals
external connect
Model Allowable power supply
voltage fluctuation range
CJ1W-PD025 19.2 to 28.8 VDC (±20%)
CJ1W-PD022 21.6 to 26.4 VDC (±10%)
173
Power Supply Units Section 3-4
3-4-3 Dimensions
CJ1W-PA205R
CJ1W-PA205C
POWER
PA205R
DC24V
AC240V
OUTPUT
RUN
INPUT
AC100-240V
L2/N
L1
65
80
81.6
90
Years
POWER
CJ1W-PA205C
TEST
65
80
81.6
90
NC
NC
AC100-240V
INPUT
L2/N
L1
L+
ALARM
OUTPUT
DC30V,50mA
NORMAL:ON
ALARM :OFF
174
Power Supply Units Section 3-4
CJ1W-PA202
CJ1W-PD025
CJ1W-PD022
65
4581.6
90
POWER
PA202
INPUT
NC
NC
AC100
-240V
L2/N
L1
65
60
81.6
90
POWER
PD025
DC24V+
INPUT
NC
NC
65
2781.6
90
POWER
PD022
175
Power Supply Units Section 3-4
3-4-4 Power Supply Confirmation
After determining what power supply voltage is required, whether power out-
put terminals and a RUN output are required, and whether replacement notifi-
cation is required, calculate the current and power requirements for each
Rack.
Condition 1:
Current Requirements
There are two voltage groups for internal power consumption: 5 V DC and
24 V DC.
Current Consumption at 5 V DC (Internal Logic Power Supply)
The following table shows the current that can be supplied to Units (including
the CPU Unit) that use 5-V DC power.
Current Consumption at 24 V DC (Relay Driving Power Supply)
The following table shows the current that can be supplied to Units that use
24-V DC power.
Condition 2:
Power Requirements
The following table shows the maximum total power that can be supplied at
5 V DC and 24 V DC.
Refer to 2-6 Unit Current Consumption for tables showing the current con-
sumed by each particular Unit as well as example calculations.
3-4-5 Replacement Notification
Principle of Replacement Notification
The Power Supply Unit has a built-in electrolytic capacitor. The electrolytic
capacitor is impregnated with electrolytic solution that starts to penetrate the
sealing rubber from the time of manufacture. As time elapses, the internal
electrolytic solution continues to evaporate, resulting in decreased electro-
static capacity and deterioration in other characteristics. Over time, the char-
acteristic deterioration of the electrolytic capacitor prevents the Power Supply
Unit from being utilized to its full capacity. In particular, the speed at which the
electrolytic capacitor deteriorates fluctuates greatly with the ambient tempera-
ture (generally, a temperature rise of 10°C will double the rate of a reaction, as
stated by Arrhenius' law).
The CJ1W-PA205C Power Supply Unit with Replacement Notification moni-
tors the internal temperature of the Power Supply Unit while the power is
Power Supply Unit Maximum current at 5 V DC
CJ1W-PA205R/PA205C 5.0 A
CJ1W-PA202 2.8 A
CJ1W-PA025 5.0 A
CJ1W-PA022 2.0 A
Power Supply Unit Maximum current at 24 V DC
CJ1W-PA205R/PA205C 0.8 A
CJ1W-PA202 0.4 A
CJ1W-PA025 0.8 A
CJ1W-PA022 0.4 A
Power Supply Unit Maximum total power output
CJ1W-PA205R/PA205C 25 W
CJ1W-PA202 14 W
CJ1W-PA025 25 W
CJ1W-PA022 19.6 W
176
Power Supply Units Section 3-4
turned ON, and calculates the level of deterioration of the electrolytic capaci-
tor from the operating time and internal temperature. The replacement notifi-
cation function displays the approximate time until the Power Supply Unit will
stop functioning at its full capacity due to the characteristic deterioration of the
electrolytic capacitor, based on the calculated level of deterioration. When 6
months are remaining until replacement is required, the alarm output will turn
OFF.
Note The replacement notification function provides an indication of when the dete-
rioration of the electrolytic capacitor will prevent the power supply functioning
at its full capacity. It does not provide information on failures occurring due to
other causes.
Power Supply Unit with Replacement Notification
Power Supply Unit Replacement Notification Module
CJ1W-PA205C
Function
Replacement Notification
Function Displays
The replacement notification for of the Power Supply Unit is shown using
three 7-segment LED displays.
• At time of purchase “FUL” is displayed. The display changes to “HLF” as
the electrolytic capacitor deteriorates (“HLF” may not be displayed,
depending on the operating environment).
• When the time until replacement is required drops below 2 years, the dis-
play will change corresponding to the operating time from “1.5” to “1.0” to
“0.5” to “0.0”/”A02.” When the remaining service life reaches 6 months or
less, the display will alternate between “0.0” and “A02” in 2-second inter-
vals.
Model Specifications
CJ1W-PA205C Output capacity: 5 A at 5 VDC, 0.8 A at 24 VDC, total of 30 W
With replacement notification
CJ1W-PA205C
CJ1W-PA205C
PO
PO
WER
TEST
TEST
ALARM OUTPUT
DC30V, 50mA
NORMAL:ON
ALARM OFF
L
L
Replacement notification display (7-segment, red)
POWER indicator (green)
Alarm output (replacement
notification output)
test switch
Alarm output (replacement
notification output)
wiring diagram
177
Power Supply Units Section 3-4
Note 1. The time remaining until replacement does not include periods when the
power is turned OFF.
2. Until approximately one month of operating time has accumulated, the dis-
play will always be “FUL” and the alarm output will remain ON (conducting)
due to the estimated deterioration speed.
3. The time remaining until replacement will vary the operating and storage
conditions, so periodically check the display.
4. Fluctuation in the time remaining until replacement may result in the alarm
output repeatedly turning ON and OFF.
5. The precision of the replacement notification function will be adversely af-
fected by applications in which the power is frequently turned ON and OFF.
6. Due to the service life of the electronic components, replace the Power
Supply Unit approximately 15 years after purchase, even if the replace-
ment notification display or output has not indicated that replacement is re-
quired.
Alarm Output
(Replacement Notification
Output)
The output remains ON until the remaining service life drops below 6 months
and then turns OFF.
Note 1. The alarm output will also turn OFF under the following conditions.
• The AC input to the Power Supply Unit is turned OFF.
• An error is detected by the self-diagnostic function.
• The TEST switch is pressed for at least 3 seconds.
2. Example of Using the Alarm Output:
Monitoring Power Supply Replacement Notification in the System (6
Months or Less Until Replacement Is Required)
Capacity at
time of
manufacture
Replacement
required
Electrolytic
capacitor level Replacement notification display
(7-Segment) 2.0 yr 1.5 yr 1.0 yr 0.5 yr
Remaining
life plan
Alarm output
(replacement notification output) Output ON Output
OFF
The output turns OFF when the
remaining life span reaches 6
months, and the following display
is repeatedly alternated.
0 yr
ON
OFF
T000
[]
Alarm output
Turns OFF when 6 months remains
TIM 000 5 s
Alarm output
Internal Flag
178
Power Supply Units Section 3-4
The Flag is programmed to allow for the delay in the alarm output at system
startup. The Flag does not turn ON when the alarm output is ON (normal
operation). When the alarm output turns OFF (replacement required), the
Flag turns ON, and the replacement notification can be monitored from the
system.
Maintenance Function
Using the TEST Switch
• Press the TEST switch for at least 3 seconds to display “A02” and force
the alarm output OFF. Release the switch to return to normal operating
status.
The TEST switch is used initially or periodically to check the connection
status between the alarm output and external devices.
• Press the TEST switch for less than 3 seconds to display the unit version
information for the Power Supply Unit.
Note 1. Replace the Power Supply Unit within 6 months when the display on the
front panel of the Power Supply Unit alternates between 0.0 and A02 or the
alarm output automatically turns OFF.
2. Maintain an ambient storage temperature of −20 to 30°C and humidity of
25% to 70% when storing the product (with the power turned OFF) for
longer than 3 months to keep the replacement notification function in opti-
mum working condition. The replacement time is calculated from when the
power is turned ON only. The precision of the replacement period will de-
cline if the electrolytic capacitor deteriorates during storage.
Display and Alarm Output Operation
Normal Display:
Replacement Notification
Display
When 6 months or less are remaining until replacement is required, the dis-
play will alternate between “0.0” and “A02” (in 2 second intervals), and the
alarm output will turn OFF.
Operation at Powerup The following initial display is shown when the power is turned ON, after which
the replacement notification is displayed. The alarm output turns ON approxi-
mately 0.2 seconds after the power is turned ON.
When replacement is already required, the alarm display will follow the initial
display. The alarm output will turn ON approximately 0.2 seconds after the
power is turned ON, and then turn OFF after approximately 5 seconds.
2 s 2 s 2 s 2 s 2 s
Remaining service life:
1 year to 6 months Remaining service life: 6 months max.
Alarm output ON OFF
0.3 s 0.1 s 0.3 s 0.1 s 0.3 s
ON
Power ON
Display
Alarm
output OFF
Display start
1 s max.
0.2 s max.
Initial display (approx. 1.1 s)
Replacement
required
display
179
Power Supply Units Section 3-4
Operation at Power OFF When the power is turned OFF, the display will turn OFF after the PC opera-
tion stops. The alarm output will turn OFF after the display turns OFF.
If replacement is already required, the display will turn OFF after the PC oper-
ation stops. When the display turns OFF, the alarm output will turn ON
momentarily and then turn OFF again.
Note The values shown are reference values (calculated for a no-load status on the
Power Supply Unit's output).
Operation When TEST
Switch Is Pressed
The following operation will be performed when the TEST switch on the
replacement notification function module is pressed. When the switch is
pressed for less than 3 seconds, the unit version will be displayed 3 times at
0.5-second intervals. When the switch is pressed for at least 3 seconds, the
alarm output will momentarily turn OFF, and the alarm display A02 will be
shown. The operation will return to the normal display and output when the
switch is released. Use the TEST switch to check the connection between the
replacement notification output and devices.
1. Operation when TEST switch is pressed for less than 3 seconds.
2. Operation when TEST switch is pressed for less than 3 seconds.
OFF
ON OFF
Power ON
Display
Alarm
output
1 s max.
0.2 s max.
Display start Initial display
(approx. 1.1 s)
Alarm
display Alarm output OFF
5 s max.
Display
Alarm
output
Replacement
notification display
Power
interruption
PLC operation
stopped
ON
Notification display
OFF
Approx. 70 ms
(See note.)
OFF
Alarm output
OFF
100 VAC: Approx. 2 s
200 VAC: Approx. 7 s
(See note.)
Display
Alarm
output
Alarm display
Power
interruption
PLC operation
stopped
OFF
Notification display OFF
+ alarm output ON
ON
OFF
Alarm output
OFF
Approx. 70 ms
(See note.)
100 VAC: Approx. 2 s
200 VAC: Approx. 7 s
(See note.)
ON
0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s
ON
TEST switch
Alarm output
180
Power Supply Units Section 3-4
Note Under normal application conditions, the replacement notification function will
operate after several years or even tens of years. When using a Power Supply
Unit for an extended period of time, periodically check operation with the
TEST switch as described above and be sure the alarm output functions prop-
erly.
Self-diagnostic Function
Note If the error continues for 3 hours or longer, the replacement notification func-
tion will be disabled. Even if the cause of the overheating is removed, the dis-
play will continue as “Hot,” and the notification output will remain OFF. In this
state, the internal parts may deteriorate even if the PC operation is normal, so
replace the Power Supply Unit.
Comparison between the CJ1W-PA205C and CJ1W-PA205R
Error name Display Alarm output
status
Error details (cause) Recovery method
Unit overheated
error
OFF Internal overheating has
occurred in the Power Supply
Unit as a result of usage under
conditions that exceed the spec-
ified values, insufficient ventila-
tion, or incorrect installation.
(See note.)
Remove the cause of the over-
heating error.
Unit error OFF System error from external
noise or hardware malfunction.
Turn ON the input's power sup-
ply again. If the Unit does not
recover, the error may be
caused by a Unit malfunction.
Consult with your OMRON rep-
resentative.
Item CJ1W-PA205C CJ1W-PA205R (for comparison)
RUN contact output Not supported Supported
Te r m i n a l b l o ck
arrangement
ON
0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s 0.5 s
ON OFF ON
TEST switch
Alarm output
3 s
NC
NC
100 to 240 VAC
INPUT
L2/N
L1
AC input
LG
Unconnected
terminals
GR
CJ1W-PA205C
24 VDC
2A RESISTIVE
240 VAC
OUTPUT
RUN
INPUT
100 to 240 VAC
L2/N
L1
AC input
LG
RUN output
(RUN contact)
GR
CJ1W-PA205R
181
I/O Control Units and I/O Interface Units Section 3-5
3-5 I/O Control Units and I/O Interface Units
An I/O Control Unit and I/O Interface Units are used to connect Expansion
Racks to expand the system.
3-5-1 Models
Terminal block posi-
tion
Located on the left side of the Unit. Located on the right side of the Unit.
POWER indicator On replacement notification module On hood of Power Supply Unit
Replacement notifi-
cation
Supported
(7-segment display + transistor outputs)
Not supported
Item CJ1W-PA205C CJ1W-PA205R (for comparison)
Years
POWER
CJ1W-PA205C
TEST
NC
NC
100 to 240 VAC
INPUT
L2/N
L1
L+
ALARM
OUTPUT
DC30V, 50mA
NORMAL :ON
ALARM :OFF
Terminal block Alarm output terminals
POWER
PA205R
24 VDC
240 VAC
OUTPUT
RUN
INPUT
100 to 240
VAC
L2/N
L1
Terminal block
Name Model number Number required Weight
I/O Control Unit CJ1W-IC101 1 on the CPU Rack 70 g max.
I/O Interface Unit CJ1W-II101 1 on each Expansion Rack 130 g max.
(including End
Cover)
182
I/O Control Units and I/O Interface Units Section 3-5
3-5-2 System Configuration
The I/O Control Unit is connected directly to the CPU Unit. If it is not immedi-
ately to the right of the CPU Unit, correct operation may not be possible.
The I/O Interface Unit is connected directly to the Power Supply Unit. If it is not
immediately to the right of the Power Supply Unit, correct operation may not
be possible.
3-5-3 Component Names
Power
Supply Unit CPU Unit CJ1W-IC101
I/O Control Unit
CJ1W-II101
I/O Interface Unit
Power
Supply Unit
CPU Rack
Expansion Rack
I/O Connecting Cable
CJ1W-II101
I/O Interface Unit
I/O Connecting Cable
Power
Supply Unit
OUT
IC101
Output connector for
I/O Connecting Cable
OUT IN
II101
Output connector for
I/O Connecting Cable
Input connector for
I/O Connecting Cable
CJ1W-IC101 I/O
Control Unit
CJ1W-II101 I/O
Interface Unit
183
CJ-series Basic I/O Units Section 3-6
3-5-4 Dimensions
Note Attached the enclosed cover to the I/O Connecting Cable connector on the I/O
Interface Unit when it is not being used to protect it from dust.
3-6 CJ-series Basic I/O Units
3-6-1 CJ-series Basic I/O Units with Terminal Blocks
Classification Name Specifications Number
of bits
allocated
Model Page
Basic Input Unit with
Terminal Block
DC Input Units 24 V DC 16 CJ1W-ID211 540
12 to 24 V DC 8 CJ1W-ID201 539
AC Input Units 200 to 240 V AC 8 CJ1W-IA201 548
100 to 120 V AC 16 CJ1W-IA111 549
Quick-response
Units
24 V DC 16 CJ1W-IDP01 551
Interrupt Input
Unit
24 V DC 16 CJ1W-INT01 550
Basic Output Units
with Terminal Blocks
Relay Output
Units
250 V AC/24 V DC, 2 A;
8 independent contacts
8 CJ1W-OC201 565
250 V AC/24 V DC, 2 A; 16 outputs 16 CJ1W-OC211 566
Triac Output
Unit
250 V AC, 0.5 A 8 CJ1W-OA201 567
Tra n -
sistor
Output
Unit
Sink 12 to 24 V DC, 2.0 A 8 CJ1W-OD201 568
12 to 24 V DC, 0.5 A 8 CJ1W-OD203 569
12 to 24 V DC, 0.5 A 16 CJ1W-OD211 570
Source 24 V DC, 2 A, load short-circuit pro-
tection and line disconnection detec-
tion
8 CJ1W-OD202 578
24 V DC, 0.5 A, load short-circuit pro-
tection
8 CJ1W-OD204 579
24 V DC, 0.5 A, load short-circuit pro-
tection
16 CJ1W-OD212 580
2.72.7 90
69.3
65
68
(140)
OUT IN
II101
31
OUT
IC101
IC101
2.7
2.7 90
69.3
65
68
(140)
20
CJ1W-IC101 I/O
Control Unit
CJ1W-II101 I/O
Interface Unit
184
CJ-series Basic I/O Units Section 3-6
Part Names
8-point/16-point Units (with 18-terminal Terminal Block)
Note The CJ1W-OD202, CJ1W-OD204, and CJ1W-OD212 also have an ERR indi-
cator for the load short-circuit alarm.
Dimensions
8-point/16-point Units (with 18-terminal Terminal Block)
Interrupt Input Units
Functions Interrupt Input Units are used to execute interrupt programs on the rising or
falling edge of an input signal. When the specified interrupt input turns ON (or
OFF), execution of the cyclic program in the CPU Unit is interrupted and an
I/O interrupt task (task number 100 to 131) is executed. When execution of the
I/O interrupt task has been completed, the cyclic program is again executed
starting from the instruction after which it was interrupted.
OD211
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
ERR
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Connector
Connect to the connector on the next Unit.
I/O
indicators
Model number label
Terminal block
for I/O wiring
(18-terminal
terminal block)
31
2.7
2.7
90
65
89
▲
▲
01 23 4 56 7
89
10 11 12 13 14 15
0
1
3
2
4
5
7
6
8
9
11
10
12
13
14
15
COM
COM
CJ1W-ID211
CJ1W-ID201
CJ1W-IA201
CJ1W-IA111
CJ1W-INT01
CJ1W-IDP01
CJ1W-OC201
CJ1W-OC211
CJ1W-OA201
CJ1W-OD201
CJ1W-OD202
CJ1W-OD203
CJ1W-OD204
CJ1W-OD211
CJ1W-OD212
185
CJ-series Basic I/O Units Section 3-6
Applicable Units Either of the following Interrupt Input Units can be used with a CJ1-H or CJ1M
CPU Unit. (Interrupt Input Units cannot be mounted to CJ1 CPU Units.)
Application Precautions
1. Interrupt Input Units must be mounted in the locations described below.
• CJ1-H CPU Units
All Interrupt Input Units must be connected in the CPU Rack and must be
connected in any of the five positions immediately to the right of the CPU
Unit. The interrupt input function will not be supported if an Interrupt Input
Unit is mounted to an Expansion Rack. If connected in any other position
or to an Expansion Rack, and I/O setting error (fatal) will occur.
• CJ1M CPU Units
All Interrupt Input Units must be connected in the CPU Rack and must be
connected in any of the three positions immediately to the right of the
CPU Unit. The interrupt input function will not be supported if an Interrupt
Input Unit is mounted to an Expansion Rack. If connected in any other
position or to an Expansion Rack, and I/O setting error (fatal) will occur.
2. If the Interrupt Input Units are not connected in the correct positions, an er-
ror will occur when the I/O tables are generated from the CX-Programmer.
A40110 will turn ON to indicate an I/O setting error and A40508 will turn
ON to indicate that an Interrupt Input Unit is in the wrong position.
Note Even if a Unit is physically in one of the correct positions, a Dummy Unit can
be registered in the I/O table, causing a Unit to be defined in a position differ-
ent from its physical position.
There are limits to the number of Interrupt Input Units that can be mounted.
(See table, above.)
MSKS(690)
CPU Unit
1 cyclic task
Input
(rising or
falling
edge)
Interrupt Input Unit
Immediate
interrupt
I/O interrupt task is
executed when the input
turns ON (or OFF).
I/O interrupt task
Model Specifications No. of Units mountable
to CPU Rack
Page
CJ1W-INT01 24 V DC, 16 inputs 2 max. 550
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Slot No.
CPUPSU
Connect here. Cannot be used.
186
CJ-series Basic I/O Units Section 3-6
The input response time cannot be changed for the CJ1W-INT01, and the
related portions of the Basic I/O Unit input time constants in the PLC Setup,
and the setting status in A220 to A259 will not be valid.
Input Signal Width Input signals must meet the following conditions.
3-6-2 CJ-series 32/64-point Basic I/O Units with Connectors
Units are available with either Fujitsu-compatible connectors (CJ1W-@D@@1)
or MIL connectors (CJ1W-@D@@2/3).
Unit ON time OFF time
CJ1W-INT01 0.05 ms min. 0.5 ms min.
ON OFF
Name Specifications Model Number
of bits
allocated
Page
DC Input Units Fujitsu-compatible connector
24 V DC, 32 inputs
CJ1W-ID231 32 542
Fujitsu-compatible connector
24 V DC, 64 inputs
CJ1W-ID261 64 545
MIL connector
24 V DC, 32 inputs
CJ1W-ID232 32 543
MIL connector
24 V DC, 64 inputs
CJ1W-ID262 64 547
Transistor
Output
Units
With Sink-
ing Out-
puts
Fujitsu-compatible connector
12 to 24 V DC, 0.5 A, 32 outputs
CJ1W-OD231 32 571
Fujitsu-compatible connector
12 to 24 V DC, 0.3 A, 64 outputs
CJ1W-OD261 64 575
MIL connector
12 to 24 V DC, 0.5 A, 32 outputs
CJ1W-OD233 32 574
MIL connector
12 to 24 V DC, 0.3 A, 64 outputs
CJ1W-OD263 64 577
With
Sourcing
Outputs
MIL connector
24 V DC, 0.5 A, 32 outputs, load short-circuit protec-
tion
CJ1W-OD232 32 581
MIL connector
12 to 24 V DC, 0.3 A, 64 outputs
CJ1W-OD262 64 584
24-V DC
Input/
Transistor
Output
Units
With Sink-
ing Out-
puts
Fujitsu-compatible connector
24 V DC, 16 inputs
12 to 24 V DC, 0.5 A, 16 outputs
CJ1W-MD231 32 553
Fujitsu-compatible connector
24 V DC, 32 inputs
12 to 24 V DC, 0.3 A, 32 outputs
CJ1W-MD261 64 559
MIL connector
24 V DC, 16 inputs
12 to 24 V DC, 0.5 A, 16 outputs
CJ1W-MD233 32 555
MIL connector
24 V DC, 32 inputs
12 to 24 V DC, 0.3 A, 32 outputs
CJ1W-MD263 64 561
With
Sourcing
Outputs
MIL connector
24 V DC, 16 inputs
24 V DC, 0.5 A, 16 outputs, load short-circuit protec-
tion
CJ1W-MD232 32 557
TTL I/O Units MIL connector
Inputs: TTL (5 V DC), 32 inputs
Outputs: TTL (5 V DC, 35 mA), 32 outputs
CJ1W-MD563 64 563
187
CJ-series Basic I/O Units Section 3-6
Part Names
32-point Units with 40-pin Fujitsu-compatible Connector or 40-pin MIL Connector
32-point Units with 2 × 24-pin Fujitsu-compatible Connectors or 2 × 20-pin MIL Connectors
64-point Units (2 × 40-pin Fujitsu-compatible Connectors or 2 × 40-pin MIL Connectors)
ID231
ID232
0 1 2 3
4 5 6 7
8 9
12 13 14 15
10 11
ERR
Model number
I/O wiring
connector
(40-pin x 1)
Unit with Fujitsu-compatible
Connector Unit with MIL Connector
Changes the 16 I/O displayed on the I/O indicators.
Indicator Switch
Connector
Connected to the connector on the next Unit.
I/O indicators
Word m
or
m+1
Note: Onl
y
the CJ1W-OD232 has an ERR indicator for the load short-circuit alarm.
Setting Fujitsu connector MIL connector
1: Wd m Row A on connector Bottom of connector
2: Wd m+1 Row B on connector Top of connector
Model number
Unit with MIL Connector
Connector
Connected to the connector on the next Unit.
Unit with Fujitsu-compatible
Connector
I/O wiring
connector
(24-pin x 2)
I/O indicators
Word m
Word m+1
MD231
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 12 13 14 15
10 11
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 12 13 14 15
10 11
MD232
ID261
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 12 13 14 15
10 11
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 12 13 14 15
10 11
I
II
ID261
Indicator Switch
Changes the 32 I/O displayed on the I/O indicators.
Unit with MIL Connector
Connector
Connected to the connector on the next Unit.
Unit with Fujitsu-compatible
Connector
I/O wiring
connector
(40-pin x 2)
I/O indicators
Word m or
m+2
Word m+1
or m+3
CN2
CN1 CN2
CN1
Setting Fujitsu connector
1 Wd m and m+1: CN1
2 Wd m+2 and m+3: CN2
188
CJ-series Basic I/O Units Section 3-6
Dimensions
Input Units and Output Units
■32-point Units with 40-pin Fujitsu-compatible Connector
CJ1W-ID231
CJ1W-OD231
■32-point Units with 40-pin MIL Connector
CJ1W-ID232
CJ1W-OD232
CJ1W-OD233
2.72.7 90
65
66.5
(112.5)
0
0
1
20
AB
20
1
1
123
456 7
89
10 11
12 13 14 15
20
2.72.7 90
65
83.6
0
01
1ch
0ch
123
456 7
89
10 11
12 13 14 15
20
189
CJ-series Basic I/O Units Section 3-6
24-V DC Input/Transistor Output Units
■32-point Units with 2 × 24-pin Fujitsu-compatible Connectors
CJ1W-MD231
■32-point Units with 2 × 20-pin MIL Connectors
CJ1W-MD232
CJ1W-MD233
ABAB
112
12 1
INOUT
15
0
910 12
1
CN2
11
CN1
13 148
12345670
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
12345670
(112.5)
65
66.5
90 2.72.7
31
OUT
1
0
13 15
0 ch 1 ch
1412
12345670
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
12345670
8 9 10 11
IN
83.6
65
90 2.72.7
31
190
CJ-series Basic I/O Units Section 3-6
Input Units, Output Units, 24-V DC Input/Transistor Output Units, TTL I/O Units
■64-point Units with 2 × 40-pin Fujitsu-compatible Connectors
CJ1W-ID261
CJ1W-OD261
CJ1W-MD261
■64-point Units with 2 × 40-pin MIL Connectors
CJ1W-ID262
CJ1W-OD262
CJ1W-OD263
CJ1W-MD263
CJ1W-MD563
ABAB
120
1
20
INOUT
15
1
CN1
0
CN2
2
3
12345670
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
12345670
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
65
66.5
(112.5)
90 2.72.7
31
OUT
0 ch
1 ch 2 ch
3 ch
12345670
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
12345670
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
31
20
IN
83.6
65
90 2.72.7
31
191
CJ-series Basic I/O Units Section 3-6
Connecting to Connector-Terminal Block Units
The CJ-series 32/64-point Basic I/O Units can be connected to Connector-
Terminal Block Conversion Units as shown in the following table.
Units with Fujitsu-compatible Connectors
Basic I/O Unit Connecting
Cable
Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Unit Required for
connection
Model
number
Specifications Model number Specifications
CJ1W-
ID231
32-point 24-V DC Input
Unit
XW2Z-@@@B XW2B-40G5 Standard, M3.5 screw terminal block 1 Connecting Cable
and 1 Conversion Unit
XW2B-40G4 Standard, M3 screw terminal block
XW2D-40G6 Slim, M3 screw terminal block
XW2D-40G6-RF Slim, M3 screw terminal block, built-
in bleeder resistor
XW2Z-@@@D XW2C-20G5-IN16 16-point input common, M3.5 screw
terminal block
1 Connecting Cable
and 2 Conversion Units
CJ1W-
ID261
64-point 24-V DC Input
Unit
XW2Z-@@@B XW2B-40G5 Standard, M3.5 screw terminal block 2 Connecting Cables
and 2 Conversion Units
XW2B-40G4 Standard, M3 screw terminal block
XW2D-40G6 Slim, M3 screw terminal block
XW2D-40G6-RF Slim, M3 screw terminal block, built-
in bleeder resistor
XW2Z-@@@D XW2C-20G5-IN16 16-point input common, M3.5 screw
terminal block
2 Connecting Cables
and 4 Conversion Units
CJ1W-
OD231
32-point Transistor Out-
put Unit with Sinking
Outputs
XW2Z-@@@B XW2B-40G5 Standard, M3.5 screw terminal block 1 Connecting Cable
and 1 Conversion Unit
XW2B-40G4 Standard, M3 screw terminal block
XW2D-40G6 Slim, M3 screw terminal block
CJ1W-
OD261
64-point Transistor Out-
put Unit with Sinking
Outputs
XW2Z-@@@B XW2B-40G5 Standard, M3.5 screw terminal block 2 Connecting Cables
and 2 Conversion Units
XW2B-40G4 Standard, M3 screw terminal block
XW2D-40G6 Slim, M3 screw terminal block
CJ1W-
MD231
16-point 24-V DC Input/
16-point Transistor Out-
put Unit with Sinking
Outputs
Inputs:
XW2Z-@@@A
XW2B-20G4 Standard, M3 screw terminal block 1 Connecting Cable
and 1 Conversion Unit
XW2B-20G5 Standard, M3.5 screw terminal block
XW2D-20G6 Slim, M3 screw terminal block
XW2C-20G5-IN16 2-tier, M3.5 screw terminal block
Outputs:
XW2Z@@@A
XW2B-20G4 Standard, M3 screw terminal block
XW2B-20G5 Standard, M3.5 screw terminal block
XW2D-20G6 Slim, M3 screw terminal block
CJ1W-
MD261
32-point 24-V DC Input/
32-point Transistor Out-
put Unit with Sinking
Outputs
Inputs:
XW2Z-@@@B
XW2B-40G4 Standard, M3 screw terminal block 1 Connecting Cable
and 1 Conversion Unit
XW2B-40G5 Standard, M3.5 screw terminal block
XW2D-40G6 Slim, M3 screw terminal block
XW2D-40G6-RF Slim, M3 screw terminal block, built-
in bleeder resistor
Inputs:
XW2Z-@@@D
XW2C-20G5-IN16 2-tier, M3.5 screw terminal block 1 Connecting Cable
and 2 Conversion Units
Outputs:
XW2Z-@@@B
XW2B-40G4 Standard, M3 screw terminal block 1 Connecting Cable
and 1 Conversion Unit
XW2B-40G5 Standard, M3.5 screw terminal block
XW2D-40G6 Slim, M3 screw terminal block
192
CJ-series Basic I/O Units Section 3-6
Units with MIL Connectors
Basic I/O Unit Connecting
Cable
Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Unit Required for
connection
Model
number
Specifications Model number Specifications
CJ1W-
ID232
32-point 24-V DC
Input Unit
XW2Z-@@@K XW2B-40G5 Standard, M3.5 screw terminal block 1 Connecting Cable
and 1 Conversion Unit
XW2B-40G4 Standard, M3 screw terminal block
XW2D-40G6 Slim, M3 screw terminal block
XW2D-40G6-RM Slim, M3 screw terminal block, built-
in bleeder resistor
XW2Z-@@@N XW2C-20G5-IN16 16-point input common, M3.5 screw
terminal block
1 Connecting Cable
and 2 Conversion Units
XW2C-20G6-IO16 16-point I/O common, M3.5 screw
terminal block
CJ1W-
ID262
64-point 24-V DC
Input Unit
XW2Z-@@@K XW2B-40G5 Standard, M3.5 screw terminal block 2 Connecting Cables
and 2 Conversion Units
XW2B-40G4 Standard, M3 screw terminal block
XW2D-40G6 Slim, M3 screw terminal block
XW2D-40G6-RM Slim, M3 screw terminal block, built-
in bleeder resistor
XW2Z-@@@N XW2C-20G5-IN16 16-point input common, M3.5 screw
terminal block
2 Connecting Cables
and 4 Conversion Units
XW2C-20G6-IO16 16-point I/O common, M3.5 screw
terminal block
CJ1W-
OD232
32-point Transistor
Output Unit with
Sourcing Outputs
XW2Z-@@@K XW2B-40G5 Standard, M3.5 screw terminal block 1 Connecting Cable
and 1 Conversion Unit
XW2B-40G4 Standard, M3 screw terminal block
XW2D-40G6 Slim, M3 screw terminal block
XW2Z-@@@N XW2C-20G6-IO16 16-point I/O common, M3.5 screw
terminal block
1 Connecting Cable
and 2 Conversion Units
CJ1W-
OD233
32-point Transistor
Output Unit with
Sinking Outputs
XW2Z-@@@K XW2B-40G5 Standard, M3.5 screw terminal block 1 Connecting Cable
and 1 Conversion Unit
XW2B-40G4 Standard, M3 screw terminal block
XW2D-40G6 Slim, M3 screw terminal block
XW2Z-@@@N XW2C-20G6-IO16 16-point I/O common, M3.5 screw
terminal block
1 Connecting Cable
and 2 Conversion Units
CJ1W-
OD262
64-point Transistor
Output Unit with
Sourcing Output
XW2Z-@@@K XW2B-40G4 Standard, M3 screw terminal block 2 Connecting Cables
and 2 Conversion Units
XW2B-40G5 Standard, M3.5 screw terminal block
XW2D-40G6 Slim, M3 screw terminal block
XW2Z-@@@N XW2C-20G6-IO16 16-point I/O common, M3.5 screw
terminal block
2 Connecting Cables
and 4 Conversion Units
CJ1W-
OD263
64-point Transistor
Output Unit with
Sinking Outputs
XW2Z-@@@K XW2B-40G5 Standard, M3.5 screw terminal block 2 Connecting Cable
and 2 Conversion Unit
XW2B-40G4 Standard, M3 screw terminal block
XW2D-40G6 Slim, M3 screw terminal block
XW2Z-@@@N XW2C-20G6-IO16 16-point I/O common, M3.5 screw
terminal block
2 Connecting Cables
and 4 Conversion Units
CJ1W-
MD232
16-point 24-V DC
Input/16-point Tran-
sistor Output Unit
with Sourcing Out-
puts
Inputs:
G79-O@@C
XW2B-20G4 Standard, M3 screw terminal block 1 Connecting Cable
and 1 Conversion Unit
XW2B-20G5 Standard, M3.5 screw terminal block
XW2D-20G6 Slim, M3 screw terminal block
Outputs:
G79-O@@C
XW2B-20G4 Standard, M3 screw terminal block
XW2B-20G5 Standard, M3.5 screw terminal block
XW2D-20G6 Slim, M3 screw terminal block
CJ1W-
MD233
16-point 24-V DC
Input/16-point Tran-
sistor Output Unit
with Sinking Outputs
Inputs:
G79-O@@C
XW2B-20G4 Standard, M3 screw terminal block 1 Connecting Cable
and 1 Conversion Unit
XW2B-20G5 Standard, M3.5 screw terminal block
XW2D-20G6 Slim, M3 screw terminal block
Outputs:
G79-O@@C
XW2B-20G4 Standard, M3 screw terminal block
XW2B-20G5 Standard, M3.5 screw terminal block
XW2D-20G6 Slim, M3 screw terminal block
193
CJ-series Basic I/O Units Section 3-6
Connecting to I/O Terminals
The CJ-series 32/64-point Basic I/O Units can be connected to I/O Terminals
as shown in the following table.
Units with Fujitsu-compatible Connectors
CJ1W-
MD263
32-point 24-V DC
Input/32-point Tran-
sistor Output Unit
with Sinking Outputs
Inputs:
XW2Z-@@@K
XW2B-40G4 Standard, M3 screw terminal block 1 Connecting Cable
and 1 Conversion Unit
XW2B-40G5 Standard, M3.5 screw terminal block
XW2D-40G6 Slim, M3 screw terminal block
XW2D-40G6-RM Slim, M3 screw terminal block, built-
in bleeder resistor
Inputs:
XW2Z-@@@N
XW2C-20G5-IN16 16-point input common, M3.5 screw
terminal block
1 Connecting Cable
and 2 Conversion Units
XW2C-20G6-IO16 16-point I/O common, M3.5 screw
terminal block
Outputs:
XW2Z-@@@K
XW2B-40G4 Standard, M3 screw terminal block 1 Connecting Cable
and 1 Conversion Unit
XW2B-40G5 Standard, M3.5 screw terminal block
XW2D-40G6 Slim, M3 screw terminal block
Outputs:
XW2Z-@@@N
XW2C-20G6-IO16 16-point I/O common, M3 screw ter-
minal block
1 Connecting Cable
and 2 Conversion Units
CJ1W-
MD563
32-point TTL Input/
32-point TTL Output
Unit
Inputs:
XW2Z-@@@K
XW2B-40G4 Standard, M3 screw terminal block 1 Connecting Cable
and 1 Conversion Unit
XW2B-40G5 Standard, M3.5 screw terminal block
XW2D-40G6 Slim, M3 screw terminal block
Inputs:
XW2Z-@@@N
XW2C-20G5-IN16 16-point input common, M3.5 screw
terminal block
1 Connecting Cable
and 2 Conversion Units
XW2C-20G6-IO16 16-point I/O common, M3.5 screw
terminal block
Outputs:
XW2Z-@@@K
XW2B-40G4 Standard, M3 screw terminal block 1 Connecting Cable
and 1 Conversion Unit
XW2B-40G5 Standard, M3.5 screw terminal block
XW2D-40G6 Slim, M3 screw terminal block
Outputs:
XW2Z-@@@N
XW2C-20G6-IO16 16-point I/O common, M3.5 screw
terminal block
1 Connecting Cable
and 2 Conversion Units
Basic I/O Unit Connecting
Cable
Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Unit Required for
connection
Model
number
Specifications Model number Specifications
Basic I/O Unit Connecting
Cable
I/O Terminal Required for
connection
Model
number
Specifications Model number Type Input voltage/
output type
CJ1W-
ID231
32-point 24-V DC Input
Unit
G79-I@C-@G7TC-ID16 Input Block Input: 24 V DC
Output: Relay
1 Connecting Cable
and 2 I/O Terminals
G7TC-IA16 Input: 100/
200 V AC
Output: Relay
CJ1W-
ID261
64-point 24-V DC Input
Unit
G79-I@C-@G7TC-ID16 Input: 24 V DC
Output: Relay
2 Connecting Cables
and 4 I/O Terminals
G7TC-IA16 Input: 100/
200 V AC
Output: Relay
CJ1W-
OD231
32-point Transistor Out-
put Unit with Sinking
Outputs
G79-O@C-@G7TC-OC16 Output Block Input: 24 V DC
Output: Relay
1 Connecting Cable
and 2 I/O Terminals
G70D-SOC16/
VSOC16
Output Termi-
nal (Slim)
Input: 24 V DC
Output: Relay
G70D-FOM16/
VFOM16
Output Termi-
nal (Slim)
Input: 24 V DC
Output: MOS FET
G70A-ZOC16-3 +
Relays
Relay Terminal
Socket (NPN) +
Relays
Input: 24 V DC
Output: Mechani-
cal relay, SSR,
MOS FET (via
relay)
194
CJ-series Basic I/O Units Section 3-6
CJ1W-
OD261
64-point Transistor Out-
put Unit with Sinking
Outputs
G79-O@C-@G7TC-OC16 Output Block Input: 24 V DC
Output: Relay
2 Connecting Cables
and 4 I/O Terminals
G70D-SOC16/
VSOC16
Output Termi-
nal (Slim)
Input: 24 V DC
Output: Relay
G70D-FOM16/
VFOM16
Output Termi-
nal (Slim)
Input: 24 V DC
Output: MOS FET
G70A-ZOC16-3 +
Relays
Relay Terminal
Socket (NPN) +
Relays
Input: 24 V DC
Output: Mechani-
cal relay, SSR,
MOS FET (via
relay)
CJ1W-
MD231
16-point 24-V DC Input/
16-point Transistor Out-
put Unit
Inputs:
G79-@C
G7TC-ID16 Input Block Input: 24 V DC
Output: Relay
1 Connecting Cable
and 1 I/O Terminal
G7TC-IA16 Input: 100/
200 V AC
Output: Relay
Outputs:
G79-@C
G7TC-OC16 Output Block Input: 24 V DC
Output: Relay
1 Connecting Cable
and 1 I/O Terminal
G70D-SOC16/
VSOC16
Output Termi-
nal (Slim)
Input: 24 V DC
Output: Relay
G70D-FOM16/
VFOM16
Output Termi-
nal (Slim)
Input: 24 V DC
Output: MOS FET
G70A-ZOC16-3 Relay Terminal
Socket (NPN) +
Relays
Input: 24 V DC
Output: Mechani-
cal relay, SSR,
MOS FET (via
relay)
CJ1W-
MD261
32-point 24-V DC Input/
32-point Transistor Out-
put Unit
Inputs:
G79-I@C-@G7TC-ID16 Input Block Input: 24 V DC
Output: Relay
1 Connecting Cable
and 2 I/O Terminals
G7TC-IA16 Input: 100/
200 V AC
Output: Relay
Outputs:
G79-O@C-@G7TC-OC16 Output Block Input: 24 V DC
Output: Relay
1 Connecting Cable
and 2 I/O Terminals
G70D-SOC16/
VSOC16
Output Termi-
nal (Slim)
Input: 24 V DC
Output: Relay
G70D-FOM16/
VFOM16
Output Termi-
nal (Slim)
Input: 24 V DC
Output: MOS FET
G70A-ZOC16-3 Relay Terminal
Socket (NPN) +
Relays
Input: 24 V DC
Output: Mechani-
cal relay, SSR,
MOS FET (via
relay)
Basic I/O Unit Connecting
Cable
I/O Terminal Required for
connection
Model
number
Specifications Model number Type Input voltage/
output type
195
CJ-series Basic I/O Units Section 3-6
Units with MIL Connectors
Basic I/O Unit Connecting
Cable
I/O Terminal Required for
connection
Model
number
Specifications Model number Type Input voltage/
output type
CJ1W-
ID232
32-point 24-V DC
Input Unit
G79-O@-@-D1 G7TC-ID16 Input Block Input: 24 V DC
Output: Relay
1 Connecting Cable
and 2 I/O Terminals
G7TC-IA16 Input: 100/
200 V AC
Output: Relay
CJ1W-
ID262
64-point 24-V DC
Input Unit
G79-O@-@-D1 G7TC-ID16 Input Block Input: 24 V DC
Output: Relay
2 Connecting
Cables and 4 I/O
Terminals
G7TC-IA16 Input: 100/
200 V AC
Output: Relay
CJ1W-
OD232
32-point Transistor
Output Unit with
Sourcing Outputs
G79-O@-@-D1 G70D-SOC16-1 Output Terminal
(Slim)
Input: 24 V DC
Output: Relay
1 Connecting Cable
and 2 I/O Terminals
G70D-FOM16-1 Input: 24 V DC
Output: MOS FET
G70A-ZOC16-4 +
Relays
Relay Terminal
Socket (PNP) +
Relays
Input: 24 V DC
Output: Mechanical
relay, SSR, MOS
FET (via relay)
CJ1W-
OD233
32-point Transistor
Output Unit with
Sinking Outputs
G79-O@-@-D1 G7TC-OC16 Output Block Input: 24 V DC
Output: Relay
1 Connecting Cable
and 2 I/O Terminals
G70D-SOC16/
VSOC16
Output Terminal
(Slim)
Input: 24 V DC
Output: Relay
G70D-FOM16/
VFOM16
Input: 24 V DC
Output: MOS FET
G70A-ZOC16-3 +
Relays
Relay Terminal
Socket (NPN) +
Relays
Input: 24 V DC
Output: Mechanical
relay, SSR, MOS
FET (via relay)
CJ1W-
OD262
64-point Transistor
Output Unit with
Sourcing Outputs
G79-O@-@-D1 G70D-SOC16-1 Output Terminal
(Slim)
Input: 24 V DC
Output: Relay
2 Connecting
Cables and 4 I/O
Terminal
G70D-FOM16-1 Input: 24 V DC
Output: MOS FET
G70A-ZOC16-4 +
Relays
Relay Terminal
Socket (PNP) +
Relays
Input: 24 V DC
Output: Mechanical
relay, SSR, MOS
FET (via relay)
CJ1W-
OD263
64-point Transistor
Output Unit with
Sinking Outputs
G79-O@-@-D1 G7TC-OC16 Output Block Input: 24 V DC
Output: Relay
2 Connecting
Cables and 4 I/O
Terminals
G70D-SOC16/
VSOC16
Output Terminal
(Slim)
Input: 24 V DC
Output: Relay
G70D-FOM16/
VFOM16
Input: 24 V DC
Output: MOS FET
G70A-ZOC16-3 +
Relays
Relay Terminal
Socket (NPN) +
Relays
Input: 24 V DC
Output: Mechanical
relay, SSR, MOS
FET (via relay)
196
CJ-series Basic I/O Units Section 3-6
CJ1W-
MD232
16-point 24-V DC
Input/16-point Tran-
sistor Output Unit
with Sourcing Out-
puts
Inputs:
G79-O@@C
G7TC-ID16 Input Block Input: 24 V DC
Output: Relay
1 Connecting Cable
and 1 I/O Terminal
G7TC-IA16 Input: 100/
200 V AC
Output: Relay
Outputs:
G79-O@@C
G7TC-OC16-1 Output Block Input: 24 V DC
Output: Relay
1 Connecting Cable
and 1 I/O Terminal
Outputs:
G79-I@@C
G70D-SOC16-1 Output Terminal
(Slim)
Input: 24 V DC
Output: Relay
G70D-FOM16-1 Input: 24 V DC
Output: MOS FET
G70A-ZOC16-4 Relay Terminal
Socket (PNP) +
Relays
Input: 24 V DC
Output: Mechanical
relay, SSR, MOS
FET (via relay)
CJ1W-
MD233
16-point 24-V DC
Input/16-point Tran-
sistor Output Unit
with Sinking Outputs
Inputs:
G79-O@@C
G7TC-ID16 Input Block Input: 24 V DC
Output: Relay
1 Connecting Cable
and 1 I/O Terminal
G7TC-IA16 Input: 100/
200 V AC
Output: Relay
Outputs:
G79-O@@C
G7TC-OC16 Output Block Input: 24 V DC
Output: Relay
1 Connecting Cable
and 1 I/O Terminal
G70D-SOC16/
VSOC16
Output Terminal
(Slim)
Input: 24 V DC
Output: Relay
G70D-FOM16/
VFOM16
Output Terminal
(Slim)
Input: 24 V DC
Output: MOS FET
G70A-ZOC16-3 Relay Terminal
Socket (NPN) +
Relays
Input: 24 V DC
Output: Mechanical
relay, SSR, MOS
FET (via relay)
CJ1W-
MD263
32-point 24-V DC
Input/32-point Tran-
sistor Output Unit
with Sinking Outputs
Inputs:
G79-O@-@-D1
G7TC-ID16 Input Block Input: 24 V DC
Output: Relay
1 Connecting Cable
and 2 I/O Terminals
G7TC-IA16 Input: 24 V DC
Output: Relay
Outputs:
G79-O@-@-D1
G7TC-OC16 Output Block Input: 24 V DC
Output: Relay
1 Connecting Cable
and 2 I/O Terminals
G70D-SOC16/
VSOC16
Output Terminal
(Slim)
Input: 24 V DC
Output: Relay
G70D-FOM16/
VFOM16
Output Terminal
(Slim)
Input: 24 V DC
Output: MOS FET
G70A-ZOC16-3 Relay Terminal
Socket (NPN) +
Relays
Input: 24 V DC
Output: Mechanical
relay, SSR, MOS
FET (via relay)
CJ1W-
MD563
32-point TTL Input/
32-point TTL Output
Unit
Inputs:
G79-O@-@-D1
G7TC-ID16 Input Block Input: 24 V DC
Output: Relay
1 Connecting Cable
and 2 I/O Terminals
G7TC-IA16 Input: 100/
200 V AC
Output: Relay
Outputs:
G79-O@-@-D1
G7TC-OC16 Output Block Input: 24 V DC
Output: Relay
1 Connecting Cable
and 2 I/O Terminals
G70D-SOC16/
VSOC16
Output Terminal
(Slim)
Input: 24 V DC
Output: Relay
G70D-FOM16/
VFOM16
Output Terminal
(Slim)
Input: 24 V DC
Output: MOS FET
G70A-ZOC16-3 Relay Terminal
Socket (NPN) +
Relays
Input: 24 V DC
Output: Mechanical
relay, SSR, MOS
FET (via relay)
Basic I/O Unit Connecting
Cable
I/O Terminal Required for
connection
Model
number
Specifications Model number Type Input voltage/
output type
197
B7A Interface Unit Section 3-7
3-7 B7A Interface Unit
3-7-1 Overview
The B7A is a 1:1 transmission path that does not require a master. A total of
16 signals are transmitted using a two-conductor or three-conductor VCTF
cable (maximum length: 500 m). The CJ1W-B7A@@ B7A Interface Unit is a
CJ-series Basic I/O Unit that exchanges up to 64 points of I/O data mainly
with B7A Link Terminals using a B7A transmission path.
The B7A Interface Unit and B7A Link Terminal can be used in the same way
as a standard Basic I/O Unit and I/O Terminal without any need to worry about
communications. This characteristic reduces the wiring when using more than
one relatively remote sensor or actuator.
3-7-2 System Configuration
3-7-3 Models
Note 1. A 10-point B7A Link Terminal cannot be connected to a B7A Interface Unit.
B7A Interface Units can be connected together.
2. Wireless transmissions are possible if B7AP Power Couplers are used on
a B7A transmission path, reducing the wiring required for moving objects
and rotating objects.
B7A Interface Unit Specifications I/O words allocated
to Unit
Connectable B7A Link Terminals
(See note 1.)
CJ1W-B7A14 64 inputs
(four B7A ports)
4 input words Inputs: Four 16-point Input Terminals, two 32-
point Input Terminals, or two 16-point Input
Terminals and one 32-point Input Terminal
CJ1W-B7A04 64 outputs
(four B7A ports)
4 output words Outputs: Four 16-point Output Terminals or
two 32-point Output Terminals
CJ1W-B7A22 32 inputs, 32 outputs
(four B7A ports)
2 input words and
2 output words
Inputs: Two 16-point Input Terminals or one
32-point Input Terminal
Outputs: Two 16-point Output Terminals or
one 32-point Output Terminal
or
Two Mixed I/O Terminals
(16 inputs/16 outputs)
CJ1W-B7A@@
B7A Interface Unit
Three-conductor VCTF
connecting cable × 4
Power
Supply
Unit
CJ-series
CPU Unit
12 to 24 V DC power supply
(when using a common power supply)
B7A Link Terminals
198
B7A Interface Unit Section 3-7
3-7-4 B7A Communications Specifications
Note 1. When separate power supplies are used, the B7A Interface Unit and B7A
Link Terminal are supplied by separate external power supplies.
2. When a common power supply is used, the B7A Interface Unit and B7A
Link Terminal are supplied by the same external power supply.
3. We recommend OMRON S8@@-series Power Supply Units for the exter-
nal power supplies.
4. The capacity of the external supply current does not include the capacity
required by the B7A Link Terminal.
5. The minimum input time is the minimum time required by the B7A Interface
Unit to read the input signals from the CPU Unit.
Item Specifications
Transmission
method
One-way time-sharing multiplex transmissions
Transmission delay
(communications
delay on
transmission path)
High-speed 3 ms typical, 5 ms max.
Standard 19.2 ms typical, 31 ms max.
Transmission points CJ1W-B7A14 64 inputs (4 ports)
CJ1W-B7A04 64 outputs (4 ports)
CJ1W-B7A22 32 inputs (2 ports), 32 outputs (2 ports)
External power
supply voltage
(See note 3.)
12 to 24 V DC (allowable voltage range: 10.8 to 26.4 V)
External supply
current
(See note 4.)
CJ1W-B7A14 40 mA min.
CJ1W-B7A04 150 mA min.
CJ1W-B7A22 80 mA min.
Minimum input time
(See note 5.)
High-speed 16 ms
Standard 2.4 ms
Transmission
distance
High-speed Power supply on one side
(common power supply)
10 m max.
50 m max. (with shielded cable)
Power supply on both sides
(separate power supplies)
10 m max.
100 m max. (with shielded cable)
Standard Power supply on one side
(common power supply)
100 m max.
Power supply on both sides
(separate power supplies)
500 m max.
Cables VCTF, 0.75 mm2, 3 conductors (power supply on one side (common power supply))
VCTF, 0.75 mm2, 2 conductors (power supply on both sides (separate power supplies))
Shielded cable, 0.75 mm2, 3 conductors (power supply on one side (common power supply))
Shielded cable, 0.75 mm2, 2 conductors (power supply on both sides (separate power supplies))
199
B7A Interface Unit Section 3-7
3-7-5 Common Specifications
3-7-6 I/O Memory Allocations
The B7A Interface Unit is a Basic I/O Unit. Each Unit is allocated four words in
the I/O Area (which starts at CIO 0000). The words are allocated according to
the mounting position of the Unit as shown in the following table.
Item Specifications
Applicable PLCs CJ Series
Unit classification CJ-series Basic I/O Unit
Transmission delay Standard (19.2 ms typical) or high-speed (3 ms typical),
switchable
(Switchable by using the setting switch on the front panel.
Settings are read when power is turned ON or Unit is
restarted.)
Factory setting: Standard (19.2 ms typical)
Note A transmission error will occur if B7A Link Terminals
with different transmission delay times are con-
nected to each other.
Transmission error
input status processing
HOLD (The bit status from immediately before the transmis-
sion error is held.)
Settings Front panel
Setting switch: Standard (19.2 ms typical) or
high-speed (3 ms typical), switchable
Indicators 5 LED indicators: RUN (B7A operating status), ERR1 (port
1 communications error), ERR2 (port 2 communications
error), ERR3 (port 3 communications error), ERR4 (port 4
communications error)
Front panel connection Connector with clamps
Current consumption 5 V DC: 70 mA max. (supplied from Power Supply Unit)
Weight 80 g max.
Port Input/output Allocated word
(n: First word
allocated to Unit)
CJ1W-B7A14 CJ1W-B7A04 CJ1W-B7A22
1 Input Output Output Word n
2 Input Output Output Word n+1
3 Input Output Input Word n+2
4 Input Output Input Word n+3
200
B7A Interface Unit Section 3-7
3-7-7 Transmission Error Processing
Input Ports
The B7A Interface Unit detects transmission errors at the input ports. When a
transmission error is detected at an input port, the corresponding indicator
and Transmission Error Flag turn ON.
Indicators
When a transmission occurs at an input port, indicators ERR1 to ERR4 on the
front panel will turn ON according to the port where the error occurred.
Transmission Error Flag
The corresponding Transmission Error Flag in the first word allocated to the
Unit in the CPU Unit's Auxiliary Area will turn ON for each input port, as
shown in the following table. Words A050 to A080 are allocated to Basic I/O
Unit as information words.
Example: Rack 0, Slot 0
Example: Rack 0, Slot 1
Transmission Error Input Status Processing
If an error occurs at an input port, the Unit will hold the status of the input bit in
the CPU Unit's I/O memory from immediately before the transmission error
occurred. When transmission returns to normal, the signals that have been
normally received will be input to the input bit.
Output Ports
The B7A Interface Unit does not detect transmission errors at output ports.
Detect output port transmission errors at the B7A Link Terminal that is con-
nected to the B7A Interface Unit.
Port where
error
occurred
LED error indicators
CJ1W-B7A14 CJ1W-B7A04 CJ1W-B7A22
Port 1 ERR1 --- ---
Port 2 ERR2 --- ---
Port 3 ERR3 --- ERR1
Port 4 ERR4 --- ERR2
Port where
error
occurred
Transmission Error Flag
CJ1W-B7A14 CJ1W-B7A04 CJ1W-B7A22
Port 1 A05000 --- ---
Port 2 A05001 --- ---
Port 3 A05002 --- A05000
Port 4 A05003 --- A05001
Port where
error
occurred
Transmission Error Flag
CJ1W-B7A14 CJ1W-B7A04 CJ1W-B7A22
Port 1 A05008 --- ---
Port 2 A05009 --- ---
Port 3 A05010 --- A05008
Port 4 A05011 --- A05009
201
B7A Interface Unit Section 3-7
3-7-8 Parts and Names
Indicators
CJ1W-B7A14
ERR4
ERR1
ERR2
RUN
ERR3
3ms 19ms
SIG
SIG
SIG
SIG
+
−
+
−
+
−
+
−
+
−
IN4 IN1IN2IN3
B7A14
Indicators
Transmission
delay switch
Connection terminals
(Screwless connectors)
Display Name Color Status Condition
RUN B7A operating
status
Green ON The B7A Unit is operating.
OFF The B7A Unit is stopped.
ERR1 Port 1 trans-
mission error
Red ON A transmission error has
occurred at port 1 of the B7A
Unit.
OFF The Unit is operating normally.
ERR2 Port 2 trans-
mission error
Red ON A transmission error has
occurred at port 2 of the B7A
Unit.
OFF The Unit is operating normally.
ERR3 Port 3 trans-
mission error
Red ON A transmission error has
occurred at port 3 of the B7A
Unit.
OFF The Unit is operating normally.
ERR4 Port 4 trans-
mission error
Red ON A transmission error has
occurred at port 4 of the B7A
Unit.
OFF The Unit is operating normally.
B7A14 CJ
RUN
ERR1
ERR2
ERR3
ERR4
202
B7A Interface Unit Section 3-7
CJ1W-B7A04
CJ1W-B7A22
Transmission Delay Switch
Note The switch setting is read when the power is turned ON or the Unit is
restarted. If the switch setting is changed after turning ON the power or
restarting the Unit, the setting will not be read.
Display Name Color Status Condition
RUN B7A operating
status
Green ON The B7A Unit is operating.
OFF The B7A Unit is stopped.
B7A04 CJ
RUN
Display Name Color Status Condition
RUN B7A operating
status
Green ON The B7A Unit is operating.
OFF The B7A Unit is stopped.
ERR1 Port 3 trans-
mission error
Red ON A transmission error has occurred
at port 3 of the B7A Unit.
OFF The Unit is operating normally.
ERR2 Port 4 trans-
mission error
Red ON A transmission error has occurred
at port 4 of the B7A Unit.
OFF The Unit is operating normally.
B7A22 CJ
RUN
ERR1
ERR2
Name Function Factory setting
Transmission delay
switch
The same baud rate is set for all ports
using this one switch.
Right: Standard (19.2 ms typical)
Left: High-speed (3 ms typical)
Standard
3 ms 19 ms
203
B7A Interface Unit Section 3-7
Terminal Arrangement
Note Terminals V1, V2, V3, V4, and V are connected internally in the Unit, and ter-
minals G1, G2, G3, G4, and G are connected internally in the Unit.
3-7-9 Preparing and Connecting Cables
Use the following procedure to prepare and connect the cables.
Note Always turn OFF the Unit's power supply and communications power supply
before attaching or removing connectors.
1) Preparing the Covering First, use the following procedure to prepare the cable.
1,2,3... 1. Strip approximately 10 mm of the sheath covering the signal lines to match
the crimp terminals. Next, twist together the wires of each signal line firmly.
Terminal Name Function Word Appearance
APort 1 power supply: V1 Connect to the + terminal of the B7A Link Termi-
nal to be connected to port 1 (only when using a
common power supply).
n Connector with clamps
BPort 1 signal: SIG1 Connect to the SIG terminal of the B7A Link Ter-
minal to be connected to port 1.
CPort 1 ground: G1 Connect to the − terminal of the B7A Link Termi-
nal to be connected to port 1.
DPort 2 power supply: V2 Connect to the + terminal of the B7A Link Termi-
nal to be connected to port 2 (only when using a
common power supply).
n+1
EPort 2 signal: SIG2 Connect to the SIG terminal of the B7A Link Ter-
minal to be connected to port 2.
FPort 2 ground: G2 Connect to the − terminal of the B7A Link Termi-
nal to be connected to port 2.
GPort 3 power supply: V3 Connect to the + terminal of the B7A Link Termi-
nal to be connected to port 3 (only when using a
common power supply).
n+2
HPort 3 signal: SIG3 Connect to the SIG terminal of the B7A Link Ter-
minal to be connected to port 3.
IPort 3 ground: G3 Connect to the − terminal of the B7A Link Termi-
nal to be connected to port 3.
JPort 4 power supply: V4 Connect to the + terminal of the B7A Link Termi-
nal to be connected to port 4 (only when using a
common power supply).
n+3
KPort 4 signal: SIG4 Connect to the SIG terminal of the B7A Link Ter-
minal to be connected to port 4.
LPort 4 ground: G4 Connect to the − terminal of the B7A Link Termi-
nal to be connected to port 4.
M+ power supply: V Connect to the + terminal of the external power
supply.
---
N− power supply: G Connect to the − terminal of the external power
supply.
AV1
BSIG1
CG1
DV2
ESIG2
FG2
GV3
HSIG3
IG3
JV4
KSIG4
LG4
MV
NG
SIG
SIG
SIG
SIG
+
−
+
−
+
−
+
−
+
−
IN4 IN1IN2IN3
Approx. 10 mm
204
B7A Interface Unit Section 3-7
2. Use vinyl tape or a heat-shrink tube to cover the end of the VCTF cable
sheath, as shown in the following diagram.
2) Preparing Cable Signal
Lines
Attach the crimp terminals to the cable's signal lines.
1,2,3... 1. Attaching Crimp Terminals
Insert the end of the cable into the terminal and crimp.
Recommended Crimp Terminals for Cables
Note Always use the specified crimp tool to attach the crimp terminals. If
a crimp tool is not used, the cable will not be crimped properly, which
may cause the cable to become detached from the terminal.
The following crimp tools are available.
2. Insulate the stripped end of each signal line with vinyl tape or heat-shrink
tubing.
3) Connecting Cables Use the following procedure to connect cables to the connection terminals.
Orient the connector properly, and then insert the signal lines fully into the
back of each terminal hole in the connector, as shown in the following dia-
gram. (The signal lines are secured in this way, without requiring the use of a
tool.) If crimp terminals are not used on the signal lines, use a small flat-blade
screwdriver to press down on the orange tab to insert the signal lines.
Cover with vinyl tape or
heat-shrink tube.
Model Manufacturer
AI-series AI0.75-8GY
(Product code: 3200519)
PHOENIX CONTACT
H0.75/14
(Product code: 046290)
Nihon Weidmuller Co., Ltd.
TE-0.75 NICHIFU Co., Ltd.
Crim
p
terminal Si
g
nal line
Sleeve
Model Manufacturer
UD6 (Product code: 1204436)
or ZA3 Series
PHOENIX CONTACT
Crimper PZ1.5
(Product code: 900599)
Nihon Weidmuller Co., Ltd.
NH77 NICHIFU Co., Ltd.
205
B7A Interface Unit Section 3-7
• Power Supply on One Side (Common Power Supply)
• Power Supply on Both Sides (Separate Power Supplies)
Note To remove the signal lines from the connector, press down on the orange tab
while pulling out the signal line, as shown in the following diagram.
Note To remove the connector from the Unit, fully unscrew the set screws from both
sides of the connector, and then remove the connector.
Forcibly pulling the connector while the set screws are still attached may dam-
age the connector.
3-7-10 Connection Diagrams
Note 1. Confirm that terminals are connected correctly. If connections are incor-
rect, the internal components of the B7A Interface Unit and B7A Link Ter-
minal may be damaged.
2. Route the signal lines in separate ducts both inside and outside the control
panel to isolate them from power lines.
3. Connect cables at a distance that is within the range given in the specifi-
cations.
4. Always turn OFF the power to the CPU Unit and all other Units before con-
necting the communications cables.
5. Always lay communications cables within ducts.
V1
SIG1
G1
SIG1
G1
1
2
Small, flat-
blade screwdriver
206
B7A Interface Unit Section 3-7
Standard Mode
Power Supply on One Side (Common Power Supply)
Power Supply on Both Sides (Separate Power Supplies)
High-speed Mode
Note If shielded cable is not used, the maximum transmission distance is 10 m
regardless of whether a common or separate power supplies are used. (Use
VCTF cable of 0.75 mm2 or higher.)
Power Supply on One Side (Common Power Supply)
V1
SIG1
G1
V2
SIG2
G2
V3
SIG3
G3
V4
SIG4
G4
V
G
+
−
B7A Interface Unit
12 to 24 V DC
Transmission distance: 100 m max.
Transmission cable: VCTF 0.75mm2 min.
B7A Link Terminal
B7A Link Terminal
V1
SIG1
G1
V2
SIG2
G2
V3
SIG3
G3
V4
SIG4
G4
V
G
−
SIG
−
+
+
+
−
B7A Interface Unit
12 to 24 V DC
Transmission cable: VCTF 0.75mm2 min.
B7A Link Terminal
B7A Link Terminal
12 to 24 V DC
Transmission distance:
500 m max.
12 to 24 V DC
V1
SIG1
G1
V2
SIG2
G2
V3
SIG3
G3
V4
SIG4
G4
V
G
+
−
Ground
Shielded cable:
VCTF 0.75mm2 min.
Transmission distance:
50 m max.
Ground
Shielded cable:
VCTF 0.75mm2 min.
B7A Interface Unit
12 to 24 V DC
B7A Link Terminal
B7A Link Terminal
207
B7A Interface Unit Section 3-7
Power Supply on Both Sides (Separate Power Supplies)
3-7-11 Dimensions (Unit: mm)
V1
SIG1
G1
V2
SIG2
G2
V3
SIG3
G3
V4
SIG4
G4
V
G
+
+
Ground
Shielded cable:
VCTF 0.75mm2 min.
Transmission distance:
100 m max.
Ground
Shielded cable:
VCTF 0.75mm2 min.
B7A Interface Unit
12 to 24 V DC
B7A Link Terminal
B7A Link Terminal
12 to 24 V DC
12 to 24 V DC
20
902.7 2.7
65
79.5
208
B7A Interface Unit Section 3-7
209
SECTION 4
Operating Procedures
This section outlines the steps required to assemble and operate a CJ-series PLC System.
4-1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
4-2 Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
210
Introduction Section 4-1
4-1 Introduction
The following procedure outlines the recommended steps to follow when pre-
paring CJ-series PLCs for operation.
1,2,3... 1. Installation
Set the DIP switches on the front of each Unit as required.
Connect the CPU Unit, Power Supply Unit, I/O Units, and End Cover. In-
stall a Memory Card if required.
See 5-2 Installation for details.
2. Wiring
Connect the power supply wiring, I/O wiring, and Programming Device
(CX-Programmer or Programming Console). Connect communications
wiring as required.
See 5-3 Wiring for details on power supply and I/O wiring.
3. Initial Settings (Hardware)
Set the DIP switches and Rotary switches on the CPU Unit and other Units.
4. Confirming Programming Device Connection
a) Connect a Programming Device (i.e., the CX-Programmer or a Pro-
gramming Console).
b) Check the power supply wiring and voltage, turn ON the power supply,
and check to be sure the Programming Device will connect to the CPU
Unit.
See 3-3 Programming Devices for details.
5. Registering the I/O Tables (If Required.)
Check the Units to verify that they are installed in the right slots. With the
PLC in PROGRAM mode, register the I/O tables from the CX-Programmer
(online) or Programming Console. (Another method is to create the I/O ta-
bles in CX-Programmer (offline) and transfer them to the CPU Unit.)
See 8-1 I/O Allocations for details.
6. PLC Setup Settings
With the PLC in PROGRAM mode, change the settings in the PLC Setup
as necessary from the CX-Programmer (online) or Programming Console.
(Another method is to change the PLC Setup in CX-Programmer (offline)
and transfer it to the CPU Unit.)
7. DM Area Settings
a) Use a Programming Device (CX-Programmer or Programming Con-
sole) to make any necessary settings in the parts of the DM Area that
are allocated to Special I/O Units and CPU Bus Units.
b) Reset the power (ON → OFF → ON) or toggle the Restart Bit for each
Unit. See the Unit’s operation manual for details.
8. Writing the Program
Write the program with a Programming Device (CX-Programmer or Pro-
gramming Console).
9. Transferring the Program (CX-Programmer Only)
With the PLC in PROGRAM mode, transfer the program from CX-Pro-
grammer to the CPU Unit.
211
Introduction Section 4-1
10. Testing Operation
a) Checking I/O Wiring
b) Auxiliary Area Settings (As Required)
Check operation of special Auxiliary Area Settings such as the follow-
ing:
c) Trial Operation
Test PLC operation by switching the PLC to MONITOR mode.
d) Monitoring and Debugging
Monitor operation from the Programming Device. Use functions such
as force-setting/force-resetting bits, tracing, and online editing to de-
bug the program.
11. Saving and Printing the Program
12. Running the Program
Switch the PLC to RUN mode to run the program.
Output wiring With the PLC in PROGRAM mode, force-set output bits
and check the status of the corresponding outputs.
Input wiring Activate sensors and switches and either check the status
of the indicators on the Input Unit or check the status of the
corresponding input bits with the Programming Device’s
Bit/Word Monitor operation.
Output OFF
Bit
When necessary, turn ON the Output OFF Bit (A50015)
from the program and test operation with the outputs
forced OFF.
Hot Start Set-
tings
When you want to start operation (switch to RUN mode)
without changing the contents of I/O memory, turn ON the
IOM Hold Bit (A50012).
212
Examples Section 4-2
4-2 Examples
1. Installation
Connect the Units. When necessary, install a Memory Card.
Make sure that the total power consumption of the Units is less than the max-
imum capacity of the Power Supply Unit.
2. Wiring
Connect the power supply and I/O wiring.
3. Initial Settings (Hardware)
Make necessary hardware settings such as the DIP switch settings on the
CPU Unit. Be sure that the communications settings for the peripheral port
and RS-232C port are correct, especially when connecting a Programming
Device (CX-Programmer or Programming Console).
When connecting to the peripheral port, turn OFF pin 4. When connecting the
CX-Programmer to the RS-232C port, turn ON pin 5.
Note When devices other than a Programming Console and Programming Device
are connected to the peripheral port and RS-232C port, turn ON pin 4 and
turn OFF pin 5.
PA205R
POWER
INPUT
AC100-240V
L2/N
L1
DC24V
AC240V
OUTPUT
RUN
PERIPHERAL
ERR/ALM
RUN
INH
COMM
PRPHL
CONTROLLER
CJ1G-CPU44
SYSMAC
PROGRAMMABLE
PORT
OPEN
BUSY
MCPWR
2
ON
4
TERM
RD2
SD2
RDY
NO.
UNIT
ERH
OFF
WIRE
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
ERC
RUN
SCU41 RD1 TER1
SD1
PORT1
(RS422
/485)
PORT2
PA205R
POWER
INPUT
AC100-240V
L2/N
L1
DC24V
AC240V
OUTPUT
RUN
PERIPHERAL
ERR/ALM
RUN
INH
COMM
PRPHL
CONTROLLER
CJ1G-CPU44
SYSMAC
PROGRAMMABLE
PORT
OPEN
BUSY
MCPWR
213
Examples Section 4-2
4. Verifying the Programming Device Connection
Connecting to the CX-Programmer
1,2,3... 1. Connect the CX-Programmer's connecting cable to the peripheral port or
RS-232C port.
Note When connecting to the RS-232C port, pin 5 of the CPU Unit's DIP
switch must be ON.
2. After checking the power supply wiring and voltage, turn ON the power and
verify the Power Supply Unit's POWER Indicator is lit.
3. Start the CX-Programmer and automatically connect online to the PLC.
Note When connecting online automatically, the CPU Unit is connected in
RUN mode.
NEC
PC-9801
BX
CONTROLLER
CJ1G-CPU44
SYSMAC
PROGRAMMABLE
ERR/ALM
RUN
COMM
INH
PRPHL
OPEN
PERIPHERAL
BUSY
MCPWR
PORT
ON
Pro
g
rammin
g
Device
Programming Consol
e
NEC
PC-9801
BX
Install the Units.
214
Examples Section 4-2
4. Verify that the CX-Programmer has connected online with the PLC.
5. Change the operating mode from RUN mode to PROGRAM mode.
Connecting to the Programming Console
1. Connect the Programming Console to the CPU Unit's peripheral port (the
upper port).
2. Verify that the Programming Console's mode is PROGRAM mode.
3. After checking the power supply wiring and voltage, turn ON the power and
verify the Power Supply Unit's POWER Indicator is lit.
4. Verify that the Programming Console has the following display.
5. Input the password (the Clear and Monitor Keys) and verify that the Pro-
gramming Console has the following display.
EAR MIC
Programming
Console
<PRG> 3:JPN~ENG
PASSWORD!
215
Examples Section 4-2
Note If the PLC Setup's Startup Mode Setting is set to PRCN (Startup Mode deter-
mined by the Programming Console's mode switch, the default setting), but a
Programming Console isn't connected when the power is turned ON, the CPU
Unit will enter RUN Mode and start operating.
5. Registering the I/O Tables (If Required)
Registering the I/O tables allocates I/O memory to the Units actually installed
in the PLC. It is not necessary to create I/O tables with CJ-series CPU Units
because by default they will be automatically generated when the CPU Unit is
started. I/O tables can be created by the user to detect mistakes in connected
Units or to enable allocating unused words (such as is possible with CS-series
CPU Units).
Note The user program and parameter area data in CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Units is
backed up in the internal flash memory. The BKUP indicator will light on the
front of the CPU Unit when the backup operation is in progress. Do not turn
OFF the power supply to the CPU Unit when the BKUP indicator is lit. The
data will not be backed up if power is turned OFF.
Using the CX-Programmer Online
Use the following procedure to register the I/O table with the CX-Programmer
that is connected to the PLC.
1,2,3... 1. Install all of the Units in the PLC.
2. With the power supply OFF, connect the CX-Programmer's connecting ca-
ble to the peripheral port or RS-232C port.
Note When connecting to the RS-232C port, pin 5 of the CPU Unit's DIP
switch must be ON.
3. Start the CX-Programmer and connect online to the PLC.
4. Double-click IO Table and Unit Setup on the project tree in the main win-
dow. The I/O Table Window will be displayed.
5. Select Options and then Create. The models and positions of Units
mounted to the Racks will be written to the Registered I/O Table in the CPU
Unit.
CLR MON
<PRG> BZ
3:JPN~ENG
NEC
PC-9801
BX
Install the Units.
216
Examples Section 4-2
Using the CX-Programmer Offline
Use the following procedure to create the I/O table offline with the CX-Pro-
grammer and later transfer the I/O table from to the CPU Unit.
1,2,3... 1. Double-click I/O Table on the project tree in the main window. The I/O Ta-
ble Window will be displayed.
2. Double-click the Rack to be edited. The slots for that Rack will be dis-
played.
Write the
I/O table.
Transfer the
I/O table.
217
Examples Section 4-2
3. Right-click the slots to be edited and select the desired Units from the pull-
down menu.
4. Select Options and then Transfer to PLC to transfer the I/O table to the
CPU Unit.
Note The first word allocated to each Rack can be set from the Programming
Device.
Using a Programming Console
Use the following procedure to register the I/O table with a Programming Con-
sole.
1,2,3... 1. Install all of the Units in the PLC.
2. Connect the Programming Console to the peripheral port.
(It can be connected with the power ON.)
3. Perform the following Programming Console operation.
6. Setting the PLC Setup
These settings are the CPU Unit’s software configuration.
Making the Settings with the CX-Programmer
1. Double-click the Settings Icon in the main window's project directory tree.
The PLC Settings Dialog Box will be displayed.
Programming
Console
Install the Units.
CLR
000000 CT00
FUN SHIFT CH
*DM
000000 I/O TBL ?
CHG
000000 I/O TBL
WRIT ????
000000 I/O TBL
WRIT ????
Password (9713)
WRITE
000000CPU BU ST?
0:CLR 1:KEEP
Specify holding or clearing
CPU Bus Unit information.
000000 I/O TBL
WRIT OK
CLR
000000 CT00
218
Examples Section 4-2
2. Make the required settings.
3. After completing the settings, transfer the PLC Setup to the PLC.
Making the Settings with the Programming Console
When a Programming Console is used to set the PLC Setup, the PLC Setup
settings are arranged by word addresses. Refer to the provided Programming
Console settings sheet for details.
In this example, the Programming Console is used to set the Watch Cycle
Time (maximum cycle time) in 10-ms units.
The following diagram shows the required Programming Console operations.
Specifying a word address in the PLC Setup.
(Example: 209)
Address Bits Setting Setting range
209 15 Enable for Watch Cycle Time
setting
0: Use default
1: Use setting in
bits 0 to 14.
0 to 14 Watch Cycle Time setting 0001 to 0FA0
Setting with a Programming Console
CLR
000000 CT00
FUN VRFY
PC SETUP
0:MODE1:PC SETUP
1
PC SETUP
+000 0000
209
PC SETUP
+209
219
Examples Section 4-2
or
Example: Input 8064.
7. DM Area Settings
The following table shows the parts of the DM Area are allocated to Special
I/O Units and CPU Bus Units for initial settings. The actual settings depend on
the model of Unit being used.
After writing the initial settings to the DM Area, be sure to restart the Units by
turning the PLC OFF and then ON again or toggling the Restart Bits for the
affected Units.
8. Writing the Program
Write the program with a Programming Device (CX-Programmer or Program-
ming Console).
The CJ-series PLC’s program can be divided into independently executable
tasks. A single cyclic task can be written for program execution like earlier
PLCs or several cyclic tasks can be written for a more flexible and efficient
program. The following table shows the differences when programming with
CX-Programmer or a Programming Console.
↓
↑PC SETUP
+209 0000
CHG
PC SETUP?
+209 0000 0000
8064WRITE
+209 8064
PC SETUP
Unit Allocated words
Special I/O Units D20000 to D29599 (100 words × 96 Units)
CPU Bus Units D30000 to D31599 (100 words × 16 Units)
Special I/O Unit or
CPU Bus Unit
Restart
Programming
Device
Relationship between Tasks
and Program
Writing a new program Editing an existing program
Cyclic tasks Interrupt
tasks
Cyclic tasks Interrupt
tasks
CX-Programmer Specify the type of task and
task number for each program.
All can be writ-
ten.
(Cyclic tasks 0
to 31)
All can be writ-
ten.
(Interrupt tasks
0 to 255)
All can be
edited.
All can be
edited.
Programming Con-
sole
Task = program
(Cyclic task 0 is the main
program)
Only one can
be written.
(Cyclic task 0)
Several can be
written.
(Interrupt tasks
1 to 3, 100 to
131) (See
note.)
All can be
edited.
All can be
edited.
220
Examples Section 4-2
Note When writing the program with a Programming Console, specify whether
there are interrupt tasks during the memory clear operation.
9. Transferring the Program
When the program has been created in the CX-Programmer, it must be trans-
ferred to the PLC’s CPU Unit.
10. Testing Operation
Before performing a Trial Operation in MONITOR mode, check the I/O wiring.
10-a) I/O Wiring Checks
Check Output Wiring
With the PLC in PROGRAM mode, force-set and force-reset output bits and
verify that the corresponding outputs operate properly.
Check Input Wiring
Activate input devices such as sensors and switches and verify that the corre-
sponding indicators on the Input Units light. Also, use the Bit/Word Monitor
operation in the Programming Device to verify the operation of the corre-
sponding input bits.
10-b) Auxiliary Area Settings
Make any required Auxiliary Area settings, such as the ones shown below.
These settings can be made from a Programming Device (including a Pro-
gramming Console or the CX-Programmer) or instructions in the program.
IOM Hold Bit (A50012)
Turning ON the IOM Hold Bit protects the contents of I/O memory (the CIO
Area, Work Area, Timer Completion Flags and PVs, Index Registers, and
Data Registers) that would otherwise be cleared when the operating mode is
switched from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
Force-rese
t
Input Unit
Retained
Operating mode changed
I/O
memory
221
Examples Section 4-2
IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup
When the IOM Hold Bit has been turned ON and the PLC Setup is set to pro-
tect the status of the IOM Hold BIt at startup (PLC Setup address 80 bit 15
turned ON), the contents of I/O memory that would otherwise be cleared will
be retained when the PLC is turned on.
Output OFF Bit (A50015)
Turning ON the Output OFF Bit causes all outputs on Basic I/O Units and
Special I/O Units to be turned OFF. The outputs will be turned OFF regardless
of the PLC’s operating mode.
10-c) Trial Operation
Use the Programming Console or Programming Device (CX-Programmer) to
switch the CPU Unit to MONITOR mode.
Using a Programming Console
Turn the Mode Switch to MONITOR for the Trial Operation. (Turn the switch to
RUN for full-scale PLC operation.)
Retained
PC turned ON.
I/O
memory
Output Unit
Output Unit
Trial Operation
Actual operation
Programming
Console
222
Examples Section 4-2
Using a Programming Console
The PLC can be put into MONITOR mode with a host computer running CX-
Programmer.
10-d) Monitoring and Debugging
There are several ways to monitor and debug PLC operation, including the
force-set and force-reset operations, differentiation monitoring, time chart
monitoring, data tracing, and online editing.
Force-Set and Force-Reset
When necessary, the force-set and force-reset operations can be used to
force the status of bits and check program execution.
When a Programming Console is being used, monitor the bits with Bit/Word
Monitor or 3-word Monitor. Press the SHIFT+SET Keys to force-set a bit or
press the SHIFT+RESET Keys to force-reset a bit. The forced status can be
cleared by pressing the NOT Key.
When CX-Programmer is being used, click the bit to be force-set or force-
reset and then select Force On or Off from the PLC menu.
Differentiation Monitor
The differentiation monitor operation can be used to monitor the up or down
differentiation of particular bits.
When a Programming Console is being used, monitor the bit with Bit/Word
Monitor. Press the SHIFT+Up Arrow Keys to specify up differentiation or press
the SHIFT+Down Arrow Keys to specify down differentiation.
When CX-Programmer is being used, follow the procedure shown below.
1,2,3... 1. Click the bit for differential monitoring.
2. Click Differential Monitor from the PLC Menu. The Differential Monitor Di-
alog Box will be displayed.
3. Click Rising or Falling.
4. Click the Start button. The buzzer will sound when the specified change is
detected and the count will be incremented.
5. Click the Stop button. Differential monitoring will stop.
Trial Operation
Select PC, Mode, MONITOR.
Actual operation
Select PC, Mode, RUN.
NEC
PC-9801
BX
CX-Programmer
SHIFT SET
SHIFT
RESET
NOT
Force-set:
Force-reset:
Clear:
3-word Monitor display
Bit/Word Monitor display
SHIFT
SHIFT ↓
↑
Bit/Word Monitor display
Detect down-differentiation:
Detect up-differentiation:
223
Examples Section 4-2
Time Chart Monitoring
The CX-Programmer's time chart monitor operation can be used to check and
debug program execution.
Data Tracing
The CX-Programmer's data trace operation can be used to check and debug
program execution.
Online Editing
When a few lines of the program in the CPU Unit have to be modified, they
can be edited online with the PLC in MONITOR mode or PROGRAM mode
from a Programming Console. When more extensive modifications are
needed, upload the program from the CPU Unit to the CX-Programmer, make
the necessary changes, and transfer the edited program back to the CPU
Unit.
When a Programming Console is being used, display the desired program
address, input the new instruction, and press the WRITE Key twice. A single
program address (instruction) can be edited.
When CX-Programmer is being used, several instruction blocks can be
edited.
11. Save and Print the Program
To save a created program, select File - Save or File - Save As from the CX-
Programmer menus.
To print a created program, first preview the print output by selecting the
desired section in the CX-Programmer's project workspace and selecting File
- Print Preview from the CX-Programmer menu. If the preview is acceptable,
select File - Print to print.
WRITE WRITE
Input instruction
Program address display
224
Examples Section 4-2
12. Run the Program
Switch the PLC to RUN mode to run the program.
225
SECTION 5
Installation and Wiring
This section describes how to install a PLC System, including mounting the various Units and wiring the System. Be sure
to follow the instructions carefully. Improper installation can cause the PLC to malfunction, resulting in very dangerous
situations.
5-1 Fail-safe Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
5-2 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
5-2-1 Installation and Wiring Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
5-2-2 Installation in a Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
5-2-3 Assembled Appearance and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
5-2-4 CJ-series Unit Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
5-2-5 Connecting PLC Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
5-2-6 DIN Track Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
5-2-7 Connecting CJ-series Expansion Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
5-3 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
5-3-1 Power Supply Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
5-3-2 Wiring CJ-series Basic I/O Units with Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . 262
5-3-3 Wiring I/O Units with Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
5-3-4 Connecting I/O Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
5-3-5 Reducing Electrical Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
226
Fail-safe Circuits Section 5-1
5-1 Fail-safe Circuits
Be sure to set up safety circuits outside of the PLC to prevent dangerous con-
ditions in the event of errors in the PLC or external power supply.
Supply Power to the PLC
before Outputs
If the PLC’s power supply is turned on after the controlled system’s power
supply, outputs in Units such as DC Output Units may malfunction momen-
tarily. To prevent any malfunction, add an external circuit that prevents the
power supply to the controlled system from going on before the power supply
to the PLC itself.
Managing PLC Errors When any of the following errors occurs, PLC operation will stop and all out-
puts from Output Units will be turned OFF.
• Operation of the Power Supply Unit’s overcurrent protection circuit
• A CPU error (watchdog timer error) or CPU on standby
• A fatal error* (memory error, I/O bus error, duplicate number error, too
many I/O points error, program error, cycle time too long error, or
FALS(007) error)
Be sure to add any circuits necessary outside of the PLC to ensure the safety
of the system in the event of an error that stops PLC operation.
Note *When a fatal error occurs, all outputs from Output Units will be turned OFF
even if the IOM Hold Bit has been turned ON to protect the contents of I/O
memory. (When the IOM Hold Bit is ON, the outputs will retain their previous
status after the PLC has been switched from RUN/MONITOR mode to PRO-
GRAM mode.)
Managing Output
Malfunctions
It is possible for an output to remain ON due to a malfunction in the internal
circuitry of the Output Unit, such as a relay or transistor malfunction. Be sure
to add any circuits necessary outside of the PLC to ensure the safety of the
system in the event that an output fails to go OFF.
Emergency Stop Circuit The following emergency stop circuit controls the power supply to the con-
trolled system so that power is supplied to the controlled system only when
the PLC is operating and the RUN output is ON.
227
Fail-safe Circuits Section 5-1
An external relay (CR1) is connected to the RUN output from the Power Sup-
ply Unit as shown in the following diagram.
Note 1. When a Power Supply Unit without a RUN output is used, program the Al-
ways ON Flag (A1) as the execution condition for an output point from an
Output Unit.
2. Do not latch the RUN output and use it in a circuit to stop a controlled ob-
ject. Chattering of the relay contacts used in the output may cause incor-
rect operation.
Interlock Circuits When the PLC controls an operation such as the clockwise and counterclock-
wise operation of a motor, provide an external interlock such as the one
shown below to prevent both the forward and reverse outputs from turning ON
at the same time.
This circuit prevents outputs MC1 and MC2 from both being ON at the same
time even if both CIO 000500 and CIO 000501 are both ON, so the motor is
protected even if the PLC is programmed improperly or malfunctions.
MCB1
MCB2
CR1
+
–
DC
PLC RUN
output*
input/output
CR1
CJ-series PLC
Power supply
Controlled system
DC voltage
regulator
Surge suppressor
Twisted-pair wires
Transformer
or noise filter
PLC
MC2
MC1
000501
000502
MC1
MC2
Interlock circuit
Motor clockwise
Motor counterclockwise
228
Installation Section 5-2
5-2 Installation
5-2-1 Installation and Wiring Precautions
Be sure to consider the following factors when installing and wiring the PLC to
improve the reliability of the system and make the most of the PLC’s functions.
Ambient Conditions Do not install the PLC in any of the following locations.
• Locations subject to ambient temperatures lower than 0°C or higher than
55°C.
• Locations subject to drastic temperature changes or condensation.
• Locations subject to ambient humidity lower than 10% or higher than
90%.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations subject to excessive dust, salt, or metal filings.
• Locations that would subject the PLC to direct shock or vibration.
• Locations exposed to direct sunlight.
• Locations that would subject the PLC to water, oil, or chemical reagents.
Be sure to enclose or protect the PLC sufficiently in the following locations.
• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
• Locations close to power lines.
Installation in Cabinets or
Control Panels
When the PLC is being installed in a cabinet or control panel, be sure to pro-
vide proper ambient conditions as well as access for operation and mainte-
nance.
Temperature Control
The ambient temperature within the enclosure must be within the operating
range of 0°C to 55°C. When necessary, take the following steps to maintain
the proper temperature.
• Provide enough space for good air flow.
• Do not install the PLC above equipment that generates a large amount of
heat such as heaters, transformers, or high-capacity resistors.
• If the ambient temperature exceeds 55°C, install a cooling fan or air con-
ditioner.
• If a Programming Console will be left on the PLC, the ambient tempera-
ture must be within the Programming Console’s operating range of 0°C to
45°C.
PLC
Control
panel
Fan
Louver
229
Installation Section 5-2
Accessibility for Operation and Maintenance
• To ensure safe access for operation and maintenance, separate the PLC
as much as possible from high-voltage equipment and moving machinery.
• The PLC will be easiest to install and operate if it is mounted at a height of
about 1.3 m (4 feet).
Improving Noise Resistance
• Do not mount the PLC in a control panel containing high-voltage equip-
ment.
• Install the PLC at least 200 mm (6.5 feet) from power lines.
• Ground the mounting plate between the PLC and the mounting surface.
• When I/O Connecting Cables are 10 m or longer, connect the control pan-
els in which Racks are mounted with heavier power wires (3 wires at least
2 mm2 in cross-sectional area).
PLC Orientation
• Each Rack must be mounted in an upright position to provide proper cool-
ing.
PLC
Power lines
200 mm min.
200 mm min.
230
Installation Section 5-2
• Do not install a Rack in any of the following positions.
Note Always use the standard installation method. A nonstandard installation will
decrease heat dissipation, and may delay the replacement notification signal
(in particular for Power Supply Units with Replacement Notification), or
degrade or damage the internal elements.
5-2-2 Installation in a Control Panel
A CJ-series PLC must be mounted inside a control panel on DIN Track. Nor-
mally the CPU Rack is installed on top and the Expansion Racks under it.
Note ACJ-series PLC must be mounted on DIN Track. It cannot be mounted with
screws.
• Consider the width of wiring ducts, wiring, ventilation, and Unit replace-
ment when determining the space between Racks.
• Up to three Expansion Racks can be connected (but only one can be con-
nected for CP1M CPU Units).
Each I/O Connecting Cable can be up to 12 m long, but the sum total of
all cables between the CPU Rack and Expansion Racks must be 12 m or
less.
DIN Track
231
Installation Section 5-2
• Whenever possible, route I/O wiring through wiring ducts or raceways.
Install the duct so that it is easy to fish wire from the I/O Units through the
duct. It is handy to have the duct at the same height as the Racks.
Wiring Ducts The following example shows the proper installation of wiring duct.
Note Tighten terminal block screws and cable screws to the following torques.
Ter m i na l S c rew s
M3.5: 0.8 N·m
M3: 0.5 N·m
Cable Connector Screws
M2.6: 0.2 N·m
Duct
Duct
Unit
20 mm min.
20 mm min.
DIN Track
30 mm
40 mm
30 mm
CPU
Rack
Mounting
bracket
Expansion
Rack
Duct
81.6 to 89 mm
232
Installation Section 5-2
Routing Wiring Ducts Install the wiring ducts at least 20 mm between the tops of the Racks and any
other objects, (e.g., ceiling, wiring ducts, structural supports, devices, etc.) to
provide enough space for air circulation and replacement of Units.
5-2-3 Assembled Appearance and Dimensions
The CJ-series Units, including the Power Supply Unit, the CPU Unit, and I/O
Units, are connected to each other and an End Cover is connected to the right
end.
Breakers,
fuses
Power
equipment
such as
transformers
and magnetic
relays
Terminal blocks for
power equipment
Terminal blocks
for PLC
Fuses, relays, timers, etc.
(NOT heat-generating equip-
ment, power equipment, etc.)
Expansion Rack
CPU Rack
Output duct
200 mm min.
Power duc
t
Input duct
233
Installation Section 5-2
Dimensions (Unit: mm)
The width the CJ-series Power Supply Unit depends on the model. The width
of the Power Supply Unit when computing the width of a Rack, is “a.”
CPU Unit width: b
Name Model number Specifications Unit width
Power Supply Unit CJ1W-PA205R 100 to 240 V AC, 25 W 80 mm
CJ1W-PA205C 100 to 240 V AC, 25 W 80 mm
CJ1W-PA202 100 to 240 V AC, 14 W 45 mm
CJ1W-PD025 24 V DC, 25 W 60 mm
CJ1W-PD02C 24 V DC, 19.6 W 27 mm
Name Model number Specifications Unit width
CPU Unit CJ1H-CPU67H I/O points: 2,560
Program capacity: 250 Ksteps
62 mm
CJ1H-CPU66H I/O points: 2,560
Program capacity: 120 Ksteps
CJ1H-CPU65H I/O points: 2,560
Program capacity: 60 Ksteps
CJ1G-CPU45H I/O points: 1,280
Program capacity: 60 Ksteps
27
35.
4
27.
6
90
65
W
234
Installation Section 5-2
Other than the CPU Units and Power Supply Units, CJ-series Units come in
two widths: 20 mm and 31 mm. When computing the width of a Rack, the
number of 20-mm Units is “n.”
CPU Unit CJ1H-CPU67H-R I/O points: 2,560
Program capacity: 250 Ksteps
62 mm
CJ1H-CPU66H-R I/O points: 2,560
Program capacity: 120 Ksteps
CJ1H-CPU65H-R I/O points: 2,560
Program capacity: 60 Ksteps
CJ1H-CPU64H-R I/O points: 2,560
Program capacity: 30 Ksteps
CJ1G-CPU44H I/O points: 1,280
Program capacity: 30 Ksteps
CJ1G-CPU43H I/O points: 960
Program capacity: 20 Ksteps
CJ1G-CPU42H I/O points: 960
Program capacity: 10 Ksteps
CJ1G-CPU45 I/O points: 1,280
Program capacity: 60 Ksteps
CJ1G-CPU44 I/O points: 1,280
Program capacity: 30 Ksteps
CJ1M-CPU23 I/O points: 640
Program capacity: 20 Ksteps
Built-in pulse I/O
49 mm
CJ1M-CPU22 I/O points: 320
Program capacity: 10 Ksteps
Built-in pulse I/O
CJ1M-CPU21 I/O points: 160
Program capacity: 5 Ksteps
Built-in pulse I/O
CJ1M-CPU13 I/O points: 640
Program capacity: 20 Ksteps
31 mm
CJ1M-CPU12 I/O points: 320
Program capacity: 10 Ksteps
CJ1M-CPU11 I/O points: 160
Program capacity: 5 Ksteps
Name Model number Unit width
I/O Control Unit CJ1W-IC101 20 mm
32-point Basic I/O Units CJ1W-ID231/ID232
CJ1W-OD231/OD232
B7A Interface Units CJ1W-B7A14/04/22
CompoBus/S Master Unit CJ1W-SRM21
Name Model number Specifications Unit width
235
Installation Section 5-2
When computing the width of a Rack, the number of 31-mm Units is “m.”
W = a (Power Supply Unit) + b (CPU Unit) + 20 x n + 31 x m + 14.7 (End
Cover) mm
Example: CJ1W-PA205R Power Supply Unit, CJ1H-CPU66H CPU Unit, two
32-point Basic I/O Units and eight 31-mm Units.
W = 80 + 62 + 20 x 2 + 31 x 8 +14.7 = 444.7 mm
Installation Dimensions (Unit: mm)
Name Model number Unit width
I/O Interface Unit CJ1W-II101 31 mm
16-point Basic I/O Units CJ1W-ID201
CJ1W-ID211
CJ1W-IA111/201
CJ1W-INT01
CJ1W-OD201/202/203/204/
211/212
CJ1W-OC201/211
CJ1W-OA201
CJ1W-IDP01
32-point Basic Mixed I/O Units CJ1W-MD231/232/233
64-point Basic I/O Units and
64-point Basic Mixed I/O Units
CJ1W-ID261/262
CJ1W-OD261/262/263
CJ1W-MD261/263/563
Analog Input Units
Analog Output Units
Analog I/O Units
CJ1W-AD041/081(-V1)
CJ1W-DA021/041/08V
CJ1W-MAD42
Temperature Control Units CJ1W-TC@@@
Position Control Units CJ1W-NC@@@
High-speed Counter Unit CJ1W-CT021
DeviceNet Unit CJ1W-DRM21
Controller Link Unit CJ1W-CLK21
Serial Communications Unit CJ1W-SCU41
CJ1W-SCU21
Ethernet Unit CJ1W-ETN11
27
35.4
27.6
90
A
68.8
DIN Track A
PFP-100N2 16 mm
PFP-100N 7.3 mm
PFP-50N 7.3 mm
236
Installation Section 5-2
Installation Height
The installation height of the CJ-series CPU Rack and Expansion Racks var-
ies from 81.6 to 89.0, depending on the I/O Units that are mounted. When a
Programming Device (CX-Programmer or Programming Console) is con-
nected, however, even greater height is required. Allow sufficient depth in the
control panel containing the PLC.
Approx. 100 to 150 mm
81.6 to 89.0 mm
237
Installation Section 5-2
Unit Dimensions
CJ-series CPU Unit
CJ1H-CPU@@H-R
CJ1G/H-CPU@@H
CJ1G-CPU@@
65
73.9
14.7
2.7
2.7
90
CONTROLLER
CJ1G-CPU44
SYSMAC
PROGRAMMABLE
ERR/ALM
RUN
COMM
INH
PRPHL
OPEN
PERIPHERAL
BUSY
MCPWR
PORT
62
2.7
2.7
90
End Cover
The depth is the same for all Units.
CPU Unit
Unit Depth
238
Installation Section 5-2
CJ1M-CPU1@
CJ1M-CPU2@
90 2.7
2.7
31
65
73.9
PERIPHEARL
PORT
MCPWR
BUSY
IN
OUT
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
5
8
9
3
4
5
6
7
SYSMAC
PROGRAMMABLE
RUN
COMM
INH
PRPHL
BKUP
CPU22
CONTROLLER
OPEN
CJ1M
SW SETTING
BATTERY
OUT
IN
2.7 2.790
48.75
83.7
65
83.6
ERR/ALM
239
Installation Section 5-2
End Cover
CJ1W-TER01
CJ-series Power Supply Units
CJ1W-PA205R
14.7
2.7
2.7
90
65
80
81.6
90
POWER
PA205R
DC24V
AC240V
OUTPUT
RUN
INPUT
AC100-240V
L2/N
L1
240
Installation Section 5-2
CJ1W-PA205C
CJ1W-PA202
CJ1W-PD025
Years
POWER
CJ1W-PA205C
TEST
65
80
81.6
90
NC
NC
AC100-240V
INPUT
L2/N
L1
L+
ALARM
OUTPUT
DC30V,50mA
NORMAL:ON
ALARM :OFF
65
4581.6
90
POWER
PA202
INPUT
NC
NC
AC100
-240V
L2/N
L1
65
60
81.6
90
POWER
PD025
DC24V+
INPUT
NC
NC
241
Installation Section 5-2
CJ1W-PD022
CJ1W-IC101 I/O Control Unit
CJ1W-II101 I/O Interface Unit
65
2781.6
90
POWER
PD022
OUT
OUT
IC101
IC101
2.7
2.7
90
69.3
65
68
(140)
2.7
2.7
90
69.3
65
68
(140)
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
II101
II101
242
Installation Section 5-2
CJ-series Basic I/O Units
Note Refer to individual Unit operation manuals for the dimensions of CJ-series
Special I/O Units and CJ-series CPU Bus Units.
8/16-point Basic I/O Units
CJ1W-ID201 (8 inputs)
CJ1W-ID211 (16 inputs)
CJ1W-IA201 (8 inputs)
CJ1W-IA111 (16 inputs)
CJ1W-INT01 (16 interrupt inputs)
CJ1W-IDP01 (16 quick-response inputs)
CJ1W-OD201/203 (8 sinking outputs)
CJ1W-OD202/204 (8 sourcing outputs)
CJ1W-OD211 (16 sinking outputs)
CJ1W-OD212 (16 sourcing outputs)
CJ1W-OC201 (8 relay outputs)
CJ1W-OC211 (16 relay outputs)
CJ1W-OA201 (8 triac outputs)
32-point Basic I/O Units, Fujitsu-compatible Connector
CJ1W-ID231 (32 inputs)
CJ1W-OD231 (32 outputs)
2.7
2.7 90
65
89
ID211
01 23 4 56 7
89
10 11 12 13 14 15
0
1
3
2
4
5
7
6
8
9
11
10
12
13
14
15
DC24V
7mA
COM
COM
31
2.7
2.7 90
65
66.5
(112.5)
ID231
0
0
1
20
AB
20
1
1
123
456 7
89
10 11
12 13 14 15
DC24V 4.1mA
20
243
Installation Section 5-2
32-point Basic I/O Units, MIL Connector
CJ1W-ID232 (32 inputs)
CJ1W-OD232 (32 outputs)
CJ1W-OD233 (32 outputs)
32-point Basic Mixed I/O Units, Fujitsu-compatible Connector
CJ1W-MD231 (16 inputs/16 outputs)
32-point Basic I/O Units, MIL Connector
CJ1W-MD232 (16 inputs/16 outputs)
CJ1W-MD233 (16 inputs/16 outputs)
2.7
2.7 90
65
83.6
ID231
0
01
1ch
0ch
123
456 7
89
10 11
12 13 14 15
DC24V 4.1mA
20
24 VDC 7.0 mA
ABAB
112
12 1
INOUT
15
0
910
MD231
12
1
CN2
11
CN1
13 148
12345670
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
12345670
24 VDC 0.5 A
(112.5)
65
66.5
90 2.72.7
31
OUT
24 VDC 7.0 mA
1
0
13 15
0 ch 1 ch
MD233
24 VDC 0.5 A
1412
12345670
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
12345670
8 9 10 11
IN
83.6
65
90 2.72.7
31
244
Installation Section 5-2
64-point Basic I/O Units, Fujitsu-compatible Connector
CJ1W-ID261 (64 inputs)
CJ1W-OD261 (64 outputs)
64-point Basic I/O Units, MIL Connector
CJ1W-ID262 (64 inputs)
CJ1W-OD262 (64 outputs)
CJ1W-OD263 (64 outputs)
64-point Basic Mixed I/O Units, Fujitsu-compatible Connector
CJ1W-MD261 (32 inputs/32 outputs)
2.7
2.7 90
65
66.5
(112.5)
ID232
0
0
I
I
II
II
2
3
1
CN2
20
A B
1
CN1
20
1
81
92
10
3
11
4
12
5
13
6
14
7
15
0
81
92
10
3
11
4
12
5
13
6
14
7
15
DC24V 4.1mA
B A
31
2.7
31
2.7 90
65
83.6
ID262
0
I
II
81
92
10
3
11
4
12
5
13
6
14
7
15
0
81
92
10
3
11
4
12
5
13
6
14
7
15
0
I
II
2
31
ABAB
120
1
20
24 VDC 0.3 A
INOUT
15
1
24 VDC 4.1 mA
MD261
CN1
0
CN2
2
3
12345670
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
12345670
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
65
66.5
(112.5)
90 2.72.7
31
245
Installation Section 5-2
64-point Basic I/O Units, MIL Connector
CJ1W-MD263 (32 inputs/32 outputs)
CJ1W-MD563 (32 TTL inputs/32 TTL outputs)
B7A Interface Units
CJ1W-B7A14 (64 inputs (4 B7A ports))
CJ1W-B7A04 (64 outputs (4 B7A ports))
CJ1W-B7A22 (32 inputs/32 outputs (4 B7A ports))
OUT
5 VDC 3.5 mA
0 ch
1 ch 2 ch
3 ch
5 VDC 3.5 mA
12345670
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
12345670
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
31
MD563
20
IN
83.6
65
90 2.72.7
31
20
902.7 2.7
65
79.5
246
Installation Section 5-2
5-2-4 CJ-series Unit Weights
Name Model number Weight
CJ-series Power Supply Unit CJ1W-PA205R 250 g max.
CJ1W-PA205C 400 g max.
CJ1W-PA202 200 g max.
CJ1W-PD025 300 g max.
CJ1W-PD022 130 g max.
CJ-series CPU Units CJ1H-CPU67H-R 200 g max.
(See note.)
CJ1H-CPU66H-R 200 g max.
(See note.)
CJ1H-CPU65H-R 200 g max.
(See note.)
CJ1H-CPU64H-R 200 g max.
(See note.)
CJ1H-CPU67H 200 g max.
(See note.)
CJ1H-CPU66H 200 g max.
(See note.)
CJ1H-CPU65H 200 g max.
(See note.)
CJ1G-CPU45H 190 g max.
(See note.)
CJ1G-CPU44H 190 g max.
(See note.)
CJ1G-CPU43H 190 g max.
(See note.)
CJ1G-CPU42H 190 g max.
(See note.)
CJ1M-CPU23 170 g max.
(See note.)
CJ1M-CPU22 170 g max.
(See note.)
CJ1M-CPU21 170 g max.
(See note.)
CJ1M-CPU13 120 g max.
(See note.)
CJ1M-CPU12 120 g max.
(See note.)
CJ1M-CPU11 120 g max.
(See note.)
CJ1G-CPU45 200 g max.
(See note.)
CJ1G-CPU44 200 g max.
(See note.)
I/O Control Unit CJ1W-IC101 70 g max.
I/O Interface Unit CJ1W-II101 130 g max.
(See note.)
247
Installation Section 5-2
Note The CPU Unit and I/O Interface Unit weights include the weight of the End
Cover.
5-2-5 Connecting PLC Components
The Units that make up a CJ-series PLC can be connected simply by pressing
the Units together and locking the sliders by moving them toward the back of
the Units. The End Cover is connected in the same way to the Unit on the far
right side of the PLC. Follow the procedure listed below to connect PLC com-
ponents.
CJ-series Basic I/O Units Input Units CJ1W-ID201 110 g max.
CJ1W-ID211 110 g max.
CJ1W-ID231 70 g max.
CJ1W-ID232 70 g max.
CJ1W-ID261 110 g max.
CJ1W-ID262 110 g max.
CJ1W-IA201 130 g max.
CJ1W-IA111 130 g max.
CJ1W-INT01 110 g max.
CJ1W-IDP01 110 g max.
CJ1W-B7A14 80 g max.
Output Units CJ1W-OD201 110 g max.
CJ1W-OD202 120 g max.
CJ1W-OD203 110 g max.
CJ1W-OD204 120 g max.
CJ1W-OD211 110 g max.
CJ1W-OD212 120 g max.
CJ1W-OD231 70 g max.
CJ1W-OD232 80 g max.
CJ1W-OD261 110 g max.
CJ1W-OD262 110 g max.
CJ1W-OD263 110 g max.
CJ1W-OC201 140 g max.
CJ1W-OC211 170 g max.
CJ1W-OA201 150 g max.
CJ1W-B7A04 80 g max.
Mixed I/O Units CJ1W-MD231 90 g max.
CJ1W-MD232 100 g max.
CJ1W-MD261 110 g max.
CJ1W-MD233 90 g max.
CJ1W-MD263 110 g max.
CJ1W-MD563 110 g max.
CJ1W-B7A22 80 g max.
Name Model number Weight
248
Installation Section 5-2
1,2,3... 1. The following diagram shows the connection of two Units that make up a
CJ-series PLC. Join the Units so that the connectors fit exactly.
2. The yellow sliders at the top and bottom of each Unit lock the Units togeth-
er. Move the sliders toward the back of the Units as shown below until they
click into place.
Note If the locking tabs are not secured properly, the CJ-series may not
function properly. Be sure to slide the locking tabs until they are se-
curely in place.
3. Attach the End Cover to the Unit on the far right side of the Rack.
CPU Rack
Note Connect the I/O Control Unit directly to the CPU Unit to enable connecting
Expansion Racks.
PA205R
POWER
INPUT
AC100-240V
L2/N
L1
DC24V
AC240V
OUTPUT
RUN
PERIPHERAL
ERR/ALM
RUN
INH
COMM
PRPHL
CONTROLLER
CJ1G-CPU44
SYSMAC
PROGRAMMABLE
PORT
OPEN
BUSY
MCPWR
Connector
Hook Hook holes
PA205R
POWER
INPUT
AC100-240V
L2/N
L1
DC24V
AC240V
OUTPUT
RUN
PERIPHERAL
ERR/ALM
RUN
INH
COMM
PRPHL
CONTROLLER
CJ1G-CPU44
SYSMAC
PROGRAMMABLE
PORT
OPEN
BUSY
MCPWR
Lock
Release
Slider
Move the sliders toward the back
until they lock into place.
Power Supply
Unit
CPU Unit (I/O Control Unit) I/O Units (10 max.) End Cover
(included with CPU Unit)
249
Installation Section 5-2
Expansion Rack
Note Connect the I/O Interface Unit directly to the Power Supply Unit.
There is no Backplane for the CJ-series. The PLC is constructed by connect-
ing Units together using the connectors on the sides.
!Caution Attach the End Cover to the Unit on the far right side of the Rack. An I/O bus
error will occur and the PLC will not operate in either RUN or MONITOR mode
if the End Cover is not connected. If this occurs, the following information will
be set in memory.
Note 1. Always turn OFF the power supply before connecting Units to each other.
2. Always turn OFF the power supply to the entire system before replacing a
Unit.
3. A maximum of 10 I/O Units can be connected to a CPU Rack or an Expan-
sion Rack. If 11 or more I/O Units are connected, and I/O overflow error will
occur and the PLC will not operate in either RUN or MONITOR mode. If
this occurs, The I/O Overflow Flag (A40111) will turn ON and A40713 to
A40715 (I/O Overflow Details 2) will turn ON.
5-2-6 DIN Track Installation
Use the following procedure to install a CJ-series PLC on DIN Track.
1,2,3... 1. Release the pins on the backs of the CJ-series Units.
I/O Interface Unit I/O Units (10 max.) End Cover
(included with
I/O Interface Unit)
Power Supply
Unit
Name Address Status
I/O Bus Error Flag A 40114 ON
I/O Bus Error Slot Number A40400 to A40407 0E hex
I/O Bus Error Rack Number A40408 to A40415 0E hex
Releas
e
DIN Track
mounting pins
250
Installation Section 5-2
2. Fit the back of the PLC onto the DIN Track by inserting the top of the track
and then pressing in at the bottom of the PLC, as shown below.
3. Lock the pins on the backs of the CJ-series Units.
4. Install a DIN Track End Plate on each end of the PLC. To install an End
Plate, hook the bottom on the bottom of the track, rotate the Plate to hook
the top of the Plate on the top of the track, and then tighten the screw to
lock the Plate in place.
1
2
DIN Trac
k
DIN Track
mounting pins
1
2
End Plates
251
Installation Section 5-2
DIN Track and
Accessories
Use the DIN Track and DIN Track End Plates shown below.
Secure the DIN Track to the control panel using M4 screws separated by
210 mm (6 holes) or less and using at least 3 screws. The tightening torque is
1.2 N·m.
PFP-100N2 DIN Track
PFP-100N/50N DIN Track
DIN Track End Plates (2 required)
DIN Track
Model numbers: PFP-50N (50 cm),
PFP-100N (100 cm), PFP-100N2 (100 cm)
15 10
4.5
25 25 25 10 25 15
1000
16
1.51
29.2
24
27
30±0.3
28-25x4.5 oblong holes
1000 (500)*
15 10
4.5
25 25 25 10 25 15 (5)* 1
7.3±0.15
35±0.3 27±0.15
* PFP-50N dimensions are
given in parentheses.
Model number: PFP-M
252
Installation Section 5-2
5-2-7 Connecting CJ-series Expansion Racks
CS/CJ-series I/O Connecting Cables are used to connect the CPU Rack and
Expansion Racks.
CS/CJ-series I/O Connecting Cables
The CS/CJ-series I/O Connecting Cables have connectors with a simple lock
mechanism are used to connect the CPU Rack to an Expansion Rack or to
connect two Expansion Racks.
• Install the Racks and select I/O Connecting Cables so that the total length
of all I/O Connecting Cables does not exceed 12 m.
• The following diagram shows where each I/O Connecting Cable must be
connected on each Rack. The Rack will not operate if the cables aren’t
connected properly. (The “up” direction is towards the CPU Unit and
“down” is away from the CPU Unit.)
• The following diagram shows examples of proper Rack connections. Con-
nect the simple lock connectors to the I/O Control Unit on the CJ-series
CPU Rack and the I/O Interface Unit on the CJ-series Expansion Rack.
0.3 m
0.7 m
2 m
3 m
5 m
10 m
12 m
CS1W-CN313
CS1W-CN713
CS1W-CN223
CS1W-CN323
CS1W-CN523
CS1W-CN133
CS1W-CN133B2
Model number Cable
length
CS/CJ-series I/O
Connecting Cables
Power Supply
Unit
CPU Unit I/O Interface Unit
Power
Supply Unit
CPU Rack Expansion Rack
Down
Up
Down
253
Installation Section 5-2
• The top and bottom of the connector are different. Be sure the connector
is facing the correct direction before connecting it.
Connecting the Simple Locking Connectors
Press the tabs on the end of the connector and insert the connector until it
locks in place. The PLC will not operate properly if the connector isn’t inserted
completely.
CPU Rack
I/O Control Unit
I/O Connecting Cable
Expansion Rack
Expansion Rack
I/O Interface Unit
I/O Interface Unit
Simple lock connector
Simple lock connector
Power
Supply Unit
CPU Unit I/O Control Unit
I/O Interface Unit
Power Supply Unit
CPU Rack
Expansion Rack
Expansion Rack
I/O Connecting Cable
I/O Connecting Cable
I/O Interface Unit
Power Supply Unit
I/O Interface Unit
Power Supply Unit
Expansion Rack
I/O Connecting Cable
Total cable
length:
12 m max.
254
Installation Section 5-2
Note 1. When using an I/O Connecting Cable with a locking connector, be sure that
the connector is firmly locked in place before using it.
2. Always turn OFF the power supply to the PLC before connecting a cable.
3. Do not route the I/O Connecting Cables through ducts that contain the I/O
or power wiring.
4. An I/O bus error will occur and the PLC will stop if an I/O Connecting Ca-
ble’s connector separates from the Rack. Be sure that the connectors are
secure.
5. A 63-mm hole will be required if the I/O Connecting Cable must pass
through a hole when connecting an Expansion Rack.
6. The cables can withstand a pulling force up to 49 N (11 lbs), so be sure
that they aren’t pulled too forcefully.
7. The I/O Connecting Cables mustn’t be bent too severely. The minimum
bending radii are shown in the following diagram.
8. Always attach the cover to the output connector (left side) on the last I/O
Interface Unit on the last Expansion Rack to protect it from dust.
RR = 69 min.
Cable outer diameter: 8.6 mm
OUT IN
II101
CJ1W-II101
I/O Interface Unit
Out
p
ut connector cover
255
Wiring Section 5-3
5-3 Wiring
5-3-1 Power Supply Wiring
CJ1W-PA205R Power Supply Unit (AC)
Note The RUN output function is enabled only when mounted to a CPU Rack.
AC Power Source
• Supply 100 to 240 V AC.
• Keep voltage fluctuations within the specified range:
• If one power supply phase of the equipment is grounded, connect the
grounded phase side to the L2/N terminal.
Isolation Transformer The PLC’s internal noise isolation circuits are sufficient to control typical noise
in power supply lines, but noise between the PLC and ground can be signifi-
cantly reduced by connecting a 1-to-1 isolation transformer. Do not ground the
secondary coil of the transformer.
Power Supply Capacity The power consumption will be 100 VA max. per Rack for the CJ1W-PA205R/
PA205C and 50 VA for the CJ1W-PA202, but there will be a surge current of at
least 5 times the max. current when power is turned ON.
RUN Output This output is ON whenever the CPU Unit is operating in RUN or MONITOR
mode; it is OFF when the CPU Unit is in PROGRAM mode or a fatal error has
occurred.
The RUN output can be used to control external systems, such as in an emer-
gency stop circuit that turns off the power supply to external systems when
the PLC is not operating. (Refer to 5-1 Fail-safe Circuits for more details on
the emergency stop circuit.)
POWER
PA205R
DC24V
AC240V
OUTPUT
RUN
INPUT
AC100-240V
L2/N
L1
Isolation
transformer
1:1
AC power supply
100 to 240 V
AC power supply
M4 self-raising screw terminals
Power
supply
RUN output
ON when CPU Unit is in RUN or
MONITOR mode.
OFF when CPU Unit is in
PROGRAM mode or stopped for
a fatal error.
Supply voltage Allowable voltage fluctuations
100 to 240 V AC 85 to 264 V AC
Item CJ1W-PA205R
Contact form SPST-NO
Maximum switching capacity 240 V AC: 2 A for resistive loads
120 V AC: 0.5 A for inductive loads
24 V DC: 2 A for resistive loads
24 V AC: 2 A for inductive loads
256
Wiring Section 5-3
Crimp Terminals
Recommended crimp terminals
Note 1. Use crimp terminals for wiring.
2. Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to the terminals.
!Caution Tighten the AC power supply terminal block screws to the torque of 1.2 N·m.
Loose screws may result in short-circuit, malfunction, or fire.
Note 1. Supply power to all of the Power Supply Units from the same source.
2. Do not remove the protective label from the top of the Unit until wiring has
been completed. This label prevents wire strands and other foreign matter
from entering the Unit during wiring procedures.
3. Do not forget to remove the label from the top of the Power Supply Unit af-
ter wiring the Unit. The label will block air circulation needed for cooling.
Terminal screws M4 self-rising screws
Recommended wire size AWG 20 to 14 (0.517 to 2.08 mm2)
Recommended tightening
torque
1.2 N·m
Manufacturer Models Shape Applicable wire range
(stranded wire)
JST Mfg. V1.25-YS4A Y-shaped terminal
with sleeve 0.25 to 1.65 mm2 (AWG
22 to 16)
V1.25-M4 Round terminal
with sleeve
V2-YS4A Y-shaped terminal
with sleeve 1.04 to 2.63 mm2 (AWG
16 to 14)
V2-M4 Round terminal
with sleeve
7 mm max.7 mm max.
Torque to 1.2 N •m
20 mm max.
M4 self-raising terminals
257
Wiring Section 5-3
DC Power Supplies
CJ1W-PD025 Power Supply Unit
DC Power Source Supply 24 V DC. Keep voltage fluctuations within the specified range.
Power Supply Capacity The maximum power consumption is 50 W (PD025)/35 W (PD022) per Rack,
but there will be a surge current of about five times that level when the power
is turned ON.
Precautions when Using CJ1W-PC022 Non-insulated Power Supply Units
!Caution When connecting a personal computers or other peripheral devices to a PLC
to which a non-insulated Power Supply Unit (CJ1W-PD022) is mounted, either
ground the 0 V side of the external power supply or do not ground the external
power supply at all ground. A short-circuit will occur in the external power sup-
ply if incorrect grounding methods are used. Never ground the 24 V side, as
shown below.
Crimp Terminals
POWER
PD025
DC24V+
INPUT
NC
NC
DC power source
Screw (M4 head with self-
raising pressure plate)
Model Allowable voltage fluctuation range
CJ1W-PD025 19.2 to 28.8 V DC (±20%)
CJ1W-PD022 21.6 to 26.4 V DC (±10%)
24 V
0 V
FG CPU Unit
0 V
Wiring in Which the 24-V Power Supply Will Short
Non-insulated
DC power supply
Power Supply
Unit
Peripheral
cable
Peripheral device (e.g.,
personal computer)
Terminal screws M4 self-rising screws
Recommended wire size AWG 20 to 14 (0.517 to 2.08 mm2)
Recommended tightening
torque
1.2 N·m
258
Wiring Section 5-3
Recommended crimp terminals
Note 1. Use crimp terminals for wiring.
2. Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to the terminals.
3. Be sure not to reverse the positive and negative leads when wiring the
power supply terminals.
4. Supply power to all of the Power Supply Units from the same source.
5. Do not remove the protective label from the top of the Unit until wiring has
been completed. This label prevents wire strands and other foreign matter
from entering the Unit during wiring procedures.
6. Do not forget to remove the label from the top of the Power Supply Unit af-
ter wiring the Unit. The label will block air circulation needed for cooling.
Grounding
The diagram below shows the location of the ground and line ground termi-
nals.
• To help prevent electrical shock, ground the ground terminal (GR: ) with
a ground resistance of less than 100 Ω using a 14-gauge wire (minimum
cross-sectional area of 2 mm2).
• The line ground terminal (LG: ) is a noise-filtered neutral terminal. If
noise is a significant source of errors or electrical shocks are a problem,
connect the line ground terminal to the ground terminal and ground both
with a ground resistance of less than 100 Ω.
• The ground wire should not be more than 20 m long.
• The following grounding configurations are acceptable.
Manufacturer Models Shape Applicable wire range
(stranded wire)
JST Mfg. V1.25-YS4A Y-shaped terminal
with sleeve 0.25 to 1.65 mm2 (AWG
22 to 16)
V1.25-M4 Round terminal
with sleeve
V2-YS4A Y-shaped terminal
with sleeve 1.04 to 2.63 mm2 (AWG
16 to 14)
V2-M4 Round terminal
with sleeve
7 mm max.7 mm max.
LG (Noise-filter neutral terminal)
Ground this terminal to less than
100 Ω to improve noise resistance
and prevent electric shock.
GR (Ground terminal)
Ground this terminal to less than
100 Ω to prevent electric shock.
POWER
PA205R
DC24V
AC240V
OUTPUT
RUN
INPUT
AC100-240V
L2/N
L1
259
Wiring Section 5-3
• The CJ-series PLCs are designed to be mounted so that they are isolated
(separated) from the mounting surface to protect them from the effects of
noise in the installation environment (e.g., the control panel).
• Do not share a ground line with other equipment.
• Do not share the PLC’s ground with other equipment or ground the PLC
to the metal structure of a building. The configuration shown in the follow-
ing diagram may worsen operation.
GR terminal
on CPU Rack
GR terminal
on Expansion
Rack 1
GR terminal
on Expansion
Rack 2
GR terminal
on Expansion
Rack 3
Do not ground multiple
control panels separately,
but connect the GR
terminals of each Rack and
ground to a resistance of
less than 100 Ω.
Control panel 1 Control panel 2
GR crossover
CJ-series PC Other equipment
Ground
(100 Ω or less)
Ground
(100 Ω or less)
CJ-series PC Other equipment
Ground
(100 Ω or less)
Ground
(100 Ω or less)
CJ-series PC Other equipment
260
Wiring Section 5-3
Crimp Terminals
Recommended crimp terminals
Note 1. Use crimp terminals for wiring.
2. Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to the terminals.
Alarm Output (Power Supply Units with Replacement Notification Only)
Connect the alarm output to a PLC's Input Unit or external LED indicator to
enable notification when Power Supply Unit replacement is required.
CJ1W-PA205C Power Supply Unit
Output Specifications • ON (normal): Power Supply Unit replacement not required for at least 6
months.
• OFF: Power Supply Unit replacement required within 6 months.
• Transistor open-collector outputs
• Maximum switching capacity: 30 VDC max., 50 mA max.
• ON: Residual voltage of 2 V max., OFF: Leakage current of 0.1 mA max.
Terminal screws M4 self-rising screws
Recommended wire size AWG 14 min. (2 mm2 min.)
Recommended tightening
torque
1.2 N·m
Manufacturer Models Shape Applicable wire range
(stranded wire)
JST Mfg. V2-YS4A Y-shaped terminal
with sleeve 1.04 to 2.63 mm2 (AWG
16 to 14)
V2-M4 Round terminal
with sleeve
7 mm max.7 mm max.
NC
NC
L1
L2/ N
CJ1W-PA205C
CJ1W-PA205C
PO
PO
WER
TE
TE
ST
ALARM OUTPUT
DC30V, 50mA
NORMAL:ON
ALARM OFF L
Alarm output (replacement notification output)
ON: Power Supply Unit replacement not
required for at least 6 months.
OFF: Power Supply Unit replacement required
within 6 months.
24 VDC
power supply
100 to 240 VAC
INPUT
261
Wiring Section 5-3
Wiring • The following wire gauges are recommended.
PLC Input Unit Wiring
Example
Connect the positive terminals of the 24-VDC power supply to the Input Unit
common (COM) terminals.
Connect the negative terminal of the 24-VDC power supply to the Input Unit
common (COM) terminal.
External Display Device
Connection Example
The alarm output (replacement notification output) is an NC contact. There-
fore, wire the alarm output using an NC contact or other means to turn ON an
error indicator or LED display as shown in the following diagram.
Note 1. The OL display will also light if the PLC's power supply fails.
Recommended
wire size
Use Pushing strength
(clamping
operation)
Pulling strength
(holding force)
Length of stripped
section
AWG 22 to 18 (0.32
to 0.82 mm2)
Connecting to PLC terminal
block models
30 N max. 30 N min. 7 to 10 mm
AWG 28 to 24 (0.08
to 0.2 mm2)
Connecting to PLC connector
models
10 N min.
NC
NC
L1
L2/ N
CJ1W-PA205C
CJ1W-PA205C
PO
PO
WER
TES
TES
T
ALARM OUTPUT
DC30V, 50mA
NORMAL:ON
ALARM OFF L
L
IN0
IN(N)
IN(N+1)
COM
CPU UnitCJ1W-PA205C
IN Unit
CJ1W-ID2**
24 VDC power supply
100 to 240 VAC
INPUT
IN0
IN(N)
IN(N+1)
COM
AC100-240V
INPUT
NC
NC
L1
L2/ N
CJ1W-PA205C
CJ1W-PA205C
PO
PO
WER
TES
TES
T
ALARM OUTPUT
DC30V, 50mA
NORMAL:ON
ALARM OFF L
L
CJ1W-PA205C CPU Unit
IN Unit
CJ1W-ID2**
24 VDC power supply
AC100- 240V
INPUT
NC
NC
L1
L2/N
CJ1W-PA205C
CJ1W-PA205C
PO
PO
WER
TES
TES
T
ALARM OUTPUT
DC30V, 50mA
NORMAL:ON
ALARM OFF L
L
OL
24 VDC power supply
Relay
(NC contact)
Power
supply
262
Wiring Section 5-3
2. Separate the alarm output cables from power lines and high-voltage lines.
3. Do not apply a voltage or connect a load to the alarm output that exceeds
the rated voltage or load.
5-3-2 Wiring CJ-series Basic I/O Units with Terminal Blocks
I/O Unit Specifications Double-check the specifications for the I/O Units. In particular, do not apply a
voltage that exceeds the input voltage for Input Units or the maximum switch-
ing capacity for Output Units. Doing so may result in breakdown, damage, or
fire.
When the power supply has positive and negative terminals, be sure to wire
them correctly.
Crimp Terminals
Recommended crimp terminals
Note 1. Use crimp terminals for wiring.
2. Do not connect bare stranded wires directly to the terminals.
Wiring Do not remove the protective label from the top of the Unit until wiring has
been completed. This label prevents wire strands and other foreign matter
from entering the Unit during wiring procedures. (Remove the label after wir-
ing has been completed to allow air circulation needed for cooling.)
• Wire the Units so that they can be easily replaced. In addition, make sure
that the I/O indicators are not covered by the wiring.
• Do not place the wiring for I/O Units in the same duct or raceway as power
lines. Inductive noise can cause errors in operation.
• Tighten the terminal screws to the torque of 0.5 N·m.
Terminal screws M3 self-rising screws
Recommended wire size AWG 22 to 18 (0.326 to 0.823 mm2)
Recommended tightening
torque
0.5 N·m
Manufacturer Models Shape Applicable wire range
(stranded wire)
JST Mfg. V1.25-N3A Y-shaped terminal
with sleeve 0.25 to 1.65 mm2 (AWG
22 to 16)
V1.25-MS3 Round terminal
with sleeve
6.2 mm max.6.2 mm max.
After wiringDuring wiring
Remove the label.
263
Wiring Section 5-3
• The terminals have screws with self-raising pressure plates. Connect the
lead wires to the terminals as shown below.
Terminal Blocks The I/O Units are equipped with removable terminal blocks. The lead wires do
not have to be removed from the terminal block to remove it from an I/O Unit.
5-3-3 Wiring I/O Units with Connectors
This section describes wiring for the following Units:
• CJ-series Basic I/O Units with Connectors (32- and 64-point Units)
CJ-series Basic I/O Units with connectors use special connectors to connec-
tor to external I/O devices. The user can combine a special connector with
cable or use a preassembled OMRON cable to connect to a terminal block or
I/O Terminal. The available OMRON cables are described later in this section.
• Be sure not to apply a voltage that exceeds the input voltage for Input
Units or the maximum switching capacity for Output Units.
• When the power supply has positive and negative terminals, be sure to
wire them correctly. Loads connected to Output Units may malfunction if
the polarity is reversed.
• Use reinforced insulation or double insulation on the DC power supply
connected to DC I/O Units when required by EC Directives (low voltage).
• When connecting the connector to the I/O Unit, tighten the connector
screws to a torque of 0.2 N·m.
• Turn on the power after checking the connector’s wiring. Do not pull the
cable. Doing so will damage the cable.
• Bending the cable too sharply can damage or break wiring in the cable.
17.5 mm
Screw (M3 screw with
self-raising pressure plate)
OD211
Terminal block leve
r
CJ-series Basic I/O Unit
264
Wiring Section 5-3
Note CJ-series Basic I/O Units with connectors have the same connector pin allo-
cations as the C200H High-density I/O Units and CS-series I/O Units with
connectors to make them compatible.
Available Connectors
Use the following connectors when assembling a connector and cable.
CJ-series 32- and 64-point I/O Units with Fujitsu-compatible Connectors
Applicable Units
Applicable Cable-side Connectors
CJ-series 32- and 64-point I/O Units with MIL Connectors
Applicable Units
Model Specifications Pins
CJ1W-ID231 Input Unit, 24 V DC, 32 inputs 40
CJ1W-ID261 Input Unit, 24 V DC, 64 inputs
CJ1W-OD231 Transistor Output Unit with Sinking Outputs, 32 outputs
CJ1W-OD261 Transistor Output Unit with Sinking Outputs, 64 outputs
CJ1W-MD261 24-V DC Input/Transistor Output Units,
32 Inputs, 32 Outputs
CJ1W-MD231 24-V DC Input/Transistor Output Units,
16 Inputs, 16 Outputs
24
Connection Pins OMRON set Fujitsu parts
Solder-type 40 C500-CE404 Socket: FCN-361J040-AU
Connector cover: FCN-360C040-J2
24 C500-CE241 Socket: FCN-361J024-AU
Connector cover: FCN-360C024-J2
Crimped 40 C500-CE405 Socket: FCN-363J040
Connector cover: FCN-360C040-J2
Contacts: FCN-363J-AU
24 C500-CE242 Socket: FCN-363J024
Connector cover: FCN-360C024-J2
Contacts: FCN-363J-AU
Pressure-welded 40 C500-CE403 FCN-367J040-AU/F
24 C500-CE243 FCN-367J024-AU/F
Model Specifications Pins
CJ1W-ID232 Input Unit, 24 V DC, 32 inputs 40
CJ1W-ID262 Input Unit, 24 V DC, 64 inputs
CJ1W-OD232 Transistor Output Unit with sourcing outputs, 32 outputs
CJ1W-OD262 Transistor Output Unit with sourcing outputs, 64 outputs
CJ1W-OD233 Transistor Output Unit with sinking outputs, 32 outputs
CJ1W-OD263 Transistor Output Unit with sinking outputs, 64 outputs
CJ1W-MD263 24-V DC Input/Transistor Output Units,
32 Inputs, 32 Outputs
CJ1W-MD563 TTL Input/TTL Output Units,
32 Inputs, 32 Outputs
CJ1W-MD232 24-V DC Input/Transistor Output Units,
16 Inputs, 16 Outputs
20
CJ1W-MD233 24-V DC Input/Transistor Output Units,
16 Inputs, 16 Outputs
265
Wiring Section 5-3
Applicable Cable-side Connectors
Wire Size
We recommend using cable with wire gauges of AWG 24 or AWG 28
(0.2 mm2 to 0.08 mm2). Use cable with external wire diameters of 1.61 mm
max.
Wiring Procedure
1,2,3... 1. Check that each Unit is installed securely.
Note Do not force the cables.
2. Do not remove the protective label from the top of the Unit until wiring has
been completed. This label prevents wire strands and other foreign matter
from entering the Unit during wiring. (Remove the label after wiring has
been completed to allow air circulation needed for cooling.)
3. When solder-type connectors are being used, be sure not to accidentally
short adjacent terminals. Cover the solder joint with heat-shrink tubing.
Note Double-check to make sure that the Output Unit’s power supply leads haven’t
been reversed. If the leads are reversed, the Unit’s internal fuse will blow and
the Unit will not operate.
Connection Pins OMRON set Daiichi Denko Industries part
Pressure-welded 40 XG4M-4030-T FRC5-A040-3T0S
20 XG4M-2030-T FRC5-A020-3T0S
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 12 13 14 15
10 11
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 12 13 14 15
10 11
I
II
ID261
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 12 13 14 15
10 11
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 12 13 14 15
10 11
I
II
ID261
Before wiring After wiring
Remove label
after wiring
Solder-type connector
Heat-shrink tubing
Wire (0.2 to 0.13 mm
2
)
266
Wiring Section 5-3
4. Assemble the connector (purchased separately).
5. Insert the wired connector.
6. Remove the protective label after wiring has been completed to allow air
circulation needed for cooling.
Tighten the connector-attaching screws to a torque of 0.2 N·m.
Connector bar Small screws (3)
Socket
Nuts (3)
Small screws (2)
Connector-attaching
screws
Cable-securing
bracket
Nuts (2)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 12 13 14 15
10 11
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 12 13 14 15
10 11
I
II
ID261
Connector
Connector I/O Unit
I/O Unit
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 12 13 14 15
10 11
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 12 13 14 15
10 11
I
II
ID261
After wiring
Remove label after wiring
.
Connector lock screws
267
Wiring Section 5-3
Connecting to Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Units or I/O Terminals
Basic I/O Units with Connectors can be connected to OMRON Connector-Ter-
minal Block Conversion Units or OMRON I/O Terminals. Refer to CJ-series
32/64-point Basic I/O Units with Connectors on page 186 for a list of models.
Connecting to Terminal Blocks
The following Connecting Cables and Connector-Terminal Block Conversion
Units are required to connect to terminal blocks.
CJ-series 32-point Basic I/O Units
CJ1W-ID231 (Input Unit, Fujitsu connector)
CJ1W-OD231 (Output Unit, Fujitsu connector)
CJ1W-ID232 (Input Unit, MIL connector)
CJ1W-OD232 (Output Unit, MIL connector)
CJ1W-OD233 (Output Unit, MIL connector)
Connecting Cable
XW2Z-@@@B (Fujitsu connector)
XW2Z-@@@K (MIL connector)
Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Unit
XW2B-40G4
XW2B-40G5
XW2D-40G6
XW2D-40G6-RF (CJ1W-ID231 only)
XW2D-40G6-RM (CJ1W-ID232 only)
CJ-series 64-point Basic I/O Units
CJ1W-ID261 (Input Unit, Fujitsu connector)
CJ1W-OD261 (Output Unit, Fujitsu connector)
CJ1W-ID262 (Input Unit, MIL connector)
CJ1W-OD262 (Output Unit, MIL connector)
CJ1W-OD263 (Output Unit, MIL connector)
Connecting Cable
XW2Z-@@@B (Fujitsu connector)
XW2Z-@@@K (MIL connector)
Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Unit
XW2B-40G4
XW2B-40G5
XW2D-40G6
XW2D-40G6-RF (CJ1W-ID261 only)
XW2D-40G6-RM (CJ1W-ID262 only)
Two sets
required.
CJ-series 32-point Basic I/O Units
CJ1W-ID231 (Input Unit, Fujitsu connector)
Connecting Cable
XW2Z-@@@D (Fujitsu connector)
Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Unit
XW2C-20G5-IN16
Two sets
required.
CJ-series 64-point Basic I/O Units
CJ1W-ID261 (Input Unit, Fujitsu connector)
Connecting Cable
XW2Z-@@@D (Fujitsu connector)
Connector-Terminal Block
Conversion Unit
XW2C-20G5-IN16
268
Wiring Section 5-3
CJ-series 32-point Basic I/O Units
CJ1W-ID232 (Input Unit, MIL connector)
CJ1W-OD232 (Output Unit, MIL connector)
CJ1W-OD233 (Output Unit, MIL connector)
Connecting Cable
XW2Z-@@@N (MIL connector)
Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Unit
XW2C-20G5-IN16 (CJ1W-ID232 only)
XW2C-20G6-IO16
CJ-series 64-point Basic I/O Units
CJ1W-ID262 (Input Unit, MIL connectors)
CJ1W-OD262 (Output Unit, MIL connectors)
CJ1W-OD263 (Output Unit, MIL connectors)
Connecting Cable
XW2Z-@@@N (MIL connector)
Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Unit
XW2C-20G5-IN16 (CJ1W-ID262 only)
XW2C-20G6-IO16
Two sets
required.
CJ-series 64-point Basic I/O Units (32 inputs/32 outputs)
CJ1W-MD261 (Mixed I/O Units, Fujitsu connectors,
24-V DC inputs/transistor outputs)
Connecting Cable
XW2Z-@@@B
Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Unit
XW2B-40G4
XW2B-40G5
XW2D-40G6
XW2D-40G6-RF16
Output Input
Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Unit
XW2B-40G4
XW2B-40G5
XW2D-40G6
Note: Two sets of an XW2Z-@@@D Connecting Cable
and an XW2C-20G5-IN16 Connector-Terminal
Block Conversion Unit can also be used.
CJ-series 32-point Basic I/O Unit (16 inputs, 16 outputs)
CJ1W-MD231 (Mixed I/O Units, MIL connectors,
24-V DC inputs/transistor outputs)
Connecting Cable
XW2Z-@@@A
Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Unit
XW2B-20G4
XW2B-20G5
XW2D-20G6
XW2C-20G5-IN16
Output Input
Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Unit
XW2B-20G4
XW2B-20G5
XW2D-20G6
269
Wiring Section 5-3
CJ-series 64-point Basic I/O Units (32 inputs, 32 outputs)
Connecting Cable
XW2Z-@@@K
Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Unit
XW2B-40G4
XW2B-40G5
XW2D-40G6
XW2D-40G6-RM
Output Input
Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Unit
XW2B-40G4
XW2B-40G5
XW2D-40G6
Note: Two sets of an XW2Z-@@@N Connecting Cable
and an XW2C-20G5-IN16 or XW2C-20G6-IO16
Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Unit can
also be used.
Note: Two sets of an XW2Z-@@@N Connecting Cable and
an XW2C-20G6-IO16 Connector-Terminal Block
Conversion Unit can also be used.
CJ1W-MD263 (Mixed I/O Units, MIL connectors, 24-V DC
inputs/transistor outputs)
CJ1W-MD563 (Mixed I/O Units, MIL connectors, TTL inputs/TTL
outputs)
CJ-series 32-point Basic I/O Units (16 inputs, 16 outputs)
Connecting Cable
G79-O@@C
Output Input
Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Unit
XW2B-20G4
XW2B-20G5
XW2D-20G6
CJ1W-MD232 (Mixed I/O Units, MIL connectors, 24-V DC
inputs/transistor outputs)
CJ1W-MD233 (Mixed I/O Units, MIL connectors, 24-V DC
inputs/transistor outputs)
270
Wiring Section 5-3
Connecting to I/O Terminals
The following Connecting Cables and I/O Terminals are required to connect to
terminal blocks.
Connecting Cable
G79-I@C-@
(for Input Unit, Fujitsu connector)
G79-O@C-@
(for Output Unit, Fujitsu connector)
G79-O@-@-D1
(for Input Unit, MIL connector)
G79-O@-@-D1
(for Output Unit, MIL connector)
Input Blocks
G7TC-ID16
G7TC-IA16
Output Blocks/Terminals
G7TC-OC16 (OD262/263 only)
G70D-SOC16/VSOC16 (OD261/263 only)
G70D-FOM16/VFOM16 (OD261/263 only)
G70A-ZOC16-3 + Relays (OD261/263 only)
Output Blocks/Terminals
G70D-SOC16-1 (OD262 only)
G70D-FOM16-1 (OD262 only)
G70A-ZOC16-4 + Relays (OD262 only)
CJ-series 64-point Basic I/O Units
CJ1W-ID261 (Input Unit, Fujitsu connector)
CJ1W-OD261 (Output Unit, Fujitsu connector)
CJ1W-ID262 (Input Unit, MIL connector)
CJ1W-OD262 (Output Unit, MIL connector)
CJ1W-OD263 (Output Unit, MIL connector)
Two sets
required.
Connecting Cable
G79-I@C-@
(for Input Unit, Fujitsu connector)
G79-O@C-@
(for Output Unit, Fujitsu connector)
G79-O@-@-D1
(for Input Unit, MIL connector)
G79-O@-@-D1
(for Output Unit, MIL connector)
Input Blocks
G7TC-ID16
G7TC-IA16
Output Blocks/Terminals
G7TC-OC16
G70D-SOC16/VSOC16
G70D-FOM16/VFOM16
G70A-ZOC16-3 + Relays
(CJ1W-OD231/233 only)
G70D-SOC16-1
(CJ1W-OD232 only)
G70D-FOM16-1
(CJ1W-OD232 only)
G70A-ZOC16-4 + Relays
(
CJ1W-OD232 onl
y)
CJ-series 32-point Basic I/O Units
CJ1W-ID231 (Input Unit, Fujitsu connector)
CJ1W-OD231 (Output Unit, Fujitsu connector)
CJ1W-ID232 (Input Unit, MIL connector)
CJ1W-OD232 (Output Unit, MIL connector)
CJ1W-OD233 (Output Unit, MIL connector)
Connecting Cable
G79-@C
Output Input
I/O Block
G7TC-ID16
G7TC-IA16
I/O Block, I/O Terminals
G7TC-OC16
G70D-SOC16/VSOC16
G70D-FOM16/VFOM16
G70A-ZOC16-3 + Relays
Connecting Cable
G79-@C
CJ-series 32-point Basic I/O Units,
16 inputs, 16 outputs
CJ1W-MD231 (Mixed I/O Units,
Fujitsu connectors, 24-V DC
inputs/transistor outputs)
Connecting Cable
G79-I@C-@
Output Input
I/O Blocks
G7TC-ID16
G7TC-IA16
I/O Blocks, I/O Terminals
G7TC-OC16
G70D-SOC16/VSOC16
G70D-FOM16/VFOM16
G70A-ZOC16-3 + Relays
Connecting Cable
G79-O@C-@
CJ-series 64-point Basic I/O Units,
32 inputs, 32 outputs
CJ1W-MD261 (Mixed I/O Units,
Fujitsu connectors,
24-V DC inputs/transistor outputs)
271
Wiring Section 5-3
CJ-series 32-point Basic I/O Units, 16 inputs, 16 output
s
Output Input
I/O Blocks
G7TC-ID16
G7TC-IA16
I/O Blocks, I/O Terminals
G7TC-OC16-1
Connecting Cable
G79-O@@C
Connecting Cable
G79-O@@C
CJ1W-MD232 (Mixed I/O Units, MIL connectors,
24-V DC inputs/transistor outputs)
CJ-series 32-point Basic I/O Units, 16 inputs, 16 outputs
Output Input
I/O Blocks
G7TC-ID16
G7TC-IA16
I/O Blocks, I/O Terminals
G70D-SOC16-1
G70D-FOM16-1
G70A-ZOC16-4 + Relays
Connecting Cable
G79-O@@C
Connecting Cable
G79-I@@C
CJ1W-MD232 (Mixed I/O Units, MIL connectors,
24-V DC inputs/transistor outputs)
CJ-series 32-point Basic I/O Units, 16 inputs, 16 output
s
Output Input
I/O Blocks
G7TC-ID16
G7TC-IA16
I/O Blocks, I/O Terminals
G7TC-OC16
G70D-SOC16/VSOC16
G70D-FOM16/VFOM16
G70A-ZOC16-3 + Relays
Connecting Cable
G79-O@@C
Connecting Cable
G79-O@@C
CJ1W-MD233 (Mixed I/O Units, MIL connectors,
24-V DC inputs/transistor outputs)
CJ-series 64-point Basic I/O Units, 32 inputs, 32 outputs
Input
Output Connecting Cable
G79-O@-@-D1
I/O Blocks
G7TC-ID16
G7TC-IA16
Connecting Cable
G79-O@-@-D1
I/O Blocks, I/O Terminals
G7TC-OC16
G70D-SOC16/VSOC16
G70D-FOM16/VFOM16
G70A-ZOC16-3 + Relays
CJ1W-MD263 (Mixed I/O Units, MIL connectors,
24-V DC inputs/transistor outputs)
CJ1W-MD563 (Mixed I/O Units, MIL connectors,
TTL inputs/TTL outputs)
272
Wiring Section 5-3
5-3-4 Connecting I/O Devices
Input Devices
Use the following information for reference when selecting or connecting input
devices.
DC Input Units The following types of DC input devices can be connected.
COM
+
+
COM
0 V
7 mA
COM
Output
Contact output
Two-wire DC output
NPN open-collector output
IN DC Input Unit
IN DC Input Unit
IN DC Input Unit
Sensor
Power
Supply
Sensor
Power
Supply
273
Wiring Section 5-3
The circuit below should NOT be used for I/O devices having a voltage output.
+
COM
0 V
7 mA
+
COM
0 V
7 mA
0 V
+COM
Output
Output
Output
NPN current output
PNP current output
Voltage output
Sensor
Power
Supply
Sensor
Power
Supply
Sensor
Power
Supply
IN DC Input Unit
IN DC Input Unit
IN DC Input Unit
Current
regulator
0 V
+
COM
Voltage output
Sensor
Power
Supply
IN DC Input Unit
Output
274
Wiring Section 5-3
AC Input Units The following types of AC input devices can be connected.
Note When using a reed switch as the input contact for an AC Input Unit, use a
switch with an allowable current of 1 A or greater. If Reed switches with
smaller allowable currents are used, the contacts may fuse due to surge cur-
rents.
Precautions when
Connecting a Two-wire DC
Sensor
When using a two-wire sensor with a 12-V DC or 24-V DC input device, check
that the following conditions have been met. Failure to meet these conditions
may result in operating errors.
1,2,3... 1. Relation between voltage when the PLC is ON and the sensor residual
voltage:
VON ≤ VCC – VR
2. Relation between voltage when the PLC is ON and sensor control output
(load current):
IOUT (min) ≤ ION ≤ IOUT (max.)
ION = (VCC – VR – 1.5 [PLC internal residual voltage])/RIN
When ION is smaller than IOUT (min), connect a bleeder resistor R. The
bleeder resistor constant can be calculated as follows:
R ≤ (VCC – VR)/(IOUT (min.) – ION)
Power W ≥ (VCC – VR)2/R × 4 [allowable margin]
3. Relation between current when the PLC is OFF and sensor leakage cur-
rent:
IOFF ≥ Ileak
Connect a bleeder resistor if Ileak is greater than IOFF
. Use the following
equation to calculate the bleeder resistance constant.
COM
COM
IN AC
IN AC
Input Unit
Input Unit
Contact output
AC Switching
Proximity
switch
main
circuit
275
Wiring Section 5-3
R ≤ (RIN × VOFF)/(Ileak × RIN – VOFF)
Power W ≥ (VCC – VR)2/R × 4 [allowable margin]
4. Precautions on Sensor Surge Current
An incorrect input may occur if a sensor is turned ON after the PLC has
started up to the point where inputs are possible. Determine the time re-
quired for sensor operation to stabilize after the sensor is turned ON and
take appropriate measures, such as inserting into the program a timer de-
lay after turning ON the sensor.
Example
In this example, the sensor’s power supply voltage is used as the input to
CIO 000000 and a 100-ms timer delay (the time required for an OMRON
Proximity Sensor to stabilize) is created in the program. After the Comple-
tion Flag for the timer turns ON, the sensor input on CIO 000001 will cause
output bit CIO 000100 to turn ON.
Output Wiring Precautions
Output Short-circuit
Protection
If a load connected to the output terminals is short-circuited, output compo-
nents and the and printed circuit boards may be damaged. To guard against
this, incorporate a fuse in the external circuit. Use a fuse with a capacity of
about twice the rated output.
Transistor Output
Residual Voltage
A TTL circuit cannot be connected directly to a transistor output because of
the transistor’s residual voltage. It is necessary to connect a pull-up resistor
and a CMOS IC between the two.
Output Surge Current When connecting a transistor or triac output to an output device having a high
surge current (such as an incandescent lamp), steps must be taken to avoid
damage to the transistor or triac. Use either of the following methods to
reduce the surge current.
V
R
R
V
CC
R
IN
V
CC
:
V
ON
:
V
OFF
:
I
ON
:
I
OFF
:
R
IN
:
V
R
:
I
OUT
:
I
leak
:
R:
Sensor output residual current
Sensor control current (load current)
Sensor leakage current
Bleeder resistance
Power voltage
PLC ON voltage
PLC OFF voltage
PLC ON current
PLC OFF current
PLC input impedance
Two-wire sensor
DC Input Unit
TIM
0000
#0001
000000
000100
TIM0000 000001
276
Wiring Section 5-3
Method 1
Add a resistor that draws about 1/3 of the current consumed by the bulb.
Method 2
Add a control resistor as shown in the following diagram.
5-3-5 Reducing Electrical Noise
I/O Signal Wiring Whenever possible, place I/O signal lines and power lines in separate ducts or
raceways both inside and outside of the control panel.
If the I/O wiring and power wiring must be routed in the same duct, use
shielded cable and connect the shield to the GR terminal to reduce noise.
Inductive Loads When an inductive load is connected to an I/O Unit, connect a surge suppres-
sor or diode in parallel with the load as shown below.
OUT
COM
L
R
+
L
OUT
COM
+
R
1 = I/O cables
2 = Power cables
Suspended duct In-floor duct Conduits
L
IN
COM
OUT
COM
OUT
COM
L
L
+
Diode DC input
Surge suppressor
Diode
Relay output or
transistor output
Relay output or
triac output
277
Wiring Section 5-3
Note Use surge suppressors and diodes with the following specifications.
External Wiring Observe the following precautions for external wiring.
• When multi-conductor signal cable is being used, avoid combining I/O
wires and other control wires in the same cable.
• If wiring racks are parallel, allow at least 300 mm (12 inches) between the
racks.
If the I/O wiring and power cables must be placed in the same duct, they must
be shielded from each other using grounded steel sheet metal.
Surge suppressor specifications Diode specifications
Resistor: 50 Ω
Capacitor: 0.47 µF
Voltage: 200 V
Breakdown voltage: 3 times load voltage min.
Mean rectification current: 1 A
PLC I/O wiring
PLC power supply and
general control circuit wiring
Power lines
Ground to 100 Ω or less
Low-current cables
Control cables
Control cables
300 mm min.
300 mm min.
PLC I/O wiring
PLC power supply
and general
control wiring Power lines
Steel sheet metal
Ground to 100 Ω or less
200 mm min.
278
Wiring Section 5-3
279
SECTION 6
DIP Switch Settings
This section describes the initial hardware settings made on the CPU Unit’s DIP switch.
6-1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
6-2 Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
280
Overview Section 6-1
6-1 Overview
There are two kinds of initial settings for a CJ-series PLC: Hardware settings
and software settings. Hardware settings are made with the CPU Unit’s DIP
switch and software settings are made in the PLC Setup (using a Program-
ming Device).
The DIP switch can be reached by opening the battery compartment cover on
the front of the CPU Unit.
Note Before touching or setting the DIP switch while the power is being supplied to
the CPU Unit, always touch a grounded piece of metal to release static elec-
tricity from your body.
Note The display language for the Programming Console is not set on the DIP
switch for CJ-series CPU Units, but rather is set using a Programming Con-
sole key sequence.
Appearance Pin No. Setting Function
1 ON Writing disabled for user program memory.
OFF Writing enabled for user program memory.
2 ON The user program is automatically transferred when power is turned
ON.
OFF
3 --- Not used.
4 ON Use peripheral port communications parameters set in the PLC
Setup.
OFF Use default peripheral port communications parameters.
5 ON Use default RS-232C port communications parameters.
OFF Use RS-232C port communications parameters set in the PLC
Setup.
6 ON User-defined pin. Turns ON the User DIP Switch Pin Flag (A39512).
OFF User-defined pin. Turns OFF the User DIP Switch Pin Flag (A39512).
7 ON Writing data from the CPU Unit to the Memory Card or restoring data
from the Memory Card to the CPU Unit.
OFF Verifying contents of Memory Card.
8 OFF Always OFF.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
281
Details Section 6-2
6-2 Details
Note 1. The following data is write-protected when pin 1 is ON: the user program
and all data in the parameter area such as the PLC Setup and registered
I/O table. Furthermore when pin 1 is ON, the user program and parameter
area won’t be cleared even when the memory clear operation is performed
from a Programming Device.
2. The auto-detect goes through baud rates in the following order: Program-
ming Console → Peripheral bus at 9,600 bps, 19,200 bps, 38,400 bps, and
115,200 bps. Programming Devices that aren’t in Peripheral Bus Mode
and devices in Peripheral Bus Mode operating at 51,200 bps will not be de-
tected.
Pin Function Setting Description
1 Write-protection for
user program
memory (UM) (See
note 1.)
ON Write-protected User program memory is write-protected when this pin
is ON. Turn ON to prevent the program from being
changed accidentally.
OFF Read/write
2 Automatic transfer
of the program at
start-up
ON Yes The program (AUTOEXEC.OBJ) and PLC Setup
(AUTOEXEC.STD) will be transferred from the Memory
Card to the CPU Unit automatically at start-up when this
pin is ON. (See note 4.)
A PLC’s software (program and PLC Setup) can be
completely initialized just by inserting a new Memory
Card and turning on the power. This can be used to
switch the system to a new arrangement very quickly.
Note When pin 7 is ON, reading from the Memory
Card for easy backup is given priority; even if pin
2 is ON, the program will not be automatically
transferred.
OFF No
3 Not used. --- --- ---
4 Peripheral port
communications
parameters
ON Use parameters set in
the PLC Setup.
• Leave this pin OFF when using a Programming Con-
sole or CX-Programmer (peripheral bus setting) con-
nected to the peripheral port.
• Turn this pin ON when the peripheral port is being
used for a device other than a Programming Console
or CX-Programmer (peripheral bus setting).
OFF
(default)
Auto-detect Program-
ming Device
(See note 2.)
5 RS-232C port com-
munications
parameters
ON Auto-detect Program-
ming Device
(See note 3.)
• Leave this pin OFF when the RS-232C port is being
used for a device other CX-Programmer (peripheral
bus setting) such as a Programmable Terminal or
host computer.
• Turn this pin ON when using CX-Programmer
(peripheral bus setting) connected to the RS-232C
port.
OFF
(default)
Use parameters set in
the PLC Setup.
6 User-defined pin ON A39512 ON The ON/OFF status of this pin is reflected in A39512.
Use this function when you want to create an Always-
ON or Always-OFF condition in the program without
using an Input Unit.
OFF
(default)
A39512 OFF
7 Easy backup set-
ting
ON Writing from the CPU
Unit to the Memory Card
Press and hold the Memory Card Power Supply Switch
for three seconds.
Restoring from the Mem-
ory Card to the CPU
Unit.
To read from the Memory Card to the CPU Unit, turn ON
the PLC power. This operation is given priority over
automatic transfer (pin 2 is ON) when power is ON.
OFF
(default)
Verifying
contents of Memory
Card.
Press and hold the Memory Card Power Supply Switch
for three seconds.
8 Not used OFF
(default)
Always OFF.
282
Details Section 6-2
3. The auto-detect operation goes through baud rates in the following order:
Peripheral bus at 9,600 bps, 19,200 bps, 38,400 bps, and 115,200 bps.
Programming Devices that aren’t in Peripheral Bus Mode and devices in
Peripheral Bus Mode operating at any other speeds will not be detected.
4. When pin 2 is ON and the power is turned ON, any I/O Memory file (AU-
TOEXEC.IOM, ATEXEC@@.IOM) will also be transferred automatically.
Both the program (AUTOEXEC.OBJ) and the parameter area (AUTOEX-
EC.STD) must exist in the Memory Card. I/O Memory files (AUTOEX-
EC.IOM, ATEXEC@@.IOM) are optional.
5. After reading data from the Memory Card to the CPU Unit with the simple
backup operation, the CPU Unit will remain in PROGRAM mode and can-
not be changed to MONITOR or RUN mode until the power supply has
been cycled. After completing the backup operation, turn OFF the power
supply to the CPU Unit, change the settings of pin 7, and then turn the
power supply back ON.
Note Use the following settings for the network on the CX-Programmer and pin 4 on
the DIP switch when connecting the CX-Programmer via the peripheral or RS-
232C port.
When CX-Programmer is set to host link mode, it won’t be possible to commu-
nicate (go online) in the following cases:
• The computer is connected to the CPU Unit’s peripheral port and pin 4 is
OFF.
DIP switch
settings
PLC Setup settings
Peripheral port settings
Default NT Link Peripheral
bus
Host Link Serial
Gateway
Pin
4
OFF Programming Console or CX-Programmer in Peripheral
Bus Mode
(Auto-detect connected device’s baud rate)
ON Host
computer
or CX-
Program-
mer in
host link
mode
OMRON
PT (NT
Link)
CX-Pro-
grammer in
Peripheral
Bus Mode
Host com-
puter or
CX-Pro-
grammer
in host
link mode
OMRON
compo-
nent
(Compo-
Way/F)
DIP switch
settings
PLC Setup settings
Peripheral port settings
Default NT Link No-
protocol
Peripheral
bus
Host Link Serial
Gateway
Pin
5
OFF Host
computer
or CX-
Program-
mer in
host link
mode
OMRON
PT (NT
Link)
Standard
external
device
CX-Pro-
grammer in
Peripheral
Bus Mode
Host com-
puter or
CX-Pro-
grammer
in host
link mode
OMRON
compo-
nent
(Compo-
Way/F)
ON CX-Programmer in Peripheral Bus Mode
(Auto-detect connected device’s baud rate)
CX-Programmer network
setting
Peripheral port
connections
RS-232C port
connection
PLC Setup
Toolbus (peripheral bus) Turn OFF pin 4. Turn ON pin 5. None
SYSMAC WAY (Host Link) Turn ON pin 4. Turn OFF pin 5. Set to Host Link.
283
Details Section 6-2
• The computer is connected to the CPU Unit’s RS-232C port and pin 5 is
ON.
To go online, set CX-Programmer to Peripheral Bus Mode, turn pin 4 ON (turn
pin 5 OFF for the RS-232C port), and set the communications mode to host
link mode in the PLC Setup.
284
Details Section 6-2
285
SECTION 7
PLC Setup
This section describes initial software settings made in the PLC Setup.
7-1 PLC Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
7-1-1 Overview of the PLC Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
7-1-2 PLC Setup Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
7-1-2-1 Startup Operation Settings (CX-Programmer's Startup Tab Page) 289
7-1-2-2 CPU Settings Tab Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
7-1-2-3 Time and Interrupt Settings (CX-Programmer Timings Tab Page) 295
7-1-2-4 SIOU Refresh Tab Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
7-1-2-5 Unit Settings Tab Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
7-1-2-6 Host Link (RS-232C) Port Tab Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
7-1-2-7 Peripheral Port Tab Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
7-1-2-8 Peripheral Service Tab Page (CPU Processing Mode Settings) 312
7-1-2-9 Set Time to All Events (Fixed Peripheral Servicing Time). . . . 314
7-1-2-10 FINS Protection Tab Page (Protection Against FINS Writes
Across Networks) (CJ-series CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Only). . . . . . . 315
7-1-2-11 Built-in Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
7-1-2-12 Origin Search Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
7-1-2-13 Pulse Output 1 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
7-1-2-14 Origin Return Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
7-2 Explanations of PLC Setup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
286
PLC Setup Section 7-1
7-1 PLC Setup
7-1-1 Overview of the PLC Setup
The PLC Setup contains basic CPU Unit software settings that the user can
change to customize PLC operation. These settings can be changed from a
Programming Console or other Programming Device.
Note To read or set parameters in the PLC Setup, use the version of CX-Program-
mer that corresponds to the parameters.
For example, with CX-Programmer Ver.3.@, when the PLC Setup is uploaded
from a PLC that was used to set the PLC Setup for Unit Ver. 2.0 or later only,
the PLC Setup that was set cannot be downloaded again. (The following
screen will be displayed.) Use the CX-Programmer Ver. 4.0 in this case.
The following table lists cases in which the PLC Setup must be changed. In
other cases, the PLC can be operated with the default settings.
Cases when settings must be changed Setting(s) to be changed
The input response time settings for CJ-series Basic I/O Units must
be changed in the following cases:
• Chattering or noise occur in Basic I/O Units.
• Short pulse inputs are being received for intervals longer than
the cycle time.
Basic I/O Unit Input Response Time
Data in all regions of I/O Memory (including the CIO Area, Work
Areas, Timer Flags and PVs, Task Flags, Index Registers, and Data
Registers) must be retained when the PLC’s power is turned on.
IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup
The status of bits force-set or force-reset from a Programming
Device (including Programming Consoles) must be retained when
the PLC’s power is turned on.
Forced Status Hold Bit Status at Startup
• You do not want the operating mode to be determined by the
Programming Console’s mode switch setting at startup.
• You want the PLC to go into RUN mode or MONITOR mode and
start operating immediately after startup.
• You want the operating mode to be other than PROGRAM mode
when the power is turned ON.
Startup Mode
Detection of low-battery errors is not required when using battery-
free operation.
Detect Low Battery
Detection of interrupt-task errors is not required. Detect Interrupt Task Error
Data files are required but a Memory Card cannot be used or the
files are written frequently. (Part of the EM Area will be used as file
memory.)
EM File Memory
The peripheral port will not be used with the Programming Console
or CX-Programmer (peripheral bus) communications speed auto-
detection and will not used the default host link communications
settings such as 9,600 bps.
Note Pin 4 of the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit must be
OFF to change the PLC Setup settings.
Peripheral Port Settings
287
PLC Setup Section 7-1
The RS-232C port will not be used with the Programming Console
or CX-Programmer (peripheral bus) communications speed auto-
detection and will not use the default host link communications set-
tings such as 9,600 bps.
Note Pin 5 of the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit must be
OFF to change the PLC Setup settings.
RS-232C Port Settings
You want to speed up communications with a PT via an NT Link. Set the peripheral port or the RS-232C port commu-
nications port baud rate to “high-speed NT Link.”
You want the intervals for scheduled interrupts to be set in units of
1 ms (or 0.1 ms) rather than 10 ms.
Scheduled Interrupt Time Units
You want CPU Unit operation to be stopped for instruction errors,
i.e., when the ER Flag or AER Flag is turned ON. (You want instruc-
tion errors to be fatal errors.)
You want to find the instructions where instruction errors are occur-
ring (where the ER Flag is turning ON.
Instruction Error Operation
You want a minimum cycle time setting to create a consistent I/O
refresh cycle.
Minimum Cycle Time
You want to set a maximum cycle time other than 1 second (10 ms
to 40,000 ms).
Watch Cycle Time
You want to delay peripheral servicing so that it is executed over
several cycles.
Fixed Peripheral Servicing Time
You want to give priority to servicing peripherals over program exe-
cution. Here, “peripherals” include CPU Bus Units, Special I/O
Units, the built-in RS-232C port, and the peripheral port.
Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode
Performing special processing when power is interrupted. Power OFF Interrupt Task (See note 5.)
You want to delay the detection of a power interruption. Power OFF Detection Delay Time (See note 5.)
You want to execute IORF or FIORF (CJ1-H-R CPU Units only) in
an interrupt task.
You want to shorten the average cycle time when a lot of Special
I/O Units are being used.
You want to extend the I/O refreshing interval for Special I/O Units.
Special I/O Unit Cyclic Refreshing
You want to improve both program execution and peripheral servic-
ing response.
CPU Processing Mode (CJ1-H CPU Units only)
You do not want to record user-defined errors for FAL(006) and
FPD(269) in the error log.
FAL Error Log Registration (CJ1-H CPU Units only)
You want to reduce fluctuation in the cycle time caused by text
string processing
Background Execution for Table Data, Text String,
and Data Shift Instructions (CJ1-H CPU Units only)
You do not want to wait for Units to complete startup processing to
start CPU Unit operation.
Startup Condition (CJ1-H CPU Units only)
You want to use high-speed counters with the built-in I/O. (See note
4.)
Use/Don’t use high-speed counter 0.
Use/Don’t use high-speed counter 1.
You want to use interrupt inputs with the built-in I/O. (See note 4.) IN0 to IN3 input operation settings.
You want to use quick-response inputs with the built-in I/O. (See
note 4.)
IN0 to IN3 input operation settings.
You want to use general-purpose inputs for the input filter function
with the built-in I/O. (See note 4.)
General purpose IN0 to IN9 input time constants.
You want to use the origin search function with the built-in I/O. (See
note 4.)
Pulse outputs 0/1: Origin search operation setting
Cases when settings must be changed Setting(s) to be changed
288
PLC Setup Section 7-1
Note 1. CJ1-H CPU Units only.
2. CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Units only.
3. CJ1-H and CJ1 CPU Units only.
4. CJ1M CPU Units only.
5. Not supported when the CJ1W-PD022 Power Supply Unit is mounted. (Re-
fer to Power OFF Operation on page 451.)
7-1-2 PLC Setup Settings
All non-binary settings in the following tables are hexadecimal unless other-
wise specified.
The Programming Console addresses given in this section are used to access
and change settings in the PLC Setup when using a Programming Console or
the Programming Console function of an NS-series Programming Terminal.
The PLC Setup is stored in the Parameter Area, which can be accessed only
from a Programming Device. Do not use the Programming Console
addresses as operands in programming instructions. They will be interpreted
as addresses in the CIO Area of I/O memory.
You want to set the various parameters for the origin search func-
tion. (See note 4.)
• Pulse outputs 0/1: Origin search, origin return ini-
tial speed
• Pulse outputs 0/1: Origin search high speed
• Pulse outputs 0/1: Origin search proximity speed
• Pulse outputs 0/1: Origin compensation value
• Pulse outputs 0/1: Origin search acceleration rate
• Pulse outputs 0/1: Origin search deceleration rate
• Pulse outputs 0/1: Limit input signal type
• Pulse outputs 0/1: Origin proximity input signal
type
• Pulse outputs 0/1: Origin input signal type
• Pulse outputs 0/1: Positioning monitor time
• Pulse outputs 0/1: Origin return target speed
• Pulse outputs 0/1: Origin return acceleration rate
• Pulse outputs 0/1: Origin return deceleration rate
You want to use the Serial PLC Link. (See note 4.) • RS-232C Communications Port: Serial Communi-
cations Mode
• Serial PLC Link: Format
• Serial PLC Link: Number of words to send
• Serial PLC Link: Maximum unit number
• Serial PLC Link: Polled Unit unit number
Cases when settings must be changed Setting(s) to be changed
289
PLC Setup Section 7-1
7-1-2-1 Startup Operation Settings (CX-Programmer's Startup Tab Page)
Startup Hold Settings
Forced Status Hold Bit
IOM Hold Bit
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+80 14 0: Cleared
1: Retained
Default: 0
This setting determines whether or not the
status of the Forced Status Hold Bit
(A50013) is retained at startup.
When you want all of the bits that have been
force-set or force-reset to retain their forced
status when the power is turned on, turn ON
the Forced Status Hold Bit and set this set-
ting to 1 (ON).
A50013
(Forced Sta-
tus Hold Bit)
At startup
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+80 15 0: Cleared
1: Retained
Default: 0
This setting determines whether or not the
status of the IOM Hold Bit (A50012) is
retained at startup.
When you want all of the data in I/O Memory
to be retained when the power is turned on,
turn ON the IOM Hold Bit and set this set-
ting to 1 (ON).
A50012 (IOM
Hold Bit)
At startup
290
PLC Setup Section 7-1
Mode Setting
Execution Settings
Startup Condition (CJ1-H CPU Units Only)
Note This setting applies only to specific Units. If “don’t wait” is set, the CPU Unit
will not wait only for those specific Units, i.e., it will still wait for all other Units
to start.
7-1-2-2 CPU Settings Tab Page
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+81 --- Program (PRG):
PROGRAM mode
Monitor (MON):
MONITOR mode
Run (RUN): RUN
mode
Use programming
console (PRNC):
Programming Con-
sole’s mode switch
Default: Use pro-
gramming console
This setting determines whether the Startup
Mode will be the mode set on the Program-
ming Console’s mode switch or the mode
set here in the PLC Setup.
Note If this setting is PRCN and a
Programming Console isn’t
connected, startup mode will be
RUN mode.
--- At startup
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+83 15 0: Wait for Units.
1: Don’t wait.
Default: 0
To start the CPU Unit in MONITOR or PRO-
GRAM mode even if there is one or more
Units that has not completed startup pro-
cessing, set this setting to 1 (Don’t wait for
Units).
To wait for all Units to finish startup process-
ing, set this setting to 0 (Wait for Units).
--- At startup
291
PLC Setup Section 7-1
Execute Process
Detect Low Battery
Detect Interrupt Task Error
Stop CPU on Instruction Error (Instruction Error Operation)
Do Not Register FAL to Error Log
Note This setting does not exists in CJ1@-CPU@@ CPU Units.
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+128 15 0: Detect
1: Do not detect
Default: 0
This setting determines whether CPU Unit
battery errors are detected. If this setting is
set to 0 and a battery error is detected, the
ERR/ALM indicator on the CPU Unit will
flash and the Battery Error Flag (A40204)
will be turned ON, but CPU Unit operation
will continue.
A40204 (Bat-
tery Error
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+128 14 0: Detect
1: Do not detect
Default: 0
This setting determines whether interrupt
task errors are detected. If this setting is set
to 0 and an interrupt task error is detected,
the ERR/ALM indicator on the CPU Unit will
flash and the Interrupt Task Error Flag
(A40213) will be turned ON, but CPU Unit
operation will continue.
A40213
(Interrupt
Task Error
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+197 15 0: Continue
1: Stop
Default: 0
This setting determines whether instruction
errors (instruction processing errors (ER)
and illegal access errors (AER)) are treated
as non-fatal or fatal errors. When this setting
is set to 1, CPU Unit operation will be
stopped if the ER or AER Flags is turned
ON (even when the AER Flag is turned ON
for an indirect DM/EM BCD error).
Related Flags: A29508 (Instruction Pro-
cessing Error Flag)
A29509 (Indirect DM/EM BCD Error Flag)
A29510 (Illegal Access Error Flag)
A29508,
A29509,
A29510
(If this setting
is set to 0,
these flags
won’t be
turned ON
even if an
instruction
error occurs.)
At start of
operation.
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+129 15 0: Record user-
defined FAL errors
in error log.
1: Don’t record user-
defined FAL errors
in error log.
Default: 0
This setting determines if user-defined FAL
errors created with FAL(006) and time moni-
toring for FPD(269) will be recorded in the
error log (A100 to A199). Set it to 1 so pre-
vent these errors from being recorded.
--- Whenever
FAL(006) is
executed
(every cycle).
292
PLC Setup Section 7-1
Memory Allocation Settings
EM File Setting Enabled
Note This setting does not exist in CJ1M CPU Units.
EM Start File No.
Note This setting does not exist in CJ1M CPU Units.
Background Execution Settings
Table Data Process Instructions
Note This setting does not exists in CJ1@-CPU@@ CPU Units.
String Data Process Instructions
Note This setting does not exists in CJ1@-CPU@@ CPU Units.
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+136 7 0: None
1: EM File Memory
Enabled.
Default: 0
This setting determines whether part of the
EM Area will be used for file memory.
--- After initial-
ization from
Program-
ming Device
or via FINS
command.
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+136 0 to 3 0 to 6
Default: 0
If bit 7 (above) is set to 1, the setting here
specifies the EM bank where file memory
begins. The specified EM bank and all sub-
sequent banks will be used as file memory.
This setting will be disabled if bit 7 is set to
0.
A344 (EM
File Memory
Starting
Bank)
After initial-
ization from
Program-
ming Device
or via FINS
command.
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+198 15 0: Not executed in
background.
1: Executed in back-
ground.
Default: 0
This setting determines if Table Data
Instructions will be processed over multiple
cycle times (i.e., processed in the back-
ground).
--- At start of
operation
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+198 14 0: Not executed in
background.
1: Executed in back-
ground.
Default: 0
This setting determines if Text String Data
Instructions will be processed over multiple
cycle times (i.e., processed in the back-
ground).
--- At start of
operation
293
PLC Setup Section 7-1
Data Shift Process Instructions
Note This setting does not exists in CJ1@-CPU@@ CPU Units.
Communications Port Number for Background Execution
Note This setting does not exists in CJ1@-CPU@@ CPU Units.
FB Communications Instruction Settings (Settings for OMRON FB Library)
The following PLC Setup settings are used only when using the OMRON FB
Library.
Number of Resends
Note This setting does not exists in CJ1@-CPU@@ CPU Units.
Response Timeout, Comms Instruction in FB
Note This setting does not exists in CJ1@-CPU@@ CPU Units.
DeviceNet Communications Instruction Response Monitoring Time
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+198 13 0: Not executed in
background.
1: Executed in back-
ground.
Default: 0
This setting determines if Data Shift Instruc-
tions will be processed over multiple cycle
times (i.e., processed in the background).
--- At start of
operation
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+198 0 to 3 0 to 7: Communica-
tions ports 0 to 7
(internal logical
ports)
The communications port number (internal
logical port) that will be used for background
execution.
--- At start of
operation.
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
New set-
ting’s effec-
tiveness
Word Bit(s)
+200 0 to 3 0 to F: 0 to 15
Default: 0
Set the number of retries for sending com-
mands when executing DeviceNet explicit
messages or FINS messages within func-
tion blocks.
A58000 to
A58003
Start of oper-
ation
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
New set-
ting’s effec-
tiveness
Word Bit(s)
+201 0 to 15 0001 to FFFF (Unit:
0.1 s, 0.1 to 6553.5)
0000: 2 s
A response timeout occurs when no
response is returned within the time set
here for FINS commands executed within a
function block.
A581 Start of oper-
ation
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
New set-
ting’s effec-
tiveness
Word Bit(s)
+202 0 to 15 0001 to FFFF (Unit:
0.1 s, 0.1 to 6553.5)
0000: 2 s
A response timeout occurs when no
response is returned within the time set
here for explicit messages commands exe-
cuted within a function block.
A582 Start of oper-
ation
294
PLC Setup Section 7-1
Note This setting does not exists in CJ1@-CPU@@ CPU Units.
The number of resends and response monitoring time must be set by the user
in the FB communications instructions settings in the PLC Setup, particularly
when using function blocks from the OMRON FB Library to execute FINS
messages or DeviceNet explicit messages communications. The values set in
this PLC Setup for OMRON FB Library will be automatically stored in the
related Auxiliary Area words A580 to A582 and used by the function blocks
from the OMRON FB Library.
295
PLC Setup Section 7-1
7-1-2-3 Time and Interrupt Settings (CX-Programmer Timings Tab Page)
Enable Watch Cycle Time Setting
Watch Cycle Time
Cycle Time (Minimum Cycle Time)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+209 15 0: Default
1: Bits 0 to 14
Default: 0
Set to 1 to enable the Watch Cycle Time
Setting in bits 0 to 14. Leave this setting at 0
for a maximum cycle time of 1 s.
A40108
(Cycle Time
Too Long
Flag)
At start of
operation.
(Can’t be
changed dur-
ing opera-
tion.)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+209 0 to 14 001 to FA0: 10 to
40,000 ms
(10-ms units)
Default: 001 (1 s)
This setting is valid only when bit 15 of 209
is set to 1. The Cycle Time Too Long Flag
(A40108) will be turned ON if the cycle time
exceeds this setting.
A264 and
A265
(Present
Cycle Time)
At start of
operation
(Can’t be
changed dur-
ing opera-
tion.)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+208 0 to 15 0001 to 7D00: 1 to
32,000 ms
(1-ms units)
Default: 0000
(No minimum)
Set to 0001 to 7D00 to specify a minimum
cycle time. If the cycle time is less than this
setting, it will be extended until this time
passes. Leave this setting at 0000 for a vari-
able cycle time. (Can’t be changed during
operation.)
This cycle time will apply to the program
execution cycle when a parallel processing
mode is used.
--- At start of
operation.
296
PLC Setup Section 7-1
Scheduled Interrupt Interval
Note CJ1M/CJ1-H-R CPU Units only.
Power OFF Detection Time (Power OFF Detection Delay Time) (See note.)
Note This setting is not supported when the CJ1W-PD022 Power Supply Unit is
mounted. (Refer to Power OFF Operation on page 451.)
Power OFF Interrupt Disable (See note.)
Note This setting is not supported when the CJ1W-PD022 Power Supply Unit is
mounted. (Refer to Power OFF Operation on page 451.)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+195 0 to 3 0: 10 ms
1: 1.0 ms
2: 0.1 ms (See
note.)
Default: 0
This setting determines the time units used
in scheduled interrupt interval settings.
(This setting cannot be changed during
operation.)
--- At start of
operation.
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+225 0 to 7 00 to 0A:
0 to 10 ms
(1-ms units)
Default: 00
This setting determines how much of a
delay there will be from the detection of a
power interruption (approximately 10 to
25 ms for AC power and 2 to 5 ms for DC
power after the power supply voltage drops
below 85% of the rated value) to the confir-
mation of a power interruption. The default
setting is 0 ms.
When the power OFF interrupt task is
enabled, it will be executed when the power
interruption is confirmed. If the power OFF
interrupt task is disabled, the CPU will be
reset and operation will be stopped.
--- At startup or
at start of
operation.
(Can’t be
changed dur-
ing opera-
tion.)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+225 15 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Default: 0
When this setting is set to 1, the power OFF
interrupt task will be executed when power
is interrupted.
--- At startup or
at start of
operation.
(Can’t be
changed dur-
ing opera-
tion.)
297
PLC Setup Section 7-1
7-1-2-4 SIOU Refresh Tab Page
Special I/O Unit Cyclic Refreshing
Note If Special I/O Units are not refreshed periodically (i.e., within 11 s) by the CPU
Unit, a CPU Unit monitoring error will occur. (The ERH and RUN indicators on
the Special I/O Unit will be lit.) If the PLC Setup is set to disable cyclically
refreshing Special I/O Units, use the I/O REFRESH (IORF(097)) or SPEICAL
I/O UNIT REFRESH (FIORF(225)) (FIORF: CJ1-H-R CPU Units only) instruc-
tion in the user program to refresh them.
Item Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is
read by
CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
Cyclic Refresh-
ing of Units 0 to
15
+226 0 to 15 0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Default: 0
These settings determine whether
data will be exchanged between the
specified Unit and the Special I/O
Unit’s allocated words (10 words/
Unit) during cyclic refreshing for Spe-
cial I/O Units.
Turn ON the corresponding bit to dis-
able cyclic refreshing when the Unit
will be refreshed in an interrupt task
by IORF(097), several Special I/O
Units are being used and you don’t
want to extend the cycle time, or the
cycle time is so short that the Special
I/O Unit’s internal processing can’t
keep up.
(Special I/O Units can be refreshed
from the program with IORF(097).)
--- At start of
operation.
Cyclic Refresh-
ing of Units 16
to 31
+227 0 to 15 0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Default: 0
Cyclic Refresh-
ing of Units 32
to 47
+228 0 to 15 0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Default: 0
Cyclic Refresh-
ing of Units 48
to 63
+229 0 to 15 0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Default: 0
Cyclic Refresh-
ing of Units 64
to 79
+230 0 to 15 0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Default: 0
Cyclic Refresh-
ing of Units 80
to 95
+231 0 to 15 0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Default: 0
298
PLC Setup Section 7-1
7-1-2-5 Unit Settings Tab Page
Basic I/O Unit Input (Rack) Response Times
Item Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When
setting is
read by
CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
Rack 0, Slot 0 +10 0 to 7 00: 8 ms
10: 0 ms
11: 0.5 ms
12: 1 ms
13: 2 ms
14: 4 ms
15: 8 ms
16: 16 ms
17: 32 ms
Default:
00 (8 ms)
Sets the input response time
(ON response time = OFF
response time) for CJ-series
Basic I/O Units. The default
setting is 8 ms and the setting
range is 0 ms to 32 ms.
This value can be increased to
reduce the effects of chatter-
ing and noise, or it can be
reduced to allow reception of
shorter input pulses.
A220 to
A259:
Actual
input
response
times for
Basic I/O
Units
At startup.
Rack 0, Slot 1 8 to 15
Rack 0, Slot 2 +11 0 to 7
Rack 0, Slot 3 8 to 15
Rack 0, Slot 4 +12 0 to 7
Rack 0, Slot 5 8 to 15
Rack 0, Slot6 +13 0 to 7
Rack 0, Slot 7 8 to 15
Rack 0, Slot 8 +14 0 to 7
Rack 0, Slot 9 8 to 15
Rack 1, Slots 0 to 9 +15 to
19
See
Rack 0.
Rack 2, Slots 0 to 9 +20 to
24
Rack 3, Slots 0 to 9 +25 to
29
Rack 4, Slots 0 to 9 +30 to
34
Rack 5, Slots 0 to 9 +35 to
39
Rack 6, Slots 0 to 9 +40 to
44
Rack 7, Slots 0 to 9 +45 to
49
299
PLC Setup Section 7-1
7-1-2-6 Host Link (RS-232C) Port Tab Page
The following settings are valid when pin 5 on the DIP switch on the CPU Unit
is OFF.
Host Link Settings
Communications Settings
Mode: Communications Mode
Format: Data Bits
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+160 15 0: Standard*
1: PLC Setup (cus-
tom)
Default: 0
*The default settings are for 1 start bit, 7
data bits, even parity, 2 stop bits, and a baud
rate of 9,600 bps.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+160 8 to 11 00: Host link
05: Host link
Default: 0
This setting determines whether the RS-
232C port will operate in host link mode or
another serial communications mode. (Host
link can be specified with 00 or 05.)
The Peripheral bus mode is for communica-
tions with Programming Devices other than
the Programming Console.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+160 3 0: 7 bits
1: 8 bits
Default: 0
These settings are valid only when the com-
munications mode is set to host link or no-
protocol.
These settings are also valid only when the
RS-232C Port Settings Selection is set to 1:
PLC Setup.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
300
PLC Setup Section 7-1
Format: Stop Bits
Format: Parity
Baud Rate (bps)
Unit Number (for CPU Unit in Host Link Mode)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+160 2 0: 2 bits
1: 1 bit
Default: 0
These settings are valid only when the com-
munications mode is set to host link or no-
protocol.
These settings are also valid only when the
RS-232C Port Settings Selection is set to 1:
PLC Setup.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+160 0 to 1 00: Even
01: Odd
10: None
Default: 00
These settings are valid only when the com-
munications mode is set to host link or no-
protocol.
These settings are also valid only when the
RS-232C Port Settings Selection is set to 1:
PLC Setup.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+161 0 to 7 00: 9,600 bps
01: 300 bps
02: 600 bps
03: 1,200 bps
04: 2,400 bps
05: 4,800 bps
06: 9,600 bps
07: 19,200 bps
08: 38,400 bps
09: 57,600 bps
0A: 115,200 bps
Default: 00
These settings are valid only when the com-
munications mode is set to host link or no-
protocol.
These settings are also valid only when the
RS-232C Port Settings Selection is set to 1:
PLC Setup.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+163 0 to 7 00 to 1F:
(0 to 31)
Default: 00
This setting determines the CPU Unit’s unit
number when it is connected in a 1-to-N
(N=2 to 32) Host Link.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
301
PLC Setup Section 7-1
NT Link Settings
Mode: Communications Mode
Baud Rate (bps)
NT Link Max. (Maximum Unit Number in NT Link Mode)
Peripheral Bus Settings
Communications Settings
Mode: Communications Mode
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+160 8 to 11 02: 1:N NT Link
Default: 0
This setting determines whether the RS-
232C port will operate in host link mode or
another serial communications mode.
Note Communications will not be possible
with PTs set for 1:1 NT Links.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+161 0 to 7 00: Standard
0A: High-speed NT
Link*
Default: 00
* Set to 115,200 bps when setting this value
from the CX-Programmer. To return to the
standard setting, leave the setting set to
“PLC Setup” and set the baud rate to 9,600
bps.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+166 0 to 3 0 to 7
Default: 0
This setting determines the highest unit
number of PT that can be connected to the
PLC.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+160 15 0: Standard*
1: PLC Setup (cus-
tom)
Default: 0
*The default settings are for a baud rate of
9,600 bps.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+160 8 to 11 04: Peripheral bus
Default: 0
This setting determines whether the RS-
232C port will operate in host link mode or
another serial communications mode. (Host
link can be specified with 00 or 05.)
The Peripheral Bus mode is for communica-
tions with Programming Devices other than
the Programming Console.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
302
PLC Setup Section 7-1
Baud Rate (bps)
No-protocol Settings
Standard/Custom Settings
Serial Communications Mode
Data Length
Stop Bits
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+161 0 to 7 00: 9,600 bps
06: 9,600 bps
07: 19,200 bps
08: 38,400 bps
09: 57,600 bps
0A: 115,200 bps
Default: 00
Settings 00 and 06 through 0A are valid
when the communications mode is set to
peripheral bus.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+160 15 0: Standard
1: Custom
Default: 0
The standard settings are as follows:
1 stop bit, 7-bit data, even parity, 2 stop bits,
9,600 bps
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+160 08 to 11 03 Hex: No-protocol
Default: 00 Hex
This setting determines whether the RS-
232C port will operate in no-protocol mode
or another serial communications mode.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+160 3 0: 7-bit
1: 8-bit
Default: 0
This setting is valid only in no-protocol com-
munications mode. Set the Standard/Cus-
tom setting (word 160, bit 15) to 1 to enable
this setting.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+160 2 0: 2 bits
1: 1 bit
Default: 0
This setting is valid only in no-protocol com-
munications mode. Set the Standard/Cus-
tom setting (word 160, bit 15) to 1 to enable
this setting.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
303
PLC Setup Section 7-1
Parity
Baud Rate
Send Delay
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+160 00 to 01 00 Hex: Even
01 Hex: Odd
10 Hex: None
Default: 00
This setting is valid only in no-protocol com-
munications mode. Set the Standard/Cus-
tom setting (word 160, bit 15) to 1 to enable
this setting.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+161 00 to 07 00 Hex: 9,600 bps
01 Hex: 300 bps
02 Hex: 600 bps
03 Hex: 1,200 bps
04 Hex: 2,400 bps
05 Hex: 4,800 bps
06 Hex: 9,600 bps
07 Hex: 19,200 bps
08 Hex: 38,400 bps
09 Hex: 57,600 bps
0A Hex: 115,200 bps
Default: 00 Hex
This setting is valid only in no-protocol com-
munications mode. Set the Standard/Cus-
tom setting (word 160, bit 15) to 1 to enable
this setting.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+162 00 to 15 0000 to 270F Hex (0
to 99,990 ms)
Unit: 10 ms
Default: 0000
When the TXD(236) instruction is executed,
data will be sent from the RS-232C after the
send delay set here has expired.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
304
PLC Setup Section 7-1
Start Code/End Code
Serial Gateway Settings
Communications Settings
Mode: Communications Mode
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+164 8 to 15 00 to FF
Default: 00
Start code: Set this start code only when the
start code is enabled (1) in bits 12 to 15 of
165.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
0 to 7 00 to FF
Default: 00
End code: Set this end code only when the
end code is enabled (1) in bits 8 to 11 of
165.
+165 12 0: None
1: Code in 164
Default: 0
Start code setting:
A setting of 1 enables the start code in 164
bits 8 to 15.
8 to 9 0: None
1: Code in 164
2: CR+LF
Default: 0
End code setting:
With a setting of 0, the amount of data being
received must be specified. A setting of 1
enables the end code in bits 0 to 7 of 164. A
setting of 2 enables an end code of CR+LF.
0 to 7 00: 256 bytes
01 to FF:
1 to 255 bytes
Default: 00
Set the data length to be sent and received
with no-protocol communications. The end
code and start code are not included in the
data length.
Set this value only when the end code set-
ting in bits 8 to 11 of 165 is “0: None.”
This setting can be used to change the
amount of data that can be transferred at
one time by TXD(236) or RXD(235). The
default setting is the maximum value of 256
bytes.
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
New set-
ting’s effec-
tiveness
Word Bit(s)
+160 15 0: Default (stan-
dard)*
1: PLC Setup (cus-
tom)
Default: 0
*The default settings are for a baud rate of
9,600 bps.
A61901
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
New set-
ting’s effec-
tiveness
Word Bit(s)
+160 8 to 11 9: Serial Gateway
Default: 0
This setting determines whether the com-
munications mode for the RS-232C port
port.
The peripheral bus mode is used for all Pro-
gramming Devices except for Programming
Consoles.
A61901 (RS-
232C Port
Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
305
PLC Setup Section 7-1
Data Bits
Stop Bits
Parity
Baud Rate (bps)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
New set-
ting’s effec-
tiveness
Word Bit(s)
+160 3 0: 7 bits
1: 8 bits
Default: 0
These settings are valid when the RS-232C
Port Settings Selection is set to 1: PLC
Setup.
A61901
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
New set-
ting’s effec-
tiveness
Word Bit(s)
+160 2 0: 2 bits
1: 1 bit
Default: 0
These settings are valid when the RS-232C
Port Settings Selection is set to 1: PLC
Setup.
A61901
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
New set-
ting’s effec-
tiveness
Word Bit(s)
+160 0 to 1 00: Even
01: Odd
10: None
Default: 00
These setting is valid only when the commu-
nications mode is set to Host Link.
These settings are also valid only when the
RS-232C Port Settings Selection is set to 1:
PLC Setup.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
New set-
ting’s effec-
tiveness
Word Bit(s)
+161 0 to 7 00: 9,600
01: 300
02: 600
03: 1,200
04 2,400
05: 4,800
06: 9,600
07: 19,200
08: 38,400
09: 57,600
0A: 115,200
Default: 00
These setting is valid only when the commu-
nications mode is set to Host Link.
These settings are also valid only when the
RS-232C Port Settings Selection is set to 1:
PLC Setup.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
306
PLC Setup Section 7-1
Response Monitoring Time
Serial PLC Link (CJ1M CPU Units Only)
Polling Unit: Serial Communications Mode
Polling Unit: Port Baud Rate
Note Set to 115,200 bps when using the CX-Programmer
Polling Unit: Link Method
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
New set-
ting’s effec-
tiveness
Word Bit(s)
+167 8 to 15 00: 5 s
01 to FF: 100 to
25,500 ms (Unit:
100 ms)
Default: 00
Monitors the time from when the FINS com-
mand that has been converted into the
specified protocol using Serial Gateway is
sent until the response is received.
Default: 5 s; PLC Setup: 0.1 to 25.5 s
Note: If a timeout occurs, the FINS end
code 0205 hex (response timeout) will be
returned to the FINS source.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+160 8 to 11 8: Serial PLC Link
Polling Unit
Default: 0
This setting specifies the serial communica-
tions mode that the RS-232C port is to be
used with. It also designates the local node
as the Serial PLC Link Polling Unit.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+161 0 to 7 00: Standard
0A: High-speed
(See note.)
Default: 00
This setting specifies the Serial PLC Link
baud rate.
Note: The setting must be the same for all of
the Polled Units and the Polling Unit using
the Serial PLC Links.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+166 15 0: Complete link
method
1: Polling Unit link
method
Default: 0
This setting specifies the link method for the
Serial PLC Link.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
307
PLC Setup Section 7-1
Polling Unit: Number of Link Words
Polling Unit: Maximum Unit Number in Serial PLC Link
Polled Unit: Serial Communications Mode
Polled Unit: Port Baud Rate
Note Set to 115,200 bps when using the CX-Programmer
Polled Unit: Serial PLC Link Polled Unit Unit Number
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+166 4 to 7 1 to A
Default: 0 (See
note.)
Note: If the default is
set, the number of
words will automati-
cally be 10 (A hex).
This setting specifies the number of words
per node in the Serial PLC Link Area to be
used for Serial PLC Links.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+166 0 to 3 0 to 7
Default: 0
This setting specifies the highest Polled Unit
unit number that can be connected in Serial
PLC Links.
Note: If a PT is to be connected, it must be
included when counting Units.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+160 8 to 11 7: Serial PLC Link
Polled Unit
Default: 0
This setting specifies the serial communica-
tions mode that the RS-232C port is to be
used with. It also designates the local node
as a a Serial PLC Link Polled Unit.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+161 0 to 7 00: Standard
0A: High-speed
(See note.)
Default: 00
This setting specifies the Serial PLC Link
baud rate.
Note: The setting must be the same for all of
the Polled Units and the Polling Unit using
Serial PLC Link.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+167 0 to 3 0 to 7
Default: 00
This setting specifies the Polled Unit unit
number for the local node on the Serial PLC
Link.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
308
PLC Setup Section 7-1
7-1-2-7 Peripheral Port Tab Page
The following settings are valid when pin 4 on the DIP switch on the CPU Unit
is ON.
Host Link Settings
Communications Settings
Mode: Communications Mode
Format: Data Bits
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+144 15 0: Standard*
1: PLC Setup (Cus-
tom)
Default: 0
*The default settings are for 1 start bit, 7
data bits, even parity, 2 stop bits, and a baud
rate of 9,600 bps.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+144 8 to 11 00: Host Link
05: Host link
Default: 0
This setting determines whether the periph-
eral port will operate in host link mode or
another serial communications mode. (Host
link can be specified with 00 or 05.)
The Peripheral Bus Mode is for communica-
tions with Programming Devices other than
the Programming Console.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+144 3 0: 7 bits
1: 8 bits
Default: 0
These settings are valid only when the com-
munications mode is set to Host link.
These settings are also valid only when the
Peripheral Port Settings Selection is set to
1: PLC Setup.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
309
PLC Setup Section 7-1
Format: Stop Bits
Format: Parity
Baud Rate (bps)
Unit Number (for CPU Unit in Host Link Mode)
NT Link Settings
Mode: Communications Mode
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+144 2 0: 2 bits
1: 1 bit
Default: 0
These settings are valid only when the com-
munications mode is set to Host link.
These settings are also valid only when the
Peripheral Port Settings Selection is set to
1: PLC Setup.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+144 0 and 1 00: Even
01: Odd
10: None
Default: 00
These setting is valid only when the commu-
nications mode is set to Host link.
These settings are also valid only when the
Peripheral Port Settings Selection is set to
1: PLC Setup.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+145 0 to 7 00: 9,600 bps
01: 300 bps
02: 600 bps
03: 1,200 bps
04: 2,400 bps
05: 4,800 bps
06: 9,600 bps
07: 19,200 bps
08: 38,400 bps
09: 57,600 bps
0A: 115,200 bps
Default: 00
This setting is valid only when the communi-
cations mode is set to the Host Link mode.
These settings are also valid only when the
Peripheral Port Settings Selection is set to
1: PLC Setup.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+147 0 to 7 00 to 1F
(0 to 31)
Default: 00
This setting determines the CPU Unit’s unit
number when it is connected in a 1-to-N
(N=2 to 32) Host Link.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+144 8 to 11 02: 1:N NT Link
Default: 0
This setting determines whether the RS-
232C port will operate in host link mode or
another serial communications mode.
Note Communications will not be possible
with PTs set for 1:1 NT Links.
A61902
(RS-232C
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
310
PLC Setup Section 7-1
Baud Rate (bps)
NT Link Max. (Maximum Unit Number in NT Link Mode)
Peripheral Bus Settings
Communications Setting
Mode: Communications Mode
Baud Rate (bps)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+145 0 to 7 00: Standard
0A: High-speed NT
Link*
Default: 00
* Set to 115,200 bps when setting this value
from the CX-Programmer.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+150 0 to 3 0 to 7
Default: 0
This setting determines the highest unit
number of PT that can be connected to the
PLC in NT Link mode.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+144 15 0: Default (stan-
dard)*
1: PLC Setup (cus-
tom)
Default: 0
*The default settings are for a baud rate of
9,600 bps.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+144 8 to 11 4: Peripheral bus
Default: 0
This setting determines whether the com-
munications mode for the peripheral port.
The Peripheral Bus Mode is used for all Pro-
gramming Devices except for Programming
Consoles.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+145 0 to 7 00: 9,600 bps
06: 9,600 bps
07: 19,200 bps
08: 38,400 bps
09: 57,600 bps
0A: 115,200 bps
Default: 00
The following settings are valid for the
Peripheral Bus Mode: 00 and 06 to 0A hex.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
At the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
311
PLC Setup Section 7-1
Serial Gateway Settings
Communications Setting
Mode: Communications Mode
Format: Data Bits
Format: Stop Bits
Format: Parity
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
New set-
ting’s effec-
tiveness
Word Bit(s)
+144 15 0: Default (stan-
dard)*
1: PLC Setup (cus-
tom)
*The default settings are for a baud rate of
9,600 bps.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
New set-
ting’s effec-
tiveness
Word Bit(s)
+144 8 to 11 9: Serial Gateway
Default: 0
This setting determines whether the com-
munications mode for the peripheral port.
The peripheral bus mode is used for all Pro-
gramming Devices except for Programming
Consoles.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
New set-
ting’s effec-
tiveness
Word Bit(s)
+144 3 0: 7 bits
1: 8 bits
Default: 0
These settings are valid when the Periph-
eral Port Settings Selection is set to 1: PLC
Setup.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
New set-
ting’s effec-
tiveness
Word Bit(s)
+144 2 0: 2 bits
1: 1 bit
Default: 0
These settings are valid when the Periph-
eral Port Settings Selection is set to 1: PLC
Setup.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
New set-
ting’s effec-
tiveness
Word Bit(s)
+144 0 to 1 00: Even
01: Odd
10: None
Default: 00
These setting is valid only when the commu-
nications mode is set to Host Link.
These settings are also valid only when the
Peripheral Port Settings Selection is set to
1: PLC Setup.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
312
PLC Setup Section 7-1
Baud Rate (bps)
Response Monitoring Time
7-1-2-8 Peripheral Service Tab Page (CPU Processing Mode Settings)
Peripheral Service Mode (Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode)
Instruction Execution Time
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
New set-
ting’s effec-
tiveness
Word Bit(s)
+145 0 to 7 00: 9,600
01: 300
02: 600
03: 1,200
04 2,400
05: 4,800
06: 9,600
07: 19,200
08: 38,400
09: 57,600
0A: 115,200
Default: 00
These setting is valid only when the commu-
nications mode is set to Host Link.
These settings are also valid only when the
Peripheral Port Settings Selection is set to
1: PLC Setup.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
New set-
ting’s effec-
tiveness
Word Bit(s)
+151 8 to 15 00: 5 s
01 to FF: 100 to
25,500 ms (Unit:
100 ms)
Default: 00
Monitors the time from when the FINS com-
mand is converted into CompoWay/F using
Serial Gateway and sent until the response
is received.
Default: 5 s; PLC Setup: 0.1 to 25.5 s
Note: If a timeout occurs, the FINS end
code 0205 hex (response timeout) will be
returned to the FINS source.
A61901
(Peripheral
Port Settings
Changing
Flag)
Takes effect
the next
cycle.
(Also can be
changed with
STUP (237).)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+219 08 to 15 00
05 to FF (hex)
Default: 00 (hex)
The Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode will
be used if a time slice is set for instruction
execution (5 to 255 ms in 1-ms increments).
Instructions will be executed at the set time
slice.
00: Disable priority servicing
05 to FF: Time slice for instruction execution
(5 to 255 ms in 1-ms increments)
A266 and
A267
At start of
operation
(Can’t be
changed dur-
ing opera-
tion.)
313
PLC Setup Section 7-1
Peripheral Service Execution Time
Target Units (Units for Priority Servicing)
Sync/Async Comms (Parallel Processing Modes)
The following setting is supported only by the CJ1-H CPU Units
Execution Mode (Parallel Processing Mode)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+219 00 to 07 00 to FF (hex)
Default: 00 (hex)
This parameter sets the time slice for
peripheral servicing (0.1 to 25.5 ms in 0.1-
ms increments). The specified amount of
time will be used to service peripherals for
each time slice.
00: Disable priority servicing
01 to FF: Time slice for peripheral servicing
(0.1 to 25.5 ms in 0.1-ms increments)
A266 and
A267
At start of
operation
(Can’t be
changed dur-
ing opera-
tion.)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+220 08 to 15 00
10 to 1F
20 to 2F
E1
FC
FD
Default: 00
Up to five Units can be specified for priority
servicing.
00: Disable priority servicing
10 to 1F: CPU Bus Unit unit number (0 to
15) + 10 (hex)
20 to 7F: CJ-series Special I/O Unit unit
number (0 to 96) + 20 (hex)
FC: RS-232C port
FD: Peripheral port
--- At start of
operation
(Can’t be
changed dur-
ing opera-
tion.)
00 to 07
+221 08 to 15
00 to 07
+222 08 to 15
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+219 08 to 15 00
01
02
Default: 00
This parameter specifies if I/O memory
access is to be included in the peripheral
service processing executed in parallel with
instruction execution.
00: Not specified (disable parallel process-
ing)
01: Synchronous (Synchronous Memory
Access
02: Asynchronous (Asynchronous Memory
Access)
--- At start of
operation
(Can’t be
changed dur-
ing opera-
tion.)
314
PLC Setup Section 7-1
7-1-2-9 Set Time to All Events (Fixed Peripheral Servicing Time)
Enable Fixed Servicing Time
Fixed Servicing Time
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+218 15 0: Default*
1: Bits 0 to 7
Default: 0
Set to 1 to enable the fixed peripheral ser-
vicing time in bits 0 to 7.
*Default: 4% of the cycle time
--- At start of
operation
(Can’t be
changed dur-
ing opera-
tion.)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
When set-
ting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bit(s)
+218 0 to 7 00 to FF:
0.0 to 25.5 ms
(0.1-ms units)
Default: 00
Set the peripheral servicing time.
This setting is valid only when bit 15 of 218
is set to 1.
--- At start of
operation
(Can’t be
changed dur-
ing opera-
tion.)
315
PLC Setup Section 7-1
7-1-2-10 FINS Protection Tab Page (Protection Against FINS Writes Across
Networks) (CJ-series CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Only)
Enabling FINS Write Protection (Use FINS Write Protection)
Nodes Excluded from Write Protection (Protection Releasing Addresses)
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
New set-
ting’s effec-
tiveness
Word Bit(s)
+448 15 0: Disable FINS
write protection
1: Enable FINS write
protection
Default: 0
Enables or disables write protection for the
CPU Unit from FINS command sent over a
network (i.e., all connections except for
serial connections).
--- At any time
Programming
Console address
Settings Function Related
flags and
words
New set-
ting’s effec-
tiveness
Word Bit(s)
Set the nodes and networks from which FINS write operations will be enabled. The total number of nodes set to be
excluded from write protection will be automatically set.
A maximum of 32 nodes can be set. If these settings are not made (i.e., if the total number of nodes is 0), write operations
will be disabled for all nodes but the local node.
Note: This setting is valid only when FINS write protection has been enabled.
+449 to
480
8 to 15 0 to 127
(00 to 7F hex)
FINS command source network address --- At any time
0 to 7 1 to 255
(01 to FE hex)
Note: 255 (FF hex)
can be set to include
all nodes in the
specified network.
FINS command source node address ---
+448 0 to 7 0 to 32
(00 to 20 hex)
Number of nodes excluded from protection
(Automatically calculated by the CX-Pro-
grammer; do not set.)
---
316
PLC Setup Section 7-1
7-1-2-11 Built-in Inputs
The following tables show the CX-Programmer's settings. These settings are
for CJ1M CPU Units equipped with the built-in I/O functions.
Note In the CX-Programmer version 3.1 or lower, the Tab Page's name is Built-in
I/O Settings.
High-speed Counter 0 Operation Settings
High-speed Counter 0 Enable/Disable
High-speed Counter 0 Pulse Input Setting (Pulse Input Mode)
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+50 12 to 15 0 hex: Don’t Use
Counter.
1 hex*:
Use Counter
(60 kHz).
2 hex*:
Use Counter
(100 kHz).
0 hex Specifies whether or not high-speed
counter 0 is being used.
Note When high-speed counter 0 is
enabled (setting 1 or 2), the
input operation settings for
IN8 and IN9 are disabled. The
input operation setting for IN3
is also disabled if the reset
method is set to Phase-Z sig-
nal + software reset.
--- When power is
turned ON
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+50 00 to 03 0 hex: Differential
phase inputs
1 hex: Pulse +
direction inputs
2 hex: Up/Down
inputs
3 hex: Increment
pulse input
0 hex Specifies the pulse-input method for
high-speed counter 0.
--- When power is
turned ON
317
PLC Setup Section 7-1
High-speed Counter 0 Reset Method
High-speed Counter 0 Counting Mode
High-speed Counter 0 Circular Max. Count (Ring Counter Maximum Value)
Note When the CX-Programmer is being used to make the setting, the setting is
input in decimal.
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+50 04 to 07 0 hex: Z phase,
software reset
(stop comparing)
1 hex: Software
reset (stop com-
paring)
2 hex: Z phase,
software reset
(continue com-
paring)
3 hex: Software
reset (continue
comparing)
0 hex Specifies the reset method for high-
speed counter 0.
--- When power is
turned ON
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+50 08 to 11 0 hex:
Linear mode
1 hex:
Ring mode
0 hex Specifies the counting mode for high-
speed counter 0.
--- When operation
starts
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+51 00 to 15 00000000 to
FFFFFFFF hex
(See note.)
00000000
hex Sets the max. ring count for high-
speed counter 0.
When the high-speed counter 0
counting mode is set to ring mode,
the count will be reset to 0 automati-
cally when the counter PV exceeds
the max. ring count.
A270
(Rightmost 4
digits of the
high-speed
counter 0
PV)
When operation
starts
+52 00 to 15 A271
(Leftmost 4
digits of the
high-speed
counter 0
PV)
318
PLC Setup Section 7-1
High-speed Counter 1 Operation Settings
High-speed Counter 1 Enable/Disable
High-speed Counter 1 Pulse Input Setting (Pulse Input Mode)
High-speed Counter 1 Reset Method
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+53 12 to 15 0 hex: Don’t Use
Counter.
1 hex*:
Use Counter
(60 kHz).
2 hex*:
Use Counter
(100 kHz).
0 hex Specifies whether or not high-speed
counter 1 is being used.
Note When high-speed counter 1 is
enabled (setting 1 or 2), the
input operation settings for
IN6 and IN7 are disabled. The
input operation setting for IN2
is also disabled if the reset
method is set to Phase-Z sig-
nal + software reset.
--- When power is
turned ON
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+53 00 to 03 0 hex: Differential
phase inputs
1 hex: Pulse +
direction inputs
2 hex: Up/Down
inputs
3 hex: Increment
pulse input
0 hex Specifies the pulse-input method for
high-speed counter 1.
--- When power is
turned ON
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+53 04 to 07 0 hex: Z phase,
software reset
(stop comparing)
1 hex: Software
reset (stop com-
paring)
2 hex: Z phase,
software reset
(continue com-
paring)
3 hex: Software
reset (continue
comparing)
0 hex Specifies the reset method for high-
speed counter 1.
--- When power is
turned ON
319
PLC Setup Section 7-1
High-speed Counter 1 Counting Mode
High-speed Counter 1 Circular Max. Count (Ring Counter Maximum Value)
Note When the CX-Programmer is being used to make the setting, the setting is
input in decimal.
Input Operation Settings for Built-in Inputs IN0 to IN3
Input Operation Setting for IN0
Note When IN0 is set as an interrupt input (1 hex), use the MSKS(690) instruction
to select direct mode or counter mode operation.
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+53 08 to 11 0 hex:
Linear mode
1 hex:
Ring mode
0 hex Specifies the counting mode for high-
speed counter 1.
--- When operation
starts
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+54 00 to 15 00000000 to
FFFFFFFF hex
(See note.)
00000000
hex Sets the max. ring count for high-
speed counter 1.
When the high-speed counter 1
counting mode is set to ring mode,
the count will be reset to 0 automati-
cally when the counter PV exceeds
the max. ring count.
A272
(Rightmost 4
digits of the
high-speed
counter 1
PV)
When operation
starts
+55 00 to 15 A273
(Leftmost 4
digits of the
high-speed
counter 1
PV)
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+60 00 to 03 0 hex:
Normal (General-
purpose input)
1 hex:
Interrupt (Inter-
rupt input) (See
note.)
2 hex:
Quick (Quick-
response input)
0 hex Specifies the kind of input that is
being received at built-in input IN0.
--- When power is
turned ON
320
PLC Setup Section 7-1
Input Operation Setting for IN1
Note When IN1 is set as an interrupt input (1 hex), use the MSKS(690) instruction
to select direct mode or counter mode operation.
Input Operation Setting for IN2
Note When IN2 is set as an interrupt input (1 hex), use the MSKS(690) instruction
to select direct mode or counter mode operation.
Input Operation Setting for IN3
Note When IN3 is set as an interrupt input (1 hex), use the MSKS(690) instruction
to select direct mode or counter mode operation.
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+60 04 to 07 0 hex:
Normal (General-
purpose input)
1 hex:
Interrupt (Inter-
rupt input) (See
note.)
2 hex:
Quick (Quick-
response input)
0 hex Specifies the kind of input that is
being received at built-in input IN1.
--- When power is
turned ON
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+60 08 to 11 0 hex:
Normal (General-
purpose input)
1 hex:
Interrupt (Inter-
rupt input) (See
note.)
2 hex:
Quick (Quick-
response input)
0 hex Specifies the kind of input that is
being received at built-in input IN2.
Note The input operation setting for
IN2 is disabled when high-
speed counter 1 is being used
and the reset method is set to
Phase-Z signal + software
reset.
--- When power is
turned ON
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+60 12 to 15 0 hex:
Normal (General-
purpose input)
1 hex:
Interrupt (Inter-
rupt input) (See
note.)
2 hex:
Quick (Quick-
response input)
0 hex Specifies the kind of input that is
being received at built-in input IN3
Note The input operation setting for
IN3 is disabled when high-
speed counter 0 is being used
and the reset method is set to
Phase-Z signal + software
reset.
--- When power is
turned ON
321
PLC Setup Section 7-1
Input Time Constant Setting for the General-purpose Inputs
7-1-2-12 Origin Search Function
The following tables show the settings for the origin search function in the CX-
Programmer. These settings are for CJ1M CPU Units equipped with the built-
in I/O functions.
Note In the CX-Programmer version 3.1 or lower, the Tab Page's name is Define
Origin Operation Settings Field of Define Origin.
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+61 00 to 07 00 hex: Default
(8 ms)
10 hex: 0 ms
(no filter)
11 hex: 0.5 ms
12 hex: 1 ms
13 hex: 2 ms
14 hex: 4 ms
15 hex: 8 ms
16 hex: 16 ms
17 hex: 32 ms
0 hex Specifies the input time constant for
general-purpose inputs IN0 to IN9.
Note This setting has no effect on
inputs set as interrupt inputs,
quick-response inputs, or
high-speed counters.
--- When operation
starts
322
PLC Setup Section 7-1
Pulse Output 0 Settings
Pulse Output 0 Use Origin Operation Settings (Origin Search Function Enable/Disable)
Pulse Output 0 Limit Input Signal Operation (CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Only)
Pulse Output 0 Speed Curve (CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Only)
Pulse Output 0 Origin Search Operating Mode
Pulse Output 0 Origin Search Operation Setting
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+256 00 to 03 0 hex: Disabled
1 hex*: Enabled
0 hex Specifies whether or not the origin
search function is used for pulse out-
put 0.
Note Interrupt inputs 0 and 1 and
PWM(891) output 0 cannot be
used when the origin search
function is enabled (setting 1)
for pulse output 0. High-speed
counters 0 and 1 can be used.
--- When power is
turned ON
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+256 04 to 07 0 hex: Search
only
1 hex: Always
0 hex Specifies whether to use the CW/
CCW limit input signals (reflected in
A54008, A54009, A54108, and
A54109) only for origin searches or
for all pulse output functions.
--- When power is
turned ON
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+256 12 to 15 0 hex: Trapezium
(linear)
1 hex: S-shaped
0 hex Specifies whether to use S-curve or
linear acceleration/deceleration rates
for pulse outputs with acceleration/
deceleration.
--- When power is
turned ON
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+257 00 to 03 0 hex: Mode 0
1 hex: Mode 1
2 hex: Mode 2
0 hex Specifies the origin search mode for
pulse output 0.
--- When operation
starts
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+257 04 to 07 0 hex:
Inverse 1 (Rever-
sal mode 1)
1 hex:
Inverse 2 (Rever-
sal mode 2)
0 hex Specifies the origin search operation
for pulse output 0.
--- When operation
starts
323
PLC Setup Section 7-1
Pulse Output 0 Origin Detection Method
Pulse Output 0 Origin Search Direction Setting
Pulse Output 0 Origin Search/Return Initial Speed
Note When the CX-Programmer is being used to make the setting, the setting is
input in decimal.
Pulse Output 0 Origin Search High Speed
Note When the CX-Programmer is being used to make the setting, the setting is
input in decimal.
Pulse Output 0 Origin Search Proximity Speed
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+257 08 to 11 0 hex: Method 0
(Origin detection
method 0)
1 hex: Method 1
(Origin detection
method 1)
2 hex: Method 2
(Origin detection
method 2)
0 hex Specifies the origin detection method
for pulse output 0.
--- When operation
starts
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+257 12 to 15 0 hex: CW direc-
tion
1 hex: CCW
direction
0 hex Specifies the origin search direction
for pulse output 0.
--- When operation
starts
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+258 00 to 15 00000000 to
000186A0 hex
(See note.)
00000000
hex Specifies the starting speed (0 to
100,000 pps) for the pulse output 0
origin search and origin return opera-
tions.
--- When operation
starts
+259 00 to 15
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+260 00 to 15 00000001 to
000186A0 hex
(See note.)
00000000
hex Specifies the high speed setting (1 to
100,000 pps) for pulse output 0 origin
search operation.
--- When operation
starts
+261 00 to 15
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+262 00 to 15 00000001 to
000186A0 hex
(See note.)
00000000
hex Specifies the proximity speed setting
(1 to 100,000 pps) for pulse output 0
origin search operation.
When operation
starts
+263 00 to 15
324
PLC Setup Section 7-1
Note When the CX-Programmer is being used to make the setting, the setting is
input in decimal.
Pulse Output 0 Search Compensation Value (Origin Compensation)
Note When the CX-Programmer is being used to make the setting, the setting is
input in decimal.
Pulse Output 0 Origin Search Acceleration Rate
Note When the CX-Programmer is being used to make the setting, the setting is
input in decimal.
Pulse Output 0 Origin Search Deceleration Rate
Note When the CX-Programmer is being used to make the setting, the setting is
input in decimal.
Pulse Output 0 Limit Input Signal Type
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+264 00 to 15 80000000 to
7FFFFFFF hex
(See note.)
--- Sets the pulse output 0 origin com-
pensation (−2,147,483,648 to
2,147,483,647).
--- When operation
starts
+265 00 to 15
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+266 00 to 15 Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU
Units: 0001 to
07D0 hex
CPU Units Ver.
2.0: 0001 to FFFF
hex
(See note.)
--- Sets the origin search acceleration
rate for pulse output 0.
Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units:
1 to 2,000 pulses/4 ms
CPU Units Ver. 2.0:
1 to 65,535 pulses/4 ms
--- When operation
starts
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+267 00 to 15 Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU
Units: 0001 to
07D0 hex
CPU Units Ver.
2.0: 0001 to FFFF
hex
(See note.)
--- Sets the origin search deceleration
rate for pulse output 0.
Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units:
1 to 2,000 pulses/4 ms
CPU Units Ver. 2.0:
1 to 65,535 pulses/4 ms
--- When operation
starts
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+268 00 to 03 0 hex: NC
1 hex: NO
0 hex Specifies whether the limit input sig-
nal for pulse output 0 is normally
closed or normally open.
--- When operation
starts
325
PLC Setup Section 7-1
Pulse Output 0 Origin Proximity Input Signal Type
Pulse Output 0 Origin Input Signal Type
Pulse Output 0 Undefine Origin Setting (CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Only)
Pulse Output 0 Positioning Monitor Time
Note When the CX-Programmer is being used to make the setting, the setting is
input in decimal.
7-1-2-13 Pulse Output 1 Settings
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+268 04 to 07 0 hex: NC
1 hex: NO
0 hex Specifies whether the Origin Proxim-
ity Input Signal for pulse output 0 is
normally closed or normally open.
--- When operation
starts
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+268 08 to 11 0 hex: NC
1 hex: NO
0 hex Specifies whether the Origin Input
Signal for pulse output 0 is normally
closed or normally open.
--- When operation
starts
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+268 12 to 15 0 hex: Hold
1 hex: Undefine
0 hex Specifies whether to hold the origin
setting when the CW/CCW limit input
signal is input during execution of an
origin search or pulse output function.
--- When operation
starts
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+269 00 to 15 0000 to 270F hex
(See note.)
0000
hex
Specifies the positioning monitor time
(0 to 9,999 ms) for pulse output 0.
--- When operation
starts
326
PLC Setup Section 7-1
Note In the CX-Programmer version 3.1 or lower, the Tab Page's name is Define
Origin Operation Settings Field of Define Origin 2.
Pulse Output 1 Use Origin Operation Settings (Origin Search Function Enable/Disable)
Pulse Output 1 Limit Input Signal Operation (CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Only)
Pulse Output 1 Speed Curve (CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Only)
Pulse Output 1 Origin Search Operating Mode
Pulse Output 1 Origin Search Operation Setting
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+274 00 to 03 0 hex: Disabled
1 hex*: Enabled
0 hex Specifies whether or not the origin
search function is used for pulse out-
put 1.
Note Interrupt inputs 2 and 3 and
PWM(891) output 1 cannot be
used when the origin search
function is enabled (setting 1)
for pulse output 1. High-speed
counters 0 and 1 can be used.
--- When power is
turned ON
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+274 04 to 07 0 hex: Search
only
1 hex: Always
0 hex Specifies whether to use the CW/
CCW limit input signals (reflected in
A54008, A54009, A54108, and
A54109) only for origin searches or
for all pulse output functions.
--- When power is
turned ON
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+274 12 to 15 0 hex: Trapezium
(linear)
1 hex: S-shaped
0 hex Specifies whether to use S-curve or
linear acceleration/deceleration rates
for pulse outputs with acceleration/
deceleration.
--- When power is
turned ON
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+275 00 to 03 0 hex: Mode 0
1 hex: Mode 1
2 hex: Mode 2
0 hex Specifies the origin search mode for
pulse output 1.
--- When operation
starts
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+275 04 to 07 0 hex:
Inverse 1 (Rever-
sal mode 1)
1 hex:
Inverse 2 (Rever-
sal mode 2)
0 hex Specifies the origin search operation
for pulse output 1.
--- When operation
starts
327
PLC Setup Section 7-1
Pulse Output 1 Origin Detection Method
Pulse Output 1 Origin Search Direction Setting
Pulse Output 1 Origin Search/Return Initial Speed
Note When the CX-Programmer is being used to make the setting, the setting is
input in decimal.
Pulse Output 1 Origin Search High Speed
Note When the CX-Programmer is being used to make the setting, the setting is
input in decimal.
Pulse Output 1 Origin Search Proximity Speed
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+275 08 to 11 0 hex: Method 0
(Origin detection
method 0)
1 hex: Method 1
(Origin detection
method 1)
2 hex: Method 2
(Origin detection
method 2)
0 hex Specifies the origin detection method
for pulse output 1.
--- When operation
starts
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+275 12 to 15 0 hex: CW direc-
tion
1 hex: CCW
direction
0 hex Specifies the origin search direction
for pulse output 1.
--- When operation
starts
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+276 00 to 15 00000000 to
000186A0 hex
(See note.)
00000000
hex Specifies the starting speed (0 to
100,000 pps) for the pulse output 1
origin search and origin return opera-
tions.
--- When operation
starts
+277 00 to 15
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+278 00 to 15 00000001 to
000186A0 hex
(See note.)
000000
01 hex
Specifies the high speed setting (1 to
100,000 pps) for pulse output 1 origin
search operation.
--- When operation
starts
+279 00 to 15
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+280 00 to 15 00000001 to
000186A0 hex
(See note.)
000000
00 hex
Specifies the proximity speed setting
(1 to 100,000 pps) for pulse output 1
origin search operation.
--- When operation
starts
+281 00 to 15
328
PLC Setup Section 7-1
Note When the CX-Programmer is being used to make the setting, the setting is
input in decimal.
Pulse Output 1 Search Compensation Value 1 (Origin Compensation)
Note When the CX-Programmer is being used to make the setting, the setting is
input in decimal.
Pulse Output 1 Origin Search Acceleration Rate
Note When the CX-Programmer is being used to make the setting, the setting is
input in decimal.
Pulse Output 1 Origin Search Deceleration Rate
Note When the CX-Programmer is being used to make the setting, the setting is
input in decimal.
Pulse Output 1 Limit Input Signal Type
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+282 00 to 15 80000000 to
7FFFFFFF hex
(See note.)
--- Sets the pulse output 1 origin com-
pensation (−2,147,483,648 to
2,147,483,647).
--- When operation
starts
+283 00 to 15
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+284 00 to 15 Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU
Units: 0001 to
07D0 hex
CPU Units Ver.
2.0: 0001 to FFFF
hex
(See note.)
--- Sets the origin search acceleration
rate for pulse output 0.
Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units:
1 to 2,000 pulses/4 ms
CPU Units Ver. 2.0:
1 to 65,535 pulses/4 ms
--- When operation
starts
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+285 00 to 15 Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU
Units: 0001 to
07D0 hex
CPU Units Ver.
2.0: 0001 to FFFF
hex
(See note.)
--- Sets the origin search deceleration
rate for pulse output 0.
Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units:
1 to 2,000 pulses/4 ms
CPU Units Ver. 2.0:
1 to 65,535 pulses/4 ms
--- When operation
starts
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+286 00 to 03 0 hex: NC
1 hex: NO
0 hex Specifies whether the limit input sig-
nal for pulse output 1 is normally
closed or normally open.
--- When operation
starts
329
PLC Setup Section 7-1
Pulse Output 1 Origin Proximity Input Signal Type
Pulse Output 1 Origin Input Signal Type
Pulse Output 1 Undefine Origin Setting (CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 Only)
Pulse Output 1 Positioning Monitor Time
Note When the CX-Programmer is being used to make the setting, the setting is
input in decimal.
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+286 04 to 07 0 hex: NC
1 hex: NO
0 hex Specifies whether the Origin Proxim-
ity Input Signal for pulse output 1 is
normally closed or normally open.
--- When operation
starts
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+286 08 to 11 0 hex: NC
1 hex: NO
0 hex Specifies whether the Origin Input
Signal for pulse output 1 is normally
closed or normally open.
--- When operation
starts
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+286 12 to 15 0 hex: Hold
1 hex: Undefine
0 hex Specifies whether to hold the origin
setting when the CW/CCW limit input
signal is input during execution of an
origin search or pulse output function.
--- When operation
starts
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+287 00 to 15 0000 to 270F hex
(See note.)
0000
hex
Specifies the positioning monitor time
(0 to 9,999 ms) for pulse output 1.
--- When operation
starts
330
PLC Setup Section 7-1
7-1-2-14 Origin Return Function
The following tables show the settings for the origin return function in the CX-
Programmer. These settings are for CJ1M CPU Units equipped with the built-
in I/O functions.
Pulse Output 0 Settings
Note CX-Programmer Tabs
CX-Programmer Ver. 3.1 or lower: Define Origin Operation Settings Field of
Define Origin 1
CX-Programmer Ver. 3.2 or higher: Pulse Output 0
Pulse Output 0 Origin Search/Return Initial Speed
Note When the CX-Programmer is being used to make the setting, the setting is
input in decimal.
Speed (Target Speed for Pulse Output 0 Origin Return)
Note When the CX-Programmer is being used to make the setting, the setting is
input in decimal.
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+258 00 to 15 00000000 to
000186A0 hex
(See note.)
00000000
hex Specifies the starting speed (0 to
100,000 pps) for the pulse output 0
origin search and origin return opera-
tions.
--- When operation
starts
+259 00 to 15
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+270 00 to 15 00000001 to
000186A0 hex
(See note.)
00000000
hex Specifies the target speed (1 to
100,000 pps) for pulse output 0 origin
return operation.
--- When operation
starts
+271 00 to 15
331
PLC Setup Section 7-1
Acceleration Rate (Pulse Output 0 Origin Return Acceleration Rate)
Note When the CX-Programmer is being used to make the setting, the setting is
input in decimal.
Deceleration Rate (Pulse Output 0 Origin Return Deceleration Rate)
Note When the CX-Programmer is being used to make the setting, the setting is
input in decimal.
Pulse Output 1 Settings
Note CX-Programmer Tabs
CX-Programmer Ver. 3.1 or lower: Define Origin Operation Settings Field of
Define Origin 2
CX-Programmer Ver. 3.2 or higher: Pulse Output 1
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+272 00 to 15 Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU
Units: 0001 to
07D0 hex
CPU Units Ver.
2.0: 0001 to FFFF
hex
(See note.)
0000
hex
Sets the origin search acceleration
rate for pulse output 0.
Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units:
1 to 2,000 pulses/4 ms
CPU Units Ver. 2.0:
1 to 65,535 pulses/4 ms
--- When operation
starts
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+273 00 to 15 Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU
Units: 0001 to
07D0 hex
CPU Units Ver.
2.0: 0001 to FFFF
hex
(See note.)
0000
hex
Sets the origin search deceleration
rate for pulse output 0.
Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units:
1 to 2,000 pulses/4 ms
CPU Units Ver. 2.0:
1 to 65,535 pulses/4 ms
--- When operation
starts
332
PLC Setup Section 7-1
Pulse Output 1 Origin Search/Return Initial Speed
Note When the CX-Programmer is being used to make the setting, the setting is
input in decimal.
Speed (Target Speed for Pulse Output 1 Origin Return)
Note When the CX-Programmer is being used to make the setting, the setting is
input in decimal.
Acceleration Rate (Pulse Output 1 Origin Return Acceleration Rate)
Note When the CX-Programmer is being used to make the setting, the setting is
input in decimal.
Deceleration (Pulse Output 1 Origin Return Deceleration Rate)
Note When the CX-Programmer is being used to make the setting, the setting is
input in decimal.
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+276 00 to 15 00000000 to
000186A0 hex
(See note.)
00000000
hex Specifies the starting speed (0 to
100,000 pps) for the pulse output 1
origin search and origin return opera-
tions.
--- When operation
starts
+277 00 to 15
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+288 00 to 15 00000001 to
000186A0 hex
(See note.)
00000000
hex Specifies the target speed (1 to
100,000 pps) for pulse output 1 origin
return operation.
--- When operation
starts
+289 00 to 15
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+290 00 to 15 Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU
Units: 0001 to
07D0 hex
CPU Units Ver.
2.0: 0001 to FFFF
hex
(See note.)
0000
hex
Sets the origin search acceleration
rate for pulse output 0.
Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units:
1 to 2,000 pulses/4 ms
CPU Units Ver. 2.0:
1 to 65,535 pulses/4 ms
--- When operation
starts
Programming
Console
address
Settings Default Function Related
Auxiliary
Area flags/
bits
Time when
setting is read
by CPU Unit
Word Bits
+291 00 to 15 Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU
Units: 0001 to
07D0 hex
CPU Units Ver.
2.0: 0001 to FFFF
hex
(See note.)
0000
hex
Sets the origin search deceleration
rate for pulse output 0.
Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units:
1 to 2,000 pulses/4 ms
CPU Units Ver. 2.0:
1 to 65,535 pulses/4 ms
--- When operation
starts
333
Explanations of PLC Setup Settings Section 7-2
7-2 Explanations of PLC Setup Settings
Basic I/O Unit Input
Response Time
The input response time can be set for Basic I/O Units by Rack and Slot num-
ber. Increasing this value reduces the effects of chattering and noise.
Decreasing this value allows reception of shorter input pulses, (but do not set
the ON response time or OFF response time to less than the cycle time).
The default setting for the input response time is 8 ms and the setting range is
0 to 32 ms. When the input response time is set to 0 ms, the only delay will be
the delays in the Unit’s internal elements. For information on the Unit’s internal
elements, refer to Appendix A Specifications of Basic I/O Units and check the
input response time for the Unit that you are using.
The input response time settings are transferred to the Basic I/O Units when
the PLC is turned ON.
When the Unit’s settings are changed, they are stored in A220 to A259 (Actual
Input Response Times for Basic I/O Units). When the settings in the PLC
Setup have been changed with the PLC in PROGRAM mode, the PLC Setup
settings will differ from the actual settings in the Units. In this case, the values
in A220 to A259 can be checked to see the input response times actually set
in the Units.
IOM Hold Bit Status at
Startup
The IOM Hold Bit (A50012) can be turned ON to retain all of the data in I/O
Memory when the CPU Unit’s operating mode is switched between PRO-
GRAM mode and RUN/MONITOR mode. When the PLC is turned on, the
IOM Hold Bit itself will be cleared (OFF) unless it is protected with this PLC
Setup setting.
If the IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup setting is ON, the status of the IOM Hold
Bit will be protected when the PLC is turned on. If this setting is ON and the
IOM Hold BIt itself is ON, all data in I/O memory will be retained when the
PLC is turned ON.
Note If the backup battery fails or is disconnected, the IOM Hold Bit will be cleared
whether this setting is ON or OFF.
Input such as a
proximity switch
Pulses shorter than the input
response time are not received.
Input bit
Input response time Input response time
334
Explanations of PLC Setup Settings Section 7-2
Forced Status Hold Bit at
Startup
The Forced Status Hold Bit (A50013) can be turned ON to retain the forced
status of all bits that have been force-set or force-reset when the CPU Unit’s
operating mode is switched between PROGRAM mode and RUN/MONITOR
mode. When the PLC is turned on, the Forced Status Hold Bit itself will be
cleared (OFF) unless it is protected with this PLC Setup setting.
If the Forced Status Hold Bit at Startup setting is ON, the status of the Forced
Status Hold Bit will be protected when the PLC is turned on. If this setting is
ON and the Forced Status Hold BIt itself is ON, all force-set and force-reset
bits will retain their forced status when the PLC is turned on.
OFF (0): IOM Hold Bit cleared at start-up
Non-retained parts
of I/O memory
Non-retained parts
of I/O memory:
Cleared
Power
OFF
Power
ON
Power
OFF
Power
ON
Mode switch Retained Power on Not retained
IOM Hold Bit: 1
(ON)
IOM Hold Bit: 0
(OFF)
Not retained when
power is turned ON.
Non-retained parts
of I/O memory
Non-retained parts
of I/O memory:
Retained
Power on Retained
RetainedMode switch
IOM Hold Bit: 1
(ON)
IOM Hold Bit: 1
(ON)
Retained when
power is turned ON.
ON (1): IOM Hold Bit protected at start-up
335
Explanations of PLC Setup Settings Section 7-2
Note If the backup battery fails or is disconnected, the Forced Status Hold Bit will
be cleared whether this setting is ON or OFF.
Startup Mode Setting This setting determines whether the startup mode will be the mode set on the
Programming Console’s mode switch or the mode set here in the PLC Setup.
Note If this setting specifies the mode set on the Programming Console’s mode
switch (0) but a Programming Console isn’t connected, the CPU Unit will auto-
matically enter RUN mode at startup. (This differs from the default operation
for CS-series CPU Units.)
Note If a Programming Console is not connected when the PLC Setup is set to use
the mode set on the Programming Console’s mode switch, the CPU Unit will
start in RUN mode.
OFF (0): Forced Status Hold Bit cleared at start-up
Power
OFF
Power
OFF
Power
ON
Power
ON
Forced bit status Forced bit status
Forced Status
Hold Bit: 1 (ON)
Forced Status
Hold Bit: 0 (OFF)
Not retained
when power is
turned ON.
ON (1): Forced Status Hold Bit protected at start-up
Forced bit status Forced bit status
Mode switch Retained Power ON Retained
Power ON Not retained
Retained when
power is turned
ON.
Mode switch Retained
Forced Status
Hold Bit: 1 (ON)
Forced Status
Hold Bit: 1 (ON)
RUN mode when
disconnected.
PRCN: Programming Console's mode switch
Other: PC Setup's Startup Mode setting
Mode switch
setting
Power ON Power ON
Power ON
PRG: PROGRAM mode
MON: MONITOR mode
RUN: RUN mode
336
Explanations of PLC Setup Settings Section 7-2
Detect Low Battery This setting determines whether CPU Unit battery errors are detected. Set the
PLC Setup so that battery errors are not detected when using battery-free
operation. Refer to the CS/CJ Series Programming Manual for details.
If this setting is set to detect errors (0) and a battery error is detected, the Bat-
tery Error Flag (A40204) will be turned ON.
Note 1. The contents of the DM, EM, and HR Areas in the CPU Unit are not backed
up to flash memory; they are backed up only by a Battery. If the Battery
voltage drops, this data may be lost. Provide countermeasures in the pro-
gram using the Battery Error Flag (A40204) to re-initialize data or take oth-
er actions if the Battery voltage drops
2. A battery error will be detected when the battery is disconnected or its volt-
age drops below the minimum allowed.
Detect Interrupt Task Error If this setting is set to detect errors (0), an interrupt task error will be detected
in the following cases:
• IORF(097) or FIORF(225) (CJ1-H-R CPU Units only) is executed in an
interrupt task to refresh a Special I/O Unit’s I/O while that Unit’s I/O is
being refreshed during cyclic refreshing.
EM File Memory Settings
(CJ1 and CJ1-H CPU Units
Only)
These settings are used to convert part of the EM Area to file memory.
Programming Console
The specified EM bank and all subsequent banks will be set aside as file
memory. Changing these settings using the Programming Console does not
format the specified EM banks; the EM banks must be formatted with a Pro-
gramming Device after changing these PLC Setup settings. When formatting
the EM banks with a Programming Console, refer to 7-2 Memory Card Format
in the Programming Console Operation Manual (W341).
CX-Programmer
With the CX-Programmer, file memory will be formatted when file memory
conversion and the number of banks to be converted is specified when trans-
ferring the PLC Setup. (EM banks cannot be formatted as file memory unless
they have been specified as file memory in the PLC Setup.)
Once part of the EM Area has been formatted for use as file memory, it can be
converted back to normal EM Area usage by changing these PLC Setup set-
tings back to their previous value and “un-formatting” the EM banks with a
Programming Device.
Note 1. The actual starting file memory bank is stored in A344 (EM File Memory
Starting Bank). When the settings in the PLC Setup have been changed
but the EM Area hasn’t been formatted, the PLC Setup setting will differ
from the actual file memory setting in the EM Area. In this case, the values
in A344 can be checked to see the actual file memory setting.
2. The EM Area cannot be formatted if the current EM bank is one of the
banks that is being converted to file memory.
Backup
Disconnected or
voltage too low
Battery Error
Flag (A40204)
ON
337
Explanations of PLC Setup Settings Section 7-2
The following example shows EM bank 2 converted to file memory.
Peripheral Port Settings These settings are effective only when pin 4 of the DIP switch on the front of
the CPU Unit is ON.
The default settings for the peripheral port are: host link mode, 1 start bit, 7
data bits, even parity, 2 stop bits, and a baud rate of 9,600 bps. Set the periph-
eral port settings in the PLC Setup when you need to change these settings.
Note When pin 4 of the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit is OFF, the CPU
Unit automatically detects the communications parameters of a connected
Programming Device (including Programming Consoles). Those automatically
detected parameters are not stored in the PLC Setup.
RS-232C Port Settings These settings are effective only when pin 5 of the DIP switch on the front of
the CPU Unit is OFF.
The default settings for the RS-232C port are: host link mode, 1 start bit, 7
data bits, even parity, 2 stop bits, and a baud rate of 9,600 bps. Set the RS-
232C port settings in the PLC Setup when you need to change these settings.
Specify the frame format when no-protocol mode is selected.
The RS-232C port settings can also be changed with STUP(237). The RS-
232C Port Settings Changing Flag (A61902) is turned ON when STUP(237) is
executed and it is turned OFF when the RS-232C port settings have been
changed.
↓
→
Converted EM file memory
EM Starting Bank setting: 2
Bank 0
Bank 1
Bank 2
EM File Memory setting: 1
(EM file memory enabled)
CONTROLLER
CJ1G-CPU44
SYSMAC
PROGRAMMABLE
ERR/ALM
RUN
COMM
INH
PRPHL
OPEN
PERIPHERAL
BUSY
MCPWR
PORT
←ON
4
Peripheral port communications settings when DIP
Switch pin 4 is ON:
Default settings:
Host link mode, 1 start bit, 7 data bits, even parity,
2 stop bits, and a baud rate of 9,600 bps
User-defined settings:
Set the communications mode (host link, NT Link,
or peripheral bus) and other settings such as the
baud rate.
338
Explanations of PLC Setup Settings Section 7-2
Note When pin 5 of the DIP switch on the front of the CPU Unit is ON, the CPU Unit
automatically detects the communications parameters of a Programming
Device (including Programming Consoles) connected to the RS-232C port.
Those automatically detected parameters are not stored in the PLC Setup.
Note 1. A no-protocol transmission delay (address 162) can be set in no-protocol
mode. The operation of this delay is shown in the following diagram.
2. The following table shows the message formats that can be set for trans-
missions and receptions in no-protocol mode. The format is determined by
the start code (ST) and end code (ED) settings. (From 1 to 256 bytes can
be received in no-protocol mode.)
←ON
5
CONTROLLER
CJ1G-CPU44
SYSMAC
PROGRAMMABLE
ERR/ALM
RUN
COMM
INH
PRPHL
OPEN
PERIPHERAL
BUSY
MCPWR
PORT
RS-232C port communications settings when DIP switch
pin 5 is OFF:
Default settings:
Host link mode, 1 start bit, 7 data bits, even parity,
2 stop bits, and a baud rate of 9,600 bps
User-defined settings:
Set the communications mode (host link, NT Link,
no-protocol*, or peripheral bus) and other settings
such as the baud rate.
*See notes 1 and 2 for details on no-protocol mode.
Start code setting End code setting
None Yes CR+LF
None DATA DATA+ED DATA+CR+LF
Yes ST+DATA ST+DATA+ED ST+DATA+CR+LF
TXD(236)
No-protocol delay Delay
Transmission Time
339
Explanations of PLC Setup Settings Section 7-2
Scheduled Interrupt Time
Units
This setting determines the time units for the scheduled interrupt interval set-
tings. Set the scheduled interrupt interval from the program with MSKS(690).
Note This setting cannot be changed while the CPU Unit is in RUN or MONITOR
mode.
Instruction Error
Operation
This setting determines whether instruction execution errors are treated as
non-fatal (0) or fatal errors (1). A program error will be generated as an
instruction error if any of the following flags is turned ON.
If this setting is OFF (0), PLC operation will continue after one of these errors.
If this setting is ON (1), PLC operation will stop after one of these errors.
Minimum Cycle Time Set the minimum cycle time to a non-zero value to eliminate inconsistencies in
I/O responses. This setting is effective only when the actual cycle time is
shorter than the minimum cycle time setting. If the actual cycle time is longer
than the minimum cycle time setting, the actual cycle time will remain
unchanged.
Note The minimum cycle time setting cannot be changed while the CPU Unit is in
RUN or MONITOR mode. If the cycle time is increased, the peripheral device
servicing interval will be longer, slowing down the response to online editing
from peripheral devices or making it difficult to go online.
Scheduled Interrupt Time Units
Interval
Scheduled interrupt task
Instruction error flag Address Cause
Instruction Processing Error Flag A29508 The ER Flag was turned ON.
Indirect DM/EM BCD Error Flag A29509 The contents of a DM/EM word wasn’t
BCD when BCD was required for indi-
rect addressing.
Illegal Access Error Flag A29510 Attempted to access part of memory
that is off-limits from the program.
Fixed cycle time
340
Explanations of PLC Setup Settings Section 7-2
Watch Cycle Time If the cycle time exceeds the watch (maximum) cycle time setting, the Cycle
Time Too Long Flag (A40108) will be turned ON and PLC operation will be
stopped. This setting must be changed if the normal cycle time exceeds the
default watch cycle time setting of 1 s.
Note The watch cycle time setting cannot be changed while the CPU Unit is in RUN
or MONITOR mode.
Note The default value for the watch cycle time is 1 s (1,000 ms).
Fixed Peripheral Servicing
Time
This setting determines whether the peripheral servicing for the following pro-
cesses is performed with the default settings (4% of the cycle time) or all
together in a fixed servicing time.
Exchange data with Special I/O Units when necessary
Exchange data with CPU Bus Units when necessary
Exchange data with peripheral port
Exchange data with serial communications ports
Service file access operations (Memory Card)
Peripheral servicing is performed at the end of the cycle, just after I/O refresh-
ing.
Watch
Time
Watch Cycle
Time Watch Cycle
Time Watch Cycle
Time
Actual Cycle
Time
Actual Cycle
Time
Actual Cycle
Time
OVER
Cycle Time
Too Long Flag
A40108
CPU Unit operation is
stopped.
↓
Initialization
Power ON
Common processes
Program execution
(Tasks executed
in order)
I/O refreshing
Peripheral servicing
Cycle
time
341
Explanations of PLC Setup Settings Section 7-2
The following table shows a breakdown of the peripheral servicing time.
The default value for each servicing process is 4% of the last cycle’s cycle
time.
In general, it is recommended that the default value be used. Set a uniform
servicing time only when peripheral servicing is being delayed because each
service process is being spread over several cycles.
Note 1. When the peripheral servicing time is set to a time longer than the default
value, the cycle time will also be longer.
2. The fixed peripheral servicing time setting cannot be changed while the
CPU Unit is in RUN mode or MONITOR mode.
3. Use the Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode to give priority to servicing pe-
ripheral over program execution.
Power OFF Interrupt Task This setting determines whether or not a power OFF interrupt task will be exe-
cuted when a power interruption is detected. (When this setting is set to 0, the
regular program will just stop when a power interruption is detected.)
The power OFF interrupt task will be stopped when the power hold time (pro-
cessing time after power interrupt + power OFF detection delay time) has
elapsed. The maximum power hold time is 10 ms.
When a power OFF detection delay time has to be set, be sure that the power
OFF interrupt task can be executed in the available time (10 ms – power OFF
detection delay time).
Note The power OFF interrupt task setting cannot be changed while the CPU Unit
is in RUN mode or MONITOR mode. This setting is not supported when the
CJ1W-PD022 Power Supply Unit is mounted. (Refer to Power OFF Operation
on page 451.)
Power OFF Detection
Delay Time
This setting determines how much of a delay there will be from the detection
of a power interruption (approximately after the power supply voltage drops
below 85% of the rated value) until a power interruption is established and the
regular program is stopped. The setting can be between 0 and 10 ms.
It takes a maximum of 10 ms for the internal 5-V DC power supply to drop to
0 V DC after the initial power interrupt detection time. Extend the time until
detection of a power interruption when momentary interruptions in a bad
power supply are causing PLC operation to stop.
Peripheral servicing time Default value Setting range
Event service time for
Special I/O Units
4% of the previous
cycle’s cycle time
Uniform servicing time in ms:
0.0 to 25.5 ms in 0.1-ms units
Event service time for
CPU Bus Units
Same as above.
Event service time for
peripheral port
Same as above.
Event service time for
RS-232C port
Same as above.
File access service time for
Memory Card
Same as above.
342
Explanations of PLC Setup Settings Section 7-2
Note The power OFF detection delay time setting cannot be changed while the
CPU Unit is in RUN mode or MONITOR mode. This setting is not supported
when the CJ1W-PD022 Power Supply Unit is mounted. (Refer to Power OFF
Operation on page 451.)
Note The execution time for the power OFF interrupt task must be less than the
maximum time available, namely: 10 ms – power OFF detection delay time.
Refer to 10-3 Power OFF Operation for details on CPU Unit operation when
power is turned OFF.
Special I/O Unit Cyclic
Refreshing
When a Special I/O Unit will be refreshed in an interrupt task by IORF(097) or
FIORF(225) (CJ1-H-R CPU Units only) or data will be read from or written to a
Special I/O Unit in an interrupt task using IORD (222) or IOWR (223), always
disable cyclic refreshing for that Unit with this setting.
If cyclic refreshing is not disabled and either of the following processes is exe-
cuted in an interrupt task, a non-fatal error will occur and the Interrupt Task
Error Flag (A40213) will turn ON.
• I/O refreshing is executed using IORF(097) or FIORF(225) (CJ1-H-R
CPU Units only) for the same Special I/O Unit.
• Data is read or written to or from the memory area using IORD (222) or
IOWR(223) for the same Special I/O Unit.
Note Whenever disabling a Special I/O Unit's cyclic refreshing, be sure that the I/O
for that Unit is refreshed with IORF(097) or FIORF(225) (CJ1-H-R CPU Units
only) in the program at least every 11 seconds during operation. A CPU Unit
service monitoring error will occur in the Special I/O Unit if it is not refreshed
every 11 seconds.
100 V
85 V
Power Interrupt Detection Time
AC power supply: 10 to 25 ms
(not consistent)
Power interrupt
detection time
Power OFF
detection
delay time
0 to 10 ms
Regular program
Time
Power OFF
interrupt task Stop
Special I/O Unit CPU Unit
Special
I/O Unit
Area
These settings determine whether or not
data will be exchanged with the 10 words
allocated to each Special I/O Unit in the
Special I/O Unit Area during cyclic I/O
refreshing.
343
SECTION 8
I/O Allocations
This section describes I/O allocations to Basic I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units, and data exchange with
CPU Bus Units.
8-1 I/O Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
8-1-1 Unit Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
8-1-2 I/O Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
8-1-3 Precautions when Using Memory Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
8-2 Creating I/O Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
8-2-1 Creating, Editing, and Transferring I/O Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
8-2-2 Procedures for Registering I/O Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
8-3 Allocating First Words to Slots and Reserving Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
8-4 Allocating First Words to Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
8-5 Detailed Information on I/O Table Creation Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
8-6 Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
8-6-1 Special I/O Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
8-6-2 CPU Bus Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
344
I/O Allocations Section 8-1
8-1 I/O Allocations
With a CJ-series PLC, the CPU Unit can automatically allocate I/O words to
the Basic I/O Units that are started and start operation automatically when the
power supply is turned ON. Words will be allocated to Special I/O Units and
CPU Bus Units according to the unit numbers set on the Units.
To help prevent troubles from occurring when adding Units or when the wrong
Unit is mounted, I/O tables can also be registered in the CPU Unit. (Refer to 8-
2 Creating I/O Tables for details.)
8-1-1 Unit Types
Memory is allocated differently to Basic I/O Units, Special I/O Units, and CJ-
series CPU Bus Units.
OD211
Note: The first word on each Rack can be set from the CX-
Programmer to an address between CIO 0000 and
CIO 0999 to change the default setting
(consecutively from CIO 0000).
Allocations
CIO 0000 to CIO0079
Words are allocated as required
by each Unit in sequence to
Units in the order they are
connected.
I/O Area
Basic I/O Units
2
ON
4
TERM
RD2
SD2
RDY
NO.
UNIT
ERH
OFF
WIRE
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
ERC
RUN
SCU41
RD1 TER1
SD1
PORT1
(RS422
/485)
PORT2
Allocations
Special I/O Unit Area
CIO 2000 to CIO 2959
Words are allocated ten at a
time to each Unit according to
unit number.
Note: The maximum total number of Units
that can be connected is 40, which means the
maximum number of Special I/O Units is 40.
Allocations
CPU Bus Unit Area
CIO 1500 to CIO 1899
Words are allocated 25 at a time
to each Unit according to unit
number.
Special I/O Units
CPU Bus Units
345
I/O Allocations Section 8-1
8-1-2 I/O Allocation
If I/O tables are not registered in a CJ-series CPU Unit, the CPU Unit will
automatically allocate I/O words to the Basic I/O Units that are mounted each
time the power supply is turned ON and then operation will start. This is called
automatic I/O allocation at startup (see note). This is the default setting for the
CJ-series CPU Units and it results in the allocations described in this section.
Note When using automatic I/O allocation at startup, the words allocated to Units
may disagree with the words used for them in the program if a Unit is added or
removed from the PLC. Be sure not to add or remove Units without checking
the program and be sure to always replace Units with the same type of Unit
and with the same number of I/O.
I/O Allocation to Basic I/O
Units
CJ-series Basic I/O Units are allocated words in the I/O Area (CIO 0000 to
CIO 0079) and can be mounted to the CPU Rack or Expansion Racks.
Refer to 2-4 I/O Units for more details on the available Basic I/O Units.
■Word Allocations
Basic I/O Units on the CPU Rack
Basic I/O Units on the CPU Rack are allocated words from left to right starting
with the Unit closest to the CPU Unit. Each Unit is allocated as many words as
it requires.
Note Units that have 1 to 16 I/O points are allocated16 bits and Units that have 17
to 32 I/O points are allocated 32 bits. For example, an 8-point Unit is allocated
16 bits (1 word) and bits 00 to 07 of that word are allocated to the Unit’s 8
points.
Example 1
The following example shows the I/O allocation to 5 Basic I/O Units in the
CPU Rack.
Basic I/O Units in Expansion Racks
I/O allocation to Basic I/O Units continues from the CJ-series CPU Rack to the
CJ-series Expansion Rack connected to the CJ-series CPU Rack. Words are
allocated from left to right and each Unit is allocated as many words as it
requires, just like Units in the CJ-series CPU Rack.
CIO
0000
←→
End Cover
10 I/O Units max.
CPU Unit
Power Supply Unit
CPU Rack
IN
16 pt
0000
IN
16 pt
0001
IN
32 pt
0002
0003
OUT
32 pt
0004
0005
12345
→
to
Power Supply Unit
From the left
CPU Rac
k
CPU Unit
OUT
64 pt
0006
0009
346
I/O Allocations Section 8-1
Example
The following example shows the I/O allocation to Basic I/O Units in the CPU
Rack and two CJ-series Expansion Racks.
I/O Allocation to Special
I/O Units
Each CJ-series Special I/O Unit is allocated ten words in the Special I/O Unit
Area (CIO 2000 to CIO 2959) according the unit number set on the Unit. Spe-
cial I/O Units can be mounted to the CJ-series CPU Rack or CJ-series Expan-
sion Racks.
Refer to 2-4 I/O Units for more details on the available Special I/O Units.
■Word Allocations
The following table shows which words in the Special I/O Unit Area are allo-
cated to each Unit.
Special I/O Units are ignored during I/O allocation to Basic I/O Units. Positions
containing Special I/O Units aren’t allocated any words in the I/O Area.
IN
16 pt
0010
IN
16 pt
0000
OUT
16 pt
0007
IN
32 pt
0011
0012
IN
32 pt
0001
0002
IN
64 pt
0003
0006
OUT
32 pt
0008
0009
OUT
8 pt
0013
123
12345
IN
16 pt
0014
IN
32 pt
0015
0016
OUT
16 pt
0017
123
to
From the left→
From the left→
From the left→
CPU Rack
Expansion Rack
Expansion Rack
Power Supply Unit
Power Supply Unit
Power Supply Unit
CPU Unit
Unit number Words allocated
0 CIO 2000 to CIO 2009
1 CIO 2010 to CIO 2019
2 CIO 2020 to CIO 2029
::
15 CIO 2150 to CIO 2159
:
:
:
:
95 CIO 2950 to CIO 2959
347
I/O Allocations Section 8-1
Example
The following example shows the I/O word allocation to Basic I/O Units and
Special I/O Units in the CPU Rack.
I/O Allocation to CPU Bus
Units
Each CJ-series CPU Bus Unit is allocated 25 words in the CPU Bus Unit Area
(CIO 1500 to CIO 1899) according the unit number set on the Unit. CJ-series
CPU Bus Units can be mounted to the CJ-series CPU Rack or CJ-series
Expansion Racks.
■Word Allocation
The following table shows which words in the CJ-series CPU Bus Unit Area
are allocated to each Unit.
CPU Bus Units are ignored during I/O allocation to Basic I/O Units. Positions
containing CJ-series CPU Bus Units aren’t allocated any words in the I/O
Area.
Power Supply Unit
CPU Unit
IN
16 pt
CIO
0000
Special
I/O
Unit
CIO
2000
to
2009
OUT
16 pt
CIO
0001
Special
I/O
Unit
CIO
2010
to
2019
OUT
32 pt
CIO
0002
CIO
0003
10234
Slot Unit Words
required
Words allocated Unit
number
Group
0 CJ1W-ID211 16-point DC Input Unit 1 CIO 0000 --- Basic I/O Unit
1 CJ1W-AD081 Analog Input Unit 10 CIO 2000 to CIO 2009 0 Special I/O Unit
2 CJ1W-OD211 16-point Transistor Output Unit 1 CIO 0001 --- Basic I/O Unit
3 CJ1W-TC001 Temperature Control Unit 20 CIO 2010 to CIO 2029 1 Special I/O Unit
4 CJ1W-OD231 32-point Transistor Output Unit 2 CIO 0002 and CIO 0003 --- Basic I/O Unit
Unit number Words allocated
0 CIO 1500 to CIO 1524
1 CIO 1525 to CIO 1549
2 CIO 1550 to CIO 1574
::
15 CIO 1875 to CIO 1899
348
I/O Allocations Section 8-1
Example
The following example shows the I/O word allocation to Basic I/O Units, Spe-
cial I/O Units, and CPU Bus Units in the CPU Rack.
Data Area Allocations for Built-in I/O (CJ1M CPU Units Only)
Note PWM(891) output1 cannot be used on the CJ1M-CPU21.
Power Supply Unit
CPU Unit
IN
16 pt
CIO
0000
Special
I/O
Unit
CIO
2000
to
2009
CPU
Bus
Unit
CIO
1500
to
1524
OUT
16 pt
CIO
0001
CPU
Bus
Unit
CIO
1525t
o
1549
10234
Slot Unit Words
required
Words allocated Unit
number
Group
0 CJ1W-ID211 16-point DC Input Unit 1 CIO 0000 --- Basic I/O Unit
1CJ1W-AD081 Analog Input Unit 10 CIO 2000 to
CIO 2009
0Special I/O Unit
2CJ1W-SCU41 Serial Communications Unit 25 CIO 1500 to
CIO 1524
0CPU Bus Unit
3 CJ1W-OD211 16-point Transistor Output Unit 1 CIO 0001 --- Basic I/O Unit
4CJ1W-CLK21 Controller Link Unit 25 CIO 1525 to
CIO 1549
1CPU Bus Unit
I/O Code IN0 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 OUT0 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5
Address CIO 2960 CIO 2961
Bit0001020304050607080900010203 04 05
Inputs General-
purpose
inputs
General-
purpose
input 0
General-
purpose
input 1
General-
purpose
input 2
General-
purpose
input 3
General-
purpose
input 4
General-
purpose
input 5
General-
purpose
input 6
General-
purpose
input 7
General-
purpose
input 8
General-
purpose
input 9
--- --- --- --- --- ---
Interrupt
inputs
Interrupt
input 0
Interrupt
input 1
Interrupt
input 2
Interrupt
input 3
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
Quick-
response
inputs
Quick-
response
input 0
Quick-
response
input 1
Quick-
response
input 2
Quick-
response
input 3
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
High-
speed
counters
--- --- High-
speed
counter
1
(phase-
Z/reset)
High-
speed
counter
0
(phase-
Z/reset)
--- --- High-
speed
counter 1
(phase-
A, incre-
ment, or
count
input)
High-
speed
counter 1
(phase-
B, decre-
ment, or
direction
input)
High-
speed
counter 0
(phase-
A, incre-
ment, or
count
input)
High-
speed
counter 0
(phase-
B, decre-
ment, or
direction
input)
--- --- --- --- --- ---
Out-
puts
General-purpose
outputs
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- Gen-
eral-pur-
pose
output 0
Gen-
eral-pur-
pose
output 1
Gen-
eral-pur-
pose
output 2
Gen-
eral-pur-
pose
output 3
General-
purpose
output 4
General-
purpose
output 5
Pulse
out-
puts
CW/CC
W out-
puts
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- Pulse
output 0
(CW)
Pulse
output 0
(CCW)
Pulse
output 1
(CW)
Pulse
output 1
(CCW)
--- ---
Pulse +
direction
outputs
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- Pulse
output 0
(pulse)
Pulse
output 1
(pulse)
Pulse
output 0
(direc-
tion)
Pulse
output 1
(direc-
tion)
--- ---
Variable
duty ratio
outputs
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- PWM(891)
output 0
PWM(891)
output 1
(See note)
Origin search Origin
search 0
(Origin
Input
Signal)
Origin
search 0
(Origin
Proxim-
ity Input
Signal)
Origin
search 1
(Origin
Input
Signal)
Origin
search 1
(Origin
Proxim-
ity Input
Signal)
Origin
search 0
(Posi-
tioning
Com-
pleted
Signal)
Origin
search 1
(Posi-
tioning
Com-
pleted
Signal)
--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- Origin
search 0
(Error
Counter
Reset
Output)
Origin
search 1
(Error
Counter
Reset
Output)
349
I/O Allocations Section 8-1
8-1-3 Precautions when Using Memory Cards
With CJ-series CPU Units with unit version 2.0 or later, the I/O allocation
method used to create the CPU Unit's I/O table (automatic I/O allocation at
startup or user-set I/O allocation) is recorded in the parameter file for auto-
matic transfers at power ON (AUTOEXEC.STD). When automatic transfer at
power ON is executed from the Memory Card, the recorded method is auto-
matically detected and used to allocate I/O automatically at power ON or ver-
ify the I/O table.
The descriptions below explain the two different methods used to create the
I/O table by the CPU Unit that creates the parameter file for automatic trans-
fers at power ON (AUTOEXEC.STD).
• Automatic Allocation at Startup (See note.)
The I/O tables in the parameter file for automatic transfer at power ON in
the Memory Card are disabled and I/O is allocated using automatic I/O
allocation at startup based on the Units actually mounted in the PLC.
• User-set I/O Allocations
The I/O tables in the parameter file for automatic transfer at power ON in
the Memory Card are enabled, and the CPU Unit compares and verifies
the I/O table with the Units actually mounted in the PLC.
Note With automatic I/O allocation at startup, I/O tables are not created in advance
and I/O allocations are automatically made to the Basic I/O Units that are
actually mounted each time the power supply is turned ON.
■Previous CPU Units (Pre-Ver. 2.0 CPU Units)
With earlier versions of the CJ-series CPU Units, there wasn't a function that
recorded in the AUTOEXEC.STD parameter file which method was used to
create the CPU Unit's I/O tables. The user-set I/O allocation method was
automatically used in the parameter file when an automatic transfer at startup
was executed from the Memory Card, and I/O was allocated according to the
I/O tables in the parameter file and the I/O tables verified against the Units
actually mounted in the PLC. If a parameter file for automatic transfer at power
ON was created using the automatic I/O allocation at startup method in an
office with the CX-Programmer connected online to the CPU Unit without any
I/O Units connected, an I/O setting error would occur when the Memory Card
was mounted to a CPU Unit and the power supply was turned ON.
Office Remote site
Create program files for automatic transfer
at power ON (AUTOEXEC.OBJ) and
parameter files for automatic transfer
at power ON (AUTOEXEC.STD).
Units mounted. I/O is allocated according to settings in mounted Units.
CJ1-H, CJ1M CPU Unit
Ver. 2.0 or later Automatic I/O Allocation at Startup
Parameter file for automatic
transfer at power ON
(AUTOEXEC.STD)
Records allocation method in
parameter file for automatic
transfer at power ON
(AUTOEXEC.STD)
Note: The parameter file for automatic transfer at power ON
(AUTOEXEC.STD) is present, but I/O is allocated by the I/O
allocations in the mounted Units.
Automatic I/O Allocation at Startup
CJ1-H, CJ1M CPU Unit
Ver. 2.0 or later
Units not mounted.
Parameter file for automatic
transfer at power ON
(AUTOEXEC.STD)
Program file for automatic
transfer at power ON
(AUTOEXEC.OBJ)
Memory Card
CX-Programmer
Match
(See note.)
Program file for automatic
transfer at power ON
(AUTOEXEC.OBJ)
350
Creating I/O Tables Section 8-2
To solve this problem, the CX-Programmer had to be connected to the CPU
Unit onsite to recreate the I/O tables or to delete the I/O tables to enable using
the automatic I/O allocation at power ON method.
8-2 Creating I/O Tables
Although the automatic I/O allocation at startup method can be used for CJ-
series PLCs, I/O tables must be created and transferred to the CPU Unit in
cases like the following:
• To provide a record of the current Unit configuration to prevent it from
being changed.
• To reserve words for future use when Units are added to the PLC.
• To set the first word on the CPU Rack or Expansion I/O Racks.
• To allocate specified words to specific Units.
Once I/O tables are transferred to the CPU Unit, it saves them at the I/O allo-
cation status, and each time the power supply is turned ON, the CPU Unit
compares the contents of the I/O tables with the Units actually mounted to
verify the Unit configuration. Operation starts when the Unit configuration is
verified, but a fatal error occurs if a discrepancy is found.
When a Memory Card is used, the I/O tables are saved as one of the parame-
ter files and can be used as a parameter file for automatic transfer at power
ON.
8-2-1 Creating, Editing, and Transferring I/O Tables
When the CX-Programmer or a Programming Console is used to create I/O
tables in the CPU Unit, the CPU Unit will check Unit connections when the
power supply is turned ON and then start operation. There are two ways to
register the I/O tables in the CPU Unit: Create them according to the Units
actually connected in the PLC by using the online I/O table creation operation
from the CX-Programmer or a Programming Console, or edit the I/O tables
offline on the CX-Programmer and then transfer them to the CPU Unit.
CX-Programmer
Memory Card
Mis-match
(See note.)
Mail
Create program files for automatic
transfer at power ON
(AUTOEXEC.OBJ) and parameter
files for automatic transfer at
power ON (AUTOEXEC.STD).
Office Remote site
Units are mounted
I/O not allocated according to settings in mounted Units.
User-set I/O allocation
Program file for automatic
transfer at power ON
(AUTOEXEC.OBJ)
Parameter file for automatic
transfer at power ON
(AUTOEXEC.STD)
Note: The parameter file for automatic transfer
at power ON (AUTOEXEC.STD) is
present, and this file is used to allocated
I/O instead of the I/O allocations in the
mounted Units.
CJ-series CPU Unit
Automatic I/O allocation at startup
Units not mounted.
Program file for automatic
transfer at power ON
(AUTOEXEC.OBJ)
Parameter file for automatic
transfer at power ON
(AUTOEXEC.STD)
351
Creating I/O Tables Section 8-2
User-set I/O Allocations
8-2-2 Procedures for Registering I/O Tables
I/O Table Registration with
CX-Programmer
Use the following procedure to register the I/O tables with the CX-Program-
mer.
1,2,3... 1. Double-click IO Table in the project tree in the main window. The I/O Table
Window will be displayed.
2. Select Options and then Create. The models and positions of the Units
mounted to the Racks will be written to the CPU Unit as the registered I/O
tables.
The I/O tables can also be edited offline and then transferred to the CPU Unit.
1,2,3... 1. Double-click IO Table in the project tree in the main window. The I/O Table
Window will be displayed.
2. Double-click Rack to be edited. The slots for the selected Rack will be dis-
played.
3. Right-click the slot to which a Unit is to be assigned and select the Unit
from the pull-down menu.
4. After editing the I/O tables, transfer them to the CPU Unit by selecting Op-
tions - Transfer to PLC.
I/O Table Registration with
a Programming Console
A Programming Console can be used to automatically register the I/O tables
in the CPU Unit according to the Units actually mounted in the PLC. With a
Programming Console, words cannot be reserved and first words cannot be
set for Racks or slots. Use the following procedure to create I/O tables with a
Programming Console.
Creating I/O Tables
CX-Programmer
OR
Operation performed to
create I/O tables.
Programming Console
Units connected
when power is turned
ON are registered in
CPU Unit.
Editing and Downloading I/O Tables
CX-Programmer
Edited I/O tales
Registered I/O tables
Down-
loading
CPU Rack
00 16pt Input Unit
01 16pt Input Dummy
02 32pt Output Unit
Rack 01
Registered I/O tables
Transferring Parameter File to CPU Unit
File memory (Memory
Card or EM Area)
Registered I/O tables
CPU Rack
00 16pt
01
02
Rack 01
I/O tables in
parameter file
CLR
000000 CT00
FUN SHIFT CH
*DM
000000 I/O TBL ?
352
Creating I/O Tables Section 8-2
Unit Check
When this method is used, the registered I/O tables are compared with the
actual I/O at startup. If they do not agree, A40110 will turn ON to indicate an
I/O setting error and operation will not be possible.
Checking I/O Allocation Status
The I/O allocation status can be checked in A260. If A260 contain 0000 hex,
automatic I/O allocation at startup is being used. If A260 contains BBBB hex,
user-set I/O allocations are being used.
■Changes in I/O Allocation Status
You cannot return to automatic I/O allocation at startup by using the Program-
ming Console. To return to automation I/O allocation, the I/O tables must be
deleted from the CPU Unit using the CX-Programmer. When the I/O tables
are deleted, all settings for first words for Racks will also be deleted.
Precautions when
Changing I/O Allocation
Status
The I/O allocation status will change when one of these three operations are
performed.
1. Automatic transfer at startup
CHG
000000 I/O TBL
WRIT ????
9713
000000 I/O TBL
WRIT 9713
WRITE
000000CPU BU ST?
0:CLR 1:KEEP
01
000000 I/O TBL
WRIT OK
CLR
000000 CT00
Address Name Contents
A260 I/O Allocations Status 0000 hex: Automatic I/O Allocation at Startup
BBBB hex: User-set I/O Allocation
Default setting:
Automatic I/O Allocation at Startup
I/O tables deleted from CPU Unit
using the CX-Programmer
User-set I/O Allocations
(A260: BBBB hex)
I/O tables created from Programming Device
I/O tables downloaded from CX-Programmer
Parameter file (.STD) transferred to CPU Unit
I/O tables are created every time power is turned
ON based on Units actually connected in PLC.
I/O tables are not verified.
Operation is performed according to the I/O tables
transferred to the CPU Unit using one of the above
three methods.
The registered I/O tables are verified against the I/O
Units that are actually connected in the PLC.
Automatic I/O Allocation
at Startup
(A260: 0000 hex)
353
Creating I/O Tables Section 8-2
2. Parameter file transferred by user operation
3. Simple backup/recovery operations
The I/O allocation status changes are described below.
1. I/O Allocation Status Changes due to Automatic Transfer at Startup
The I/O allocation status depends on the unit versions of the source and des-
tination CPU Units when using a single CJ-series CPU Unit to create parame-
ter files for automatic transfer at startup (AUTOEXEC.STD), save them in the
Memory Card, and then automatically transfer them to another CJ-series CPU
Unit at startup. The changes to I/O allocation status for different unit version
combinations is shown in the following table.
Note 1. When files for automatic transfer at startup (AUTOEXEC.STD) are created
and saved in a Memory Card using user-specified I/O allocations with a
pre-Ver. 2.0 CJ-series CPU Unit, the system will automatically switch to au-
tomatic I/O allocation at startup if the data is automatically transferred from
the Memory Card.
2. When files for automatic transfer at startup (AUTOEXEC.STD) are created
and saved in the Memory Card using a CJ-series CPU Unit with unit ver-
sion 2.0, the I/O allocation status will switch automatically to user-specified
I/O allocations if the data is automatically transferred from the Memory
Card to a CJ-series CPU Unit with unit version 3.0 or later.
Source CPU Unit Original I/O
allocation status
Destination CPU Unit
Unit version of CPU Unit to which files for automatic
transfer at startup will be sent
Pre-Ver. 2.0 Unit Ver. 2.0 Unit Ver. 3.0 or
later
CPU Unit’s unit
version used to
create files for
automatic transfer
at startup
Pre-Ver. 2.0 Automatic alloca-
tion
Switches to user-
specified
(Same) automatic
allocation
Switches to user-
specified
User-specified (Same) User-
specified
Switches to auto-
matic allocation
(See note 1.)
(Same) User-
specified
Unit Ver. 2.0 Automatic alloca-
tion
Switches to user-
specified
(Same) automatic
allocation
Switches to user
operation
User-specified (Same) User-specified
Unit Ver. 3.0 or
later
Automatic alloca-
tion
Switches to user-
specified
(Same) Automatic
allocation
(Same) Automatic
allocation
User-specified (Same) User-specified
354
Creating I/O Tables Section 8-2
2. I/O Allocation Status Changes Due to Transfer of Parameter Files
Note 1. When parameter files (.STD) are created and saved in a Memory Card us-
ing user-specified I/O allocations with a CJ-series CPU Unit with unit Ver.
2.0, the system will automatically switch to automatic I/O allocation at star-
tup if the parameter file is transferred from the Memory Card using by a
user operation.
2. When parameter files (.STD) are created and saved in the Memory Card
using automatic I/O allocation at startup with a CJ-series CPU Unit with
unit version 2.0, the I/O allocation status will switch automatically to user-
specified I/O allocations if the parameter file is transferred from the Mem-
ory Card to a CJ-series CPU Unit with unit version 3.0 or later.
3. An I/O setting error will occur if a parameter file (.STD) created and saved
in a Memory Card using a CJ-series CPU Unit with unit Ver. 3.0 or later is
transferred from the Memory Card using a CJ-series CPU Unit with unit
Ver. 2.0 and user-specified I/O allocations. The I/O setting error will occur
after the parameter file is transferred. If this error occurs, cycle the power
and clear the error.
3. I/O Allocation Status Changes Due to Backup/Restore Operations
The I/O allocation status depends on the unit versions of the source and des-
tination CPU Units when using a single CJ-series CPU Unit to create backup
parameter files (BKUP.STD), save them in the Memory Card, and then back
up or restore them to another CJ-series CPU Unit. The changes to I/O alloca-
Source CPU Unit Original I/O
allocation status
Destination CPU Unit
Unit version of CPU Unit to which parameter files will be
transferred
Pre-Ver. 2.0 Unit Ver. 2.0 Unit Ver. 3.0 or
later
CPU Unit’s unit
version used to
create parameter
files
Pre-Ver. 2.0 Automatic alloca-
tion
Switches to user-
specified
(Same) automatic
allocation
Switches to user-
specified
User-specified (Same) User-
specified
Switches to auto-
matic allocation
(See note 1.)
(Same) User-
specified
Unit Ver. 2.0 Automatic alloca-
tion
Switches to user-
specified
(Same) automatic
allocation
Switches to user
operation
User-specified (Same) User-specified
Unit Ver. 3.0 or
later
Automatic alloca-
tion
Switches to user-
specified
(Same) Automatic
allocation (See
note 3.) and an I/O
setting error
occurs.
(Same) Automatic
allocation
User-specified (Same) User-specified
355
Allocating First Words to Slots and Reserving Words Section 8-3
tion status for different unit version combinations are shown in the following
table.
8-3 Allocating First Words to Slots and Reserving Words
The first word allocated to a slot on any Rack can be set with the CX-Pro-
grammer’s I/O table edit operation regardless of the position of the slot. This
feature can be used whenever it’s necessary to control allocations to specific
Units regardless of the position of the Unit to group allocated I/O words by
device or circuit or to prepare for future changes to or additions of I/O Units for
system design changes.
Word Allocations When setting first words for slots, the first word must be set for slot 00 on the
CPU Rack. The first word can then be set for any slot on any Rack for up to 63
other slots.
Each first word set for a slot creates a group starting with that slot. Words are
allocated starting from the specified word to the first slot in the group and con-
tinuing left to right allocating consecutive words to each Unit until the next
group (i.e., until the next Unit for which a first slot word is set). The next group
can start on the same Rack or on a following Rack.
Source CPU Unit Original I/O
allocation status
Destination CPU Unit
Unit version of CPU Unit at the backup/restore
destination
Pre-Ver. 2.0 Unit Ver. 2.0 Unit Ver. 3.0 or
later
Unit version of
CPU Unit at the
backup source
Pre-Ver. 2.0 Automatic alloca-
tion
(Same) automatic allocation
User-specified (Same) User-
specified
Switches to auto-
matic allocation.
(Same) User-
specified
Unit Ver. 2.0 Automatic alloca-
tion
(Same) automatic allocation
User-specified (Same) User-specified
Unit Ver. 3.0 or
later
Automatic alloca-
tion
(Same) automatic allocation
User-specified (Same) User-specified
356
Allocating First Words to Slots and Reserving Words Section 8-3
Example: Setting the First Words for Racks
In this example, a first slot word has been set in the middle of each Rack. For
simplicity, only 16-bit Units have been used.
First Slot Word Settings
Note Group 00 must start at slot 00 on the CPU Rack. Any word can be set. Any
slot can be set on any Rack for groups 01 to 63.
Setting First Slot Words from the CX-Programmer
First slot words can be set from the CX-Programmer. These settings are not
possible from a Programming Console.
Note For CJ1-H CPU Units, an indication of whether or not the first rack words have
been set will be displayed on a Programming Console.
Use the following procedure to set the first rack words.
Group Rack Slot Word
00 CPU Rack 00 CIO 0000
01 CPU Rack 03 CIO 0100
02 Rack 1 02 CIO 0200
03 Rack 2 02 CIO 0300
0002
01234
01234
01234
CIO
0000 CIO
0001 CIO CIO
0100 CIO
0101
CIO
0102 CIO
0103 CIO
0200
CIO
0201
CIO
0202 CIO
0203 CIO
0300 CIO
0302
CIO
0301
Group 00 set for first
slot word of CIO 0000
Group 01 set for first
slot word of CIO 0200
Rack number 0
CPU Unit
Power Supply Unit
Power Supply Unit
Power Supply Unit
CS Expansion
Rack
Group 03 set for first slot word of CIO 0300
CS Expansion Rack
Empty
CPU Rack
Group 02 set for first slot word of CIO 0200
357
Allocating First Words to Slots and Reserving Words Section 8-3
1,2,3... 1. Select the Rack/Slot Start Addresses from the Option Menu on the I/O
Table Window. The following dialog box will be displayed.
2. Select the Slot Start Addresses Settings Option and click the OK Button.
3. In the dialog box that will appear, set the first word for slot 00 on the CPU
Rack.
4. To change the setting from CIO 0000, click the Edit Button. The follow di-
alog box will appear.
5. Set the desired word and click the OK Button.
6. To set slot first words for other groups, click the Add Button and make the
appropriate settings for the Rack, slot, and word.
Up to 64 groups can be set for the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit Ver. 2.0. Only 8
groups can be set for the CS/CJ-series CPU Unit Ver. 1.0
Setting Setting range Default Remarks
Group 00 to 63 00 Groups numbers are allocated
automatically in the order the
groups are displayed and set.
Rack CPU Rack
(“MainRack”)
Racks 1 to 7
CPU Rack Group 00 always starts at slot 00
on the CPU Rack.
Slot 00 to 99 0
First word 0 to 999 0 ---
358
Allocating First Words to Racks Section 8-4
Precautions in Setting First Slot Words
When the I/O tables are edited, the CX-Programmer checks for any duplica-
tions in word allocations caused by first word settings. It is conceivable, how-
ever, that duplications in word allocations could occur after the I/O tables have
been registered, e.g., as the result of replacing a 1-word Unit with a 2-word
Unit. In this case the extra word needed by the new Unit would still also be
allocated to the next Unit.
When the PLC is turned ON, the CPU Unit checks the registered I/O tables
against the actual Units mounted to the PLC. If there are any duplications, and
error will occur and it will be no longer possible to edit the I/O tables. If this
happens, the I/O tables will have to be deleted and recreated or retransferred
from a Programming Devices.
8-4 Allocating First Words to Racks
In the CJ-series PLCs, the first word allocated to each Rack can be set with
the CX-Programmer’s I/O table edit operation. For example, the CPU Rack
can be set to be allocated words starting with CIO 0000; the next Rack, words
starting with CIO 0100; the next Rack, words starting with CIO 0200; etc. This
can make it easier to check word allocations to Units without calculating all the
way from the CPU Rack.
Note The first words for Racks cannot be set at the same time as the first words for
slots.
Word Allocations
For Racks in which the first word address has been set, words are allocated to
Units in the order that the Units are mounted (from left to right) beginning with
the specified first word. Words are not allocated to empty slots.
For Racks in which the first word address has not been set, words are allo-
cated in rack-number order (lowest to highest) continuing from the last word
allocated to the previous rack and starting with CIO 0000 on the first Rack for
which the first word is not set.
359
Allocating First Words to Racks Section 8-4
Example: Setting the First Words for Racks
Rack First Word Settings
Note Rack numbers (0 to 3) are fixed according to the order that the Racks are
physically connected with cable. The CPU Rack is always Rack 0 and the
other Racks are, in order, Racks 1 to 3. These numbers cannot be changed.
Setting First Rack Words from the CX-Programmer
The first word allocated on each Rack can be set from the CX-Programmer.
These settings are not possible from a Programming Console.
Note For CJ1-H CPU Units, an indication of whether or not the first rack words have
been set will be displayed on a Programming Console.
Use the following procedure to set the first rack words.
Rack First word
CPU Rack CIO 0100
Rack 1 CIO 0120
Rack 2 0000
Rack 3 0140
01234
0123
01234
01234
CIO
0100
CIO
0101
CIO
0104
CIO
0103
CIO
0102
CIO
0200
CIO
0202
CIO
0203
CIO
0201
CIO
0000
CIO
0004
CIO
0003
CIO
0002
CIO
0001
CIO
0140
CIO
0144
CIO
0143
CIO
0142
CIO
0141
I/O Control Unit
Power Supply Unit
CPU Rack
(Rack 0)
Rack 1
Rack 2
Rack 3
First Rack word set to CIO 0100.
First Rack word set to CIO 0120.
First Rack word not set (automatic allocation from CIO 0000).
First Rack word set to CIO 0140.
I/O Interface Unit
Power Supply Unit
Power Supply Unit
CPU UNIT I/O Interface Unit
Power Supply Unit
I/O Interface Unit
360
Allocating First Words to Racks Section 8-4
1,2,3... 1. Select the Rack/Slot Start Addresses from the Option Menu on the I/O
Table Window. The following dialog box will be displayed.
2. Select the Rack Start Addresses Settings Option and click the OK Button.
3. In the dialog box that will appear, remove the checkmarks from the settings
disabling the first rack word settings and set the address of the first words
for the CPU Rack and Expansion Racks (1 to 7).
4. Click the OK Button.
Note 1. Up to 3 Racks can be set for any CPU Unit model.
2. Although the CX-Programmer window will display 7 Racks, only 3 Racks
can be set for the CJ1.
Confirming First Rack Word Settings on a Programming Console
With a CJ1-H/CJ1M CPU Unit, the Programming Console can be used to
check whether or not the first word has been set on a Rack. Use the following
procedure.
1,2,3... 1. Press the FUN, SHIFT, and CH Keys to start the I/O table creation opera-
tion. If the first work for a Rack has been set, a message saying so will ap-
pear on the second line of the display.
If nothing is displayed, then a first word has not been set.
2. Press the CHG Key, enter the password (9713), and then press the
WRITE Key to continue creating the I/O tables, or press the CLR Key to
cancel the operation and return to the initial display.
Setting Setting range Default Remarks
Rack Start Address 0 to 900 0 Same for all Racks
Invalid Selected or cleared Selected (invalid)
FUN SHIFT CH
*DM
000000I/O TBL ?
Rack 1st Word En
361
Detailed Information on I/O Table Creation Errors Section 8-5
Precautions in Setting Rack First Words
• Be sure to make first word settings so that allocated words do not overlap.
The first word setting for a rack can be any address from CIO 0000 to
CIO 0900. If the same word is allocated to two Racks, the I/O tables can-
not be created and the Duplication Error Flag (A26103) in the I/O Table
Error Information will turn ON.
• Always register the I/O table after installing an I/O Unit, after setting a rack
number, or after setting the first word allocation for a Rack. The I/O Table
Registration operation registers the I/O words allocated to the Racks.
• I/O words will not be allocated to empty slots. If an I/O Unit will be
installed later, reserve words for the empty slot by changing the I/O table
with a Programming Device’s I/O Table Change Operation.
• If the actual system configuration is changed after registering the I/O table
so that the number of words or I/O type does not match the I/O table, an
I/O verification error (A40209) or I/O setting error (A40110) will occur. A
CS-series CPU Bus Unit Setting Error (A40203) or Special I/O Unit Set-
ting Error (A40202) may occur as well.
• When a Unit is removed, words can be reserved for the missing Unit using
the I/O Table Change Operation. If a Unit is changed or added, all of the
words in the program following that Unit’s allocated words will be changed
and the I/O Table Registration Operation will have to be performed again.
8-5 Detailed Information on I/O Table Creation Errors
With a CJ1-H CPU Unit, the contents of A261 provides information on the Unit
causing the error whenever one occurs when creating the I/O tables from the
Programming Console or CX-Programmer. This information will make it easier
to find the Unit causing the problem with troubleshooting I/O tables. Refer to
SECTION 11 Troubleshooting for actual procedures.
Note This function does not exist in CJ1-CPU@@ CPU Units.
Name Address Contents When
changing
to RUN
mode
At
startup
Setting
timing
Word Bit
CPU Bus Unit Setup
Area Initialization
Error Flag
A261 00 ON: Error in CPU Bus Unit Setup
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
Held Cleared When I/O
tables are
created
I/O Overflow Flag 02 ON: Overflow in maximum number of I/O points.
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
Duplication Error Flag 03 ON: The same unit number was used more than
once.
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
I/O Bus Error Flag 04 ON: I/O bus error
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
Special I/O Unit Error
Flag
07 ON: Error in a Special I/O Unit
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
I/O Unconfirmed Error
Flag
09 ON: I/O detection has not been completed.
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
362
Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units Section 8-6
8-6 Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units
This section describes how data can be exchanged between Special I/O Units
or CJ-series CPU Bus Units, and the CPU Unit.
8-6-1 Special I/O Units
Special I/O Unit Area
(I/O Refreshing)
Data is exchanged each cycle during I/O refreshing of the Special I/O Unit
Area. Basically, 10 words are allocated to each Special I/O Unit based on its
unit number setting. Refer to the operation manuals for individual Special I/O
Units for details.
The Special I/O Unit Area ranges from CIO 2000 to CIO 2959 (10 words × 96
Units).
Transfer of Words Allocated in DM Area
There are three times that data may be transferred through the words allo-
cated to each Unit. The timing of data transfers depends on the model being
used.
1,2,3... 1. Data transferred when the PLC is turned on.
2. Data transferred when the Unit is restarted.
3. Data transferred when necessary.
Some models transfer data in both directions, from the DM Area to the Unit
and from the Unit to the DM Area. See the Unit’s Operation Manual for details
on data transfers.
Special I/O Unit Words in the DM Area: D20000 to D29599 (100 Words x 96 Units)
Each Special I/O Unit is allocated 100 words in the DM Area in the range of
D20000 to D29599 (100 words × 96 Units). These 100 words are generally
used to hold initial settings for the Special I/O Unit. When the contents of this
area are changed from the program to reflect a change in the system, the
Restart Bits for affected Units must be turned ON to restart the Units.
Special I/O Unit Area
10 words/Unit
CPU Unit
Special I/O Unit
Transferred in
I/O refreshing
Transferred
when power is
turned on or
the Unit is
restarted.
CPU Unit
Special I/O Unit
DM Area for Special I/O
Units 100 words/Unit
Transferred
each cycle and
when
necessary.
363
Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units Section 8-6
FINS Commands The CMND(490) instruction can be added to the ladder program to issue a
FINS command to the Special I/O Unit.
FINS commands can be transmitted to Special I/O Units in other PLCs in the
network, not just the local PLC.
Special I/O Unit Initialization
Special I/O Units are initialized when the PLC’s power is turned on or the
Unit’s Restart Bit is turned ON. The Unit’s Special I/O Unit Initialization Flag
(A33000 to A33515) will be ON while the Unit is initializing.
I/O refreshing (cyclic I/O refreshing or refreshing by IORF(097) or FIORF(225)
(CJ1-H-R CPU Units only) will not be performed for a Special I/O Unit while its
Initialization Flag is ON.
Disabling Special I/O Unit Cyclic Refreshing
Ten words are allocated to each Special I/O Unit in the Special I/O Unit Area
(CIO 2000 to CIO 2959) based on the unit number set on the front of each
Unit. The data in the Special I/O Unit Area is refreshed in the CPU Unit every
cycle during I/O refreshing (just after execution of the END(001) instruction).
I/O refreshing may take too long if too many Special I/O Units are installed. If
I/O refreshing is taking too much time, the PLC Setup can be set to disable
cyclic refreshing for particular Special I/O Units. (The Special I/O Unit Cyclic
Refreshing Disable Bits are in PLC Setup addresses 226 to 231.)
If the I/O refreshing time is too short, the Unit’s internal processing will not be
able to keep pace, the Special I/O Unit Error Flag (A40206) will be turned ON,
and the Special I/O Unit may not operate properly. In this case, the cycle time
can be extended by setting a minimum cycle time in the PLC Setup or cyclic
I/O refreshing with the Special I/O Unit can be disabled.
Then cyclic refreshing has been disabled, the Special I/O Unit’s data can be
refreshed during program execution with IORF(097) or FIORF(225) (CJ1-H-R
CPU Units only).
Note IORF(097), FIORF(225) (CJ1-H-R CPU Units only), IORD (222), and
IOWR(223) can be executed for Special I/O Units from interrupt tasks. When
doing so, always disable the Special I/O Unit’s cyclic refreshing in the PLC
CPU Unit
Special I/O Unit
FINS
com-
mand
transmis-
sion
The FINS command is trans-
mitted when CMND(490) has
been executed in the program.
CPU Unit
Special I/O Unit
CPU Unit
Serial Communications
Unit
Serial Communications
Unit
The FINS command is
transmitted when
CMND(490) has been
executed in the program.
FINS command transmission
364
Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units Section 8-6
Setup. If cyclic refreshing is not disabled and either of the following processes
is executed in an interrupt task, a non-fatal error will occur and the Interrupt
Task Error Flag (A40213) will turn ON.
• I/O refreshing is executed using IORF(097) or FIORF(225) (CJ1-H-R
CPU Units only) for the same Special I/O Unit.
• Data is read or written to or from the memory area using IORD (222) or
IOWR(223) for the same Special I/O Unit.
Whenever disabling a Special I/O Unit’s cyclic refreshing, be sure that the I/O
for that Unit is refreshed with IORF(097) or FIORF(225) (CJ1-H-R CPU Units
only) in the program at least every 11 seconds during operation. A CPU Unit
service monitoring error will occur in the Special I/O Unit if it is not refreshed
every 11 seconds.
8-6-2 CPU Bus Units
Data can be exchanged between CPU Bus Units and the CPU Unit through
the CPU Bus Unit Area, the DM Area, or FINS commands.
CPU Bus Unit Area (I/O Refreshing)
Data is exchanged each cycle during I/O refreshing of the CPU Bus Unit Area.
Basically, 25 words are allocated to each CPU Bus Unit based on its unit num-
ber setting. The number of words actually used by the CPU Bus Unit varies.
The Special I/O Unit Area ranges from CIO 1500 to CIO 1899 (25 words × 16
Units).
Note With CJ1-H CPU Units, the CPU BUS I/O REFRESH instruction
(DLNK(226)) can be executed in the ladder program to refresh the
CIO Area words allocated to the CPU Bus Unit of a specified unit
number.
Transfer of Words Allocated in the DM Area
Each CPU Bus Unit is allocated 100 words in the DM Area in the range of
D30000 to D31599 (100 words × 16 Units). There are three times that data
may be transferred through the words allocated to each Unit. The timing of
data transfers depends on the model being used.
1,2,3... 1. Data transferred when the PLC is turned ON.
2. Data transferred each cycle.
3. Data transferred when necessary.
Note With CJ1-H CPU Units, the CPU BUS I/O REFRESH instruction
(DLNK(226)) can be executed in the ladder program to refresh the
DM Area words allocated to the CPU Bus Unit of a specified unit
number.
CPU Unit
CPU Bus Unit
CPU Bus Unit Area
25 words/Unit
Trans-
ferred in
I/O
refresh-
ing
365
Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units Section 8-6
Some models transfer data in both directions, from the DM Area to the Unit
and from the Unit to the DM Area. See the Unit’s Operation Manual for details
on data transfers.
These 100 words are generally used to hold initial settings for the CPU Bus
Unit. When the contents of this area are changed from the program to reflect a
change in the system, the Restart Bits (A50100 to A50115) for affected Units
must be turned ON to restart the Units.
FINS Commands
The CMND(490) instruction can be added to the ladder program to issue a
FINS command to the CPU Bus Unit.
FINS commands can be transmitted to CPU Bus Units in other PLCs in the
network, not just the local PLC.
CPU Bus Unit Initialization
CPU Bus Units are initialized when the PLC’s power is turned on or the Unit’s
Restart Bit is turned ON. The Unit’s CPU Bus Unit Initialization Flag (A30200
to A30215) will be ON while the Unit is initializing.
CPU Unit
CPU Bus Unit
DM Area for CPU Bus Units
100 words/Unit
Transferred
when power
is turned ON
or the Unit is
restarted.
Transferred
each cycle
and when
necessary.
CPU Unit
CPU Bus Unit
FINS
com-
mand
trans-
mission
The FINS command is trans-
mitted when CMND(490) has
been executed in the program.
CPU Unit
CPU Bus Unit
CPU Unit
Serial Communications
Unit Serial Communications
Unit
Command transmission
The FINS command is
transmitted when
CMND(490) has been
executed in the program.
366
Data Exchange with CPU Bus Units Section 8-6
Cyclic I/O refreshing will not be performed for a CPU Bus Unit while its Initial-
ization Flag is ON.
367
SECTION 9
Memory Areas
This section describes the structure and functions of the I/O Memory Areas and Parameter Areas.
9-1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
9-2 I/O Memory Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
9-2-1 I/O Memory Area Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
9-2-2 Overview of the Data Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
9-2-3 Data Area Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
9-3 I/O Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
9-4 Data Link Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
9-5 CPU Bus Unit Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
9-6 Special I/O Unit Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
9-7 Serial PLC Link Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
9-8 DeviceNet Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
9-9 Internal I/O Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
9-10 Holding Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
9-11 Auxiliary Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
9-12 TR (Temporary Relay) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
9-13 Timer Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
9-14 Counter Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
9-15 Data Memory (DM) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
9-16 Extended Data Memory (EM) Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
9-17 Index Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
9-18 Data Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
9-19 Task Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
9-20 Condition Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
9-21 Clock Pulses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
9-22 Parameter Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
9-22-1 PLC Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
9-22-2 Registered I/O Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
9-22-3 Routing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
9-22-4 CPU Bus Unit Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
368
Introduction Section 9-1
9-1 Introduction
The CPU Unit’s memory (RAM with battery back-up) can be divided into three
parts: the User Program Memory, I/O Memory Area, and Parameter Area.
This section describes the I/O Memory Area and Parameter Area.
I/O Memory Area This region of memory contains the data areas which can be accessed by
instruction operands. The data areas include the CIO Area, Work Area, Hold-
ing Area, Auxiliary Area, DM Area, EM Area, Timer Area, Counter Area, Task
Flag Area, Data Registers, Index Registers, Condition Flag Area, and Clock
Pulse Area.
Parameter Area This region of memory contains various settings that cannot be specified by
instruction operands; they can be specified from a Programming Device only.
The settings include the PLC Setup, I/O Table, Routing Table, and CPU Bus
Unit settings.
Instruction I/O Memory Area
Programming Device
Parameter Area
369
I/O Memory Areas Section 9-2
9-2 I/O Memory Areas
9-2-1 I/O Memory Area Structure
The following table shows the basic structure of the I/O Memory Area.
Area Size Range Task
usage
External
I/O alloca-
tion
Bit
access
Word
access
Access Change
from
Pro-
gram-
ming
Device
Status at
startup
or mode
change
Forc-
ing
bit
sta-
tus
Read Write
CIO
Area
I/O Area 1,280
bits (80
words)
CIO 0000
to
CIO 0079
(Note 1)
Shared
by all
tasks
Basic I/O
Units
OK OK OK OK OK Cleared
(See
note 8.)
OK
Data Link
Area
3,200
bits (200
words)
CIO 1000
to
CIO 1199
Data link OK OK OK OK OK OK
CPU Bus
Unit Area
6,400
bits (400
words)
CIO 1500
to
CIO 1899
CPU Bus
Units
OK OK OK OK OK OK
Special I/O
Unit Area
15,360
bits (960
words)
CIO 2000
to
CIO 2959
Special I/O
Units
OK OK OK OK OK OK
Built-in I/O
Area (CJ1M
CPU Units
with built-in
I/O only.)
10 bits +
6 bits (1
word + 1
word)
CIO 2960
to
CIO 2961
Built-in I/O
port
OK OK OK OK OK OK
Serial PLC
Link Area
(CJ1M CPU
Units only.)
1,440
bits (90
words)
CIO 3100
to
CIO 3189
Serial PLC
Link
OK OK OK OK OK OK
DeviceNet
Area
9,600
bits (600
words)
CIO 3200
to
CIO 3799
DeviceNet
Master
(fixed allo-
cations
OK OK OK OK OK OK
Internal I/O
Areas
37,504
bits
(2,344
words)
4,800
bits (300
words)
CIO 1200
to
CIO 1499
CIO 3800
to
CIO 6143
--- OKOKOKOK OK OK
370
I/O Memory Areas Section 9-2
Note 1. The I/O Area can be expanded to CIO 0000 to CIO 0999 by changing the
first words allocated to Racks.
2. Bits can be manipulated using TST(350), TSTN(351), SETB(532),
RSTB(533), OUTB(534).
3. Index registers and data registers can be used either individually by task
or they can be shared by all the tasks (CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Units only).
4. Timer PVs can be refreshed indirectly by forced setting/resetting Timer
Completion Flags.
5. Counter PVs can be refreshed indirectly by forced setting/resetting
Counter Completion Flags.
6. CJ1-H and CJ1 CPU Units only.
7. The Function Block Holding Area words are allocated from H512 to H1535.
These words can be used only for the function block instance area (inter-
nally allocated variable area).
8. If the I/O Memory Hold Flag (A50012) is turned ON, the memory values
will be maintained when the operating mode is changed. If, in addition, the
PLC Setup is set to hold the status of the I/O Memory Hold Flag at startup
(IOM Hold Bit parameter), the memory values will be maintained when the
power supply is turned ON.
Work Area 8,192
bits (512
words)
W000 to
W511
Shared
by all
tasks
--- OKOKOKOK OK Cleared
(Note 8.)
OK
Holding Area
(Note 7.)
8,192
bits (512
words)
H000 to
H511
--- OKOKOKOK OK Main-
tained
OK
Auxiliary Area 15,360
bits (960
words)
A000 to
A959
--- OKOKOKA000 to
A447 No
A000 to
A447 No
Varies
from
address
to
address.
No
A448 to
A959 OK
A448 to
A959 OK
TR Area 16 bits TR0 to
TR15
--- OK --- OK OK No Cleared No
DM Area 32,768
words
D00000
to
D32767
--- No
(Note 2.)
OK OK OK OK Main-
tained
No
EM Area (Note 6.) 32,768
words
per bank
(0 to C
max.)
E0_0000
0 to
EC_3276
7
--- No
(Note 2.)
OK OK OK OK Main-
tained
No
Timer Completion
Flags
4,096
bits
T0000 to
T4095
--- OK --- OK OK OK Cleared
(Note 8.)
OK
Counter Comple-
tion Flags
4,096
bits
C0000 to
C4095
--- OK --- OK OK OK Main-
tained
OK
Timer PVs 4,096
words
T0000 to
T4095
--- --- OK OK OK OK Cleared
(Note 8.)
No
(Note
4.)
Counter PVs 4,096
words
C0000 to
C4095
--- --- OK OK OK OK Main-
tained
No
(Note
5.)
Task Flag Area 32 bits TK00 to
TK31
--- OK --- OK No No Cleared No
Index Registers
(Note 3.)
16 regis-
ters
IR0 to
IR15
Used
sepa-
rately in
each
task
--- OK OK Indirect
address
-ing only
Specific
instruc-
tions
only
No Cleared
(Note 8.)
No
Data Registers
(Note 3.)
16 regis-
ters
DR0 to
DR15
--- No OK OK OK No Cleared
(Note 8.)
No
Area Size Range Task
usage
External
I/O alloca-
tion
Bit
access
Word
access
Access Change
from
Pro-
gram-
ming
Device
Status at
startup
or mode
change
Forc-
ing
bit
sta-
tus
Read Write
371
I/O Memory Areas Section 9-2
9-2-2 Overview of the Data Areas
The data areas in the I/O Memory Area are described in detail below.
CIO Area It is not necessary to input the “CIO” acronym when specifying an address in
the CIO Area. The CIO Area is generally used for data exchanges such as I/O
refreshing with various Units. Words that are not allocated to Units may be
used as work words and work bits in the program only.
Note 1. It is possible to use CIO 0080 to CIO 0999 for I/O words by making the ap-
propriate settings for the first words on the Racks. Settings for the first
words on the Racks can be made using the CX-Programmer to set the first
CIO 0000
CIO 0159
(CIO 0160)
(CIO 0999)
CIO 1000
CIO 1199
CIO 1200
CIO 1499
CIO 1500
CIO 1899
CIO 1900
CIO 1999
CIO 2000
CIO 2959
CIO 2960
CIO 2961
(CIO 2962)
CIO 3100
(CIO 3199)
CIO 3200
CIO 3799
CIO 3800
CIO 6143
15 0
Word
I/O Area
Not used.
Data Link Area
Internal I/O Area
CPU Bus Unit Area
(25 words/Unit)
DeviceNet Area
Not used.
Bit
Special Unit Area
(10 words/Unit)
Internal I/O Area
See note 1.
See note 2.
See note 2.
Serial PLC Link Area
(CJ1M CPU Units only.)
Internal I/O Area
(CJ1M CPU Units with
built-in I/O only.)
Not used.
372
I/O Memory Areas Section 9-2
Rack addresses in the I/O table. The settings range for the first Rack ad-
dresses is from CIO 0000 to CIO 0900.
2. The parts of the CIO Area that are labelled “Not used” may be used in pro-
gramming as work bits. In the future, however, unused CIO Area bits may
be used when expanding functions. Always use Work Area bits first.
I/O Area
These words are allocated to external I/O terminals on Basic I/O Units. Words
that aren’t allocated to external I/O terminals may be used only in the pro-
gram.
Data Link Area
These words are used for data links in Controller Link Networks. Words that
aren’t used in data links may be used only in the program.
CPU Bus Unit Area
These words are allocated to CPU Bus Units to transfer status information.
Each Unit is allocated 25 words and up to 16 Units (with unit numbers 0 to 15)
can be used. Words that aren’t used by CPU Bus Units may be used only in
the program.
Special I/O Unit Area
These words are allocated to Special I/O Units. Each Unit is allocated 10
words and up to 96 Units (unit numbers 0 to 95) can be used).
Words that aren’t used by Special I/O Units may be used only in the program.
Built-in I/O Area (CJ1M CPU Units with Built-in I/O Only)
These words are allocated to the CPU Unit’s built-in I/O port. Allocations are
fixed and cannot be changed. This area can be used only by CJ1M CPU Units
with the built-in I/O. Other CPU Units can be programmed only as described
below under “Internal I/O Area.”
Serial PLC Link Area
These words are allocated for use with the Serial PLC Link, for data links with
other PLCs. Addresses not used for Serial PLC Link can be used only in the
program, the same as the Work Area.
DeviceNet Area
These words are allocated to Slaves for DeviceNet Remote I/O Communica-
tions. Allocations are fixed and cannot be changed. Words that aren’t used by
DeviceNet devices can be used only in the program.
Internal I/O Area
These words can be used only in the program; they cannot be used for I/O
exchange with external I/O terminals. Be sure to use the work words provided
in the Work Area (WR) before allocating words in the Internal I/O Area or
other unused words in the CIO Area. It is possible that these words will be
assigned to new functions in future versions of CJ-series CPU Units, so the
program may have to be changed before being used in a new CJ-series PLC if
CIO Area words are used as work words in the program.
373
I/O Memory Areas Section 9-2
Work Area (WR) Words in the Work Area can be used only in the program; they cannot be
used for I/O exchange with external I/O terminals. No new functions will be
assigned to this area in future versions of CJ-series PLCs, so use this area for
work words and bits before any words in the CIO Area.
Holding Area (HR) Words in the Holding Area can be used only in the program. These words
retain their content when the PLC is turned on or the operating mode is
switched between PROGRAM mode and RUN or MONITOR mode.
Note The Function Block Holding Area words are allocated from H512 to H1535.
These words can be used only for the function block instance area (internally
allocated variable area). These words cannot be specified as instruction oper-
ands in the user program.
Auxiliary Area (AR) The Auxiliary Area contains flags and control bits used to monitor and control
PLC operation. This area is divided into two parts: A000 to A447 are read-
only and A448 to A959 can be read or written. Refer to 9-11 Auxiliary Area for
details on the Auxiliary Area.
Note There is a possibility that a function will be assigned to an undefined Auxiliary
Area word or bit in a future upgrade of the CPU Units. Do not use undefined
words or bits in the Auxiliary Area as work words or bits in the user program.
Temporary Relay Area
(TR)
The TR Area contains bits that record the ON/OFF status of program
branches. The TR bits are used with mnemonics only.
15
W511
Word Bit
15
H511
Word Bit
A447
A448
A959
15
Read-write area
Read-only area
Word Bit
374
I/O Memory Areas Section 9-2
Data Memory Area (DM) The DM Area is a multi-purpose data area that can be accessed in word-units
only. These words retain their content when the PLC is turned on or the oper-
ating mode is switched between PROGRAM mode and RUN or MONITOR
mode.
Extended Data Memory
Area (EM) (CJ1 and CJ1-H
CPU Units Only)
The EM Area is a multi-purpose data area that can be accessed in word-units
only. These words retain their content when the PLC is turned on or the oper-
ating mode is switched between PROGRAM mode and RUN or MONITOR
mode.
The EM Area is divided into 32,767-word regions called banks. The number of
EM banks depends upon the model of CPU Unit, with a maximum of 13 banks
(0 to C). Refer to 2-1 Specifications for details on the number of EM banks
provided in each model of CPU Unit.
Timer Area There are two timer data areas, the Timer Completion Flags and the Timer
Present Values (PVs). Up to 4,096 timers with timer numbers T0000 to T4095
can be used. The same number is used to access a timer’s Completion Flag
and PV.
Timer Completion Flags
These flags are read as bits. A Completion Flag is turned ON by the system
when the corresponding timer times out (the set time elapses).
Timer PVs
The PVs are read and written as words (16 bits). The PVs count up or down
as the timer operates.
D00000
D20000
D29599
D30000
D31599
D32767
Special I/O Unit Area
(10 words/Unit)
CPU Bus Unit Area
(100 words/Unit)
Word
E0_32767
E2_0000
E2_32767
E0_00000
Word
Word
375
I/O Memory Areas Section 9-2
Counter Area There are two counter data areas, the Counter Completion Flags and the
Counter Present Values (PVs). Up to 4,096 counters with counter numbers
C0000 to C4095 can be used. The same number is used to access a
counter’s Completion Flag and PV.
Counter Completion Flags
These flags are read as bits. A Completion Flag is turned ON by the system
when the corresponding counter counts out (the set value is reached).
Counter PVs
The PVs are read and written as words (16 bits). The PVs count up or down
as the counter operates.
Condition Flags These flags include the Arithmetic Flags such as the Error Flag and Equals
Flag which indicate the results of instruction execution as well as the Always
ON and Always OFF Flags. The Condition Flags are specified with labels
(symbols) rather than addresses.
Clock Pulses The Clock Pulses are turned ON and OFF by the CPU Unit’s internal timer.
These bits are specified with labels (symbols) rather than addresses.
Task Flag Area (TK) Task Flags range from TK00 to TK31 and correspond to cyclic tasks 0 to 31.
A Task Flag will be ON when the corresponding cyclic task is in executable
(RUN) status and OFF when the cyclic task hasn’t been executed (INI) or is in
standby (WAIT) status.
Index Registers (IR) These registers (IR0 to IR15) are used to store PLC memory addresses
(absolute memory addresses in RAM) to indirectly address words in I/O mem-
ory. The Index Registers can be used separately in each task or, for CJ1-H or
CJ1M CPU Units, they can be shared by all tasks.Data Registers (DR)
Data Registers (DR) These registers (DR0 to DR15) are used together with the Index Registers.
When a Data Register is input just before an Index Register, the content of the
Data Register is added to the PLC memory address in the Index Register to
offset that address. The Data Registers are used separately in each task or,
for CJ1-H or CJ1M CPU Units, they can be shared by all tasks.
376
I/O Memory Areas Section 9-2
9-2-3 Data Area Properties
Content after Fatal Errors, Forced Set/Reset Usage
Area Fatal Error Generated Forced Set/
Forced Reset
Functions
Usable?
Execution of FALS(007) Other Fatal Error
IOM Hold Bit
OFF
IOM Hold Bit
ON
IOM Hold Bit
OFF
IOM Hold Bit
ON
CIO
Area
I/O Area Retained Retained Cleared Retained Yes
Data Link Area
CPU Bus Unit Area
Special I/O Unit Area
DeviceNet Area
Internal I/O Area
Work Area (W) Retained Retained Cleared Retained Yes
Holding Area (H) Retained Retained Retained Retained Yes
Auxiliary Area (A) Status varies from address to address. No
Data Memory Area (D) Retained Retained Retained Retained No
Extended Data Memory Area (E) Retained Retained Retained Retained No
Timer Completion Flags (T) Retained Retained Cleared Retained Yes
Timer PVs (T) Retained Retained Cleared Retained No
Counter Completion Flags (C) Retained Retained Retained Retained Yes
Counter PVs (C) Retained Retained Retained Retained No
Task Flags (TK) Cleared Cleared Retained Retained No
Index Registers (IR) Retained Retained Cleared Retained No
Data Registers (DR) Retained Retained Cleared Retained No
377
I/O Area Section 9-3
Content after Mode Change or Power Interruption
Note 1. Mode changed from PROGRAM to RUN/MONITOR or vice-versa.
2. The PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup” setting determines
whether the IOM Hold Bit’s status is held or cleared when the PLC is turned
on.
9-3 I/O Area
I/O Area addresses range from CIO 0000 to CIO 0159 (CIO bits 000000 to
015915), but the area can be expanded to CIO 0000 to CIO 0999 by changing
the first Rack word with any Programming Device other than a Programming
Console. The maximum number of bits that can be allocated for external I/O
will still be 2,560 (160 words) even if the I/O Area is expanded.
Note The maximum number of external I/O points depends upon the CPU Unit
being used.
Words in the I/O Area are allocated to I/O terminals on Basic I/O Units.
Words are allocated to Basic I/O Units based on the slot position (left to right)
and number of words required. The words are allocated consecutively and
empty slots are skipped. Words in the I/O Area that aren’t allocated to Basic
I/O Units can be used only in the program.
Forcing Bit Status Bits in the I/O Area can be force-set and force-reset.
Area Mode Changed
(See note 1.)
PLC Power OFF to ON
IOM Hold Bit Cleared
(See note 2.)
IOM Hold Bit Held
(See note 2.)
IOM Hold
Bit OFF
IOM Hold
Bit ON
IOM Hold
Bit OFF
IOM Hold
Bit ON
IOM Hold
Bit OFF
IOM Hold
Bit ON
CIO
Area
I/O Area Cleared Retained Cleared Cleared Cleared Retained
Data Link Area
CPU Bus Unit Area
Special I/O Unit Area
Built-in I/O Area
(CJ1M CPU Units with built-in
I/O only.)
Serial PLC Link Area
(CJ1M CPU Units only.)
DeviceNet Area
Internal I/O Area
Work Area (W) Cleared Retained Cleared Cleared Cleared Retained
Holding Area (H) Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained
Auxiliary Area (A) Status varies from address to address.
Data Memory Area (D) Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained
Extended Data Memory Area (E) Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained
Timer Completion Flags (T) Cleared Retained Cleared Cleared Cleared Retained
Timer PVs (T) Cleared Retained Cleared Cleared Cleared Retained
Counter Completion Flags (C) Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained
Counter PVs (C) Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained Retained
Task Flags (TK) Cleared Cleared Cleared Cleared Cleared Cleared
Index Registers (IR) Cleared Retained Cleared Cleared Cleared Cleared
Data Registers (DR) Cleared Retained Cleared Cleared Cleared Cleared
378
I/O Area Section 9-3
I/O Area Initialization The contents of the I/O Area will be cleared in the following cases:
1,2,3... 1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM to RUN or MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
(See the following explanation of IOM Hold Bit Operation.)
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not pro-
tected in the PLC Setup.
(See the following explanation of IOM Hold Bit Operation.)
3. The I/O Area is cleared from a Programming Device.
4. PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS(007) error
occurs. (The contents of the I/O Area will be retained if FALS(007) is exe-
cuted.)
IOM Hold Bit Operation If the IOM Hold Bit (A50012) is ON, the contents of the I/O Area won’t be
cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed from
PROGRAM mode to RUN or MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the I/O
Area won’t be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled. All I/O bits,
including outputs, will retain the status that they had before the PLC was
turned off.
Note If the I/O Hold Bit is turned ON, the outputs from the PLC will not be turned
OFF and will maintain their previous status when the PLC is switched from
RUN or MONITOR mode to PROGRAM mode. Make sure that the external
loads will not produce dangerous conditions when this occurs. (When opera-
tion stops for a fatal error, including those produced with the FALS(007)
instruction, all outputs from Output Unit will be turned OFF and only the inter-
nal output status will be maintained.)
Input Bits
A bit in the I/O Area is called an input bit when it is allocated to an Input Unit.
Input bits reflect the ON/OFF status of devices such as push-button switches,
limit switches, and photoelectric switches. There are three ways for the status
of input points to be refreshed in the PLC: normal I/O refreshing, immediate
refreshing, and IORF(097) refreshing.
379
I/O Area Section 9-3
Normal I/O Refreshing The status of I/O points on external devices is read once each cycle after pro-
gram execution.
In the following example, CIO 000101 is allocated to switch 1, an external
switch connected to the input terminal of an Input Unit. The ON/OFF status of
switch 1 is reflected in CIO 000101 once each cycle.
Immediate Refreshing When the immediate refreshing variation of an instruction is specified by
inputting an exclamation point just before the instruction, and the instruction’s
operand is an input bit or word, the word containing the bit or the word itself
will be refreshed just before the instruction is executed. This immediate
refreshing is performed in addition to the normal I/O refreshing performed
once each cycle.
1,2,3... 1. Bit Operand
Just before the instruction is executed, the ON/OFF status of the 16 I/O
points allocated to the word containing the specified bit will be read to the
PLC.
2. Word Operand
Just before the instruction is executed, the ON/OFF status of the 16 I/O
points allocated to the specified word will be read to the PLC.
In the following example, CIO 000101 is allocated to switch 1, an external
switch connected to the input terminal of an Input Unit. The ON/OFF status of
switch 1 is read and reflected in CIO 000101 just before !LD 000101 is exe-
cuted.
LD 000101
000101
CIO 000101
Ladder symbol Mnemonic
CPU Unit
Bit allocation
Once
each
cycle
Switch 1
Input Unit
380
I/O Area Section 9-3
IORF(097) Refreshing When IORF(097) (I/O REFRESH) is executed, the input bits in the specified
range of words are refreshed. This I/O refreshing is performed in addition to
the normal I/O refreshing performed once each cycle.
The following IORF(097) instruction refreshes the status of all I/O points in I/O
Area words CIO 0000 to CIO 0003. The status of input points is read from the
Input Units and the status of output bits is written to the Output Units.
In the following example, the status of input points allocated to CIO 0000 and
CIO 0001 are read from the Input Unit. (CIO 0002 and CIO 0003 are allocated
to Output Units.)
Limitations on Input bits There is no limit on the number of times that input bits can be used as nor-
mally open and normally closed conditions in the program and the addresses
can be programmed in any order.
An input bit cannot be used as an operand in an Output instruction.
000101 !LD 000101
CIO 000101
CPU UnitInput Unit
Read
just
before
instru-
ction
execu-
tion.
Switch 7
Switch 1
Switch 0
Ladder symbol Mnemonic
Input Unit CPU Unit
Read
when
IORF
(097)
is
execu-
ted.
Switch 0
Switch 1
Switch 15
Switch 16
Switch 17
Switch 31
00001 000100 Not allowed if CIO 000100 is an input bit.
381
I/O Area Section 9-3
Input Response Time
Settings
The input response times for each Input Unit can be set in the PLC Setup.
Increasing the input response time will reduce chattering and the effects of
noise and decreasing the input response time allows higher speed input
pulses to be received.
The default value for input response times is 8 ms and the setting range is
0.5 ms to 32 ms.
Note If the time is set to 0 ms, there will still be an ON delay time of 20 µs max. and
an OFF delay time of 300 µs due to delays caused by internal elements.
Output Bits
A bit in the I/O Area is called an output bit when it is allocated to an Output
Unit. The ON/OFF status of an output bits are output to devices such as actu-
ators. There are three ways for the status of output bits to be refreshed to an
Output Unit: normal I/O refreshing, immediate refreshing, and IORF(097)
refreshing.
Normal I/O Refreshing The status of output bits are output to external devices once each cycle after
program execution.
In the following example, CIO 000201 is allocated to an actuator, an external
device connected to an output terminal of an Output Unit. The ON/OFF status
of CIO 000201 is output to that actuator once each cycle.
Immediate Refreshing When the immediate refreshing variation of an instruction is specified by
inputting an exclamation point just before the instruction, and the instruction’s
operand is an output bit or word, the content of the word containing the bit or
the word itself will be output just after the instruction is executed. This immedi-
ate refreshing is performed in addition to the normal I/O refreshing performed
once each cycle.
Input from switch
Input bit
Pulses shorter than the time
constant are not received.
Input time constant Input time constant
000201 OUT 000201
CIO 000201
Ladder symbol Mnemonic
CPU Unit
Bit allocation Output Unit
Actuator
Once
each
cycle
382
I/O Area Section 9-3
1,2,3... 1. Bit Operand
Just after the instruction is executed, the ON/OFF status of the 16 I/O
points allocated to the word containing the specified bit will be output to the
output device(s).
2. Word Operand
Just after the instruction is executed, the ON/OFF status of the 16 I/O
points allocated to the specified word will be output to the output device(s).
In the following example, CIO 000201 is allocated to an actuator, an external
device connected to the output terminal of an Output Unit. The ON/OFF sta-
tus of CIO 000201 is output to the actuator just after !OUT 000201 is exe-
cuted.
IORF(097) Refreshing When IORF(097) (I/O REFRESH) is executed, the ON/OFF status of output
bits in the specified range of words is output to their external devices. This I/O
refreshing is performed in addition to the normal I/O refreshing performed
once each cycle.
The following IORF(097) instruction refreshes the status of all I/O points in I/O
Area words CIO 0000 to CIO 0003. The status of input points is read from the
Input Units and the status of output bits is written to the Output Units.
In this example, the status of input points allocated to CIO 0002 and CIO 0003
are output to the Output Unit. (CIO 0000 and CIO 0001 are allocated to Input
Units.)
000201 OUT 000201
!
Ladder symbol Mnemonic
CIO 000201
CPU Unit
Output Unit
Actuator
Output
just after
instruction
execution.
Bit allocation
CIO 0002
CIO 0003
CPU Unit
Bit allocation Output Unit
Actuator
Output when
IORF (097)
is executed.
383
Data Link Area Section 9-4
Limitations on Output Bits Output bits can be programmed in any order. Output bits can be used as oper-
ands in Input instructions and there is no limit on the number of times that an
output bit is used as a normally open and normally closed condition.
An output bit can be used in only one Output instruction that controls its sta-
tus. If an output bit is used in two or more Output instructions, only the last
instruction will be effective.
Note All outputs on Basic I/O Units and Special I/O Units can be turned OFF by
turning ON the Output OFF Bit (A50015). The status of the output bits won’t
be affected even though the actual outputs are turned OFF.
9-4 Data Link Area
Data Link Area addresses range from CIO 1000 to CIO 1199 (CIO
bits 100000 to 119915). Words in the Link Area are used for data links when
LR is set as the data link area for Controller Link Networks. It is also used for
PLC Links.
A data link automatically (independently of the program) shares data with Link
Areas in other CJ-series CPU Units in the network through a Controller Link
Unit mounted to the PLC’s CPU Rack.
Data links can be generated automatically (using the same number of words
for each node) or manually. When a user defines the data link manually, he
can assign any number of words to each node and make nodes receive-only
or transmit-only. Refer to the Controller Link Units Operation Manual (W309)
for more details.
Words in the Link Area can be used in the program when LR is not set as the
data link area for Controller Link Networks and PLC Links are not used.
Forcing Bit Status Bits in the Data Link Area can be force-set and force-reset.
CIO 000000 is
controlled by CIO
000010.
Only this instruction
is effective.
Controller
Link Unit CPU Unit
Link Areas
Controller
Link Unit
CPU Unit
Controller
Link Unit CPU Unit
Controller Link Network
384
CPU Bus Unit Area Section 9-5
Links to C200HX/HG/HE,
C200HS, and C200H PLCs
Link Area words CIO 1000 to CIO 1063 in CJ-series PLCs correspond to Link
Relay Area words LR 00 to LR 63 for data links created in C200HX/HG/HE
PLCs. When converting C200HX/HG/HE, C200HS, or C200H programs for
use in CJ-series PLCs, change addresses LR 00 through LR 63 to their equiv-
alent Link Area addresses CIO 1000 through CIO 1063.
Link Area Initialization The contents of the Link Area will be cleared in the following cases:
1,2,3... 1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not pro-
tected in the PLC Setup.
3. The Link Area is cleared from a Programming Device.
4. PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS(007) error
occurs. (The contents of the Link Area will be retained if FALS(007) is ex-
ecuted.)
IOM Hold Bit Operation If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the Link
Area won’t be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the contents of the Link Area won’t be
cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed from
PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
9-5 CPU Bus Unit Area
The CPU Bus Unit Area contains 400 words with addresses ranging from
CIO 1500 to CIO 1899. Words in the CPU Bus Unit Area can be allocated to
CPU Bus Units to transfer data such as the operating status of the Unit. Each
Unit is allocated 25 words based on the Unit’s unit number setting.
Data is exchanged with CPU Bus Units once each cycle during I/O refreshing,
which occurs after program execution. (Words in this data area cannot be
refreshed with immediate-refreshing, IORF(097) or FIORF(225) (CJ1-H-R
CPU Units only).)
CPU Bus Unit
CPU Unit
CPU Bus Unit Area
(25 words/Unit)
I/O re-
fresh-
ing
385
CPU Bus Unit Area Section 9-5
Each CPU Bus Unit is allocated 25 words based on its unit number, as shown
in the following table.
The function of the 25 words depends upon the CPU Bus Unit being used. For
details, refer to the Unit’s operation manual.
Words in the CPU Bus Unit Area that aren’t allocated to CPU Bus Units can
be used only in the program.
Forcing Bit Status Bits in the CPU Bus Unit Area can be force-set and force-reset.
CPU Bus Unit Area
Initialization
The contents of the CPU Bus Unit Area will be cleared in the following cases:
1,2,3... 1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM to RUN or MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not pro-
tected in the PLC Setup.
3. The CPU Bus Unit Area is cleared from a Programming Device.
4. PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS(007) error
occurs. (The contents of the CPU Bus Unit Area will be retained when
FALS(007) is executed.)
IOM Hold Bit Operation If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the contents of the CPU Bus Unit Area
won’t be cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed
from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the CPU
Bus Unit Area won’t be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled.
Unit number Allocated words
0 CIO 1500 to CIO 1524
1 CIO 1525 to CIO 1549
2 CIO 1550 to CIO 1574
3 CIO 1575 to CIO 1599
4 CIO 1600 to CIO 1624
5 CIO 1625 to CIO 1649
6 CIO 1650 to CIO 1674
7 CIO 1675 to CIO 1699
8 CIO 1700 to CIO 1724
9 CIO 1725 to CIO 1749
A CIO 1750 to CIO 1774
B CIO 1775 to CIO 1799
C CIO 1800 to CIO 1824
D CIO 1825 to CIO 1849
E CIO 1850 to CIO 1874
F CIO 1875 to CIO 1899
386
Special I/O Unit Area Section 9-6
9-6 Special I/O Unit Area
The Special I/O Unit Area contains 960 words with addresses ranging from
CIO 2000 to CIO 2959. Words in the Special I/O Unit Area are allocated to CJ
to transfer data such as the operating status of the Unit. Each Unit is allocated
10 words based on its unit number setting.
Data is exchanged with Special I/O Units once each cycle during I/O refresh-
ing, which occurs after program execution. The words can also be refreshed
with IORF(097) or FIORF(225) (CJ1-H-R CPU Units only).
Each Special I/O Unit is allocated 25 words based on its unit number, as
shown in the following table.
The function of the 10 words allocated to a Unit depends upon the Special I/O
Unit being used. For details, refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual.
Words in the Special I/O Unit Area that are not allocated to Special I/O Units
can be used only in the program.
Forcing Bit Status Bits in the Special I/O Unit Area can be force-set and force-reset.
Unit number Allocated words
0 CIO 2000 to CIO 2009
1 CIO 2010 to CIO 2019
2 CIO 2020 to CIO 2029
3 CIO 2030 to CIO 2039
4 CIO 2040 to CIO 2049
5 CIO 2050 to CIO 2059
6 CIO 2060 to CIO 2069
7 CIO 2070 to CIO 2079
8 CIO 2080 to CIO 2089
9 CIO 2090 to CIO 2099
10 (A) CIO 2100 to CIO 2109
11 (B) CIO 2110 to CIO 2119
12 (C) CIO 2120 to CIO 2129
13 (D) CIO 2130 to CIO 2139
14 (E) CIO 2140 to CIO 2149
15 (F) CIO 2150 to CIO 2159
16 CIO 2160 to CIO 2169
17 CIO 2170 to CIO 2179
95 CIO 2950 to CIO 2959
Special I/O Unit
CPU Unit Special I/O Unit Area
(10 words/Unit)
I/O re-
freshing,
IORF
(097), or
FIORF
(225)
387
Serial PLC Link Area Section 9-7
Special I/O Unit Area
Initialization
The contents of the Special I/O Unit Area will be cleared in the following
cases:
1,2,3... 1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not pro-
tected in the PLC Setup.
3. The Special I/O Unit Area is cleared from a Programming Device.
4. PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS(007) error
occurs. (The contents of the Special I/O Unit Area will be retained when
FALS(007) is executed.)
IOM Hold Bit Operation If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the contents of the Special I/O Unit Area
will not be cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed
from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the Spe-
cial I/O Unit Area will not be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled.
9-7 Serial PLC Link Area
The Serial PLC Link Area contains 90 words with addresses ranging from
CIO 3100 to CIO 3189. Words in the Serial PLC Link Area can be used for
data links with other PLCs.
Serial PLC Links exchange data among CPU Units via the built-in RS-232C
ports, with no need for special programming.
The Serial PLC Link allocation is set automatically by means of the following
PLC Setup settings at the Polling Unit.
• Serial PLC Link Mode
• Number of Serial PLC Link transfer words
• Maximum Serial PLC Link unit number
Addresses not used for Serial PLC Links can be used only in the program, the
same as the Work Area.
Forcing Bit Status Bits in the Serial PLC Link Area can be force-set and force-reset.
Serial PLC Link Area
Initialization
The contents of the Serial PLC Link Area will be cleared in the following
cases:
1,2,3... 1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not pro-
tected in the PLC Setup.
3. The Serial PLC Link Area is cleared from a Programming Device.
CJ1M CPU
Unit
CJ1M CPU
Unit CJ1M CPU
Unit
RS-232C
port
RS-232C
port
Serial PLC Link
Serial PLC
Link Area
RS-232C
port
388
DeviceNet Area Section 9-8
4. PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS(007) error
occurs. (The contents of the Serial PLC Link Area will be retained when
FALS(007) is executed.)
IOM Hold Bit Operation If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the contents of the Serial PLC Link Area
will not be cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed
from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the Serial
PLC Link Area will not be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled.
9-8 DeviceNet Area
The DeviceNet Area consists of 600 words from CIO 3200 to CIO 3799.
Words in the DeviceNet Area are allocated to Slaves for DeviceNet remote I/O
communications. Data is exchanged regularly to Slaves in the network (inde-
pendent of the program) through the DeviceNet Unit.
Words are allocated to Slaves using fixed allocations according to fixed allo-
cation settings 1, 2, and 3. One of these fixed areas is selected.
The following words are allocated to the DeviceNet Unit when the remote I/O
slave function is used with fixed allocations.
Bits in the DeviceNet Area can be force-set and force-reset.
Note There are two ways to allocated I/O in DeviceNet networks: Fixed allocations
according to node addresses and user-set allocations.
• With fixed allocations, words are automatically allocated to the slave in
the specified fixed allocation area according to the node addresses.
• With user-set allocations, the user can allocate words to Slaves from the
following words.
CIO 0000 to CIO 6143
W000 to W511
H000 to H511
D00000 to D32767
E00000 to E32767, banks 0 to 2
Area Output Area
(master to slaves)
Input Area
(slaves to master)
Fixed Allocation Area 1 CIO 3200 to CIO 3263 CIO 3300 to CIO 3363
Fixed Allocation Area 2 CIO 3400 to CIO 3463 CIO 3500 to CIO 3563
Fixed Allocation Area 3 CIO 3600 to CIO 3663 CIO 3700 to CIO 3763
Area Output Area
(master to slaves)
Input Area
(slaves to master)
Fixed Allocation Area 1 CIO 3370 CIO 3270
Fixed Allocation Area 2 CIO 3570 CIO 3470
Fixed Allocation Area 3 CIO 3770 CIO 3670
389
Internal I/O Area Section 9-9
For details on word allocations, refer to the DeviceNet Operation Manual
(W267).
DeviceNet Area
Initialization
The contents of the DeviceNet Area will be cleared in the following cases:
1,2,3... 1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM to RUN or MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not pro-
tected in the PLC Setup.
3. The DeviceNet Area is cleared from a Programming Device.
4. PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS(007) error
occurs. (The contents of the DeviceNet Area will be retained when
FALS(007) is executed.)
IOM Hold Bit Operation If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the contents of the DeviceNet Area will
not be cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed
from PROGRAM mode to RUN or MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the
DeviceNet Area will not be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled.
9-9 Internal I/O Area
The Internal I/O (Work) Area contains 512 words with addresses ranging from
W000 to W511. These words can be used only in the program as work words.
There are unused words in the CIO Area (CIO 1200 to CIO 1499 and
CIO 3800 to CIO 6143) that can also be used in the program, but use any
available words in the Work Area first because the unused words in the CIO
Area may be allocated to new functions in future versions of CJ-series CPU
Units.
Bits in the Work Area can be force-set and force-reset.
CPU Unit
DeviceNet
Master Unit
DeviceNet Area
DeviceNet
Slaves
With fixed allocation, words are assigned according to node
numbers. (If a Slave requires two or more words, it will occupy
as many node numbers as words required.)
390
Holding Area Section 9-10
Work Area Initialization The contents of the Work Area will be cleared in the following cases:
1,2,3... 1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM to RUN or MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not pro-
tected in the PLC Setup.
3. The Work Area is cleared from a Programming Device.
4. PLC operation is stopped when a fatal error other than an FALS(007) error
occurs. (The contents of the Work Area will be retained when FALS(007)
is executed.)
IOM Hold Bit Operation If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the contents of the Work Area won’t be
cleared when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed from
PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the contents of the Work
Area won’t be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled.
9-10 Holding Area
The Holding Area contains 512 words with addresses ranging from H000 to
H511 (bits H00000 to H51115). These words can be used only in the pro-
gram.
Holding Area bits can be used in any order in the program and can be used as
normally open or normally closed conditions as often as necessary.
Holding Area Initialization Data in the Holding Area is not cleared when the PLC’s power supply is cycled
or the PLC’s operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN or
MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
A Holding Area bit will be cleared if it is programmed between IL(002) and
ILC(003) and the execution condition for IL(002) is OFF. To keep a bit ON
even when the execution condition for IL(002) is OFF, turn ON the bit with the
SET instruction just before IL(002).
Self-maintaining Bits When a self-maintaining bit is programmed with a Holding Area bit, the self-
maintaining bit won’t be cleared even when the power is reset.
Note 1. If a Holding Area bit is not used for the self-maintaining bit, the bit will be
turned OFF and the self-maintaining bit will be cleared when the power is
reset.
2. If a Holding Area bit is used but not programmed as a self-maintaining bit
as in the following diagram, the bit will be turned OFF by execution condi-
tion A when the power is reset.
391
Auxiliary Area Section 9-11
3. The Function Block Holding Area words are allocated from H512 to H1535.
These words can be used only for the function block instance area (inter-
nally allocated variable area). These words cannot be specified as instruc-
tion operands in the user program.
Precautions When a Holding Area bit is used in a KEEP(011) instruction, never use a nor-
mally closed condition for the reset input if the input device uses an AC power
supply. When the power supply goes OFF or is temporarily interrupted, the
input will go OFF before the PLC’s internal power supply and the Holding Area
bit will be reset.
Instead, use a configuration like the one shown below.
There are no restrictions in the order of using bit address or in the number of
N.C. or N.O. conditions that can be programmed.
9-11 Auxiliary Area
The Auxiliary Area contains 960 words with addresses ranging from A000 to
A959). These words are preassigned as flags and control bits to monitor and
control operation.
A000 through A447 are read-only, but A448 through A959 can be read or writ-
ten from the program or a Programming Device.
Forcing Bit Status
Bits in the Auxiliary Area cannot be force-set and force-reset continuously.
Writing Auxiliary Area Data
The following operations can be performed from a Programming Device to
write data in the Auxiliary Area.
• Using the CX-Programmer: Online set/reset (not force-set/force-reset),
changing present values when monitoring programming addresses (set
values dialog box), or transferring data to the PLC after editing the PLC
data tables. Refer to the CX-Programmer Operation Manual (W414).
• Using a Programming Console: Temporarily force-setting/force-resetting
bits from the Bit/Word Monitor or the 3-word Monitor operation (refer to
the Programming Console Operation Manual (W341)).
Note There is a possibility that a function will be assigned to an undefined Auxiliary
Area word or bit in a future upgrade of the CPU Units. Do not use undefined
words or bits in the Auxiliary Area as work words or bits in the user program.
Input
Unit
Set input
Reset input
Input
Unit
Set input
Reset input
392
Auxiliary Area Section 9-11
Functions
The following tables list the functions of Auxiliary Area flags and control bits.
The table is organized according to the functions of the flags and bits. Some
of these functions are not supported by some CPU Unit models and unit ver-
sions. For more details or to look up a bit by its address, refer to Appendix C
Auxiliary Area.
Initial Settings
CPU Unit Settings
Basic I/O Unit Settings
Name Address Description Access
I/O Response Times in Basic
I/O Units
A22000 to
A25915
Contains the current I/O response times for CJ-series Basic
I/O Units.
Read-only
IOM Hold Bit A50012 Determines whether the contents of I/O memory are
retained when the PLC’s power is reset or the PLC’s operat-
ing mode is changed (from PROGRAM to RUN/MONITOR
or vice-versa).
Turn ON this bit to maintain I/O memory when changing
between PROGRAM and RUN or MONITOR mode.
Turn OFF this bit to clear I/O memory when changing the
changing between PROGRAM and RUN or MONITOR
mode.
Read/write
Forced Status Hold BIt A50013 Determines whether the status of force-set and force-reset
bits is maintained when the PLC’s power is reset or the
PLC’s operating mode is changed (between PROGRAM and
RUN or MONITOR mode).
Read/write
Power Interruption Disable
Setting (Not supported by
CJ1@-CPU@@ CPU Units.)
A530 Set to A5A5 hex to disable power interrupts (except the
Power OFF Interrupt task) between DI(693) and EI(694)
instructions.
Read/write
Name Address Description Access
Status of DIP Switch Pin 6 A39512 Contains the status set on pin 6 of the CPU Unit’s DIP
switch. (Refreshed every cycle.)
Read-only
Name Address Description Access
Basic I/O Unit Status Area A05000 to
A06915
Indicates alarm status (load short-circuit protection) for
Basic I/O Units. (From slot 0 on Rack 0 + slot 7 on Rack 3)
Read-only
I/O Allocation Status A260 Indicates the current status of I/O allocation, i.e., Automatic
I/O Allocation at Startup or User-set I/O Allocations.
Read-only
Units Detected at Startup
(Racks 0 to 3)
(Not supported by CJ1@-
CPU@@ CPU Units.)
Rack 0:
A33600 to
A33603
Rack 1:
A33604 to
A33607
Rack 2:
A33608 to
A33611
Rack 3:
A33612 to
A33615
The number of Units detected on each Rack is stored in 1-
digit hexadecimal (0 to A hex).
Example: The following would be stored if Rack 0 had 1 Unit,
Rack 1 had 4 Units, Rack 2 had 8 Units and Rack 3 had 10
Units:
A336 = A 8 4 1
Read-only
393
Auxiliary Area Section 9-11
CPU Bus Unit Flags/Bits
Special I/O Unit Flags/Bits
Flags for Programming
Name Address Description Access
CPU Bus Unit Initialization
Flags
A30200 to
A30215
These flags correspond to CPU Bus Units 0 to 15. A flag will
be ON while the corresponding Unit is initializing after the
power is turned ON or the Unit’s Restart Bit (in A501) is
turned ON.
Read-only
CPU Bus Unit Restart Bits A50100 to
A50115
These bits correspond to CPU Bus Units 0 to 15. Turn a bit
from OFF to ON to restart the corresponding Unit.
Read/write
Name Address Description Access
Special I/O Unit Initialization
Flags
A33000 to
A33515
These flags correspond to Special I/O Units 0 to 95. A flag
will be ON while the corresponding Unit is initializing after
the power is turned ON or the Unit’s Restart Bit is turned
ON. (Restart Bits A50200 to A50715 correspond to Units 0
to 95.)
Read-only
Special I/O Unit Restart Bits A50200 to
A50715
These bits correspond to Special I/O Units 0 to 95. Turn a bit
from OFF to ON to restart the corresponding Unit.
Read/write
Name Address Description Access
First Cycle Flag A20011 This flag is turned ON for one cycle when program execution
starts (the operating mode is switched from PROGRAM to
RUN/MONITOR).
Read-only
Initial Task Execution Flag A20015 When a task switches from INI to RUN status for the first
time, this flag will be turned ON within the task for one cycle
only.
Read-only
Task Started Flag
(Not supported by CJ1@-
CPU@@ CPU Units.)
A20014 When a task switches from WAIT or INI to RUN status, this
flag will be turned ON within the task for one cycle only.
The only difference between this flag and A20015 is that this
flag also turns ON when the task switches from WAIT to
RUN status.
Read-only
10-ms Incrementing Free
Running Timer
(Unit versions 3.0 or later)
A000 This word contains the system timer used after the power is
turned ON.
0000 hex is set when the power is turned ON and this value
is automatically incremented by 1 every 10 ms. The value
returns to 0000 hex after reaching FFFF hex (655,350 ms),
and then continues to be automatically incremented by 1
every 10 ms.
Note: The timer will continue to be incremented when the
operating mode is switched to RUN mode.
Example: The interval can be counted between processing
A and processing B without requiring timer
instructions. This is achieved by calculating the
difference between the value in A000 for process-
ing A and the value in A000 for processing B. The
interval is counted in 10 ms units.
Read-only
394
Auxiliary Area Section 9-11
Cycle Time Information
Task Information
100-ms Incrementing Free
Running Timer
(Unit versions 3.0 or later)
A001 This word contains the system timer used after the power is
turned ON.
0000 hex is set when the power is turned ON and this value
is automatically incremented by 1 every 100 ms. The value
returns to 0000 hex after reaching FFFF hex (6,553,500
ms), and then continues to be automatically incremented by
1 every 100 ms.
Note: The timer will continue to be incremented when the
operating mode is switched to RUN mode.
Read-only
1-s Incrementing Free
Running Timer
(Unit version 4.0 or later)
A002 This word contains the system timer used after the power is
turned ON.
0000 hex is set when the power is turned ON and this value
is automatically incremented by 1 every 1 s. The value
returns to 0000 hex after reaching FFFF hex (65,535 s), and
then continues to be automatically incremented by 1 every
1 s.
Note: The timer will continue to be incremented when the
operating mode is switched to RUN mode.
Read-only
Name Address Description Access
Maximum Cycle Time A262 to
A263
These words contain the maximum cycle time in units of
0.1 ms. In a Parallel Processing Mode, the maximum cycle
time of the program execution cycle will be given.
The time is updated every cycle and is recorded in 32-bit
binary (0 to FFFF FFFF, or 0 to 429,496,729.5 ms). (A263 is
the leftmost word.)
Read-only
Present Cycle Time A264 to
A265
These words contain the present cycle time in units of
0.1 ms. In a Parallel Processing Mode, the maximum cycle
time of the program execution cycle will be given. The time is
updated every cycle and is recorded in 32-bit binary (0 to
FFFF FFFF, or 0 to 429,496,729.5 ms). (A265 is the leftmost
word.)
Read-only
Peripheral Servicing Cycle
Time
(CJ1-H CPU Units only)
A268 In Parallel Processing with Synchronous or Asynchronous
Memory Access, this word contains the peripheral servicing
cycle time in units of 0.1 ms. The time is updated every cycle
and is recorded in 16-bit binary (0 to 4E20 hex, or 0.0 to
2,000.0 ms).
Read-only
Name Address Description Access
Task Number when Program
Stopped
A294 This word contains the task number of the task that was
being executed when program execution was stopped
because of a program error.
Read-only
Maximum Interrupt Task
Processing Time
A440 Contains the Maximum Interrupt Task Processing Time in
units of 0.1 ms.
Read-only
Interrupt Task with Max.
Processing Time
A441 Contains the task number of the interrupt task with the maxi-
mum processing time. Hexadecimal values 8000 to 80FF
correspond to task numbers 00 to FF. Bit 15 is turned ON
when an interrupt has occurred.
Read-only
IR/DR Operation between
Tasks
(Not supported by CJ1@-
CPU@@ CPU Units.)
A09914 Turn ON this bit to share index and data registers between
all tasks. Turn OFF this bit to use separate index and data
registers between in each task.
Read-only
Name Address Description Access
395
Auxiliary Area Section 9-11
Debugging Information
■Online Editing
■Output Control
■Differentiate Monitor
■Data Tracing
File Memory Information
Name Address Description Access
Online Editing Wait Flag A20110 ON when an online editing process is waiting.
(An online editing request was received while online editing
was disabled.)
Read-only
Online Editing Processing
Flag
A20111 ON when an online editing process is being executed. Read-only
Online Editing Disable Bit
Validator
A52700 to
A52707
The Online Editing Disable Bit (A52709) is valid only when
this byte contains 5A.
Read/write
Online Editing Disable Bit A52709 Turn this bit ON to disable online editing. Read/write
Name Address Description Access
Output OFF Bit A50015 Turn this bit ON to turn OFF all outputs from Basic I/O Units,
Output Units, and Special I/O Units.
Read/write
Name Address Description Access
Differentiate Monitor
Completed Flag
A50809 ON when the differentiate monitor condition has been estab-
lished during execution of differentiation monitoring.
Read/write
Name Address Description Access
Sampling Start Bit A50815 When a data trace is started by turning this bit from OFF to
ON from a Programming Device, the PLC will begin storing
data in Trace Memory by one of the three following methods:
1) Periodic sampling (10 to 2,550 ms)
2) Sampling at execution of TRSM(045)
3) Sampling at the end of every cycle.
Read/write
Trace Start Bit A50814 Turn this bit from OFF to ON to establish the trigger condi-
tion. The offset indicated by the delay value (positive or neg-
ative) determines which data samples are valid.
Read/write
Trace Busy Flag A50813 ON when the Sampling Start Bit (A50815) is turned from
OFF to ON. OFF when the trace is completed.
Read/write
Trace Completed Flag A50812 ON when sampling of a region of trace memory has been
completed during execution of a Trace. OFF when the next
time the Sampling Start Bit (A50815) is turned from OFF to
ON.
Read/write
Trace Trigger Monitor Flag A50811 ON when a trigger condition is established by the Trace Start
Bit (A50814). OFF when the next Data Trace is started by
the Sampling Start bit (A50815).
Read/write
Name Address Description Access
Memory Card Type A34300 to
A34302
Indicates the type of Memory Card, if any, installed. Read-only
Memory Card Format Error
Flag
A34307 ON when the Memory Card is not formatted or a formatting
error has occurred.
Read-only
File Transfer Error Flag A34308 ON when an error occurred while writing data to file memory. Read-only
File Write Error Flag A34309 ON when data cannot be written to file memory because it is
write-protected or the data exceeds the capacity of the file
memory.
Read-only
File Read Error A34310 ON when a file could not be read because of a malfunction
(file is damaged or data is corrupted).
Read-only
396
Auxiliary Area Section 9-11
File Missing Flag A34311 ON when an attempt is made to read a file that doesn’t exist,
or an attempt is made to write to a file in a directory that
doesn’t exist.
Read-only
File Memory Operation Flag A34313 ON while any of the following operations is being executed.
OFF when none of them are being executed.
Memory Card detection started.
CMND instruction sending a FINS command to the local
CPU Unit.
FREAD/FWRIT instructions.
Program replacement using the control bit in the Auxiliary
Area.
Easy backup operation.
If this flag is ON, write and comparison operations to the
Memory Card cannot be executed.
Read-only
Memory Card Detected Flag A34315 ON when a Memory Card has been detected.
OFF when a Memory Card has not been detected.
Read-only
Number of Items to
Transfer
A346 to
A347
These words contain the number of words or fields remain-
ing to be transferred (32 bits).
For binary files (.IOM), the value is decremented for each
word that is read. For text (.TXT) or CSV (.CSV) data, the
value is decremented for each field that is read.
Read-only
Accessing File Data Flag A34314 ON while file data is being accessed. Read-only
EM File Memory Format Error
Flag
(CJ1/CJ1-H CPU Units only)
A34306 Turns ON when a format error occurs in the first EM bank
allocated for file memory.
Turns OFF when formatting is completed normally.
Read-only
EM File Memory Starting
Bank
(CJ1/CJ1-H CPU Units only)
A344 Contains the starting bank number of EM file memory (bank
number of the first formatted bank).
This number is read when starting to write data from a Mem-
ory Card. If the largest bank number for which there is an
EM file for simple backup (BACKUPE@.IOM, where repre-
sents consecutive bank numbers) is the same as the largest
bank number supported by the CPU Unit, the EM Area will
be formatted as file memory using the value in A344. If the
maximum bank numbers are different, the EM Area will be
returned to it’s unformatted (not file memory) status.
Read-only
Program Index File Flag A34501 Turns ON when the comment memory contains a program
index file.
0: No file
1: File present
Read-only
Comment File Flag A34502 Turns ON when the comment memory contains a comment
file.
0: No file
1: File present
Read-only
Symbol Table File Flag A34503 Turns ON when the comment memory contains a symbol
table file.
0: No file
1: File present
Read-only
File Deletion Flags A39506 The system automatically deleted the remainder of an EM
file memory file that was being updated when a power inter-
ruption occurred.
Read-only
A39507 The system automatically deleted the remainder of a Mem-
ory Card file that was being updated when a power interrup-
tion occurred.
Read-only
Name Address Description Access
397
Auxiliary Area Section 9-11
Simple Backup Write Capacity A397 If a write for a simple backup operation fails, A397 will con-
tain the Memory Card capacity that would have been
required to complete the write operation. The value is in
Kbytes. (This indicates that the Memory Card did not have
the specified capacity when the write operation was started.)
0001 to FFFF hex: Write error (value indicates required
capacity from 1 to 65,535 Kbytes).
A397 will be cleared to 0000 hex when the write is com-
pleted successfully for a simple backup operation.
Read-only
Program Replacement End
Code
A65000 to
A65007
Normal End (i.e., when A65014 is OFF)
01 hex: Program file (.OBJ) replaced.
Error End (i.e., when A65014 is ON)
00 hex: Fatal error
01 hex: Memory error
11 hex: Write-protected
12 hex: Program replacement password error
21 hex: No Memory Card
22 hex: No such file
23 hex: Specified file exceeds capacity (memory error).
31 hex: One of the following in progress:
File memory operation
User program write
Operating mode change
Read-only
Replacement Error Flag A65014 ON when the Replacement Start Bit (A65015) has been
turned ON to replace the program, but there is an error. If
the Replacement Start Bit is turned ON again, the Replace-
ment Error Flag will be turned OFF.
Read/write
Replacement Start Bit A65015 Program replacement starts when the Replacement Start Bit
is turned ON if the Program Password (A651) is valid (A5A5
hex). Do not turn OFF the Replacement Start Bit during pro-
gram replacement.
When the power is turned ON or program replacement is
completed, the Replacement Start Bit will be turned OFF,
regardless of whether replacement was completed normally
or in error.
It is possible to confirm if program replacement is being exe-
cuted by reading the Replacement Start Bit using a Pro-
gramming Device, PT, or host computer.
Read/write
Name Address Description Access
398
Auxiliary Area Section 9-11
Program Error Information
Program Password A651 Input the password to replace a program.
A5A5 hex: Replacement Start Bit (A65015) is enabled.
Any other value: Replacement Start Bit (A65015) is dis-
abled.
When the power is turned ON or program replacement is
completed, the Replacement Start Bit will be turned OFF,
regardless of whether replacement was completed normally
or in error.
Read/write
Program File Name A654 to
A657
When program replacement starts, the program file name
will be stored in ASCII. File names can be specified up to
eight characters in length excluding the extension.
File names are stored in the following order: A654 to A657
(i.e., from the lowest word to the highest), and from the high-
est byte to the lowest. If a file name is less than eight charac-
ters, the lowest remaining bytes and the highest remaining
word will be filled with spaces (20 hex). Null characters and
space characters cannot be used within file names.
Example: File name is ABC.OBJ
Read/write
Name Address Description Access
Program Error Flag
(Fatal error)
A40109 ON when program contents are incorrect. CPU Unit opera-
tion will stop.
Read-only
Program Error Task A294 Provides the type and number of the tack that was being
executed when program execution stops as a result of a pro-
gram error.
Read-only
Name Address Description Access
399
Auxiliary Area Section 9-11
Error Information
■Error Log, Error Code
■FAL/FALS Error Information
Instruction Processing Error
Flag
A29508 This flag and the Error Flag (ER) will be turned ON when an
instruction processing error has occurred and the PLC
Setup has been set to stop operation for an instruction error.
Read-only
Indirect DM/EM BCD Error
Flag
A29509 This flag and the Access Error Flag (AER) will be turned ON
when an indirect DM/EM BCD error has occurred and the
PLC Setup has been set to stop operation an indirect DM/
EM BCD error.
Read-only
Illegal Access Error Flag A29510 This flag and the Access Error Flag (AER) will be turned ON
when an illegal access error has occurred and the PLC
Setup has been set to stop operation an illegal access error.
Read-only
No END Error Flag A29511 ON when there isn’t an END(001) instruction in each pro-
gram within a task.
Read-only
Task Error Flag A29512 ON when a task error has occurred. The following conditions
will generate a task error.
1) There isn’t an executable cyclic task.
2) There isn’t a program allocated to the task.
Read-only
Differentiation Overflow Error
Flag
A29513 ON when the specified Differentiation Flag Number exceeds
the allowed value.
Read-only
Illegal Instruction Error Flag A29514 ON when a program that cannot be executed has been
stored.
Read-only
UM Overflow Error Flag A29515 ON when the last address in UM (user program memory)
has been exceeded.
Read-only
Program Address Where Pro-
gram Stopped
A298 and
A299
These words contain the 8-digit hexadecimal program
address of the instruction where program execution was
stopped due to a program error.
(A299 contains the leftmost digits.)
Read-only
Name Address Description Access
Error Log Area A100 to
A199
When an error has occurred, the error code, error contents,
and error’s time and date are stored in the Error Log Area.
Read-only
Error Log Pointer A300 When an error occurs, the Error Log Pointer is incremented
by 1 to indicate the location where the next error record will
be recorded as an offset from the beginning of the Error Log
Area (A100).
Read-only
Error Log Pointer Reset Bit A50014 Turn this bit ON to reset the Error Log Pointer (A300) to 00. Read/write
Error Code A400 When a non-fatal error (user-defined FALS(006) or system
error) or a fatal error (user-defined FALS(007) or system
error) occurs, the 4-digit hexadecimal error code is written to
this word.
Read-only
Name Address Description Access
FAL Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)
A40215 ON when a non-fatal error is generated by executing
FAL(006).
Read-only
Executed FAL Number Flags A360 to
A391
The flag corresponding to the specified FAL number will be
turned ON when FAL(006) is executed. Bits A36001 to
A39115 correspond to FAL numbers 001 to 511.
Read-only
FALS Error Flag
(Fatal error)
A40106 ON when a fatal error is generated by the FALS(007)
instruction.
Read-only
FAL/FALS Number for Sys-
tem Error Simulation
(Not supported by CJ1@-
CPU@@ CPU Units.)
A529 Set a dummy FAL/FALS number to use to simulate the sys-
tem error using FAL(006) or FALS(007).
0001 to 01FF hex: FAL/FALS numbers 1 to 511
0000 or 0200 to FFFF hex: No FAL/FALS number for system
error simulation. (No error will be generated.)
Read/write
Name Address Description Access
400
Auxiliary Area Section 9-11
■Memory Error Information
■PLC Setup Error Information
Name Address Description Access
Memory Error Flag
(Fatal error)
A40115 ON when an error occurred in memory or there was an error
in automatic transfer from the Memory Card when the power
was turned ON.
The ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will light
and CPU Unit operation will stop when this flag turns ON.
If the automatic data transfer at startup fails, A40309 will be
turned ON. If an error occurs in automatic transfer at startup,
this error cannot be cleared.
Read-only
Memory Error Location A40300 to
A40308
When a memory error occurs, the Memory Error Flag
(A40115) is turned ON and one of the following flags is
turned ON to indicate the memory area where the error
occurred.
A40300: User program
A40304: PLC Setup
A40305: Registered I/O Table
A40307: Routing Table
A40308: CJ-series CPU Bus Unit Settings
Read-only
Startup Memory Card Transfer
Error Flag
A40309 ON when an error occurs in automatically transferring a file
from the Memory Card to the CPU Unit at startup, including
when a file is missing or a Memory Card is not mounted.
The error can be cleared by turning OFF the power. (This
error cannot be cleared while the power is ON.)
Read-only
Flash Memory Error
(Not supported by CJ1@-
CPU@@ CPU Units.)
A40310 Turns ON when the flash memory fails. Read-only
Name Address Description Access
PLC Setup Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)
A40210 ON when there is a setting error in the PLC Setup. Read-only
PLC Setup Error Location A406 When there is a setting error in the PLC Setup, the location
of that error is written to A406 in 16 bits binary. The location
is given as the address set on the Programming Console.
Read-only
401
Auxiliary Area Section 9-11
■Interrupt Task Error Information
■I/O Information
Name Address Description Access
Interrupt Task Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)
A40213 ON when the Detect Interrupt Task Errors setting in the PLC
Setup is set to “Detect” and one of the following occurs for
the same Special I/O Unit.
FIORF(225), IORF(097) (CJ1-H-R CPU Units only),
IORD(222) or IOWR(223) in a cyclic task are competing with
FIORF(225), IORF(097), IORD(222) or IOWR(223) in an
interrupt task.
FIORF(225), IORF(097), IORD(222) or IOWR(223) was exe-
cuted in an interrupt task when I/O was being refreshed.
Note If cyclic refreshing is not disabled in the PLC Setup for
a Special I/O Unit and FIORF(225), IORF(097),
IORD(222) or IOWR(223) is executed for the same
Special I/O Unit in an interrupt task, a duplicate
refreshing status will occur and an interrupt task error
will occur.
Read-only
Interrupt Task Error Cause
Flag
A42615 Indicates the cause of an Interrupt Task Error. Read-only
Interrupt Task Error, Task
Number
A42600 to
A42611
The function of these bits depends upon the status of
A42615 (the Interrupt Task Error Flag).
A42615 ON:
Contains the Special I/O Unit’s unit number when an attempt
was made to refresh a Special I/O Unit’s I/O from an inter-
rupt task with IORF(097) while the Unit’s I/O was being
refreshed by cyclic I/O refreshing (duplicate refreshing).
Read-only
Name Address Description Access
Basic I/O Unit Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)
A40212 ON when an error has occurred in a Basic I/O Unit (including
C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units and C200H Interrupt
Input Units).
Read-only
Basic I/O Unit Error, Slot
Number
A40800 to
A40807
Contains the binary slot number where the error occurred
when an error has occurred in a Basic I/O Unit (including
C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units and C200H Interrupt
Input Units).
Read-only
Basic I/O Unit Error, Rack
Number
A40808 to
A40815
Contains the binary rack number where the error occurred
when an error has occurred in a Basic I/O Unit (including
C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units and C200H Interrupt
Input Units).
Read-only
I/O Setting Error Flag
(Fatal error)
A40110 ON when an Input Unit has been installed in an Output
Unit’s slot or vice-versa, so the Input and Output Units clash
in the registered I/O table.
Read-only
Expansion I/O Rack Number
Duplication Flags
A40900 to
A40903
The corresponding flag will be turned ON when an Expan-
sion I/O Rack’s starting word address was set from a Pro-
gramming Device and two Racks have overlapping word
allocations or a Rack’s starting address exceeds CIO 0901.
Bits 00 to 07 correspond to Racks 0 to 3.
Read-only
Too Many I/O Points Flag
(Fatal error)
A40111 ON when the number of I/O points being used in Basic I/O
Units exceeds the maximum allowed for the PLC.
Read-only
Too Many I/O Points, Details A40700 to
A40712
The three possible causes of the Too Many I/O Points Error
are listed below. The 3-digit binary value in A40713 to
A40715 indicates the cause of the error.
The number of I/O points will be written here when the total
number of I/O points set in the I/O Table (excluding Slave
Racks) exceed the maximum allowed for the CPU Unit.
The number of interrupt inputs will be written here when
there are more than 32 interrupt inputs.
The number of Racks will be written here when the number
of Expansion I/O Racks exceeds the maximum.
Read-only
402
Auxiliary Area Section 9-11
Too Many I/O Points, Cause A40713 to
A40715
These three bits indicate the cause of the Too Many I/O
Points Error. (See A40700 to A40712.)
000 (0): Too many I/O points.
001 (1): Too many Interrupt Input points.
101 (5): Too many Expansion Racks connected.
111 (7): Too many Units are connected to one rack (more
than 10).
Read-only
I/O Bus Error Flag
(Fatal error)
A40114 ON when an error occurs in a data transfer between the
CPU Unit and a Unit mounted to a slot or the End Cover is
not connected to the CPU Rack or an Expansion Rack.
Read-only
I/O Bus Error Slot Number A40400 to
A40407
Contains the 8-bit binary slot number (00 to 09) where an
I/O Bus Error occurred. Contain 0E hex of the End Cover is
not connected to the CPU Rack or an Expansion Rack.
Read-only
I/O Bus Error Rack Number A40408 to
A40415
Contains the 8-bit binary rack number (00 to 07) where an
I/O Bus Error occurred.
Read-only
I/O Table Errors
(Not supported by CJ1@-
CPU@@ CPU Units.)
A26100 CPU Bus Unit Setup Area Initialization Error Flag
ON: Error in CPU Bus Unit Setup
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
Read-only
A26102 I/O Overflow Flag
ON: Overflow in maximum number of I/O points.
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
Read-only
A26103 Duplication Error Flag
ON: The same unit number was used more than once.
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
Read-only
A26104 I/O Bus Error Flag
ON: I/O bus error
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
Read-only
A26107 Special I/O Unit Error Flag
ON: Error in a Special I/O Unit
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
Read-only
A26109 I/O Unconfirmed Error Flag
ON: I/O detection has not been completed.
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
Read-only
Duplication Error Flag
(Fatal error)
A40113 ON in the following cases:
Two CPU Bus Units have been assigned the same unit num-
ber.
Two Special I/O Units have been assigned the same unit
number.
Two Basic I/O Units have been allocated the same data area
words.
The same rack number is set for more than one Expansion
Rack.
Read-only
Interrupt Input Unit Position
Error Flag
(Not supported by CJ1@-
CPU@@ CPU Units.)
A40508 CJ1-H CPU Units:
ON when the Interrupt Input Unit is not connected in one of
the five positions (slots 0 to 4) next to the CPU Unit on the
CPU Rack.
CJ1M CPU Units:
ON when the Interrupt Input Unit is not connected in one of
the three positions (slots 0 to 2) next to the CPU Unit on the
CPU Rack.
Read-only
Name Address Description Access
403
Auxiliary Area Section 9-11
■CPU Bus Unit Information
■Special I/O Unit Information
■Other PLC Operating Information
Name Address Description Access
CPU Bus Unit Number Dupli-
cation Flags
A41000 to
A41015
The Duplication Error Flag (A40113) and the corresponding
flag in A410 will be turned ON when a CPU Bus Unit’s unit
number has been duplicated.
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F.
Read-only
CPU Bus Unit Error, Unit
Number Flags
A41700 to
A41715
When an error occurs in a data exchange between the CPU
Unit and a CPU Bus Unit, the CPU Bus Unit Error Flag
(A40207) and the corresponding flag in A417 are turned ON.
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F.
Read-only
CPU Bus Unit Setting Error,
Unit Number Flags
A42700 to
A42715
When a CPU Bus Unit Setting Error occurs, A40203 and the
corresponding flag in A427 are turned ON.
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F.
Read-only
CPU Bus Unit Setting Error
Flag
(Non-fatal error)
A40203 ON when an installed CPU Bus Unit does not match the
CPU Bus Unit registered in the I/O table.
Read-only
CPU Bus Unit Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)
A40207 ON when an error occurs in a data exchange between the
CPU Unit and a CPU Bus Unit (including an error in the CPU
Bus Unit itself).
Read-only
Name Address Description Access
Special I/O Unit Number
Duplication Flags
A41100 to
A41615
The Duplication Error Flag (A40113) and the corresponding
flag in A411 through A416 will be turned ON when a Special
I/O Unit’s unit number has been duplicated. (Bits A41100 to
A41615 correspond to unit numbers 0 to 95.)
Read-only
Special I/O Unit Setting Error
Flag
(Non-fatal error)
A40202 ON when an installed Special I/O Unit does not match the
Special I/O Unit registered in the I/O table.
Read-only
Special I/O Unit Setting Error,
Unit Number Flags
A42800 to
A43315
When a Special I/O Unit Setting Error occurs, A40202 and
the corresponding flag in these words are turned ON. (Bits
A42800 to A43315 correspond to unit numbers 0 to 95.)
Read-only
Special I/O Unit Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)
A40206 ON when an error occurs in a data exchange between the
CPU Unit and a Special I/O Unit (including an error in the
Special I/O Unit itself).
Read-only
Special I/O Unit Error, Unit
Number Flags
A41800 to
A42315
When an error occurs in a data exchange between the CPU
Unit and a Special I/O Unit, the Special I/O Unit Error Flag
(A40206) and the corresponding flag in these words are
turned ON. (Bits A42800 to A43315 correspond to unit num-
bers 0 to 95.)
Read-only
Name Address Description Access
Battery Error Flag
(Non-fatal error)
A40204 ON if the CPU Unit’s battery is disconnected or its voltage is
low and the PLC Setup has been set to detect this error.
(Detect Low Battery)
Read-only
Cycle Time Too Long Flag
(Fatal error)
A40108 ON if the cycle time exceeds the maximum cycle time set in
the PLC Setup. In the Parallel Processing Modes, the pro-
gram execution cycle time will be used. (Watch Cycle Time)
Read-only
Peripheral Servicing Too Long
Flag (Fatal error, CJ1-H CPU
Unit only.)
A40515 Turns ON when the peripheral servicing time in a Parallel
Processing Mode exceeds 2 s. This will also cause a cycle
time error and operation will stop.
Read-only
FPD Teaching Bit A59800 Turn this bit ON to set the monitoring time in FPD(269) auto-
matically with the teaching function.
Read/write
Memory Backup Battery Fail-
ure Flag
A39511 Data from the I/O memory areas that are maintained when
power is turned OFF (HR, DM, etc.) are backed up with a
Battery. A39511 turns ON if the Battery voltage drops and
the data can no longer be maintained. The data in the I/O
memory will not be dependable when this happens.
Read-only
404
Auxiliary Area Section 9-11
Clock
■Clock Information
The above clock information in the Auxiliary Area is updated every few cycles
according to the internal clock. For information on the accuracy of the internal
clock, refer to 2-1-1 Performance Specifications.
Name Address Description Access
Clock Data The clock data from the clock built into the CPU Unit is stored here in BCD. Read-only
A35100 to
A35107
Seconds: 00 to 59 (BCD) Read-only
A35108 to
A35115
Minutes: 00 to 59 (BCD) Read-only
A35200 to
A35207
Hour: 00 to 23 (BCD) Read-only
A35208 to
A35215
Day of the month: 01 to 31 (BCD) Read-only
A35300 to
A35307
Month: 01 to 12 (BCD) Read-only
A35308 to
A35315
Year: 00 to 99 (BCD) Read-only
A35400 to
A35407
Day of the week: 00: Sunday, 01: Monday,
02: Tuesday, 03: Wednesday, 04: Thursday,
05: Friday, 06: Saturday
Read-only
Operation Start Time
(Not supported by CJ1@-
CPU@@ CPU Units.)
A515 to
A517
The time that operation started as a result of changing the
operating mode to RUN or MONITOR mode is stored here in
BCD.
A51500 to A51507: Seconds (00 to 59)
A51508 to A51515: Minutes (00 to 59)
A51600 to A51607: Hour (00 to 23)
A51608 to A51615: Day of month (01 to 31)
A51700 to A51707: Month (01 to 12)
A51708 to A51715: Year (00 to 99)
Note: The previous start time is stored after turning ON the
power supply until operation is started.
Read/write
Operation End Time
(Not supported by CJ1@-
CPU@@ CPU Units.)
A518 to
A520
The time that operation stopped as a result of changing the
operating mode to PROGRAM mode is stored here in BCD.
A51800 to A51807: Seconds (00 to 59)
A51808 to A51815: Minutes (00 to 59)
A51900 to A51907: Hour (00 to 23)
A51908 to A51915: Day of month (01 to 31)
A52000 to A52007: Month (01 to 12)
A52008 to A52015: Year (00 to 99)
Note: If an error occurs in operation, the time of the error will
be stored. If the operating mode is then changed to PRO-
GRAM mode, the time that PROGRAM mode was entered
will be stored.
Read/write
405
Auxiliary Area Section 9-11
■Power Supply ON/OFF Time Information
Note This data is supported only by CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later.
Name Address Description Access
Startup Time A510 and
A511
These words contain the time (in BCD) at which the power
was turned ON. The contents are updated every time that
the power is turned ON.
A51000 to A51007: Seconds (00 to 59)
A51008 to A51015: Minutes (00 to 59)
A51100 to A51107: Hour (00 to 23)
A51108 to A51115: Day of the month (01 to 31)
Read/write
Power Interruption Time A512 and
A513
These words contain the time (in BCD) at which the power
was interrupted. The contents are updated every time that
the power is interrupted.
A51200 to A51207: Seconds (00 to 59)
A51208 to A51215: Minutes (00 to 59)
A51300 to A51307: Hour (00 to 23)
A51308 to A51315: Day of month (01 to 31)
Read/write
Number of Power
Interruptions
A514 Contains the number of times (in binary) that power has
been interrupted since the power was first turned on. To
reset this value, overwrite the current value with 0000.
Read/write
Total Power ON Time A523 Contains the total time (in binary) that the PLC has been on
in 10-hour units. The data is stored is updated every 10
hours. To reset this value, overwrite the current value with
0000.
Read/write
Power ON Clock Data 1
(See note.)
A720 to
A722
These words contain the startup date/time (the same time
as the startup time stored in words A510 to A511 as well as
the month and year information) for the last time that power
was turned ON. The data is BCD.
A72000 to A72007: Seconds (00 to 59)
A72008 to A72015: Minutes (00 to 59)
A72100 to A72107: Hour (00 to 23)
A72108 to A72115: Day of month (01 to 31)
A72200 to A72207: Month (01 to 12)
A72208 to A72215: Year (00 to 99)
Read/write
406
Auxiliary Area Section 9-11
Note This data is supported only by CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later.
Name Address Description Access
Power ON Clock Data 2
(See note.)
A723 to
A725
These words contain the startup time/date for the second-to-
last time that power was turned ON.
The data is BCD and the storage format is the same as
words A720 to A722.
Read/write
Power ON Clock Data 3
(See note.)
A726 to
A728
These words contain the startup time/date for the third-to-
last time that power was turned ON.
The data is BCD and the storage format is the same as
words A720 to A722.
Read/write
Power ON Clock Data 4
(See note.)
A729 to
A731
These words contain the startup time/date for the fourth-to-
last time that power was turned ON.
The data is BCD and the storage format is the same as
words A720 to A722.
Read/write
Power ON Clock Data 5
(See note.)
A732 to
A734
These words contain the startup time/date for the fifth-to-last
time that power was turned ON.
The data is BCD and the storage format is the same as
words A720 to A722.
Read/write
Power ON Clock Data 6
(See note.)
A735 to
A737
These words contain the startup time/date for the sixth-to-
last time that power was turned ON.
The data is BCD and the storage format is the same as
words A720 to A722.
Read/write
Power ON Clock Data 7
(See note.)
A738 to
A740
These words contain the startup time/date for the seventh-
to-last time that power was turned ON.
The data is BCD and the storage format is the same as
words A720 to A722.
Read/write
Power ON Clock Data 8
(See note.)
A741 to
A743
These words contain the startup time/date for the eighth-to-
last time that power was turned ON.
The data is BCD and the storage format is the same as
words A720 to A722.
Read/write
Power ON Clock Data 9
(See note.)
A744 to
A746
These words contain the startup time/date for the ninth-to-
last time that power was turned ON.
The data is BCD and the storage format is the same as
words A720 to A722.
Read/write
Power ON Clock Data 10
(See note.)
A747 to
A749
These words contain the startup time/date for the tenth-to-
last time that power was turned ON.
The data is BCD and the storage format is the same as
words A720 to A722.
Read/write
407
Auxiliary Area Section 9-11
User Data Revision Times
Information on Read Protection Using a Password
Name Address Description Access
User Program Date
(Not supported by CJ1@-
CPU@@ CPU Units.)
A090 to
A093
These words contain in BCD the date and time that the user
program was last overwritten.
A09000 to A09007: Seconds (00 to 59)
A09008 to A09015: Minutes (00 to 59)
A09100 to A09107: Hour (00 to 23)
A09108 to A09115: Day of month (01 to 31)
A09200 to A09207: Month (01 to 12)
A09208 to A09215: Year (00 to 99)
A09308 to A09307: Day of the week
(00: Sunday, 01: Monday, 02: Tuesday, 03: Wednesday,
04: Thursday, 05: Friday, 06: Saturday)
Read-only
Parameter Date
(Not supported by CJ1@-
CPU@@ CPU Units.)
A094 to
A097
These words contain in BCD the date and time that the
parameters were last overwritten.
A09400 to A09407: Seconds (00 to 59)
A09408 to A09415: Minutes (00 to 59)
A09500 to A09507: Hour (00 to 23)
A09508 to A09515: Day of month (01 to 31)
A09600 to A09607: Month (01 to 12)
A09608 to A09615: Year (00 to 99)
A09708 to A09707: Day of the week
(00: Sunday, 01: Monday, 02: Tuesday, 03: Wednesday,
04: Thursday, 05: Friday, 06: Saturday)
Read-only
Name Address Description Access
UM Read Protection Flag
(Unit version 2.0 or later)
A09900 Indicates whether the entire user program in the PLC is
read-protected.
0: UM not read-protected.
1: UM read-protected.
Read-only
Task Read Protection Flag
(Unit version 2.0 or later)
A09901 Indicates whether read protection is set for individual tasks.
0: Tasks not read-protected.
1: Tasks read-protected.
Read-only
Program Write Protection for
Read Protection
(Unit version 2.0 or later)
A09902 Indicates whether the program is write-protected.
0: Write-enabled.
1: Write-protected.
Read-only
Enable/Disable Bit for
Program Backup
(Unit version 2.0 or later)
A09903 Indicates whether creating a backup program file (.OBJ) is
enabled or disabled.
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
Read-only
408
Auxiliary Area Section 9-11
Communications
■Network Communications Information
Name Address Description Access
Communications Port Enabled
Flags
A20200 to
A20207
ON when a network instruction (SEND, RECV, CMND, or
PMCR) can be executed with the corresponding port num-
ber or background execution can be executed with the corre-
sponding port number (CS1-H CPU Units only). Bits 00 to 07
correspond to communications ports 0 to 7.
When the simple backup operation is used to performed a
write or compare operation for a Memory Card on a CS1-H
CPU Unit, a communications port will be automatically allo-
cated, and the corresponding flag will be turned ON during
the operation and turned OFF when the operation has been
completed.
Read-only
Communications Port Com-
pletion Codes
A203 to
A210
These words contain the completion codes for the corre-
sponding port numbers when network instructions (SEND,
RECV, CMND, or PMCR) have been executed. The contents
will be cleared when background execution has been com-
pleted (for CS1-H CPU Unit only). Words A203 to A210 cor-
respond to communications ports 0 to 7.
When the simple backup operation is used to performed a
write or compare operation for a Memory Card on a CS1-H
CPU Unit, a communications port will be automatically allo-
cated, and a completion code will be stored in the corre-
sponding word.
Read-only
Communications Port Error
Flags
A21900 to
A21907
ON when an error occurred during execution of a network
instruction (SEND, RECV, CMND, or PMCR). Turns OFF
then execution has been finished normally. Bits 00 to 07 cor-
respond to communications ports 0 to 7.
When the simple backup operation is used to performed a
write or compare operation for a Memory Card on a CS1-H
CPU Unit, a communications port will be automatically allo-
cated. The corresponding flag will be turned ON if an error
occurs and will be turned OFF if the simple backup opera-
tion ends normally.
Read-only
409
Auxiliary Area Section 9-11
■Auxiliary Area Bits and Words Used when Automatically Allocating Communications Ports
Name Address Description Access
Network Communications
Port Allocation Enabled Flag
A20215 ON when there is a communications port available for auto-
matic allocation.
Note: Use this flag to confirm whether a communications
port is available for automatic allocation before executing
communications instructions when using 9 or more commu-
nications instructions simultaneously.
Read-only
First Cycle Flags after Net-
work Communications Fin-
ished
A21400 to
A21407
Each flag will turn ON for just one cycle after communica-
tions have been completed. Bits 00 to 07 correspond to
ports 0 to 7. Use the Used Communications Port Number
stored in A218 to determine which flag to access.
Note: These flags are not effective until the next cycle after
the communications instruction is executed. Delay access-
ing them for at least one cycle.
Read-only
First Cycle Flags after Net-
work Communications Error
A21500 to
A21507
Each flag will turn ON for just one cycle after a communica-
tions error occurs. Bits 00 to 07 correspond to ports 0 to 7.
Use the Used Communications Port Number stored in A218
to determine which flag to access. Determine the cause of
the error according to the Communications Port Completion
Codes stored in A203 to A210.
Note: These flags are not effective until the next cycle after
the communications instruction is executed. Delay
accessing them for at least one cycle.
Read-only
Network Communications
Completion Code Storage
Address
A216 to
A217
The completion code for a communications instruction is
automatically stored at the address with the I/O memory
address given in these words. Place this address into an
index register and use indirect addressing through the index
register to read the communications completion code.
Read-only
Used Communications Port
Numbers
A218 Stores the communications port numbers used when a com-
munications instruction is executed using automatic commu-
nication port allocations.
0000 to 0007 hex: Communications port 0 to 7
Read-only
410
Auxiliary Area Section 9-11
■Information on Explicit Message Instructions
■Peripheral Port Communications Information
Name Address Description Access
Explicit Communications Error
Flag
A21300 to
A21307
Turn ON when an error occurs in executing an Explicit Mes-
sage Instruction (EXPLT, EGATR, ESATR, ECHRD, or
ECHWR).
Bits 00 to 07 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7.
The corresponding bit will turn ON both when the explicit
message cannot be sent and when an error response is
returned for the explicit message.
The status will be maintained until the next explicit message
communication is executed. The bit will always turn OFF
when the next Explicit Message Instruction is executed.
Read-only
Network Communications
Error Flag
A21900 to
A21907
Turn ON if the explicit message cannot be sent when execut-
ing an Explicit Message Instruction (EXPLT, EGATR,
ESATR, ECHRD, or ECHWR).
Bits 00 to 07 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7.
The corresponding bit will turn ON when the explicit mes-
sage cannot be sent.
The status will be maintained until the next explicit message
communication is executed. The bit will always turn OFF
when the next Explicit Message Instruction is executed.
Read-only
Network Communications
Response Code
A203 to
A210
The following codes will be stored when an Explicit Message
Instruction (EXPLT, EGATR, ESATR, ECHRD, or ECHWR)
has been executed.
A203 to A210 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7.
If the Explicit Communications Error Flag turns OFF, 0000
hex is stored.
If the Explicit Communications Error Flag is ON and the Net-
work Communications Error Flag is ON, the FINS end code
is stored.
If the Explicit Communications Error Flag is ON and the Net-
work Communications Error Flag is OFF, the explicit mes-
sage end code is stored.
During communications, 0000 hex will be stored and the
suitable code will be stored when execution has been com-
pleted. The code will be cleared when operation is started.
Read-only
Name Address Description Access
Peripheral Port Communica-
tions Error Flag
A39212 ON when a communications error has occurred at the
peripheral port.
Note: This flag is disabled in NT Link (1:N) mode.
Read-only
Peripheral Port Restart Bit A52601 Turn this bit ON to restart the peripheral port. Read/write
Peripheral Port Settings
Change Bit
A61901 ON while the peripheral port’s communications settings are
being changed.
Read/write
Peripheral Port Error Flags A52808 to
A52815
These flags indicate what kind of error has occurred at the
peripheral port.
Read/write
Peripheral Port PT Communi-
cations Flags
A39400 to
A39407
The corresponding bit will be ON when the peripheral port is
communicating with a PT in NT link mode. Bits 0 to 7 corre-
spond to units 0 to 7.
Read-only
Peripheral Port PT Priority
Registered Flags
A39408 to
A39415
The corresponding bit will be ON for the PT that has priority
when the peripheral port is communicating in NT link mode.
Bits 0 to 7 correspond to units 0 to 7.
Read-only
411
Auxiliary Area Section 9-11
■RS-232C Port Communications Information
■Serial Device Communications Information
Instruction-related Information
Name Address Description Access
RS-232C Port Communica-
tions Error Flag
A39204 ON when a communications error has occurred at the RS-
232C port.
Note This flag is disabled in 1:N NT Link or PLC Link Mas-
ter/Slave mode.
Read-only
RS-232C Port Restart Bit A52600 Turn this bit ON to restart the RS-232C port. Read/write
RS-232C Port Settings
Change Bit
A61902 ON while the RS-232C port’s communications settings are
being changed.
Read/write
RS-232C Port Error Flags A52800 to
A52807
These flags indicate what kind of error has occurred at the
RS-232C port.
Read/write
RS-232C Port Send Ready
Flag
(No-protocol mode)
A39205 ON when the RS-232C port is able to send data in no-proto-
col mode.
Read-only
RS-232C Port Reception
Completed Flag
(No-protocol mode)
A39206 ON when the RS-232C port has completed the reception in
no-protocol mode.
Read-only
RS-232C Port Reception
Overflow Flag
(No-protocol mode)
A39207 ON when a data overflow occurred during reception through
the RS-232C port in no-protocol mode.
Read-only
RS-232C Port PT Communi-
cations Flags
A39300 to
A39307
The corresponding bit will be ON when the RS-232C port is
communicating with a PT in NT link mode. Bits 0 to 7 corre-
spond to units 0 to 7.
Read-only
RS-232C Port PT Priority
Registered Flags
A39308 to
A39315
The corresponding bit will be ON for the PT that has priority
when the RS-232C port is communicating in NT link mode.
Bits 0 to 7 correspond to units 0 to 7.
Read-only
RS-232C Port Reception
Counter
(No-protocol mode)
A39300 to
A39315
Indicates (in binary) the number of bytes of data received
when the RS-232C port is in no-protocol mode.
Read-only
Name Address Description Access
Communications Units 0 to
15, Ports 1 to 4 Settings
Change Bits
A62001 to
A63504
The corresponding flag will be ON when the settings for that
port are being changed.
(Bits 1 to 4 in A620 to A635 correspond to ports 1 to 4 in
Communications Units 0 to 15.)
Read/write
Name Address Description Access
Step Flag A20012 ON for one cycle when step execution is started with
STEP(008).
Read-only
Current EM Bank (CJ1 and
CJ1-H CPU Units only.)
A301 This word contains the current EM bank number in 4-digit
hexadecimal.
Read-only
Macro Area Input Words A600 to
A603
When MCRO(099) is executed, it copies the input data from
the specified source words (input parameter words) to A600
through A603.
Read/write
Macro Area Output Words A604 to
A607
After the subroutine specified in MCRO(099) has been exe-
cuted, the results of the subroutine are transferred from
A604 through A607 to the specified destination words (out-
put parameter words).
Read/write
412
Auxiliary Area Section 9-11
Background Execution Information
Function Block Information
■Function Block Memory Information
■OMRON FB Library Information
Note These Auxiliary Area bits/words are not to be written by the user. The number
of resends and response monitoring time must be set by the user in the FB
communications instructions settings in the PLC Setup, particularly when
using function blocks from the OMRON FB Library to execute FINS messages
or DeviceNet explicit messages communications. The values set in the Set-
tings for OMRON FB Library in the PLC Setup will be automatically stored in
the related Auxiliary Area words A580 to A582 and used by the function
blocks from the OMRON FB Library.
Name Address Description Access
DR00 Output for Background
Execution
(Not supported by CJ1@-
CPU@@ CPU Units.)
A597 When a data register is specified as the output for an
instruction processed in the background, A597 receives the
output instead of DR00.
0000 to FFFF hex
Read-only
IR00 Output for Background
Execution
(Not supported by CJ1@-
CPU@@ CPU Units.)
A595 and
A596
When an index register is specified as the output for an
instruction processed in the background, A595 and A596
receive the output instead of IR00.
0000 0000 to FFFF FFFF hex
(A596 contains the leftmost digits.)
Read-only
Equals Flag for Background
Execution
(Not supported by CJ1@-
CPU@@ CPU Units.)
A59801 Turns ON if matching data is found for an SRCH(181)
instruction executed in the background.
Read-only
ER/AER Flag for Background
Execution
(Not supported by CJ1@-
CPU@@ CPU Units.)
A39510 Turns ON if an error or illegal access occurs during back-
ground execution. Turns OFF when power is turned ON or
operation is started.
Read-only
Name Address Description Access
FB Program Data Flag A34500 Turns ON if the FB program memory contains FB program
data.
0: No data
1: Data present
Read-only
Name Address Description Access
FB Communications Instruc-
tion Response Required
A58015 0: Not required
1: Required
Read-only
FB Communications Instruc-
tion Port No.
A58008 to
A58011
0 to 7 hex: Communications port No. 0 to 7
F hex: Automatic allocation
Read-only
FB Communications Instruc-
tion Retries
A58000 to
A58003
Automatically stores the number of retries in the FB commu-
nications instruction settings specified in the PLC Setup.
Read-only
FB Communications Instruc-
tion Response Monitoring
Time
A581 Automatically stores the FB communications instruction
response monitoring time set in the PLC Setup.
0001 to FFFF hex (Unit: 0.1 s; Range: 0.1 to 6553.5)
0000 hex: 2 s
Read-only
FB DeviceNet Communica-
tions Instruction Response
Monitoring Time
A582 Automatically stores the FB DeviceNet communications
instruction response monitoring time set in the PLC Setup.
0001 to FFFF hex (Unit: 0.1 s; Range: 0.1 to 6553.5)
0000 hex: 2 s
Read-only
413
Auxiliary Area Section 9-11
Auxiliary Area Flags and Bits for Built-in Inputs
The following tables show the Auxiliary Area words and bits that are related to
the CJ1M CPU Unit's built-in inputs. These allocations apply to CPU Units
equipped with the built-in I/O only.
■Interrupt Inputs
Name Address Description Read/Write Times when data is
accessed
Interrupt Counter 0
Counter SV
A532 Used for interrupt input 0 in counter mode.
Sets the count value at which the interrupt task
will start. Interrupt task 140 will start when inter-
rupt counter 0 has counted this number of
pulses.
Read/Write • Retained when
power is turned
ON.
• Retained when
operation starts.
Interrupt Counter 1
Counter SV
A533 Used for interrupt input 1 in counter mode.
Sets the count value at which the interrupt task
will start. Interrupt task 141 will start when inter-
rupt counter 1 has counted this number of
pulses.
Read/Write
Interrupt Counter 2
Counter SV
A534 Used for interrupt input 2 in counter mode.
Sets the count value at which the interrupt task
will start. Interrupt task 142 will start when inter-
rupt counter 2 has counted this number of
pulses.
Read/Write
Interrupt Counter 3
Counter SV
A535 Used for interrupt input 3 in counter mode.
Sets the count value at which the interrupt task
will start. Interrupt task 143 will start when inter-
rupt counter 3 has counted this number of
pulses.
Read/Write
Interrupt Counter 0
Counter PV
A536 These words contain the interrupt counter PVs
for interrupt inputs operating in counter mode.
In increment mode, the counter PV starts incre-
menting from 0. When the counter PV reaches
the counter SV, the PV is automatically reset to
0.
In decrement mode, the counter PV starts dec-
rementing from the counter SV. When the
counter PV reaches the 0, the PV is automati-
cally reset to the SV.
Read/Write • Retained when
power is turned
ON.
• Cleared when
operation starts.
• Refreshed when
interrupt is gener-
ated.
• Refreshed when
INI(880) instruc-
tion is executed.
Interrupt Counter 1
Counter PV
A537 Read/Write
Interrupt Counter 2
Counter PV
A538 Read/Write
Interrupt Counter 3
Counter PV
A539 Read/Write
414
Auxiliary Area Section 9-11
■High-speed Counters
Name Address Description Read/Write Times when data is
accessed
High-speed Counter
0 PV
A270 to
A271
Contains the PV of high-speed counter 0. A271
contains the leftmost 4 digits and A270 contains
the rightmost 4 digits.
Read only • Cleared when
power is turned
ON.
• Cleared when
operation starts.
• Refreshed each
cycle during over-
seeing process.
• Refreshed when
PRV(881) instruc-
tion is executed
for the corre-
sponding counter.
High-speed Counter
1 PV
A272 to
A273
Contains the PV of high-speed counter 1. A273
contains the leftmost 4 digits and A272 contains
the rightmost 4 digits.
Read only
High-speed Counter
0
Range 1 Compari-
son Condition Met
Flag
A27400 These flags indicate whether the PV is within the
specified ranges when high-speed counter 0 is
being operated in range-comparison mode.
0: PV not in range
1: PV in range
Read only • Cleared when
power is turned
ON.
• Cleared when
operation starts.
• Refreshed each
cycle during over-
seeing process.
• Refreshed when
PRV(881) instruc-
tion is executed
for the corre-
sponding counter.
High-speed Counter
0
Range 2 Compari-
son Condition Met
Flag
A27401 Read only
High-speed Counter
0
Range 3 Compari-
son Condition Met
Flag
A27402 Read only
High-speed Counter
0
Range 4 Compari-
son Condition Met
Flag
A27403 Read only
High-speed Counter
0
Range 5 Compari-
son Condition Met
Flag
A27404 Read only
High-speed Counter
0
Range 6 Compari-
son Condition Met
Flag
A27405 Read only
High-speed Counter
0
Range 7 Compari-
son Condition Met
Flag
A27406 Read only
High-speed Counter
0
Range 8 Compari-
son Condition Met
Flag
A27407 Read only
415
Auxiliary Area Section 9-11
High-speed Counter
0
Comparison In-
progress Flag
A27408 This flag indicates whether a comparison opera-
tion is being executed for high-speed counter 0.
0: Stopped.
1: Being executed.
Read only • Cleared when
power is turned
ON.
• Cleared when
operation starts.
• Refreshed when
comparison oper-
ation starts or
stops.
High-speed Counter
0
Overflow/Underflow
Flag
A27409 This flag indicates when an overflow or under-
flow has occurred in the high-speed counter 0
PV. (Used only when the counting mode is set to
Linear Mode.)
0: Normal
1: Overflow or underflow
Read only • Cleared when
power is turned
ON.
• Cleared when
operation starts.
• Cleared when the
PV is changed.
• Refreshed when
an overflow or
underflow occurs.
High-speed Counter
0
Count Direction
A27410 This flag indicates whether the high-speed
counter is currently being incremented or decre-
mented. The counter PV for the current cycle is
compared with the PV in last cycle to determine
the direction.
0: Decrementing
1: Incrementing
Read only • Setting used for
high-speed
counter, valid dur-
ing counter opera-
tion.
Name Address Description Read/Write Times when data is
accessed
416
Auxiliary Area Section 9-11
High-speed Counter
1
Range 1 Compari-
son Condition Met
Flag
A27500 These flags indicate whether the PV is within the
specified ranges when high-speed counter 1 is
being operated in range-comparison mode.
0: PV not in range
1: PV in range
Read only • Cleared when
power is turned
ON.
• Cleared when
operation starts.
• Refreshed each
cycle during over-
seeing process.
• Refreshed when
PRV(881) instruc-
tion is executed
for the corre-
sponding counter.
High-speed Counter
1
Range 2 Compari-
son Condition Met
Flag
A27501 Read only
High-speed Counter
1
Range 3 Compari-
son Condition Met
Flag
A27502 Read only
High-speed Counter
1
Range 4 Compari-
son Condition Met
Flag
A27503 Read only
High-speed Counter
1
Range 5 Compari-
son Condition Met
Flag
A27504 Read only
High-speed Counter
1
Range 6 Compari-
son Condition Met
Flag
A27505 Read only
High-speed Counter
1
Range 7 Compari-
son Condition Met
Flag
A27506 Read only
High-speed Counter
1
Range 8 Compari-
son Condition Met
Flag
A27507 Read only
High-speed Counter
1
Comparison In-
progress Flag
A27508 This flag indicates whether a comparison opera-
tion is being executed for high-speed counter 1.
0: Stopped.
1: Being executed.
Read only • Cleared when
power is turned
ON.
• Cleared when
operation starts.
• Refreshed when
comparison oper-
ation starts or
stops.
High-speed Counter
1
Overflow/Underflow
Flag
A27509 This flag indicates when an overflow or under-
flow has occurred in the high-speed counter 1
PV. (Used only when the counting mode is set to
Linear Mode.)
0: Normal
1: Overflow or underflow
Read only • Cleared when
power is turned
ON.
• Cleared when
operation starts.
• Cleared when the
PV is changed.
• Refreshed when
an overflow or
underflow occurs.
Name Address Description Read/Write Times when data is
accessed
417
Auxiliary Area Section 9-11
Auxiliary Area Flags and Bits for Built-in Outputs
The following tables show the Auxiliary Area words and bits that are related to
the CJ1M CPU Unit's built-in outputs. These allocations apply to CPU Units
equipped with the built-in I/O only.
High-speed Counter
1
Count Direction
A27510 This flag indicates whether the high-speed
counter is currently being incremented or decre-
mented. The counter PV for the current cycle is
compared with the PV in last cycle to determine
the direction.
0: Decrementing
1: Incrementing
Read only • Setting used for
high-speed
counter, valid dur-
ing counter opera-
tion.
High-speed Counter
0 Reset Bit
A53100 When the reset method is set to Phase-Z signal
+ Software reset, the corresponding high-speed
counter's PV will be reset if the phase-Z signal is
received while this bit is ON.
When the reset method is set to Software reset,
the corresponding high-speed counter's PV will
be reset in the cycle when this bit goes from
OFF to ON.
Read/Write • Cleared when
power is turned
ON.
High-speed Counter
1 Reset Bit
A53101 Read/Write
High-speed Counter
0 Gate Bit
A53102 When a counter's Gate Bit is ON, the counter's
PV will not be changed even if pulse inputs are
received for the counter.
When the bit is turned OFF again, counting will
restart and the high-speed counter's PV will be
refreshed.
When the reset method is set to Phase-Z signal
+ Software reset, the Gate Bit is disabled while
the corresponding Reset Bit (A53100 or
A53101) is ON.
Read/Write • Cleared when
power is turned
ON.
High-speed Counter
1 Gate Bit
A53103 Read/Write
Name Address Description Read/Write Times when data is
accessed
Name Address Description Read/Write Times when data is
accessed
Pulse Output 0 PV A276 to
A277
Contain the number of pulses output from the
corresponding pulse output port.
PV range: 80000000 to 7FFFFFFF hex
(−2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647)
When pulses are being output in the CW direc-
tion, the PV is incremented by 1 for each pulse.
When pulses are being output in the CCW direc-
tion, the PV is decremented by 1 for each pulse.
PV after overflow: 7FFFFFFF hex
PV after underflow: 80000000 hex
A277 contains the leftmost 4 digits and A276
contains the rightmost 4 digits of the pulse out-
put 0 PV.
A279 contains the leftmost 4 digits and A278
contains the rightmost 4 digits of the pulse out-
put 1 PV.
Note If the coordinate system is relative coor-
dinates (undefined origin), the PV will be
cleared to 0 when a pulse output starts,
i.e. when a pulse output instruction
(SPED(885), ACC(888), or PLS2(887)) is
executed.
Read only • Cleared when
power is turned
ON.
• Cleared when
operation starts.
• Refreshed each
cycle during over-
see process.
• Refreshed when
the INI(880)
instruction is exe-
cuted for the cor-
responding pulse
output.
Pulse Output 1 PV A278 to
A279
418
Auxiliary Area Section 9-11
Pulse Output 0
Accel/Decel Flag
A28000 This flag will be ON when pulses are being out-
put from pulse output 0 according to an
ACC(888) or PLS2(887) instruction and the out-
put frequency is being changed in steps (accel-
erating or decelerating).
0: Constant speed
1: Accelerating or decelerating
Read only • Cleared when
power is turned
ON.
• Cleared when
operation starts or
stops.
• Refreshed each
cycle during over-
see process.
Pulse Output 0
Overflow/Underflow
Flag
A28001 This flag indicates when an overflow or under-
flow has occurred in the pulse output 0 PV.
0: Normal
1: Overflow or underflow
Read only • Cleared when
power is turned
ON.
• Cleared when
operation starts.
• Cleared when the
PV is changed by
the INI(880)
instruction.
• Refreshed when
an overflow or
underflow occurs.
Pulse Output 0 Out-
put Amount Set Flag
A28002 ON when the number of output pulses for pulse
output 0 has been set with the PULS(886)
instruction.
0: No setting
1: Setting made
Read only • Cleared when
power is turned
ON.
• Cleared when
operation starts or
stops.
• Refreshed when
the PULS(886)
instruction is exe-
cuted.
• Refreshed when
pulse output
stops.
Pulse Output 0 Out-
put Completed Flag
A28003 ON when the number of output pulses set with
the PULS(886)/PLS2(887) instruction has been
output through pulse output 0.
0: Output not completed.
1: Output completed.
Read only • Cleared when
power is turned
ON.
• Cleared when
operation starts or
stops.
• Refreshed at the
start or comple-
tion of pulse out-
put in
independent
mode.
Pulse Output 0 Out-
put In-progress Flag
A28004 ON when pulses are being output from pulse
output 0.
0: Stopped
1: Outputting pulses.
Read only • Cleared when
power is turned
ON.
• Cleared when
operation starts or
stops.
• Refreshed when
pulse output
starts or stops.
Name Address Description Read/Write Times when data is
accessed
419
Auxiliary Area Section 9-11
Pulse Output 0 No-
origin Flag
A28005 ON when the origin has not been determined for
pulse output 0 and goes OFF when the origin
has been determined.
0: Origin established.
1: Origin not established.
Read only • Turned ON when
power is turned
ON.
• Turned ON when
operation starts.
• Refreshed when
pulse output
starts or stops.
• Refreshed each
cycle during the
overseeing pro-
cesses.
Pulse Output 0 At-
origin Flag
A28006 ON when the pulse output PV matches the ori-
gin (0).
0: Not stopped at origin.
1: Stopped at origin.
Read only • Cleared when
power is turned
ON.
• Refreshed each
cycle during the
overseeing pro-
cesses.
Pulse Output 0 Out-
put Stopped Error
Flag
A28007 ON when an error occurred while outputting
pulses in the pulse output 0 origin search func-
tion.
The Pulse Output 0 Output Stop Error code will
be written to A444.
0: No error
1: Stop error occurred.
Read only • Cleared when
power is turned
ON.
• Refreshed when
origin search
starts.
• Refreshed when a
pulse output stop
error occurs.
Pulse Output 1
Accel/Decel Flag
A28100 This flag will be ON when pulses are being out-
put from pulse output 1 according to an
ACC(888) or PLS2(887) instruction and the out-
put frequency is being changed in steps (accel-
erating or decelerating).
0: Constant speed
1: Accelerating or decelerating
Read only • Cleared when
power is turned
ON.
• Cleared when
operation starts or
stops.
• Refreshed each
cycle during over-
see process.
Pulse Output 1
Overflow/Underflow
Flag
A28101 This flag indicates when an overflow or under-
flow has occurred in the pulse output 1 PV.
0: Normal
1: Overflow or underflow
Read only • Cleared when
power is turned
ON.
• Cleared when
operation starts.
• Cleared when the
PV is changed by
the INI(880)
instruction.
• Refreshed when
an overflow or
underflow occurs.
Pulse Output 1 Out-
put Amount Set Flag
A28102 ON when the number of output pulses for pulse
output 1 has been set with the PULS(886)
instruction.
0: No setting
1: Setting made
Read only • Cleared when
power is turned
ON.
• Cleared when
operation starts or
stops.
• Refreshed when
the PULS(886)
instruction is exe-
cuted.
• Refreshed when
pulse output
stops.
Name Address Description Read/Write Times when data is
accessed
420
Auxiliary Area Section 9-11
Pulse Output 1 Out-
put Completed Flag
A28103 ON when the number of output pulses set with
the PULS(886)/PLS2(887) instruction has been
output through pulse output 1.
0: Output not completed.
1: Output completed.
Read only • Cleared when
power is turned
ON.
• Cleared when
operation starts or
stops.
• Refreshed at the
start or comple-
tion of pulse out-
put in
independent
mode.
Pulse Output 1 Out-
put In-progress Flag
A28104 ON when pulses are being output from pulse
output 1.
0: Stopped
1: Outputting pulses.
Read only • Cleared when
power is turned
ON.
• Cleared when
operation starts or
stops.
• Refreshed when
pulse output
starts or stops.
Pulse Output 1 No-
origin Flag
A28105 ON when the origin has not been determined for
pulse output 1 and goes OFF when the origin
has been determined.
0: Origin established.
1: Origin not established.
Read only • Turned ON when
power is turned
ON.
• Turned ON when
operation starts.
• Refreshed when
pulse output
starts or stops.
• Refreshed each
cycle during the
overseeing pro-
cesses.
Pulse Output 1 At-
origin Flag
A28106 ON when the pulse output PV matches the ori-
gin (0).
0: Not stopped at origin.
1: Stopped at origin.
Read only • Cleared when
power is turned
ON.
• Refreshed each
cycle during the
overseeing pro-
cesses.
Pulse Output 1 Out-
put Stopped Error
Flag
A28107 ON when an error occurred while outputting
pulses in the pulse output 1 origin search func-
tion.
The Pulse Output 1 Output Stop Error code will
be written to A445.
0: No error
1: Stop error occurred.
Read only • Cleared when
power is turned
ON.
• Refreshed when
origin search
starts.
• Refreshed when a
pulse output stop
error occurs.
PWM(891) Output 0
Output In-progress
Flag
A28300 ON when pulses are being output from
PWM(891) output 0.
0: Stopped
1: Outputting pulses.
Read only • Cleared when
power is turned
ON.
• Cleared when
operation starts or
stops.
• Refreshed when
pulse output
starts or stops.
PWM(891) Output 1
Output In-progress
Flag
A28308 ON when pulses are being output from
PWM(891) output 1.
0: Stopped
1: Outputting pulses.
Read only
Name Address Description Read/Write Times when data is
accessed
421
Auxiliary Area Section 9-11
Pulse Output 0 Stop
Error Code
A444 When a pulse output stop error occurred with
pulse output 0, the corresponding error code is
written to this word.
Read only • Cleared when
power is turned
ON.
• Refreshed when
origin search
starts.
• Refreshed when a
pulse output stop
error occurs.
Pulse Output 1 Stop
Error Code
A445 When a pulse output stop error occurred with
pulse output 1, the corresponding error code is
written to this word.
Read only
Pulse Output 0
Reset Bit
A54000 The pulse output 0 PV (contained in A276 and
A277) will be cleared when this bit is turned from
OFF to ON.
Read/Write • Cleared when
power is turned
ON.
Pulse Output 0 CW
Limit Input Signal
Flag
A54008 This is the CW limit input signal for pulse output
0, which is used in the origin search. To use this
signal, write the input from the actual sensor as
an input condition in the ladder program and out-
put the result to this flag.
Read/Write Cleared when power
is turned ON.
Pulse Output 0 CCW
Limit Input Signal
Flag
A54009 This is the CCW limit input signal for pulse out-
put 0, which is used in the origin search. To use
this signal, write the input from the actual sensor
as an input condition in the ladder program and
output the result to this flag.
Read/Write
Pulse Output 1
Reset Bit
A54100 The pulse output 1 PV (contained in A278 and
A279) will be cleared when this bit is turned from
OFF to ON.
Read/Write
Pulse Output 1 CW
Limit Input Signal
Flag
A54108 This is the CW limit input signal for pulse output
1, which is used in the origin search. To use this
signal, write the input from the actual sensor as
an input condition in the ladder program and out-
put the result to this flag.
Read/Write
Pulse Output 1 CCW
Limit Input Signal
Flag
A54109 This is the CCW limit input signal for pulse out-
put 1, which is used in the origin search. To use
this signal, write the input from the actual sensor
as an input condition in the ladder program and
output the result to this flag.
Read/Write
Name Address Description Read/Write Times when data is
accessed
422
TR (Temporary Relay) Area Section 9-12
Serial PLC Link (CJ1M CPU Units Only)
9-12 TR (Temporary Relay) Area
The TR Area contains 16 bits with addresses ranging from TR0 to TR15.
These temporarily store the ON/OFF status of an instruction block for branch-
ing. TR bits are useful when there are several output branches and interlocks
cannot be used.
The TR bits can be used as many times as required and in any order required
as long as the same TR bit is not used twice in the same instruction block.
TR bits can be used only with the OUT and LD instructions. OUT instructions
(OUT TR0 to OUT TR15) store the ON OFF status of a branch point and LD
instructions recall the stored ON OFF status of the branch point.
TR bits cannot be changed from a Programming Device.
Name Address Description Read/Write Time(s) when data is accessed
RS-232C
Port Com-
munica-
tions Error
Flag
A39204 ON when a communications
error has occurred at the RS-
232C port.
ON: Error
OFF: Normal
Read only Cleared when power is turned ON.
ON when communications error occurs at RS-
232C port.
OFF when port is restarted.
Disabled in Peripheral Bus Mode and NT Link
Mode.
RS-232C
Port PT
Communi-
cations
Flags
A39300
to
A39307
The corresponding bit will be
ON when the RS-232C port is
communicating with a PT in
NT link mode. Bits 0 to 7 cor-
respond to units 0 to 7.
ON: Communicating.
OFF: Not communicating.
Read only Cleared when power is turned ON.
With the RS-232C port in NT Link Mode or Serial
PLC Link Mode, the bit corresponding to the com-
municating PT or Slave turns ON.
Bits 0 to 7 correspond to units 0 to 7.
RS-232C
Port
Restart Bit
A52600 Turn this bit ON to restart the
RS-232C port.
Read/Write Cleared when power is turned ON.
Turn this bit ON to restart the RS-232C port.
Automatically turned OFF by the system after the
restart processing is completed.
RS-232C
Port Error
Flags
A52800
to
A52807
These flags indicate what
kind of error has occurred at
the RS-232C port.
Bit 0: Not used.
Bit 1: Not used.
Bit 2: Parity error
Bit 3: Framing error
Bit 4: Overrun error
Bit 5: Timeout error
Bit 6: Not used.
Bit 7: Not used.
Read/Write Cleared when power is turned ON.
The error code is stored when an error occurs at
the RS-232C port.
Disabled in Peripheral Bus Mode.
Enabled in NT Link Mode only for Bit 5 (timeout
error).
Enabled in Serial PLC Link Mode only for the fol-
lowing:
Polling Unit:
Bit 5: Timeout error
Polled Unit:
Bit 5: Timeout error
Bit 4: Overrun error
Bit 3: Framing error
RS-232C
Port Set-
tings
Change Bit
A61902 ON while the RS-232C port’s
communications settings are
being changed.
ON: Changing.
OFF: Not changing.
Read/Write Cleared when power is turned ON.
ON when the RS-232C port communications set-
tings are being changed.
ON when STUP(237) is executed and OFF after
the settings have been changed.
423
Timer Area Section 9-13
Examples In this example, a TR bit is used when two outputs have been directly con-
nected to a branch point.
In this example, a TR bit is used when an output is connected to a branch
point without a separate execution condition.
Note A TR bit is not required when there are no execution conditions after the
branch point or there is an execution condition only in the last line of the
instruction block.
9-13 Timer Area
The 4,096 timer numbers (T0000 to T4095) are shared by the HUNDRED-MS
TIMER (TIM/TIMX(550)), TEN-MS TIMER (TIMH(015)/TIMHX(551)), ONE-
MS TIMER (TMHH(540)/TMHHX(552)), TENTH-MS TIMER (TIMU(541)/
TIMUX(556)) (see note), HUNDREDTH-MS TIMER (TMUH(544)/
TMUHX(557)) (see note), ACCUMULATIVE TIMER (TTIM(087)/TTIMX(555)),
TIMER WAIT (TIMW(813)/TIMWX(816)), and HIGH-SPEED TIMER WAIT
(TMHW(815)/TMHWX(817)) instructions. Timer Completion Flags and
present values (PVs) for these instructions are accessed with the timer num-
bers. (The TIML(542), TIMLX(553), MTIM(543), and MTIMX(554) instructions
do not use timer numbers.)
Note CJ1-H-R CPU Units only.
When a timer number is used in an operand that requires bit data, the timer
number accesses the Completion Flag of the timer. When a timer number is
used in an operand that requires word data, the timer number accesses the
LD
OR
OUT
AND
OUT
LD
AND
OUT
000000
000001
TR 0
000002
000003
TR 0
000004
000005
Instruction Operand
LD
OUT
AND
OUT
LD
OUT
000000
TR 0
000001
000002
TR 0
000003
Instruction Operand
LD 000000
OUT 000001
AND
OUT
000002
000003
LD 000000
OUT
OUT
000001
000002
Instruction Operand
Instruction Operand
424
Timer Area Section 9-13
PV of the timer. Timer Completion Flags can be used as often as necessary
as normally open and normally closed conditions and the values of timer PVs
can be read as normal word data.
With CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Units, the refresh method for timer PVs can be
set from the CX-Programmer to either BCD or binary. With CJ1 CPU Units, it
can only be set to binary.
Note It is not recommended to use the same timer number in two timer instructions
because the timers will not operate correctly if they are timing simultaneously.
(If two or more timer instructions use the same timer number, an error will be
generated during the program check, but the timers will operate as long as the
instructions are not executed in the same cycle.)
The following table shows when timer PVs and Completion Flags will be reset.
Note 1. If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the PV and Completion Flag will be
retained when a fatal error occurs or the operating mode is changed from
PROGRAM mode to RUN or MONITOR mode or vice-versa. The PV and
Completion Flag will be cleared when power is cycled.
2. If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Sta-
tus at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the PV and Com-
pletion Flag will be retained when the PLC’s power is cycled.
3. Since the TIML(542), TIMLX(553), MTIM(543), and MTIMX(554) instruc-
tions do not use timer numbers, they are reset under different conditions.
Refer to the descriptions of these instructions for details.
4. The present value of HUNDRED-MS TIMER (TIM/TIMX(550)), TEN-MS
TIMER (TIMH(015)/TIMHX(551)), ONE-MS TIMER (TMHH(540)/TMH-
HX(552)), TENTH-MS TIMER (TIMU(541)/TIMUX(556) (see note), HUN-
DREDTH-MS TIMER (TMUH(544)/TMUHX(557)) (see note), TIMER
WAIT (TIMW(813)/TIMWX(816), and HIGH-SPEED TIMER WAIT (TM-
HW(815)/TMHWX(817)) timers programmed with timer numbers 0000 to
2047 will be updated even when jumped between JMP and JME instruc-
tions or when in a task that is on standby. The present value of timers pro-
Instruction name Effect on PV and Completion Flag Operation in
Jumps and Interlocks
Mode change1PLC start-up1CNR(545)/
CNRX(547)
Jumps
(JMP-JME) or
Tasks on standby
Interlocks
(IL-ILC)
HUNDRED-MS TIMER:
TIM/TIMX(550)
PV → 0
Flag → OFF
PV → 0
Flag → OFF
PV → 9999
Flag → OFF
PVs refreshed in
operating timers
PV → SV
(Reset to SV.)
Flag → OFF
TEN-MS TIMER:
TIMH(015)/TIMHX(551)
ONE-MS TIMER:
TMHH(540)/TMHHX(552)
TENTH-MS TIMER:
TIMU(541)/TIMUX(556)
(See note 5.)
HUNDERDTH-MS TIMER:
TMUH(544)/TMUHX(557)
(See note 5.)
ACCUMULATIVE TIMER:
TTIM(087)/TTIMX(555)
PV Maintained PV Maintained
TIMER WAIT:
TIMW(813)TIMWX(816)
PVs refreshed in
operating timers
---
HIGH-SPEED TIMER WAIT:
TMHW(815)/TMHWX(817)
---
425
Counter Area Section 9-14
grammed with timer numbers 2048 to 4095 will be held when jumped or
when in a task that is on standby.
5. CJ1-H-R CPU Units only.
Timer Completion Flags can be force-set and force-reset.
Timer PVs cannot be force-set or force-reset, although the PVs can be
refreshed indirectly by force-setting/resetting the Completion Flag.
There are no restrictions in the order of using timer numbers or in the number
of N.C. or N.O. conditions that can be programmed. Timer PVs can be read as
word data and used in programming.
9-14 Counter Area
The 4,096 counter numbers (C0000 to C4095) are shared by the CNT,
CNTX(546), CNTR(012), CNTRX(548), CNTW(814), and CNTWX(818)
instructions. Counter Completion Flags and present values (PVs) for these
instructions are accessed with the counter numbers.
When a counter number is used in an operand that requires bit data, the
counter number accesses the Completion Flag of the counter. When a
counter number is used in an operand that requires word data, the counter
number accesses the PV of the counter.
With CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Units, the refresh method for counter PVs can be
set from the CX-Programmer to either BCD or binary. With CJ1 CPU Units, it
can only be set to binary.
It is not recommended to use the same counter number in two counter
instructions because the counters will not operate correctly if they are count-
ing simultaneously. If two or more counter instructions use the same counter
number, an error will be generated during the program check, but the counters
will operate as long as the instructions are not executed in the same cycle.
The following table shows when counter PVs and Completion Flags will be
reset.
Counter Completion Flags can be force-set and force-reset.
Counter PVs cannot be force-set or force-reset, although the PVs can be
refreshed indirectly by force-setting/resetting the Completion Flag.
There are no restrictions in the order of using counter numbers or in the num-
ber of N.C. or N.O. conditions that can be programmed. Counter PVs can be
read as word data and used in programming.
9-15 Data Memory (DM) Area
The DM Area contains 32,768 words with addresses ranging from D00000 to
D32767. This data area is used for general data storage and manipulation
and is accessible only by word.
Instruction name Effect on PV and Completion Flag
Reset Mode
change
PLC startup Reset Input CNR(545)/
CNRX(547)
Interlocks
(IL-ILC)
COUNTER: CNT/
CNTX(546)
PV → 0000
Flag → OFF
Maintained Maintained Reset Reset Maintained
REVERSIBLE
COUNTER: CNTR(012)/
CNTRX(548)
COUNTER WAIT:
CNTW(814)/CNTWX(818)
426
Data Memory (DM) Area Section 9-15
Data in the DM Area is retained when the PLC’s power is cycled or the PLC’s
operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode
or vice-versa.
Although bits in the DM Area cannot be accessed directly, the status of these
bits can be accessed with the BIT TEST instructions, TST(350) and
TSTN(351).
Bits in the DM Area cannot be force-set or force-reset.
Indirect Addressing Words in the DM Area can be indirectly addressed in two ways: binary-mode
and BCD-mode.
Binary-mode Addressing (@D)
When a “@” character is input before a DM address, the content of that DM
word is treated as binary and the instruction will operate on the DM word at
that binary address. The entire DM Area (D00000 to D32767) can be indi-
rectly addressed with hexadecimal values 0000 to 7FFF.
BCD-mode Addressing (*D)
When a “*” character is input before a DM address, the content of that DM
word is treated as BCD and the instruction will operate on the DM word at that
BCD address. Only part of the DM Area (D00000 to D09999) can be indirectly
addressed with BCD values 0000 to 9999.
DM Area Allocation to
Special I/O Units
Parts of the DM Area are allocated to Special I/O Units and CPU Bus Units for
functions such as initial Unit settings. The timing for data transfers is different
for these Units, but may occur at any of the three following times.
1,2,3... 1. Transfer data when the PLC’s power is turned ON or the Unit is restarted.
2. Transfer data once each cycle.
3. Transfer data when required.
Refer to the Unit’s operation manual for details on data transfer timing.
Special I/O Units (D20000 to D29599)
Each Special I/O Unit is allocated 100 words (based on unit numbers 0 to 95).
Refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual for details on the function of these
words.
@D00100 D00256
0100
▲
Address actually used.
*D00100 D00100
0100
▲
Address actually used.
DM Area for Special I/O Units
(100 words/Unit)
CPU Unit
Special I/O Unit
Data trans-
ferred to the
Special I/O
unit when the
PLC is turned
on or the Unit
is restarted.
Data trans-
ferred to the
CPU Unit at
cyclic refresh-
ing or when
necessary.
427
Extended Data Memory (EM) Area Section 9-16
CPU Bus Units (D30000 to D31599)
Each CPU Bus Unit is allocated 100 words (based on unit numbers 0 to F).
Refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual for details on the function of these
words. With some CPU Bus Units such as Ethernet Units, initial settings must
be registered in the CPU Unit’s Parameter Area; this data can be registered
with a Programming Device other than a Programming Console.
9-16 Extended Data Memory (EM) Area
The EM Area is supported by the CJ1 and CJ1-H CPU Units only. It is divided
into 7 banks (0 to C) that each contain 32,768 words. EM Area addresses
range from E0_00000 to EC_32767. This data area is used for general data
storage and manipulation and is accessible only by word.
Data in the EM Area is retained when the PLC’s power is cycled or the PLC’s
operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode
or vice-versa.
Although bits in the EM Area cannot be accessed directly, the status of these
bits can be accessed with the BIT TEST instructions, TST(350) and
TSTN(351).
Bits in the EM Area cannot be force-set or force-reset.
Specifying EM Addresses There are two ways to specify an EM address: the bank and address can be
specified at the same time or an address in the current bank can be specified
(after changing the current bank, if necessary). In general, we recommend
specifying the bank and address simultaneously.
1,2,3... 1. Bank and Address Specification
With this method, the bank number is specified just before the EM address.
For example, E2_00010 specifies EM address 00010 in bank 2.
2. Current Bank Address Specification
With this method, just the EM address is specified. For example, E00010
specifies EM address 00010 in the current bank. (The current bank must
be changed with EMBC(281) to access data in another bank. A301 con-
tains the current EM bank number.)
The current bank will be reset to 0 when the operating mode is changed
from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR mode, unless the IOM Hold Bit
(A50012) is ON. The current bank is not changed as the program proceeds
through cyclic tasks and the current bank will be returned to its original val-
ue (in the source cyclic task) if it has been changed in an interrupt task.
DM Area for CJ CPU Bus Units
(100 words/Unit)
CPU Unit
Special I/O Unit
Data trans-
ferred to the
CJ Unit when
the PLC is
turned on or
the Unit is
restarted.
Data trans-
ferred to the
CPU Unit at
cyclic refresh-
ing or when
necessary.
428
Index Registers Section 9-17
Indirect Addressing Words in the EM Area can be indirectly addressed in two ways: binary-mode
and BCD-mode.
Binary-mode Addressing (@E)
When a “@” character is input before a EM address, the content of that EM
word is treated as binary and the instruction will operate on the EM word in
the same bank at that binary address. All of the words in the same EM bank
(E00000 to E32767) can be indirectly addressed with hexadecimal values
0000 to 7FFF and words in the next EM bank (E00000 to E32767) can be
addressed with hexadecimal values 8000 to FFFF.
BCD-mode Addressing (*E)
When a “*” character is input before a EM address, the content of that EM
word is treated as BCD and the instruction will operate on the EM word in the
same bank at that BCD address. Only part of the EM bank (E00000 to
E09999) can be indirectly addressed with BCD values 0000 to 9999.
File Memory Conversion Part of the EM Area can be converted for use as file memory with settings in
the PLC Setup. All EM banks from the specified bank (EM File Memory Start-
ing Bank) to the last EM bank will be converted to file memory.
Once EM banks have been converted to file memory, they cannot be
accessed (read or written) by instructions. An Illegal Access Error will occur if
a file-memory bank is specified as an operand in an instruction.
The following example shows EM file memory when the EM File Memory
Starting Bank has been set to 3 in the PLC Setup.
9-17 Index Registers
The sixteen Index Registers (IR0 to IR15) are used for indirect addressing.
Each Index Register can hold a single PLC memory address, which is the
absolute memory address of a word in I/O memory. Use MOVR(560) to con-
vert a regular data area address to its equivalent PLC memory address and
write that value to the specified Index Register. (Use MOVRW(561) to set the
PLC memory address of a timer/counter PV in an Index Register.)
Note Refer to Appendix D Memory Map of PLC Memory Addresses for more details
on PLC memory addresses.
E1_00512
E0_00512
@E1_00100
@E00100
0200
0200
▲▲
(When the current
bank is bank 0.)
Address actually used.
Address actually used.
E1_00200
▲
E0_00200
▲
0200
0200
*E1_00100
*E00100
Address actually used.
(When the current
bank is bank 0.)
Address actually used.
EM bank number
Example:
EM File Memory Starting Bank
set to 3 in the PLC Setup
EM file memory
(Cannot be accessed
from instructions.)
429
Index Registers Section 9-17
Indirect Addressing When an Index Register is used as an operand with a “,” prefix, the instruction
will operate on the word indicated by the PLC memory address in the Index
Register, not the Index Register itself. Basically, the Index Registers are I/O
memory pointers.
• All addresses in I/O memory (except Index Registers, Data Registers, and
Condition Flags) can be specified seamlessly with PLC memory
addresses. It isn’t necessary to specify the data area.
• In addition to basic indirect addressing, the PLC memory address in an
Index Register can be offset with a constant or Data Register, auto-incre-
mented, or auto-decremented. These functions can be used in loops to
read or write data while incrementing or decrementing the address by one
each time that the instruction is executed.
With the offset and increment/decrement variations, the Index Registers can
be set to base values with MOVR(560) or MOVRW(561) and then modified as
pointers in each instruction.
Note It is possible to specify regions outside of I/O memory and generate an Illegal
Access Error when indirectly addressing memory with Index Registers. Refer
to Appendix D Memory Map of PLC Memory Addresses for details on the lim-
its of PLC memory addresses.
I/O Memory
Pointer
Set to a base value
with MOVR(560) or
MOVRW(561).
430
Index Registers Section 9-17
The following table shows the variations available when indirectly addressing
I/O memory with Index Registers. (IR@ represents an Index Register from IR0
to IR15.)
Example This example shows how to store the PLC memory address of a word
(CIO 0002) in an Index Register (IR0), use the Index Register in an instruc-
tion, and use the auto-increment variation.
MOVR(560) 0002 IR0 Stores the PLC memory address of
CIO 0002 in IR0.
MOV(021) #0001 ,IR0 Writes #0001 to the PLC memory ad-
dress contained in IR0.
MOV(021) #0020 +1,IR0 Reads the content of IR0, adds 1,
and writes #0020 to that PLC memo-
ry address.
Note The PLC memory addresses are listed in the diagram above, but it isn’t nec-
essary to know the PLC memory addresses when using Index Registers.
Variation Function Syntax Example
Indirect addressing The content of IR@ is treated as
the PLC memory address of a bit
or word.
,IR@LD ,IR0 Loads the bit at the PLC
memory address contained
in IR0.
Indirect addressing
with constant offset
The constant prefix is added to the
content of IR@ and the result is
treated as the PLC memory
address of a bit or word.
The constant may be any integer
from –2,048 to 2,047.
Constant ,IR@
(Include a + or –
in the constant.)
LD +5,IR0 Adds 5 to the contents of IR0
and loads the bit at that PLC
memory address.
Indirect addressing
with DR offset
The content of the Data Register
is added to the content of IR@ and
the result is treated as the PLC
memory address of a bit or word.
DR@,IR@LD
DR0,IR0
Adds the contents of DR0 to
the contents of IR0 and
loads the bit at that PLC
memory address.
Indirect addressing
with auto-increment
After referencing the content of
IR@ as the PLC memory address
of a bit or word, the content is
incremented by 1 or 2.
Increment by 1:
,IR@+
Increment by 2:
,IR@++
LD , IR0++ Loads the bit at the PLC
memory address contained
in IR0 and then increments
the content of IR0 by 2.
Indirect addressing
with auto-decrement
The content of IR@ is decre-
mented by 1 or 2 and the result is
treated as the PLC memory
address of a bit or word.
Decrement by 1:
,–IR@
Decrement by 2:
,– –IR@
LD , – –IR0 Decrements the content of
IR0 by 2 and then loads the
bit at that PLC memory
address.
#0001
#0020
Regular
data area
address I/O memory
PLC memory
address MOVE TO REGISTER instruction
MOVR(560) 0002 IR0
Pointer
431
Index Registers Section 9-17
Since some operands are treated as word data and others are treated as bit
data, the meaning of the data in an Index Register will differ depending on the
operand in which it is used.
1,2,3... 1. Word Operand:
MOVR(560) 0000 IR2
MOV(021) D00000 , IR2
When the operand is treated as a word, the contents of the Index Register
are used “as is” as the PLC memory address of a word.
In this example MOVR(560) sets the PLC memory address of CIO 0002 in
IR2 and the MOV(021) instruction copies the contents of D00000 to
CIO 0002.
2. Bit Operand:
MOVR(560) 000013 ,IR2
SET +5 , IR2
When the operand is treated as a bit, the leftmost 7 digits of the Index Reg-
ister specify the word address and the rightmost digit specifies the bit num-
ber. In this example, MOVR(560) sets the PLC memory address of
CIO 000013 (0C000D hex) in IR2. The SET instruction adds +5 from bit 13
to this PLC memory address, so it turns ON bit CIO 000102.
Direct Addressing When an Index Register is used as an operand without a “,” prefix, the instruc-
tion will operate on the contents of the Index Register itself (a two-word or
“double” value). Index Registers can be directly addressed only in the instruc-
tions shown in the following table. Use these instructions to operate on the
Index Registers as pointers.
The Index Registers cannot be directly addressed in any other instructions,
although they can usually be used for indirect addressing.
The SRCH(181), MAX(182), and MIN(183) instructions can output the PLC
memory address of the word with the desired value (search value, maximum,
or minimum) to IR0. In this case, IR0 can be used in later instructions to
access the contents of that word.
Instruction group Instruction name Mnemonic
Data Movement
Instructions
MOVE TO REGISTER MOVR(560)
MOVE TIMER/COUNTER PV TO REG-
ISTER
MOVRW(561)
DOUBLE MOVE MOVL(498)
DOUBLE DATA EXCHANGE XCGL(562)
Table Data Processing
Instructions
SET RECORD LOCATION SETR(635)
GET RECORD NUMBER GETR(636)
Increment/Decrement
Instructions
DOUBLE INCREMENT BINARY ++L(591)
DOUBLE DECREMENT BINARY – –L(593)
Comparison Instructions DOUBLE EQUAL =L(301)
DOUBLE NOT EQUAL < >L(306)
DOUBLE LESS THAN < L(311)
DOUBLE LESS THAN OR EQUAL < =L(316)
DOUBLE GREATER THAN > L(321)
DOUBLE GREATER THAN OR EQUAL > =L(326)
DOUBLE COMPARE CMPL(060)
Symbol Math Instructions DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY ADD WITH-
OUT CARRY
+L(401)
DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY SUBTRACT
WITHOUT CARRY
–L(411)
432
Index Registers Section 9-17
Index Register
Initialization
The Index Registers will be cleared in the following cases:
1,2,3... 1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not pro-
tected in the PLC Setup.
IOM Hold Bit Operation If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the Index Registers won’t be cleared
when a FALS error occurs or the operating mode is changed from PROGRAM
mode to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the Index Registers won’t
be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is reset (ON → OFF → ON).
Precautions Do not use Index Registers until a PLC memory address has been set in the
register. The pointer operation will be unreliable if the registers are used with-
out setting their values.
The values in Index Registers are unpredictable at the start of an interrupt
task. When an Index Register will be used in an interrupt task, always set a
PLC memory address in the Index Register with MOVR(560) or MOVRW(561)
before using the register in that task.
Each Index Register task is processed independently, so they do not affect
each other. For example, IR0 used in Task 1 and IR0 used in Task 2 are differ-
ent. Consequently, each Index Register task has 16 Index Registers.
Limitations when Using Index Registers
• It is only possible to read the Index Register for the last task executed
within the cycle from the Programming Devices (CX-Programmer or Pro-
gramming Console). If using Index Registers with the same number to
perform multiple tasks, it is only possible with the Programming Devices
to read the Index Register value for the last task performed within the
cycle from the multiple tasks. Nor is it possible to write the Index Register
value from the Programming Devices.
• It is not possible to either read or write to the Index Registers using Host
Link commands or FINS commands.
• The Index Registers cannot be shared between tasks for CJ1 CPU Units.
(With CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Units, a PLC Setup setting can be made
from the CX-Programmer to share Index Registers between tasks.)
Monitoring Index Registers
It is possible to monitor Index Registers as follows:
To use the Programming Devices to monitor the final Index Register values for
each task, or to monitor the Index Register values using Host Link commands
or FINS commands, write a program to store Index Register values from each
task to another area (e.g., DM area) at the end of each task, and to read Index
Register values from the storage words (e.g., DM area) at the beginning of
each task. The values stored for each task in other areas (e.g., DM area) can
then be edited using the Programming Devices, Host Link commands, or
FINS commands.
433
Index Registers Section 9-17
Note Be sure to use PLC memory addresses in Index Registers.
D01001 and D01000
stored in IR0
or
Actual memory address of
CIO 0000 (0000C000 Hex)
stored in IR0
Contents of IR0 stored in
D01001 and D01000
D02001 and D02000
stored in IR0
or
Actual memory address
CIO 0005 (0000C005 Hex)
stored in IR0
Contents of IR0 stored in
D02001 and D02000
Peripheral servicing Read D01001
and D01000
Read D02001
and D02000
IR storage words for task 2
IR storage words for task 1
or
or
Task 1
Task 2
434
Data Registers Section 9-18
Sharing Index Registers
(CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU
Units Only)
The following setting can be made from the PLC properties dialog box on the
CX-Programmer to control sharing index and data registers between tasks.
9-18 Data Registers
The sixteen Data Registers (DR0 to DR15) are used to offset the PLC mem-
ory addresses in Index Registers when addressing words indirectly.
The value in a Data Register can be added to the PLC memory address in an
Index Register to specify the absolute memory address of a bit or word in I/O
memory. Data Registers contain signed binary data, so the content of an
Index Register can be offset to a lower or higher address.
Normal instructions can be use to store data in Data Registers.
Bits in Data Registers cannot be force-set and force-reset.
Examples The following examples show how Data Registers are used to offset the PLC
memory addresses in Index Registers.
LD DR0 ,IR0 Adds the contents of DR0 to the contents
of IR0 and loads the bit at that PLC mem-
ory address.
MOV(021) #0001 DR0 ,IR1 Adds the contents of DR0 to the contents
of IR1 and writes #0001 to that PLC
memory address.
Range of Values The contents of data registers are treated as signed binary data and thus
have a range of –32,768 to 32,767.
Data Register Initialization The Data Registers will be cleared in the following cases:
1,2,3... 1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR
mode or vice-versa and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF.
Set to a base value
with MOVR(560) or
MOVRW(561).
Set with a regular
instruction.
Pointer
I/O Memory
Hexadecimal content Decimal equivalent
8000 to FFFF –32,768 to –1
0000 to 7FFF 0 to 32,767
435
Task Flags Section 9-19
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled and the IOM Hold Bit is OFF or not pro-
tected in the PLC Setup.
IOM Hold Bit Operation If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON, the Data Registers won’t be cleared when
a FALS error occurs or the operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode
to RUN/MONITOR mode or vice-versa.
If the IOM Hold BIt (A50012) is ON and the PLC Setup’s “IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup” setting is set to protect the IOM Hold Bit, the Data Registers won’t
be cleared when the PLC’s power supply is reset (ON →OFF →ON).
Precautions Data Registers are normally local to each task. For example, DR0 used in
task 1 is different from DR0 used in task 2. (With CJ1-H CPU Units, a PLC
Setup setting can be made from the CX-Programmer to share Data Registers
between tasks.)
The content of Data Registers cannot be accessed (read or written) from a
Programming Device.
Do not use Data Registers until a value has been set in the register. The reg-
ister’s operation will be unreliable if they are used without setting their values.
The values in Data Registers are unpredictable at the start of an interrupt
task. When a Data Register will be used in an interrupt task, always set a
value in the Data Register before using the register in that task.
Sharing Data Registers The following setting can be made from the PLC properties dialog box on the
CX-Programmer to control sharing index and data registers between tasks.
Note This function is not supported by CJ1-CPU@@ CPU Units.
9-19 Task Flags
Task Flags range from TK00 to TK31 and correspond to cyclic tasks 0 to 31. A
Task Flag will be ON when the corresponding cyclic task is in executable
(RUN) status and OFF when the cyclic task hasn’t been executed (INI) or is in
standby (WAIT) status.
Note These flags indicate the status of cyclic tasks only, they do not reflect the sta-
tus of interrupt tasks.
Task Flag Initialization The Task Flags will be cleared in the following cases, regardless of the status
of the IOM Hold Bit.
1,2,3... 1. The operating mode is changed from PROGRAM mode to RUN/MONITOR
mode or vice-versa.
2. The PLC’s power supply is cycled.
Forcing Bit Status The Task Flags cannot be force-set and force-reset.
436
Condition Flags Section 9-20
9-20 Condition Flags
These flags include the Arithmetic Flags such as the Error Flag and Equals
Flag which indicate the results of instruction execution. In earlier PLCs, these
flags were in the SR Area.
The Condition Flags are specified with labels, such as CY and ER, or with
symbols, such as P_Carry and P_Instr_Error, rather than addresses. The sta-
tus of these flags reflects the results of instruction execution, but the flags are
read-only; they cannot be written directly from instructions or Programming
Devices (CX-Programmer or Programming Console).
Note The CX-Programmer treats condition flags as global symbols beginning with
P_.
All Condition Flags are cleared when the program switches tasks, so the sta-
tus of the ER and AER flags are maintained only in the task in which the error
occurred.
The Condition Flags cannot be force-set and force-reset.
Summary of the Condition
Flags
The following table summarizes the functions of the Condition Flags, although
the functions of these flags will vary slightly from instruction to instruction.
Refer to the description of the instruction for complete details on the operation
of the Condition Flags for a particular instruction.
Name Symbol Label Function
Error Flag P_ER ER Turned ON when the operand data in an instruction is incorrect (an
instruction processing error) to indicate that an instruction ended
because of an error.
When the PLC Setup is set to stop operation for an instruction error
(Instruction Error Operation), program execution will be stopped and
the Instruction Processing Error Flag (A29508) will be turned ON
when the Error Flag is turned ON.
Access Error Flag P_AER AER Turned ON when an Illegal Access Error occurs. The Illegal Access
Error indicates that an instruction attempted to access an area of
memory that should not be accessed.
When the PLC Setup is set to stop operation for an instruction error
(Instruction Error Operation), program execution will be stopped and
the Instruction Processing Error Flag (A429510) will be turned ON
when the Access Error Flag is turned ON.
Carry Flag P_CY CY Turned ON when there is a carry in the result of an arithmetic opera-
tion or a “1” is shifted to the Carry Flag by a Data Shift instruction.
The Carry Flag is part of the result of some Data Shift and Symbol
Math instructions.
Greater Than Flag P_GT > Turned ON when the first operand of a Comparison Instruction is
greater than the second or a value exceeds a specified range.
Equals Flag P_EQ = Turned ON when the two operands of a Comparison Instruction are
equal the result of a calculation is 0.
Less Than Flag P_LT < Turned ON when the first operand of a Comparison Instruction is less
than the second or a value is below a specified range.
Negative Flag P_N N Turned ON when the most significant bit (sign bit) of a result is ON.
Overflow Flag P_OF OF Turned ON when the result of calculation overflows the capacity of the
result word(s).
Underflow Flag P_UF UF Turned ON when the result of calculation underflows the capacity of
the result word(s).
Greater Than or
Equals Flag
P_GE >= Turned ON when the first operand of a Comparison Instruction is
greater than or equal to the second.
Not Equal Flag P_NE < > Turned ON when the two operands of a Comparison Instruction are
not equal.
437
Condition Flags Section 9-20
Using the Condition Flags The Condition Flags are shared by all of the instructions, so their status may
change often in a single cycle. Be sure to read the Condition Flags immedi-
ately after the execution of instruction, preferably in a branch from the same
execution condition.
Since the Condition Flags are shared by all of the instructions, program oper-
ation can be changed from its expected course by interruption of a single task.
Be sure to consider the effects of interrupts when writing the program. Refer
to SECTION 2 Programming of CS/CJ Series Programming Manual (W394)
for more details.
The Condition Flags are cleared when the program switches tasks, so the sta-
tus of a Condition Flag cannot be passed to another task. For example the
status of a flag in task 1 cannot be read in task 2.
Saving and Loading Condition Flag Status
The Condition Flag status instructions (CCS(282) and CCL(283)) can be used
to save and load the status of the Condition Flags between different locations
within a task (program) or between different tasks or cycles.
The following example shows how the Equals Flag is used at a different loca-
tion in the same task.
Note This instruction does not exist in CJ1 CPU Units.
Less Than or
Equals Flag
P_LE < = Turned ON when the first operand of a Comparison Instruction is less
than or equal to the second.
Always ON Flag P_On ON Always ON. (Always 1.)
Always OFF Flag P_Off OFF Always OFF. (Always 0.)
Name Symbol Label Function
=
Instruction A
The result from instruction A is
reflected in the Equals Flag.
Instruction B
Instruction
LD
Instruction A
AND
Instruction B
Operand
Condition Flag
Example: P_EQ
CMP
CCS
CCL
P_EQ
Stores result of comparison in the Condition Flags.
This will enable loading the results to use with
Instruction B.
Saves status of Condition Flags.
Loads the statuses of the Conditions Flags that
were stored.
The result of the comparison instruction in the
Equals Flag can be used by Instruction B without
interference from Instruction A.
Instruction A
Instruction B
Tas k
438
Clock Pulses Section 9-21
9-21 Clock Pulses
The Clock Pulses are flags that are turned ON and OFF at regular intervals by
the system.
High-speed Clock Pulses (CJ1-H-R CPU Units Only)
The Clock Pulses are specified with labels (or symbols) rather than
addresses.
Name Label Symbol Name on
Programming
Console
Operation
0.02 s Clock Pulse 0.02s P_0_02_s 0.02 s ON for 0.01 s
OFF for 0.01 s
0.1 s Clock Pulse 0.1s P_0_1s 0.1 s ON for 0.05 s
OFF for 0.05 s
0.2 s Clock Pulse 0.2s P_0_2s 0.2 s ON for 0.1 s
OFF for 0.1 s
1 s Clock Pulse 1s P_1s 1 s ON for 0.5 s
OFF for 0.5 s
1 min Clock Pulse 1min P_1min 1 min ON for 30 s
OFF for 30 s
Name Label Symbol Name on
Programming
Console
Operation
0.1 ms Clock Pulse 0.1 ms P_0_1ms 0.1 ms ON for 0.05 ms
OFF for 0.05 ms
1 ms Clock Pulse 1 ms P_1ms 1 ms ON for 0.5 ms
OFF for 0.5 ms
0.01 s Clock Pulse
(Cannot be used
with unit version
4.1 of the CJ1-H-R
CPU Units. Can be
used with other
unit versions.)
0.01 s P_0_1s 0.01 s ON for 5 ms
OFF for 5 ms
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.05 s
0.05 s
0.1 s
0.1 s
0.5 s
0.5 s
30 s
30 s
0.05 ms
0.05 ms
0.5 ms
0.5 ms
5 ms
5 ms
439
Parameter Areas Section 9-22
Note The CX-Programmer treats condition flags as global symbols beginning with
P_.
The Clock Pulses are read-only; they cannot be overwritten from instructions
or Programming Devices (CX-Programmer or Programming Console).
The Clock Pulses are cleared at the start of operation.
Using the Clock Pulses The following example turns CIO 000000 ON and OFF at 0.5 s intervals.
Clock Pulse Refreshing The clock pulses are refreshed even during program execution. ON/OFF sta-
tus may not be the same at the beginning and end of a program.
Clock Pulse Error The maximum error in the clock pulses is 0.01% (at 25°C). For long-term,
time-based control, we recommend you use the internal clock instead of the
clock pulses. Be sure to allow for the error in the internal clock.
9-22 Parameter Areas
Unlike the data areas in I/O memory which can be used in instruction oper-
ands, the Parameter Area can be accessed only from a Programming Device.
The Parameter Area is made up of the following parts.
• The PLC Setup
• The Registered I/O Table
• The Routing Table
• The CPU Bus Unit Settings
9-22-1 PLC Setup
The user can customize the basic specifications of the CPU Unit with the set-
tings in the PLC Setup. The PLC Setup contains settings such as the serial
port communications settings and minimum cycle time setting.
Note Refer to the Programming Device’s Operation Manual for details on changing
these settings.
9-22-2 Registered I/O Tables
The Registered I/O Tables are tables in the CPU Unit that contain the informa-
tion on the model and slot location of all of the Units mounted to the CPU
Rack and Expansion Rack. The I/O Tables are written to the CPU Unit with a
Programming Device operation.
The CPU Unit allocates I/O memory to I/O points on Basic I/O Unit and CPU
Bus Units based on the information in the Registered I/O Tables. Refer to the
P_1s
0.5 s
0.5 s
000000
000000
OUT
LD P_1s
000000
Instruction Operand
440
Parameter Areas Section 9-22
Programming Device’s Operation Manual for details on registering the I/O
Tabl e s.
The I/O Setting Error Flag (A40110) will be turned ON if the models and loca-
tions of the Units actually mounted to the PLC (CPU Rack and Expansion
Racks) do not match the information in the Registered I/O Table.
By default, the CJ-series CPU Unit will automatically create I/O tables at star-
tup and operate according to them. I/O tables do not necessarily need to be
created by the user.
9-22-3 Routing Tables
When transferring data between networks, it is necessary to create a table in
each CPU Unit that shows the communications route from the local PLC’s
Communications Unit to the other networks. These tables of communications
routes are called “Routing Tables.”
Create the Routing Tables with a Programming Device or the Controller Link
Support Software and transfer the tables to each CPU Unit. The following dia-
gram shows the Routing Tables used for a data transfer from PLC #1 to PLC
#4.
1,2,3... 1. Relay Network Table of PLC #1:
2. Relay Network Table of PLC #2:
43102
CPU Unit
Regis-
tered
I/O
Table
Analog
Communications
16-point Output
12-point Output
16-point Input
Programming Device
Input 16 Output 12 Output 16
Analog
Commu-
nications
Node number M
Network 2
PLC#3 PLC#2 PLC#1
Unit number n
PLC#4 Network 3
Node number N
Network 1
Destination network Relay network Relay node
31N
Destination network Relay network Relay node
32M
441
Parameter Areas Section 9-22
3. Local Network Table of PLC #3:
Relay Network Table
This table lists the network address and node number of the first relay node to
contact in order to reach the destination network. The destination network is
reached through these relay nodes.
Local Network Table
This table lists the network address and unit number of the Communications
Unit connected to the local PLC.
These are settings for the CPU Bus Units which are controlled by the CPU
Unit. The actual settings depend on the model of CPU Bus Unit being used;
refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual for details.
9-22-4 CPU Bus Unit Setting
These settings are not managed directly like the I/O memory’s data areas, but
are set from a Programming Device (CX-Programmer or Programming Con-
sole) like the Registered I/O Table. Refer to the Programming Device’s opera-
tion manual for details on changing these settings.
Local network Unit number
3n
Programming Device
CPU Unit
CPU Bus Unit
CPU Bus Unit
Settings
442
Parameter Areas Section 9-22
443
SECTION 10
CPU Unit Operation and the Cycle Time
This section describes the internal operation of the CPU Unit and the cycle used to perform internal processing.
10-1 CPU Unit Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
10-1-1 General Flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
10-1-2 I/O Refreshing and Peripheral Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
10-1-3 Startup Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
10-2 CPU Unit Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
10-2-1 Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
10-2-2 Status and Operations in Each Operating Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
10-2-3 Operating Mode Changes and I/O Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
10-3 Power OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
10-3-1 Instruction Execution for Power Interruptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
10-4 Computing the Cycle Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
10-4-1 CPU Unit Operation Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
10-4-2 Cycle Time Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
10-4-3 I/O Unit Refresh Times for Individual Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
10-4-4 Cycle Time Calculation Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
10-4-5 Online Editing Cycle Time Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
10-4-6 I/O Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
10-4-7 Interrupt Response Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
10-4-8 Serial PLC Link Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
10-5 Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
10-5-1 Sequence Input Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
10-5-2 Sequence Output Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
10-5-3 Sequence Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
10-5-4 Timer and Counter Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
10-5-5 Comparison Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
10-5-6 Data Movement Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
10-5-7 Data Shift Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
10-5-8 Increment/Decrement Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
10-5-9 Symbol Math Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
10-5-10 Conversion Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
10-5-11 Logic Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
10-5-12 Special Math Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
10-5-13 Floating-point Math Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
10-5-14 Double-precision Floating-point Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
10-5-15 Table Data Processing Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
10-5-16 Data Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
10-5-17 Subroutine Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
10-5-18 Interrupt Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
444
10-5-19 High-speed Counter and Pulse Output Instructions
(CJ1M CPU21/22/23 CPU Units only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
10-5-20 Step Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
10-5-21 Basic I/O Unit Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
10-5-22 Serial Communications Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
10-5-23 Network Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
10-5-24 File Memory Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
10-5-25 Display Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
10-5-26 Clock Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
10-5-27 Debugging Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
10-5-28 Failure Diagnosis Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
10-5-29 Other Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
10-5-30 Block Programming Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
10-5-31 Text String Processing Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
10-5-32 Task Control Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
10-5-33 Model Conversion Instructions (Unit Ver. 3.0 or Later Only) . . . . . 495
10-5-34 Special Function Block Instructions (Unit Ver. 3.0 or Later Only). . 495
10-5-35 Function Block Instance Execution Time
(CPU Units with Unit Version 3.0 or Later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
445
CPU Unit Operation Section 10-1
10-1 CPU Unit Operation
10-1-1 General Flow
The following flowchart shows the overall operation of the CPU Unit.
Note The CPU Unit’s processing mode is set to Normal Mode, Parallel Processing
with Synchronous Memory Access, or Parallel Processing with Asynchronous
Memory Access in the PLC Setup (Programming Console address 219, bits
08 to 15). This setting is also possible from the CX-Programmer.
Normal Mode
In the normal mode, the program is executed before I/O is refreshed and
peripherals are serviced. This cycle is executed repeatedly.
Startup
initialization
I/O refreshing
(even in
PROGRAM
mode)
Peripheral
servicing
Cycle time
Initialize hardware
memory and system
work area.
Detect Units.
Automatically transfer
data from Memory Card.
Verify actual Units with
registered I/O tables.
Clear I/O memory.
Check user memory.
Clear forced status, etc.
Check the Battery.
Check for Memory Card
and other devices.
Read DIP switch
settings.
Check I/O bus.
Check user program
memory.
Overseeing
processing
Program
execution Operation processing: Execute the user program.
Error processing: Turn OFF outputs. (Reset Units
for bus errors.)
After error: Clear I/O memory is an error occurs
(unless a FALS(007) instruction created the error).
Refresh data for the following
Units.
Basic I/O Units
Special I/O Units (both words
allocated in CIO and DM area
and specific data for each Unit)
CPU Bus Units (both words
allocated in CIO and DM area
and specific data for each Unit)
Perform the following
servicing if any events have
occurred.
Special I/O Unit event
servicing
CPU Bus Unit event servicing
Peripheral port servicing
RS-232C port servicing
File access servicing
Communications port
servicing
Power ON
446
CPU Unit Operation Section 10-1
Parallel Processing (CJ1-H CPU Units Only)
The following two types of processing are performed in parallel in either of the
Parallel Processing Modes.
1,2,3... 1. Program execution: Includes user program execution and I/O refreshing. It
is this cycle time that is monitored from a Programming Device.
2. Peripheral servicing: Programming Devices and events from Special I/O
Units and CPU Bus Units are serviced when they occur.
There are two different Parallel Processing Modes. Parallel Processing with
Synchronous Memory Access refreshes I/O memory in the program execution
cycle and Parallel Processing with Asynchronous Memory Access refreshes
I/O memory in the peripheral servicing cycle.
Note Always disconnect the Programming Console from the peripheral port during
actual system operation in a Parallel Processing Mode. If the Programming
Console is left attached, excess time will be allocated to increase key
response for the Programming Console, adversely affecting performance.
Startup
initialization
I/O refreshing
(even in
PROGRAM
mode)
Peripheral
servicing
Program
execution
cycle
time
Initialize hardware
memory and system
work area.
Detect I/O.
Automatically transfer
data from Memory
Card.
Verify actual Units with
registered I/O tables.
Clear I/O memory.
Check user memory.
Clear forced status,
etc.
Program
execution
Operation processing: Execute the user
program.
Error processing: Turn OFF outputs.
(Reset Units for bus errors.)
After error: Clear I/O memory is an error
occurs (unless a FALS(007) instruction
created the error).
Refresh data for the following Units.
Basic I/O Units
Special I/O Units (both words allocated
in CIO and DM area and specific data
for each Unit)
CPU Bus Units (both words allocated in
CIO and DM area and specific data for
each Unit)
Perform the following servicing if any
events have occurred.
Special I/O Unit event servicing
CPU Bus Unit event servicing
Peripheral port servicing
RS-232C port servicing
Communications port servicing
Note: In Parallel Processing with
Synchronous Memory Access, any
events requiring I/O memory access
are serviced in the program execution
cycle.
Power ON
Read DIP switch settings.
Check I/O bus.
Overseeing
processing Overseeing
processing
Program
Execution
Cycle
Peripheral
servicing
cycle time
Check the Battery.
Check I/O bus.
Check user program
memory.
Peripheral
servicing
Perform the following servicing if any events
have occurred.
File access servicing
Note: In Parallel Processing with Synchronous
Memory Access, any events requiring I/O
memory access are serviced here.
Note Refreshed in PROGRAM mode too.
Peripheral
Servicing
Cycle
447
CPU Unit Operation Section 10-1
10-1-2 I/O Refreshing and Peripheral Servicing
I/O Refreshing
I/O refreshing involves cyclically transferring data with external devices using
preset words in memory. I/O refreshing includes the following:
• Refreshing between Basic I/O Units and I/O words in the CIO Area
• Refreshing between Special I/O Units and CPU Bus Units, and the words
allocated to these in the CIO Area (and for CPU Bus Units, words allo-
cated in the DM Area)
• Refreshing Unit-specific data for Special I/O Units and CPU Bus Units.
All I/O refreshing is performed in the same cycle (i.e., time slicing is not used).
I/O refreshing is always performed after program execution (even in a Parallel
Processing Mode for CJ1-H CPU Units).
Units Max. data
exchange
Data exchange area
Basic I/O Units Depends on the
Unit.
I/O Bit Area
Special I/O
Units
Words allocated in CIO
Area
10 words/Unit
(Depends on the
Unit.)
Special I/O Unit Area
Unit-
specific
data
DeviceNet Mas-
ter Unit
Depends on the
Unit.
Words set for remote I/O
communications (for
either fixed or user-set
allocations)
CompoBus/S
Master Unit
Depends on the
Unit.
Special I/O Units Area
CPU Bus
Units
Words allocated in CIO
Area
25 words/Unit CJ-series CPU Bus Unit
Area
Words allocated in DM
Area
100 words/Unit CJ-series CPU Bus Unit
Area
Unit-
specific
data
Controller Link
Unit and SYS-
MAC LINK Unit
Depends on the
Unit.
Words set for data links
(for either fixed or user-
set allocations)
DeviceNet Unit Depends on the
Unit.
Words set for remote I/O
communications (for
either fixed or user-set
allocations)
Serial Communi-
cations Unit
Depends on the
protocol macros.
Communications data
set for protocol macros
Ethernet Unit Depends on the
Unit.
Communications data for
socket services initiated
by specific control bit
operations.
448
CPU Unit Operation Section 10-1
Peripheral Servicing
Peripheral servicing involves servicing non-scheduled events for external
devices. This includes both events from external devices and service requests
to external devices.
Most peripheral servicing for CJ-series PLCs involved FINS commands. The
specific amount of time set in the system is allocated to each type of servicing
and executed every cycle. If all servicing cannot be completed within the allo-
cated time, the remaining servicing is performed the next cycle.
Note 1. Special I/O Units, CPU Bus Units, RS-232C communications ports, and file
servicing is allocated 4% of the cycle time by default (the default can be
changed). If servicing is separated over many cycles, delaying completion
of the servicing, set the same allocated time (same time for all services)
rather than a percentage under execute time settings in the PLC Setup.
2. In either of the Parallel Processing Modes for the CJ1-H CPU Unit, all pe-
ripheral servicing except for file access is performed in the peripheral ser-
vicing cycle.
10-1-3 Startup Initialization
The following initializing processes will be performed once each time the
power is turned ON.
• Detect mounted Units.
• Compare the registered I/O tables and the actual Units.
• Clear the non-holding areas of I/O memory according to the status of the
IOM Hold Bit. (See note 1.)
• Clear forced status according to the status of the Forced Status Hold Bit.
(See note 2.)
• Autoboot using the autotransfer files in the Memory Card if one is
inserted.
• Perform self-diagnosis (user memory check).
• Restore the user program. (See note 3.)
Units Servicing
Event servicing for Spe-
cial I/O Units
Non-scheduled servicing for FINS commands from CJ-series Special I/O Units and CJ-series
CPU Bus Units (e.g., requests to start external interrupt tasks)
Non-scheduled servicing for FINS commands from the CPU Unit to the above Units.
Event servicing for CPU
Bus Units
Peripheral port servic-
ing
Non-scheduled servicing for FINS or Host Link commands received via the peripheral or RS-
232C ports from Programming Devices, PTs, or host computers (e.g., requests to transfer pro-
gramming, monitoring, forced-set/reset operations, or online editing
Non-scheduled servicing from the CPU Unit transmitted from the peripheral or RS-232C port
(non-solicited communications)
RS-232C port servicing
Communications port
servicing
Servicing to execute network communications, serial communications, or file memory access
for the SEND, RECV, CMND or PMCR instructions using communications ports 0 to 7 (internal
logical ports)
Servicing to execute background execution using communications ports 0 to 7 (internal logical
ports) (CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Units only)
File access servicing File read/write operations for Memory Cards or EM file memory.
449
CPU Unit Operating Modes Section 10-2
Note 1. The I/O memory is held or cleared according to the status of the IOM Hold
Bit and the setting for IOM Hold Bit Status at Startup in the PLC Setup
(read only when power is turned ON).
Mode Change: Between PROGRAMMING mode and RUN or MONITOR
mode
2. The forced status held or cleared according to the status of the Force Sta-
tus Hold Bit and the setting for Forced Status Hold Bit Status at Startup in
the PLC Setup.
Mode Change: Between PROGRAMMING mode and MONITOR mode
3. If the CPU Unit is turned OFF after online editing before the backup pro-
cess has been competed, an attempt will be made to recover the program
when power is turned ON again. The BKUP indicator will light during this
process. Refer to the CS/CJ Series Programming Manual (W394) for de-
tails.
10-2 CPU Unit Operating Modes
10-2-1 Operating Modes
The CPU Unit has three operating modes that control the entire user program
and are common to all tasks.
PROGRAM: Programs are not executed and preparations, such as creat-
ing I/O tables, initializing the PLC Setup and other settings,
transferring programs, checking programs, force-setting and
force-resetting can be executed prior to program execution.
MONITOR: Programs are executed, but some operations, such as online
editing, forced-set/reset, and changes to present values in I/O
memory, are enabled for trial operation and other adjust-
ments.
RUN: Programs are executed and some operations are disabled.
Auxiliary bit
PLC Setup setting
IOM Hold Bit (A50012)
Clear (OFF) Hold (ON)
IOM Hold Bit Status
at Startup
(Programming Con-
sole address:
Word 80, bit 15)
Clear
(OFF)
At power ON: Clear
At mode change: Clear
At power ON: Clear
At mode change: Hold
Hold
(ON)
At power ON: Hold
At mode change: Hold
Auxiliary bit
PLC Setup setting
Forced Status Hold Bit (A50013)
Clear (OFF) Hold (ON)
Forced Status Hold
Bit Status at Startup
(Programming Con-
sole address:
Word 80, bit 14)
Clear
(OFF)
At power ON: Clear
At mode change: Clear
At power ON: Clear
At mode change: Hold
Hold
(ON)
At power ON: Hold
At mode change: Hold
450
CPU Unit Operating Modes Section 10-2
10-2-2 Status and Operations in Each Operating Mode
PROGRAM, RUN, and MONITOR are the three operating modes available in
the CPU Unit. The following lists status and operations for each mode.
Overall Operation
Programming Console Operations
Note The following table shows the relationship of operating modes to tasks.
Mode Program
(See note)
I/O refresh External outputs I/O Memory
Non-holding
areas
Holding areas
PROGRAM Stopped Executed OFF Clear Hold
MONITOR Executed Executed Controlled by pro-
gram
Controlled by program
RUN Executed Executed Controlled by pro-
gram
Controlled by program
Mode Monitor I/O
Memory
Monitor
Program
Transfer Program Check
Program
Create I/O
Table
PLC to
Programming
Device
Programming
Device to PLC
PROGRAM OK OK OK OK OK OK
MONITOR OK OK OK XXX
RUN OK OK OK XXX
Mode PLC Setup Modify
Program
Force- set/
reset
Changing
Timer/Counter
SV
Changing
Timer/Counter
PV
Changing I/O
Memory PV
PROGRAM OK OK OK OK OK OK
MONITOR X OK OK OK OK OK
RUNXXXXXX
Mode Cyclic task status Interrupt task
status
PROGRAM Disabled status (INI) Stopped
MONITOR • Any task that has not yet been executed, will be in disabled status (INI).
• A task will go to READY status if the task is set to go to READY status at star-
tup or the TASK ON (TKON) instruction has been executed for it.
• A task in READY status will be executed (RUN status) when it obtains the
right to execute.
• A status will go to Standby status if a READY task is put into Standby status
by a TASK OFF (TKOF) instruction.
Executed if inter-
rupt condition is
met.
RUN
451
Power OFF Operation Section 10-3
10-2-3 Operating Mode Changes and I/O Memory
Note 1. The following processing is performed depending on the status of the I/O
Memory Hold Bit. Output from Output Units will be turned OFF when oper-
ation stops even if I/O bit status is held in the CPU Unit.
2. the cycle time will increase temporarily by approximately 10 ms when the
operating mode is changed from MONITOR to RUN mode.
Note See Chapter 7 Memory Areas, etc. for more details on I/O Memory.
10-3 Power OFF Operation
The following processing is performed if CPU Unit power is turned OFF.
Power OFF processing will be performed if the power supply falls below 85%
(80% for CJ1W-PD025 DC Power Supply Units or 90% for CJ1W-PD022 DC
Power Supply Units) of the minimum rated voltage while the CPU Unit is in
RUN or MONITOR mode.
1,2,3... 1. The CPU Unit will stop.
2. All outputs from Output Units will be turned OFF.
Note All output will turn OFF despite an I/O Memory Hold Bit or I/O Memory Hold
Bit at power ON settings in the PLC Setup.
85% of the rated voltage:
85 V AC for 100 to 240 V (wide range)
DC Power Supply Units:
CJ1W-PD025: 19.2 V DC
CJ1W-PD022: 21.6 V DC
Mode Changes Non-holding areas Holding Areas
• I/O bits
• Data Link bits
• CPU Bus Unit bits
• Special I/O Unit bits
• Work bits
• Timer PV/Completion Flags
• Index Registers
• Data Registers
• Task Flags
(Auxiliary Area bits/words are hold-
ing or non-holding depending on the
address.)
•HR Area
•DM Area
•EM Area
• Counter PV and Completion Flags
(Auxiliary Area bits/words are hold-
ing or non-holding depending on the
address.)
RUN or MONITOR to PROGRAM Cleared (See note 1.) Held
PROGRAM to RUN or MONITOR Cleared (See note 1.) Held
RUN to MONITOR or
MONITOR to RUN
Held (See note 2.) Held
I/O Memory
Hold Bit status
(A50012)
I/O Memory Output bits allocated to Output Units
Mode changed
between
PROGRAM
and RUN/
MONITOR
Operation stopped Mode changed
between
PROGRAM
and RUN/
MONITOR
Operation stopped
Fatal error
other than
FALS
FALS
executed
Fatal error
other than
FALS
FALS
executed
OFF Cleared Cleared Held OFF OFF OFF
ON Held Held Held Held OFF OFF
452
Power OFF Operation Section 10-3
The following processing will be performed if power drops only momentarily
(momentary power interruption).
1,2,3... 1. The system will continue to run unconditionally if the momentary power in-
terruption lasts less than 10 ms, i.e., the time it takes the minimum rated
voltage at 85% or less to return to 85% or higher is less than 10 ms.
Note When DC power supplies are used, less than 2 ms is required for the rated
voltage of a CJ1W-PD025 at 80% or less to return to 80% or higher or for the
rated voltage of a CJ1W-PD022 at 90% or less to return to 90% or higher.
2. A momentary power interruption that lasts more than 10 ms but less than
25 ms (when using a DC power supply, more than 2 ms but less than 5 ms
for CJ1W-PD025 and more than 2 ms but less than 10 ms for CJ1W-
PD022) is difficult to determine and a power interruption may or may not
be detected.
3. The system will stop unconditionally if the momentary power interruption
lasts more than 25 ms (when using a DC power supply, more than 5 ms for
CJ1W-PD025 and more than 10 ms for CJ1W-PD022).
Therefore, the time required to detect a power interruption is 10 to 25 ms
(when using a DC power supply, 2 to 5 ms for CJ1W-PD025 and 2 to 10 ms
for CJ1W-PD022) If operation stops under the conditions given in items 2 and
3 above, the timing used to stop operation (or the timing used to start execu-
tion of the Power OFF Interrupt Task) can be delayed by setting the Power
OFF Detection Delay Time (0 to 10 ms) in the PLC Setup. Operation, how-
ever, will always be stopped 10 ms after detecting a momentary power inter-
ruption regardless of the setting in the PLC Setup. The holding time for the
5-VDC outputs of CJ1W-PD022 Power Supply Units when a power interrup-
tion occurs is 1 ms, however, so bit 22515 (Power OFF Interrupt Task Disable
Bit) and bits 22500 to 22507 (Power OFF Detection Time (Power OFF Detec-
tion Delay Time) Bits) cannot be used.
Note The above timing chart shows an example when the power OFF detection
delay time is set to 0 ms.
0 to 10 ms
(PD025/PD022:
0 to 2 ms)
Time
10 to 25 ms
(PD025: 2 to 5 ms,
PD022: 2 to 10 ms)
25 ms and longer
(PD025: 5 ms, PD022: 10 ms)
10 ms 25 ms
Power supply
voltage
Power supply
voltage
Power supply
voltage
Momentary power
interruption not
detected and op-
eration continues.
85% of the rated voltage or less (DC power supply: 80% or less for PD025, 90% or less for PD022)
Operation will continue or
stop depending on
whether or not a
momentary power
interruption is detected.
Momentary power interruption detected
and operation stops.
453
Power OFF Operation Section 10-3
The following timing chart shows the CPU Unit power OFF operation in more
detail.
Power OFF Timing Chart
Power OFF Detection Time
The time it takes to detect power OFF after the power supply falls below 85%
(80% for CJ1W-PD025 DC Power Supply Units or 90% for CJ1W-PD022 DC
Power Supply Units) of the minimum rated voltage.
Power OFF Detection Delay Time
The delay time after power OFF is detected until it is confirmed. This can be
set in the PLC Setup within a range from 0 to 10 ms.
If the power OFF interrupt task is disabled, then the CPU reset signal will turn
ON and the CPU will be reset when this time expires.
If the power OFF interrupt task is enabled in the PLC Setup, then the CPU
reset signal will turn ON and the CPU will be reset only after the power OFF
interrupt task has been executed.
If an unstable power supply is causing power interruptions, set a longer Power
OFF Detection Delay Time (10 ms max.) in the PLC Setup. The CJ1W-PD022
Power Supply Units only support a holding time of 1 ms, however, so this set-
ting is not possible.
Power Holding Time
The maximum amount of time (fixed at 10 ms) that 5 V will be held internally
after power shuts OFF. The time that it takes for the power OFF interrupt task
to execute must not exceed 10 ms minus the Power OFF Detection Delay
Time (processing time after power OFF is confirmed). The power OFF inter-
rupt task will be ended even if it has not been completely executed the
moment this time expires. The CJ1W-PD022 Power Supply Units only support
a holding time of 1 ms, however, so this setting is not possible.
Description of Operation
1,2,3... 1. Power OFF will be detected if the 100 to 120 V AC, 200 to 240 V AC or 24-
V DC power supply falls below 85% (80% for CJ1W-PD025 DC Power Sup-
ply Units or 90% for CJ1W-PD022 DC Power Supply Units) of the minimum
rated voltage for the power OFF detection time (somewhere between 10 to
25 ms for AC Power Supply Units, somewhere between 2 to 5 ms for
CPU reset signal
Stopped
Cyclic tasks or interrupt tasks not
associated with power OFF
Power OFF
detection time:
AC: 10 to 25 ms
PD025: 2 to 5 ms
PD022: 2 to 10 ms
(Power OFF
undetermined)
Power OFF detected Power OFF confirmed
Power OFF
Detection Delay
Time: 0 to 10 ms (set
in PLC Setup)
Operation always stopped at this
point regardless.
Processing time after power
OFF is confirmed: 10 ms
minus Power OFF Detection
Delay Time (PD022: 1 ms
minus Power OFF Detection
Delay Time)
Note: The interrupt task
execution time must be less
than or equal to processing
time after power OFF is
confirmed.
Power OFF
interrupt
task
85% of rated
voltage
(PD025: 80%,
PD022: 90%)
Power OFF
detected signal
Program execution
status
Holding time for 5 V internal power
supply after power OFF detection:
Always 10 ms (PD022: 1 ms)
454
Power OFF Operation Section 10-3
CJ1W-PD025 DC Power Supply Units, and somewhere between 2 to
10 ms for CJ1W-PD022 DC Power Supply Units).
2. If the Power OFF Detection Delay Time is set (0 to 10 ms) in the PLC Set-
up, then the following operations will be performed when the set time ex-
pires.
a) If the power OFF interrupt task is disabled (default PLC Setup setting)
The CPU reset signal will turn ON and the CPU will be reset immedi-
ately.
b) If the power OFF interrupt task is enabled (in the PLC Setup), the CPU
reset signal will turn ON and the CPU will be reset after the power OFF
interrupt task has been executed. Make sure that the power OFF inter-
rupt task will finish executing within 10 ms minus the Power OFF De-
tection Delay Time = processing time after power OFF. The 5-V
internal power supply will be maintained only for 10 ms after power
OFF is detected. The holding time for the internal 5-V power supply of
CJ1W-PD022 Power Supply Units when a power interruption occurs is
1 ms, however, so the Power OFF Detection Delay Time and Power
OFF Interrupt Task Disable functions cannot be used.
10-3-1 Instruction Execution for Power Interruptions
If power is interrupted and the interruption is confirmed when the CPU Unit is
operating in RUN or MONITOR mode, the instruction currently being executed
will be completed (see note 1) and the following power interruption processing
will be performed.
• If the power OFF interrupt task has not been enabled, the CPU Unit will
be reset immediately.
• If the power OFF interrupt task has been enabled, the task will be exe-
cuted and then the CPU Unit will be reset immediately.
The power OFF interrupt task is enabled and disabled in the PLC Setup.
Note 1. The current instruction can be completed only when the time required to
complete execution is less than or equal to the processing time after power
interruption detection (10 ms − power interruption detection delay time). If
the instruction is not completed within this time, it will be interrupted and
the above processing will be performed.
2. The processing time after a power interruption is detected is 1 ms when a
CJ1W-PD022 is mounted.
Disabling Power Interruption Processing in the Program
With CS1-H and CJ1M CPU Units, if the power OFF interrupt task is disabled,
areas of the program can be protected from power interruptions so that the
instructions will be executed before the CPU Unit performs power OFF pro-
cessing even if the power supply is interrupted. This is achieved by using the
DISABLE INTERRUPTS (DI(693)) and ENABLE INTERRUPTS (EI(694))
instructions.
The following procedure is used.
1,2,3... 1. Insert DI(693) before the program section to be protected to disable inter-
rupts and then place EI(694) after the section to enable interrupts.
455
Power OFF Operation Section 10-3
2. Set the Disable Setting for Power OFF Interrupts in A530 to A5A5 Hex to
enable disabling power interruption processing.
Note A530 is normally cleared when power is turned OFF. To prevent this,
the IOM Hold Bit (A50012) must be turned ON and the PLC Setup
must be set to maintain the setting of the IOM Hold Bit at Startup, or
the following type of instruction must be included at the beginning of
the program to set A530 to A5A5 Hex.
3. Disable the Power OFF Interrupt Task in the PLC Setup.
With the above procedure, all instructions between DI(693) and EI(694) (or
END) will be completed (see note 1) before the Power OFF Interrupt is exe-
cuted even if the power interruption occurs while executing the instructions
between DI(693) and EI(694).
Note 1. The protected instructions can be completed only when the time required
to complete execution is less than or equal to the processing time after
power interruption detection (10 ms − power interruption detection delay
time). If the instructions is not completed within this time, they will be inter-
rupted and the above processing will be performed.
2. If the Power OFF Interrupt Task is not disabled in the PLC Setup, the Power
OFF Interrupt Task will be executed, and the CPU Unit will be reset without
executing the protected instructions as soon as the power interruption is
detected.
3. If a power interrupt is detected while DI(693) is being executed, the CPU
Unit will be reset without executing the protected instructions.
4. The processing time after a power interruption is detected is 1 ms when a
CJ1W-PD022 is mounted.
DI
W0.00
Interrupt tasks disabled.
Interrupt tasks enabled.
EI
Instructions that cannot be
interrupted when a power
interruption occurs Instructions executed here.
Power interruption
confirmed.
MOV
#A5A5
A530
A20011
First Cycle Flag
Set A530 to A5A5 Hex at the
beginning of the program to enable
disabling power interruption
processing.
456
Power OFF Operation Section 10-3
Interrupt processing is performed according to the contents of A530 and the
PLC Setup as shown below.
CPU reset signal
Stopped
Instructions between
DI(693) and EI(694)
are executed.
DI(693) EI(694)
Program execution
status
Power OFF
detected signal
85% of rated
voltage
(PD025: 80%,
PD022: 90%)
Cyclic tasks or interrupt tasks not
associated with power OFF
Processing time after power
OFF is confirmed: 10 ms
minus Power OFF Detection
Delay Time
(PD022: 1 ms minus Power
OFF Detection Delay Time)
Note: The interrupt task
execution time must be less
than or equal to processing
time after power OFF is
confirmed.
Power OFF
Detection Delay
Time: 0 to 10 ms
(set in PLC Setup)
Power OFF
detection time:
AC: 10 to 25 ms
PD025: 2 to 5 ms
PD022: 2 to 10 ms
(Power OFF
undetermined)
Power OFF confirmed
Operation always stopped at this
point regardless.
Power OFF detected
Holding time for 5 V internal power
supply after power OFF detection:
Always 10 ms (PD022: 1 ms)
The following example is for a CJ1-H CPU Unit with the
power OFF interrupt enabled and A530 (Power
Interrupt Disabled Area Setting) set to A5A5 hex
(masking power interruption processing enabled).
A530 (Power Interrupt Dis-
abled Area Setting)
A5A5 hex (masking power
interruption processing enabled)
Not A5A5 hex
Power OFF
Interrupt Task
(PLC Setup)
Disabled All instructions between DI(693)
and EI(694) are executed and the
CPU Unit is reset.
Execution of the current
instruction is completed
and the CPU Unit is reset.
Enabled Execution of the current instruction is completed, the Power OFF
Interrupt Task is executed, and the CPU Unit is reset.
457
Computing the Cycle Time Section 10-4
10-4 Computing the Cycle Time
10-4-1 CPU Unit Operation Flowchart
The CJ-series CPU Units process data in repeating cycles from the oversee-
ing processing up to peripheral servicing as shown in the following diagrams.
Normal Processing Mode
NO
YES
YES
NO
Sets error flags
I/O refreshing
ERR/ALM indicator
ON or Flashing?
ON (fatal error)
Flashing (non-
fatal error)
Executes user pro-
gram (i.e., executes
READY cyclic tasks).
End of program?
Resets watchdog
timer and waits un-
til the set cycle time
has elapsed
Calculates cycle
time
Performs I/O
refreshing
Services Program-
ming Devices
Check OK?
Checks hardware
and user program
memory
Checks Unit
connection status.
Power ON
Startup initializa-
tion
Overseeing pro-
cessing
Program execu-
tion
Cycle time cal-
culation
Peripheral servic-
ing
PLC cycle
time
458
Computing the Cycle Time Section 10-4
Parallel Processing Mode (CJ-H CPU Units Only)
10-4-2 Cycle Time Overview
Normal Processing Mode
The cycle time depends on the following conditions.
• Type and number of instructions in the user program (in all cyclic tasks
that are executed during a cycle, and within interrupt tasks for which the
execution conditions have been satisfied).
• Type and number of Basic I/O Units
• Type and number of Special I/O Units, CPU Bus Units, and type of ser-
vices being executed.
• Specific servicing for the following Units
• Data link refreshing and the number of data link words for Controller
Link and SYSMAC LINK Units
NO
YES
Power ON
Startup
initialization
Checks Unit
connection status
Program Execution
Cycle Peripheral
Servicing Cycle
Check user program
memory, etc.
Check OK?
Services
peripherals.
Overseeing
processing
Program execution
cycle time
Check OK?
Execute user
program (i.e., READY
cyclic tasks).
Program
completed?
Wait for specified
cycle time.
Calculates cycle
time.
Refreshes I/O.
Services peripherals.
Overseeing
processing
Program
execution
Cycle time
calculations
I/O refreshing
ERR/ALM
indicator lit or
flashing
Lit: Fatal error
Set error flags.
Check hardware,
etc.
Flashing:
Non-fatal
error
Periph-
eral
servic-
ing
Periph-
eral
servic-
ing
459
Computing the Cycle Time Section 10-4
• Remote I/O for DeviceNet (Master) Units and the number of remote
I/O words
• Use of protocol macros and the largest communications message
• Socket services for specific control bits for Ethernet Units and the num-
ber of send/receive words
• Fixed cycle time setting in the PLC Setup
• File access in file memory, and the amount of data transferred to/from file
memory
• Event servicing for Special I/O Units, CPU Bus Units, and communica-
tions ports
• Use of peripheral and RS-232C ports
• Fixed peripheral servicing time in the PLC Setup
Note 1. The cycle time is not affected by the number of tasks that are used in the
user program. The tasks that affect the cycle time are those cyclic tasks
that are READY in the cycle.
2. When the mode is switched from MONITOR mode to RUN mode, the cycle
time will be extended by 10 ms (this will not, however, take the cycle time
over its limit).
The cycle time is the total time required for the PLC to perform the 5 opera-
tions shown in the following tables.
Cycle time = (1) + (2) + (3) + (4) + (5)
1: Overseeing
Note With CPU22 and CPU23 models, the processing time is 0.6 ms while the
pulse I/O function is used.
2: Program Execution
3: Cycle Time Calculation
Details Processing time and fluctuation cause
Checks the I/O bus and user program memory, checks for
battery errors and refreshes the clock.
CJ1-H-R CPU Unit: 0.13 ms
CJ1-H CPU Unit: 0.3 ms
CJ1M CPU Unit: 0.5 ms (See note.)
CJ1 CPU Unit: 0.5 ms
Details Processing time and fluctuation cause
Executes the user program, and calculates the total time
time taken for the instructions to execute the program.
Total instruction execution time
Details Processing time and fluctuation cause
Waits for the specified cycle time to elapse when a minimum
(fixed) cycle time has been set in the PLC Setup.
Calculates the cycle time.
When the cycle time is not fixed, the time for step 3 is
approximately 0.
When the cycle time is fixed, the time for step 3 is the preset
fixed cycle time minus the actual cycle time ((1) + (2) + (4) +
(5)).
460
Computing the Cycle Time Section 10-4
4: I/O Refreshing
5: Peripheral Servicing
Details Processing time and fluctuation cause
Basic I/O Units Basic I/O Units are refreshed. Outputs from
the CPU Unit to the I/O Unit are refreshed
first for each Unit, and then inputs.
I/O refresh time for each Unit multiplied by the number of
Units used.
Special I/O
Units
Words allocated in CIO Area I/O refresh time for each Unit multiplied by the number of
Units used.
Unit- specific
data
CompoBus/S remote
I/O
CPU Bus Units Words allocated in CIO and DM Areas I/O refresh time for each Unit multiplied by the number of
Units used.
Unit- specific
data
Data links for Control-
ler Link and SYSMAC
LINK Units, DeviceNet
remote I/O for CJ-
series DeviceNet Units,
send/receive data for
protocol macros, and
socket services for spe-
cific control bits for
Ethernet Units
I/O refresh time for each Unit multiplied by the number of
Units used.
Details Processing time and fluctuation cause
Services events for Special I/O Units.
Note Peripheral servicing does not include
I/O refreshing,
If a uniform peripheral servicing time hasn’t been set in the PLC Setup for
this servicing, 4% of the previous cycle’s cycle time (calculated in step (3))
will be allowed for peripheral servicing.
If a uniform peripheral servicing time has been set in the PLC Setup, servic-
ing will be performed for the set time. At least 0.1 ms, however, will be ser-
viced whether the peripheral servicing time is set or not.
If no Units are mounted, the servicing time is 0 ms.
Services events for CPU Bus Units.
Note Peripheral servicing does not include
I/O refreshing.
Same as above.
Services events for peripheral ports. If a uniform peripheral servicing time hasn’t been set in the PLC Setup for
this servicing, 4% of the previous cycle’s cycle time (calculated in step (3))
will be allowed for peripheral servicing.
If a uniform peripheral servicing time has been set in the PLC Setup, servic-
ing will be performed for the set time. At least 0.1 ms, however, will be ser-
viced whether the peripheral servicing time is set or not.
If the ports are not connected, the servicing time is 0 ms.
Services RS-232C ports. Same as above.
Services file access (Memory Card or EM
file memory).
If a uniform peripheral servicing time hasn’t been set in the PLC Setup for
this servicing, 4% of the previous cycle’s cycle time (calculated in step (3))
will be allowed for peripheral servicing.
If a uniform peripheral servicing time has been set in the PLC Setup, servic-
ing will be performed for the set time. At least 0.1 ms, however, will be ser-
viced whether the peripheral servicing time is set or not.
If there is no file access, the servicing time is 0 ms.
Services communications ports. If a uniform peripheral servicing time hasn’t been set in the PLC Setup for
this servicing, 4% of the previous cycle’s cycle time (calculated in step (3))
will be allowed for peripheral servicing.
If a uniform peripheral servicing time has been set in the PLC Setup, servic-
ing will be performed for the set time. At least 0.1 ms, however, will be ser-
viced whether the peripheral servicing time is set or not.
If no communications ports are used, the servicing time is 0 ms.
461
Computing the Cycle Time Section 10-4
Parallel Processing with Asynchronous Memory Access (CJ1-H CPU Units Only)
Program Execution Cycle The program execution cycle time depends on the following conditions.
• Type and number of instructions in the user program (in all cyclic tasks
that are executed during a cycle, and within interrupt tasks for which the
execution conditions have been satisfied).
• Type and number of Basic I/O Units
• Type and number of Special I/O Units, CJ-series CPU Bus Units, and type
of services being executed.
• Specific servicing for the following Units
• Data link refreshing and the number of data link words for Controller
Link and SYSMAC LINK Units
• Remote I/O for DeviceNet (Master) Units and the number of remote
I/O words
• Use of protocol macros and the largest communications message
• Socket services for specific control bits for Ethernet Units and the num-
ber of send/receive words
• Fixed cycle time setting in the PLC Setup
• File access in file memory, and the amount of data transferred to/from file
memory
• Fixed peripheral servicing time in the PLC Setup
The program execution cycle time is the total time required for the PLC to per-
form the five operations shown in the following tables.
Cycle time = (1) + (2) + (3) + (4) + (5)
Peripheral Servicing Cycle
Time
The peripheral servicing execution cycle time depends on the following condi-
tions.
• Type and number of Special I/O Units, CJ-series CPU Bus Units, and type
of services being executed.
• Type and frequency of event servicing requiring communications ports.
• Use of peripheral and RS-232C ports
Details Processing time and
fluctuation cause
(1) Overseeing I/O bus check, etc. • CJ1H-CPU@@H-R:
0.28 ms
• CJ1@-CPU@@H/CJ1G-
CPU@@P: 0.3 ms
(2) Program execution Same as for Normal Mode. Same as for Normal Mode.
(3) Cycle time calcula-
tion
Waits for the specified
cycle time.
Same as for Normal Mode.
(4) I/O refreshing Same as for Normal Pro-
cessing Mode.
Same as for Normal Pro-
cessing Mode.
(5) Partial peripheral
servicing
Servicing file access Same as for Normal Pro-
cessing Mode.
462
Computing the Cycle Time Section 10-4
The peripheral servicing cycle time is the total time required for the PLC to
perform the five operations shown in the following tables.
Cycle time = (1) + (2)
Note 1. The cycle time display on a Programming Device is the Program Execution
Cycle Time.
2. The peripheral service cycle time varies with the event load and number of
Units that are mounted. In a Parallel Processing Mode, however, this vari-
ation will not affect the program execution cycle time.
Parallel Processing with Synchronous Memory Access (CJ1-H CPU Units Only)
Program Execution Cycle The program execution cycle time depends on the same conditions as Parallel
Processing with Asynchronous Memory Access.
The program execution cycle time is the total time required for the PLC to per-
form the five operations shown in the following tables.
Cycle time = (1) + (2) + (3) + (4) + (5)
Name Processing Processing time and
fluctuation cause
(1) Overseeing
processing
Checks user program memory,
checks for battery errors, etc.
• CJ1H-CPU@@H-R:
0.18 ms
• CJ1@-CPU@@H/
CJ1G-CPU@@P:
0.2 ms
(2) Peripheral
servicing
Performs
services for
the events
give at the
right, includ-
ing I/O
memory
access.
Events with CJ-series
Special I/O Units (does
not include I/O refresh-
ing)
1.0 ms for each type of
service
If servicing ends before
1 ms has expired, the
next type of servicing
will be started immedi-
ately without waiting.
Events with CJ-series
CPU Bus Units (does
not include I/O refresh-
ing)
Peripheral port events
RS-232C port events
Events using communi-
cations ports
Details Processing time and
fluctuation cause
(1) Overseeing I/O bus check, etc. • CJ1H-CPU@@H-R:
0.28 ms
• CJ1@-CPU@@H/
CJ1G-CPU@@P:
0.3 ms
(2) Program exe-
cution
Same as for Normal Mode. Same as for Normal
Mode.
(3) Cycle time
calculation
Waits for the specified cycle time. Same as for Normal
Mode.
(4) I/O refreshing Same as for Normal Processing Mode. Same as for Normal
Mode.
463
Computing the Cycle Time Section 10-4
Peripheral Servicing Cycle
Time
The peripheral servicing cycle time depends on the same conditions as Paral-
lel Processing with Asynchronous Memory Access.
The peripheral servicing cycle time is the total time required for the PLC to
perform the five operations shown in the following tables.
Cycle time = (1) + (2)
Note 1. The cycle time display on a Programming Device is the Program Execution
Cycle Time.
2. The peripheral service cycle time varies with the event load and number of
Units that are mounted. In a Parallel Processing Mode, however, this vari-
ation will not affect the program execution cycle time.
(5) Partial
peripheral
servicing
Servicing file access (Memory Card or
EM file memory)
Same as for Normal
Mode.
Performs
services for
the events
give at the
right that
requires I/O
memory
access
Events with Special I/O
Units (does not include
I/O refreshing)
Events with CPU Bus
Units (does not include
I/O refreshing)
Peripheral port events
RS-232C port events
Events using communi-
cations ports
Details Processing time and
fluctuation cause
Name Processing Processing time and
fluctuation cause
(1) Overseeing
processing
Checks user program memory,
checks for battery errors, etc.
• CJ1H-CPU@@H-R:
0.18 ms
• CJ1@-CPU@@H/
CJ1G-CPU@@P:
0.2 ms
(2) Peripheral
servicing
Performs
services for
the events
give at the
right,
excluding
those that
require I/O
memory
access.
Events with Special I/O
Units (does not include
I/O refreshing)
1.0 ms for each type of
service
If servicing ends before
1 ms has expired, the
next type of servicing
will be started immedi-
ately without waiting.
Events with CPU Bus
Units (does not include
I/O refreshing)
Peripheral port events
RS-232C port events
Events using communi-
cations ports
464
Computing the Cycle Time Section 10-4
10-4-3 I/O Unit Refresh Times for Individual Units
Typical Basic I/O Unit Refresh Times
Typical Special I/O Unit Refresh Times
Name Model I/O refresh time per Unit
CJ1-H-R CJ1-H CJ1M CJ1
8/16-point DC Input Units CJ1W-ID201/211 0.0014 ms 0.003 ms 0.003 ms 0.004 ms
32-point DC Input Units CJ1W-ID231/232 0.0023 ms 0.005 ms 0.005 ms 0.006 ms
64-point DC Input Units CJ1W-ID261/262 0.0041 ms 0.011 ms 0.011 ms 0.012 ms
8/16-point AC Input Units CJ1W-IA201/111 0.0014 ms 0.003 ms 0.003 ms 0.004 ms
16-point Interrupt Input Units CJ1W-INT01 0.0014 ms 0.003 ms 0.003 ms 0.004 ms
16-point Quick-response Input Units CJ1W-IDP01 0.0014 ms 0.003 ms 0.003 ms 0.004 ms
8/16-point Relay Output Units CJ1W-OC201/211 0.0014 ms 0.003 ms 0.003 ms 0.005 ms
8-point Triac Output Units CJ1W-OA201 0.0014 ms 0.003 ms 0.003 ms 0.005 ms
8/16-point Transistor Output Units CJ1W-OD201/202/203/204/211/212 0.0014 ms 0.003 ms 0.003 ms 0.005 ms
32-point Transistor Output Units CJ1W-OD231/232/233 0.0023 ms 0.005 ms 0.005 ms 0.008 ms
64-point Transistor Output Units CJ1W-OD261/262/263 0.0041 ms 0.011 ms 0.011 ms 0.015 ms
24-V DC Input/Transistor Output Units
(16 inputs/16 outputs)
CJ1W-MD231/232/233 0.0023 ms 0.005 ms 0.005 ms 0.007 ms
24-V DC Input/Transistor Output Units
(32 inputs/32 outputs)
CJ1W-MD261/263 0.0041 ms 0.011 ms 0.011 ms 0.014 ms
TTL Input/TTL Output Units
(16 inputs/16 outputs)
CJ1W-MD563 0.0041 ms 0.011 ms 0.011 ms 0.014 ms
B7A Interface Unit (64 inputs) CJ1W-B7A14 0.0041 ms 0.011 ms 0.011 ms 0.012 ms
B7A Interface Unit (64 outputs) CJ1W-B7A04 0.0041 ms 0.011 ms 0.011 ms 0.015 ms
B7A Interface Unit (32 inputs/32 out-
puts)
CJ1W-B7A22 0.0041 ms 0.011 ms 0.011 ms 0.014 ms
Name Model I/O refresh time per Unit
CJ1-H-R CJ1-H CJ1M CJ1
Analog Input Units CJ1W-AD041/081(V1) 0.05 ms 0.12 ms 0.16 ms 0.20 ms
Analog Output Units CJ1W-DA021/041/08V 0.05 ms 0.12 ms 0.16 ms 0.20 ms
Analog I/O Unit CJ1W-MAD42 0.05 ms 0.12 ms 0.16 ms 0.20 ms
Temperature Con-
trol Units
CJ1W-TC@@@ 0.26 ms 0.30 ms 0.36 ms 0.40 ms
Position Control
Units
CJ1W-NC113/133 0.13 ms 0.14 ms 0.14 ms 0.18 ms
+ 0.7 ms for each instruction (IOWR/ IORD) used to transfer data.
CJ1W-NC213/233 0.16 ms 0.18 ms 0.22 ms 0.26 ms
+ 0.7 ms for each instruction (IOWR/ IORD) used to transfer data.
CJ1W-NC413/433 0.19 ms 0.22 ms 0.28 ms 0.34 ms
+ 0.6 ms for each instruction (IOWR/ IORD) used to transfer data.
ID Sensor Units CJ1W-V600C11 0.11 ms 0.15 ms 0.20 ms 0.25 ms
CJ1W-V600C12 0.14 ms 0.30 ms 0.40 ms 0.50 ms
High-speed Counter
Unit
CJ1W-CT021 0.12 ms 0.14 ms 0.20 ms 0.20 ms
465
Computing the Cycle Time Section 10-4
Note 1. CJ1M Low-end CPU Units: CJ1M-CPU11/21.
2. The number of words allocated is the actual number of words allocated in
the I/O memory areas for all slaves.
Increase in Cycle Time
Caused by CPU Bus Units
The increase in the cycle time will be the I/O refresh times from the following
table plus the refresh time required for specific Unit functions.
CompoNet Master
Unit
CJ1W-
CRM21
Communica-
tions mode
No. 0
0.142 ms CJ1H-H: 0.156 ms
CJ1G-H: 0.189 ms
Low-end: 0.256 ms
(See note 1.)
Other: 0.233 ms
0.200 ms
Communica-
tions mode
No. 1
0.155 ms CJ1H-H: 0.178 ms
CJ1G-H: 0.211 ms
Low-end: 0.267 ms
(See note 1.)
Other: 0.256 ms
0.256 ms
Communica-
tions mode
No. 2
0.183 ms CJ1H-H: 0.189 ms
CJ1G-H: 0.233 ms
Low-end: 0.289 ms
(See note 1.)
Other: 0.267 ms
0.300 ms
Communica-
tions mode
No. 3
0.215 ms CJ1H-H: 0.244 ms
CJ1G-H: 0.289 ms
Low-end: 0.367 ms
(See note 1.)
Other: 0.322 ms
0.322 ms
Communica-
tions mode
No. 8
(See note 2.)
0.091 +
(0.0012 × No.
of words allo-
cated) ms
CJ1H-H: 0.106 +
(0.0012 × No. of
words allocated) ms
CJ1G-H: 0.109 +
(0.0014 × No. of
words allocated) ms
Low-end: 0.166 +
(0.0016 × No. of
words allocated)
ms (See note 1.)
Other: 0.100 +
(0.0016 × No. of
words allocated)
ms
0.154 +
(0.0022 × No.
of words allo-
cated) ms
CompoBus/S Mas-
ter Unit
CJ1W-
SRM21
Assigned 1
unit number
0.10 ms 0.12 ms 0.15 ms 0.15 ms
Assigned 2
unit numbers
0.11 ms 0.13 ms 0.17 ms 0.17 ms
Name Model I/O refresh time per Unit
CJ1-H-R CJ1-H CJ1M CJ1
Name Model Increase Remarks
Controller Link
Unit
CJ1W-
CLK21(V1)
CJ1-H: 0.1 ms
CJ1M: 0.15 ms
CJ1: 0.2 ms
There will be an increase of 0.1 ms + 0.7 µs × number of
data link words for CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Units and 1.5 ms
+ 1 µs × number of data link words for CJ1 CPU Units.
There will be an additional increase of the event execution
times when message services are used.
Serial Commu-
nications Unit
CJ1W-SCU41-V1
CJ1W-SCU21-V1
CJ1W-SCU31-V1
CJ1-H: 0.22 ms
CJ1M: 0.24 ms
CJ1: 0.25 ms
There will be an increase of up to the following time when a
protocol macro is executed:
CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Units: 0.7 µs × maximum number of
data words sent or received (0 to 500 words)
CJ1 CPU Units: 1 µs × maximum number of data words
sent or received (0 to 500 words)
There will be an increase of the event execution times
when Host Links or 1:N NT Links are used.
Ethernet Unit CJ1W-ETN11/21 CJ1-H: 0.1 ms
CJ1M: 0.17 ms
CJ1: 0.25 ms
If socket services are executed with software switches,
there will be an increase of 1.4 µs × the number of bytes
sent/received for CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Units and 2 µs ×
the number of bytes sent/received for CJ1 CPU Units.
There will be an increase in the event execution times
when FINS communications services, socket services for
CMND instructions, or FTP services are performed.
466
Computing the Cycle Time Section 10-4
Note The influence on the cycle time for CJ1-H-R CPU Units for Special I/O Units
and CPU Bus Units is the same as that for the CJ1-H CPU Units.
FL-net Unit CJ1W-FLN22 0.3 + No. of data link
words × 0.0011 ms
The number of data link words is the number of words of
data sent and received by a node. If the message service
is used, the event execution time must be added sepa-
rately.
DeviceNet Unit CJ1W-DRM21 CJ1: 0.7 ms + 1 µs for
each allocated word
CJ1-H: 0.4 ms + 0.7 µs
for each allocated word
CJ1M: 0.5 ms + 0.7 µs
for each allocated word
Include all words allocated to the slaves, including unused
ones.
For message communications, add the number of commu-
nications words to the calculations as the left.
Position Control
Unit with
MECHA-
TROLINK-II
Communica-
tions
CJ1W-NCF71 According to the num-
ber of Servo Driver
axes connected to the
Unit.
1 axis: 0.2 ms, 3 axes:
0.3 ms, 6 axes: 0.4 ms,
16 axes: 1.0 ms
---
Motion Control
Unit with
MECHA-
TROLINK-II
Communica-
tions
CJ1W-MCH71 No. of motion tasks × 6
× 0.001 + No. of axes ×
0.001 + No. of words
allocated for general
I/O × 0.01 + 0.6 ms
---
SYSMAC SPU
Unit
CJ1W-SPU01 0.2 ms + No. of sam-
pled words × 0.8 µs
---
Name Model Increase Remarks
467
Computing the Cycle Time Section 10-4
10-4-4 Cycle Time Calculation Example
Example 1: Application Based on Basic Instructions and Basic I/O Units
The following example shows the method used to calculate the cycle time
when only Basic I/O Units are connected in the PLC and the program consists
of 20K steps of basic and data movement instructions. Here, a CJ1H-
CPU6@H-R CPU Unit is used.
Conditions
Calculation Example
Example 2: Application Containing Calculations and Special I/O Units
The following example shows the method used to calculate the cycle time
when Basic I/O Units and Special I/O Units are connected in the PLC and the
program consists of 20K steps of basic instructions, data movement instruc-
tions, and floating-point calculation instructions. Here, a CJ1H-CPU6@H-R
CPU Unit is used.
Conditions
Item Details
CPU Unit CJ1H-CPU6@H-R
CJ-series CPU Rack CJ1W-ID261 64-point Input Units 2 Units
CJ1W-OD261 64-point Output Units 2 Units
User program 20 Ksteps LD instructions: 10 Ksteps
MOV instructions: 10 Ksteps
Note
• LD: Each instruction is 1 step.
• MOV: Each instruction is 3 steps.
Peripheral port connection Yes and no
Fixed cycle time processing No
RS-232C port connection No
Peripheral servicing with other
devices (Special I/O Units, CPU
Bus Units, and file access)
No
Process name Calculation Processing time
With Programming
Device
Without Programming
Device
(1) Overseeing --- 0.13 ms 0.13 ms
(2) Program execution 0.016 µs × 10,000 + 0.14 µs/
3 steps × 10,000
0.63 ms 0.63 ms
(3) Cycle time calculation (Fixed cycle time not set) 0 ms 0 ms
(4) I/O refreshing 0.0039 ms × 2 + 0.0039 ms × 2 0.0164 ms 0.0164 ms
(5) Peripheral servicing (Peripheral port connected only) 0.1 ms 0 ms
Cycle time (1) + (2) + (3) + (4) + (5) 0.8764 ms 0.7764 ms
Item Details
CPU Unit CJ1H-CPU6@H-R
CJ-series CPU Rack CJ1W-ID261 64-point Input Units 2 Units
CJ1W-OD261 64-point Output Units 2 Units
CJ1W-AD081 Analog Input Unit 2 Units
CJ1W-NC413 Position Control Unit 2 Units
468
Computing the Cycle Time Section 10-4
Calculation Example
10-4-5 Online Editing Cycle Time Extension
When online editing is executed from a Programming Device (such as Pro-
gramming Console or CX-Programmer) while the CPU Unit is operating in
MONITOR mode to change the program, the CPU Unit will momentarily sus-
pend operation while the program is being changed. The period of time that
the cycle time is extended is determined by the following conditions.
• Editing operations (insert/delete/overwrite).
• Types of instructions used.
The cycle time extension for online editing will be negligibly affected by the
size of task programs.
The following table shows the maximum expected cycle time extension due to
online editing when the maximum program size for each task is 64 Ksteps.
User program 20 Ksteps LD instructions: 12 Ksteps
MOV instructions: 6 Ksteps
+F instructions: 2K steps
Note:
• LD: Each instruction is 1 step.
• MOV: Each instruction is 3 steps.
• +F: Each instruction is 4 steps
Peripheral port connection Yes and no
Fixed cycle time processing No
RS-232C port connection No
Peripheral servicing with other
devices (Special I/O Units, CPU
Bus Units, and file access)
No
Item Details
Process name Calculation Processing time
With Programming
Device
Without Programming
Device
(1) Overseeing --- 0.13 ms 0.13 ms
(2) Program execution 0.016 µs × 12,000 + 0.14 µs/
3 steps × 6,000 + 0.24 µs/
4 steps × 2,000
0.59 ms 0.59 ms
(3) Cycle time calculation (Fixed cycle time not set) 0 ms 0 ms
(4) I/O refreshing 0.0041 ms × 2 + 0.0041 ms × 2
+ 0.05 ms × 2 + 0.19 ms × 2
0.4964 ms 0.4964 ms
(5) Peripheral servicing (Peripheral port connected only) 0.1 ms 0 ms
Cycle time (1) + (2) + (3) + (4) + (5) 1.3164 ms 1.2164 ms
CPU Unit Increase in cycle time for online editing
CJ1-H-R CPU Unit (CPU6@H-R) 8 ms
CPU6@H CJ1-H Unit (CPU6@)8 ms
CPU4@H CJ1-H Unit (CPU4@) 11 ms
CJ1M CPU Unit 14 ms (Program size: 20 steps)
CJ1 CPU Unit 12 ms
469
Computing the Cycle Time Section 10-4
When editing online, the cycle time will be extended by the time that operation
is stopped.
Note When there is one task, online editing is processed all in the cycle time follow-
ing the cycle in which online editing is executed (written). When there are mul-
tiple tasks (cyclic tasks and interrupt tasks), online editing is separated, so
that for n tasks, processing is executed over n to n ×2 cycles max.
10-4-6 I/O Response Time
The I/O response time is the time it takes from when an Input Unit’s input
turns ON, the data is recognized by the CJ-series CPU Unit, and the user pro-
gram is executed, up to the time for the result to be output to an Output Unit’s
output terminals.
The length of the I/O response time depends on the following conditions.
• Timing of Input Bit turning ON.
• Cycle time.
• Type of Rack to which Input and Output Units are mounted (CPU Rack,
CPU Expansion Rack, Expansion Rack).
Basic I/O Units
Minimum I/O Response
Time
The I/O response time is shortest when data is retrieved immediately before
I/O refresh of the CPU Unit.
The minimum I/O response time is the total of the Input ON delay, the cycle
time, and the Output ON delay.
Note The Input and Output ON delay differs according to the Unit used.
Maximum I/O Response
Time
The I/O response time is longest when data is retrieved immediately after I/O
refresh of the Input Unit.
The maximum I/O response time is the total of the Input ON delay, (the cycle
time × 2), and the Output ON delay.
I/O refresh
Input
Output
Cycle timeCycle time
Minimum I/O res
p
onse time
(Interrupt to CPU Unit)
Output ON delay
Input ON delay
Instruction
execution
Instruction
execution
470
Computing the Cycle Time Section 10-4
Calculation Example
Conditions: Input ON delay 1.5 ms
Output ON delay 0.2 ms
Cycle time 20.0 ms
Minimum I/O response time = 1.5 ms + 20 ms + 0.2 ms = 21.7 ms
Maximum I/O response time = 1.5 ms + (20 ms × 2) + 0.2 ms = 41.7 ms
10-4-7 Interrupt Response Times
I/O Interrupt Tasks The interrupt response time for I/O interrupt tasks is the time taken from when
an input from a CJ1W-INT01 Interrupt Input Unit (or the built-in I/O in a CJ1M
CPU Unit) has turned ON (or OFF) until the I/O interrupt task has actually
been executed.
The length of the interrupt response time for I/O interrupt tasks depends on
the following conditions.
When an Interrupt Input Unit is Used
When CJ1M CPU Unit Built-in I/O is Used
Note I/O interrupt tasks can be executed (while an instruction is being executed, or
by stopping the execution of an instruction) during execution of the user pro-
gram, I/O refresh, peripheral servicing, or overseeing. The interrupt response
time is not affected by the Input of the Interrupt Input Unit turning ON during
any of the above processing operations.
I/O refresh
Input
Output
Cycle timeCycle time
Input ON delay
Output ON delay
Maximum I/O response time
(Interrupt to CPU Unit)
Instruction
execution
Instruction
execution
Instruction
execution
Item CPU Unit Time
Hardware response CJ1-H-R CPU Unit Upward differentiation: 0.05 ms,
Downward differentiation: 0.5 ms
CJ1-H CPU Units
CJ1M CPU Unit
CJ1 CPU Unit
Software interrupt
response
CJ1-H-R CPU Unit 40 µs
CJ1-H CPU Units 124 µs
CJ1M CPU Unit 169 µs
CJ1 CPU Unit 320 µs
Item CPU Unit Time
Hardware response CJ1M CPU Unit Upward differentiation: 0.03 ms,
Downward differentiation: 0.15 ms
Software interrupt
response
CJ1M CPU Unit 93 to 209 µs
471
Computing the Cycle Time Section 10-4
Some I/O interrupts, however, are not executed during interrupt tasks even if
the I/O interrupt conditions are satisfied. Instead, the I/O interrupts are exe-
cuted in order of priority after the other interrupt task has completed execution
and the software interrupt response time (1 ms max.) has elapsed.
Scheduled Interrupt Tasks The interrupt response time of scheduled interrupt tasks is the time taken
from after the scheduled time specified by the MSKS(690) instruction has
elapsed until the interrupt task has actually been executed.
The maximum interrupt response time for scheduled interrupt tasks is 0.1 ms.
Also, there a deviation of 50 µs from the specified scheduled interrupt time
(minimum of 0.2 ms, for CJ1-H-R CPU Units) due to the time interval required
for actually starting the scheduled interrupt task.
Note Scheduled interrupt tasks can be executed (while an instruction is being exe-
cuted, or by stopping the execution of an instruction) during execution of the
user program, I/O refresh, peripheral servicing, or overseeing. The interrupt
response time is not affected by the scheduled time elapsing during any of the
above processing operations.
Some scheduled interrupts, however, are not executed during other interrupt
tasks even if the scheduled interrupt conditions are satisfied. Instead, the
scheduled interrupt is executed after the other interrupt task has completed
execution and the software interrupt response time (1 ms max.) has elapsed.
The interrupt response time for scheduled interrupt tasks is the software inter-
rupt response time (1 ms max.).
External Interrupt Tasks The interrupt response time for external interrupt tasks differs depending on
the Unit (Special I/O Unit or CJ-series CPU Bus Unit) that is requesting the
external interrupt task of the CPU Unit and the type of service requested by
the interrupt. For details, refer to the appropriate operation manual for the Unit
being used.
Power OFF Interrupt Tasks Power OFF interrupt tasks are executed within 0.1 ms of the power being con-
firmed as OFF.
Input
(Interrupt Input Unit retrieval)
Interrupt task execution
Software interrupt response time
Input ON delay time
I/O interrupt task
interrupt response time
I/O interrupt task
reset time
Cycle execution task execution
(main program)
Ready for next
interrupt Input Unit retrieval
The time from when the I/O interrupt task ladder program execution is
completed until the cycle execution task resumes execution is 60 µs.
Ladder program
execution time
Internal timer
Scheduled interrupt task
Scheduled interrupt time
Software interrupt response time
472
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10-5
10-4-8 Serial PLC Link Response Time
The I/O response time between CPU Units (Polling Unit to Polled Unit, or
Polled Unit to Polling Unit) connected in Serial PLC Link (CJ1M CPU Units
only) can be found by means of the formulas provided below. The values will
vary, however, if a PT is connected in the Serial PLC Links, because the
amount of communications data is not fixed.
• Maximum I/O response time (not including hardware delays):
Polling Unit cycle time + Communications cycle time + Polled Unit cycle
time + 4 ms
• Minimum I/O response time (not including hardware delays):
Polled Unit communications time + 1.2 ms
10-5 Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps
The following table lists the execution times for all instructions that are avail-
able for CJ PLCs.
The total execution time of instructions within one whole user program is the
process time for program execution when calculating the cycle time (See
note.).
Note User programs are allocated tasks that can be executed within cyclic tasks
and interrupt tasks that satisfy interrupt conditions.
Execution times for most instructions differ depending on the CPU Unit used
(CJ1H-CPU6@H-R, CJ1H-CPU6@H, CJ1H-CPU4@H, CJ1M-CPU@@ and
CJ1G-CPU4@) and the conditions when the instruction is executed. The top
line for each instruction in the following table shows the minimum time
required to process the instruction and the necessary execution conditions,
and the bottom line shows the maximum time and execution conditions
required to process the instruction.
The execution time can also vary when the execution condition is OFF.
The following table also lists the length of each instruction in the Length
(steps) column. The number of steps required in the user program area for
each of the CJ-series instructions varies from 1 to 15 steps, depending upon
the instruction and the operands used with it. The number of steps in a pro-
gram is not the same as the number of instructions.
Note 1. Program capacity for CJ-series PLCs is measured in steps, whereas pro-
gram capacity for previous OMRON PLCs, such as the C-series and CV-
series PLCs, was measured in words. Basically speaking, 1 step is equiv-
alent to 1 word. The amount of memory required for each instruction, how-
ever, is different for some of the CJ-series instructions, and inaccuracies
Number of con-
nected Polled Units
The number of Polled Units connected in the Link, within the
maximum number of Units that can be set for the Polling Unit.
Number of discon-
nected Polled Units
The number of Polled Units disconnected from the Link, within
the maximum number of Units that can be set for the Polling
Unit.
Communications
cycle time (Unit: ms)
Polled Unit communications time × Number of connected
Polled Units + 10 × Number of disconnected Polled Units
Polled Unit commu-
nications time (Unit:
ms)
When communications speed is “standard”:
0.6 + 0.286 × (Number of Polled Units + 1) × Number of Link
words × 2 + 12
When communications speed is “high speed”:
0.6 + 0.0955 × (Number of Polled Units + 1) × Number of Link
words × 2 + 12
473
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10-5
will occur if the capacity of a user program for another PLC is converted for
a CJ-series PLC based on the assumption that 1 word is 1 step. Refer to
the information at the end of 10-5 Instruction Execution Times and Number
of Steps for guidelines on converting program capacities from previous
OMRON PLCs.
2. Most instructions are supported in differentiated form (indicated with ↑, ↓,
@, and %). Specifying differentiation will increase the execution times by
the following amounts.
3. Use the following times as guidelines when instructions are not executed.
10-5-1 Sequence Input Instructions
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table
Symbol CJ1-H CJ1M CJ1
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU@@ CPU4@
↑ or ↓+0.24 µs +0.24 µs +0.32 µs +0.5 µs +0.45 µs
@ or % +0.24 µs +0.24 µs +0.32 µs +0.5 µs +0.33 µs
CJ1-H CJ1M CJ1
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU@@ CPU4@
Approx. 0.1 µs Approx. 0.1 µs Approx. 0.2 µs Approx. 0.2 to
0.5 µs
Approx. 0.2 to
0.4 µs
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
LOAD LD --- 1 0.016 0.02 0.04 0.08 0.10 0.10 ---
!LD --- 2 +21.14 +21.14 +21.16 +21.16 +24.10 +28.07 Increase for imme-
diate refresh
LOAD NOT LD NOT --- 1 0.016 0.02 0.04 0.08 0.10 0.10 ---
!LD NOT --- 2 +21.14 +21.14 +21.16 +21.16 +24.10 +28.07 Increase for imme-
diate refresh
AND AND --- 1 0.016 0.02 0.04 0.08 0.10 0.10 ---
!AND --- 2 +21.14 +21.14 +21.16 +21.16 +24.10 +28.07 Increase for imme-
diate refresh
AND NOT AND NOT --- 1 0.016 0.02 0.04 0.08 0.10 0.10 ---
!AND NOT --- 2 +21.14 +21.14 +21.16 +21.16 +24.10 +28.07 Increase for imme-
diate refresh
OR OR --- 1 0.016 0.02 0.04 0.08 0.10 0.10 ---
!OR --- 2 +21.14 +21.14 +21.16 +21.16 +24.10 +28.07 Increase for imme-
diate refresh
OR NOT OR NOT --- 1 0.016 0.02 0.04 0.08 0.10 0.10 ---
!OR NOT --- 2 +21.14 +21.14 +21.16 +21.16 +24.10 +28.07 Increase for imme-
diate refresh
AND LOAD AND LD --- 1 0.016 0.02 0.04 0.08 0.05 0.05 ---
OR LOAD OR LD --- 1 0.016 0.02 0.04 0.08 0.05 0.05 ---
NOT NOT 520 1 0.016 0.02 0.04 0.08 0.05 0.05 ---
CONDITION ON UP 521 3 0.24 0.3 0.42 0.54 0.50 0.50 ---
CONDITION OFF DOWN 522 4 0.24 0.3 0.42 0.54 0.50 0.50 ---
LOAD BIT TEST LD TST 350 4 0.11 0.14 0.24 0.37 0.35 0.35 ---
LOAD BIT TEST
NOT
LD TSTN 351 4 0.11 0.14 0.24 0.37 0.35 0.35 ---
AND BIT TEST
NOT
AND TSTN 351 4 0.11 0.14 0.24 0.37 0.35 0.35 ---
OR BIT TEST OR TST 350 4 0.11 0.14 0.24 0.37 0.35 0.35 ---
OR BIT TEST NOT OR TSTN 351 4 0.11 0.14 0.24 0.37 0.35 0.35 ---
474
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10-5
10-5-2 Sequence Output Instructions
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
10-5-3 Sequence Control Instructions
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
OUTPUT OUT --- 1 0.016 0.02 0.04 0.21 0.35 0.35 ---
!OUT --- 2 +21.37 +21.37 +21.37 +21.37 +23.07 +28.60 Increase for imme-
diate refresh
OUTPUT NOT OUT NOT --- 1 0.016 0.02 0.04 0.21 0.35 0.35 ---
!OUT NOT --- 2 +21.37 +21.37 +21.37 +21.37 +23.07 +28.60 Increase for imme-
diate refresh
KEEP KEEP 011 1 0.048 0.06 0.08 0.29 0.40 0.40 ---
DIFFERENTIATE
UP
DIFU 013 2 0.21 0.24 0.40 0.54 0.50 0.50 ---
DIFFERENTIATE
DOWN
DIFD 014 2 0.21 0.24 0.40 0.54 0.50 0.50 ---
SET SET --- 1 0.016 0.02 0.06 0.21 0.30 0.30 ---
!SET --- 2 +21.37 +21.37 +21.37 +21.37 +23.17 +28.60 Increase for imme-
diate refresh
RESET RSET --- 1 0.016 0.02 0.06 0.21 0.30 0.30 Word specified
!RSET --- 2 +21.37 +21.37 +21.37 +21.37 +23.17 +28.60 Increase for imme-
diate refresh
MULTIPLE BIT
SET
SETA 530 4 5.8 5.8 6.1 7.8 11.8 11.8 With 1-bit set
25.7 25.7 27.2 38.8 64.1 64.1 With 1,000-bit set
MULTIPLE BIT
RESET
RSTA 531 4 5.7 5.7 6.1 7.8 11.8 11.8 With 1-bit reset
25.8 25.8 27.1 38.8 64.0 64.0 With 1,000-bit reset
SINGLE BIT SET SETB 532 2 0.19 0.24 0.34 --- 0.5 0.5 ---
!SETB 3 +21.44 +21.44 +21.54 --- +23.31 +23.31 ---
SINGLE BIT
RESET
RSTB 533 2 0.19 0.24 0.34 --- 0.5 0.5 ---
!RSTB 3 +21.44 +21.44 +21.54 --- +23.31 +23.31 ---
SINGLE BIT OUT-
PUT
OUTB 534 2 0.19 0.22 0.32 --- 0.45 0.45 ---
!OUTB 3 +21.42 +21.42 +21.52 --- +23.22 +23.22 ---
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note 1.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
END END 001 1 5.5 5.5 6.0 4.0 7.9 7.9 ---
NO OPERATION NOP 000 1 0.016 0.02 0.04 0.12 0.05 0.05 ---
INTERLOCK IL 002 1 0.048 0.06 0.06 0.12 0.15 0.15 ---
INTERLOCK
CLEAR
ILC 003 1 0.048 0.06 0.06 0.12 0.15 0.15 ---
MULTI-INTER-
LOCK DIFFEREN-
TIATION HOLD
(See note 2.)
MILH 517 3 6.1 6.1 6.5 --- 10.3 11.7 During interlock
7.5 7.5 7.9 --- 13.3 14.6 Not during interlock
and interlock not set
8.9 8.9 9.7 --- 16.6 18.3 Not during interlock
and interlock set
MULTI-INTER-
LOCK DIFFEREN-
TIATION
RELEASE (See
note 2.)
MILR 518 3 6.1 6.1 6.5 --- 10.3 11.7 During interlock
7.5 7.5 7.9 --- 13.3 14.6 Not during interlock
and interlock not set
8.9 8.9 9.7 --- 16.6 18.3 Not during interlock
and interlock set
MULTI-INTER-
LOCK CLEAR
(See note 2.)
MILC 519 2 5.0 5.0 5.6 --- 8.3 12.5 Interlock not cleared
5.7 5.7 6.2 --- 9.6 14.2 Interlock cleared
JUMP JMP 004 2 0.31 0.38 0.48 8.1 0.95 0.95 ---
JUMP END JME 005 2 --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
CONDITIONAL
JUMP
CJP 510 2 0.31 0.38 0.48 7.4 0.95 0.95 When JMP condi-
tion is satisfied
475
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10-5
Note 1. When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the
length column in the following table.
2. Supported only by CPU Units Ver. 2.0 or later.
10-5-4 Timer and Counter Instructions
CONDITIONAL
JUMP NOT
CJPN 511 2 0.31 0.38 0.48 8.5 0.95 0.95 When JMP condi-
tion is satisfied
MULTIPLE JUMP JMP0 515 1 0.048 0.06 0.06 0.12 0.15 0.15 ---
MULTIPLE JUMP
END
JME0 516 1 0.048 0.06 0.06 0.12 0.15 0.15 ---
FOR LOOP FOR 512 2 0.18 0.21 0.21 0.21 1.00 1.00 Designating a con-
stant
BREAK LOOP BREAK 514 1 0.048 0.12 0.12 0.12 0.15 0.15 ---
NEXT LOOP NEXT 513 1 0.14 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.45 0.45 When loop is contin-
ued
0.18 0.22 0.22 0.22 0.55 0.55 When loop is ended
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note 1.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note 1.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
HUNDRED-MS
TIMER
TIM --- 3 0.45 0.56 0.88 0.42 1.30 1.30 ---
TIMX 550 0.45
TEN-MS TIMER TIMH 015 3 0.70 0.88 1.14 0.42 1.80 1.80 ---
TIMHX 551 0.46 0.56 0.88 0.42 1.30 1.30
ONE-MS TIMER TMHH 540 3 0.69 0.86 1.12 0.42 1.75 1.75 ---
TMHHX 552 0.46 0.56 0.88 0.42 1.30 1.30
TENTH-MS TIMER
(See note 2.)
TIMU 541 3 0.45 --- --- --- --- --- ---
TIMUX 556 0.45
HUNDREDTH-MS
TIMER (See
note 2.)
TMUH 544 3 0.45 --- --- --- --- --- ---
TMUHX 557 0.45
ACCUMULATIVE
TIMER
TTIM 087 3 16.1 16.1 17.0 21.4 27.4 30.9 ---
10.9 10.9 11.4 14.8 19.0 21.2 When resetting
8.5 8.5 8.7 10.7 15.0 16.6 When interlocking
TTIMX 555 16.1 16.1 17.0 21.4 27.4 --- ---
10.9 10.9 11.4 14.8 19.0 --- When resetting
8.5 8.5 8.7 10.7 15.0 --- When interlocking
LONG TIMER TIML 542 4 7.6 7.6 10.0 12.8 16.3 17.2 ---
6.2 6.2 6.5 7.8 13.8 15.3 When interlocking
TIMLX 553 7.6 7.6 10.0 12.8 16.3 --- ---
6.2 6.2 6.5 7.8 13.8 --- When interlocking
MULTI-OUTPUT
TIMER
MTIM 543 4 20.9 20.9 23.3 26.0 38.55 43.3 ---
5.6 5.6 5.8 7.8 12.9 13.73 When resetting
MTIMX 554 20.9 20.9 23.3 26.0 38.55 --- ---
5.6 5.6 5.8 7.8 12.9 --- When resetting
COUNTER CNT --- 3 0.51 0.56 0.88 0.42 1.30 1.30 ---
CNTX 546 0.51 ---
REVERSIBLE
COUNTER
CNTR 012 3 16.9 16.9 19.0 20.9 31.8 27.2 ---
CNTRX 548 ---
RESET TIMER/
COUNTER
CNR 545 3 9.9 9.9 10.6 13.9 14.7 17.93 When resetting 1
word
4.16 ms 4.16 ms 4.16 ms 5.42 ms 6.21 ms 6.30 ms When resetting
1,000 words
CNRX 547 9.9 9.9 10.6 13.9 14.7 17.93 When resetting 1
word
4.16 ms 4.16 ms 4.16 ms 5.42 ms 6.21 ms 6.30 ms When resetting
1,000 words
476
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10-5
Note 1. When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the
length column in the following table.
2. CJ1-H-R CPU Units only.
10-5-5 Comparison Instructions
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note 1.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
Input Comparison
Instructions
(unsigned)
LD, AND,
OR +=
300 4 0.08 0.10 0.16 0.37 0.35 0.35 ---
LD, AND,
OR + <>
305
LD, AND,
OR + <
310
LD, AND,
OR +<=
315
LD, AND,
OR +>
320
LD, AND,
OR +>=
325
Input Comparison
Instructions (dou-
ble, unsigned)
LD, AND,
OR +=+L
301 4 0.08 0.10 0.16 0.54 0.35 0.35 ---
LD, AND,
OR +<>+L
306
LD, AND,
OR +<+L
311
LD, AND,
OR +<=+L
316
LD, AND,
OR +>+L
321
LD, AND,
OR +>=+L
326
Input Comparison
Instructions
(signed)
LD, AND,
OR +=+S
302 4 0.08 0.10 0.16 6.50 0.35 0.35 ---
LD, AND,
OR +<>+S
307
LD, AND,
OR +<+S
312
LD, AND,
OR +<=
317
LD, AND,
OR +>+S
322
LD, AND,
OR +>=+S
327
Input Comparison
Instructions (dou-
ble, signed)
LD, AND,
OR +=+SL
303 4 0.08 0.10 0.16 6.50 0.35 0.35 ---
LD, AND,
OR
+<>+SL
308
LD, AND,
OR +<+SL
313
LD, AND,
OR
+<=+SL
318
LD, AND,
OR +>+SL
323
LD, AND,
OR
+>=+SL
328
Time Comparison
Instructions
(See note 2.)
=DT 341 4 25.1 25.1 36.4 --- 18.8 39.6 ---
<>DT 342 4 25.2 25.2 36.4 --- 45.6 40.6 ---
<DT 343 4 25.2 25.2 36.4 --- 45.6 40.7 ---
<=DT 344 4 25.2 25.2 36.4 --- 18.8 39.6 ---
>DT 345 4 25.1 25.1 36.4 --- 45.6 41.1 ---
>=DT 346 4 25.2 25.2 36.4 --- 18.8 39.6 ---
COMPARE CMP 020 3 0.032 0.04 0.04 0.29 0.10 0.10 ---
!CMP 020 7 +42.1 42.1 42.1 42.4 +45.2 45.2 Increase for imme-
diate refresh
477
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10-5
Note 1. When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the
length column in the following table.
2. Supported only by CPU Units Ver. 2.0 or later.
10-5-6 Data Movement Instructions
DOUBLE COM-
PARE
CMPL 060 3 0.064 0.08 0.08 0.46 0.50 0.50 ---
SIGNED BINARY
COMPARE
CPS 114 3 0.064 0.08 0.08 6.50 0.30 0.30 ---
!CPS 114 7 +35.9 35.9 35.9 42.4 +45.2 45.2 Increase for imme-
diate refresh
DOUBLE SIGNED
BINARY COM-
PARE
CPSL 115 3 0.064 0.08 0.08 6.50 0.50 0.50 ---
TABLE COMPARE TCMP 085 4 14.0 14.0 15.2 21.9 29.77 32.13 ---
MULTIPLE COM-
PARE
MCMP 019 4 20.5 20.5 22.8 31.2 45.80 48.67 ---
UNSIGNED
BLOCK COM-
PARE
BCMP 068 4 21.5 21.5 23.7 32.6 47.93 51.67 ---
EXPANDED
BLOCK COM-
PARE
BCMP2 502 4 8.4 --- --- --- 13.20 19.33 Number of data
words: 1
313.0 --- --- --- 650.0 754.67 Number of data
words: 255
AREA RANGE
COMPARE
ZCP 088 3 5.3 5.3 5.4 --- 11.53 12.43 ---
DOUBLE AREA
RANGE COM-
PARE
ZCPL 116 3 5.5 5.5 6.7 --- 11.28 11.90 ---
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note 1.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
MOVE MOV 021 3 0.14 0.18 0.20 0.29 0.30 0.30 ---
!MOV 021 7 +21.38 21.38 21.40 42.36 +35.1 43.0 Increase for imme-
diate refresh
DOUBLE MOVE MOVL 498 3 0.26 0.32 0.34 0.50 0.60 0.60 ---
MOVE NOT MVN 022 3 0.14 0.18 0.20 0.29 0.35 0.35 ---
DOUBLE MOVE
NOT
MVNL 499 3 0.26 0.32 0.34 0.50 0.60 0.60 ---
MOVE BIT MOVB 082 4 0.19 0.24 0.34 7.5 0.50 0.50 ---
MOVE DIGIT MOVD 083 4 0.19 0.24 0.34 7.3 0.50 0.50 ---
MULTIPLE BIT
TRANSFER
XFRB 062 4 10.1 10.1 10.8 13.6 20.9 22.1 Transferring 1 bit
186.4 186.4 189.8 269.2 253.3 329.7 Transferring 255
bits
BLOCK TRANS-
FER
XFER 070 4 0.29 0.36 0.44 11.2 0.8 0.8 Transferring 1 word
240.1 300.1 380.1 633.5 650.2 650.2 Transferring 1,000
words
BLOCK SET BSET 071 4 0.21 0.26 0.28 8.5 0.55 0.55 Setting 1 word
142.2 200.1 220.1 278.3 400.2 400.2 Setting 1,000 words
DATA EXCHANGE XCHG 073 3 0.32 0.40 0.56 0.7 0.80 0.80 ---
DOUBLE DATA
EXCHANGE
XCGL 562 3 0.61 0.76 1.04 1.3 1.5 1.5 ---
SINGLE WORD
DISTRIBUTE
DIST 080 4 5.1 5.1 5.4 7.0 6.6 12.47 ---
DATA COLLECT COLL 081 4 5.1 5.1 5.3 7.1 6.5 12.77 ---
MOVE TO REGIS-
TER
MOVR 560 3 0.064 0.08 0.08 0.50 0.60 0.60 ---
MOVE TIMER/
COUNTER PV TO
REGISTER
MOVRW 561 3 0.064 0.42 0.50 0.50 0.60 0.60 ---
478
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10-5
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
10-5-7 Data Shift Instructions
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
SHIFT
REGISTER
SFT 010 3 7.4 7.4 10.4 10.4 11.9 15.3 Shifting 1 word
187.3 433.2 488.0 763.1 1.39 ms 1.43 ms Shifting 1,000
words
REVERSIBLE
SHIFT
REGISTER
SFTR 084 4 6.9 6.9 7.2 9.6 11.4 15.5 Shifting 1 word
399.3 615.3 680.2 859.6 1.43 ms 1.55 ms Shifting 1,000
words
ASYNCHRO-
NOUS SHIFT
REGISTER
ASFT 017 4 6.2 6.2 6.4 7.7 13.4 14.2 Shifting 1 word
1.22 ms 1.22 ms 1.22 ms 2.01 ms 2.75 ms 2.99 ms Shifting 1,000
words
WORD SHIFT WSFT 016 4 4.5 4.5 4.7 7.8 9.6 12.3 Shifting 1 word
171.5 171.5 171.7 781.7 928.0 933.3 Shifting 1,000
words
ARITHMETIC
SHIFT LEFT
ASL 025 2 0.18 0.22 0.32 0.37 0.45 0.45 ---
DOUBLE SHIFT
LEFT
ASLL 570 2 0.32 0.40 0.56 0.67 0.80 0.80 ---
ARITHMETIC
SHIFT RIGHT
ASR 026 2 0.18 0.22 0.32 0.37 0.45 0.45 ---
DOUBLE SHIFT
RIGHT
ASRL 571 2 0.32 0.40 0.56 0.67 0.80 0.80 ---
ROTATE LEFT ROL 027 2 0.18 0.22 0.32 0.37 0.45 0.45 ---
DOUBLE ROTATE
LEFT
ROLL 572 2 0.32 0.40 0.56 0.67 0.80 0.80 ---
ROTATE LEFT
WITHOUT CARRY
RLNC 574 2 0.18 0.22 0.32 0.37 0.45 0.45 ---
DOUBLE ROTATE
LEFT WITHOUT
CARRY
RLNL 576 2 0.32 0.40 0.56 0.67 0.80 0.80 ---
ROTATE RIGHT ROR 028 2 0.18 0.22 0.32 0.37 0.45 0.45 ---
DOUBLE ROTATE
RIGHT
RORL 573 2 0.32 0.40 0.56 0.67 0.80 0.80 ---
ROTATE RIGHT
WITHOUT CARRY
RRNC 575 2 0.18 0.22 0.32 0.37 0.45 0.45 ---
DOUBLE ROTATE
RIGHT WITHOUT
CARRY
RRNL 577 2 0.32 0.40 0.56 0.67 0.80 0.80 ---
ONE DIGIT SHIFT
LEFT
SLD 074 3 5.9 5.9 6.1 8.2 7.6 12.95 Shifting 1 word
561.1 561.1 626.3 760.7 1.15 ms 1.27 ms Shifting 1,000
words
ONE DIGIT SHIFT
RIGHT
SRD 075 3 6.9 6.9 7.1 8.7 8.6 15.00 Shifting 1 word
760.5 760.5 895.5 1.07 ms 1.72 ms 1.82 ms Shifting 1,000
words
SHIFT N-BIT DATA
LEFT
NSFL 578 4 7.5 7.5 8.3 10.5 14.8 16.0 Shifting 1 bit
34.5 40.3 45.4 55.5 86.7 91.3 Shifting 1,000 bits
SHIFT N-BIT DATA
RIGHT
NSFR 579 4 7.5 7.5 8.3 10.5 14.7 15.9 Shifting 1 bit
48.2 50.5 55.3 69.3 114.1 119.6 Shifting 1,000 bits
SHIFT N-BITS
LEFT
NASL 580 3 0.18 0.22 0.32 0.37 0.45 0.45 ---
DOUBLE SHIFT N-
BITS LEFT
NSLL 582 3 0.32 0.40 0.56 0.67 0.80 0.80 ---
SHIFT N-BITS
RIGHT
NASR 581 3 0.18 0.22 0.32 0.37 0.45 0.45 ---
DOUBLE SHIFT N-
BITS RIGHT
NSRL 583 3 0.32 0.40 0.56 0.67 0.80 0.80 ---
479
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10-5
10-5-8 Increment/Decrement Instructions
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
10-5-9 Symbol Math Instructions
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
INCREMENT
BINARY
++ 590 2 0.18 0.22 0.32 0.37 0.45 0.45 ---
DOUBLE INCRE-
MENT BINARY
++L 591 2 0.18 0.40 0.56 0.67 0.80 0.80 ---
DECREMENT
BINARY
– – 592 2 0.18 0.22 0.32 0.37 0.45 0.45 ---
DOUBLE DECRE-
MENT BINARY
– –L 593 2 0.18 0.40 0.56 0.67 0.80 0.80 ---
INCREMENT BCD ++B 594 2 5.7 6.4 4.5 7.4 12.3 14.7 ---
DOUBLE INCRE-
MENT BCD
++BL 595 2 5.6 5.6 4.9 6.1 9.24 10.8 ---
DECREMENT
BCD
– –B 596 2 5.7 6.3 4.6 7.2 11.9 14.9 ---
DOUBLE DECRE-
MENT BCD
– –BL 597 2 5.3 5.3 4.7 7.1 9.0 10.7 ---
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
SIGNED BINARY
ADD WITHOUT
CARRY
+ 400 4 0.18 0.18 0.20 0.37 0.30 0.30 ---
DOUBLE SIGNED
BINARY ADD
WITHOUT CARRY
+L 401 4 0.18 0.32 0.34 0.54 0.60 0.60 ---
SIGNED BINARY
ADD WITH
CARRY
+C 402 4 0.18 0.18 0.20 0.37 0.40 0.40 ---
DOUBLE SIGNED
BINARY ADD
WITH CARRY
+CL 403 4 0.18 0.32 0.34 0.54 0.60 0.60 ---
BCD ADD WITH-
OUT CARRY
+B 404 4 7.6 8.2 8.4 14.0 18.9 21.5 ---
DOUBLE BCD
ADD WITHOUT
CARRY
+BL 405 4 9.2 13.3 14.5 19.0 24.4 27.7 ---
BCD ADD WITH
CARRY
+BC 406 4 8.0 8.9 9.1 14.5 19.7 22.6 ---
DOUBLE BCD
ADD WITH
CARRY
+BCL 407 4 9.6 13.8 15.0 19.6 25.2 28.8 ---
SIGNED BINARY
SUBTRACT WITH-
OUT CARRY
– 410 4 0.18 0.18 0.20 0.37 0.3 0.3 ---
DOUBLE SIGNED
BINARY SUB-
TRACT WITHOUT
CARRY
–L 411 4 0.18 0.32 0.34 0.54 0.60 0.60 ---
SIGNED BINARY
SUBTRACT WITH
CARRY
–C 412 4 0.18 0.18 0.20 0.37 40 40 ---
DOUBLE SIGNED
BINARY SUB-
TRACT WITH
CARRY
–CL 413 4 0.18 0.32 0.34 0.54 0.60 0.60 ---
BCD SUBTRACT
WITHOUT CARRY
–B 414 4 7.4 8.0 8.2 13.1 18.1 20.5 ---
DOUBLE BCD
SUBTRACT WITH-
OUT CARRY
–BL 415 4 8.9 12.8 14.0 18.2 23.2 26.7 ---
BCD SUBTRACT
WITH CARRY
–BC 416 4 7.9 8.5 8.6 13.8 19.1 21.6 ---
480
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10-5
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
10-5-10 Conversion Instructions
DOUBLE BCD
SUBTRACT WITH
CARRY
–BCL 417 4 9.4 13.4 14.7 18.8 24.3 27.7 ---
SIGNED BINARY
MULTIPLY
* 420 4 0.26 0.38 0.40 0.58 0.65 0.65 ---
DOUBLE SIGNED
BINARY MULTIPLY
*L 421 4 5.93 7.23 8.45 11.19 13.17 15.0 ---
UNSIGNED
BINARY MULTIPLY
*U 422 4 0.26 0.38 0.40 0.58 0.75 0.75 ---
DOUBLE
UNSIGNED
BINARY MULTIPLY
*UL 423 4 5.9 7.1 8.3 10.63 13.30 15.2 ---
BCD MULTIPLY *B 424 4 8.3 9.0 9.2 12.8 17.5 19.7 ---
DOUBLE BCD
MULTIPLY
*BL 425 4 12.8 23.0 24.2 35.2 36.3 45.7 ---
SIGNED BINARY
DIVIDE
/ 430 4 0.29 0.40 0.42 0.83 0.70 0.70 ---
DOUBLE SIGNED
BINARY DIVIDE
/L 431 4 7.2 7.2 8.4 9.8 13.7 15.5 ---
UNSIGNED
BINARY DIVIDE
/U 432 4 0.29 0.40 0.42 0.83 0.8 0.8 ---
DOUBLE
UNSIGNED
BINARY DIVIDE
/UL 433 4 6.9 6.9 8.1 9.1 12.8 14.7 ---
BCD DIVIDE /B 434 4 8.6 8.6 8.8 15.9 19.3 22.8 ---
DOUBLE BCD
DIVIDE
/BL 435 4 13.1 17.7 18.9 26.2 27.1 34.7 ---
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note 1.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
BCD-TO-BINARY BIN 023 3 0.18 0.22 0.24 0.29 0.40 0.40 ---
DOUBLE BCD-TO-
DOUBLE BINARY
BINL 058 3 6.1 6.5 6.8 9.1 12.3 13.7 ---
BINARY-TO-BCD BCD 024 3 0.19 0.24 0.26 8.3 7.62 9.78 ---
DOUBLE BINARY-
TO-DOUBLE BCD
BCDL 059 3 6.7 6.7 7.0 9.2 10.6 12.8 ---
2’S COMPLE-
MENT
NEG 160 3 0.14 0.18 0.20 0.29 0.35 0.35 ---
DOUBLE 2’S
COMPLEMENT
NEGL 161 3 0.26 0.32 0.34 0.5 0.60 0.60 ---
16-BIT TO 32-BIT
SIGNED BINARY
SIGN 600 3 0.26 0.32 0.34 0.50 0.60 0.60 ---
DATA DECODER MLPX 076 4 0.32 0.32 0.42 8.8 0.85 0.85 Decoding 1 digit
(4 to 16)
0.98 0.98 1.20 12.8 1.60 1.60 Decoding 4 digits
(4 to 16)
3.30 3.30 4.00 20.3 4.70 4.70 Decoding 1 digit
(8 to 256)
6.50 6.50 7.90 33.4 8.70 8.70 Decoding 4 digits
(8 to 256)
DATA ENCODER DMPX 077 4 7.5 7.5 7.9 10.4 9.4 13.9 Encoding 1 digit
(16 to 4)
49.6 49.6 50.2 59.1 57.3 71.73 Encoding 4 digits
(16 to 4)
18.2 18.2 18.6 23.6 56.8 82.7 Encoding 1 digit
(256 to 8)
55.1 55.1 57.4 92.5 100.0 150.7 Encoding 2 digits
(256 to 8)
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
481
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10-5
ASCII CONVERT ASC 086 4 6.8 6.8 7.1 9.7 8.3 14.6 Converting 1 digit
into ASCII
9.0 11.2 11.7 15.1 19.1 21.8 Converting 4 digits
into ASCII
ASCII TO HEX HEX 162 4 7.1 7.1 7.4 10.1 12.1 15.6 Converting 1 digit
COLUMN TO LINE LINE 063 4 16.6 19.0 23.1 29.1 37.0 40.3 ---
LINE TO COLUMN COLM 064 4 18.4 23.2 27.5 37.3 45.7 48.2 ---
SIGNED BCD-TO-
BINARY
BINS 470 4 6.8 8.0 8.3 12.1 16.2 17.0 Data format setting
No. 0
6.8 8.0 8.3 12.1 16.2 17.1 Data format setting
No. 1
7.1 8.3 8.6 12.7 16.5 17.7 Data format setting
No. 2
7.4 8.5 8.8 13.0 16.5 17.6 Data format setting
No. 3
DOUBLE SIGNED
BCD-TO-BINARY
BISL 472 4 6.9 9.2 9.6 13.6 18.4 19.6 Data format setting
No. 0
7.0 9.2 9.6 13.7 18.5 19.8 Data format setting
No. 1
7.3 9.5 9.9 14.2 18.6 20.1 Data format setting
No. 2
7.6 9.6 10.0 14.4 18.7 20.1 Data format setting
No. 3
SIGNED BINARY-
TO-BCD
BCDS 471 4 6.6 6.6 6.9 10.6 13.5 16.4 Data format setting
No. 0
6.7 6.7 7.0 10.8 13.8 16.7 Data format setting
No. 1
6.8 6.8 7.1 10.9 13.9 16.8 Data format setting
No. 2
7.1 7.2 7.5 11.5 14.0 17.1 Data format setting
No. 3
DOUBLE SIGNED
BINARY-TO-BCD
BDSL 473 4 7.6 8.1 8.4 11.6 11.4 12.5 Data format setting
No. 0
6.7 8.2 8.6 11.8 11.7 12.73 Data format setting
No. 1
6.7 8.3 8.7 12.0 11.8 12.8 Data format setting
No. 2
6.9 8.8 9.2 12.5 11.9 13.0 Data format setting
No. 3
GRAY CODE
CONVERSION
(See note 2.)
GRY 474 4 46.9 46.9 72.1 --- 80.0 71.2 8-bit binary
49.6 49.6 75.2 --- 83.0 75.6 8-bit BCD
57.7 57.7 87.7 --- 95.9 86.4 8-bit angle
61.8 61.8 96.7 --- 104.5 91.6 15-bit binary
64.5 64.5 99.6 --- 107.5 96.1 15-bit BCD
72.8 72.8 112.4 --- 120.4 107.3 15-bit angle
52.3 52.3 87.2 --- 88.7 82.4 360° binary
55.1 55.1 90.4 --- 91.7 86.8 360° BCD
64.8 64.8 98.5 --- 107.3 98.1 360° angle
FOUR-DIGIT
NUMBER TO
ASCII
(See note 3.)
STR4 601 3 13.79 13.79 20.24 --- 22.16 19.88
EIGHT-DIGIT
NUMBER TO
ASCII
(See note 3.)
STR8 602 3 18.82 18.82 27.44 --- 29.55 26.70
SIXTEEN-DIGIT
NUMBER TO
ASCII
(See note 3.)
STR16 603 3 30.54 30.54 44.41 --- 48.16 44.10
ASCII TO FOUR-
DIGIT NUMBER
(See note 3.)
NUM4 604 3 18.46 18.46 27.27 --- 29.13 26.88
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note 1.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
482
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10-5
Note 1. When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the
length column in the following table.
2. Supported only by CPU Units Ver. 2.0 or later.
3. Supported only by CPU Units Ver. 4.0 or later.
10-5-11 Logic Instructions
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
10-5-12 Special Math Instructions
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
ASCII TO EIGHT-
DIGIT NUMBER
(See note 3.)
NUM8 605 3 27.27 27.27 40.29 --- 42.69 39.71
ASCII TO SIX-
TEEN-DIGIT NUM-
BER (See note 3.)
NUM16 606 3 52.31 52.31 78.25 --- 82.21 74.23
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note 1.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
LOGICAL AND ANDW 034 4 0.14 0.18 0.20 0.37 0.30 0.30 ---
DOUBLE LOGI-
CAL AND
ANDL 610 4 0.26 0.32 0.34 0.54 0.60 0.60 ---
LOGICAL OR ORW 035 4 0.18 0.22 0.32 0.37 0.45 0.45 ---
DOUBLE LOGI-
CAL OR
ORWL 611 4 0.26 0.32 0.34 0.54 0.60 0.60 ---
EXCLUSIVE OR XORW 036 4 0.18 0.22 0.32 0.37 0.45 0.45 ---
DOUBLE EXCLU-
SIVE OR
XORL 612 4 0.26 0.32 0.34 0.54 0.60 0.60 ---
EXCLUSIVE NOR XNRW 037 4 0.18 0.22 0.32 0.37 0.45 0.45 ---
DOUBLE EXCLU-
SIVE NOR
XNRL 613 4 0.26 0.32 0.34 0.54 0.60 0.60 ---
COMPLEMENT COM 029 2 0.18 0.22 0.32 0.37 0.45 0.45 ---
DOUBLE COM-
PLEMENT
COML 614 2 0.32 0.40 0.56 0.67 0.80 0.80 ---
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
BINARY ROOT ROTB 620 3 49.6 49.6 50.0 530.7 56.5 82.7 ---
BCD SQUARE
ROOT
ROOT 072 3 13.7 13.7 13.9 514.5 59.3 88.4 ---
ARITHMETIC
PROCESS
APR 069 4 6.7 6.7 6.9 32.3 14.0 15.0 Designating SIN
and COS
17.2 17.2 18.4 78.3 32.2 37.9 Designating line-
segment approxi-
mation
FLOATING POINT
DIVIDE
FDIV 079 4 116.6 116.6 176.6 176.6 246.0 154.7 ---
BIT COUNTER BCNT 067 4 0.24 0.3 0.38 22.1 0.65 0.65 Counting 1 word
483
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10-5
10-5-13 Floating-point Math Instructions
Note 1. When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the
length column in the following table.
2. CJ1-H-R CPU Units only.
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note 1.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
FLOATING TO 16-
BIT
FIX 450 3 0.13 10.6 10.8 14.5 16.2 19.5 ---
FLOATING TO 32-
BIT
FIXL 451 3 0.13 10.8 11.0 14.6 16.6 21.7 ---
16-BIT TO FLOAT-
ING
FLT 452 3 0.13 8.3 8.5 11.1 12.2 14.6 ---
32-BIT TO FLOAT-
ING
FLTL 453 3 0.13 8.3 8.5 10.8 14.0 15.8 ---
FLOATING-POINT
ADD
+F 454 4 0.24 8.0 9.2 10.2 13.3 15.7 ---
FLOATING-POINT
SUBTRACT
–F 455 4 0.24 8.0 9.2 10.3 13.3 15.8 ---
FLOATING-POINT
DIVIDE
/F 457 4 0.4 8.7 9.9 12.0 14.0 17.6 ---
FLOATING-POINT
MULTIPLY
*F 456 4 0.24 8.0 9.2 10.5 13.2 15.8 ---
DEGREES TO
RADIANS
RAD 458 3 8.1 10.1 10.2 14.9 15.9 20.6 ---
RADIANS TO
DEGREES
DEG 459 3 8.0 9.9 10.1 14.8 15.7 20.4 ---
SINE SIN 460 3 42.0 42.0 42.2 61.1 47.9 70.9 ---
HIGH-SPEED
SINE (See note 2.)
SINQ 475 8 0.59 --- --- --- --- --- ---
COSINE COS 461 3 31.5 31.5 31.8 44.1 41.8 51.0 ---
HIGH-SPEED
COSINE (See
note 2.)
COSQ 476 8 0.59 --- --- --- --- --- ---
TANGENT TAN 462 3 16.3 16.3 16.6 22.6 20.8 27.6 ---
HIGH-SPEED
TANGENT (See
note 2.)
TANQ 477 15 1.18 --- --- --- --- --- ---
ARC SINE ASIN 463 3 17.6 17.6 17.9 24.1 80.3 122.9 ---
ARC COSINE ACOS 464 3 20.4 20.4 20.7 28.0 25.3 33.5 ---
ARC TANGENT ATAN 465 3 16.1 16.1 16.4 16.4 45.9 68.9 ---
SQUARE ROOT SQRT 466 3 0.42 19.0 19.3 28.1 26.2 33.2 ---
EXPONENT EXP 467 3 65.9 65.9 66.2 96.7 68.8 108.2 ---
LOGARITHM LOG 468 3 12.8 12.8 13.1 17.4 69.4 103.7 ---
EXPONENTIAL
POWER
PWR 840 4 125.4 125.4 126.0 181.7 134.0 201.0 ---
Floating Symbol
Comparison
LD, AND,
OR +=F
329 3 0.13 6.6 8.3 --- 12.6 15.37 ---
LD, AND,
OR +<>F
330
LD, AND,
OR +<F
331
LD, AND,
OR +<=F
332
LD, AND,
OR +>F
333
LD, AND,
OR +>=F
334
FLOATING- POINT
TO ASCII
FSTR 448 4 48.5 48.5 48.9 --- 58.4 85.7 ---
ASCII TO FLOAT-
ING-POINT
FVAL 449 3 21.1 21.1 21.3 --- 31.1 43.773 ---
MOVE FLOATING-
POINT (SINGLE)
(See note 2.)
MOVF 469 3 0.18 --- --- --- --- --- ---
484
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10-5
10-5-14 Double-precision Floating-point Instructions
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
DOUBLE SYM-
BOL COMPARI-
SON
LD, AND,
OR +=D
335 3 8.5 8.5 10.3 --- 16.2 19.9 ---
LD, AND,
OR +<>D
336
LD, AND,
OR +<D
337
LD, AND,
OR +<=D
338
LD, AND,
OR +>D
339
LD, AND,
OR +>=D
340
DOUBLE FLOAT-
ING TO 16-BIT
BINARY
FIXD 841 3 11.0 11.7 12.1 --- 16.1 21.6 ---
DOUBLE FLOAT-
ING TO 32-BIT
BINARY
FIXLD 842 3 10.2 11.6 12.1 --- 16.4 21.7 ---
16-BIT BINARY TO
DOUBLE FLOAT-
ING
DBL 843 3 9.9 9.9 10.0 --- 14.3 16.5 ---
32-BIT BINARY TO
DOUBLE FLOAT-
ING
DBLL 844 3 9.8 9.8 10.0 --- 16.0 17.7 ---
DOUBLE FLOAT-
ING-POINT ADD
+D 845 4 11.2 11.2 11.9 --- 18.3 23.6 ---
DOUBLE FLOAT-
ING-POINT SUB-
TRACT
−D 846 4 11.2 11.2 11.9 --- 18.3 23.6 ---
DOUBLE FLOAT-
ING-POINT MUL-
TIPLY
*D 847 4 12.0 12.0 12.7 --- 19.0 25.0 ---
DOUBLE FLOAT-
ING-POINT
DIVIDE
/D 848 4 23.5 23.5 24.2 --- 30.5 44.3 ---
DOUBLE
DEGREES TO
RADIANS
RADD 849 3 11.5 27.4 27.8 --- 32.7 49.1 ---
DOUBLE RADI-
ANS TO
DEGREES
DEGD 850 3 11.2 11.2 11.9 --- 33.5 48.4 ---
DOUBLE SINE SIND 851 3 45.4 45.4 45.8 --- 67.9 76.7 ---
DOUBLE COSINE COSD 852 3 43.0 43.0 43.4 --- 70.9 72.3 ---
DOUBLE TAN-
GENT
TAND 853 3 19.8 20.1 20.5 --- 97.9 157.0 ---
DOUBLE ARC
SINE
ASIND 854 3 21.5 21.5 21.9 --- 32.3 37.3 ---
DOUBLE ARC
COSINE
ACOSD 855 3 24.7 24.7 25.1 --- 29.9 42.5 ---
DOUBLE ARC
TA N G E N T
ATAND 856 3 19.3 19.3 19.7 --- 24.0 34.4 ---
DOUBLE SQUARE
ROOT
SQRTD 857 3 47.4 47.4 47.9 --- 52.9 81.9 ---
DOUBLE EXPO-
NENT
EXPD 858 3 121.0 121.0 121.4 --- 126.3 201.3 ---
DOUBLE LOGA-
RITHM
LOGD 859 3 16.0 16.0 16.4 --- 21.6 29.3 ---
DOUBLE EXPO-
NENTIAL POWER
PWRD 860 4 223.9 223.9 224.2 --- 232.3 373.4 ---
485
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10-5
10-5-15 Table Data Processing Instructions
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
SET STACK SSET 630 3 8.0 8.0 8.3 8.5 14.2 20.3 Designating 5
words in stack area
231.6 231.6 251.8 276.8 426.5 435.3 Designating 1,000
words in stack area
PUSH ONTO
STACK
PUSH 632 3 6.5 6.5 8.6 9.1 15.7 16.4 ---
FIRST IN FIRST
OUT
FIFO 633 3 6.9 6.9 8.9 10.6 15.8 16.8 Designating 5
words in stack area
352.6 352.6 434.3 1.13 ms 728.0 732.0 Designating 1,000
words in stack area
LAST IN FIRST
OUT
LIFO 634 3 7.0 7.0 9.0 9.9 16.6 17.2 ---
DIMENSION
RECORD TABLE
DIM 631 5 15.2 15.2 21.6 142.1 27.8 27.1 ---
SET RECORD
LOCATION
SETR 635 4 5.4 5.4 5.9 7.0 12.8 13.2 ---
GET RECORD
NUMBER
GETR 636 4 7.8 7.8 8.4 11.0 16.1 18.3 ---
DATA SEARCH SRCH 181 4 15.5 15.5 19.5 19.5 29.1 26.4 Searching for 1
word
2.42 ms 2.42 ms 3.34 ms 3.34 ms 4.41 ms 3.60 ms Searching for 1,000
words
SWAP BYTES SWAP 637 3 12.2 12.2 13.6 13.6 21.0 18.4 Swapping 1 word
1.94 ms 1.94 ms 2.82 ms 2.82 ms 3.65 ms 3.15 ms Swapping 1,000
words
FIND MAXIMUM MAX 182 4 19.2 19.2 24.9 24.9 35.3 32.0 Searching for 1
word
2.39 ms 2.39 ms 3.36 ms 3.36 ms 4.39 ms 3.57 ms Searching for 1,000
words
FIND MINIMUM MIN 183 4 19.2 19.2 25.3 25.3 35.4 31.9 Searching for 1
word
2.39 ms 2.39 ms 3.33 ms 3.33 ms 4.39 ms 3.58 ms Searching for 1,000
words
SUM SUM 184 4 28.2 28.2 38.5 38.3 49.5 44.1 Adding 1 word
14.2 ms 1.42 ms 1.95 ms 1.95 ms 2.33 ms 2.11 ms Adding 1,000 words
FRAME CHECK-
SUM
FCS 180 4 20.0 20.0 28.3 28.3 34.8 31.5 For 1-word table
length
1.65 ms 1.65 ms 2.48 ms 2.48 ms 3.11 ms 2.77 ms For 1,000-word
table length
STACK SIZE
READ
SNUM 638 3 6.0 6.0 6.3 --- 12.1 13.7 ---
STACK DATA
READ
SREAD 639 4 8.0 8.0 8.4 --- 18.1 20.6 ---
STACK DATA
OVERWRITE
SWRIT 640 4 7.2 7.2 7.6 --- 16.9 18.8 ---
STACK DATA
INSERT
SINS 641 4 7.8 7.8 9.9 --- 18.2 20.5 ---
354.0 354.0 434.8 --- 730.7 732.0 For 1,000-word
table
STACK DATA
DELETE
SDEL 642 4 8.6 8.6 10.6 --- 19.3 22.0 ---
354.0 354.0 436.0 --- 732.0 744.0 For 1,000-word
table
486
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10-5
10-5-16 Data Control Instructions
Note 1. When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the
length column in the following table.
2. Supported only by CPU Units Ver. 2.0 or later.
10-5-17 Subroutine Instructions
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note 1.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
PID CONTROL PID 190 4 436.2 436.2 678.2 678.2 612.0 552.6 Initial execution
332.3 332.3 474.9 474.9 609.3 548.0 Sampling
97.3 97.3 141.3 141.3 175.3 162.0 Not sampling
LIMIT CONTROL LMT 680 4 16.1 16.1 22.1 22.1 27.1 26.1 ---
DEAD BAND
CONTROL
BAND 681 4 17.0 17.0 22.5 22.5 27.4 26.6 ---
DEAD ZONE
CONTROL
ZONE 682 4 15.4 15.4 20.5 20.5 28.0 26.4 ---
TIME-PROPOR-
TIONAL OUTPUT
(See note 2.)
TPO 685 4 10.6 10.6 14.8 --- 20.2 19.8 OFF execution time
54.5 54.5 82.0 --- 92.7 85.1 ON execution time
with duty designa-
tion or displayed
output limit
61.0 61.0 91.9 --- 102.5 95.3 ON execution time
with manipulated
variable designa-
tion and output limit
enabled
SCALING SCL 194 4 13.9 13.9 14.3 56.8 25.0 32.8 ---
SCALING 2 SCL2 486 4 12.2 12.2 12.6 50.7 22.3 29.1 ---
SCALING 3 SCL3 487 4 13.7 13.7 14.2 57.7 25.6 30.0 ---
AVERAGE AVG 195 4 36.3 36.3 52.6 53.1 62.9 59.1 Average of an oper-
ation
291.0 291.0 419.9 419.9 545.3 492.7 Average of 64 oper-
ations
PID CONTROL
WITH AUTOTUN-
ING
PIDAT 191 4 446.3 446.3 712.5 --- 765.3 700.0 Initial execution
339.4 339.4 533.9 --- 620.7 558.0 Sampling
100.7 100.7 147.1 --- 180.0 166.1 Not sampling
189.2 189.2 281.6 --- 233.7 225.1 Initial execution of
autotuning
535.2 535.2 709.8 --- 575.3 558.2 Autotuning when
sampling
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
SUBROUTINE
CALL
SBS 091 2 0.90 1.26 1.96 17.0 2.04 2.04 ---
SUBROUTINE
ENTRY
SBN 092 2 --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
SUBROUTINE
RETURN
RET 093 1 0.43 0.86 1.60 20.60 1.80 1.80 ---
MACRO MCRO 099 4 23.3 23.3 23.3 23.3 47.9 50.3 ---
GLOBAL SUB-
ROUTINE CALL
GSBN 751 2 --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
GLOBAL SUB-
ROUTINE ENTRY
GRET 752 1 0.90 1.26 1.96 --- 2.04 2.04 ---
GLOBAL SUB-
ROUTINE
RETURN
GSBS 750 2 0.43 0.86 1.60 --- 1.80 1.80 ---
487
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10-5
10-5-18 Interrupt Control Instructions
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
10-5-19 High-speed Counter and Pulse Output Instructions (CJ1M CPU21/
22/23 CPU Units only)
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
SET INTERRUPT
MASK
MSKS 690 3 25.6 25.6 38.4 39.5 44.7 42.9 ---
READ INTER-
RUPT MASK
MSKR 692 3 11.9 11.9 11.9 11.9 16.9 15.9 ---
CLEAR INTER-
RUPT
CLI 691 3 27.4 27.4 41.3 41.3 42.7 44.5 ---
DISABLE INTER-
RUPTS
DI 693 1 15.0 15.0 16.8 16.8 30.3 28.5 ---
ENABLE INTER-
RUPTS
EI 694 1 19.5 19.5 21.8 21.8 37.7 34.4 ---
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note 1.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
MODE CONTROL INI 880 4 --- --- --- --- 77.00 80.4 Starting high-speed
counter comparison
--- --- --- --- 43.00 43.0 Stopping high-
speed counter com-
parison
--- --- --- --- 43.40 48.8 Changing pulse
output PV
--- --- --- --- 51.80 50.8 Changing high-
speed counter PV
--- --- --- --- 31.83 28.5 Changing PV of
counter in interrupt
input mode
--- --- --- --- 45.33 49.8 Stopping pulse out-
put
--- --- --- --- 36.73 30.5 Stopping
PWM(891) output
HIGH-SPEED
COUNTER PV
READ
PRV 881 4 --- --- --- --- 42.40 43.9 Reading pulse out-
put PV
--- --- --- --- 53.40 65.9 Reading high-
speed counter PV
--- --- --- --- 33.60 30.5 Reading PV of
counter in interrupt
input mode
--- --- --- --- 38.80 40.0 Reading pulse out-
put status
--- --- --- --- 39.30 66.9 Reading high-
speed counter sta-
tus
--- --- --- --- 38.30 34.5 Reading PWM(891)
status
--- --- --- --- 117.73 145.7 Reading high-
speed counter
range comparison
results
--- --- --- --- 48.20 48.5 Reading frequency
of high-speed
counter 0
488
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10-5
Note 1. When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the
length column in the following table.
2. Supported only by CPU Units Ver. 2.0 or later.
10-5-20 Step Instructions
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
COMPARISON
TABLE LOAD
CTBL 882 4 --- --- --- --- 238.0 235.0 Registering target
value table and
starting comparison
for 1 target value
--- --- --- --- 14.42 ms 9.97 ms Registering target
value table and
starting comparison
for 48 target values
--- --- --- --- 289.0 276.0 Registering range
table and starting
comparison
--- --- --- --- 198.0 183.0 Only registering tar-
get value table for 1
target value
--- --- --- --- 14.40 ms 9.61 ms Only registering tar-
get value table for
48 target values
--- --- --- --- 259.0 239.0 Only registering
range table
COUNTER FRE-
QUENCY CON-
VERT
(See note 2.)
PRV2 883 4 --- --- --- --- 23.03 22.39 ---
SPEED OUTPUT SPED 885 4 --- --- --- --- 56.00 89.3 Continuous mode
--- --- --- --- 62.47 94.9 Independent mode
SET PULSES PULS 886 4 --- --- --- --- 26.20 32.9 ---
PULSE OUTPUT PLS2 887 5 --- --- --- --- 100.80 107.5 ---
ACCELERATION
CONTROL
ACC 888 4 --- --- --- --- 90.80 114.8 Continuous mode
--- --- --- --- 80.00 122.1 Independent mode
ORIGIN SEARCH ORG 889 3 --- --- --- --- 106.13 116.0 Origin search
--- --- --- --- 52.00 102.1 Origin return
PULSE WITH
VARIABLE DUTY
FACTOR
PWM 891 4 --- --- --- --- 25.80 33.0 ---
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note 1.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
STEP DEFINE STEP 008 2 17.4 17.4 20.7 27.1 35.9 37.1 Step control bit ON
11.8 11.8 13.7 24.4 13.8 18.3 Step control bit
OFF
STEP START SNXT 009 2 6.6 6.6 7.3 10.0 12.1 14.0 ---
489
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10-5
10-5-21 Basic I/O Unit Instructions
Note 1. When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the
length column in the following table.
2. Read/write times depend on the Special I/O Unit for which the instruction
is being executed.
3. Supported only by CPU Units Ver. 2.0 or later.
4. CJ1-H-R CPU Units only.
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note 1.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
I/O REFRESH IORF 097 3 15.5 15.5 16.4 23.5 26.7 30.4 1-word refresh (IN)
for Basic I/O Units
17.20 17.20 18.40 25.6 29.7 35.0 1-word refresh
(OUT) for Basic I/O
Units
319.9 319.9 320.7 377.6 291.0 100.0 60-word refresh
(IN) for Basic I/O
Units
CJ1M-CPU 11/21:
10 words
Other than CJ1M-
CPU 11/21: 40
words
358.00 358.00 354.40 460.1 325.0 134.7 60-word refresh
(OUT) for Basic I/O
Units
CJ1M-CPU 11/21:
10 words
Other than CJ1M-
CPU 11/21: 40
words
SPECIAL I/O UNIT
I/O REFRESH
(See note 4.)
FIORF 225 2 --- (See
note 2.)
--- --- --- --- --- ---
CPU BUS I/O
REFRESH
DLNK 226 4 287.8 287.8 315.5 --- 321.3 458.7 Allocated 1 word
7-SEGMENT
DECODER
SDEC 078 4 6.5 6.5 6.9 14.1 8.1 15.7 ---
DIGITAL SWITCH
INPUT
(See note 3.)
DSW 210 6 50.7 50.7 73.5 --- 77.7 77.6 4 digits, data input
value: 0
51.5 51.5 73.4 --- 77.9 77.6 4 digits, data input
value: F
51.3 51.3 73.5 --- 83.2 80.0 8 digits, data input
value: 00
50.7 50.7 73.4 --- 77.9 77.7 8 digits, data input
value: FF
TEN KEY INPUT
(See note 3.)
TKY 211 4 9.7 9.7 13.2 --- 18.7 18.6 Data input value:
00
10.7 10.7 14.8 --- 20.2 19.1 Data input value:
FF
HEXADECIMAL
KEY INPUT
(See note 3.)
HKY 212 5 50.3 50.3 70.9 --- 77.3 78.1 Data input value:
00
50.1 50.1 71.2 --- 76.8 77.3 Data input value:
FF
MATRIX INPUT
(See note 3.)
MTR 213 5 47.8 47.8 68.1 --- 76.4 77.7 Data input value:
00
48.0 48.0 68.0 --- 77.7 76.9 Data input value:
FF
7-SEGMENT DIS-
PLAY OUTPUT
(See note 3.)
7SEG 214 5 58.1 58.1 83.3 --- 89.6 89.9 4 digits
63.3 63.3 90.3 --- 98.3 99.2 8 digits
INTELLIGENT I/O
READ
IORD 222 4 --- (See
note 2.)
--- (See
note 2.)
--- (See
note 2.)
--- (See
note 2.)
225.3 217.7 First execution
232.0 241.7 When busy
223.0 215.3 At end
INTELLIGENT I/O
WRITE
IOWR 223 4 --- (See
note 2.)
--- (See
note 2.)
--- (See
note 2.)
--- (See
note 2.)
245.3 219.7 First execution
231.0 225.7 When busy
244.0 218.7 At end
490
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10-5
10-5-22 Serial Communications Instructions
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
10-5-23 Network Instructions
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
10-5-24 File Memory Instructions
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
PROTOCOL
MACRO
PMCR 260 5 100.1 100.1 142.1 276.8 158.4 206.0 Sending 0 words,
receiving 0 words
134.2 134.2 189.6 305.9 210.0 256.7 Sending 249 words,
receiving 249
words
TRANSMIT TXD 236 4 68.5 68.5 98.8 98.8 109.3 102.9 Sending 1 byte
734.3 734.3 1.10 ms 1.10 ms 1.23 ms 1.16 ms Sending 256 bytes
RECEIVE RXD 235 4 89.6 89.6 131.1 131.1 144.0 132.1 Storing 1 byte
724.2 724.2 1.11 ms 1.11 ms 1.31 ms 1.22 ms Storing 256 bytes
TRANSMIT VIA
SERIAL COMMU-
NICATIONS UNIT
TXDU 256 4 131.5 131.5 202.4 --- 213.4 208.6 Sending 1 byte
RECEIVE VIA
SERIAL COMMU-
NICATIONS UNIT
RXDU 255 4 131 131 200.8 --- 211.8 206.8 Storing 1 byte
CHANGE SERIAL
PORT SETUP
STUP 237 3 341.2 341.2 400.0 440.4 504.7 524.7 ---
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
NETWORK SEND SEND 090 4 84.4 84.4 123.9 123.9 141.6 195.0 ---
NETWORK
RECEIVE
RECV 098 4 85.4 85.4 124.7 124.7 142.3 196.7 ---
DELIVER COM-
MAND
CMND 490 4 106.8 106.8 136.8 136.8 167.7 226.7 ---
EXPLICIT MES-
SAGE SEND
EXPLT 720 4 127.6 127.6 190.0 --- 217.0 238.0 ---
EXPLICIT GET
ATTRIBUTE
EGATR 721 4 123.9 123.9 185.0 --- 210.0 232.7 ---
EXPLICIT SET
ATTRIBUTE
ESATR 722 3 110.0 110.0 164.4 --- 188.3 210.3 ---
EXPLICIT WORD
READ
ECHRD 723 4 106.8 106.8 158.9 --- 176.3 220.3 ---
EXPLICIT WORD
WRITE
ECHWR 724 4 106.0 106.0 158.3 --- 175.7 205.3 ---
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note 1.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
READ DATA FILE FREAD 700 5 391.4 391.4 632.4 684.1 657.3 641.3 2-character direc-
tory + file name in
binary
836.1 836.1 1.33 ms 1.35 ms 1.45 ms 1.16 ms 73-character direc-
tory + file name in
binary
491
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10-5
Note 1. When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the
length column in the following table.
2. Supported only by CPU Units Ver. 4.0 or later.
10-5-25 Display Instructions
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
10-5-26 Clock Instructions
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
10-5-27 Debugging Instructions
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
WRITE DATA FILE FWRIT 701 5 387.8 387.8 627.0 684.7 650.7 637.3 2-character direc-
tory + file name in
binary
833.3 833.3 1.32 ms 1.36 ms 1.44 ms 1.16 ms 73-character direc-
tory + file name in
binary
WRITE TEXT FILE
(See note 2.)
TWRIT 704 5 390.1 390.1 619.1 --- 555.3 489.0 ---
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note 1.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
DISPLAY MES-
SAGE
MSG 046 3 10.1 10.1 14.2 14.3 16.8 17.3 Displaying mes-
sage
8.4 8.4 11.3 11.3 14.7 14.7 Deleting displayed
message
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
CALENDAR ADD CADD 730 4 34.0 38.3 201.9 209.5 217.0 194.0 ---
CALENDAR SUB-
TRACT
CSUB 731 4 29.6 38.6 170.4 184.1 184.7 167.0 ---
HOURS TO SEC-
ONDS
SEC 065 3 7.8 21.4 29.3 35.8 36.1 35.4 ---
SECONDS TO
HOURS
HMS 066 3 7.7 22.2 30.9 42.1 45.1 45.7 ---
CLOCK ADJUST-
MENT
DATE 735 2 216.0 216.0 251.5 120.0 118.7 128.3 ---
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
TRACE MEMORY
SAMPLING
TRSM 045 1 80.4 80.4 120.0 120.0 207.0 218.3 Sampling 1 bit and
0 words
848.1 848.1 1.06 ms 1.06 ms 1.16 ms 1.10 ms Sampling 31 bits
and 6 words
492
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10-5
10-5-28 Failure Diagnosis Instructions
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
10-5-29 Other Instructions
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
10-5-30 Block Programming Instructions
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
FAILURE ALARM FAL 006 3 15.4 15.4 16.7 16.7 26.1 24.47 Recording errors
179.8 179.8 244.8 244.8 294.0 264.0 Deleting errors (in
order of priority)
432.4 432.4 657.1 657.1 853.3 807.3 Deleting errors (all
errors)
161.5 161.5 219.4 219.4 265.7 233.0 Deleting errors
(individually)
SEVERE FAIL-
URE ALARM
FALS 007 3 --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
FAILURE POINT
DETECTION
FPD 269 4 140.9 140.9 202.3 202.3 220.7 250.0 When executed
163.4 163.4 217.6 217.6 250.3 264.3 First time
185.2 185.2 268.9 268.9 220.7 321.7 When executed
207.5 207.5 283.6 283.6 320.7 336.0 First time
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
SET CARRY STC 040 1 0.048 0.06 0.06 0.12 0.15 0.15 ---
CLEAR CARRY CLC 041 1 0.048 0.06 0.06 0.12 0.15 0.15 ---
SELECT EM
BANK
EMBC 281 2 14.0 14.0 15.1 15.1 --- --- ---
EXTEND MAXI-
MUM CYCLE
TIME
WDT 094 2 15.0 15.0 19.7 19.7 23.6 22.0 ---
SAVE CONDI-
TION FLAGS
CCS 282 1 8.6 8.6 12.5 --- 14.2 12.9 ---
LOAD CONDI-
TION FLAGS
CCL 283 1 9.8 9.8 13.9 --- 16.3 15.7 ---
CONVERT
ADDRESS FROM
CV
FRMCV 284 3 13.6 13.6 19.9 --- 23.1 31.8 ---
CONVERT
ADDRESS TO CV
TOCV 285 3 11.9 11.9 17.2 --- 22.5 31.4 ---
DISABLE PERIPH-
ERAL SERVICING
IOSP 287 --- 13.9 13.9 19.8 --- 21.5 21.5 ---
ENABLE PERIPH-
ERAL SERVICING
IORS 288 --- 63.6 63.6 92.3 --- 22.2 22.2 ---
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
BLOCK PRO-
GRAM BEGIN
BPRG 096 2 12.1 12.1 13.0 13.0 27.5 30.4 ---
BLOCK PRO-
GRAM END
BEND 801 1 9.6 9.6 12.3 13.1 23.2 27.1 ---
BLOCK PRO-
GRAM PAUSE
BPPS 811 2 10.6 10.6 12.3 14.9 16.0 21.7 ---
BLOCK PRO-
GRAM RESTART
BPRS 812 2 5.1 5.1 5.6 8.3 9.0 10.2 ---
493
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10-5
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
CONDITIONAL
BLOCK EXIT
(Execution
condition)
EXIT
806 1 10.0 10.0 11.3 12.9 23.8 26.0 EXIT condition sat-
isfied
4.0 4.0 4.9 7.3 7.2 8.4 EXIT condition not
satisfied
CONDITIONAL
BLOCK EXIT
EXIT (bit
address)
806 2 6.8 6.8 13.5 16.3 28.4 30.6 EXIT condition sat-
isfied
4.7 4.7 7.2 10.7 11.4 13.1 EXIT condition not
satisfied
CONDITIONAL
BLOCK EXIT
(NOT)
EXIT NOT
(bit
address)
806 2 12.4 12.4 14.0 16.8 28.4 31.2 EXIT condition sat-
isfied
7.1 7.1 7.6 11.2 11.8 13.5 EXIT condition not
satisfied
Branching IF (execu-
tion condi-
tion)
802 1 4.6 4.6 4.8 7.2 6.8 8.5 IF true
6.7 6.7 7.3 10.9 12.2 13.9 IF false
Branching IF (relay
number)
802 2 6.8 6.8 7.2 10.4 11.0 12.7 IF true
9.0 9.0 9.6 14.2 16.5 18.5 IF false
Branching (NOT) IF NOT
(relay num-
ber)
802 2 7.1 7.1 7.6 10.9 11.5 13.1 IF true
9.2 9.2 10.1 14.7 16.8 18.9 IF false
Branching ELSE 803 1 6.2 6.2 6.7 9.9 11.4 12.6 IF true
6.8 6.8 7.7 11.2 13.4 15.0 IF false
Branching IEND 804 1 6.9 6.9 7.7 11.0 13.5 15.4 IF true
4.4 4.4 4.6 7.0 6.93 8.1 IF false
ONE CYCLE AND
WAIT
WAIT (exe-
cution con-
dition)
805 1 12.6 12.6 13.7 16.7 28.6 34.0 WAIT condition sat-
isfied
3.9 3.9 4.1 6.3 5.6 6.9 WAIT condition not
satisfied
ONE CYCLE AND
WAIT
WAIT
(relay num-
ber)
805 2 12.0 12.0 13.4 16.5 27.2 30.0 WAIT condition sat-
isfied
6.1 6.1 6.5 9.6 10.0 11.4 WAIT condition not
satisfied
ONE CYCLE AND
WAIT (NOT)
WAIT NOT
(relay num-
ber)
805 2 12.2 12.2 13.8 17.0 27.8 30.6 WAIT condition sat-
isfied
6.4 6.4 6.9 10.1 10.5 11.8 WAIT condition not
satisfied
COUNTER WAIT CNTW 814 4 17.9 17.9 22.6 27.4 41.0 43.5 First execution
19.1 19.1 23.9 28.7 42.9 45.7 Normal execution
CNTWX 818 4 17.9 17.9 22.6 27.4 41.0 43.5 First execution
19.1 19.1 23.9 28.7 42.9 45.7 Normal execution
HIGH-SPEED
TIMER WAIT
TMHW 815 3 25.8 25.8 27.9 34.1 47.9 53.7 First execution
20.6 20.6 22.7 28.9 40.9 46.2 Normal execution
TMHWX 817 3 25.8 25.8 27.9 34.1 47.9 53.7 First execution
20.6 20.6 22.7 28.9 40.9 46.2 Normal execution
Loop Control LOOP 809 1 7.9 7.9 9.1 12.3 15.6 17.6 ---
Loop Control LEND
(execution
condition)
810 1 7.7 7.7 8.4 10.9 13.5 15.5 LEND condition
satisfied
6.8 6.8 8.0 9.8 17.5 19.8 LEND condition not
satisfied
Loop Control LEND
(relay num-
ber)
810 2 9.9 9.9 10.7 14.4 17.5 19.9 LEND condition
satisfied
8.9 8.9 10.3 13.0 21.6 24.5 LEND condition not
satisfied
Loop Control LEND NOT
(relay num-
ber)
810 2 10.2 10.2 11.2 14.8 21.9 24.9 LEND condition
satisfied
9.3 9.3 10.8 13.5 17.8 20.4 LEND condition not
satisfied
TIMER WAIT TIMW 813 3 22.3 22.3 25.2 33.1 47.4 52.0 Default setting
24.9 24.9 27.8 35.7 46.2 53.4 Normal execution
TIMWX 816 3 22.3 22.3 25.2 33.1 47.4 52.0 Default setting
24.9 24.9 27.8 35.7 46.2 53.4 Normal execution
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
494
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10-5
10-5-31 Text String Processing Instructions
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
10-5-32 Task Control Instructions
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
MOV STRING MOV$ 664 3 45.6 45.6 66.0 84.3 79.3 72.7 Transferring 1 char-
acter
CONCATENATE
STRING
+$ 656 4 86.5 86.5 126.0 167.8 152.0 137.0 1 character + 1
character
GET STRING
LEFT
LEFT$ 652 4 53.0 53.0 77.4 94.3 93.6 84.8 Retrieving 1 char-
acter from 2 char-
acters
GET STRING
RIGHT
RGHT$ 653 4 52.2 52.2 76.3 94.2 92.1 83.3 Retrieving 1 char-
acter from 2 char-
acters
GET STRING MID-
DLE
MID$ 654 5 56.5 56.5 84.6 230.2 93.7 84.0 Retrieving 1 char-
acter from 3 char-
acters
FIND IN STRING FIND$ 660 4 51.4 51.4 77.5 94.1 89.1 96.7 Searching for 1
character from 2
characters
STRING LENGTH LEN$ 650 3 19.8 19.8 28.9 33.4 33.8 30.1 Detecting 1 charac-
ter
REPLACE IN
STRING
RPLC$ 661 6 175.1 175.1 258.7 479.5 300.7 267.7 Replacing the first
of 2 characters with
1 character
DELETE STRING DEL$ 658 5 63.4 63.4 94.2 244.6 11.3 99.3 Deleting the leading
character of 2 char-
acters
EXCHANGE
STRING
XCHG$ 665 3 60.6 60.6 87.2 99.0 105.2 95.3 Exchanging 1 char-
acter with 1 charac-
ter
CLEAR STRING CLR$ 666 2 23.8 23.8 36.0 37.8 42.0 36.8 Clearing 1 charac-
ter
INSERT INTO
STRING
INS$ 657 5 136.5 136.5 200.6 428.9 204.0 208.0 Inserting 1 charac-
ter after the first of
2 characters
String Comparison
Instructions
LD, AND,
OR +=$
670 4 48.5 48.5 69.8 86.2 79.9 68.5 Comparing 1 char-
acter with 1 charac-
ter
LD, AND,
OR +<>$
671
LD, AND,
OR +<$
672
LD, AND,
OR +>$
674
LD, AND,
OR +>=$
675
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU6@HCPU4@HCPU4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
TASK ON TKON 820 2 19.5 19.5 26.3 26.3 33.1 32.5 ---
TASK OFF TKOF 821 2 13.3 13.3 19.0 26.3 19.7 20.2 ---
495
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10-5
10-5-33 Model Conversion Instructions (Unit Ver. 3.0 or Later Only)
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
10-5-34 Special Function Block Instructions (Unit Ver. 3.0 or Later Only)
Note When a double-length operand is used, add 1 to the value shown in the length
column in the following table.
10-5-35 Function Block Instance Execution Time (CPU Units with Unit
Version 3.0 or Later)
Use the following equation to calculate the effect of instance execution on the
cycle time when function block definitions have been created and the
instances copied into the user program using CS/CJ-series CPU Units with
unit version 3.0 or later.
The following table shows the length of time for A, B, and C.
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU-6@HCPU-4@HCPU-4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
BLOCK TRANS-
FER
XFERC 565 4 6.4 6.4 6.5 --- 33.1 31.1 Transferring 1 word
481.6 481.6 791.6 --- 3056.1 2821.1 Transferring 1,000
words
SINGLE WORD
DISTRIBUTE
DISTC 566 4 3.4 3.4 3.5 --- 19 18.1 Data distribute
5.9 5.9 7.3 --- 39.5 38.5 Stack operation
DATA COLLECT COLLC 567 4 3.5 3.5 3.85 --- 24.9 29.7 Data collection
8 8 9.1 --- 22.1 25.3 Stack operation
8.3 8.3 9.6 --- 25.5 31 Stack operation
1 word FIFO Read
2052.3 2052.3 2097.5 --- 8310.1 7821.1 Stack operation
1,000 words FIFO
Read
MOVE BIT MOVBC 568 4 4.5 4.5 4.88 --- 28.1 22.1 ---
BIT COUNTER BCNTC 621 4 4.9 4.9 5 --- 30.6 28.8 Counting 1 word
1252.4 1252.4 1284.4 --- 5814.1 5223.8 Counting 1,000
words
Instruction Mnemonic Code Length
(steps)
(See
note.)
ON execution time (µs) Conditions
CPU6@H-R CPU-6@HCPU-4@HCPU-4@CJ1M
excluding
CPU11/21
CJ1M
CPU11/21
GET VARIABLE ID GETID 286 4 14 14 22.2 --- 23.4 21.3 ---
Effect of Instance Execution on Cycle Time
= Startup time (A)
+ I/O parameter transfer processing time (B)
+ Execution time of instructions in function block definition (C)
Operation CPU Unit model
CJ1H-
CPU6@H-R
CS1H-
CPU6@H
CJ1H-
CPU6@H
CS1G-
CPU4@H
CJ1G-
CPU4@H
CJ1M-CPU@@
A Startup time Startup time not including
I/O parameter transfer
3.3 µs6.8 µs8.8 µs 15.0 µs
496
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10-5
Example: CJ1H-CPU67H-R
Input variables with a 1-word data type (INT): 3
Output variables with a 1-word data type (INT): 2
Total instruction processing time in function block definition section: 10 µs
Execution time for 1 instance = 3.3 µs + (3 + 2) × 0.19 µs + 10 µs = 14.25 µs
Note The execution time is increased according to the number of multiple instances
when the same function block definition has been copied to multiple locations.
Guidelines on Converting Program Capacities from Previous OMRON PLCs
Guidelines are provided in the following table for converting the program
capacity (unit: words) of previous OMRON PLCs (SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE,
CVM1, or CV-series PLCs) to the program capacity (unit: steps) of the CS-
series PLCs.
Add the following value (n) to the program capacity (unit: words) of the previ-
ous PLCs for each instruction to obtain the program capacity (unit: steps) of
the CJ-series PLCs.
For example, if OUT is used with an address of CIO 000000 to CIO 25515, the
program capacity of the previous PLC would be 2 words per instruction and
that of the CJ-series PLC would be 1 (2 – 1) step per instruction.
B I/O parameter trans-
fer processing time
The data type is
indicated in paren-
theses.
1-bit I/O variable (BOOL) 0.24 µs0.4 µs0.7 µs1.0 µs
1-word I/O variable (INT,
UINT, WORD)
0.19 µs0.3 µs0.6 µs0.8 µs
2-word I/O variable
(DINT, UDINT, DWORD,
REAL)
0.19 µs0.5 µs0.8 µs1.1 µs
4-word I/O variable (LINT,
ULINT, LWORD, LREAL)
0.38 µs1.0 µs1.6 µs2.2 µs
C Function block defi-
nition instruction
execution time
Total instruction processing time (same as standard user program)
Operation CPU Unit model
CJ1H-
CPU6@H-R
CS1H-
CPU6@H
CJ1H-
CPU6@H
CS1G-
CPU4@H
CJ1G-
CPU4@H
CJ1M-CPU@@
CJ-series steps = “a” (words) of previous PLC + n
Instructions Variations Value of n when
converting from
C200HX/HG/HE to
CJ Series
Value of n when
converting from
CV-series PLC or
CVM1 to CJ Series
Basic
instructions
None OUT, SET, RSET, or
KEEP(011): –1
Other instructions: 0
0
Upward Differentiation None +1
Immediate Refreshing None 0
Upward Differentiation and
Immediate Refreshing
None +2
Special
instructions
None 0 –1
Upward Differentiation +1 0
Immediate Refreshing None +3
Upward Differentiation and
Immediate Refreshing
None +4
497
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10-5
For example, if !MOV is used (MOVE instruction with immediate refreshing),
the program capacity of a CV-series PLC would be 4 words per instruction
and that of the CJ-series PLC would be 7 (4 + 3) steps.
Number of Function Block Program Steps (CPU Units with Unit Version 3.0 or Later)
Use the following equation to calculate the number of program steps when
function block definitions have been created and the instances copied into the
user program using CS/CJ-series CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later.
Note The number of instruction steps in the function block definition (p) will not be
diminished in subsequence instances when the same function block definition
is copied to multiple locations (i.e., for multiple instances). Therefore, in the
above equation, the number of instances is not multiplied by the number of
instruction steps in the function block definition (p).
Example:
Input variables with a 1-word data type (INT): 5
Output variables with a 1-word data type (INT): 5
Function block definition section: 100 steps
Number of steps for 1 instance = 57 + (5 + 5) × 6 steps + 100 steps + 27 steps
= 244 steps
Number of steps
= Number of instances × (Call part size m + I/O parameter transfer part size n × Num-
ber of parameters) + Number of instruction steps in the function block definition p
(See note.)
Contents CS/CJ-series CPU Units
with unit version 3.0 or later
m Call part 57 steps
n I/O parameter
transfer part
The data type is
shown in parenthe-
ses.
1-bit I/O variable (BOOL) 6 steps
1-word I/O variable (INT,
UINT, WORD)
6 steps
2-word I/O variable (DINT,
UDINT, DWORD, REAL)
6 steps
4-word I/O variable (LINT,
ULINT, LWORD, LREAL)
12 steps
p Number of instruc-
tion steps in func-
tion block definition
The total number of instruction steps (same as standard
user program) + 27 steps.
498
Instruction Execution Times and Number of Steps Section 10-5
499
SECTION 11
Troubleshooting
This section provides information on hardware and software errors that occur during PLC operation.
11-1 Error Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
11-2 Error Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
11-2-1 Error Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
11-2-2 Error Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
11-2-3 Error Codes and Error Flags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
11-2-4 Error Processing Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
11-2-5 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
11-2-6 Power Supply Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
11-2-7 Memory Error Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
11-2-8 Program Error Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
11-2-9 Cycle Time Too Long Error Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
11-2-10 PLC Setup Setting Error Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
11-2-11 Battery Error Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
11-2-12 I/O Setting Error Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
11-2-13 I/O Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
11-2-14 Environmental Conditions Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
11-3 Troubleshooting Racks and Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
500
Error Log Section 11-1
11-1 Error Log
Each time that an error occurs in a CJ PLC, the CPU Unit stores error infor-
mation in the Error Log Area. The error information includes the error code
(stored in A400), error contents, and time that the error occurred. Up to 20
records can be stored in the Error Log.
Errors Generated by
FAL(006)/FALS(007)
In addition to system-generated errors, the PLC records user-defined
FAL(006) and FALS(007) errors, making it easier to track the operating status
of the system.
A user-defined error is generated when FAL(006) or FALS(007) is executed in
the program. The execution conditions of these instructions constitute the
user-defined error conditions. FAL(006) generates a non-fatal error and
FALS(007) generates a fatal error that stops program execution.
The following table shows the error codes for FAL(006) and FALS(007).
Error Log Structure When more than 20 errors occur, the oldest error data (in A195 to A199) is
deleted and the newest record is stored in A100 to A104.
Instruction FAL numbers Error codes
FAL(006) #0001 to #01FF (1 to 511 decimal) 4101 to 42FF
FALS(007) #0001 to #01FF (1 to 511 decimal) C101 to C2FF
501
Error Processing Section 11-2
Note The Error Log Pointer can be reset by turning ON the Error Log Pointer Reset
Bit (A50014), effectively clearing the error log displays from the Programming
Consoles or CX-Programmer. The contents of the Error Log Area will not be
cleared by resetting the pointer.
11-2 Error Processing
11-2-1 Error Categories
Errors in CJ-series PLCs can be broadly divided into the following three cate-
gories.
11-2-2 Error Information
There are basically four sources of information on errors that have occurred:
1,2,3... 1. The CPU Unit’s indicators
2. The Auxiliary Area Error Flags
3. The Auxiliary Area Error Information Words
4. The Auxiliary Area Error Code Word
Error code
Error Log Area
Error code
Error contents
Error code
Error contents
Error code
Error contents
Order of
occurrence
Minute, second
Minute, second
Day, hour
Day, hour
Year, month
Minute, second
Day, hour
Year, month
Year, month
Time of
occurrence
Time of
occurrence
Time of
occurrence
Error Log Pointer (error counter)
Category Result Indicators Comments
RUN ERR/ALM
CPU Standby The CPU Unit will not start opera-
tion in RUN or MONITOR mode.
OFF OFF ---
Non-fatal Errors
(including FAL(006))
The CPU Unit will continue oper-
ating in RUN or MONITOR mode.
ON
(Green)
Flashing
(Red)
Other indicators will also operate
when a communications error has
occurred or the Output OFF Bit is ON.
Fatal Errors
(including FALS(007))
The CPU Unit will stop operating
in RUN or MONITOR mode.
OFF ON
(Red)
The indicators will all be OFF when
there is a power interruption.
502
Error Processing Section 11-2
Note When two or more errors occur at the same time, the highest (most serious)
error code will be stored in A400.
Indicator Status and Error Conditions
The following table shows the status of the CPU Unit’s indicators for errors
that have occurred in RUN or MONITOR mode.
11-2-3 Error Codes and Error Flags
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH
PRPHL/COMM
RUN:
ERR/ALM:
INH:
PRPHL:
COMM:
CPU Unit Indicators
Lit when the PC is in RUN
or MONITOR mode.
Flashing: Non-fatal error
Lit: Fatal error
Lit when Output OFF Bit
has been turned ON.
Lit when the CPU Unit is
communicating through
the peripheral port
Lit when the CPU Unit is
communicating through
the RS-232C port
Flags indicating
the type of error.
Words providing
error information.
Error Flags Error Info. Error Code Word
(A400)
A400 contains
the error code.
(See note.)
Auxiliary Area Flags and Words
Indicator* CPU
error
CPU
reset
CPU
standby
Fatal
error
Non-fatal
error
Communications error Output OFF
Bit ON
Peripheral RS-232C
RUN OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON
ERR/ALM ON OFF OFF ON Flashing --- --- ---
INH OFF OFF --- --- --- --- --- ON
PRPHL --- --- --- --- --- OFF --- ---
COMM --- --- --- --- --- --- OFF ---
Classification Error code Error name Page
Fatal system
errors
80F1 Memory error 508
80C0 to 80C7,
80CE, 80CF
I/O bus error 508
80E9 Duplicated number error 509
80E1 Too many I/O points 511
80E0 I/O setting error 511
80F0 Program error 510
809F Cycle time too long 512
Non-fatal sys-
tem errors
008B Interrupt task error 514
009A Basic I/O error 515
009B PLC Setup setting error 515
0200 to 020F CJ-series CPU Bus Unit error 515
0300 to 035F,
03FF
Special I/O Unit error 515
00F7 Battery error 515
0400 to 040F CJ-series CPU Bus Unit setting error 516
0500 to 055F Special I/O Unit setting error 516
503
Error Processing Section 11-2
11-2-4 Error Processing Flowchart
Use the following flowchart as a guide for error processing with a Program-
ming Console.
User-defined
fatal errors
4101 to 42FF FAL(006) error
(4101 to 42FF are stored for FAL num-
bers 001 to 511)
514
User-defined
non-fatal errors
C101 to C2FF FALS(007) error
(C101 to C2FF are stored for FALS
numbers 001 to 511)
512
Classification Error code Error name Page
OFF
OFF
OFF
Check the Power
Supply (page 16).
Check I/O (page 17)
and environmental
conditions (page 18).
Lit
Lit
Flashing
ERR/ALM indicator lit.
Error occurred during
operation
Is the POWER
indicator lit?
Is the RUN
indicator lit?
Connect the
Programming Console.
Is the Programming
Console's display
operating?
- - - - displayed.
Yes
Fatal error
CPU Error
(WDT error)
Non-fatal error
Connect the
Programming Console.
Is the ERR/ALM
indicator flashing?
Check the Power
Supply (page 517)
Check I/O (page 522)
and environmental
conditions (page 523)
504
Error Processing Section 11-2
1. The rack number will be given at *.
2. The FAL/FALS number will be given at ***.
3. The unit number will be given at **.
4. The master number will be given at *.
MEMORY ERR *
I/O BUS ERR
UNIT NO. DPL ERR
RACK NO. DPL ERR
TOO MANY I/O PNT
I/O SET ERR
PROGRAM ERR
CYCLE TIME ERR
SYS FAIL FALS
SYS FAIL FAL ***
INTRPT ERR
DENSITY I/O ERR
PC SETUP ERR
CPU BU ERR **
SIOU ERR **
BAT LOW
CPU BU STUP **
SIOU SETUP **
Fatal error
Memory error
I/O bus error
I/O Table
Setting error
Program error
Non-fatal error
Interrupt
Task error
Battery error
(See note 1.)
(See note 2.)
(See note 3.)
(See note 3.)
(See note 3.)
(See note 3.)
FAL error
Unit Number
Duplication
error
Rack Number
Duplication
error
Too Many I/O
Points error
Cycle Time
Overrun error
System FALS
error
Special I/O
Unit Setup
error
CJ1 CPU
Bus Unit
Setup error
Special I/O
Unit error
CJ1 CPU Bus
Unit error
PLC Setup
error
Basic I/O
error
(See note 2.)
505
Error Processing Section 11-2
11-2-5 Error Messages
The following tables show error messages for errors which can occur in CJ-
series PLCs and indicate the likely cause of the errors.
Note Always confirm the safety of any related facilities and machines before turning
OFF the power supply.
CPU Errors
A CPU error has occurred if the indicators have the following conditions in
RUN or MONITOR mode. A Programming Device cannot be connected to the
CPU if an CPU error has occurred.
Note If a fatal operating error occurs, the indicators will be the same as shown
below for CPU errors, but a Programming Device can be connected. This will
enable distinguishing between the two types of error.
CPU Reset
The following indictor status shows that the CPU Unit has been reset (not a
CPU error). A Programming Device cannot be connected.
Power Supply
Unit Indicator
CPU Unit Indicators
POWER RUN ERR/ALM INH PRPHL COMM
ON OFF ON --- --- ---
Status Error Program-
ming
Console
display
Error
flags in
Auxiliary
Area
Error
code (in
A400)
Flags
and
word
data
Probable cause Possible remedy
Stopped CPU error
(WDT
error)
– – – – None None None Watchdog timer has
exceeded maxi-
mum setting. (This
error does not nor-
mally occur)
Turn the power OFF and
restart. The Unit may be
damaged. Contact you
OMRON representative.
Power Supply
Unit Indicator
CPU Unit Indicators
POWER RUN ERR/ALM INH PRPHL COMM
ON --- --- --- --- ---
506
Error Processing Section 11-2
Note When power supply is interrupted to an Expansion Rack, the CPU Unit will
stop program execution and the same operations as are performed when the
power supply to the CPU Unit is interrupted will be performed. For example, if
the power OFF interrupt task is enabled, it will be executed. If power is then
restored to the Expansion Rack, the CPU Unit will perform startup processing,
i.e., the same operational status as existed before the power interrupt will not
necessarily be continued.
CPU Standby Errors
A CPU standby error has occurred if the indicators have the following condi-
tions in RUN or MONITOR mode.
When a CJ-series CPU Unit is turned ON, cyclic servicing is started and RUN
mode is entered only after all Special I/O Units and CPU Bus Units have been
detected. If the startup mode is RUN or MONITOR mode, the CPU will remain
on standby until all Units have been directed.
Status Error Program-
ming
Console
display
Error
flags in
Auxiliary
Area
Error
code (in
A400)
Flags Probable cause Possible remedy
Stopped CPU reset – – – – None None None Power is not being
supplied to an
Expansion Rack.
Supply power to the Expan-
sion Racks.
I/O Control Unit is
not connected cor-
rectly, e.g., more
than one is con-
nected or one is
connected to an
Expansion Rack.
Turn OFF the power supply,
correct the connections, and
turn the power supply back
ON.
The I/O Connecting
cable is not con-
nected correctly,
e.g., the connections
to the input and out-
put connectors on
the I/O Interface Unit
are backward.
Turn OFF the power supply,
correct the connections, and
turn the power supply back
ON.
Power Supply
Unit Indicator
CPU Unit Indicators
POWER RUN ERR/ALM INH PRPHL COMM
ON OFF OFF --- --- ---
Status Error Program-
ming
Console
display
Error
flags in
Auxiliary
Area
Error
code (in
A400)
Flags Probable cause Possible remedy
Stopped CPU
standby
error
CPU
WAIT’G
None None None A CPU Bus Unit has not
started properly.
Check the settings of the
CPU Bus Unit.
A Special I/O Unit, or
Interrupt Input Unit was
not recognized.
Read the I/O table and
replace any Special I/O
Unit or Interrupt Input
Units for which only “$” is
displayed.
507
Error Processing Section 11-2
Startup Condition The CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Units support a Startup Condition setting.
To start the CPU Unit in MONITOR or PROGRAM mode even if there is one
or more Units that has not completed startup processing, set the Startup Con-
dition to 1.
PLC Setup
Fatal Errors
A fatal error has occurred if the indicators have the following conditions in
RUN or MONITOR mode.
Connect a Programming Console to display the error message or use the
error log window on the CX-Programmer. The cause of the error can be deter-
mined from the error message and related Auxiliary Area flags and words.
Errors are listed in order of importance. When two or more errors occur at the
same time, the more serious error’s error code will be recorded in A400.
If the IOM Hold Bit hasn’t been turned ON to protect I/O memory, all non-
retained areas of I/O memory will be cleared when a fatal error other than
FALS(007) occurs. If the IOM Hold Bit is ON, the contents of I/O memory will
be retained but all outputs will be turned OFF.
Programming Con-
sole setting address
Name Settings Default
Word Bit
83 15 Startup Condition 0: Wait for Units.
1: Don’t wait.
0: Wait for Units.
Power Supply
Unit Indicator
CPU Unit Indicators
POWER RUN ERR/ALM INH PRPHL COMM
ON OFF ON --- --- ---
508
Error Processing Section 11-2
If the IOM Hold Bit hasn’t been turned ON to protect I/O memory, all non-
retained areas of I/O memory will be cleared when a fatal error other than
FALS(007) occurs. When the IOM Hold Bit is ON, the contents of I/O memory
will be retained but all outputs will be turned OFF.
Error Program-
ming
Console
display
Error
code (in
A400)
Flag and
word data
Probable cause Possible remedy
Memory
error
MEMORY
ERR
80F1 A40115:
Memory
Error Flag
A403:
Memory
Error Loca-
tion
An error has occurred in
memory. A bit in A403 will
turn ON to show the location
of the error as listed below.
See below.
A40300 ON:
A checksum error has
occurred in the user program
memory. The power was
turned OFF while storing data
to the flash memory (backup
memory).
Check the program and correct the
error.
A40304 ON:
A checksum error has
occurred in the PLC Setup.
Clear the entire PLC Setup to 0000 and
reenter the settings.
A40305 ON:
A checksum error has
occurred in the registered I/O
table.
Initialize the registered I/O table and
generate a new I/O table.
A40307 ON:
A checksum error has
occurred in the routing tables.
Initialize the routing tables and reenter
the tables.
A40308 ON:
A checksum error has
occurred in the CPU Bus Unit
setup.
Initialize the CPU Bus Unit setup and
reenter the settings.
A40309 ON:
An error occurred during
automatic transfer from the
Memory Card at startup.
Make sure that the Memory Card is
installed properly and that the correct
file is on the Card.
A40310 ON:
An error occurred in flash
memory (backup memory).
CPU Unit hardware is faulty. Replace
the CPU Unit.
I/O Bus
error
I/O BUS
ERR
80C0 to
80CE or
80CF
A40114: I/O
Bus Error
Flag
A404: I/O
Bus Error
Slot and
Rack Num-
bers
Error has occurred in the bus
line between the CPU and I/O
Units or the End Cover is not
connected to the CPU Rack
or an Expansion Rack.
A40400 to A40407 contain
the error slot number (00 to
09) in binary. 0F hex indicates
that the slot cannot be deter-
mined. 0E hex indicates the
End Cover is not connected
to the CPU Rack or an
Expansion Rack.
A40408 to A40415 contain
the error rack number (00 to
03) in binary. 0F hex indicates
that the rack cannot be deter-
mined. 0E hex indicates the
End Cover is not connected
to the CPU Rack or an
Expansion Rack.
Try turning the power OFF and ON
again.
If the error isn’t corrected, turn the
power OFF and check cable connec-
tions between the I/O Units and Racks
and the End Covers.
Check for damage to the cable or Units.
Turn the Rack’s power supply OFF and
then ON again.
509
Error Processing Section 11-2
Unit/Rack
Number
Duplica-
tion error
UNIT No.
DPL ERR
80E9 A40113:
Duplication
Error Flag
A410: CPU
Bus Unit
Duplicate
Number
Flags
The same number has been
allocated to more than one
CPU Bus Unit.
Bits A41000 to A41015 corre-
spond to unit numbers 0 to F.
Check the unit numbers, eliminate the
duplications, and turn the Rack’s power
supply OFF and then ON again.
A40113:
Duplication
Error Flag
A411 to
A416: Spe-
cial I/O Unit
Duplicate
Number
Flags
The same number has been
allocated to more than one
Special I/O Unit.
Bits A41100 to A41615 corre-
spond to unit numbers 0 to
95.
Check the unit numbers, eliminate the
duplications, and turn the Rack’s power
supply OFF and then ON again.
RACK No.
DPL ERR
80EA A409:
Expansion
Rack Dupli-
cate Rack
Number
The same I/O word has been
allocated to more than one
Basic I/O Unit.
Check allocations to Units on the rack
number whose bit in ON in A40900 to
A40903. Correct the allocations so that
no words are allocated more than once,
including to Units on other Racks, and
turn the Rack’s power supply OFF and
then ON again.
An Expansion Rack’s starting
word address exceeds CIO
0901.
The corresponding bit in
A40900 to A40903 (Racks 0
to 3) will be turned ON.
Check the first word setting for the Rack
indicated in A40900 to A40903 and
change the setting to a valid word
address below CIO 0900 with a Pro-
gramming Device.
Program
error
PRO-
GRAM
ERR
80F0 A40109:
Program
Error Flag
A294 to
A299: Pro-
gram error
information
The program is incorrect. See
the following rows of this table
for details.
The address at which the pro-
gram stopped will be output
to A298 and A299.
Check A295 to determine the type of
error that occurred and check A298/
A299 to find the program address where
the error occurred.
Correct the program and then clear the
error.
A29511: No END error Be sure that there is an END(001)
instruction at the end of the task speci-
fied in A294 (program stop task num-
ber). The address where the END(001)
A29515: UM overflow error
The last address in UM (user
program memory) has been
exceeded.
Use a Programming Device to transfer
the program again.
Error Program-
ming
Console
display
Error
code (in
A400)
Flag and
word data
Probable cause Possible remedy
510
Error Processing Section 11-2
Program
error
(cont.)
PRO-
GRAM
ERR
80F0 A40109:
Program
Error Flag
A294 to
A299: Pro-
gram error
information
A29513: Differentiation over-
flow error
Too many differentiated
instructions have been
inserted or deleted during
online editing.
After writing any changes to the pro-
gram, switch to PROGRAM mode and
then return to MONITOR mode to con-
tinue editing the program.
A29512: Task error
A task error has occurred.
The following conditions will
generate a task error.
1) There isn’t an executable
cyclic task.
2) There isn’t a program allo-
cated to the task. Check
A294 for the number of the
task missing a program.
3) The task specified in a
TKON(820), TKOF(821), or
MSKS(690) instruction
doesn’t exist.
Check the startup cyclic task attributes.
Check the execution status of each task
as controlled by TKON(820) and
TKOF(821).
Make sure that all of the task numbers
specified in TKON(820), TKOF(821),
and MSKS(690) instructions have corre-
sponding tasks.
Use MSKS(690) to mask any I/O or
scheduled interrupt tasks that are not
being used and that do not have pro-
grams set for them.
A29510: Illegal access error
An illegal access error has
occurred and the PLC Setup
has been set to stop opera-
tion for an instruction error.
The following are illegal
access errors:
1. Reading/writing a parame-
ter area.
2. Writing memory that is not
installed.
3. Writing an EM bank that is
EM file memory.
4. Writing to a read-only area.
5. Indirect DM/EM address
that is not in BCD when BCD
mode is specified.
Find the program address where the
error occurred (A298/A299) and correct
the instruction.
A29509: Indirect DM/EM
BCD error
An indirect DM/EM BCD error
has occurred and the PLC
Setup has been set to stop
operation for an instruction
error.
Find the program address where the
error occurred (A298/A299) and correct
the indirect addressing or change to
binary mode.
A29508: Instruction error
An instruction processing
error has occurred and the
PLC Setup has been set to
stop operation for an instruc-
tion error.
Find the program address where the
error occurred (A298/A299) and correct
the instruction.
A29514: Illegal instruction
error
The program contains an
instruction that cannot be
executed.
Retransfer the program to the CPU Unit.
Error Program-
ming
Console
display
Error
code (in
A400)
Flag and
word data
Probable cause Possible remedy
511
Error Processing Section 11-2
To o M a ny
I/O Points
error
TOO
MANY I/O
PNT
80E1 A40111:
To o M a ny
I/O Points
Flag
A407: Too
Many I/O
Points,
Details
The probable causes are
listed below. The 3-digit
binary value (000 to 101) in
A40713 to A40715 indicates
the cause of the error. The
value of these 3 bits is also
output to A40700 to A40712.
1) The total number of I/O
points set in the I/O Table
exceeds the maximum
allowed for the CPU Unit
2) The number of Expansion
Racks exceeds the maxi-
mum (bits: 101).
3) More than 10 I/O Units are
connected to one Rack (bits:
111).
Correct the problem and then turn the
power supply OFF and back ON.
I/O Table
Setting
error
I/O SET
ERR
80E0 A40110: I/O
Setting
Error Flag
The Units that are connected
do not agree with the regis-
tered I/O table or the number
of Units that are connected
does not agree with the num-
ber in the registered I/O table.
(The following Units must be
set as a 16-point Units in the
I/O tables made on the CX-
Programmer because they
are allocated 1 word each
even though they have only 8
points: CJ1W-ID201, CJ1W-
OC201, CJ1W-IA201, CJ1W-
OA201, and CJ1W-OD201/
202/203/204. An I/O setting
error will occur if this Unit is
set as an 8-point Unit.)
Any discrepancies in the I/O table will be
detected when the I/O verification oper-
ation is performed. If this error occurs
even when the number Units is correct,
there may be a faulty Unit. Automatically
create the I/O tables and check for Units
that are not being detected.
If the number of Units is not correct, turn
OFF the power supply and correctly
connect the proper Units.
If the number of Units is correct, confirm
the Unit in discrepancy, turn OFF the
power supply, and then correct the Unit
connections.
If there is a mistake in the I/O tables,
recreate or edit them to correct the mis-
take.
An Interrupt Input Unit has
been connected in the wrong
position, i.e., not in one of the
five positions (CJ1 and CJ1-
H) or three positions (CJ1M)
next to the CPU Unit, or has
been registered in the Regis-
tered I/O Tables in the wrong
position.
A40508 will turn ON if an Interrupt Input
Unit is in the wrong position (i.e., either
physically in the wrong position in the
system or registered in the wrong posi-
tion in the Registered I/O Tables).
Mount the Unit in the correct position or
correct the Registered I/O Tables.
Error Program-
ming
Console
display
Error
code (in
A400)
Flag and
word data
Probable cause Possible remedy
512
Error Processing Section 11-2
Cycle
Time
Overrun
error
CYCLE
TIME ERR
809F A40108:
Cycle Time
Too Long
Flag
The cycle time has exceeded
the maximum cycle time
(watch cycle time) set in the
PLC Setup.
Change the program to reduce the cycle
time or change the maximum cycle time
setting.
Check the Maximum Interrupt Task Pro-
cessing Time in A440 and see if the
Cycle Time Watch Time can be
changed.
The cycle time can be reduced by divid-
ing unused parts of the program into
tasks, jumping unused instructions in
tasks, and disabling cyclic refreshing of
Special I/O Units that don’t require fre-
quent refreshing.
809F A40515:
Peripheral
Servicing
Cycle Time
Too Long
Turns ON when the periph-
eral servicing time in a Paral-
lel Processing Mode exceeds
2 s.
Change the CPU Processing Mode in
the PLC Setup to Normal Mode or
Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode, or
review the system to reduce the event
load.
Parallel processing may not be possible
if the program execution time (given in
A66) is too short (e.g., less than 0.2
ms).
System
FALS error
SYS FAIL
FALS
C101 to
C2FF
A40106:
FALS Error
Flag
FALS(007) has been exe-
cuted in the program.
The error code in A400 will
indicate the FAL number. The
leftmost digit of the code will
be C and the rightmost 3 dig-
its of the code will be from
100 to 2FF hex and will corre-
spond to FAL numbers 001 to
511.
Correct according to cause indicated by
the FAL number (set by user).
Error Program-
ming
Console
display
Error
code (in
A400)
Flag and
word data
Probable cause Possible remedy
513
Error Processing Section 11-2
Non-fatal Errors
A non-fatal error has occurred if the indicators have the following conditions in
RUN or MONITOR mode.
Connect a Programming Console to display the error message or use the
error log window on the CX-Programmer. The cause of the error can be deter-
mined from the error message and related Auxiliary Area flags and words.
Power Supply
Unit Indicator
CPU Unit Indicators
POWER RUN ERR/ALM INH PRPHL COMM
ON ON Flashing --- --- ---
514
Error Processing Section 11-2
Errors are listed in order of importance. When two or more errors occur at the
same time, the more serious error’s error code will be recorded in A400.
Error Program-
ming
Console
display
Error
code (in
A400)
Flag and
word data
Probable cause Possible remedy
System FAL
error
SYS FAIL
FAL
4101 to
42FF
A40215:
FAL Error
Flag
A360 to
A391: Exe-
cuted FAL
Number
Flags
FAL(006) has been executed
in program.
Executed FAL Number Flags
A36001 to A39115 corre-
spond to FAL numbers 001
to 511.
The error code in A400 will
indicate the FAL number.
The leftmost digit of the code
will be 4 and the rightmost 3
digits of the code will be
from 100 to 2FF hex and will
correspond to FAL numbers
001 to 511.
Correct according to cause indicated by
FAL number (set by user).
Interrupt
Task error
INTRPT
ERR
008B A40213:
Interrupt
Task Error
Flag
A426: Inter-
rupt Task
Error, Task
Number
ON when the Detect Inter-
rupt Task Errors setting in
the PLC Setup is set to
“Detect” and one of the fol-
lowing occurs for the same
Special I/O Unit.
IORF(097), FIORF(225)
(CJ1-H-R CPU Units only),
IORD(222) or IOWR(223) in
a cyclic task are competing
with FIORF(225),
IORF(097), IORD(222) or
IOWR(223) in an interrupt
task.
IORF(097), FIORF(225)
(CJ1-H-R CPU Units only),
IORD(222) or IOWR(223)
was executed in an interrupt
task when I/O was being
refreshed.
Note If cyclic refreshing is
not disabled in the
PLC Setup for a Spe-
cial I/O Unit and
IORF(097),
FIORF(225)
(CJ1-H-R CPU Units
only), IORD(222) or
IOWR(223) is exe-
cuted for the same
Special I/O Unit in an
interrupt task, a dupli-
cate refreshing status
will occur and an inter-
rupt task error will
occur.
Check the program. Either disable
detection of interrupt task errors in the
PLC Setup (address 128, bit 14) or cor-
rect the problem in the program.
515
Error Processing Section 11-2
Basic I/O
error
DENSITY
I/O ERR
009A A40212:
Basic I/O
Unit Error
Flag
A408: Basic
I/O Unit
Error, Slot
Number
An error has occurred in a
Basic I/O Unit.
A408 contains the errant
rack/slot number.
Check the errant Unit for blown fuse, etc.
PLC Setup
error
PLC Setup
ERR
009B A40210:
PLC Setup
Error Flag
A406: PLC
Setup Error
Location
There is a setting error in the
PLC Setup. The location of
the error is written to A406.
Change the indicated setting to a valid
setting.
CPU Bus
Unit error
CPU BU
ERR
0200 to
020F
A40207:
CPU Bus
Unit Error
Flag
A417: CPU
Bus Unit
Error, Unit
Number
Flags
An error occurred in a data
exchange between the CPU
Unit and a CPU Bus Unit.
The corresponding flag in
A417 is turned ON to indi-
cate the problem Unit. Bits
A41700 to A41715 corre-
spond to unit numbers 0 to F.
Check the Unit indicated in A417. Refer
to the Unit’s operation manual to find
and correct the cause of the error.
Restart the Unit by toggling its Restart
Bit or turn the power OFF and ON again.
Replace the Unit if it won’t restart.
Special I/O
Unit error
SIOU ERR 0300 to
035F, or
03FF
A40206:
Special I/O
Unit Error
Flag
A418 to
A423: Spe-
cial I/O Unit
Error, Unit
Number
Flags
An error occurred in a data
exchange between the CPU
Unit and a Special I/O Unit.
The corresponding flag in
A418 to A423 is turned ON
to indicate the problem Unit.
Bits A41800 to A42315 cor-
respond to unit numbers 0 to
95.
Check the Unit indicated in A418 to
A423. Refer to the Unit’s operation man-
ual to find and correct the cause of the
error. Restart the Unit by toggling its
Restart Bit or turn the power OFF and
ON again.
Replace the Unit if it won’t restart.
Battery
error
BATT
LOW
00F7 A40204:
Battery
Error Flag
This error occurs when the
PLC Setup has been set to
detect battery errors and the
CPU Unit’s backup battery is
missing or its voltage has
dropped.
Check battery and replace if necessary.
Change the PLC Setup setting if battery-
free operation is being used.
Error Program-
ming
Console
display
Error
code (in
A400)
Flag and
word data
Probable cause Possible remedy
516
Error Processing Section 11-2
Other Errors
Peripheral Port Communications Error
A communications error has occurred in communications with the device con-
nected to the peripheral port if the indicators have the following conditions.
Check the setting of pin 4 on the DIP switch and the peripheral port settings in
the PLC Setup. Also check the cable connections.
RS-232C Port Communications Error
A communications error has occurred in communications with the device con-
nected to the RS-232C port if the indicators have the following conditions.
Check the setting of pin 5 on the DIP switch and the RS-232C port settings in
the PLC Setup. Also check the cable connections. If a host computer is con-
nected, check the communications settings of the serial port on the host com-
puter and the communications program in the host computer.
CPU Bus
Unit Setup
error
CPU BU
ST ERR
0400 to
040F
A40203:
CPU Bus
Unit Set-
ting Error
Flag
A427: CPU
Bus Unit
Setting
Error, Unit
Number
Flags
An installed CPU Bus Unit
does not match the CPU
Bus Unit registered in the I/O
table.
The corresponding flag in
A427 will be ON. Bits 00 to
15 correspond to unit num-
bers 0 to F.
Change the registered I/O table.
Special I/O
Unit Setup
error
SIOU
SETUP
ERR
0500 to
055F
A40202:
Special I/O
Unit Set-
ting Error
Flag
A428 to
A433: Spe-
cial I/O Unit
Setting
Error, Unit
Number
Flags
An installed Special I/O Unit
does not match the Special
I/O Unit registered in the I/O
table.
The corresponding flag in
A428 to A433 will be ON.
Bits A42800 to A43315 cor-
respond to unit numbers 0 to
95.
Change the registered I/O table.
Error Program-
ming
Console
display
Error
code (in
A400)
Flag and
word data
Probable cause Possible remedy
Power Supply
Unit Indicator
CPU Unit Indicators
POWER RUN ERR/ALM INH PRPHL COMM
ON ON --- --- OFF ---
Power Supply
Unit Indicator
CPU Unit Indicators
POWER RUN ERR/ALM INH PRPHL COMM
ON --- --- --- --- OFF
517
Error Processing Section 11-2
11-2-6 Power Supply Check
The allowable voltage ranges are shown in the following table.
Power Supply Unit Power supply
voltage
Allowable voltage
range
CJ1W-PA205R 100 to 240 V AC 85 to 264 V AC
CJ1W-PA205C 100 to 240 V AC 85 to 264 V AC
CJ1W-PA202 100 to 240 V AC 85 to 264 V AC
CJ1W-PD025 24 V DC 19.2 to 28.8 V DC
CJ1W-PD022 24 V DC 21.6 to 26.4 V DC
Yes
No
Not lit Lit
Set supply voltage within
acceptable limits.
End
No
Not lit Is power indicator lit? Lit
Yes
Tighten screws or
replace wires.
No
Not lit Is power indicator lit? Lit
Yes
Power indicator not lit.
Is power being
supplied?
Power supply
voltage in acceptable
range?
Are there any
loose terminal screws or
broken wires?
Replace the Power
Supply Unit.
Connect power
supply.
Is power indicator lit?
518
Error Processing Section 11-2
11-2-7 Memory Error Check
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Memory error occurred.
A40309
(autotransfer at
startup error)
ON?
A40310 (flash
memory error)
ON?
Battery connected?
Power
turned OFF during
backup (with BKUP
lit)?
Battery-free
operation
necessary?
Conditions have not been met for
automatic transfer at startup. Confirm
that the required files are on the
Memory Card and the pin 2 on the DIP
switch is OFF.
The write life of the flash memory has
been exceeded. Replace the CPU Unit.
Check to see if battery-free operation has
been set correctly. Retransfer the user
program and parameters and set the PLC
Setup so that battery errors are not detected.
Mount a Battery.
If power was turned OFF during the backup
operation, retransfer the user program and
parameters.
A hardware fault has occurred in
internal memory. Replace the CPU
Unit.
519
Error Processing Section 11-2
11-2-8 Program Error Check
ON
OFF
#FFFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Program error occurred.
A29512 (Task
Error Flag) ON?
A29511 (No END
Flag) ON?
A29508 to A29510
(instruction error
flags) ON?
Task that stopped
program (A294)?
An active task does not exist. Check
the usage of TKON(820) and
TKOF(821).
An attempt was made to start a task that
doesn’t exist. Check the MSKS(690)
instruction used to enable the interrupt task
of the specified number.
An attempt was made to start the task of the
specified number with an interrupt. Check
the CPU Bus Unit.
There is no END(001) in the task
that stopped the program (A294).
Add END(001).
The program was stopped for the PLC
Setup setting to stop the program for
instruction errors. Check the program
based on the task (A294) and address
(A298 and A299) that stopped the program.
Turn the power supply OFF and then back
ON again.
#8002, #8003,
#8064 to #8083
Not related
to problem.
520
Error Processing Section 11-2
11-2-9 Cycle Time Too Long Error Check
11-2-10 PLC Setup Setting Error Check
Yes
No
Yes
No
The cycle time was too long.
A40515 (Peripheral
Servicing Cycle Too
Long) ON?
Anticipated cycle time
less than PLC Setup
monitor setting?
Interrupts being
used?
A440
(Maximum Interrupt
Processing Time) value
acceptable?
The peripheral servicing cycle time
exceeded 2 s. Reduce the event load
or set the CPU processing mode in
the PLC Setup to Normal Mode or
Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode.
The Parallel Processing Modes may
not function properly if the program
execution cycle time (A266) is too
short (less than 0.2 ms.)
The monitoring time was execution
time was exceed for program
execution. Increase the monitoring
time set in the PLC Setup.
The problem may be caused by long
processing times for interrupt tasks. Check
the contents of the task specified in A441
(Task with Highest Processing Time).
There may be more than one interrupt
task occurring, causing the cycle time
to be increased. Reduce the
frequency of interrupts.
There may be a bug in the program. Check
all tasks for the following instructions.
FOR and LOOP
J M P, C J P, a n d C P N
Ye s
No
Ye s
No
Not related to
problem.
#00DC(220)
PLC Setup setting error occurred.
Value of A406
(location of setting
error)?
PLC Setup written
from Programming
Console?
The CPU processing mode is set to
Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode, but
the priorities have not been set
correctly.
The setting indicated by the contents
of A406 is illegal. Check the setting
from a Programming Console.
A communications error may have occurred
during data transfer from the CX-
Programmer. Retransfer the PLC Setup.
Ye s
No
Other
521
Error Processing Section 11-2
11-2-11 Battery Error Check
11-2-12 I/O Setting Error Check
Battery error occurred.
Battery-free operation
required?
Set the PLC Setup so that battery
errors are not detected. (DM Area
contents may be unstable when this
setting is used.)
Refer to the CS/CJ Programming
Manual (W394) for details.
The Battery is missing or the voltage
has dropped. Replace the Battery.
Ye s
No
OFF
ON
Interrupt Input Unit
being used?
A40508 turned ON?
Either connect the Interrupt
Input Unit in the correct
position or register it in the I/O
tables in the correct position.
Reconnect the Units according
to the Registered I/O Tables.
Ye s
No
I/O setting error occurred.
522
Error Processing Section 11-2
11-2-13 I/O Check
The I/O check flowchart is based on the following ladder diagram section
assuming that SOL1 does not turn ON.
NORMAL
YES
NO YES YES
NORMAL YES NORMAL
NORMAL ABNORMAL
NO
NO
YES
NO NO ABNORMA
L
NO
YES
ABNORMAL
NORMAL
ABNORMAL
ABNORMAL
NORMAL
YES
NO
YES
ABNORMAL
NO
000500
000002
(LS1)
000003
(LS2)
SOL1
000500
Check LS1 and LS2
Replace Input Unit Return to START
Correctly wire Tighten
Remove external
wiring and provide
dummy input signal
to check
Operation OK?
Voltage normal?
Check terminal
voltages of 000002
and 000003 with
tester
Check output de-
vice SOL1
Check terminal
voltages of 000002
and 000003 with
tester
Voltage normal?
Indicators of
inputs (000002,
000003) normal?
Voltage normal?
Replace Output
Unit
(Unit without
fuse)
Output wiring
correct?
Voltage normal?
Check terminal
voltage of 000500
with tester
Is the blown
fuse indi-
cator lit?
Replace fuse
Correct wiring Replace terminal
block connector
Faulty terminal
block connector
contact?
START
Indicator of
000500
normal?
Disconnect external
wiring and check
terminal voltage of
000500 with tester (Units with
internal
fuse)
Replace Input Unit
Terminal
screws loose?
Faulty
terminal block
connector
contact?
Replace terminal
block connector
Operation OK?
Monitor ON/OFF
status of 000500
with Programming
Device
Input wiring
correct?
523
Error Processing Section 11-2
11-2-14 Environmental Conditions Check
Note Check for corrosive gases, flammable gases, dust, dirt, salts, metal dust,
direct light, water, oils, and chemicals.
End.
No
No
No
No
No
Environmental conditions check
Is the ambient
temperature
below 55°C?
Is the ambient
temperature
above 0°C?
Is the ambient
humidity between
10% and 90%?
Is noise being
controlled?
Is the installation
environment okay?
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
(See note.)
Check the structure
of the panel and
the installation site.
Install surge
protectors or other
noise-reducing
equipment at noise
sources.
Consider using an
air conditioner.
Consider using a
heater.
Consider using a
fan or cooler.
524
Troubleshooting Racks and Units Section 11-3
11-3 Troubleshooting Racks and Units
CPU Racks and Standard Expansion Racks
Special I/O Units
Refer to the Operation Manual for the Special I/O Unit to troubleshoot any
other errors.
Symptom Cause Remedy
POWER indicator is not lit. PCB short-circuited or damaged. Replace Power Supply Unit.
(1) Error in program. Correct program
(2) Power line is faulty. Replace Power Supply Unit.
RUN output* does not turn ON.
RUN indicator lit.
(*CJ1W-PA205R)
Internal circuitry of Power Supply Unit
is faulty.
Replace Power Supply Unit.
Serial Communications Unit or CPU
Bus Unit does not operate or malfunc-
tions.
(1) The I/O Connecting Cable is faulty.
(2) The I/O bus is faulty.
Replace the I/O Connecting Cable
Replace the I/O Control Unit or I/O
Interface Unit.
Bits do not operate past a certain point.
Error occurs in units of 8 points.
I/O bit turns ON
All bits in one Unit do not turn ON.
Symptom Cause Remedy
The ERH and RUN
indicators on the Spe-
cial I/O Unit are lit.
I/O refreshing is not being performed for the
Unit from the CPU Unit (CPU Unit monitoring
error).
It’s possible that cyclic refreshing has been dis-
abled for the Special I/O Unit in the Cyclic
Refresh Disable Setting in the PLC Setup (i.e.,
the bit corresponding to the unit number has
been set to 1).
Change the bit corresponding to the unit num-
ber to 0 to enable cyclic refreshing, or make
sure that the Unit is refreshed from the program
using IORF or FIORF (CJ1-H-R CPU Units
only) at least once every 11 s.
525
Troubleshooting Racks and Units Section 11-3
CJ Long-distance Expansion Racks
Symptom Cause Remedy
CPU Unit won’t operate. (No
response to Programming
Devices and no CPU Unit
indicators are lit.)
(1) Power is not turned ON to an Expansion
Rack.
Turn ON power to all Expansion Racks.
(2) An Expansion Rack is not connected
correctly.
Recheck the connections and configuration
using information in 2-3-3 CJ-series Expan-
sion Racks, 3-5 I/O Control Units and I/O
Interface Units.
(3) An I/O Connecting Cable is not wired
correctly.
Reconnect the I/O Connecting Cables in the
correct order for output and input connec-
tors.
(4) A Unit is faulty. Gradually remove/replace Units to deter-
mine the Unit that is faulty, including the
Power Supply Unit, I/O Units, I/O Control/
Interface Unit, and I/O Connecting Cable.
Expansion Rack not
detected.
(1) A Terminator is not connected. If the TERM indicator is lit, connect a Termi-
nator.
(2) An Expansion Rack is not connected
correctly.
Recheck the connections and configuration
using information in 2-3-3 CJ-series Expan-
sion Racks, 3-5 I/O Control Units and I/O
Interface Units.
(3) A Unit is faulty. Gradually remove/replace Units to deter-
mine the Unit that is faulty, including the
Power Supply Unit, I/O Units, I/O Control/
Interface Unit, and I/O Connecting Cable.
I/O bus error or I/O verifica-
tion error occurs.
(1) An I/O Connecting Cable or Terminator
connection is faulty.
Check that I/O Connecting Cables and Ter-
minators are connected correctly.
(2) Expansion cable is not wired correctly Rewire the terminals using the correct OUT-
IN sequence.
(3) Noise or other external factor. Separate all cables from possible sources of
noise or place them in metal ducts.
(4) A Unit is faulty. Gradually remove/replace Units to deter-
mine the Unit that is faulty, including the
Power Supply Unit, I/O Units, I/O Control/
Interface Unit, and I/O Connecting Cable.
Cycle time is too long. (1) A CPU Bus Unit that is allocated many
words (e.g., Controller Link Unit) is
mounted to a CJ Long-distance Expan-
sion Rack.
Move the CPU Bus Unit to the CPU Rack.
(2) A Unit is faulty. Gradually remove/replace Units to deter-
mine the Unit that is faulty, including the
Power Supply Unit, I/O Units, I/O Control/
Interface Unit, and I/O Connecting Cable.
I/O Control Unit and I/O Inter-
face Units do not appear on
CX-Programmer I/O table.
This is not an error. These Units are not allo-
cated I/O words and thus are not registered
in the I/O tables.
---
526
Troubleshooting Racks and Units Section 11-3
Input Units
Symptom Cause Remedy
Not all inputs turn ON or indi-
cators are not lit.
(1) Power is not supplied to Input Unit. Supply power
(2) Supply voltage is low. Adjust supply voltage to within rated range.
(3) Terminal block mounting screws are
loose.
Tighten screws.
(4) Faulty contact of terminal block connec-
tor.
Replace terminal block connector.
Not all inputs turn ON (indica-
tor lit).
Input circuit is faulty. (There is a short at the
load or something else that caused an over-
current to flow.)
Replace Unit.
Not all inputs turn OFF. Input circuit is faulty. Replace Unit.
Specific bit does not turn ON. (1) Input device is faulty. Replace input devices.
(2) Input wiring disconnected. Check input wiring
(3) Terminal block screws are loose. Tighten screws
(4) Faulty terminal block connector contact. Replace terminal block connector.
(5) Too short ON time of external input. Adjust input device
(6) Faulty input circuit Replace Unit.
(7) Input bit number is used for output
instruction.
Correct program.
Specific bit does not turn
OFF.
(1) Input circuit is faulty. Replace Unit.
(2) Input bit number is used for output
instruction.
Correct program.
Input irregularly turns ON/
OFF.
(1) External input voltage is low or unstable. Adjust external input voltage to within rated
range.
(2) Malfunction due to noise. Take protective measures against noise,
such as:
(1) Increase input response time (PLC
Setup)
(2) Install surge suppressor.
(3) Install insulation transformer.
(4) Install shielded cables between the Input
Unit and the loads.
(3) Terminal block screws are loose. Tighten screws
(4) Faulty terminal block connector contact. Replace terminal block connector.
Error occurs in units of
8 points or 16 points, i.e., for
the same common.
(1) Common terminal screws are loose. Tighten screws
(2) Faulty terminal block connector contact. Replace terminal block connector.
(3) Faulty data bus Replace Unit.
(4) Faulty CPU Replace CPU.
Input indicator is not lit in nor-
mal operation.
Faulty indicator or indicator circuit. Replace Unit.
527
Troubleshooting Racks and Units Section 11-3
Output Units
Symptom Cause Remedy
Not all outputs turn ON (1) Load is not supplied with power. Supply power
(2) Load voltage is low. Adjust voltage to within rated range.
(3) Terminal block screws are loose. Tighten screws
(4) Faulty terminal block connector contact. Replace terminal block connector.
(5) An overcurrent (possibly caused by a
short at the load) resulted in a blown
fuse in the Output Unit. (Some Output
Units provide an indicator for blown
fuses.)
Replace fuse or Unit.
(6) Faulty I/O bus connector contact. Replace Unit.
(7) Output circuit is faulty. Replace Unit.
(8) If the INH indicator is lit, the Output OFF
Bit (A50015) is ON.
Turn A50015 OFF.
Not all outputs turn OFF Output circuit is faulty. Replace Unit.
Output of a specific bit num-
ber does not turn ON or indi-
cator is not lit
(1) Output ON time too short because of a
mistake in programming.
Correct program to increase the time that
the output is ON.
(2) Bit status controlled by multiple instruc-
tions.
Correct program so that each output bit is
controlled by only one instruction.
(3) Faulty output circuit. Replace Unit.
Output of a specific bit num-
ber does not turn ON (indica-
tor lit).
(1) Faulty output device. Replace output device.
(2) Break in output wiring. Check output wiring.
(3) Loose terminal block screws. Tighten screws.
(4) Faulty terminal block connector faulty. Replace terminal block connector.
(5) Faulty output bit. Replace relay or Unit.
(6) Faulty output circuit. Replace Unit.
Output of a specific bit num-
ber does not turn OFF (indi-
cator is not lit).
(1) Faulty output bit. Replace relay or Unit.
(2) Bit does not turn OFF due to leakage
current or residual voltage.
Replace external load or add dummy resis-
tor.
Output of a specific bit num-
ber does not turn OFF (indi-
cator lit).
(1) Bit status controlled by multiple instruc-
tions.
Correct program.
(2) Faulty output circuit. Replace Unit.
Output irregularly turns ON/
OFF.
(1) Low or unstable load voltage. Adjust load voltage to within rated range
(2) Bit status controlled by multiple instruc-
tions.
Correct program so that each output bit is
controlled by only one instruction.
(3) Malfunction due to noise. Protective measures against noise:
(1) Install surge suppressor.
(2) Install insulation transformer.
(3) Use shielded cables between the Output
Unit and the loads.
(4) Terminal block screws are loose. Tighten screws.
(5) Faulty terminal block connector contact. Replace terminal block connector.
Error occurs in units of
8 points or 16 points, i.e., for
the same common.
(1) Loose common terminal screw. Tighten screws.
(2) Faulty terminal block connector contact. Replace terminal block connector.
(3) An overcurrent (possibly caused by a
short at the load) resulted in a blown
fuse in the Output Unit.
Replace fuse or Unit.
(4) Faulty data bus. Replace Unit.
(5) Faulty CPU. Replace CPU.
Output indicator is not lit
(operation is normal).
Faulty indicator. Replace Unit.
528
Troubleshooting Racks and Units Section 11-3
529
SECTION 12
Inspection and Maintenance
This section provides inspection and maintenance information.
12-1 Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
12-1-1 Inspection Points. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
12-1-2 Unit Replacement Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
12-2 Replacing User-serviceable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
530
Inspections Section 12-1
12-1 Inspections
Daily or periodic inspections are required in order to maintain the PLC’s func-
tions in peak operating condition.
12-1-1 Inspection Points
Although the major components in CJ-series PLCs have an extremely long life
time, they can deteriorate under improper environmental conditions. Periodic
inspections are thus required to ensure that the required conditions are being
kept.
Inspection is recommended at least once every six months to a year, but more
frequent inspections will be necessary in adverse environments.
Take immediate steps to correct the situation if any of the conditions in the fol-
lowing table are not met.
No. Item Inspection Criteria Action
1 Source Power
Supply
Check for voltage fluctuations
at the power supply terminals.
The voltage must be within
the allowable voltage fluctu-
ation range.
(See note.)
Use a voltage tester to check the
power supply at the terminals. Take
necessary steps to bring voltage
fluctuations within limits.
2 I/O Power Sup-
ply
Check for voltage fluctuations
at the I/O terminals.
Voltages must be within
specifications for each Unit.
Use a voltage tester to check the
power supply at the terminals. Take
necessary steps to bring voltage
fluctuations within limits.
3 Ambient environ-
ment
Check the ambient tempera-
ture. (Inside the control panel
if the PLC is in a control
panel.)
0 to 55°C Use a thermometer to check the
temperature and ensure that the
ambient temperature remains
within the allowed range of 0 to
55°C.
Check the ambient humidity.
(Inside the control panel if the
PLC is in a control panel.)
Relative humidity must be
10% to 90% with no con-
densation.
Use a hygrometer to check the
humidity and ensure that the ambi-
ent humidity remains within the
allowed range.
Check that the PLC is not in
direct sunlight.
Not in direct sunlight Protect the PLC if necessary.
Check for accumulation of
dirt, dust, salt, metal filings,
etc.
No accumulation Clean and protect the PLC if neces-
sary.
Check for water, oil, or chemi-
cal sprays hitting the PLC.
No spray on the PLC Clean and protect the PLC if neces-
sary.
Check for corrosive or flam-
mable gases in the area of the
PLC.
No corrosive or flammable
gases
Check by smell or use a sensor.
Check the level of vibration or
shock.
Vibration and shock must
be within specifications.
Install cushioning or shock absorb-
ing equipment if necessary.
Check for noise sources near
the PLC.
No significant noise
sources
Either separate the PLC and noise
source or protect the PLC.
531
Inspections Section 12-1
Note The following table shows the allowable voltage fluctuation ranges for source
power supplies.
Tools Required for Inspections
Required Tools
• Slotted and Phillips-head screwdrivers
• Voltage tester or digital voltmeter
• Industrial alcohol and clean cotton cloth
Tools Required Occasionally
• Synchroscope
• Oscilloscope with pen plotter
• Thermometer and hygrometer (humidity meter)
12-1-2 Unit Replacement Precautions
Check the following after replacing any faulty Unit.
• Do not replace a Unit until the power is turned OFF.
• Check the new Unit to make sure that there are no errors.
• If a faulty Unit is being returned for repair, describe the problem in as
much detail as possible, enclose this description with the Unit, and return
the Unit to your OMRON representative.
• For poor contact, take a clean cotton cloth, soak the cloth in industrial
alcohol, and carefully wipe the contacts clean. Be sure to remove any lint
prior to remounting the Unit.
Note 1. When replacing a CPU Unit, be sure that not only the user program but
also all other data required for operation is transferred to or set in the new
CPU Unit before starting operation, including DM Area and HR Area set-
4 Installation and
wiring
Check that each Unit is con-
nected and locked to the next
Unit securely.
No looseness Press the connectors together
completely and lock them with the
sliders.
Check that cable connectors
are fully inserted and locked.
No looseness Correct any improperly installed
connectors.
Check for loose screws in
external wiring.
No looseness Tighten loose screws with a Phil-
lips-head screwdriver.
Check crimp connectors in
external wiring.
Adequate spacing between
connectors
Check visually and adjust if neces-
sary.
Check for damaged external
wiring cables.
No damage Check visually and replace cables if
necessary.
5 User-service-
able parts
Check whether the battery
has reached its service life.
CJ1 and CJ1-H CPU Units:
CJ1W-BAT01
CJ1M CPU Units:
CJ1W-BAT01 Battery
Service life expectancy is 5
years at 25°C, less at
higher temperatures.
(From 0.75 to 5 years
depending on model,
power supply rate, and
ambient temperature.)
Replace the battery when its ser-
vice life has passed even if a bat-
tery error has not occurred.
(Battery life depends upon the
model, the percentage of time in
service, and ambient conditions.)
Power Supply Unit Supply voltage Allowable voltage range
CJ1W-PA205R/PA205C 100 to 240 V AC 85 to 264 V AC
(+10%/−15%)
CJ1W-PA202
CJ1W-PD025 24 V DC 19.2 to 28.8 V DC (±20%)
CJ1W-PD022 21.6 to 26.4 V DC (±10%)
No. Item Inspection Criteria Action
532
Replacing User-serviceable Parts Section 12-2
tings. If data area and other data are not correct for the user program, un-
expected accidents may occur. Be sure to include the routing tables,
Controller Link Unit data link tables, network parameters, and other CPU
Bus Unit data, which are stored as parameters in the CPU Unit. Refer to
the CPU Bus Unit and Special I/O Unit operation manuals for details on the
data required by each Unit.
2. The simple backup operation can be used to store the user program and
all parameters for the CJ1-H CPU Unit, DeviceNet Units, Serial Communi-
cations Units, and other specific Units in a Memory Card as backup files.
A Memory Card and the simple backup operation can be used to easily re-
store data after replacing any of these Units. Refer to the CS/CJ Series
Programming Manual (W394) for details.
12-2 Replacing User-serviceable Parts
The following parts should be replaced periodically as preventative mainte-
nance. The procedures for replacing these parts are described later in this
section.
• Battery (backup for the CPU Unit’s internal clock and RAM)
Battery Functions The battery maintains the internal clock and the following data of the CPU
Unit’s RAM while the main power supply is OFF.
• Retained regions of I/O memory
If the battery is not installed or battery voltage drops too low, the internal clock
will stop and the data in RAM will not be stable when the main power supply
goes OFF.
Battery Service Life and
Replacement Period
At 25°C, the maximum service life for batteries is five years whether or not
power is supplied to the CPU Unit while the battery is installed. The battery’s
lifetime will be shorter when it is used at higher temperatures and when power
is not supplied to the CPU Unit for long periods.
The following table shows the approximate minimum lifetimes and typical life-
times for the backup battery (total time with power not supplied).
Model Approx.
maximum
lifetime
Approx. minimum
lifetime
(See note.)
Typical lifetime
(See note.)
CJ1H-CPU@@H-R 5 years 6,500 hours (0.75 years) 43,000 hours (5 years)
CJ1@-CPU@@H 5 years 6,500 hours (0.75 years) 43,000 hours (5 years)
CJ1G-CPU@@ 5 years 6,500 hours (0.75 years) 43,000 hours (5 years)
CJ1M-CPU@@ 5 years 13,000 hours (1.5 years) 43,000 hours (5 years)
533
Replacing User-serviceable Parts Section 12-2
Note The minimum lifetime is the memory backup time at an ambient temperature
of 55°C. The typical lifetime is the memory backup time at an ambient temper-
ature of 25°C.
Low Battery Indicators If the PLC Setup has been set to detect a low-battery error, the ERR/ALM
indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash when the battery is nearly dis-
charged.
When the ERR/ALM indicator flashes, connect a Programming Console to the
peripheral port and read the error message. If the message “BATT LOW”
appears on the Programming Console* and the Battery Error Flag (A40204) is
ON*, first check whether the battery is properly connected to the CPU Unit. If
the battery is properly connected, replace the battery as soon as possible.
Once a low-battery error has been detected, it will take 5 days before the bat-
tery fails assuming that power has been supplied at lease once a day. Battery
failure and the resulting loss of data in RAM can be delayed by ensuring that
the CPU Unit power is not turned OFF until the battery has been replaced.
Note 1. *The PLC Setup must be set to detect a low-battery error (Detect Low Bat-
tery). If this setting has not been made, the BATT LOW error message will
not appear on the Programming Console and the Battery Error Flag
(A40204) will not go ON when the battery fails.
2. The battery will discharge faster at higher temperatures, e.g., 4 days at
40°C and 2 days at 55°C.
Memory Backup Time
Ambient temperature
This graphic is for reference only.
5 yr
4 yr
3 yr
2 yr
1 yr
25°C40°C55°C
CJ1M-CPU@@
CJ1H-CPU@@H-R
CJ1@-CPU@@H
CJ1G-CPU@@
BATT LOW
534
Replacing User-serviceable Parts Section 12-2
Replacement Battery Use the CPM2A-BAT01 (for CJ1 and CJ1-H) or CJ1W-BAT01 (for CJ1M) Bat-
tery Set. Be sure to install a replacement battery within two years of the pro-
duction date shown on the battery’s label.
CJ1 and CJ1-H CPU Units
CJ1M CPU Units
Replacement Procedure Use the following procedure to replace the battery when the previous battery
has become completely discharged. You must complete this procedure within
five minutes after turning OFF the power to the CPU Unit to ensure memory
backup.
Note 1. We recommend replacing the battery with the power OFF to prevent the
CPU Unit’s sensitive internal components from being damaged by static
electricity. The battery can be replaced without turning OFF the power sup-
ply. To do so, always touch a grounded piece of metal to discharge static
electricity from your body before starting the procedure.
2. After replacing the battery, connect a Programming Device and clear the
battery error.
Procedure
1,2,3... 1. Turn OFF the power to the CPU Unit.
or If the CPU Unit has not been ON, turn it ON for at least five minutes and
then turn it OFF.
Note If power is not turned ON for at least five minutes before replacing the
battery, the capacitor that backs up memory when the battery is re-
moved will not be fully charged and memory may not be stable before
the new battery is inserted.
2. Open the compartment on the upper left of the CPU Unit and carefully
draw out the battery.
3. Remove the battery connector.
4. Connect the new battery, place it into the compartment, and close the cov-
er.
CPM2A-BAT01
01-04
Production Date
Manufactured in April 2001.
CJ1W-BAT01
02-06
Production Date
Manufactured in June 2002.
535
Replacing User-serviceable Parts Section 12-2
The battery error will automatically be cleared when a new battery is inserted.
!WARNING Never short-circuit the battery terminals; never charge the battery; never dis-
assemble the battery; and never heat or incinerate the battery. Doing any of
these may cause the battery to leak, burn, or rupturing resulting in injury, fire,
and possible loss of life or property. Also, never use a battery that has been
dropped on the floor or otherwise subject to shock. It may leak.
UL standards require that batteries be replaced by experienced technicians.
Always place an experienced technician in charge or battery replacement.
!Caution Turn ON the power after replacing the battery for a CPU Unit that has been
unused for a long time. Leaving the CPU Unit unused again without turning
ON the power even once after the battery is replaced may result in a shorter
battery life.
536
Replacing User-serviceable Parts Section 12-2
537
Appendix A
Specifications of Basic I/O Units
Basic Input Units
Note Although 16 I/O bits (1 word) are allocated, only 8 of these can be used for external I/O. This Unit is also
treated as a 16-point I/O Unit in the I/O tables.
Basic Mixed I/O Units
Name Specifications Model Number of
input bits
allocated
Page
DC Input Units Terminal block 12 to 24 V DC CJ1W-ID201 8 (16)
(See note.)
539
Terminal block, 24 V DC, 16 inputs CJ1W-ID211 16 540
Fujitsu-compatible connector, CJ1W-ID231 32 542
MIL connector, 24 V DC CJ1W-ID232 32 543
Fujitsu-compatible connector, 24 V DC CJ1W-ID261 64 545
MIL connector, 24 V DC CJ1W-ID262 64 547
AC Input Units Terminal block, 200 to 240 V AC CJ1W-IA201 8 (16)
(See note.)
548
Terminal block, 100 to 120 V AC CJ1W-IA111 16 549
Interrupt Input
Unit
Terminal block, 24 V DC CJ1W-INT01 16 550
Quick-response
Input Unit
Terminal block, 24 V DC CJ1W-IDP01 16 551
Name Specifications Model Number
of bits
allocated
Page
24-V DC
Inputs/
Transis-
tor Out-
put Units
Sinking
output
Fujitsu-compatible connector
Inputs: 24 V DC
Outputs: 12 to 24 V DC, 0.5 A, sinking
CJ1W-MD231 16 input
16 output
553
MIL connector
Inputs: 24 V DC
Outputs: 12 to 24 V DC, 0.5 A, sinking
CJ1W-MD233 555
Fujitsu-compatible connector
Inputs: 24 V DC
Outputs: 12 to 24 V DC, 0.3 A, sinking
CJ1W-MD261 32 input
32 output
559
MIL connector
Inputs: 24 V DC
Outputs: 12 to 24 V DC, 0.3 A, sinking
CJ1W-MD263 561
Sourcing
output
MIL connector
Input: 24 V DC
Outputs: 24 V DC, 0.5 A, load short-circuit
protection
CJ1W-MD232 16 input
16 output
557
TTL I/O Units Inputs: 5 V DC
Outputs: 5 V DC, 35 mA
CJ1W-MD563 32 input
32 output
563
538
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
Basic Output Units
Note 1. For details on the connectors included with the Unit, refer to the information provided under Acces-
sories in the tables for Basic I/O Units in the following pages.
2. Although 16 I/O bits (1 word) are allocated, only 8 of these can be used for external I/O. This Unit is
also treated as a 16-point I/O Unit in the I/O tables.
Reading Terminal Connection Diagrams
• I/O terminals in terminal connection diagrams are shown as viewed from the front panel of the Unit.
• Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on all Units.
• A0 to A20 and B0 to B20 are printed on the Units.
Name Specifications Model Number
of bits
allocated
Page
Relay Output Units Terminal block, 250 V AC/24 V DC, 2 A, inde-
pendent contacts
CJ1W-OC201 8 (16)
(See note
2.)
565
Terminal block, 250 V AC/24 V DC, 2 A CJ1W-OC211 16 566
Triac Output Unit Terminal block, 250 V AC, 0.6 A/24 V DC, CJ1W-OA201 8 (16)
(See note
2.)
567
Transis-
tor Out-
put Units
Sinking
outputs
Terminal block, 12 to 24 V DC, 2 A CJ1W-OD201 8 (16)
(See note
2.)
568
Terminal block, 12 to 24 V DC, 0.5 A CJ1W-OD203 8 (16)
(See note
2.)
569
Terminal block, 12 to 24 V DC, 0.5 A CJ1W-OD211 16 570
Fujitsu-compatible connector, 12 to 24 V DC,
0.5 A
CJ1W-OD231 32 571
MIL connector, 12 to 24 V DC, 0.5 A CJ1W-OD233 32 574
Fujitsu-compatible connector, 12 to 24 V DC,
0.3 A
CJ1W-OD261 64 575
MIL connector, 12 to 24 V DC, 0.3 A CJ1W-OD263 64 577
Sourcing
outputs
Terminal block, 24 V DC, 2 A, load short-cir-
cuit protection, line disconnection detection
CJ1W-OD202 8 (16)
(See note
2.)
578
Terminal block, 24 V DC, 0.5 A, load short-
circuit protection
CJ1W-OD204 8 (16)
(See note
2.)
579
Terminal block, 24 V DC, 0.5 A, load short-
circuit protection
CJ1W-OD212 16 580
MIL connector, 24 V DC, 0.5 A, load short-
circuit protection
CJ1W-OD232 32 581
MIL connector, 12 to 24 V DC, 0.3 A CJ1W-OD262 64 584
About Contact Output Units 586
Load Short-circuit Protection and Line Disconnection Detection for CJ1W-OD202 588
Load short-circuit protection for CJ1W-OD204/OD212/OD232/MD232 590
539
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
CJ1W-ID201 12 to 24-V DC Input Unit (Terminal Block, 8 Points)
Circuit Configuration
Rated Input Voltage 12 to 24 V DC
Rated Input Voltage Range 10.2 to 26.4 V DC
Input Impedance 2.4 kΩ
Input Current 10 mA typical (at 24 V DC)
ON Voltage/ON Current 8.8 V DC min./3 mA min.
OFF Voltage/OFF Current 3 V DC max./1 mA max.
ON Response Time 8.0 ms max. (Possible to set to between 0 and
32 ms in the PLC Setup.)
OFF Response Time 8.0 ms max. (Possible to set to between 0 and
32 ms using PLC Setup)
Number of Circuits 8 (each common)
Number of Simultaneously ON
Points
100% simultaneously ON
Insulation Resistance 20 MΩ between external terminals and the GR ter-
minal (100 V DC)
Dielectric Strength 1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
Internal Current Consumption 5 V DC: 80 mA max.
Weight 110 g max.
560 Ω
COM7
IN07 2.4 kΩ
1000pF
560 Ω
COM0
IN00 2.4 kΩ
1000 pF
Input indicator
Internal circuits
Input indicator
Internal circuits
to
540
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
Terminal Connections
Polarity of the input power supply can be connected in either direction.
Note 1. The ON response time will be 20 µs maximum and OFF response time will be 400 µs maximum even
if the response time are set to 0 ms due to internal element delays.
2. Although 16 I/O bits (1 word) are allocated, only 8 of these can be used for external I/O. This Unit is
also treated as a 16-point I/O Unit in the I/O tables.
3. Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.
CJ1W-ID211 24-V DC Input Unit (Terminal Block, 16 Points)
B1
C0
B2
1
B3
2
B4
3
B5
4
B6
5
B7
6
B8
7
NC
0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
NC
B0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A0
12 to 24 V DC
Rated Input Voltage 24 V DC
Rated Input Voltage Range 20.4 to 26.4 V DC
Input Impedance 3.3 kΩ
Input Current 7 mA typical (at 24 V DC)
ON Voltage/ON Current 14.4 V DC min./3 mA min.
OFF Voltage/OFF Current 5 V DC max./1 mA max.
ON Response Time 8.0 ms max. (Possible to set to between 0 and
32 ms in the PLC Setup.)
OFF Response Time 8.0 ms max. (Possible to set to between 0 and
32 ms using PLC Setup)
Number of Circuits 16 (16 points/common, 1 circuit)
Number of Simultaneously ON
Points
100% simultaneously ON (at 24 V DC) (Refer to the
following illustration.)
Insulation Resistance 20 MΩ between external terminals and the GR ter-
minal (100 V DC)
Dielectric Strength 1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
Internal Current Consumption 5 V DC: 80 mA max.
Weight 110 g max.
541
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
Circuit Configuration
Terminal Connections
Note 1. The ON response time will be 20 µs maximum and OFF response time will be 400 µs maximum even
if the response time are set to 0 ms due to internal element delays.
2. Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.
IN00
to
IN15
COM
COM
3.3 kΩ470 Ω
1000 pF
Input indicator
Internal circuits
Temperature characteristics for simultaneously ON points
16 points at 45°C.
12 points at 55°C.
Input voltage: 26.4 V DC
No. of simultaneously ON points
Ambient temperature
24 V DC
Polarity of the input power supply can be connected in either direction.
542
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
CJ1W-ID231 DC Input Unit (Fujitsu Connector, 32 Points)
Circuit Configuration
Rated Input Voltage 24 V DC
Rated Input Voltage Range 20.4 to 26.4 V DC
Input Impedance 5.6 kΩ
Input Current 4.1 mA typical (at 24 V DC)
ON Voltage/ON Current 19.0 V DC min./3 mA min.
OFF Voltage/OFF Current 5 V DC max./1 mA max.
ON Response Time 8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between 0 and 32 in the
PLC Setup.)
OFF Response Time 8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between 0 and 32 in the
PLC Setup)
Number of Circuits 32 (16 points/common, 2 circuits)
Number of Simultaneously ON
Points
75% (12 points/common) (at 24 V DC) (Refer to the
following illustration.)
Insulation Resistance 20 MΩ between external terminals and the GR ter-
minal (100 V DC)
Dielectric Strength 1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
Internal Current Consumption 5 V DC: 90 mA max.
Weight 70 g max.
Accessories None
5.6 kΩ
5.6 kΩ
to
to
1000 pF
Input indicator
Internal circuits
1000 pF
Number of Simultaneously ON Points vs.
Ambient Temperature Characteristic
32 points at 40°C32 points at 48°C
Input voltage: 24 V DC
Input voltage: 26.4 V DC
12 points/common at 55°C
10 points/common at 55°C
Number of simultaneously ON points
Ambient Temperature
543
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
Terminal Connections
• The input power polarity can be connected in either direction.
• Be sure to wire both terminals A9 and A18 (COM0), and set the same polarity for both pins.
• Be sure to wire both terminals B9 and B18 (COM1), and set the same polarity for both pins.
Note The ON response time will be 20 µs maximum and OFF response time will be 300 µs maximum even if
the response times are set to 0 ms due to internal element delays.
CJ1W-ID232 DC Input Unit (MIL Connector, 32 Points)
1
0
2
1
3
2
4
3
5
4
6
5
7
6
8
7
9
COM0
10
8
11
9
12
10
13
11
14
12
15
13
16
14
17
15
18
COM0
19
NC
20
NC
Wd m+1
Wd m
24 V
DC
1
0
2
1
3
2
4
3
5
4
6
5
7
6
8
7
9
COM1
10
8
11
9
12
10
13
11
14
12
15
13
16
14
17
15
18
COM1
19
NC
20
NC
AB
24 V
DC
Rated Input Voltage 24 V DC
Rated Input Voltage Range 20.4 to 26.4 V DC
Input Impedance 5.6 kΩ
Input Current 4.1 mA typical (at 24 V DC)
ON Voltage/ON Current 19.0 V DC min./3 mA min.
OFF Voltage/OFF Current 5 V DC max./1 mA max.
ON Response Time 8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between 0 and 32 in the
PLC Setup.)
OFF Response Time 8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between 0 and 32 in the
PLC Setup)
Number of Circuits 32 (16 points/common, 2 circuits)
Number of Simultaneously ON
Points
75% (12 points/common) (at 24 V DC) (Refer to the
following illustration.)
Insulation Resistance 20 MΩ between external terminals and the GR ter-
minal (100 V DC)
Dielectric Strength 1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
Internal Current Consumption 5 V DC: 90 mA max.
Weight 70 g max.
Accessories None
544
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
Circuit Configuration
Terminal Connections
5.6 kΩ
5.6 kΩ
1000 pF
to
to
Input indicator
Internal circuits
1000 pF
560 Ω
560 Ω
Number of Simultaneously ON Points vs.
Ambient Temperature Characteristic
32 points at 40°C32 points at 48°C
Input voltage: 24 V DC
Input voltage: 26.4 V DC
12 points/common at 55°C
10 points/common at 55°C
Number of simultaneously ON points
Ambient Temperature
24 V DC
24 V DC
m+1 words
m words
545
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
• The input power polarity can be connected in either direction.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 23 and 24 (COM0), and set the same polarity for both pins.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 3 and 4 (COM1), and set the same polarity for both pins.
Note The ON response time will be 20 µs maximum and OFF response time will be 300 µs maximum even if
the response times are set to 0 ms due to internal element delays.
CJ1W-ID261 DC Input Unit (Fujitsu Connectors, 64 Points)
Circuit Configuration
Rated Input Voltage 24 V DC
Rated Input Voltage Range 20.4 to 26.4 V DC
Input Impedance 5.6 kΩ
Input Current 4.1 mA typical (at 24 V DC)
ON Voltage/ON Current 19.0 V DC min./3 mA min.
OFF Voltage/OFF Current 5 V DC max./1 mA max.
ON Response Time 8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between 0 and 32 in the
PLC Setup.)
OFF Response Time 8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between 0 and 32 in the
PLC Setup.)
Number of Circuits 64 (16 points/common, 4 circuits)
Number of Simultaneously ON
Points
50% (16 points/common) (at 24 V DC) (Refer to the
following illustrations.)
Insulation Resistance 20 MΩ between external terminals and the GR ter-
minal (100 V DC)
Dielectric Strength 1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
Internal Current Consumption 5 V DC: 90 mA max.
Weight 110 g max.
Accessories None
to
to
to
to
5.6 kΩ
1000 pF
560 Ω
5.6 kΩ
1000 pF
560 Ω
Input indicator
Indicator
switching
circuit
Internal circuits Internal circuits
546
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
Terminal Connections
• The input power polarity can be connected in either direction.
• Be sure to wire both terminals A9 and A18 (COM0) of CN1, and set the same polarity for both pins.
• Be sure to wire both terminals B9 and B18 (COM1) of CN1, and set the same polarity for both pins.
• Be sure to wire both terminals A9 and A18 (COM2) of CN2, and set the same polarity for both pins.
• Be sure to wire both terminals B9 and B18 (COM3) of CN2, and set the same polarity for both pins.
Note The ON response time will be 120 µs maximum and OFF response time will be 400 µs maximum even if
the response times are set to 0 ms due to internal element delays.
Ambient Temperature
8 points/common
(total: 26 points max.) at 55°C
8 points/common at 55°C
12 points/common
(total: 45 points) at 55°C
Input voltage: 20.4 V DC
Input voltage: 26.4 V DC
Input voltage: 24 V DC
Number of simultaneously ON points
N
um
b
er o
f
Si
mu
l
taneous
l
y
ON
P
o
i
nts vs.
Ambient Temperature Characteristic
64 points
at 25°C
64 points
at 35°C
64 points
at 47°C
24 V
DC
24 V
DC
24 V
DC
24 V
DC
I/O word "m"I/O word "m+1" I/O word "m+3"I/O word "m+2"
547
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
CJ1W-ID262 DC Input Unit (MIL Connectors, 64 Points)
Circuit Configuration
Rated Input Voltage 24 V DC
Rated Input Voltage Range 20.4 to 26.4 V DC
Input Impedance 5.6 kΩ
Input Current 4.1 mA typical (at 24 V DC)
ON Voltage/ON Current 19.0 V DC min./3 mA min.
OFF Voltage/OFF Current 5 V DC max./1 mA max.
ON Response Time 8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between 0 and 32 in the
PLC Setup.)
OFF Response Time 8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between 0 and 32 in the
PLC Setup.)
Number of Circuits 64 (16 points/common, 4 circuits)
Number of Simultaneously ON
Points
50% (8 points/common) (at 24 V DC) (Refer to the
following illustrations.)
Insulation Resistance 20 MΩ between external terminals and the GR ter-
minal (100 V DC)
Dielectric Strength 1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
Internal Current Consumption 5 V DC: 90 mA max.
Weight 110 g max.
Accessories None
to
to
to
to
5.6 kΩ
1000 pF
560 Ω
5.6 kΩ
1000 pF
560 Ω
Input indicator
Indicator
switching
circuit
Internal circuits Internal circuits
Ambient Temperature
8 points/common
(total: 26 points max.) at 55°C
8 points/common at 55°C
12 points/common
(total: 45 points) at 55°C
Input voltage: 20.4 V DC
Input voltage: 26.4 V DC
Input voltage: 24 V DC
Number of simultaneously ON points
N
um
b
er o
f
Si
mu
l
taneous
l
y
ON
P
o
i
nts vs.
Ambient Temperature Characteristic
64 points
at 25°C
64 points
at 35°C
64 points
at 47°C
548
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
Terminal Connections
• The input power polarity can be connected in either direction.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 23 and 24 (COM0) of CN1, and set the same polarity for both pins.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 3 and 4 (COM1) of CN1, and set the same polarity for both pins.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 23 and 24 (COM2) of CN2, and set the same polarity for both pins.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 3 and 4 (COM3) of CN2, and set the same polarity for both pins.
Note The ON response time will be 120 µs maximum and OFF response time will be 400 µs maximum even if
the response times are set to 0 ms due to internal element delays.
CJ1W-IA201 DC Input Unit (Terminal Block, 8 Points)
1
NC
3
5
15
7
14
9
13
11
12
13
11
15
10
17
19
2
21
23
25
27
15
29
14
31
13
33
12
35
11
37
NC
39
24 V DC
2
4
NC
6
8
7
10
6
12
5
14
4
16
3
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
10
32
34
36
38
40
24 V DC
NC
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
9
8
9
0
1
CN1
40 0
38 1
36 2
34 3
32 4
30 5
28 6
26 7
24
22
15
20 0
1
14
2
3
4
8
5
6
6
4
NC
2
24 V DC
39
37
8
35
9
33
10
31
11
29
12
13
25
14
23
21
8
9
10
11
12
7
9
7
14
5
15
3
NC 1
COM3
24 V DC
NC NC
CN2
27
COM2 COM2
19
17 18
16
15
13
11 12
10
13
COM3
COM0 COM0
COM1
COM1
I/O word m
I/O word
m+1 I/O word
m+2
I/O word
m+3
Rated Input Voltage 200 to 240 V AC+10%/–15% 50/60 Hz
Rated Input Voltage Range 170 to 264 V AC
Input Impedance 21 kΩ (50 Hz), 18 kΩ (60 Hz)
Input Current 9 mA typical (at 200 V AC, 50 Hz),
11 mA typical (at 200 V AC, 60 Hz)
ON Voltage/ON Current 120 V AC min./4 mA min.
OFF Voltage/OFF Current 40 V AC max./2 mA max.
ON Response Time 18.0 ms max. (PLC Setup default setting: 8 ms)
(See note.)
OFF Response Time 48.0 ms max. (PLC Setup default setting: 8 ms)
(See note.)
Number of Circuits 8 (8 points/common)
Number of Simultaneously ON
Points
100% (8 points/common)
Insulation Resistance 20 MΩ between external terminals and the GR ter-
minal (500 V DC)
Dielectric Strength 2,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
Internal Current Consumption 5 V DC: 80 mA max.
Weight 130 g max.
Accessories None
549
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
Note 1. The Input ON and OFF response times for Basic I/O Units can be set to 0 ms, 0.5 ms, 1 ms, 2 ms,
4 ms, 8 ms, 16 ms, or 32 ms in the PLC Setup. When the response times have been set to 0 ms, the
ON response time will be 10 ms maximum and the OFF response time will be 40 ms maximum due
to internal element delays.
2. Although 16 I/O bits (1 word) are allocated, only 8 of these can be used for external I/O. This Unit is
also treated as a 16-point I/O Unit in the I/O tables.
Circuit Configuration
Terminal Connections
Note Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.
CJ1W-IA111 100-V AC Input Unit (16 points)
Note The Input ON and OFF response times for Basic I/O Units can be set to 0 ms, 0.5 ms, 1 ms, 2 ms, 4 ms,
8 ms, 16 ms, or 32 ms in the PLC Setup. When the response times have been set to 0 ms, the ON
response time will be 10 ms maximum and the OFF response time will be 40 ms maximum due to inter-
nal element delays.
COM
IN0
IN7
820 Ω1 MΩ
0.15 µF220 Ω
to
Input indicator
Internal circuits
0
1
2
3
5
6
7
4
COM
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B1
B0
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
200 to 240 V AC
Rated input voltage 100 to 120 V AC 50/60 Hz
Rated Input Voltage Range 85 to 132 V AC
Input Impedance 14.5 kΩ (50 Hz), 12 kΩ (60 Hz)
Input Current 7 mA typical (at 100 V AC, 50 Hz),
8 mA typical (at 100 V AC, 60 Hz)
ON Voltage 70 V AC min./4 mA min
OFF Voltage 20 V AC max./2 mA min
ON Response Time 18 ms max. (PLC Setup default setting: 8 ms) (See
note.)
OFF Response Time 63 ms max. (PLC Setup default setting: 8 ms) (See
note.)
Number of Circuits 16 (16 points/common)
Number of Inputs ON Simulta-
neously
100% simultaneously ON (16 points/common)
Insulation Resistance 20 MΩ between external terminals and the GR termi-
nal (500 V DC)
Dielectric Strength 2,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
Internal Current Consumption 5 V DC: 90 mA max.
Weight 130 g max.
550
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
Circuit Layout
Terminal Connections
Note 1. Use an input voltage of 90 V AC or less when connecting 2-wire sensors.
2. Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.
CJ1W-INT01 Interrupt Input Unit (16 Points)
Circuit Configuration
• Up to two Interrupt Input Units can be mounted to the CPU Rack, but they must be connected as one the
five Unit immediately next to the CPU Unit. If an Interrupt Input Unit is connected in any other position, an
I/O setting error will occur.
• Interrupts cannot be used when an Interrupt Input Unit is mounted to an Expansion Rack.
COM
IN0
IN15
470 Ω1 MΩ
0.22 µF270 Ω
to
Input indicator
Internal circuits
A8
0
2
4
6
10
12
14
8
1
3
5
7
COM
11
13
15
9
COM
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
B0
100 to 120 V AC
Rated Input Voltage 24 V DC
Rated Input Voltage Range 20.4 to 26.4 V DC
Input Impedance 3.3 kΩ
Input Current 7 mA typical (at 24 V DC)
ON Voltage/ON Current 14.4 V DC min./3 mA min.
OFF Voltage/OFF Current 5 V DC max./1 mA max.
ON Response Time 0.05 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.5 ms max.
Number of Circuits 16 (16 points/common)
Number of Simultaneously ON
Points
100% simultaneously ON (24 V DC)
Insulation Resistance 20 MΩ between external terminals and GR terminal
(at 100 V DC)
Dielectric Strength 1,000 V AC between external terminals and GR ter-
minal for 1 minute at a leakage current of 10 mA
max.
Internal Current Consumption 5 V DC: 80 mA max.
Weight 110 g max.
ON
OFF
IN00
IN 15
COM
COM
3.3 kΩ
1000 pF
470 Ω
to
0.5 ms
min.
Internal circuits
0.05 ms
min.
551
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
• Set the pulse width of signals input to the Interrupt Input Unit so they satisfy the above conditions.
Terminal Connections
Note Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.
CJ1W-IDP01 Quick-response Input Unit (16 Points)
Temperature characteristics for simultaneously ON points
16 points at 45°C.
12 points at 55°C.
Input voltage: 26.4 V DC
No. of simultaneously ON points
Ambient temperature
A8
0
2
4
6
10
12
14
8
1
3
5
7
COM
11
13
15
9
COM
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
B0
24 V DC
The polarity can be connected in either direction.
Rated Input Voltage 24 V DC
Rated Input Voltage Range 20.4 to 26.4 V DC
Input Impedance 3.3 kΩ
Input Current 7 mA typical (at 24 V DC)
ON Voltage/ON Current 14.4 V DC min./3 mA min.
OFF Voltage/OFF Current 5 V DC max./1 mA max.
ON Response Time 0.05 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.5 ms max.
Number of Circuits 16 (16 points/common)
Number of Simultaneously
ON Points
100% simultaneously ON (24 V DC)
Insulation Resistance 20 MΩ between external terminals and GR terminal
(at 100 V DC)
Dielectric Strength 1,000 V AC between external terminals and GR ter-
minal for 1 minute at a leakage current of 10 mA
max.
Internal Current Consumption 5 V DC: 80 mA max.
Weight 110 g max.
Accessories None
552
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
Circuit Configuration
Terminal Connections
• The input power supply polarity can be connected in either direction.
• With quick-response inputs, pulse inputs shorter than the CPU Unit’s cycle time can be read by the CPU
Unit.
• The pulse width (ON time) that can be read by the Quick-response Input Unit is 0.05 ms.
• Inputs read by the internal circuits are cleared when inputs are refreshed.
Note Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0010 20 30 40 50 60
Number of
simultaneously ON points
Input voltage:
26.4 V DC
Ambient temperature
16 pt s.,
45 ˚C
12 pt s.,
55 ˚C
3.3 kΩ470 Ω
1000 pF
IN 00
to
IN 15
COM
COM
Input indicator
Internal circuits
Number of simultaneously
ON points -- Ambient
temperature characteristics
A8
0
2
4
6
10
12
14
8
1
3
5
7
COM
11
13
15
9
COM
24 V DC
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0 B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
553
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
Mixed I/O Units
CJ1W-MD231 DC Input/Transistor Output Unit
(Fujitsu Connector, 16 Inputs/16 Outputs, Sinking)
Note The ON response time will be 20 µs maximum and OFF response time will be 400 µs maximum even if
the response times are set to 0 ms due to internal element delays.
Circuit Configuration
Output section (CN1) Input section (CN2)
Rated Voltage 12 to 24 V DC Rated Input Voltage 24 V DC
Operating Input Volt-
age
20.4 to 26.4 V DC
Operating Load Volt-
age Range
10.2 to 26.4 V DC Input Impedance 3.3 kΩ
Maximum Load Cur-
rent
0.5 A/point, 2.0 A/Unit Input Current 7 mA typical (at 24 V DC)
Maximum Inrush Cur-
rent
4.0 A/point, 10 ms max. ON Voltage/ON Cur-
rent
14.4 V DC min./3 mA min.
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max. OFF Voltage/OFF
Current
5 V DC max./1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 1.5 V max. ON Response Time 8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between
0 and 32 in the PLC Setup.) (See
note.)
ON Response Time 0.1 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.8 ms max. OFF Response Time 8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between
0 and 32 in the PLC Setup.) (See
note.)
No. of Circuits 16 (16 points/common, 1 circuit)
Fuse None No. of Circuits 16 (16 points/common, 1 circuit)
External Power Sup-
ply
12 to 24 V DC, 20 mA min. Number of Simulta-
neously ON Points
75% (at 24 V DC)
Insulation Resistance 20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR terminal (at 100 V DC)
Dielectric Strength 1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current
of 10 mA max.
Internal Current Con-
sumption
5 V DC 130 mA max.
Weight 90 g max.
Accessories None
IN00
COM1
A
IN15
COM1
B
3.3 kΩ
3.3 kΩ
1000 pF
470
Ω
1000 pF
470
Ω
OUT00
+V
+V
OUT15
COM0
COM0
A
B
CN2 (IN)
CN1 (OUT)
OUT07
OUT08
IN08
IN07
to
to
Input indicator
Internal circuits
Internal circuits
Output
indicator
to
to
554
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
Terminal Connections
• When wiring, pay careful attention to the polarity of the external power supply. The load may operate if
polarity is reversed.
• Be sure to wire both terminals A9 and B9 (COM (0 V)) of CN1.
• Be sure to wire both terminals A10 and B10 (+V) of CN1.
• Be sure to wire both terminals A9 and B9 (COM) of CN2, and set the same polarity for both pins.
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
0204060
(°C)
Number of Simultaneously ON Points vs.
Ambient Temperature Characteristic
16 points at 33°C 16 points at 45°C
Number of simultaneously ON points
Input voltage: 24 V DC
Input voltage: 26.4 V DC
12 points at 55°C
9 points at 55°C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
9
10
11
12
NC
NC
+V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
08
10
11
12
A B
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
NC
+V
NC
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
4
3
2
1
24 V DC
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
07
3
2
1
B A
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
COM0 (0 V)
COM0 (0 V)
12 to
24 V DC
COM1 COM1
CN1 (Outputs)
I/O word "m"
CN2 (Inputs)
I/O word "m+1"
555
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
CJ1W-MD233 DC Input/Transistor Output Unit
(MIL Connector, 16 Inputs/16 Outputs, Sinking)
Note The ON response time will be 20 µs maximum and OFF response time will be 400 µs maximum even if
the response times are set to 0 ms due to internal element delays.
Circuit Configuration
Output section (CN1) Input section (CN2)
Rated Voltage 12 to 24 V DC Rated Input Voltage 24 V DC
Operating Input Volt-
age
20.4 to 26.4 V DC
Operating Load Volt-
age Range
10.2 to 26.4 V DC Input Impedance 3.3 kΩ
Maximum Load Cur-
rent
0.5 A/point, 2.0 A/Unit Input Current 7 mA typical (at 24 V DC)
Maximum Inrush Cur-
rent
4.0 A/point, 10 ms max. ON Voltage/ON Cur-
rent
14.4 V DC min./3 mA min.
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max. OFF Voltage/OFF
Current
5 V DC max./1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 1.5 V max. ON Response Time 8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between
0 and 32 in the PLC Setup.) (See
note.)
ON Response Time 0.1 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.8 ms max. OFF Response Time 8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between
0 and 32 in the PLC Setup.) (See
note.)
No. of Circuits 16 (16 points/common, 1 circuit)
Fuse None No. of Circuits 16 (16 points/common, 1 circuit)
External Power Sup-
ply
12 to 24 V DC, 20 mA min. Number of Simulta-
neously ON Points
75% (at 24 V DC)
Insulation Resistance 20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR terminal (at 100 V DC)
Dielectric Strength 1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current
of 10 mA max.
Internal Current Con-
sumption
5 V DC 130 mA max.
Weight 90 g max.
Accessories None
IN00
COM1
IN15
COM1
3.3 kΩ
3.3 kΩ
1000 pF
470
Ω
1000 pF
470
Ω
OUT00
+V
+V
OUT15
COM0
COM0
CN2 (IN)
CN1 (OUT)
OUT08
IN08
IN07
OUT07
to
to
Input indicator
Internal circuits
Internal circuits
to
to
Output
indicator
556
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
Terminal Connections
• When wiring, pay careful attention to the polarity of the external power supply. The load may operate if
polarity is reversed.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 3 and 4 (COM0 (0 V)) of CN1.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 1 and 2 (+V) of CN1.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 3 and 4 (COM1) of CN2, and set the same polarity for both pins.
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
0204060
(°C)
Number of Simultaneously ON Points vs.
Ambient Temperature Characteristic
Number of simultaneously ON points
Ambient Temperature
Input voltage: 24 V DC
Input voltage: 26.4 V DC
12 points at 55°C
9 points at 55°C
16 points at 33°C 16 points at 45°C
12 to
24 V DC
24 V DC
COM0 (0 V)
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
17
19
+V
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
07
20
+V
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
19
17
15
13
11
9
7 06
05
04
03
02
01
00
07
5
3
1
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
COM1
NC
COM1
NC
COM0 (0 V)
CN1 (Outputs)
I/O word "m"
CN2 (Inputs)
I/O word "m+1"
557
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
CJ1W-MD232 DC Input/Transistor Output Unit
(MIL Connector, 16 inputs/16 Outputs, Sourcing)
Note The ON response time will be 20 µs maximum and OFF response time will be 400 µs maximum even if
the response times are set to 0 ms due to internal element delays.
Circuit Configuration
Output section (CN1) Input section (CN2)
Rated Voltage 24 V DC Rated Input Voltage 24 V DC
Operating Input Volt-
age
20.4 to 26.4 V DC
Operating Load Volt-
age Range
20.4 to 26.4 V DC Input Impedance 3.3 kΩ
Maximum Load Cur-
rent
0.5 A/point, 2.0 A/Unit Input Current 7 mA typical (at 24 V DC)
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max. ON Voltage/ON Cur-
rent
14.4 V DC min./3 mA min.
Residual Voltage 1.5 V max. OFF Voltage/OFF
Current
5 V DC max./1 mA max.
ON Response Time 0.5 ms max. ON Response Time 8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between
0 and 32 in the PLC Setup.) (See
note.)
OFF Response Time 1.0 ms max.
Load Short-circuit
Protection
Detection current: 0.7 to 2.5 A min.
Automatic restart after error clear-
ance. (Refer to page 590.)
OFF Response Time 8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between
0 and 32 in the PLC Setup.) (See
note.)
No. of Circuits 16 (16 points/common, 1 circuit) No. of Circuits 16 (16 points/common, 1 circuit)
External Power Sup-
ply
20.4 to 26.4 V DC, 40 mA min. Number of Simulta-
neously ON Points
75% (at 24 V DC)
Insulation Resistance 20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR terminal (at 100 V DC)
Dielectric Strength 1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current
of 10 mA max.
Internal Current Con-
sumption
5 V DC 130 mA max.
Weight 100 g max.
Accessories None
470 Ω
COM1
IN00
IN07
3.3 kΩ
1000 pF
470 Ω
COM1
IN08
IN15
3.3 kΩ
1000 pF
COM0(+V)
0 V
COM0(+V)
0 V
CN2(IN)
CN1(OUT)
ERR indicator
Output indicator
Internal circuits
Input indicator
to
to
OUT00
to
OUT07
OUT08
to
OUT15
Internal circuits
Load short-circuit
protected Load short-circuit
protected
558
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
Terminal Connections
• When wiring, pay careful attention to the polarity of the external power supply. The load may operate if
polarity is reversed.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 3 and 4 (COM0 (+V)) of CN1.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 1 and 2 ((0 V)) of CN1.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 3 and 4 (COM1) of CN2, and set the same polarity for both pins.
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
0204060
(°C)
Number of Simultaneously ON Points vs.
Ambient Temperature Characteristic
Number of simultaneously ON points
16 points at 33°C 16 points at 45°C
Ambient Temperature
Input voltage: 24 V DC
Input voltage: 26.4 V DC
12 points at 55°C
9 points at 55°C
24 V
DC 24 V
DC
1
3
5
7
9
13
15
17
19
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
0715
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
COM1
NC
COM1
NC
11
1
3
5
7
9
13
15
17
19
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
11
06
05
04
03
02
01
00
07
COM0 (+V)
0 V
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
COM0 (+V)
0 V
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
LL
CN1 (Outputs)
I/O word "m" CN2 (Inputs)
I/O word "m+1"
559
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
CJ1W-MD261 DC Input/Transistor Output Unit
(Fujitsu Connector, 32 Inputs/32 Outputs, Sinking)
Note 1. The ON response time will be 120 µs maximum and OFF response time will be 400 µs maximum even
if the response times are set to 0 ms due to internal element delays.
2. The following restrictions apply when connecting 2-wire sensors.
• Provide an input power supply voltage at least as high as the sum of the ON voltage (19 V) and
the sensor’s residual voltage (approximately 3 V).
• Use a sensor with a minimum load current of 3 mA or higher.
• When connecting a sensor with a minimum load current of 5 mA or higher, connect a bleeder
resistor.
Circuit Configuration
Output section (CN1) Input section (CN2)
Rated Voltage 12 to 24 V DC Rated Input Voltage 24 V DC
Operating Input Volt-
age
20.4 to 26.4 V DC
Operating Load Volt-
age Range
10.2 to 26.4 V DC Input Impedance 5.6 kΩ
Maximum Load Cur-
rent
0.3 A/point, 1.6/common, 3.2 A/Unit Input Current 4.1 mA typical (at 24 V DC)
Maximum Inrush Cur-
rent
3.0 A/point, 10 ms max. ON Voltage/ON Cur-
rent
19.0 V DC min./3 mA min.
(See note 2.)
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max. OFF Voltage/OFF
Current
5 V DC max./1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 1.5 V max. ON Response Time 8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between
0 and 32 in the PLC Setup.) (See
note.)
ON Response Time 0.5 ms max.
OFF Response Time 1.0 ms max. OFF Response Time 8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between
0 and 32 in the PLC Setup.) (See
note.)
No. of Circuits 32 (16 points/common, 2 circuits)
Fuse None No. of Circuits 32 (16 points/common, 2 circuits)
External Power Sup-
ply
12 to 24 V DC, 30 mA min. Number of Simulta-
neously ON Points
75% (24 points) (at 24 V DC)
Insulation Resistance 20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR terminal (at 100 V DC)
Dielectric Strength 1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current
of 10 mA max.
Internal Current Con-
sumption
5 V DC 140 mA max.
Weight 110 g max.
Accessories None
IN00
IN15
COM2
A
IN00
IN15
COM3
B
COM2
COM3
5.6 kΩ
560
Ω
1000 pF
5.6 kΩ
560
Ω
1000 pF
OUT00
+V
OUT15
COM0
OUT00
+V
OUT15
COM1
COM0
COM1
A
B
CN2 (IN)
CN1 (OUT)
to
to
Indicator switch
Input indicator
Internal circuits
Internal circuits
to
to
Output indicator
Indicator switch
560
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
Terminal Connections
• When wiring, pay careful attention to the polarity of the external power supply. The load may operate if
polarity is reversed.
• Be sure to wire both terminals A19 and A9 (COM0 (0 V)) of CN1.
• Be sure to wire both terminals B19 and B9 (COM1 (0 V)) of CN1.
• Be sure to wire both terminals A20 and A10 (+V) of CN1.
• Be sure to wire both terminals B20 and B10 (+V) of CN1.
• Be sure to wire both terminals A9 and A18 (COM2) of CN2, and set the same polarity for both pins.
• Be sure to wire both terminals B9 and B18 (COM3) of CN2, and set the same polarity for both pins.
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
0204060
(°C)
Number of Simultaneously ON Points vs.
Ambient Temperature Characteristic
Number of simultaneously ON points
32 points at 38°C
32 points
at 44°C
Ambient Temperature
Input voltage: 24 V DC
Input voltage: 26.4 V DC
12 points/common at 55°C
8 points/common at 55°C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10 +V
+V
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
19
20 +V+V
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
AB
10
21
32
43
54
65
76
87
9
10 8
11 9
12 10
13 11
14 12
15 13
16 14
17 15
18
19 NC
20 NC
1
0
2
1
3
2
4
3
5
4
6
5
7
6
8
7
9
10
8
11
9
12
10
13
11
14
12
15
13
16
14
17
15
18
19
NC
20
NC
BA
12 to 24 V DC 12 to 24 V DC
24
V DC
24
V DC
COM1 (0 V) COM0 (0 V)
COM1 (0 V) COM0 (0 V)
COM2 COM3
COM3
COM2
CN1 (Outputs)
I/O word "m+1" I/O word "m"
CN2 (Inputs)
I/O word "m+2" I/O word "m+3"
561
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
CJ1W-MD263 DC Input/Transistor Output Unit
(MIL Connector, 32 Inputs/32 Outputs, Sinking)
Note 1. The ON response time will be 120 µs maximum and OFF response time will be 400 µs maximum even
if the response times are set to 0 ms due to internal element delays.
2. The following restrictions apply when connecting 2-wire sensors.
• Provide an input power supply voltage at least as high as the sum of the ON voltage (19 V) and
the sensor’s residual voltage (approximately 3 V).
• Use a sensor with a minimum load current of 3 mA or higher.
• When connecting a sensor with a minimum load current of 5 mA or higher, connect a bleeder
resistor.
Circuit Configuration
Output section (CN1) Input section (CN2)
Rated Voltage 12 to 24 V DC Rated Input Voltage 24 V DC
Operating Input Volt-
age
20.4 to 26.4 V DC
Operating Load Volt-
age Range
10.2 to 26.4 V DC Input Impedance 5.6 kΩ
Maximum Load Cur-
rent
0.3 A/point, 1.6/common, 3.2 A/Unit Input Current 4.1 mA typical (at 24 V DC)
Maximum Inrush Cur-
rent
3.0 A/point, 10 ms max. ON Voltage/ON Cur-
rent
19.0 V DC min./3 mA min.
(See note 2.)
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max. OFF Voltage/OFF
Current
5 V DC max./1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 1.5 V max. ON Response Time 8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between
0 and 32 in the PLC Setup.) (See
note.)
ON Response Time 0.5 ms max.
OFF Response Time 1.0 ms max. OFF Response Time 8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between
0 and 32 in the PLC Setup.) (See
note.)
No. of Circuits 32 (16 points/common, 2 circuits)
Fuse None No. of Circuits 32 (16 points/common, 2 circuits)
External Power Sup-
ply
12 to 24 V DC, 30 mA min. Number of Simulta-
neously ON Points
75% (24 points) (at 24 V DC)
Insulation Resistance 20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR terminal (at 100 V DC)
Dielectric Strength 1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current
of 10 mA max.
Internal Current Con-
sumption
5 V DC 140 mA max.
Weight 110 g max.
Accessories None
IN00
IN15
COM2
IN00
IN15
COM3
COM2
COM3
5.6 kΩ
560
Ω
1000 pF
5.6 kΩ
560
Ω
1000 pF
OUT00
+V
OUT15
COM0
OUT00
+V
OUT15
COM1
COM0
COM1
CN2 (IN)CN1 (OUT)
Internal circuits
Internal circuits
Output indicator
Indicator switch
Indicator switch
Input indicator
to
to
to
to
562
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
Terminal Connections
• When wiring, pay careful attention to the polarity of the external power supply. The load may operate if
polarity is reversed.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 23 and 24 (COM0) of CN1.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 3 and 4 (COM1) of CN1.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 21 and 22 (+V) of CN1.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 1 and 2 (+V) of CN1.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 23 and 24 (COM2) of CN2, and set the same polarity for both pins.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 3 and 4 (COM3) of CN2, and set the same polarity for both pins.
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
0204060
(°C)
Number of Simultaneously ON Points vs.
Ambient Temperature Characteristic
Number of simultaneously ON points
32 points at 38°C
32 points
at 44°C
Ambient Temperature
Input voltage: 24 V DC
Input voltage: 26.4 V DC
12 points/common at 55°C
8 points/common at 55°C
1
+V
3
5
15
7
14
9
13
11
12
13
11
15
10
17
19
2
21
23
25
27
15
29
14
31
13
33
12
35
11
37
+V
39
2
4
+V
6
8
7
10
6
12
5
14
4
16
3
18
COM1
20
22
24
26
28
30
10
32
34
36
38
40
COM1
+V
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
COM0
8
9
COM0
8
9
0
1
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
40 0
38 1
36 2
34 3
32 4
30 5
28 6
26 7
24
22
15
20
18
0
16
1
14
2
12
3
10
4
8
5
6
6
4
NC
2
COM3
39
37
8
35
9
33
10
31
11
29
12
27
13
25
14
23
COM2
21
819
917
10 15
11 13
12 11
7
9
13
7
14
5
15
3
NC 1
COM3
COM2
NC NC
24 V DC
24 V
DC
I/O word "m"I/O word "m+1"
I/O word "m+3"
I/O word "m+2"
CN1 (Outputs) CN2 (Inputs)
12 to 24 V DC
12 to
24 V
DC
563
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
CJ1W-MD563 TTL I/O Unit (MIL Connector, 32 Inputs/32 Outputs)
Note The ON response time will be 120 µs maximum and OFF response time will be 400 µs maximum even if
the response times are set to 0 ms due to internal element delays.
Circuit Configuration
Output section (CN1) Input section (CN2)
Rated Voltage 5 V DC±10% Rated Input Voltage 5 V DC±10%
Operating Load Volt-
age Range
4.5 to 5.5 V DC Input Impedance 1.1 kΩ
Maximum Load Cur-
rent
35 mA/point, 560 mA/common,
1.12 A/Unit
Input Current Approx. 3.5 mA (at 5 V DC)
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max. ON Voltage 3.0 V DC min.
Residual Voltage 0.4 V max. OFF Voltage 1.0 V DC max.
ON Response Time 0.2 ms max. ON Response Time 8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between
0 and 32 in the PLC Setup.) (See
note.)
OFF Response Time 0.3 ms max. OFF Response Time 8.0 ms max. (Can be set to between
0 and 32 in the PLC Setup.) (See
note.)
No. of Circuits 32 points (16 points/common, 2 cir-
cuits)
No. of Circuits 32 points (16 points/common, 2 cir-
cuits)
Fuse None Number of Simulta-
neously ON Points
100% (16 points/common)
External Power Sup-
ply
5V DC±10%, 40 mA min. (1.2 mA ×
No. of ON points)
Insulation Resistance 20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR terminal (at 100 V DC)
Dielectric Strength 1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current
of 10 mA max.
Internal Current Con-
sumption
5 V DC 190 mA max.
Weight 110 g max.
Accessories None
IN00
IN15
COM2
IN00
IN15
COM3
COM2
COM3
1.1 kΩ
2.2 k
Ω
1000 pF
1.1 kΩ
2.2
Ω
1000 pF
OUT00
+V
OUT15
COM0
OUT00
+V
OUT15
COM1
COM0
COM1
5.6 k
Ω
5.6 k
Ω
CN1 (OUT) CN2 (IN)
to
Indicator switch
Input indicator
to
Output indicator
Indicator switch
Internal circuits
Internal circuits
to
to
564
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
Terminal Connections
• When wiring, pay careful attention to the polarity of the external power supply. The load may operate if the
polarity is reversed.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 23 and 24 (COM0) of CN1.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 3 and 4 (COM1) of CN1.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 21 and 22 (+V) of CN1.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 1 and 2 (+V) of CN1.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 23 and 24 (COM2) of CN2, and set the same polarity for both pins.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 3 and 4 (COM3) of CN2, and set the same polarity for both pins.
1+V
3
515
714
913
11 12
13 11
15 10
17
19
2
21
23
25
27
15
29
14
31
13
33
12
35
11
37
+V
39
2
4
+V
6
8
7
10
6
12
5
4
16
3
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
10
32
34
36
38
40
+V
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
9
8
9
0
1
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
40
0
38
1
36
2
34
3
32
4
30
5
28
6
26
7
24
22
15
20
0
1
14
2
3
4
8
5
6
6
4
NC
2
39
37
8
35
9
33
10
31
11
29
12
13
25
14
23
21
8
9
10
11
12
7
9
7
14
5
15
3
NC
1
COM3
NC NC
5 V DC
5 V DC
5 V DC
5 V DC
COM0 COM0
COM1 COM1
COM3
11
10
12
13
15 16
17 18
19
COM2
COM2
27
14
13
CN1 (Outputs) CN2 (Inputs)
I/O word "m"
I/O word "m+1"
I/O word "m+2"
I/O word "m+3"
565
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
CJ1W-OC201 Contact Output Unit (Terminal Block, 8 Points)
Note Although 16 I/O bits (1 word) are allocated, only 8 of these can be used
for external I/O. This Unit is also treated as a 16-point I/O Unit in the I/O
tables.
Circuit Configuration
Max. Switching Capacity 2 A 250 V AC (cosφ = 1), 2 A 250 V AC (cosφ = 0.4),
2 A 24 V DC (16 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Capacity 1 mA 5 V DC
Service Life of Relay Electrical: 150,000 operations (24 V DC, resistive
load)/ 100,000 operations (240 V AC, cosφ = 0.4,
inductive load)
Mechanical: 20,000,000 operations
Service life will vary depending on the connected
load. Refer to page 586 for information on service life
according to the load.
Relay replacement NY-24W-K-IE (Fujitsu Takamizawa Component Ltd.)
Relays cannot be replaced by users.
ON Response Time 15 ms max.
OFF Response Time 15 ms max.
Number of Circuits 8 independent contacts
Insulation Resistance 20 MΩ between external terminals and the GR termi-
nal (500 V DC)
Dielectric Strength 2,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
Internal Current Consumption 90 mA 5 V DC max. 48 mA 24 V DC (6 mA × No.
points ON)
Weight 140 g max.
Output indicator
Internal circuits
566
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
Terminal Connections
Note Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.
CJ1W-OC211 Contact Output Unit (Terminal Block, 16 Points)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
2 A 250 V AC,
2 A 24 V DC max.
Polarity of the DC
power supply can be
connected in either
direction because
relay contacts are
used.
Max. Switching Capacity 2 A 250 V AC (cosφ = 1), 2 A 250 V AC (cosφ =
0.4), 2 A 24 V DC (8 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Capacity 1 mA 5 V DC
Service Life of Relay Electrical: 150,000 operations (24 V DC, resistive
load)/ 100,000 operations (250 V AC, cosφ = 0.4,
inductive load)
Mechanical: 20,000,000 operations
Service life will vary depending on the connected
load. Refer to page 586 for information on service
life according to the load.
Relay replacement NY-24W-K-IE (Fujitsu Takamizawa Component
Ltd.)
Relays cannot be replaced by users.
ON Response Time 15 ms max.
OFF Response Time 15 ms max.
Number of Circuits 16 points/common, 1 circuit
Insulation Resistance 20 MΩ between external terminals and the GR
terminal (500 V DC)
Dielectric Strength 2,000 V AC between the external terminals and
the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current
of 10 mA max.
Internal Current Consumption 110 mA 5 V DC max. 96 mA 24 V DC (6 mA × No.
points ON)
Weight 170 g max.
567
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
Circuit Configuration
Terminal Connections
Note Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.
CJ1W-OA201 Triac Output Unit (8 Points)
Note Although 16 I/O bits (1 word) are allocated, only 8 of these can be used
for external I/O. This Unit is also treated as a 16-point I/O Unit in the I/O
tables.
Output indicator
Internal circuits
to
2 A 250 V AC,
2 A 24 V DC max.
Max. Switching Capacity 0.6 A 250 V AC, 50/60 Hz (2.4 A/Unit)
Max. Inrush Current 15 A (pulse width: 10 ms)
Min. Switching Capacity 50 mA 75 V AC
Leakage Current 1.5 mA (200 V AC) max.,
Residual Voltage 1.6 V AC max.
ON Response Time 1 ms max.
OFF Response Time 1/2 of load frequency+1 ms or less.
Number of Circuits 8 (8 points/common)
Surge Protector C.R Absorber + Surge Absorber
Fuses 5 A (1/common, 1 used)
The fuse cannot be replaced by the user.
Insulation Resistance 20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR
terminal (500 V DC)
Dielectric Strength 2,000 V AC between the external terminals and
the GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current
of 10 mA max.
Internal Current Consumption 220 mA max.
Weight 150 g max.
568
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
Circuit Configuration
Terminal Connections
CJ1W-OD201 Transistor Output Unit (Terminal Block, 8 Points, Sinking)
Note Although 16 I/O bits (1 word) are allocated, only 8 of these can be used
for external I/O. This Unit is also treated as a 16-point I/O Unit in the I/O
tables.
COM
OUT
0
OUT7
to
Internal circuits
Output indicator
Fuse
0
1
2
3
5
6
7
4
COM
L
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8 B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
B0
250 V AC max.
Rated Voltage 12 to 24 V DC
Operating Load Voltage Range 10.2 to 26.4 V DC
Maximum Load Current 2.0 A/point, 8.0 A/Unit
Maximum Inrush Current 10 A/point, 10 ms max.
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 1.5 V max.
ON Response Time 0.5 ms max.
OFF Response Time 1.0 ms max.
Insulation Resistance 20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR
terminal (100 V DC)
Dielectric Strength 1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
Number of Circuits 8 (4 points/common, 2 circuits)
Internal Current Consumption 5 V DC: 90 mA max.
Fuse 6.3 A (1/common, 2 used)
The fuse cannot be replaced by the user.
External Power Supply 12 to 24 V DC, 10 mA min.
Weight 110 g max.
569
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
Circuit Configuration
Terminal Connections
When wiring, pay careful attention to the polarity of the external power supply. The load may operate incorrectly
if the polarity is reversed.
Note Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.
CJ1W-OD203 Transistor Output Unit (Terminal Block, 8 Points, Sinking)
OUT0
0
+V
OUT0
3
COM0
OUT0
4
+V
OUT0
7
COM1
to
to
Output
indicator
Internal circuits
0
2
COM0
NC
NC
4
6
NC
1
3
+V
NC
NC
NC
5
7
A8
COM1
+V
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
B0
12 to 24 V DC
12 to 24 V DC
Rated Voltage 12 to 24 V DC
Operating Load Voltage Range 10.2 to 26.4 V DC
Maximum Load Current 0.5 A/point, 4.0 A/Unit
Maximum Inrush Current 4.0 A/point, 10 ms max.
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 1.5 V max.
ON Response Time 0.1 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.8 ms max.
Insulation Resistance 20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR
terminal (100 V DC)
Dielectric Strength 1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
Number of Circuits 8 (8 points/common, 1 circuit)
Internal Current Consumption 5 V DC 100 mA max.
Fuse None
External Power Supply 10.2 to 26.4 V DC, 20 mA min.
Weight 110 g max.
570
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
Circuit Configuration
Terminal Connections
When wiring, pay careful attention to the polarity of the external power supply. The load may operate incorrectly
if the polarity is reversed.
Note Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.
CJ1W-OD211 Transistor Output Unit (Terminal Block, 16 Points, Sinking)
OUT00
OUT07
+V
COM
Output indicator
Internal circuits
to
B1
1
B2
3
B3
5
B4
7
B5
B6
B7
B8
A1
0
A2
2
A3
4
A4
6
A5
NC
A6
A7
A8
COM
B0
A0
+V
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
12 to 24 V DC
Rated Voltage 12 to 24 V DC
Operating Load Voltage Range 10.2 to 26.4 V DC
Maximum Load Current 0.5 A/point, 5.0 A/Unit
Maximum Inrush Current 4.0 A/point, 10 ms max.
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 1.5 V max.
ON Response Time 0.1 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.8 ms max.
Insulation Resistance 20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR
terminal (100 V DC)
Dielectric Strength 1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
Number of Circuits 16 (16 points/common, 1 circuit)
Internal Current Consumption 5 V DC 100 mA max.
Fuse None
External Power Supply 10.2 to 26.4 V DC, 20 mA min.
Weight 110 g max.
571
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
Circuit Configuration
Terminal Connections
When wiring, pay careful attention to the polarity of the external power supply. The load may operate incorrectly
if the polarity is reversed.
Note Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.
CJ1W-OD231 Transistor Output Unit (Fujitsu Connector, 32 Points,
Sinking)
Output indicator
Internal circuits
to
Internal circuits
12 to 24 V DC
Rated Voltage 12 to 24 V DC
Operating Load Voltage Range 10.2 to 26.4 V DC
Maximum Load Current 0.5 A/point, 2.0 A/common, 4.0 A/Unit
Maximum Inrush Current 4.0 A/point, 10 ms max.
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 1.5 V max.
572
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
Note The maximum load currents will be 2.0 A/common and 4.0 A/Unit if a pressure-welded connector is
used.
Circuit Configuration
ON Response Time 0.1 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.8 ms max.
Insulation Resistance 20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR
terminal (100 V DC)
Dielectric Strength 1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
Number of Circuits 32 (16 points/common, 2 circuits)
Internal Current Consumption 5 V DC 140 mA max.
Fuse None
External Power Supply 10.2 to 26.4 V DC, 30 mA min.
Weight 70 g max.
Accessories None
Output
indicator
Internal circuits
to
to
573
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
Terminal Connections
•When wiring, pay careful attention to the polarity of the external power supply. The load may operate if the
polarity is reversed.
• Be sure to wire both terminals A9 and A19 (COM0).
• Be sure to wire both terminals B9 and B19 (COM1).
• Be sure to wire both terminals A10 and A20 (+V).
• Be sure to wire both terminals B10 and B20 (+V).
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
I/O word “m+1” I/O word “m”
12 to 24 V DC 12 to 24 V DC
574
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
CJ1W-OD233 Transistor Output Unit (MIL Connector, 32 Points, Sinking)
Circuit Configuration
Terminal Connections
•When wiring, pay careful attention to the polarity of the external power supply. The load may operate if the
polarity is reversed.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 23 and 24 (COM0).
Rated Voltage 12 to 24 V DC
Operating Load Voltage Range 10.2 to 26.4 V DC
Maximum Load Current 0.5 A/point, 2 A/common, 4 A/Unit
Maximum Inrush Current 4.0 A/point, 10 ms max.
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 1.5 V max.
ON Response Time 0.1 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.8 ms max.
Insulation Resistance 20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR termi-
nal (100 V DC)
Dielectric Strength 1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR
terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of 10 mA max.
Number of Circuits 32 (16 points/common, 2 circuits)
Internal Current Consumption 5 V DC: 140 mA max.
Fuse None
External Power Supply 12 to 24 V DC, 30 mA min.
Weight 70 g max.
Accessories None
OUT00
+V
OUT15
COM0
OUT00
+V
OUT15
COM1
COM0
COM1
m ch
SW
(m+1) c
h
to
to
Output
indicator
Internal circuits
40 0
38 1
36 2
34 3
32 4
30 5
28 6
26 7
24
22
15
20
18
0
16
1
14
2
12
3
10
4
8
5
6
6
4
+V
2
COM1
39
37
8
35
9
33
10
31
11
29
12
27
13
25
14
23
21
819
917
10 15
11 13
12 11
7
9
13
7
14
5
15
3
+V 1
COM1
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
+V +V
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
COM0 COM0
12 to
24 V DC
12 to
24 V DC
I/O word
m+1
I/O word m
575
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
• Be sure to wire both terminals 3 and 4 (COM1).
• Be sure to wire both terminals 21 and 22 (+V).
• Be sure to wire both terminals 1 and 2 (+V).
CJ1W-OD261 Transistor Output Unit (Fujitsu Connectors, 64 Points,
Sinking)
Circuit Configuration
Rated Voltage 12 to 24 V DC
Operating Load Voltage Range 10.2 to 26.4 V DC
Maximum Load Current 0.3 A/point, 1.6 A/common, 6.4 A/Unit
Maximum Inrush Current 3.0 A/point, 10 ms max.
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 1.5 V max.
ON Response Time 0.5 ms max.
OFF Response Time 1.0 ms max.
Insulation Resistance 20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR
terminal (100 V DC)
Dielectric Strength 1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
Number of Circuits 64 (16 points/common, 4 circuits)
Internal Current Consumption 5 V DC, 170 mA max.
Fuse None
External Power Supply 10.2 to 26.4 V DC, 50 mA min.
Weight 110 g max.
Accessories None
Output indicator
Internal circuits
to
to
to
to
576
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
Terminal Connections
•When wiring, pay careful attention to the polarity of the external power supply. The load may operate if the
polarity is reversed.
• Be sure to wire both terminals A9 and A19 (COM0) of CN1.
• Be sure to wire both terminals B9 and B19 (COM1) of CN1.
• Be sure to wire both terminals A10 and A20 (+V) of CN1.
• Be sure to wire both terminals B10 and B20 (+V) of CN1.
• Be sure to wire both terminals A9 and A19 (COM2) of CN2.
• Be sure to wire both terminals B9 and B19 (COM3) of CN2.
• Be sure to wire both terminals A10 and A20 (+V) of CN2.
• Be sure to wire both terminals B10 and B20 (+V) of CN2.
12 to 24 V DC
12 to
24 V DC
12 to
24 V DC
12 to
24 V D
C
I/O word "m"I/O word "m+1" I/O word "m+3"I/O word "m+2"
577
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
CJ1W-OD263 Transistor Output Unit (MIL Connectors, 64 Points, Sinking)
Circuit Configuration
Terminal Connections
•When wiring, pay careful attention to the polarity of the external power supply. The load may operate if the
polarity is reversed.
Rated Voltage 12 to 24 V DC
Operating Load Voltage Range 10.2 to 26.4 V DC
Maximum Load Current 0.3 A/point, 1.6 A/common, 6.4 A/Unit
Maximum Inrush Current 3.0 A/point, 10 ms max.
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 1.5 V max.
ON Response Time 0.5 ms max.
OFF Response Time 1.0 ms max.
Insulation Resistance 20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR termi-
nal (100 V DC)
Dielectric Strength 1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR
terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of 10 mA max.
Number of Circuits 64 (16 points/common, 4 circuits)
Internal Current Consumption 5 V DC: 170 mA max.
Fuse None
External Power Supply 12 to 24 V DC, 50 mA min.
Weight 110 g max.
Accessories None
OUT00
+V
OUT15
COM0
OUT00
+V
OUT15
COM2
COM0
COM2
m ch
(m +1) ch
+V
OUT00
OUT15
COM1
COM1
+V
OUT00
OUT15
COM3
COM3
CN1
(m +2) ch
(m +3) ch
CN2
SW
to
to
to
to
Output indicator
Internal circuits
1
+V
3
5
15
7
14
9
13
11
12
13
11
15
10
17
19
2
21
23
25
27
15
29
14
31
13
33
12
35
11
37
+V
39
2
4
+V
6
8
7
10
6
12
5
14
4
16
3
18
COM1
20
22
24
26
28
30
10
32
34
36
38
40
COM1
+V
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
COM0
8
9
COM0
8
9
0
1
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
CN1
40
0
38
1
36
2
34
3
32
4
30
5
28
6
26
7
24
22
15
20
18
0
16
1
14
2
12
3
10
4
8
5
6
6
4
+V
2
COM3
12 to
24 V DC
39
37
8
35
9
33
10
31
11
29
12
27
13
25
14
23
21
8
19
9
17
10
15
11
13
12
11
7
9
13
7
14
5
15
3
+V
1
COM3
12 to
24 V DC
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
+V +V
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
COM2 COM2
CN2
12 to
24 V DC
12 to
24 V DC
I/O word
m
I/O word
m+1
I/O word
m+3
I/O word
m+2
578
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
• Be sure to wire both terminals 23 and 24 (COM0) of CN1.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 3 and 4 (COM1) of CN1.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 21 and 22 (+V) of CN1.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 1 and 2 (+V) of CN1.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 23 and 24 (COM2) of CN2.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 3 and 4 (COM3) of CN2.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 21 and 22 (+V) of CN2.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 1 and 2 (+V) of CN2.
CJ1W-OD202 Transistor Output Unit (Terminal Block, 8 Points, Sourcing)
Note Although 16 I/O bits (1 word) are allocated, only 8 of these can be used
for external I/O. This Unit is also treated as a 16-point I/O Unit in the I/O
tables.
Circuit Configuration
• The ERR indicator will light and the corresponding bit in A050 to A069 (Basic I/O Unit Information, two
points per bit) will turn ON if an overcurrent or line disconnection is detected.
Rated Voltage 24 V DC
Operating Load Voltage Range 20.4 to 26.4 V DC
Maximum Load Current 2 A/point, 8 A/Unit
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 1.5 V max.
ON Response Time 0.5 ms max.
OFF Response Time 1.0 ms max.
Load Short-circuit Protection Detection current: 6.0 A min.
Automatic restart after error clearance. (Refer to
page 588.)
Line Disconnection Detection Detection current: 200 mA (Refer to page 590.)
Insulation Resistance 20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR termi-
nal (100 V DC)
Dielectric Strength 1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR
terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of 10 mA max.
Number of Circuits 8 (4 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 5 V DC: 110 mA max.
Fuse None
External Power Supply 24 V DC, 50 mA min.
Weight 120 g max.
OUT03
OUT00
0 V
C O M 1(+V)
C O M 0(+V)
OUT04
O U T07
0 V
to
to
Output indicator
Internal circuits
ERR indicator
Load short-circuit
protection
Load short-
circuit protection
579
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
Terminal Connections
•When wiring, pay careful attention to the polarity of the external power supply. The load may operate if the
polarity is reversed.
Note Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.
CJ1W-OD204 Transistor Output Unit (Terminal Block, 8 Points, Sourcing)
Note Although 16 I/O bits (1 word) are allocated, only 8 of these can be used
for external I/O. This Unit is also treated as a 16-point I/O Unit in the I/O
tables.
Circuit Configuration
0
2
0 V
NC
NC
4
6
NC
1
3
COM0 (+V)
NC
NC
NC
5
7
0 V
24 V DC
C O M 1 (+V)
24 V DC
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
Rated Voltage 24 V DC
Operating Load Voltage Range 20.4 to 26.4 V DC
Maximum Load Current 0.5 A/point, 4.0 A/Unit
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 1.5 V max.
ON Response Time 0.5 ms max.
OFF Response Time 1.0 ms max.
Load Short-circuit Prevention Detection current: 0.7 to 2.5 A
Automatic restart after error clearance. (Refer to
page 590.)
Insulation Resistance 20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR termi-
nal (100 V DC)
Dielectric Strength 1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the GR
terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of 10 mA max.
Number of Circuits 8 (8 points/common, 1 circuit)
Internal Current Consumption 5 V DC, 100 mA max.
External Power Supply 20.4 to 26.4 V DC, 40 mA min.
Weight 120 g max.
COM(+V)
OUT00
OUT07
0 V
Output indicator
ERR indicator
Internal circuits
Load short-circuit
protected
to
580
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
When overcurrent is detected, the ERR indicator will light, and the corresponding flag in the Basic I/O Unit
Information Area (A050 to A069) will turn ON.
Terminal Connections
When wiring, pay careful attention to the polarity of the external power supply. The load may operate if the
polarity is reversed.
Note Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.
CJ1W-OD212 Transistor Output Unit (Terminal Block, 16 Points,
Sourcing)
B1
1
B2
3
B3
5
B4
7
B5
B6
B7
B8
24 V DC
A1
0
A2
2
A3
4
A4
6
A5
NC
A6
A7
A8
0 V
B0
A0
COM(+V)
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
Rated Voltage 24 V DC
Operating Load Voltage Range 20.4 to 26.4 V DC
Maximum Load Current 0.5 A/point, 5.0 A/Unit
Maximum Inrush Current 0.1 mA max.
Leakage Current 1.5 V max.
ON Response Time 0.5 ms max.
OFF Response Time 1.0 ms max.
Load Short-circuit Prevention Detection current: 0.7 to 2.5 A
Automatic restart after error clearance. (Refer to
page 590.)
Insulation Resistance 20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR
terminal (100 V DC)
Dielectric Strength 1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
Number of Circuits 16 (16 points/common, 1 circuits)
Internal Current Consumption 5 V DC, 100 mA max.
External Power Supply 20.4 to 26.4 V DC, 40 mA min.
Weight 120 g max.
581
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
Circuit Configuration
When overcurrent is detected, the ERR indicator will light, and the corresponding flag in the Basic I/O Unit
Information Area (A050 to A069) will turn ON.
Terminal Connections
When wiring, pay careful attention to the polarity of the external power supply. The load may operate if the
polarity is reversed.
Note Terminal numbers A0 to A9 and B0 to B9 are used in this manual, but they are not printed on the Unit.
CJ1W-OD232 Transistor Output Unit (MIL Connector, 32 Points, Sourcing)
Output indicator
Internal circuits
ERR indicator
Load short-
circuit protected
to
24 V DC
Rated Voltage 24 V DC
Operating Load Voltage Range 20.4 to 26.4 V DC
Maximum Load Current 0.5 A/point, 2.0 A/common, 4.0 A/Unit
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 1.5 V max.
582
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
Note The maximum load currents will be 2.0 A/common and 4.0 A/Unit if a
pressure-welded connector is used.
Circuit Configuration
When the output current of any output exceeds the detection current, the output for that point will turn OFF. At
the same time, the ERR indicator will light and the corresponding flag (one for each common) in the Basic I/O
Unit Information Area (A050 to A069) will turn ON.
ON Response Time 0.5 ms max.
OFF Response Time 1.0 ms max.
Load Short-circuit Prevention Detection current: 0.7 to 2.5 A
Automatic restart after error clearance. (Refer to
page 590.)
Insulation Resistance 20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR
terminal (100 V DC)
Dielectric Strength 1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
Number of Circuits 32 (16 points/common, 2 circuits)
Internal Current Consumption 5 V DC 150 mA max.
External Power Supply 20.4 to 26.4 V DC, 70 mA min.
Weight 80 g max.
Accessories None
to
to
Output indicator
Internal circuits
Load short-circuit
protected
I/O word “m”
I/O word “m+1”
Load short-circuit
protected
ERR indicator
583
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
Terminal Connections
• When wiring, pay careful attention to the polarity of the external power supply. The load may operate if the
polarity is reversed.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 21 and 22 (COM0 (+V)).
• Be sure to wire both terminals 1 and 2 (COM1 (+V)).
• Be sure to wire both terminals 3 and 4 (0 V).
• Be sure to wire both terminals 23 and 24 (0 V).
24 V DC
24 V DC
I/O word “m+1”I/O word “m”
584
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
CJ1W-OD262 Transistor Output Unit (MIL Connectors, 64 Points,
Sourcing)
Circuit Configuration
Rated Voltage 12 to 24 V DC
Operating Load Voltage Range 10.2 to 26.4 V DC
Maximum Load Current 0.3 A/point, 1.6 A/common, 6.4 A/Unit
Maximum Inrush Current 3.0 A/point, 10 ms max.
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 1.5 V max.
ON Response Time 0.5 ms max.
OFF Response Time 1.0 ms max.
Insulation Resistance 20 MΩ between the external terminals and the GR
terminal (100 V DC)
Dielectric Strength 1,000 V AC between the external terminals and the
GR terminal for 1 minute at a leakage current of
10 mA max.
Number of Circuits 64 (16 points/common, 4 circuits)
Internal Current Consumption 170 mA max. (5 V DC)
Fuse None
External Power Supply 10.2 to 26.4 V DC, 50 mA min.
Weight 110 g max.
Accessories None
OUT15
0 V
OUT00
COM0
COM0
0 V
0 V
COM1
0 V
COM1
OUT15
OUT00
COM2
COM2
OUT15
OUT00
OUT15
OUT00
COM3
COM3
CN1 (OUT)
I/O word m
I/O word m+1
CN2 (OUT)
I/O word m+3
I/O word m+2
Internal circuits
Indicator switch
Output indicator
to
to
to
to
585
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
Terminal Connections
•When wiring, pay careful attention to the polarity of the external power supply. The load may operate if the
polarity is reversed.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 21 and 22 (COM0 (+V)) of CN1.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 1 and 2 (COM1 (+V)) of CN1.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 23 and 24 (0 V) of CN1.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 3 and 4 (0 V) of CN1.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 21 and 22 (COM2 (+V)) of CN2.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 1 and 2 (COM3 (+V)) of CN2.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 23 and 24 (0 V) of CN2.
• Be sure to wire both terminals 3 and 4 (0 V) of CN2.
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
L L
L L
L L
L L
L L
L L
L L
L L
L L
L L
L L
L L
L L
L L
L L
L L
15
14
13
12
11
102
15
14
13
12
11
0 V
0 V
7
6
5
4
3
COM1(+V)
10
0 V
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
COM0(+V)
8
9
COM0(+V)
8
9
0
1
CN1 (OUT)
0 V
COM1(+V)
L L
L L
L L
L L
L L
L L
L L
L L
L L
L L
L L
L L
CN2 (OUT)
40
0
38
1
36
2
34
3
32
4
30
5
28
6
26
7
24
22
15
20
18
0
16
1
14
2
12
3
10
4
8
5
6
6
4
2
39
37
8
35
9
33
10
31
11
29
12
27
13
25
14
23
21
8
19
9
17
10
15
11
13
12
10
7
9
13
7
14
5
15
3
0 V
1
COM3(+V)
0 V
COM2(+V)
0 V
COM3(+V)
LL
0 V
COM2(+V)
L L
L
L L
L
12
to
24 V DC
I/O word m
12
to
24 V DC
I/O word m+1
I/O word m+3
I/O word m+2
12
to
24 V DC
12
to
24 V DC
586
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
About Contact Output Units
Service Life Expectancy of CJ1W-OC201/211 Relays
The service life expectancy of the relays (NY-24W-K-IE) in the CJ1W-OC201/211 Contact Output Units is
shown in the following diagrams. Use the diagrams to calculate the relay service life based on the operating
conditions, and replace the relay before the end of its service life.
Note The diagrams show the life expectancy of the relay itself. Do not use a contact current, therefore, that
exceeds the maximum switching capacity specified in the specifications for each Contact Output Unit. If
a switching capacity exceeding the specifications is used, the reliability and life expectancy of other
parts will be reduced and the Unit may malfunction.
Inductive Load
The life of the Relay varies with the load inductance. If any inductive load is connected to the Contact Output
Unit, use an arc killer with the Contact Output Unit using an inductive load.
Be sure to connect a diode in parallel with every DC inductive load that is connected to the Contact Output
Unit.
Contact Protection Circuit
Arc killers are used with the Contact Output Unit in order to prolong the life of each Relay mounted to the Con-
tact Output Unit, prevent noise, and reduce the generation of carbide and nitrate deposits. Arc killers can, how-
ever, reduce relay life if not use correctly.
Note Arc killers used with the Contact Output Unit can delay the resetting time required by each Relay
mounted to the Contact Output Unit.
24 V DC τ = 7 ms
Service Life with AC Load Service Life with DC Load
120 V AC, resistive load
240 V AC, resistive load
240 V AC
cos φ = 0.4
120 V AC
cos φ = 0.4
Service life (×104)
Contact current (A)
Service life (×104)
Contact current (A)
24 V DC, resistive load
587
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
Arc killer circuit examples are listed in the following table.
Note Do not connect a capacitor as an arc killer in parallel with an inductive load as shown in the following dia-
gram. This arc killer is very effective for preventing spark discharge at the moment when the circuit is
opened. However when the contacts are closed, the contacts may be welded due to the current charged
in the capacitor.
DC inductive loads can be more difficult to switch than resistive loads. If appropriate arc killers are used,
however, DC inductive loads will be as easy to switch as resistive loads.
Circuit Current Characteristic Required element
AC DC
Yes Yes If the load is a relay or solenoid, there
is a time lag between the moment the
circuit is opened and the moment the
load is reset.
If the supply voltage is 24 or 48 V,
insert the arc killer in parallel with the
load. If the supply voltage is 100 to
200 V, insert the arc killer between the
contacts.
The capacitance of the capacitor must
be 1 to 0.5 µF per contact current of
1 A and resistance of the resistor must
be 0.5 to 1 Ω per contact voltage of 1 V.
These values, however, vary with the
load and the characteristics of the
relay. Decide these values from experi-
ments, and take into consideration that
the capacitance suppresses spark dis-
charge when the contacts are sepa-
rated and the resistance limits the
current that flows into the load when
the circuit is closed again.
The dielectric strength of the capacitor
must be 200 to 300 V. If the circuit is an
AC circuit, use a capacitor with no
polarity.
No Yes The diode connected in parallel with
the load changes energy accumulated
by the coil into a current, which then
flows into the coil so that the current
will be converted into Joule heat by the
resistance of the inductive load. This
time lag, between the moment the cir-
cuit is opened and the moment the load
is reset, caused by this method is
longer than that caused by the CR
method.
The reversed dielectric strength value
of the diode must be at least 10 times
as large as the circuit voltage value.
The forward current of the diode must
be the same as or larger than the load
current.
The reversed dielectric strength value
of the diode may be two to three times
larger than the supply voltage if the arc
killer is applied to electronic circuits
with low circuit voltages.
Yes Yes The varistor method prevents the impo-
sition of high voltage between the con-
tacts by using the constant voltage
characteristic of the varistor. There is
time lag between the moment the cir-
cuit is opened and the moment the load
is reset.
If the supply voltage is 24 or 48 V,
insert the varistor in parallel with the
load. If the supply voltage is 100 to
200 V, insert the varistor between the
contacts.
---
CR method
Power
supply
Inductive
load
Power
supply
Inductive
load
Diode method
Varistor method
Inductive
load
Power
supply
Power
supply
Inductive
load
588
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
Load Short-circuit Protection and Line Disconnection Detection for
CJ1W-OD202
This section describes the load short-circuit protection of the CJ1W-OD202 Output Units.
As shown below, normally when the output bit turns ON (OUT), the transistor will turn ON and then output cur-
rent (Iout) will flow. If the output (Iout) is overloaded or short-circuited exceeding the detection current (Ilim), the
output current (Iout) will be limited as shown in Figure 2 below. When the junction temperature (Tj) of the output
transistor reaches the thermal shutdown temperature (Tstd), the output will turn OFF to protect the transistor
from being damaged, and the alarm output bit will turn ON to light the ERR indicator. When the junction tem-
perature (Tj) of the transistor drops down to the reset temperature (Tr), the ERR indicator will be automatically
reset and the output current will start flowing.
Figure 1: Normal Condition
Figure 2: Overload or Short-circuit
Line Disconnection
If the line is disconnected and the output current (Iout) drops below the line disconnection detection current
(IOL), the ERR indicator will light as shown in Figure 3.
Figure 3: Line Disconnections
OUT: OUTPUT instruction
I
OUT
: Output current
ERR: Alarm output, ERR indicator
I
lim
: Detection current
Tj: Junction temperature of transistor
Tstd: Thermal shutdown temperature
Tr: Reset temperature
OUT
ON
OFF
IOUT
ON
OFF
ERR
ON
OFF
IOL
ABC
A: Load not connected or load line broken.
B: Current to load at or below line disconnection
detection current.
C: Rise of current to load too slow and error
detected before the disconnection detection
current was reached.
When load L is connected, the ERR indicator
may light and the Alarm Output Bit may turn ON
for approximately 100 ms. The programming
example given later in this section can be used
so that an error is not detected in this case.
589
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
Operating Restrictions
Although the CJ1W-OD202 is provided with short-circuit protection, these are for protecting internal circuits
against momentary short-circuiting in the load. As shown in Figure 2 below, the short-circuit protection is auto-
matically released when the Tj equals to Tr. Therefore, unless the cause of short-circuit is removed, ON/OFF
operations will be repeated in the output. Leaving short-circuits for any length of time will cause internal tem-
perature rise, deterioration of elements, discoloration of the case or PCBs, etc. Therefore, observe the follow-
ing restrictions.
Restrictions
If a short-circuit occurs in an external load, immediately turn OFF the corresponding output and remove the
cause. The CJ1W-OD202 turns ON an alarm output bit that corresponds to the external load output number.
There is an alarm output bit for every common.
When an alarm output bit turns ON, use a self-holding bit for the alarm in the user program and turn OFF the
corresponding output.
The alarm output bit is allocated in the Basic I/O Unit Information Area (A050 to A089) for every Unit mounting
slot.
The following table shows the correspondence between output bits and bits in the Basic I/O Unit Information
Area.
For example, when the CJ1W-OD202 is mounted in slot 0 on Rack 0, A05000 will turn ON if the output 8 is
short-circuited. When the CJ1W-OD202 is mounted in slot 1 of Rack 0, A05011 will turn ON if the output m+3
is short-circuited
Programming Example
In this example, CJ1W-OD202 is mounted in slot 0 of the Rack 0.
This example shows how to turn OFF output bits CIO 000000 to CIO 000007 immediately if the alarm output bit
A05000 turns ON and how to keep the output bits OFF until the cause is removed and the bit is reset using
work bit W000001.
Output bit 0 or 1 2 or 3 4 0r 5 6 or 7
CJ1W-OD202 Mounted in even slot 0 1 2 3
Mounted in odd slot 8 9 10 11
TIM0
W00000
W00001
A05000 000100 TIM
0000
#0002
W00000
000100
000000
W00000
590
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
Load Short-circuit Protection for CJ1W-OD204/OD212/OD232/MD232
Output Units
As shown below, normally when the output bit turns ON (OUT), the transistor will turn ON and then output cur-
rent (Iout) will flow. If the output (Iout) is overloaded or short-circuited exceeding the detection current (Ilim), the
output current (Iout) will be limited as shown in Figure 2 below. When the junction temperature (Tj) of the output
transistor reaches the thermal shutdown temperature (Tstd), the output will turn OFF to protect the transistor
from being damaged, and the alarm output bit will turn ON to light the ERR indicator. When the junction tem-
perature (Tj) of the transistor drops down to the reset temperature (Tr), the ERR indicator will be automatically
reset and the output current will start flowing.
Figure 1: Normal Condition
Figure 2: Overload or Short-circuit
Operating Restrictions for the CJ1W-OD204/OD212/OD232/MD232
These Units are provided with short-circuit protection, these are for protecting internal circuits against momen-
tary short-circuiting in the load. As shown in Figure 2 below, the short-circuit protection is automatically
released when the Tj equals to Tr. Therefore, unless the cause of short-circuit is removed, ON/OFF operations
will be repeated in the output. Leaving short-circuits for any length of time will cause internal temperature rise,
deterioration of elements, discoloration of the case or PCBs, etc. Therefore, observe the following restrictions.
Restrictions
If a short-circuit occurs in an external load, immediately turn OFF the corresponding output and remove the
cause. An an alarm output bit that corresponds to the external load output number is turned ON. There is an
alarm output bit for every common.
When an alarm output bit turns ON, use a self-holding bit for the alarm in the user program and turn OFF the
corresponding output.
The alarm output bit is allocated in the Basic I/O Unit Information Area (A050 to A069) for every Unit mounting
slot.
OUT: OUTPUT instruction
IOUT: Output current
ERR: Alarm output, ERR indicator
Ilim: Detection current
Tj: Junction temperature of transistor
Tstd: Thermal shutdown temperature
Tr: Reset temperature
591
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
The following table shows the correspondence between output bits and bits in the Basic I/O Unit Information
Area.
For example, when the CJ1W-OD212 is mounted in slot 0 on Rack 0, A05000 will turn ON if the output 8 is
short-circuited. When the CJ1W-OD232 is mounted in slot 1 of Rack 0, A05009 will turn ON if the output m+1
is short-circuited
Programming Example
In this example, CJ1W-OD212 is mounted in slot 0 of the Rack 0.
This example shows how to turn OFF output bits CIO 000000 to CIO 000007 immediately if the alarm output bit
A05000 turns ON and how to keep the output bits OFF until the cause is removed and the bit is reset using
work bit W000001.
Output bit m m+1 m+2 m+3
0 to 7 8 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15
CJ1W-OD204 Mounted in even slot 0 --- --- --- ---
Mounted in odd slot 8 --- --- --- ---
CJ1W-OD212 Mounted in even slot 0 --- --- ---
Mounted in odd slot 8 --- --- ---
CJ1W-MD232 Mounted in even slot 0 --- --- ---
Mounted in odd slot 8 --- --- ---
CJ1W-OD232 Mounted in even slot 0 1 --- ---
Mounted in odd slot 8 9 --- ---
W00000
A05000 W00001
000000
A W00000
W00000
000001
B W00000
000007
H W00000
592
Specifications of Basic I/O Units Appendix A
593
Appendix B
CJ1M CPU Unit Built-in I/O Specifications
Built-in Inputs (CJ1M-CPU2@)
General-purpose Inputs
Note 1. The power supply at the line driver must be 5 V ±5%.
2. When 0 ms is set, the ON response time due to internal components delay will be 30 µs max. for IN0
to IN5 or 2 µs max. for IN6 to IN9. The OFF response time will be 150 µs max. for IN0 to IN5 or 2 µs
max. for IN6 to IN9.
Circuit Configuration
Interrupt Inputs and Quick-response Inputs (IN0 to IN3)
Inputs IN0 to IN5 IN6 to IN9 IN0 to IN5 IN6 to IN9
Input Device 2-wire sensor Line driver
Input Current 6 mA typical 5.5 mA typical 13 mA typical 10 mA typical
Input Voltage Range 24 V DC +10%/–15% RS-422A Line Driver, AM26LS31 or equivalent
(See note 1.)
Input Resistance 3.6 kΩ4.0 kΩ---
Number of Circuits 1 common per circuit
ON Voltage/ON Cur-
rent
17.4 V DC min./3 mA min. ---
OFF Voltage/OFF Cur-
rent
5 V DC max./1 mA max. ---
ON Response Time 8 ms max. (Can be switched to 0, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32 ms. See note 2.)
OFF Response Time 8 ms max. (Can be switched to 0, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32 ms. See note 2.)
Inputs IN0 to IN5 IN6 to IN9
Circuit Configuration
Item Specifications
ON Response Time 30 µs max.
OFF Response Time 150 µs max.
Response pulses
3.6 kΩ
24 V
LD+
0 V/LD
100 Ω
750 Ω
100 Ω
1000 pF
Internal circuits
4.0 kΩ
24 V
LD+
0 V/LD
100 Ω
1.5 kΩ
100 Ω
1000 pF
Internal circuits
ON
OFF
30 µs 150 µs
594
CJ1M CPU Unit Built-in I/O Specifications Appendix B
High-speed Counter Inputs (IN6 to IN9)
24-V DC Input Line Driver Input
When 60 kHz is set.
When 100 kHz is set. Count operation cannot be assured above
60 kHz.
ON
50%
OFF
ON
50%
OFF
ON
50%
OFF
T1 T2 T3 T4
16.6 µs min.
8.3 µs min. 8.3 µs min.
3 µs max. 3 µs max.
33.3 µs min.
T1, T2, T3, and T4: 4.0 µs min.
Phase-A/Phase-B encoder input, Single-phase
60-kHz pulse input with 50% duty ratio
Rise time and fall time: 3.0
µ
s max.
Phase-A/Phase-B encoder input, Differential-
phase 30-kHz pulse input
Maintain a spacing of 4.0 µs min.
between phase-A/phase-B transitions
ON
50%
OFF
ON
50%
OFF
ON
50%
OFF
T1 T2 T3 T4
16.6 µs min.
8.3 µs min. 8.3 µs min.
33.3 µs min.
T1, T2, T3, and T4: 4.0 µs min.
Phase-A/Phase-B encoder input, Single-phase
60-kHz pulse input with 50% duty ratio
Phase-A/Phase-B encoder input, Differential-
phase 50-kHz pulse input
Maintain a spacing of 4.0 µs min.
between phase-A/phase-B transitions
ON
50%
OFF
ON
50%
OFF
T1 T2 T3 T4
ON
50%
OFF
10.0 µs min.
5.0 µs min. 5.0 µs min.
20.0 µs min.
T1, T2, T3, and T4: 2.5 µs min.
Single-phase 100-kHz pulse input with
50% duty ratio
Differential-phase 50-kHz pulse input
Maintain a spacing of 2.5 µs min. between Phase
A/Phase B transitions
ON
50%
OFF
Phase-Z encoder input (IN2 and IN3)
Maintain an ON time of 30 µs min.
and an OFF time of 150 µs min.
30 µs min.
150 µs min. 30 µs min. 150 µs min.
Phase-Z encoder input (IN2 and IN3)
Maintain an ON time of 30 µs min.
and an OFF time of 150 µs min.
ON
50%
OFF
595
CJ1M CPU Unit Built-in I/O Specifications Appendix B
Note In order for the counter inputs to satisfy the specifications shown in the table
above, it will be necessary to check the factors that can affect the pulses, such
as the type of output driver in the encoder, encoder cable length, and count
pulse frequency. In particular, the rise time and fall time may be too long and
the input waveform may not be within specifications when a long encoder
cable is used to connect an encoder that has 24-V open collector outputs.
When a long cable is connected, either shorten the encoder cable or use an
encoder with line driver outputs.
Built-in Outputs (CJ1M-CPU2@)
Transistor Outputs (Sinking)
General-purpose Outputs
Pulse Outputs (OUT0 to OUT3)
Note 1. The load at the above values is taken as the resistance load, and the connecting cable impedance is
not taken into account.
2. The pulse width during actual operation may be smaller than the above values as a result of pulse
pattern distortion due to connecting cable impedance.
Outputs OUT0 to OUT3 OUT4 to OUT5
Rated Voltage 5 to 24 V DC
Operating Load Voltage
Range
4.75 to 26.4 V DC
Maximum Switching Current 0.3 A/point, 1.8 A/Unit
Number of Circuits 6 points (6 points/common)
Maximum Inrush Current 3.0 A/point, 10 ms max.
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 0.6 V max.
ON Response Time 0.1 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.1 ms max.
Fuse None
External Power Supply 10.2 to 26.4 V DC, 50 mA min.
Circuit Configuration
Item Specifications
Maximum Switching Capacity 30 mA, 4.75 to 26.4 V DC
Minimum Switching Capacity 7 mA, 4.75 to 26.4 V DC
Maximum Output Frequency 100 kHz
Output Pattern
+V
OUT 0
to
OUT 3
COM
Internal circuits
Low
voltage
circuit
+V
OUT 4
to
OUT 5
COM
Internal circuits
Low
voltage
circuit
ON
OFF 90%
10%
2 µs min.
4 µs min.
596
CJ1M CPU Unit Built-in I/O Specifications Appendix B
PWM Output Specifications (OUT4 to OUT5)
Note The CJ1M-CPU21 supports only OUT4.
Item Specifications
Maximum Switching Capacity 300 mA, 4.75 to 26.4 V DC
Maximum Output Frequency 1 kHz
PWM Output Precision ON duty +5% -0% during 1 kHz output
Output Pattern
ON
OFF
T
t
ON
50
%
ON duty = tON
TX 100%
597
Appendix C
Auxiliary Area
A000 to A447: Read-only Area, A448 to A959: Read/Write Area
Read-only Area (Set by System)
Address Name Function Status
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write timing/
Related flags,
settings
Words Bits
A000 --- 10-ms Incre-
menting Free
Running
Timer
This word contains the system timer used after the
power is turned ON.
0000 hex is set when the power is turned ON and
this value is automatically incremented by 1 every
10 ms. The value returns to 0000 hex after reaching
FFFF hex (655,350 ms), and then continues to be
automatically incremented by 1 every 10 ms.
Note: The timer will continue to be incremented
when the operating mode is switched to RUN
mode.
Example: The interval can be counted between pro-
cessing A and processing B without requir-
ing timer instructions. This is achieved by
calculating the difference between the
value in A000 for processing A and the
value in A000 for processing B. The inter-
val is counted in 10 ms units.
Retained Cleared Every 10 ms after
power is turned ON
CPU Unit with unit ver-
sion. 3.0 or later
A001 --- 100-ms Incre-
menting Free
Running
Timer
This word contains the system timer used after the
power is turned ON.
0000 hex is set when the power is turned ON and
this value is automatically incremented by 1 every
100 ms. The value returns to 0000 hex after reaching
FFFF hex (6,553,500 ms), and then continues to be
automatically incremented by 1 every 100 ms.
Note: The timer will continue to be incremented
when the operating mode is switched to RUN
mode.
Retained Cleared Every 100 ms after
power is turned ON
CPU Unit with unit ver-
sion. 3.0 or later
A002 --- 1-s Increment-
ing Free Run-
ning Timer
This word contains a system timer used after the
power is turned ON
0000 hex is set when the power is turned ON and
this value is automatically incremented by 1 every
1 s. The value returns to 0000 hex after reaching
FFFF hex (65,535 s), and then continues to be auto-
matically incremented by 1 every 1 s.
Note: The timer will continue to be incremented
when the operating mode is switched to RUN
mode.
Retained Cleared Every 1 s after power is
turned ON
CPU Unit with unit ver-
sion. 4.0 or later
A050 A05000
to
A05007
Basic I/O Unit
Information,
Rack 0 Slot 0
A bit will turn ON to indicate when the load short-cir-
cuit protection function alarm output has been given.
Only the 4 most LSB are used for the CJ1W-OD202
(2 points per bit), only the LSB is used for the CJ1W-
OD212, OD204, MD232 and only the two most LSB
are used for the CJ1W-OD232. Each bit indicates the
status for one circuit.
1: Short circuited
0: Normal
--- --- Refreshed each cycle.
A05008
to
A05015
Basic I/O Unit
Information,
Rack 0 Slot 1
--- ---
A051 to
A069
A05100
to
A06915
Basic I/O Unit
Information,
Racks 2 to 7
--- ---
A090 to
A093
--- User Program
Date
These words contain in BCD the date and time that
the user program was last overwritten.
A09000 to A09007: Seconds (00 to 59)
A09008 to A09015: Minutes (00 to 59)
A09100 to A09107: Hour (00 to 23)
A09108 to A09115: Day of month (01 to 31)
A09200 to A09207: Month (01 to 12)
A09208 to A09215: Year (00 to 99)
A09308 to A09307: Day of the week
(00: Sunday, 01: Monday, 02: Tuesday, 03: Wednes-
day, 04: Thursday, 05: Friday, 06: Saturday)
Retained Retained Not supported by
CJ1@-CPU@@ CPU
Units
A094 to
A097
--- Parameter
Date
These words contain in BCD the date and time that
the parameters were last overwritten.
The format is the same as above
Retained Retained Not supported by
CJ1@-CPU@@ CPU
Units
598
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
A099 A09900 UM Read Pro-
tection Status
Indicates whether the entire user program in the PLC
is read-protected.
0: UM not read-protected.
1: UM read-protected.
Retained Retained When protection is set
or cleared
CPU Unit with unit ver-
sion 2 or later
A09901 Task Read
Protection
Status
Indicates whether read protection is set for individual
tasks.
0: Tasks not read-protected.
1: Tasks read-protected.
Retained Retained When protection is set
or cleared
CPU Unit with unit ver-
sion 2 or later
A09902 Program Write
Protection
Status when
Read Protec-
tion Is Set
Indicates whether the program is write-protected.
0: Write-enabled.
1: Write-protected.
Retained Retained When protection is set
or cleared
CPU Unit with unit ver-
sion 2 or later
A09903 Enable/Dis-
able Status for
Backing Up
the Program
to a Memory
Card
Indicates whether creating a backup program file
(.OBJ) is enabled or disabled.
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
Retained Retained When protection is set
or cleared
CPU Unit with unit ver-
sion 2 or later
A09914 IR/DR Opera-
tion between
Ta s k s
Turn ON this bit to share index and data registers
between all tasks. Turn OFF this bit to use separate
index and data registers between in each task.
0: Independent
1: Shared (default)
Retained Retained Not supported by
CJ1@-CPU@@ CPU
Units
A09915 Timer/Counter
PV Refresh
Mode Flag
Indicates whether the CPU Unit is operating in BCD
mode or binary mode.
0: BCD mode
1: Binary mode
Retained Retained Not supported by
CJ1@-CPU@@ CPU
Units
A100 to
A199
All Error Log
Area
When an error has occurred, the error code, error
contents, and error’s time and date are stored in the
Error Log Area. Information on the 20 most recent
errors can be stored.
Each error record occupies 5 words; the function of
these 5 words is as follows:
1) Error code (bits 0 to 15)
2) Error contents (bits 0 to 15)
Error contents:
Address of Aux. Area word with details or 0000.
3) Minutes (bits 8 to 15), Seconds (bits 0 to 7)
Seconds: 00 to 59, BCD
Minutes: 00 to 59, BCD
4) Day of month (bits 8 to 15), Hours (bits 0 to 7)
Hours: 00 to 23, BCD
Day of month: 01 to 31, BCD
5) Year (bits 8 to 15),
Month (bits 0 to 7)
Year: 00 to 99, BCD
Month: 00 to 12, BCD
Errors generated by FAL(006) and FALS(007) will
also be stored in this Error Log.
The Error Log Area can be reset from a Program-
ming Device.
If the Error Log Area is full (20 records) and another
error occurs, the oldest record in A100 to A104 will
be cleared, the other 19 records are shifted down,
and the new record is stored in A195 to A199.
Retained Retained Refreshed when error
occurs.
A50014
A300
A400
Address Name Function Status
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write timing/
Related flags,
settings
Words Bits
599
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
A200 A20011 First Cycle
Flag
ON for one cycle after PLC operation begins (after
the mode is switched from PROGRAM to RUN or
MONITOR, for example).
ON for the first cycle
--- --- ---
A20012 Step Flag ON for one cycle when step execution is started with
STEP(008). This flag can be used for initialization
processing at the beginning of a step.
ON for the first cycle after execution of STEP(008).
Cleared --- ---
A20014 Task Started
Flag
When a task switches from WAIT or INI to RUN sta-
tus, this flag will be turned ON within the task for one
cycle only.
1: ON for first cycle (including transitions from WAIT
and IN)
0: Other
The only difference between this flag and A20015 is
that this flag also turns ON when the task switches
from WAIT to RUN status.
Cleared Cleared Not supported by
CJ1@-CPU@@ CPU
Units
A20015 First Task
Startup Flag
ON when a task is executed for the first time. This
flag can be used to check whether the current task is
being executed for the first time so that initialization
processing can be performed if necessary.
1: First execution
0: Not executable for the first time or not being exe-
cuted.
Cleared --- ---
A201 A20110 Online Editing
Wait Flag
ON when an online editing process is waiting.
1: Waiting for online editing
0: Not waiting for online editing
(If another online editing command is received while
waiting, the other command won’t be recorded and
an error will occur.)
Cleared Cleared A527
A20111 Online Editing
Flag
ON when an online editing process is being exe-
cuted.
1: Online editing in progress
0: Online editing not in progress
Cleared Cleared A527
A202 A20200
to
A20207
Communica-
tions Port
Enabled Flags
ON when a network instruction (SEND, RECV,
CMND, PMCR, TXDU, or RXDU) or background exe-
cution (CJ1-H and CJ1M CPU Units only) can be
executed with the corresponding port number. Bits
00 to 07 correspond to communications ports 0 to 7.
1: Network instruction is not being executed
0: Network instruction is being executed (port busy)
When two or more network instructions are pro-
grammed with the same port number, use the corre-
sponding flag as an execution condition to prevent
the instructions from being executed simultaneously.
(The flag for a given port is turned OFF while a net-
work instruction with that port number is being exe-
cuted.)
(When the simple backup operation is used to per-
formed a write or compare operation for a Memory
Card on a CJ1-H or CJ1M CPU Unit, a communica-
tions port will be automatically allocated, and the cor-
responding Flag will be turned OFF.)
Cleared --- ---
A20215 Network Com-
munications
Port Alloca-
tion Enabled
Flag
ON when there is a communications port available
for automatic allocation when executing communica-
tions instructions (SEND, RECV, CMND, PMCR,
TXDU, or RXDU).
1: Communications port available
0: Communications port not available
Note: Use this flag to confirm whether a communica-
tions port is available for automatic allocation before
executing communications instructions when using 9
or more communications instructions simultaneously.
Cleared --- ---
Address Name Function Status
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write timing/
Related flags,
settings
Words Bits
600
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
A203 to
A210
All Communica-
tions Port
Completion
Codes
These words contain the completion codes for the
corresponding port numbers when network instruc-
tions (SEND, RECV, CMND, or PMCR) or back-
ground execution (CJ1-H CPU Units only) have been
executed.
(The corresponding word will be cleared when back-
ground execution has been completed for CJ1-H
CPU Units.)
Words A203 to A210 correspond to communications
ports 0 to 7.
Non-zero: Error code
0000: Normal condition
The following codes will be stored when an Explicit
Message Instruction (EXPLT, EGATR, ESATR,
ECHRD, or ECHWR) has been executed.
If the Explicit Communications Error Flag turns OFF,
0000 hex is stored.
If the Explicit Communications Error Flag is ON and
the Network Communications Error Flag is ON, the
FINS end code is stored.
If the Explicit Communications Error Flag is ON and
the Network Communications Error Flag is OFF, the
explicit message end code is stored.
During communications, 0000 hex will be stored and
the suitable code will be stored when execution has
been completed. The code will be cleared when
operation is started.
(The completion code for a given port is cleared to
0000 when a network instruction with that port num-
ber is executed.)
(When the simple backup operation is used to per-
formed a write or compare operation for a Memory
Card on a CS1-H CPU Unit, a communications port
will be automatically allocated, and a completion
code will be stored in the corresponding word.)
(The completion code for a given port is cleared to
0000 when a network instruction with that port num-
ber is executed.)
(When the simple backup operation is used to per-
formed a write or compare operation for a Memory
Card on a CJ1-H or CJ1M CPU Unit, a communica-
tions port will be automatically allocated, and a com-
pletion code will be stored in the corresponding
word.)
Cleared --- ---
A213 A21300
to
A21307
Explicit Com-
munications
Error Flag
Turn ON when an error occurs in executing an
Explicit Message Instruction (EXPLT, EGATR,
ESATR, ECHRD, or ECHWR).
Bits 00 to 07 correspond to communications ports 0
to 7.
1: Error end
0: Normal end
The corresponding bit will turn ON both when the
explicit message cannot be sent and when an error
response is returned for the explicit message.
The status will be maintained until the next explicit
message communication is executed. The bit will
always turn OFF when the next Explicit Message
Instruction is executed.
Cleared --- A21900 to A21907
A203 to A210
A214 A21400
to
A21407
First Cycle
Flags after
Network Com-
munications
Finished
Each flag will turn ON for just one cycle after commu-
nications have been completed. Bits 00 to 07 corre-
spond to ports 0 to 7. Use the Used Communications
Port Number stored in A218 to determine which flag
to access.
1: First cycle after communications finish only
2: Other status
Note: These flags are not effective until the next
cycle after the communications instruction is exe-
cuted. Delay accessing them for at least one cycle.
Retained Cleared ---
Address Name Function Status
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write timing/
Related flags,
settings
Words Bits
601
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
A215 A21500
to
A21507
First Cycle
Flags after
Network Com-
munications
Error
Each flag will turn ON for just one cycle after a com-
munications error occurs. Bits 00 to 07 correspond to
ports 0 to 7. Use the Used Communications Port
Number stored in A218 to determine which flag to
access. Determine the cause of the error according
to the Communications Port Completion Codes
stored in A203 to A210.
1: First cycle after communications error only
0: Other status
Note: These flags are not effective until the next
cycle after the communications instruction is exe-
cuted. Delay accessing them for at least one cycle.
Retained Cleared ---
A216 to
A217
All Network Com-
munications
Completion
Code Storage
Address
The completion code for a communications instruc-
tion is automatically stored at the address with the
I/O memory address given in these words. Place this
address into an index register and use indirect
addressing through the index register to read the
communications completion code.
Retained Cleared ---
A218 All Used Commu-
nications Port
Numbers
Stores the communications port numbers used when
a communications instruction is executed using auto-
matic communication port allocations.
0000 to 0007 hex: Communications port 0 to 7
Retained Cleared ---
A219 A21900
to
A21907
Communica-
tions Port
Error Flags
ON when an error occurred during execution of a net-
work instruction (SEND, RECV, CMND, or PMCR).
Bits 00 to 07 correspond to communications ports 0
to 7.
1: Error occurred
0: Normal condition
(When the simple backup operation is used to per-
formed a write or compare operation for a Memory
Card on a CJ1-H or CJ1M CPU Unit, a communica-
tions port will be automatically allocated, and the
corresponding Flag will be turned OFF if an error
occurs.)
Retained --- ---
A220 to
A259
A22000
to
25915
Basic I/O Unit
Input
Response
Times
These words contain the actual input response
times.
0 to 17 hexadecimal
When the Basic I/O Unit input response time setting
is changed in the PLC Setup while the PLC is in
PROGRAM mode, the setting in the PLC Setup will
not match the actual value in the Basic I/O Unit
unless the power is turned OFF and then ON again.
In that case, the actual value can be monitored in
these words.
Retained See
function
column.
PLC Setup (Basic I/O
Unit Input response
time settings)
A260 All I/O Allocation
Status
Indicates the current status of I/O allocation, i.e.,
Automatic I/O Allocation at Startup or User-set I/O
Allocations.
0000 hex: Automatic I/O Allocation at Startup
BBBB hex: User-set I/O Allocations
Retained Retained ---
Address Name Function Status
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write timing/
Related flags,
settings
Words Bits
602
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
A261 A26100 I/O Table
Creation Error
Details (Not
supported by
CJ1@-
CPU@@ CPU
Units.)
ON: Error in CPU Bus Unit Setup
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: Error in CPU Bus Unit Setup
OFF: I/O tables generated normally
Retained Cleared When I/O tables are
generated
A26102 ON: Overflow in maximum number of I/O points
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: Overflow in maximum number of I/O points
OFF: I/O tables generated normally
A40111 (Too many I/O
points)
A26103 ON: The same unit number was used more than
once.
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: The same unit number was used more than
once.
OFF: I/O tables generated normally
A40113 (duplicated
number)
A26104 ON: I/O bus error
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: I/O bus error
OFF: I/O tables generated normally
A40114
(I/O but error)
A26107 ON: Error in a Special I/O Unit
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: Error in a Special I/O Unit
OFF: I/O tables generated normally
A26109 ON: I/O detection has not been completed.
Turns OFF when I/O tables are generated normally.
ON: I/O detection has not been completed.
OFF: I/O tables generated normally
A262
and
A263
All Maximum
Cycle Time
These words contain the maximum cycle time (the
maximum cycle time of the program execution cycle
for a Parallel Processing Mode) since the start of PLC
operation. The cycle time is recorded in 8-digit hexa-
decimal with the leftmost 4 digits in A263 and the
rightmost 4 digits in A262.
0 to FFFFFFFF: 0 to 429,496,729.5 ms (0.1 ms units)
Cleared Cleared ---
A264
and
A265
All Present Cycle
Time
These words contain the present cycle time (the
maximum cycle time of the program execution cycle
for a Parallel Processing Mode) in 8-digit hexadeci-
mal with the leftmost 4 digits in A265 and the right-
most 4 digits in A264.
0 to FFFFFFFF: 0 to 429,496,729.5 ms
Cleared Cleared ---
A266
and
A267
All Program Exe-
cution Time+
Priority
Peripheral
Servicing
Time
Total of all slice times for program execution and all
slice times for peripheral servicing.
00000000 to FFFFFFFF hex
0.0 to 429,496,729.5 ms (0.1-ms increments)
Cleared Cleared ---
A268 All Peripheral
Servicing
Cycle Time
(CJ1-H CPU
Units only)
In Parallel Processing with Synchronous or Asyn-
chronous Memory Access, this word contains the
peripheral servicing cycle time. The time is updated
every cycle and is recorded in 16-bit binary.
0 to 4E20 hex, (0.0 to 2,000.0 ms in units of 0.1 ms)
Cleared Cleared Refreshed each periph-
eral processing cycle
A40515
A270 to
A271
(See
note.)
All High-speed
Counter 0 PV
Contains the PV of high-speed counter 0. A271 con-
tains the leftmost 4 digits and A270 contains the
rightmost 4 digits.
Cleared Cleared Refreshed each cycle
during oversee
process.
Refreshed when
PRV(881) instruction is
executed.
A272 to
A273
(See
note.)
All High-speed
Counter 1 PV
Contains the PV of high-speed counter 1. A273 con-
tains the leftmost 4 digits and A272 contains the
rightmost 4 digits.
Cleared Cleared Refreshed each cycle
during oversee pro-
cess.
Refreshed when
PRV(881) instruction is
executed.
Address Name Function Status
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write timing/
Related flags,
settings
Words Bits
603
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
A274
(See
note.)
A27400 High-speed
Counter 0
Range 1 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
These flags indicate whether the PV is within the
specified ranges when high-speed counter 0 is being
operated in range-comparison mode.
Cleared at beginning of operation.
Cleared when range comparison table is registered.
0: PV not in range
1: PV in range
Cleared Cleared Refreshed each cycle
during oversee pro-
cess.
Refreshed when
PRV(881) instruction is
executed.
A27401 High-speed
Counter 0
Range 2 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A27402 High-speed
Counter 0
Range 3 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A27403 High-speed
Counter 0
Range 4 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A27404 High-speed
Counter 0
Range 5 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A27405 High-speed
Counter 0
Range 6 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A27406 High-speed
Counter 0
Range 7 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A27407 High-speed
Counter 0
Range 8 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A27408 High-speed
Counter 0
Comparison
In-progress
Flag
This flag indicates whether a comparison operation is
being executed for high-speed counter 0.
Cleared at beginning of operation.
0: Stopped.
1: Being executed.
Retained Cleared Refreshed when com-
parison operation starts
or stops.
A27409 High-speed
Counter 0
Overflow/
Underflow
Flag
This flag indicates when an overflow or underflow
has occurred in the high-speed counter 0 PV. (Used
with the linear mode counting range only.)
Cleared when operation starts.
Cleared when PV is changed.
0: Normal
1: Overflow or underflow
Cleared Cleared Refreshed when an
overflow or underflow
occurs.
A27410 High-speed
Counter 0
Count Direc-
tion
This flag indicates whether the high-speed counter is
currently being incremented or decremented. The
counter PV for the current cycle is compared with the
PLC in last cycle to determine the direction.
0: Decrementing
1: Incrementing
Retained Cleared Setting used for high-
speed counter, valid
during counter opera-
tion.
Address Name Function Status
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write timing/
Related flags,
settings
Words Bits
604
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
A275
(See
note.)
A27500 High-speed
Counter 1
Range 1 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
These flags indicate whether the PV is within the
specified ranges when high-speed counter 1 is being
operated in range-comparison mode.
Cleared when operation starts.
Cleared when range comparison table is registered.
0: PV not in range
1: PV in range
Cleared Cleared Refreshed each cycle
during overseeing pro-
cess.
Refreshed when
PRV(881) instruction is
executed for the corre-
sponding counter.
A27501 High-speed
Counter 1
Range 2 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A27502 High-speed
Counter 1
Range 3 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A27503 High-speed
Counter 1
Range 4 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A27504 High-speed
Counter 1
Range 5 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A27505 High-speed
Counter 1
Range 6 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A27506 High-speed
Counter 1
Range 7 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A27507 High-speed
Counter 1
Range 8 Com-
parison Condi-
tion Met Flag
A27508 High-speed
Counter 1
Comparison
In-progress
Flag
This flag indicates whether a comparison operation is
being executed for high-speed counter 1.
Cleared when operation starts.
0: Stopped.
1: Being executed
Retained Cleared Refreshed when com-
parison operation starts
or stops.
A27509 High-speed
Counter 1
Overflow/
Underflow
Flag
This flag indicates when an overflow or underflow
has occurred in the high-speed counter 1 PV. (Used
with the linear mode counting range only.)
Cleared when operation starts.
Cleared when the PV is changed.
0: Normal
1: Overflow or underflow
Cleared Cleared Refreshed when an
overflow or underflow
occurs.
A27510 High-speed
Counter 1
Count Direc-
tion
This flag indicates whether the high-speed counter is
currently being incremented or decremented. The
counter PV for the current cycle is compared with the
PC in last cycle to determine the direction.
0: Decrementing
1: Incrementing
Retained Cleared Setting used for high-
speed counter, valid
during counter opera-
tion.
Address Name Function Status
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write timing/
Related flags,
settings
Words Bits
605
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
A276 to
A277
(See
note.)
All Pulse Output
0 PV
Contain the number of pulses output from the corre-
sponding pulse output port.
PV range: 80000000 to 7FFFFFFF hex
(-2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647)
When pulses are being output in the CW direction,
the PV is incremented by 1 for each pulse.
When pulses are being output in the CCW direction,
the PV is decremented by 1 for each pulse.
PV after overflow: 7FFFFFFF hex
PV after underflow: 80000000 hex
A277 contains the leftmost 4 digits and A276 con-
tains the rightmost 4 digits of the pulse output 0 PV.
A279 contains the leftmost 4 digits and A278 con-
tains the rightmost 4 digits of the pulse output 1 PV.
Cleared when operation starts.
Note If the coordinate system is relative coordi-
nates (undefined origin), the PV will be
cleared to 0 when a pulse output starts, i.e.
when a pulse output instruction (SPED(885),
ACC(888), or PLS2(887)) is executed.
Retained Cleared Refreshed each cycle
during oversee pro-
cess.
Refreshed when the
INI(880) instruction is
executed (PV change).
A278 to
A279
(See
note.)
All Pulse Output
1 PV
A280
(See
note.)
A28000 Pulse Output
0 Accel/Decel
Flag
This flag will be ON when pulses are being output
from pulse output 0 according to an ACC(888) or
PLS2(887) instruction and the output frequency is
being changed in steps (accelerating or decelerat-
ing).
Cleared when operation starts or stops.
0: Constant speed
1: Accelerating or decelerating
Retained Cleared Refreshed each cycle
during oversee pro-
cess.
A28001 Pulse Output
0
Overflow/
Underflow
Flag
This flag indicates when an overflow or underflow
has occurred in the pulse output 0 PV.
Cleared when operation starts.
0: Normal
1: Overflow or underflow
Retained Cleared Cleared when the PV is
changed by the
INI(880) instruction.
Refreshed when an
overflow or underflow
occurs.
A28002 Pulse Output
0 Output
Amount Set
Flag
ON when the number of output pulses for pulse out-
put 0 has been set with the PULS(886) instruction.
Cleared when operation starts or stops.
0: No setting
1: Setting made
Retained Cleared Refreshed when the
PULS(886) instruction
is executed.
Refreshed when pulse
output stops.
A28003 Pulse Output
0 Output
Completed
Flag
ON when the number of output pulses set with the
PULS(886) or PLS2(887) instruction has been output
through pulse output 0.
Cleared when operation starts or stops.
0: Output not completed.
1: Output completed.
Retained Cleared Refreshed at the start
or completion of pulse
output in independent
mode.
A28004 Pulse Output
0 Output In-
progress Flag
ON when pulses are being output from pulse output
0.
Cleared when operation starts or stops.
0: Stopped
1: Outputting pulses.
Retained Cleared Refreshed when pulse
output starts or stops.
A28005 Pulse Output
0 No-origin
Flag
ON when the origin has not been determined for
pulse output 0 and goes OFF when the origin has
been determined.
Turned ON when power is turned ON.
Turned ON when operation starts.
0: Origin established.
1: Origin not established.
Retained ON Refreshed each cycle
during the overseeing
processes.
A28006 Pulse Output
0 At-origin
Flag
ON when the pulse output PV matches the origin (0).
0: Not stopped at origin.
1: Stopped at origin.
Retained Cleared Refreshed each cycle
during the overseeing
processes.
A28007 Pulse Output
0 Output
Stopped Error
Flag
ON when an error occurred while outputting pulses in
the pulse output 0 origin search function.
The Pulse Output 0 Output Stop Error code will be
written to A444.
0: No error
1: Stop error occurred.
Retained Cleared Refreshed when origin
search starts.
Refreshed when a
pulse output stop error
occurs.
Address Name Function Status
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write timing/
Related flags,
settings
Words Bits
606
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
A281
(See
note.)
A28100 Pulse Output
1 Accel/Decel
Flag
This flag will be ON when pulses are being output
from pulse output 1 according to an ACC(888) or
PLS2(887) instruction and the output frequency is
being changed in steps (accelerating or decelerat-
ing).
Cleared when operation starts or stops.
0: Constant speed
1: Accelerating or decelerating
Retained Cleared Refreshed each cycle
during oversee pro-
cess.
A28101 Pulse Output
1
Overflow/
Underflow
Flag
This flag indicates when an overflow or underflow
has occurred in the pulse output 1 PV.
Cleared when operation starts.
0: Normal
1: Overflow or underflow
Retained Cleared Refreshed when the
PV is changed by the
INI(880) instruction.
Refreshed when an
overflow or underflow
occurs.
A28102 Pulse Output
1 Output
Amount Set
Flag
ON when the number of output pulses for pulse out-
put 1 has been set with the PULS(886) instruction.
Cleared when operation starts or stops.
0: No setting
1: Setting made
Retained Cleared Refreshed when the
PULS(886) instruction
is executed.
A28103 Pulse Output
1 Output
Completed
Flag
ON when the number of output pulses set with the
PULS(886) or PLS2(887) instruction has been output
through pulse output 1.
Cleared when operation starts or stops.
0: Output not completed.
1: Output completed.
Retained Cleared Refreshed when
PULS(886)(886)
instruction is executed.
Refreshed at the start
or completion of pulse
output.
A28104 Pulse Output
1 Output In-
progress Flag
ON when pulses are being output from pulse output
1.
Cleared when operation starts or stops.
0: Stopped
1: Outputting pulses.
Retained Cleared Refreshed when pulse
output starts or stops.
A28105 Pulse Output
1 No-origin
Flag
ON when the origin has not been determined for
pulse output 1 and goes OFF when the origin has
been determined.
Turned ON when power is turned ON.
Turned ON when operation starts.
0: Origin established.
1: Origin not established.
Retained ON Refreshed each cycle
during overseeing pro-
cesses.
A28106 Pulse Output
1 At-origin
Flag
ON when the pulse output PV matches the origin (0).
0: Not stopped at origin.
1: Stopped at origin.
Retained Cleared Refreshed each cycle
during overseeing pro-
cesses.
A28107 Pulse Output
1 Output
Stopped Error
Flag
ON when an error occurred while outputting pulses in
the pulse output 1 origin search function.
The Pulse Output 1 Output Stop Error code will be
written to A445.
0: No error
1: Stop error occurred.
Retained Cleared Refreshed when origin
search starts.
Refreshed when pulse
output stop error
occurs.
A283
(See
note.)
A28300 PWM(891)
Output 0 Out-
put In-
progress Flag
ON when pulses are being output from PWM(891)
output 0.
0: Stopped
1: Outputting pulses.
Retained Cleared Refreshed when pulse
output starts or stops.
A28308 PWM(891)
Output 1 Out-
put In-
progress Flag
ON when pulses are being output from PWM(891)
output 1.
0: Stopped
1: Outputting pulses.
Retained Cleared
A294 All Task Number
when Program
Stopped
This word contains the task number of the task that
was being executed when program execution was
stopped because of a program error.
Normal tasks: 0000 to 001F
(task 0 to 31)
Interrupt tasks: 8000 to 80FF
(task 0 to 255)
(A298 and A299 contain the program address where
program execution was stopped.)
Cleared Cleared A298/A299
Address Name Function Status
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write timing/
Related flags,
settings
Words Bits
607
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
A295 A29508 Instruction
Processing
Error Flag
This flag and the Error Flag (ER) will be turned ON
when an instruction processing error has occurred
and the PLC Setup has been set to stop operation for
an instruction error. CPU Unit operation will stop and
the ERR/ALM indicator will light when this flag goes
ON.
1: Error Flag ON
0: Error Flag OFF
Cleared Cleared PLC Setup (Operation
when instruction error
has occurred)
The task number where
the error is stored in
A294 and the program
address is stored in
A298 and A299.
A29509 Indirect DM/
EM BCD Error
Flag
This flag and the Access Error Flag (AER) will be
turned ON when an indirect DM/EM BCD error has
occurred and the PLC Setup has been set to stop
operation an indirect DM/EM BCD error. (This error
occurs when the content of an indirectly addressed
DM or EM word is not BCD although BCD mode has
been selected.) CPU Unit operation will stop and the
ERR/ALM indicator will light when this flag goes ON.
1: Not BCD
0: Normal
Cleared Cleared
A29510 Illegal Access
Error Flag
This flag and the Access Error Flag (AER) will be
turned ON when an illegal access error has occurred
and the PLC Setup has been set to stop operation an
illegal access error. (This error occurs when a region
of memory is access illegally.) CPU Unit operation
will stop and the ERR/ALM indicator will light when
this flag goes ON.
The following operations are considered illegal
access:
1) Reading/writing the system area
2) Reading/writing EM File Memory
3) Writing to a write-protected area
4) Indirect DM/EM BCD error (in BCD mode)
1: Illegal access occurred
0: Normal condition
Cleared Cleared
A295 A29511 No END Error
Flag
ON when there isn’t an END(001) instruction in each
program within a task.
CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR/ALM indi-
cator will light when this flag goes ON.
1: No END
0: Normal condition
Cleared Cleared The task number where
the error is stored in
A294 and the program
address is stored in
A298 and A299.
A29512 Task Error
Flag
ON when a task error has occurred. The following
conditions generate a task error.
There isn’t even one regular task that is executable
(started).
There isn’t a program allocated to the task.
1: Error
0: Normal
Cleared Cleared
A29513 Differentiation
Overflow Error
Flag
The allowed value for Differentiation Flags which cor-
respond to differentiation instructions has been
exceeded. CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR/
ALM indicator will light when this flag goes ON.
1: Error
0: Normal
Cleared Cleared
A29514 Illegal Instruc-
tion Error Flag
ON when a program that cannot be executed has
been stored. CPU Unit operation will stop and the
ERR/ALM indicator will light when this flag goes ON.
1: Error
0: Normal
Cleared Cleared
A29515 UM Overflow
Error Flag
ON when the last address in UM (User Memory) has
been exceeded. CPU Unit operation will stop and the
ERR/ALM indicator will light when this flag goes ON.
1: Error
0: Normal
Cleared Cleared
Address Name Function Status
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write timing/
Related flags,
settings
Words Bits
608
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
A298 to
A299
All Program
Address
Where Pro-
gram Stopped
These words contain the 8-digit binary program
address of the instruction where program execution
was stopped due to a program error.
Cleared Cleared (A294 contains the task
number of the task
where program execu-
tion was stopped.)
A300 All Error Log
Pointer
When an error occurs, the Error Log Pointer is incre-
mented by 1 to indicate the location where the next
error record will be recorded as an offset from the
beginning of the Error Log Area (A100 to A199).
00 to 14 hexadecimal
The Error Log Pointer can be cleared to 00 by turning
A50014 (the Error Log Reset Bit) from OFF to ON.
When the Error Log Pointer has reached 14 (20 deci-
mal), the next record is stored in A195 to A199 when
the next error occurs.
Retained Retained Refreshed when error
occurs.
A50014
A301 All Current EM
Bank
This word contains the current EM bank number in 4-
digit hexadecimal. The current bank number can be
changed with the EMBC(281) instruction.
0000 to 000C hexadecimal
Cleared Cleared ---
A302 A30200
to
A30215
CPU Bus Unit
Initializing
Flags
These flags are ON while the corresponding CPU
Bus Unit is initializing after its CPU Bus Unit Restart
Bit (A50100 to A50115) is turned from OFF to ON or
the power is turned ON.
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to 15.
Use these flags in the program to prevent the CPU
Bus Unit’s refresh data from being used while the
Unit is initializing. IORF(097) and FIORF(225) (CJ1-
H-R CPU Units only) cannot be executed while an
CPU Bus Unit is initializing.
0: Not initializing
1: Initializing
(Reset to 0 automatically after initialization.)
These bits are turned OFF automatically when initial-
ization is completed.
Retained Cleared Written during initializa-
tion
A50100
A330 to
A335
A33000
to
A33515
Special I/O
Unit Initializ-
ing Flags
These flags are ON while the corresponding Special
I/O Unit is initializing after its Special I/O Unit Restart
Bit (A50200 to A50715) is turned from OFF to ON or
the power is turned ON.
The bits in these words correspond to unit numbers 0
to 95 as follows:
A33000 to A33015: Units 0 to 15
A33100 to A33115: Units 16 to 31
----
A33500 to A33515: Units 80 to 95
Use these flags in the program to prevent the Special
I/O Unit’s refresh data from being used while the Unit
is initializing. Also, IORF(097) and FIORF(225) (CJ1-
H-R CPU Units only) cannot be executed while a
Special I/O Unit is initializing.
0: Not initializing
1: Initializing
(Reset to 0 automatically after initialization.)
These bits are turned OFF automatically when initial-
ization is completed.
Retained Cleared A50200 to A50715
A336 A33600
to
A33616
Units
Detected at
Startup
(Racks 0 to 3)
(CJ1-H and
CJ1M CPU
Units only)
The number of Units detected on each Rack is stored
in 1-digit hexadecimal (0 to A hex).
Rack 0: A33600 to A33603
Rack 1: A33604 to A33607
Rack 2: A33608 to A33611
Rack 3: A33612 to A33615
Example: The following would be stored if Rack 0
had 1 Unit, Rack 1 had 4 Units, Rack 2 had 8 Units
and Rack 3 had 10 Units:
A336 = A 8 4 1
Retained Cleared Not supported by
CJ1@-CPU@@ CPU
Units.
Address Name Function Status
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write timing/
Related flags,
settings
Words Bits
609
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
A339
and
A340
All Maximum Dif-
ferentiation
Flag Number
These words contain the maximum value of the dif-
ferentiation flag numbers being used by differentia-
tion instructions.
See
Function
column.
Cleared Written at the start of
operation
A29513
A343 A34300
to
A34302
Memory Card
Ty p e
Indicates the type of Memory Card, if any, installed.
0: None
4: Flash ROM
This information is recorded when the PLC power is
turned ON or the Memory Card power switch is
turned ON.
Retained See
Func-
tion col-
umn.
See Function column.
A34306 EM File Mem-
ory Format
Error Flag
ON when a format error occurs in the first EM bank
allocated for file memory.
1: Format error
0: No format error
(The flag is turned OFF when formatting is com-
pleted normally.)
Retained Cleared ---
A34307 Memory Card
Format Error
Flag
ON when the Memory Card is not formatted or a for-
matting error has occurred. (The flag is turned OFF
when formatting is completed normally.)
1: Format error
0: No format error
This flag is written when the PLC power is turned ON
or the Memory Card power switch is turned ON.
Retained See
Func-
tion col-
umn.
See Function column.
A34308 File Transfer
Error Flag
ON when an error occurred while writing data to file
memory.
1: Error
0: No error
Retained Cleared Refreshed when file
data is written.
A34309 File Write
Error Flag
ON when data cannot be written to file memory
because it is write-protected or the data exceeds the
capacity of the file memory.
1: Write not possible
0: Normal condition
Retained Cleared Refreshed when file
data is written.
A34310 File Read
Error
ON when a file could not be read because of a mal-
function (file is damaged or data is corrupted).
1: Read not possible
0: Normal condition
Retained Cleared Refreshed when file
data is read.
A34311 File Missing
Flag
ON when an attempt is made to read a file that
doesn’t exist, or an attempt is made to write to a file
in a directory that doesn’t exist.
1: Specified file or directory is missing
0: Normal condition
Retained Cleared Refreshed when file
data is read.
A343 A34313 File Memory
Operation
Flag
ON while any of the following operations is being
executed. OFF when none of them are being exe-
cuted.
CMND instruction sending a FINS command to the
local CPU Unit.
Execution of a File Memory instruction.
Program replacement using the control bit in the Aux-
iliary Area.
Easy backup operation.
1: Instruction being executed.
0: Instruction not being executed.
Retained Cleared Refreshed when file
memory instruction is
executed.
A34314 Accessing File
Data Flag
ON while file data is being accessed. Use this flag to
prevent two file memory instructions from being exe-
cuted at the same time.
1: File being accessed
0: File not being accessed
Retained Cleared ---
A34315 Memory Card
Detected Flag
ON when a Memory Card has been detected.
OFF when a Memory Card has not been detected.
1: Memory Card detected
0: Memory Card not detected
Retained Cleared Refreshed when Mem-
ory Card is inserted, or
the power is turned
ON.
Address Name Function Status
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write timing/
Related flags,
settings
Words Bits
610
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
A344 All EM File Mem-
ory Starting
Bank
(CJ1 and CJ1-
H CPU Units
only.)
Contains the starting bank number of EM file mem-
ory (bank number of the first formatted bank). All EM
banks from this starting bank to the last bank in EM
are formatted for use as file memory.
To convert the EM Area for use as file memory, first
set the PLC Setup’s EM File Memory Function set-
ting to 1, set the PLC Setup’s EM File Memory Start-
ing Bank setting, and then format the EM Area from a
Programming Device
The PLC Setup’s EM file memory settings won’t
agree with the actual settings unless the EM Area is
formatted after the PLC Setup’s EM file memory set-
tings have been changed. In that case, the actual
settings can be determined with this word.
Retained Retained Refreshed when EM
file formatting is per-
formed.
PLC Setup (EM File
Memory Function set-
ting and EM File Mem-
ory Starting Bank
setting)
A345 A34500 FB Program
Data Flag
Turns ON if the FB program memory contains FB
program data.
Retained Retained When program is
downloaded
A34501 Program Index
File Flag
Turns ON when the comment memory contains a
program index file.
When program is
downloaded
A34502 Comment File
Flag
Turns ON when the comment memory contains a
comment file.
A34503 Symbol Table
File Flag
Turns ON when the comment memory contains a
symbol table file.
A346
and
A347
All Number of
Remaining
Words to
Transfer
These words contain the 8-digit hexadecimal number
of words remaining to be transferred by FREAD(700)
or FWRIT(701). When one of these instructions is
executed, the number of words to be transferred is
written to A346 and A347.
While the data is being transferred, the value in these
words is decremented.
A326 contains the rightmost 4-digits and A347 con-
tains the leftmost 4-digits.
Check the content of these words to determine
whether or not the planned number of words have
been transferred successfully.
Retained Cleared Written as FREAD or
FWRIT is being exe-
cuted.
Decremented as data
is actually transferred.
A351 to
A354
All Calendar/
Clock Area
These words contain the CPU Unit’s internal clock
data in BCD. The clock can be set from a Program-
ming Device such as a Programming Console, with
the DATE(735) instruction, or with a FINS command
(CLOCK WRITE, 0702).
Retained Retained Written every cycle
A35100
to
A35107
Seconds (00 to 59) (BCD)
A35108
to
A35115
Minutes (00 to 59) (BCD)
A35200
to
A35207
Hours (00 to 23) (BCD)
A35208
to
A35215
Day of the month (01 to 31) (BCD)
A35300
to
A35307
Month (01 to 12) (BCD)
A35308
to
A35315
Year (00 to 99) (BCD)
A35400
to
A35407
Day of the week (00 to 06) (BCD)
00: Sunday, 01: Monday, 02: Tuesday,
03: Wednesday, 04: Thursday,
05: Friday, 06: Saturday
Address Name Function Status
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write timing/
Related flags,
settings
Words Bits
611
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
A360 to
A391
A36001
to
A39115
Executed FAL
Number Flags
The flag corresponding to the specified FAL number
will be turned ON when FAL(006) is executed. Bits
A36001 to A39115 correspond to FAL numbers 001
to 511.
The flag will be turned OFF when the error is cleared.
1: That FAL was executed
0: That FAL wasn’t executed
Retained Cleared Refreshed when error
occurs.
A40215
A392 A39204 RS-232C Port
Error Flag
ON when an error has occurred at the RS-232C port.
(Not valid in Peripheral Bus Mode, 1:N NT Link mode
or PLC Link Master/Slave mode.)
1: Error
0: No error
Retained Cleared Refreshed when error
occurs.
A39205 RS-232C Port
Send Ready
Flag (No-pro-
tocol mode)
ON when the RS-232C port is able to send data in
no-protocol mode.
1: Able-to-send
0: Unable-to-send
Retained Cleared Written after transmis-
sion
A39206 RS-232C Port
Reception
Completed
Flag
(No-protocol
mode)
ON when the RS-232C port has completed the
reception in no-protocol mode.
• When the number of bytes was specified: ON
when the specified number of bytes is received.
• When the end code was specified: ON when the
end code is received or 256 bytes are received.
Retained Cleared Written after reception
A39207 RS-232C Port
Reception
Overflow Flag
(No-protocol
mode)
ON when a data overflow occurred during reception
through the RS-232C port in no-protocol mode.
• When the number of bytes was specified: ON
when more data is received after the reception
was completed but before RXD(235) was exe-
cuted.
• When the end code was specified: ON when more
data is received after the end code was received
but before RXD(235) was executed.
ON when 257 bytes are received before the end
code.
1: Overflow
0: No overflow
Retained Cleared ---
A39212 Peripheral
Port Commu-
nications Error
Flag
• ON when a communications error has occurred at
the peripheral port. (Not valid in Peripheral Bus
Mode or NT Link mode.)
1: Error
0: No error
Retained Cleared Refreshed when error
occurs.
A393 A39300
to
A39307
RS-232C Port
PT Communi-
cations Flag
The corresponding bit will be ON when the RS-232C
port is communicating with a PT in NT Link or Serial
PLC Link mode.
Bits 0 to 7 correspond to units 0 to 7.
1: Communicating
0: Not communicating
Retained Cleared Refreshed when there
is a normal response to
the token.
A39308
to
A39315
RS-232C Port
PT Priority
Registered
Flags
The corresponding bit will be ON for the PT that has
priority when the RS-232C port is communicating in
NT link mode.
Bits 0 to 7 correspond to units 0 to 7.
These flags are written when the priority registration
command is received.
1: Priority registered
0: Priority not registered
Retained Cleared See Function column.
A39300
to
A39315
RS-232C Port
Reception
Counter (No-
protocol
mode)
Indicates (in binary) the number of bytes of data
received when the RS-232C port is in no-protocol
mode.
Retained Cleared Refreshed when data is
received.
Address Name Function Status
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write timing/
Related flags,
settings
Words Bits
612
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
A394 A39400
to
A39407
Peripheral
Port PT Com-
munications
Flag
The corresponding bit will be ON when the peripheral
port is communicating with a PT in NT link mode.
Bits 0 to 7 correspond to units 0 to 7.
1: Communicating
0: Not communication
Retained Cleared Refreshed when there
is a normal response to
the token.
A39408
to
39415
Peripheral
Port PT Prior-
ity Registered
Flags
The corresponding bit will be ON for the PT that has
priority when the peripheral port is communicating in
NT link mode.
Bits 0 to 7 correspond to units 0 to 7.
1: Priority registered
0: Priority not registered
These flags are written when the priority registration
command is received.
Retained Cleared See Function column.
A395 A39506 File Deleted
Flags
The system deleted the remainder of a Memory Card
file that was being updated when a power interrup-
tion occurred.
1: File deleted
0: No files deleted
Cleared Cleared Refreshed when the
system deletes the file.
A39507 The system deleted the remainder of an EM file
memory file that was being updated when a power
interruption occurred.
1: File deleted
0: No files deleted
Cleared Cleared Refreshed when the
system deletes the file.
A39510 ER/AER Flag
for Back-
ground Execu-
tion
ON when an instruction processing error or an illegal
area access error occurs during background pro-
cessing.
1: Error. OFF (0) when power is turned ON. OFF (0)
when operation starts.
0: No errors. OFF (0) when background processing
starts.
Cleared Cleared Not supported by
CJ1@-CPU@@ CPU
Units.
A39511 Memory Cor-
ruption
Detected Flag
ON when memory corruption is detected when the
power supply is turned ON.
1: Memory corruption
0: Normal operation
Retained See
Func-
tion col-
umn.
Refreshed when power
is turned ON.
A39512 DIP Switch
Pin 6 Status
Flag
The status of pin 6 on the DIP switch on the front of
the CPU Unit is written to this flag every cycle.
1: Pin 6 ON
0: Pin 6 OFF
Retained See
Func-
tion col-
umn.
Written every cycle.
A397 --- Simple
Backup Write
Capacity
If a write for a simple backup operation fails, A397
will contain the Memory Card capacity that would
have been required to complete the write operation.
The value is in Kbytes. (This indicates that the Mem-
ory Card did not have the specified capacity when
the write operation was started.)
A397 will be cleared to 0000 hex when the write is
completed successfully for a simple backup opera-
tion.
Retained Retained Refreshed when write
is executed.
Not supported by
CJ1@-CPU@@ CPU
Units.
A400 All Error code When a non-fatal error (user-defined FALS(006) or
system error) or a fatal error (user-defined
FALS(007) or system error) occurs, the 4-digit hexa-
decimal error code is written to this word. (Refer to
Details on Auxiliary Area Operation) When two or
more errors occur simultaneously, the highest error
code will be recorded.
Refer to page 632 for details on error codes.
Cleared Cleared Refreshed when error
occurs.
Address Name Function Status
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write timing/
Related flags,
settings
Words Bits
613
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
A401 A40106 FALS Error
Flag
(Fatal error)
ON when a non-fatal error is generated by the
FALS(006) instruction. The CPU Unit will continue
operating and the ERR/ALM indicator will flash.
The corresponding error code will be written to A400.
Error codes C101 to C2FF correspond to FALS num-
bers 001 to 511.
1: FALS(006) executed
0: FALS(006) not executed
This flag will be turned OFF when the FALS errors
are cleared.
Cleared Cleared Refreshed when error
occurs.
A400
A40108 Cycle Time
Too Long Flag
(Fatal error)
ON if the cycle time exceeds the maximum cycle time
set in the PLC Setup (the cycle time monitoring time).
CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR/ALM indi-
cator on the front of the CPU Unit will light.
0: Cycle time under max.
1: Cycle time over max.
This flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.
Cleared Cleared Refreshed when the
cycle time exceeds
maximum.
PLC Setup (Cycle time
monitoring time)
A40109 Program Error
Flag
(Fatal error)
ON when program contents are incorrect.
CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR/ALM indi-
cator on the front of the CPU Unit will light. The task
number where the error occurred will be stored in
A294 and the program address will be stored in A298
and A299.
The type of program error that occurred will be stored
in bits 8 to 15 of A295. Refer to the description of
A295 for more details on program errors.
1: Error
0: No error
This flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.
Cleared Cleared A294,
A295,
A298 and A299
A40110 I/O Setting
Error Flag
(Fatal error)
ON when a the registered I/O tables do not match the
actual I/O tables (i.e., the Units actually installed in
the PLC) or, for a CJ1-H CPU Unit, when an Interrupt
Input Unit is connected in the wrong position (not slot
0 to 4, i.e., the 5 slots to the right of the CPU Unit).
CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR/ALM indi-
cator on the front of the CPU Unit will light.
1: Error
0: No error
This flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.
Cleared Cleared A40508
A40111 Too Many I/O
Points Flag
(Fatal error)
ON when the number of I/O points being used in
Basic I/O Units exceeds the maximum allowed for the
PLC or when there are more than 11 Units con-
nected in one Rack.
CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR/ALM indi-
cator on the front of the CPU Unit will light.
1: Error
0: No error
This flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.
Cleared Cleared A407
Address Name Function Status
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write timing/
Related flags,
settings
Words Bits
614
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
A401 A40113 Duplication
Error Flag
(Fatal error)
ON in the following cases:
• Two CPU Bus Units have been assigned the same
unit number.
• Two Special I/O Units have been assigned the
same unit number.
• Two Basic I/O Units have been allocated the same
data area words.
CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR/ALM indi-
cator on the front of the CPU Unit will light.
The duplicated unit number is indicated in A409 to
A416.
1: Duplication error
0: No duplication
(This flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.)
Cleared Cleared A410 to A416
A40114 I/O Bus Error
Flag
(Fatal error)
ON when an error occurs in a data transfer between
the CPU Unit and a Unit mounted to a slot or when
the End Cover is not connected to the CPU Rack or
an Expansion Rack.
CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR/ALM indi-
cator on the front of the CPU Unit will light.
The slot number (00 to 09) where the I/O Bus Error
occurred is written to A40400 to A40407 in binary
and the rack number (00 to 03) is written to A40408
to A40415 in binary. When the End Cover is not con-
nected to the CPU Rack or an Expansion Rack, 0E
hex will be stored in both locations.
1: Error
0: No error
(This flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.)
Cleared Cleared A404
A40115 Memory Error
Flag
(Fatal error)
ON when an error occurred in memory or there was
an error in automatic transfer from the Memory Card
when the power was turned ON.
CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR/ALM indi-
cator on the front of the CPU Unit will light.
1: Error
0: No error
The location where the error occurred is indicated in
A40300 to A40308, and A40309 will be turned ON if
there was an error during automatic transfer at start-
up.
This flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared. (The automatic transfer at start-up error can-
not be cleared without turning OFF the PLC.)
Cleared Cleared A403
A402 A40202 Special I/O
Unit Setting
Error Flag
(Non-fatal
error)
ON when an installed Special I/O Unit does not
match the Special I/O Unit registered in the I/O table.
The CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR/
ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash.
1: Error
0: No error
The unit number of the Unit where the setting error
occurred is indicated in A428 to A433.
(This flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.)
Cleared Cleared A428 to A433
Address Name Function Status
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write timing/
Related flags,
settings
Words Bits
615
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
A402 A40203 CPU Bus Unit
Setting Error
Flag
(Non-fatal
error)
ON when an installed CPU Bus Unit does not match
the CPU Bus Unit registered in the I/O table. The
CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR/ALM
indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash.
1: Error
0: No error
The unit number of the Unit where the setting error
occurred is written to A427.
(This flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.)
Cleared Cleared A427
A40204 Battery Error
Flag
(Non-fatal
error)
ON if the CPU Unit’s battery is disconnected or its
voltage is low and the Detect Battery Error setting
has been set in the PLC Setup.
The CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR/
ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash.
1: Error
0: No error
This flag can be used to control an external warning
light or other indicator to indicate that the battery
needs to be replaced.
(This flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.)
Cleared Cleared PLC Setup (Detect Bat-
tery Error)
A40206 Special I/O
Unit Error Flag
(Non-fatal
error)
ON when an error occurs in a data exchange
between the CPU Unit and a Special I/O Unit (includ-
ing an error in the Special I/O Unit itself).
1: Error
0: No error
The CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR/
ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash.
The Special I/O Unit where the error occurred will
stop operating and the unit number of the Unit where
the data exchange error occurred is indicated in
A418 through A423.
(This flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.)
Cleared Cleared A418 to A423
A40207 CPU Bus Unit
Error Flag
(Non-fatal
error)
ON when an error occurs in a data exchange
between the CPU Unit and an CPU Bus Unit (includ-
ing an error in the CPU Bus Unit itself).
The CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR/
ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash.
The CPU Bus Unit where the error occurred will stop
operating and the unit number of the Unit where the
data exchange error occurred is indicated in A417.
1: Error
0: No error
(This flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.)
Cleared Cleared A417
A40210 PLC Setup
Error Flag
(Non-fatal
error)
ON when there is a setting error in the PLC Setup.
The CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR/
ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash.
The location of the error will be written to A406.
1: Error
0: No error
(This flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.)
Cleared Cleared A406
A40212 Basic I/O Unit
Error Flag
(Non-fatal
error)
ON when an error has occurred in a Basic I/O Unit.
The CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR/
ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash.
The location of the error will be written to A408.
1: Error
0: No error
(This flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.)
Cleared Cleared A408
Address Name Function Status
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write timing/
Related flags,
settings
Words Bits
616
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
A402 A40213 Interrupt Task
Error Flag
(Non-fatal
error)
ON when the Detect Interrupt Task Errors setting in
the PLC Setup is set to “Detect” and one of the fol-
lowing occurs for the same Special I/O Unit.
FIORF(225), IORF(097) (CJ1-H-R CPU Units only),
IORD(222) or IOWR(223) in a cyclic task are com-
peting with FIORF(225), IORF(097), IORD(222) or
IOWR(223) in an interrupt task.
FIORF(225), IORF(097), IORD(222) or IOWR(223)
was executed in an interrupt task when I/O was being
refreshed.
If cyclic refreshing is not disabled in the PLC Setup
for a Special I/O Unit and FIORF(225), IORF(097),
IORD(222) or IOWR(223) is executed for the same
Special I/O Unit in an interrupt task, a duplicate
refreshing status will occur and an interrupt task error
will occur.
Cleared Cleared A426,
PLC Setup
(Detect Interrupt Task
Errors setting)
A40215 FAL Error Flag
(Non-fatal
error)
ON when a non-fatal error is generated by executing
FAL(006). The CPU Unit will continue operating and
the ERR/ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit
will flash.
The bit in A360 to A391 that corresponds to the FAL
number specified in FALS(006) will be turned ON
and the corresponding error code will be written to
A400. Error codes 4101 to 42FF correspond to FAL
numbers 001 to 2FF (0 to 511).
1: FALS(006) error occurred
0: FALS(006) not executed
(This flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.)
Cleared Cleared A360 to A391, A400
A403 A40300
to
A40308
Memory Error
Location
When a memory error occurs, the Memory Error Flag
(A40115) is turned ON and one of the following flags
is turned ON to indicate the memory area where the
error occurred
A40300: User program
A40304: PLC Setup
A40305: Registered I/O Table
A40307: Routing Table
A40308: CPU Bus Unit Settings
When a memory error occurs, the CPU Unit will con-
tinue operating and the ERR/ALM indicator on the
front of the CPU Unit will flash.
1: Error
0: No error
(The corresponding flag will be turned OFF when the
error is cleared.)
Cleared Cleared A40115
A40309 Memory Card
Start-up
Transfer Error
Flag
ON when automatic transfer at start-up has been
selected and an error occurs during automatic trans-
fer. An error will occur if there is a transfer error, the
specified file does not exist, or the Memory Card is
not installed.
1: Error
0: No error
(This flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared by turning the power off. The error cannot be
cleared without turning the power off.)
Cleared Cleared Refreshed when power
is turned ON.
A40310 Flash Mem-
ory Error Flag
ON when the flash memory is physically destroyed.
1: Error
0: No error
Cleared Cleared Refreshed when error
is detected.
Not supported by
CJ1@-CPU@@ CPU
Units
Address Name Function Status
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write timing/
Related flags,
settings
Words Bits
617
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
A404 A40400
to
A40407
I/O Bus Error
Slot Number
Contains the 8-bit binary slot number (00 to 09)
where an I/O Bus Error occurred. When the End
Cover is not connected to the CPU Rack or an
Expansion Rack, 0E hex will be stored.
CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR/ALM indi-
cator on the front of the CPU Unit will light. The I/O
Bus Error Flag (A40114) will be ON.
00 to 09 (slot number 00 to 09)
(This flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.)
Cleared Cleared A40114
A40408
to
A40415
I/O Bus Error
Rack Number
Contains the 8-bit binary rack number (00 to 03)
where an I/O Bus Error occurred. When the End
Cover is not connected to the CPU Rack or an
Expansion Rack, 0E hex will be stored.
CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR/ALM indi-
cator on the front of the CPU Unit will light. The I/O
Bus Error Flag (A40114) will be ON.
00 to 03 (rack number 00 to 03)
(This flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.)
Cleared Cleared A40114
A405 A40508 Interrupt Input
Unit Position
Error Flag
ON when the Interrupt Input Unit is not connected in
one of the five positions (slots 0 to 4) next to the CPU
Unit on the CPU Rack.
Even if a Unit is physically in one of the first 5 posi-
tions, a Dummy Unit can be registered in the I/O
table, causing a Unit to be defined in a position differ-
ent from its physical position.
1: Position not correct
0: Position correct
(This flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.)
Cleared Cleared A40110
Not supported by
CJ1@-CPU@@ CPU
Units
A40515 Peripheral
Servicing Too
Long Flag
Turns ON when the peripheral servicing time in a
Parallel Processing Mode exceeds 2 s. This will also
cause a cycle time error and operation will stop.
1: Too long (Parallel processing cannot be used.)
0: Not too long (Parallel processing can be used.)
Cleared Cleared A268
(CJ1-H CPU Units
only)
A406 All PLC Setup
Error Location
When there is a setting error in the PLC Setup, the
location of that error is written to A406 in 4-digit hexa-
decimal. The location is given as the address dis-
played on a Programming Console.
The CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR/
ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash.
(A406 will be cleared when the cause of the error is
eliminated.)
0000 to 01FF hexadecimal
Cleared Cleared A40210
Address Name Function Status
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write timing/
Related flags,
settings
Words Bits
618
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
A407 A40700
to
A40712
Too Many I/O
Points, Details
The 6 possible causes of the Too Many I/O Points
Error are listed below. The 3-digit binary value in
A40713 to A40715 indicates the cause of the error
(values 0 to 5 correspond to causes 1 to 6, below).
The 13-bit binary value in A40700 to A40712 indi-
cates the details: the excessive value or the dupli-
cated unit number.
CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR/ALM indi-
cator on the front of the CPU Unit will light.
1) The number of I/O points will be written here when
the total number of I/O points set in the I/O Table
(excluding Slave Racks) exceed the maximum
allowed for the CPU Unit.
2) The number of Racks will be written here when the
number of Expansion Racks exceeds the maxi-
mum.
(The relevant value will be written here (A40700 to
A40712) when the error occurs. These bits will be
cleared when the error is cleared.)
Cleared Cleared A40111,
A40713 to A40715
A40713
to
A40715
Too Many I/O
Points, Cause
The 3-digit binary value of these bits indicates the
cause of the Too Many I/O Points Error and shows
the meaning of the value written to bits A40700 to
A40712.
Values of 000 to 101 (0 to 5) correspond to causes 1
through 6 described in “Too Many I/O Points, Cause
1,” above.
000: Too many I/O total
101: Too many Racks
111: Too many Units on a Rack
(These bits will be cleared when the error is cleared.)
Cleared Cleared ---
A408 A40800
to
A40807
Basic I/O Unit
Error, Slot
Number
When an error has occurred in a Basic I/O Unit,
A40212 will be turned ON and the slot number where
the error occurred will be written here in binary.
The CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR/
ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash.
00 to 09 hexadecimal
(Slots 0 to 9)
(These bits will be cleared when the error is cleared.)
Cleared Cleared A40212
A40808
to
A40815
Basic I/O Unit
Error, Rack
Number
When an error has occurred in a Basic I/O Unit,
A40212 will be turned ON and the Rack number
where the error occurred will be written here in
binary.
The CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR/
ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash.
00 to 03 hexadecimal
(Racks 0 to 3)
(These bits will be cleared when the error is cleared.)
Cleared Cleared A40212
A409 A40900
to
A40903
Expansion
Rack Number
Duplication
Flags
The corresponding flag will be turned ON when an
Expansion Rack’s starting word address was set
from a Programming Device and two Racks have
overlapping word allocations or a Rack’s starting
address exceeds CIO 0901. Bits 00 to 03 correspond
to Racks 0 to 3.
1: Same words allocated to two different Racks or
Rack starting address exceeds CIO 0901.
0: No error
(The corresponding flag will be cleared when the
error is cleared.)
Cleared Cleared ---
A410 A41000
to
A41015
CPU Bus Unit
Number Dupli-
cation Flags
The Duplication Error Flag (A40113) and the corre-
sponding flag in A410 will be turned ON when an
CPU Bus Unit’s unit number has been duplicated.
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F.
CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR/ALM indi-
cator on the front of the CPU Unit will light.
1: Duplication detected
0: No duplication
Cleared Cleared A40113
Address Name Function Status
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write timing/
Related flags,
settings
Words Bits
619
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
A411 to
A416
A41100
to
A41615
Special I/O
Unit Number
Duplication
Flags
The Duplication Error Flag (A40113) and the corre-
sponding flag in A411 through A416 will be turned
ON when a Special I/O Unit’s unit number has been
duplicated.
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to unit numbers 0 to F.
(Bits A41100 to A41615 correspond to unit numbers
000 to 05F (0 to 95).)
CPU Unit operation will stop and the ERR/ALM indi-
cator on the front of the CPU Unit will light.
The corresponding bit will also be turned ON when
the Special I/O Unit’s words are also allocated to a
Basic I/O Unit on an Expansion Rack because of the
Expansion Rack’s starting word setting.
1: Duplication detected
0: No duplication
Cleared Cleared A40113
A417 A41700
to
A41715
CPU Bus Unit
Error, Unit
Number Flags
When an error occurs in a data exchange between
the CPU Unit and an CPU Bus Unit, the CPU Bus
Unit Error Flag (A40207) is turned ON and the bit in
A417 corresponding to the unit number of the Unit
where the error occurred is turned ON. Bits 00 to 15
correspond to unit numbers 0 to F.
The CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR/
ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash.
1: Error
0: No error
Cleared Cleared A40207
A418 to
A423
A41800
to
A42315
Special I/O
Unit Error,
Unit Number
Flags
When an error occurs in a data exchange between
the CPU Unit and a Special I/O Unit, the Special I/O
Unit Error Flag (A40206) will be turned ON.
Each bit corresponds to a unit number. Bit 00 in A418
to bit 15 in A423 correspond to unit numbers 0 to 95.
The CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR/
ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash.
1: Error
0: No error
If the unit number of the Unit is uncertain, none of the
flags will be turned ON.
(The flag will be turned OFF when the error is
cleared.)
Cleared Cleared A40206
A426 A42600
to
A42611
Interrupt Task
Error, Unit
Number
An attempt was made to refresh a Special I/O Unit’s
I/O from an interrupt task with IORF(097) while the
Unit’s I/O is being refreshed by cyclic I/O refreshing
(duplicate refreshing). A42600 to A42611: contain
the Special I/O Unit’s unit number.
These bits will be cleared when the error is cleared.
Unit number: 000 to 05F (0 to 95)
Cleared Cleared A40213
A42615
A42615 Interrupt Task
Error Cause
Flag
When A40213 (the Interrupt Task Error Flag) is ON,
this flag indicates the cause of the error. The CPU
Unit will continue operating and the ERR/ALM indica-
tor on the front of the CPU Unit will flash.
1: Duplicated refreshing
Cleared Cleared A40213,
A42600 to A42611
A427 A42700
to
A42715
CPU Bus Unit
Setting Error,
Unit Number
Flags
When an CPU Bus Unit Setting Error occurs, A40203
and the bit in this word corresponding to the Unit’s
unit number are turned ON. Bits 00 to 15 correspond
to unit numbers 0 to F.
The CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR/
ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash.
1: Setting error
0: No setting error
Cleared Cleared Refreshed when power
is turned ON or I/O is
recognized.
A40203
Address Name Function Status
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write timing/
Related flags,
settings
Words Bits
620
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
Note CJ1M CPU Units with built-in I/O only.
A428 to
A433
A42800
to
A43315
Special I/O
Unit Setting
Error, Unit
Number Flags
When a Special I/O Unit Setting Error occurs,
A40202 and the bit in these words corresponding to
the Unit’s unit number are turned ON. Bits 00 to 15
correspond to unit numbers 0 to F.
1: Setting error
0: No setting error
(Bits A42800 to A43315 correspond to unit numbers
000 to 05F (0 to 95).)
The CPU Unit will continue operating and the ERR/
ALM indicator on the front of the CPU Unit will flash.
Cleared Cleared Refreshed when power
is turned ON or I/O is
recognized.
A40202
A440 All Max. Interrupt
Task Process-
ing Time
Contains the Maximum Interrupt Task Processing
Time in units of 0.1 ms.
(This value is written after the interrupt task with the
max. processing time is executed and cleared when
PLC operation begins.)
Cleared Cleared See Function column.
A441 All Interrupt Task
With Max.
Processing
Time
Contains the task number of the interrupt task with
the maximum processing time. Hexadecimal values
8000 to 80FF correspond to task numbers 00 to FF.
Bit 15 is turned ON when an interrupt has occurred.
(This value is written after the interrupt task with the
max. processing time is executed and cleared when
PLC operation begins.)
Cleared Cleared See Function column.
A444
(See
note.)
All Pulse Output
0 Stop Error
Code
When a pulse output stop error occurred with pulse
output 0, the corresponding error code is written to
this word.
Cleared Cleared Refreshed when origin
search starts.
Refreshed when a
pulse output stop error
occurs.
A445
(See
note.)
Pulse Output
1 Stop Error
Code
When a pulse output stop error occurred with pulse
output 1, the corresponding error code is written to
this word.
Address Name Function Status
after
mode
change
Status
at star-
tup
Write timing/
Related flags,
settings
Words Bits
621
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
Read/Write Area (Set by User)
Addresses Name Function Settings Status
after
mode
change
Status at
startup
Write timing/
Related Flags,
Settings
Word Bit
A500 A50012 IOM Hold Bit Turn this bit ON to preserve the sta-
tus of the I/O Memory when shifting
from PROGRAM to RUN or MONI-
TOR mode or vice versa. The I/O
Memory includes the CIO Area,
Transition Flags, Timer Flags and
PVs, Index Registers, Data Regis-
ters, and the Current EM Bank Num-
ber.
(If the status of the IOM Hold Bit itself
is preserved in the PLC Setup (IOM
Hold Bit Status), the status of the I/O
Memory Area will be retained when
the PLC is turned ON or power is
interrupted.)
1: Retained
0: Not retained
Retained Cleared
(PLC
Setup
can be
set to
retain
status.)
See Function column.
PLC Setup
(IOM Hold Bit Status
setting)
A50013 Forced Sta-
tus Hold Bit
Turn this bit ON to preserve the sta-
tus of bits that have been force-set or
force-reset when shifting from PRO-
GRAM to MONITOR mode or vice
versa. Bits that have been force-set
or force-reset will always return to
their default status when shifting to
RUN mode.
(If the status of the Forced Status
Hold Bit itself is preserved in the PLC
Setup (Forced Status Hold Bit Sta-
tus), the status of force-set and
force-reset bits will be retained when
the PLC is turned ON or power is
interrupted.)
1: Retained
0: Not retained
Retained Cleared
(PLC
Setup
can be
set to
retain
status.)
See Function column.
PLC Setup
(Forced Status Hold
Bit Status setting)
A50014 Error Log
Reset Bit
Turn this bit ON to reset the Error
Log Pointer (A300) to 00.
The contents of the Error Log Area
itself (A100 to A199) are not cleared.
(This bit is automatically reset to 0
after the Error Log Pointer is reset.)
0 → 1: Clear Retained Cleared A100 to A199, A300
A50015 Output OFF
Bit
Turn this bit ON to turn OFF all out-
puts from Basic I/O Units and Spe-
cial I/O Units. The INH indicator on
the front of the CPU Unit will light
while this bit is ON.
(The status of the Output OFF Bit is
retained through power interrup-
tions.)
--- Retained Retained ---
A501 A50100
to
A50115
CPU Bus
Unit Restart
Bits
Turn these bits ON to restart (initial-
ize) the CPU Bus Unit with the corre-
sponding unit number. Bits 00 to 15
correspond to unit numbers 0 to F.
When a restart bit is turned ON, the
corresponding CPU Bus Unit Initializ-
ing Flag (A30200 to A30215) will be
turned ON. Both the restart bit and
initializing flag will be turned OFF
automatically when initialization is
completed.
0 to 1: Restart
1 to 0: Restart
completed
Turned OFF by
the system
when the Unit
has been
restarted.
Retained Cleared A30200 to A30215
A502 to
A507
A50200
to
A50715
Special I/O
Unit Restart
Bits
Turn these bits ON to restart (initial-
ize) the Special I/O Unit with the cor-
responding unit number. Bits A50200
to A50715 correspond to unit num-
bers 0 to 95.
When a restart bit is turned ON, the
corresponding Special I/O Unit Ini-
tializing Flag (A33000 to A33515) will
be turned ON. Both the restart bit
and initializing flag will be turned
OFF automatically when initializa-
tion is completed.
0 to 1: Restart
1 to 0: Restart
completed
Turned OFF by
the system
when the Unit
has been
restarted.
Retained Cleared A33000 to A33515
622
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
A508 A50809 Differentiate
Monitor
Completed
Flag
ON when the differentiate monitor
condition has been established dur-
ing execution of differentiation moni-
toring.
(This flag will be cleared to 0 when
differentiation monitoring starts.)
1: Monitor con-
dition estab-
lished
0: Not yet
established
Retained Cleared ---
A50811 Trace Trig-
ger Monitor
Flag
ON when a trigger condition is estab-
lished by the Trace Start Bit
(A50814). OFF when the next Data
Trace is started by the Sampling
Start bit (A50815).
1: Trigger con-
dition estab-
lished
0: Not yet
established or
not tracing
Retained Cleared ---
A50812 Trace Com-
pleted Flag
ON when sampling of a region of
trace memory has been completed
during execution of a Trace.
OFF when the next time the Sam-
pling Start Bit (A50815) is turned
from OFF to ON.
1: Trace com-
pleted
0: Not tracing
or trace in
progress
Retained Cleared ------
A50813 Trace Busy
Flag
ON when the Sampling Start Bit
(A50815) is turned from OFF to ON.
OFF when the trace is completed.
1: Trace in
progress
0: Not tracing
(not sampling)
Retained Cleared ---
A50814 Trace Start
Bit
Turn this bit from OFF to ON to
establish the trigger condition. The
offset indicated by the delay value
(positive or negative) determines
which data samples are valid.
1: Trace trigger
condition
established
0: Not estab-
lished
Retained Cleared ---
A50815 Sampling
Start Bit
When a data trace is started by turn-
ing this bit from OFF to ON from a
Programming Device, the PLC will
begin storing data in Trace Memory
by one of the three following meth-
ods:
1) Data is sampled at regular inter-
vals (10 to 2,550 ms).
2) Data is sampled when TRSM(045)
is executed in the program.
3) Data is sampled at the end of
every cycle.
The operation of A50815 can be con-
trolled only from a Programming
Device.
0 to 1: Starts
data trace
(sampling)
Turned ON
from Program-
ming Device.
Retained Cleared ---
A510 to
A511
Start-up
Time
These words contain the time at
which the power was turned ON. The
contents are updated every time that
the power is turned ON. The data is
stored in BCD.
A51000 to A51007: Second (00 to
59)
A51008 to A51015: Minute (00 to 59)
A51100 to A51107: Hour (00 to 23)
A51108 to A51115: Day of month (01
to 31)
See Function
column.
Retained See
Function
column.
Refreshed when
power is turned ON.
A512 to
A513
Power Inter-
ruption Time
These words contain the time at
which the power was interrupted.
The contents are updated every time
that the power is interrupted. The
data is stored in BCD.
A51200 to A51207: Second (00 to
59)
A51208 to A51215: Minute (00 to 59)
A51300 to A51307: Hour (00 to 23)
A51308 to A51315: Day of month (01
to 31)
(These words are not cleared at
start-up.)
See Function
column.
Retained Retained Written at power inter-
ruption
Addresses Name Function Settings Status
after
mode
change
Status at
startup
Write timing/
Related Flags,
Settings
Word Bit
623
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
A514 Number of
Power Inter-
ruptions
Contains the number of times that
power has been interrupted since the
power was first turned ON. The data
is stored in binary. To reset this
value, overwrite the current value
with 0000.
(This word is not cleared at start-up,
but it is cleared when the Memory
Corruption Detected Flag (A39511)
goes ON.)
0000 to FFFF
hexadecimal
Retained Retained Refreshed when
power is turned ON.
A39511
A515 to
A517
Operation
Start Time
The time that operation started as a
result of changing the operating
mode to RUN or MONITOR mode is
stored here in BCD.
A51500 to A51507: Seconds (00 to
59)
A51508 to A51515: Minutes (00 to
59)
A51600 to A51607: Hour (00 to 23)
A51608 to A51615: Day of month (01
to 31)
A51700 to A51707: Month (01 to 12)
A51708 to A51715: Year (00 to 99)
Note: The previous start time is
stored after turning ON the power
supply until operation is started.
See at left. Retained Retained See at left.
Not supported by
CJ1@-CPU@@ CPU
Units
A518 to
A520
Operation
End Time
The time that operation stopped as a
result of changing the operating
mode to PROGRAM mode is stored
here in BCD.
A51800 to A51807: Seconds (00 to
59)
A51808 to A51815: Minutes (01 to
59)
A51900 to A51907: Hour (00 to 23)
A51908 to A51915: Day of month (01
to 31)
A52000 to A52007: Month (01 to 12)
A52008 to A52015: Year (00 to 99)
Note: If an error occurs in operation,
the time of the error will be stored. If
the operating mode is then changed
to PROGRAM mode, the time that
PROGRAM mode was entered will
be stored.
See at left. Retained Retained See at left.
Not supported by
CJ1@-CPU@@ CPU
Units.
A523 Total Power
ON Time
Contains the total time that the PLC
has been on in 10-hour units. The
data is stored in binary and it is
updated every 10 hours. To reset this
value, overwrite the current value
with 0000.
(This word is not cleared at start-up,
but it is cleared to 0000 when the
Memory Corruption Detected Flag
(A39511) goes ON.)
0000 to FFFF
hexadecimal
Retained Retained ---
A526 A52600 RS-232C
Port Restart
Bit
Turn this bit ON to restart the RS-
232C port. (Do not use this bit when
the port is operating in Peripheral
Bus Mode.)
This bit is turned OFF automatically
when the restart processing is com-
pleted.
0 to 1: Restart Retained Cleared ---
A52601 Peripheral
Port Restart
Bit
Turn this bit ON to restart the periph-
eral port.
This bit is turned OFF automatically
when the restart processing is com-
pleted.
0 to1: Restart Retained Cleared ---
Addresses Name Function Settings Status
after
mode
change
Status at
startup
Write timing/
Related Flags,
Settings
Word Bit
624
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
A527 A52700
to
A52707
Online Edit-
ing Disable
Bit Validator
The Online Editing Disable Bit
(A52709) is valid only when this byte
contains 5A.
To disable online editing from a Pro-
gramming Device, set this byte to 5A
and turn ON A52709.
(Online editing refers to changing or
adding to the program while the PLC
is operating in MONITOR mode.)
5 A:
A52709
enabled
Other value:
A52709 dis-
abled
Retained Cleared A52709
A52709 Online Edit-
ing Disable
Bit
Turn this bit ON to disable online
editing. The setting of this bit is valid
only when A52700 to A52707 have
been set to 5 A.
1: Disabled
0: Not disabled
Retained Cleared A52700 to A52707
A528 A52800
to
A52807
RS-232C
Port Error
Flags
These flags indicate what kind of
error has occurred at the RS-232C
port; they are automatically turned
OFF when the RS-232C port is
restarted.
(These flags are valid in Serial Gate-
way mode. They are not valid in
peripheral bus mode and only bit 5 is
valid in NT Link mode.)
Polling Unit:
Bit 5: ON for timeout error.
Polled Unit:
Bit 3: ON for framing error.
Bit 4: ON for overrun error.
Bit 5: ON for timeout error.
These bits can be cleared by a Pro-
gramming Device.
Bits 0 and 1:
Not used.
Bit 2: ON for
parity error.
Bit 3: ON for
framing error.
Bit 4: ON for
overrun error.
Bit 5: ON for
timeout error.
Bits 6 and 7:
Not used.
Retained Cleared ---
A52808
to
A52815
Peripheral
Port Error
Code
These flags indicate what kind of
error has occurred at the peripheral
port; they are automatically turned
OFF when the peripheral port is
restarted.
(These flags are valid in Serial Gate-
way mode. They are not valid in
peripheral bus mode and only bit 13
(timeout error) is valid in NT Link
mode.)
Bits 8 and 9: Not used.
Bit 10: ON when there was a parity
error.
Bit 11: ON when there was a framing
error.
Bit 12: ON when there was an over-
run error.
Bit 13: ON when there was a timeout
error.
Bits 14 and 15: Not used.
Bits 8 and 9:
Not used.
Bit 10: ON for
parity error.
Bit 11: ON for
framing error.
Bit 12: ON for
overrun error.
Bit 13: ON for
timeout error.
Bits 14 and 15:
Not used.
Retained Cleared ---
A529 --- FAL/FALS
Number for
System
Error Simu-
lation
Set a dummy FAL/FALS number to
use to simulate the system error
using FAL(006) or FALS(007).
When FAL(006) or FALS(007) is exe-
cuted and the number in A529 is the
same as the one specified in the
operand of the instruction, the sys-
tem error given in the operand of the
instruction will be generated instead
of a user-defined error.
0001 to 01FF
hex: FAL/FALS
numbers 1 to
511
0000 or 0200
to FFFF hex:
No FAL/FALS
number for sys-
tem error simu-
lation. (No error
will be gener-
ated.)
Retained Cleared Not supported by
CJ1@-CPU@@ CPU
Units.
Addresses Name Function Settings Status
after
mode
change
Status at
startup
Write timing/
Related Flags,
Settings
Word Bit
625
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
A530 --- Power Inter-
rupt Dis-
abled Area
Setting
Set to A5A5 hex to disable power
interrupts (except the Power OFF
Interrupt task) between DI(693) and
EI(694) instructions.
A5A5 hex:
Masking power
interruption
processing
enabled
Other: Mask-
ing power inter-
ruption
processing not
enabled.
Cleared Cleared Not supported by
CJ1@-CPU@@ CPU
Units.
A531
(See
note 1.)
A53100 High-speed
Counter 0
Reset Bit
When the reset method is set to
Phase-Z signal + Software reset, the
corresponding high-speed counter's
PV will be reset if the phase-Z signal
is received while this bit is ON.
When the reset method is set to Soft-
ware reset, the corresponding high-
speed counter's PV will be reset in
the cycle when this bit goes from
OFF to ON.
--- Retained Cleared ---
A53101 High-speed
Counter 1
Reset Bit
--- Retained Cleared ---
A53108 High-speed
Counter 0
Gate Bit
When a counter's Gate Bit is ON, the
counter's PV will not be changed
even if pulse inputs are received for
the counter.
When the bit is turned OFF again,
counting will restart and the high-
speed counter's PV will be refreshed.
When the reset method is set to
Phase-Z signal + Software reset, the
Gate Bit is disabled while the corre-
sponding Reset Bit (A53100 or
A53101) is ON.
--- Retained Cleared ---
A53109 High-speed
Counter 1
Gate Bit
--- Retained Cleared ---
A532
(See
note 1.)
Interrupt
Counter 0
Counter SV
Used for interrupt input 0 in counter
mode.
Sets the count value at which the
interrupt task will start. Interrupt task
140 will start when interrupt counter
0 has counted this number of pulses.
Retained when operation starts.
--- Retained Retained ---
A533
(See
note 1.)
Interrupt
Counter 1
Counter SV
Used for interrupt input 1 in counter
mode.
Sets the count value at which the
interrupt task will start. Interrupt task
141 will start when interrupt counter
1 has counted this number of pulses.
--- Retained Retained ---
A534
(See
note 1.)
Interrupt
Counter 2
Counter SV
Used for interrupt input 2 in counter
mode.
Sets the count value at which the
interrupt task will start. Interrupt task
142 will start when interrupt counter
2 has counted this number of pulses.
--- Retained Retained ---
A535
(See
note 1.)
Interrupt
Counter 3
Counter SV
Used for interrupt input 3 in counter
mode.
Sets the count value at which the
interrupt task will start. Interrupt task
143 will start when interrupt counter
3 has counted this number of pulses.
--- Retained Retained ---
A536
(See
note 1.)
Interrupt
Counter 0
Counter PV
These words contain the interrupt
counter PVs for interrupt inputs oper-
ating in counter mode.
In increment mode, the counter PV
starts incrementing from 0. When the
counter PV reaches the counter SV,
the PV is automatically reset to 0.
In decrement mode, the counter PV
starts decrementing from the counter
SV. When the counter PV reaches
the 0, the PV is automatically reset to
the SV.
Cleared when operation starts.
--- Cleared Cleared Refreshed when inter-
rupt is generated.
Refreshed when
INI(880) instruction is
executed.
A537
(See
note 1.)
Interrupt
Counter 1
Counter PV
---
A538
(See
note 1.)
Interrupt
Counter 2
Counter PV
---
A539
(See
note 1.)
Interrupt
Counter 3
Counter PV
---
Addresses Name Function Settings Status
after
mode
change
Status at
startup
Write timing/
Related Flags,
Settings
Word Bit
626
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
Note 1. CJ1M CPU Units with built-in I/O only.
2. These Auxiliary Area bits/words are not to be written by the user. The number of resends and re-
sponse monitoring time must be set by the user in the FB communications instructions settings in the
PLC Setup, particularly when using function blocks from the OMRON FB Library to execute FINS
messages or DeviceNet explicit messages communications. The values set in the Settings for
OMRON FB Library in the PLC Setup will be automatically stored in the related Auxiliary Area words
A580 to A582 and used by the function blocks from the OMRON FB Library.
A540
(See
note 1.)
A54000 Pulse Out-
put 0 Reset
Bit
The pulse output 0 PV (contained in
A276 and A277) will be cleared when
this bit is turned from OFF to ON.
--- Retained Cleared ---
A54008 Pulse Out-
put 0 CW
Limit Input
Signal Flag
This is the CW limit input signal for
pulse output 0, which is used in the
origin search. To use this signal,
write the input from the actual sensor
as an input condition in the ladder
program and output the result to this
flag.
--- ---
A54009 Pulse Out-
put 0 CCW
Limit Input
Signal Flag
This is the CCW limit input signal for
pulse output 0, which is used in the
origin search. To use this signal,
write the input from the actual sensor
as an input condition in the ladder
program and output the result to this
flag.
--- ---
A541
(See
note 1.)
A54100 Pulse Out-
put 1 Reset
Bit
The pulse output 1 PV (contained in
A278 and A279) will be cleared when
this bit is turned from OFF to ON.
--- Retained Cleared ---
A54108 Pulse Out-
put 1 CW
Limit Input
Signal Flag
This is the CW limit input signal for
pulse output 1, which is used in the
origin search. To use this signal,
write the input from the actual sensor
as an input condition in the ladder
program and output the result to this
flag.
--- ---
A54109 Pulse Out-
put 1 CCW
Limit Input
Signal Flag
This is the CCW limit input signal for
pulse output 1, which is used in the
origin search. To use this signal,
write the input from the actual sensor
as an input condition in the ladder
program and output the result to this
flag.
--- ---
A580
(See
note 2.)
A58000
to
A58003
FB Commu-
nications
Instruction
Retries
Automatically stores the number of
retries in the FB communications
instruction settings specified in the
PLC Setup.
0 to F hex As set in
PLC
Setup
Cleared Written at start of
operation
A581
(See
note 2.)
FB Commu-
nications
Instruction
Response
Monitoring
Time
Automatically stores the FB commu-
nications instruction response moni-
toring time set in the PLC Setup.
0001 to FFFF
hex (Unit: 0.1 s;
Range: 0.1 to
6553.5)
0000 hex: 2 s
As set in
PLC
Setup
Cleared Written at start of
operation
A582
(See
note 2.)
FB
DeviceNet
Communica-
tions
Instruction
Response
Monitoring
Time
Automatically stores the FB
DeviceNet communications instruc-
tion response monitoring time set in
the PLC Setup.
0001 to FFFF
hex (Unit: 0.1 s;
Range: 0.1 to
6553.5)
0000 hex: 2 s
As set in
PLC
Setup
Cleared Written at start of
operation
A595
and
A596
--- IR00 Output
for Back-
ground Exe-
cution
When an index register is specified
as the output for an instruction pro-
cessed in the background, A595 and
A596 receive the output instead of
IR00.
0000 0000 to
FFFF FFFF
hex
(A596 contains
the leftmost
digits.)
Cleared Cleared Not supported by
CJ1@-CPU@@ CPU
Units.
Addresses Name Function Settings Status
after
mode
change
Status at
startup
Write timing/
Related Flags,
Settings
Word Bit
627
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
Addresses Name Function Settings Status
after
mode
change
Status at
startup
Write timing/
Related Flags,
Settings
Word Bit
A597 --- DR00 Out-
put for Back-
ground
Execution
When a data register is specified as
the output for an instruction pro-
cessed in the background, A597
receives the output instead of DR00.
0000 to FFFF
hex
Cleared Cleared Not supported by
CJ1@-CPU@@ CPU
Units
A598 A59800 FPD Teach-
ing Bit
Turn this bit ON to set the monitoring
time automatically with the teaching
function.
While A59800 is ON, FPD(269) mea-
sures how long it takes for the diag-
nostic output to go ON after the
execution condition goes ON. If the
measured time exceeds the monitor-
ing time, the measured time is multi-
plied by 1.5 and that value is stored
as the new monitoring time.
(The teaching function can be used
only when a word address has been
specified for the monitoring time
operand.)
1: Teach moni-
toring time
0: Teaching
function off
Cleared Cleared ---
A59801 Equals Flag
for Back-
ground Exe-
cution
Turns ON if matching data is found
for an SRCH(181) instruction exe-
cuted in the background.
1: Search data
found in table
0: Search data
not found
Cleared Cleared Not supported by
CJ1@-CPU@@ CPU
Units
A600 to
A603
Macro Area
Input Words
When MCRO(099) is executed, the
contents of the four specified source
words (starting from the 1st input
parameter word) are copied here.
The contents of the four copied
words are then passed to the sub-
routine.
Input data:
4 words
Cleared Cleared ---
A604 to
A607
Macro Area
Output
Words
After the subroutine specified in
MCRO(099) has been executed, the
results of the subroutine are trans-
ferred from A604 through A607 to
the specified destination words. (out-
put parameter words)
Output data:
4 words
Cleared Cleared ---
A619 A61901 Peripheral
Port Set-
tings Chang-
ing Flag
ON while the peripheral port’s com-
munications settings are being
changed. This flag will be turned ON
when STUP(237) is executed and it
will be turned OFF after the settings
have been changed.
1: Changing
0: Not chang-
ing
Retained Cleared ---
A61902 RS-232C
Port Set-
tings Chang-
ing Flag
ON while the RS-232C port’s com-
munications settings are being
changed. This flag will be turned ON
when STUP(237) is executed and it
will be turned OFF after the settings
have been changed.
1: Changing
0: Not chang-
ing
Retained Cleared ---
A620 A62001 Communica-
tions Unit 0,
Port 1 Set-
tings Chang-
ing Flag
The corresponding flag will be ON
when the settings for that port are
being changed.
The flag will be turned ON when
STUP(237) is executed and it will be
turned OFF by an event issued from
the Serial Communications Unit after
the settings have been changed.
It is also possible for the user to indi-
cate a change in serial port settings
by turning these flags ON.
1: Changing
0: Not chang-
ing
Retained Cleared ---
A62002 Communica-
tions Unit 0,
Port 2 Set-
tings Chang-
ing Flag
1: Changing
0: Not chang-
ing
Retained Cleared ---
A62003 Communica-
tions Unit 0,
Port 3 Set-
tings Chang-
ing Flag
1: Changing
0: Not chang-
ing
Retained Cleared ---
A62004 Communica-
tions Unit 0,
Port 4 Set-
tings Chang-
ing Flag
1: Changing
0: Not chang-
ing
Retained Cleared ---
628
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
A621 to
A635
A62100
to
A63504
Communica-
tions Units 0
to 15, Ports
1 to 4 Set-
tings Chang-
ing Flag
Same as above. 1: Changing
0: Not chang-
ing
Retained Cleared ---
A650 A65000
to
A65007
Program
Replace-
ment End
Code
Normal End (i.e., when A65014 is
OFF)
01 hex:Program file (.OBJ)
replaced.
Error End (i.e., when A65014 is ON)
00 hex:Fatal error
01 hex:Memory error
11 hex:Write-protected
12 hex:Program replacement pass-
word error
21 hex:No Memory Card
22 hex:No such file
23 hex:Specified file exceeds
capacity (memory error).
31 hex:One of the following in
progress:
File memory operation
User program write
Operating mode change
--- Retained Cleared ---
A65014 Replace-
ment Error
Flag
ON when the Replacement Start Bit
(A65015) is turned ON to replace the
program, but there is an error. If the
Replacement Start Bit is turned ON
again, the Replacement Error Flag
will be turned OFF.
1: Replace-
ment error
0: No replace-
ment error, or
the Replace-
ment Start Bit
(A65015) is
ON.
Retained Cleared ---
A65015 Replace-
ment Start
Bit
Program replacement starts when
the Replacement Start Bit is turned
ON if the Program Password (A651)
is valid (A5A5 hex). Do not turn OFF
the Replacement Start Bit during
program replacement.
When the power is turned ON or pro-
gram replacement is completed, the
Replacement Start Bit will be turned
OFF, regardless of whether replace-
ment was completed normally or in
error.
It is possible to confirm if program
replacement is being executed by
reading the Replacement Start Bit
using a Programming Device, PT, or
host computer.
1: Program
replaced
0: Replace-
ment com-
pleted, or after
power is turned
ON
Retained Cleared ---
A651 --- Program
Password
Type in the password to replace a
program.
A5A5 hex: Replacement Start Bit
(A65015) is enabled.
Any other value: Replacement Start
Bit (A65015) is disabled.
When the power is turned ON or pro-
gram replacement is completed, the
Replacement Start Bit will be turned
OFF, regardless of whether replace-
ment was completed normally or in
error.
--- Retained Cleared ---
Addresses Name Function Settings Status
after
mode
change
Status at
startup
Write timing/
Related Flags,
Settings
Word Bit
629
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
Note This data is supported by CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later.
A654 to
657
--- Program
File Name
When program replacement starts,
the program file name will be stored
in ASCII. File names can be speci-
fied up to eight characters in length
excluding the extension.
File names are stored in the follow-
ing order: A654 to A657 (i.e., from
the lowest word to the highest), and
from the highest byte to the lowest. If
a file name is less than eight charac-
ters, the lowest remaining bytes and
the highest remaining word will be
filled with spaces (20 hex). Null char-
acters and space characters cannot
be used within file names.
Example: File name is ABC.OBJ
--- Retained Cleared ---
A720 to
A722
Power ON
Clock Data 1
(See note.)
These words contain the same time
data as the startup time stored in
words A510 to A511, as well as the
month and year information.
A72000 to A72007: Seconds (00 to
59)
A72008 to A72015: Minutes (00 to
59)
A72100 to A72107: Hour (00 to 23)
A72108 to A72115: Day of month (00
to 31)
A72200 to A72207: Month (01 to 12)
A72208 to A72215: Year (00 to 99)
See at left. Retained Retained Written when power is
turned ON.
A723 to
A725
Power ON
Clock Data 2
(See note.)
These words contain the time at
which the power was turned ON one
time before the startup time stored in
words A510 to A511.
A72300 to A72307: Seconds (00 to
59)
A72308 to A72315: Minutes (00 to
59)
A72400 to A72407: Hour (00 to 23)
A72408 to A72415: Day of month (00
to 31)
A72500 to A72507: Month (01 to 12)
A72508 to A72515: Year (00 to 99)
See at left. Retained Retained Written when power is
turned ON.
A726 to
A728
Power ON
Clock Data 3
(See note.)
These words contain the time at
which the power was turned ON two
times before the startup time stored
in words A510 to A511.
A72600 to A72607: Seconds (00 to
59)
A72608 to A72615: Minutes (00 to
59)
A72700 to A72707: Hour (00 to 23)
A72708 to A72715: Day of month (00
to 31)
A72800 to A72807: Month (01 to 12)
A72808 to A72815: Year (00 to 99)
See at left. Retained Retained Written when power is
turned ON.
Addresses Name Function Settings Status
after
mode
change
Status at
startup
Write timing/
Related Flags,
Settings
Word Bit
630
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
Note This data is supported by CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later.
Addresses Name Function Settings Status
after
mode
change
Status at
startup
Write timing/
Related Flags,
Settings
Word Bit
A729 to
A731
Power ON
Clock Data 4
(See note.)
These words contain the time at
which the power was turned ON
three times before the startup time
stored in words A510 to A511.
A72900 to A72907: Seconds (00 to
59)
A72908 to A72915: Minutes (00 to
59)
A73000 to A73007: Hour (00 to 23)
A73008 to A73015: Day of month (00
to 31)
A73100 to A73107: Month (01 to 12)
A73108 to A73115: Year (00 to 99)
See at left. Retained Retained Written when power is
turned ON.
A732 to
A734
Power ON
Clock Data 5
(See note.)
These words contain the time at
which the power was turned ON four
times before the startup time stored
in words A510 to A511.
A73200 to A73207: Seconds (00 to
59)
A73208 to A73215: Minutes (00 to
59)
A73300 to A73307: Hour (00 to 23)
A73308 to A73315: Day of month (00
to 31)
A73400 to A73407: Month (01 to 12)
A73408 to A73415: Year (00 to 99)
See at left. Retained Retained Written when power is
turned ON.
A735 to
A737
Power ON
Clock Data 6
(See note.)
These words contain the time at
which the power was turned ON five
times before the startup time stored
in words A510 to A511.
A73500 to A73507: Seconds (00 to
59)
A73508 to A73515: Minutes (00 to
59)
A73600 to A73607: Hour (00 to 23)
A73608 to A73615: Day of month (00
to 31)
A73700 to A73707: Month (01 to 12)
A73708 to A73715: Year (00 to 99)
See at left. Retained Retained Written when power is
turned ON.
A738 to
A740
Power ON
Clock Data 7
(See note.)
These words contain the time at
which the power was turned ON six
times before the startup time stored
in words A510 to A511.
A73800 to A73807: Seconds (00 to
59)
A73808 to A73815: Minutes (00 to
59)
A73900 to A73907: Hour (00 to 23)
A73908 to A73915: Day of month (00
to 31)
A74000 to A74007: Month (01 to 12)
A74008 to A74015: Year (00 to 99)
See at left. Retained Retained Written when power is
turned ON.
A741 to
A743
Power ON
Clock Data 8
(See note.)
These words contain the time at
which the power was turned ON
seven times before the startup time
stored in words A510 to A511.
A74100 to A74107: Seconds (00 to
59)
A74108 to A74115: Minutes (00 to
59)
A74200 to A74207: Hour (00 to 23)
A74208 to A74215: Day of month (00
to 31)
A74300 to A74307: Month (01 to 12)
A74308 to A74315: Year (00 to 99)
See at left. Retained Retained Written when power is
turned ON.
631
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
Note This data is supported by CPU Units with unit version 3.0 or later.
Note In CJ-series PLCs, the following flags are provided in a special read-only area and can be specified with
the labels given in the table. These flags are not contained in the Auxiliary Area.
Addresses Name Function Settings Status
after
mode
change
Status at
startup
Write timing/
Related Flags,
Settings
Word Bit
A744 to
A746
Power ON
Clock Data 9
(See note.)
These words contain the time at
which the power was turned ON
eight times before the startup time
stored in words A510 to A511.
A74400 to A74407: Seconds (00 to
59)
A74408 to A74415: Minutes (00 to
59)
A74500 to A74507: Hour (00 to 23)
A74508 to A74515: Day of month (00
to 31)
A74600 to A74607: Month (01 to 12)
A74608 to A74615: Year (00 to 99)
See at left. Retained Retained Written when power is
turned ON.
A747 to
A749
Power ON
Clock Data
10 (See
note.)
These words contain the time at
which the power was turned ON nine
times before the startup time stored
in words A510 to A511.
A74700 to A74707: Seconds (00 to
59)
A74708 to A74715: Minutes (00 to
59)
A74800 to A74807: Hour (00 to 23)
A74808 to A74815: Day of month (00
to 31)
A74900 to A74907: Month (01 to 12)
A74908 to A74915: Year (00 to 99)
See at left. Retained Retained Written when power is
turned ON.
Flag area Name Label Meaning
Condition Code
Area
Error Flag ER Turns ON when an error occurs in processing an instructions, indi-
cating an error end to the instruction.
Access Error Flag AER Turns ON when an attempt is made to access an illegal area. The
status of this flag is maintain only during the current cycle and only
in the task in which it occurred.
Carry Flag CY Turns ON when there is a carry or borrow in a math operation,
when a bit is shifted into the Carry Flag, etc.
Greater Than Flag >Turns ON when the result of comparing two values is “greater
than,” when a value exceeds a specified range, etc.
Equals Flag =Turns ON when the result of comparing two values is “equals,”
when the result of a math operation is 0, etc.
Less Than Flag <Turns ON when the result of comparing two values is “less than,”
when a value is below a specified range, etc.
Negative Flag NTurns ON when the MSB in the result of a math operation is 1.
Overflow Flag OF Turns ON when the result of a math operation overflows.
Underflow Flag UF Turns ON when the result of a math operation underflows.
Greater Than or Equals
Flag
>= Turns ON when the result of comparing two values is “greater than
or equals.”
Not Equal Flag <> Turns ON when the result of comparing two values is “not equal.”
Less than or Equals Flag <= Turns ON when the result of comparing two values is “less than or
equals.”
Always ON Flag A1 This flag is always ON.
Always OFF Flag A0 This flag is always OFF.
Clock Pulse
Area
0.02-s clock pulse 0.02s Repeatedly turns ON for 0.02 s and OFF for 0.02 s.
0.1-s clock pulse 0.1s Repeatedly turns ON for 0.1 s and OFF for 0.1 s.
0.2-s clock pulse 0.2s Repeatedly turns ON for 0.2 s and OFF for 0.2 s.
1-s clock pulse 1s Repeatedly turns ON for 1 s and OFF for 1 s.
1-min clock pulse 1min Repeatedly turns ON for 1 min and OFF for 1 min.
632
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
Details on Auxiliary Area Operation
A100 to A199: Error Log Area
The following data would be generated in an error record if a memory error (error code 80F1) occurred on 1
April 1998 at 17:10:30 with the error located in the PLC Setup (04 hex).
The following data would be generated in an error record if an FALS error with FALS number 001 occurred on
2 May 1997 at 8:30:15.
Error code
Error flag contents
min s
yr
mo
Error code
Error flag contents
min s
yr mo
day hr
day hr
Error
record
Error
record
633
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
Error Codes and Error Flags
Note 1. C101 to C2FF will be stored for FALS numbers 001 to 511.
2. 4101 to 42FF will be stored for FAL numbers 001 to 511.
3. The contents of the error flags for a duplicate number error are as follows:
Bits 0 to 7: Unit number (binary), 00 to 5F hex for Special I/O Units, 00 to 0F hex for CPU Bus Units
Bits 8 to 14: All zeros.
Bit 15: Unit type, 0 for CPU Bus Units and 1 for Special I/O Units.
4. Only the contents of A295 is stored as the error flag contents for program errors.
5. 0000 hex will be stored as the error flag contents.
A20011: First Cycle Flag
A20015: Initial Task Flag
A20015 will turn ON during the first time a task is executed after it has reached executable status. It will be ON
only while the task is being executed and will not turn ON if following cycles.
Classification Error code Meaning Error flags
System-defined
fatal errors
80F1 Memory error A403
80C0 to 80C7
80CE, 80CF
I/O bus error A404
80E9 Duplicate number error A410, A411 to 416 (See note 3.)
80E1 Too many I/O error A407
80E0 I/O setting error ---
80F0 Program error A295 to 299 (See note 4.)
809F Cycle time too long error ---
80EA Duplicate Expansion Rack number error A40900 to 40907
User-defined
fatal errors
C101 to C2FF FALS instruction executed (See note 1.) ---
User-defined
non-fatal errors
4101 to 42FF FAL instruction executed (See note 2.) ---
System-defined
non-fatal errors
008B Interrupt task error A426
009A Basic I/O error A408
009B PLC Setup setting error A406
0200 to 020F CPU Bus Unit error A417
0300 to 035F Special I/O Unit error A418 to 423 (See note 5.)
00F7 Battery error ---
0400 to 040F CPU Bus Unit setup error A427
0500 to 055F Special I/O Unit setup error A428 to 433 (See note 5.)
Time
1 cycle
Execution
started.
634
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
A20200 to A20207: Communications Port Enabled Flags
A300: Error Record Pointer
A20015
1 cycle
Executed
Executable status
CMN
SEND
PMCR
Port 0
Port 1
Port 7
Network communications in-
struction executed for port 0.
The program is designed so that CMND(490)
will be executed only when A20200 is ON.
Instruction
execution
Error record 1
Error record 20
Example
Stored
Stored
Points to the next record to be used.
Stored
next
635
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
A20110: Online Editing Wait Flag
A50100 to A50115: CPU Bus Unit Restart Bits and
A30200 to A30215: CPU Bus Unit Initialization Flags
A301: Current EM Bank
Online edit processing
A20110
Wait
A30201
A50101 (or at startup)
Unit initialized.
Example: Unit No. 1 Automatically turned OFF by system.
EM Area
Bank 0
Bank 1
Bank 2
Bank C
Current Bank
If bank 2 is the current bank, the
E2_00100 can also be address
simply as E00100
7
636
Auxiliary Area Appendix C
A40109: Program Error
A42615: Interrupt Task Error Cause Flag
Note CJ1-H-R CPU Units only.
Error Address
UM Overflow Error Flag A29515
Illegal Instruction Flag A29514
Distribution Overflow Error Flag A29513
Task Error Flag A25912
No END(001) Error Flag A29511
Illegal Area Access Error Flag A29510
Indirect DM/EM Addressing Error Flag A29509
Instruction Processing Error Flag (ER
Flag goes ON)
A29508
Refreshed twice.
Special I/O Unit
IORF(097) or
FIORF(225)
(See note.)
instruction
Interrupt task
I/O refresh
10 ms
min.
637
Appendix D
Memory Map of PLC Memory Addresses
PLC Memory Addresses
PLC memory addresses are set in Index Registers (IR00 to IR15) to indirectly address I/O memory. Normally,
use the MOVE TO REGISTER (MOVR(560)) and MOVE TIMER/COUNTER PV TO REGISTER
(MOVRW(561)) instructions to set PLC memory addresses into the Index Registers.
Some instructions, such as DATA SEARCH (SRCH(181)), FIND MAXIMUM (MAX(182)), and FIND MINIMUM
(MIN(183)), output the results of processing to an Index Register to indicate an PLC memory address.
There are also instructions for which Index Registers can be directly designated to use the PLC memory
addresses stored in them by other instructions. These instructions include DOUBLE MOVE (MOVL(498)),
some symbol comparison instructions (=L,<>L, <L, >L,<=L, and >=L), DOUBLE COMPARE (CMPL(060)),
DOUBLE DATA EXCHANGE (XCGL(562)), DOUBLE INCREMENT BINARY (++L(591)), DOUBLE DECRE-
MENT BINARY (––L(593)), DOUBLE SIGNED BINARY ADD WITHOUT CARRY (+L(401)), DOUBLE SIGNED
BINARY SUBTRACT WITHOUT CARRY (–L(411)), SET RECORD LOCATION (SETR(635)), and GET
RECORD LOCATION (GETR(636)).
The PLC memory addresses all are continuous and the user must be aware of the order and boundaries of the
memory areas. As reference, the PLC memory addresses are provided in a table at the end of this appendix.
Note Directly setting PLC memory addresses in the program should be avoided whenever possible. If PLC
memory addresses are set in the program, the program will be less compatible with new CPU Unit mod-
els or CPU Units for which changed have been made to the layout of the memory.
Memory Configuration
There are two classifications of the RAM memory (with battery backup) in a CJ-series CPU Unit.
Parameter Areas: These areas contain CPU Unit system setting data, such as the PLC Setup, CJ-series CPU
Bus Unit Setups, etc. An illegal access error will occur if an attempt is made to access any of the parameter
areas from an instruction in the user program.
I/O Memory Areas: These are the areas that can be specified as operands in the instructions in user pro-
grams.
638
Memory Map of PLC Memory Addresses Appendix D
Memory Map
Note Do not access the areas indicated Reserved for system.
Note The contents of the EM Area bank currently specified in the program is stored at these addresses. For
example, if bank 1 is specified, the same contents as at 20000 to 27FFF will be stored at F8000 to
FFFFF.
Classification PLC memory
addresses (hex)
User addresses Area
I/O memory
areas
0B100 to 0B1FF --- Reserved for system.
00000 to 0B7FF --- Reserved for system.
0B800 to 0B801 TK00 to TK31 Task Flag Area
0B802 to 0B83F --- Reserved for system.
0B840 to 0B9FF A000 to A447 Read-only Auxiliary Area
0BA00 to 0BBFF A448 to A959 Read/Write Auxiliary Area
0BC00 to 0BDFF --- Reserved for system.
0BE00 to 0BEFF T0000 to T4095 Timer Completion Flags
0BF00 to 0BFFF C0000 to C4095 Counter Completion Flags
0C000 to 0D7FF CIO 0000 to CIO 6143 CIO Area
0D800 to 0D9FF H000 to H511 Holding Area
0DA00 to 0DDFF H512 to H1535 Holding Area
These words are used for function blocks only.
0DE00 to 0DFFF W000 to W511 Work Area
0E000 to 0EFFF T0000 to T4095 Timer PVs
0F000 to 0FFFF C0000 to C4095 Counter PVs
10000 to 17FFF D00000 to D32767 DM Area
18000 to 1FFFF E0_00000 to E0_32767 EM Area bank 0
20000 to 27FFF E1_00000 to E1_32767 EM Area bank 1
Etc. Etc. Etc.
78000 to 7FFFF EC_00000 to EC_32767 EM Area bank C
Etc. Etc. Etc.
F8000 to FFFFF E00000 to E32767 EM Area, current bank (See note.)
639
Appendix E
PLC Setup Coding Sheets for
Programming Console
Use the following coding sheets when setting the PLC Setup from a Programming Console.
Value (hex) Rack 0, Slot 0 I/O Response Time
A00 8 ms
10 No filter
11 0.5 ms
12 1 ms
13 2 ms
14 4 ms
15 8 ms
16 16 ms
17 32 ms
B00 8 ms
10 No filter
11 0.5 ms
12 1 ms
13 2 ms
14 4 ms
15 8 ms
16 16 ms
17 32 ms
10@@@@
A
B
Address
640
PLC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console Appendix E
Value (hex) Rack 0, Slot 2 I/O Response Time
A00 8 ms
10 No filter
11 0.5 ms
12 1 ms
13 2 ms
14 4 ms
15 8 ms
16 16 ms
17 32 ms
Value (hex) Rack 0, Slot 3 I/O Response Time
B00 8 ms
10 No filter
11 0.5 ms
12 1 ms
13 2 ms
14 4 ms
15 8 ms
16 16 ms
17 32 ms
Value (hex) Rack 7, Slot 8 I/O Response Time
A00 8 ms
10 No filter
11 0.5 ms
12 1 ms
13 2 ms
14 4 ms
15 8 ms
16 16 ms
17 32 ms
Value (hex) Rack 7, Slot 9 I/O Response Time
B00 8 ms
10 No filter
11 0.5 ms
12 1 ms
13 2 ms
14 4 ms
15 8 ms
16 16 ms
17 32 ms
11@@@@
A
B
Address
29@@@@
A
B
Address
641
PLC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console Appendix E
High-speed Counter 0 Operation Settings
Value (hex) Pulse input method
A 0 Differential phase inputs
1 Pulse + direction inputs
2 Up/Down inputs
3 Increment pulse input
Value (hex) Reset method
B 0 Z Phase and software reset, stop
comparing
1 Software reset, stop comparing
2 Z Phase and software reset, continue
comparing
3 Software reset, continue comparing
Value (hex) Number range mode
C 0 Linear mode
1 Ring mode
Value (hex) Usage
D 0 Don’t Use Counter
1 Use Counter (60 kHz)
2 Use Counter (100 kHz)
Value (hex) High-speed Counter 0 Circular Max.
Count (Max. ring counter value)
A 00000000 0
to
FFFFFFFF 4294967295
50@@@@
A
B
C
D
Address
51@@@@
52@@@@
A
(Lower)
(Upper)
Address
642
PLC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console Appendix E
Built-in Inputs IN0 to IN3 Operation Settings
Input Time Constant Setting for General-purpose Inputs
Value (hex) IN0 operation settings
A 0 Normal (General-purpose inputs)
1 Interrupt (Interrupt inputs)
2 Quick (Quick-response inputs
Value (hex) IN1 operation settings
B Same as for IN0.
Value (hex) IN2 operation settings
C Same as for IN0.
Value (hex) IN3 operation settings
D Same as for IN0.
Value (hex) Input time constant
A 0000 Default (8 ms)
0010 0 ms (No filter)
0011 0.5 ms
0012 1 ms
0013 2 ms
0014 4 ms
0015 8 ms
0016 16 ms
0017 32 ms
Value (hex) IOM Hold Bit Status at
Startup
Forced Status Hold Bit
Status at Startup
A C000 Retained Retained
8000 Retained Cleared
4000 Cleared Retained
0000 Cleared Cleared
53@@@@
55@@@@
60@@@@
A
B
C
D
High-speed counter 1: Operation settings
(Same as operation settings for
high-speed counter 0.)
Address
to
61@@@@
A
Address
80@@@@
A
Address
643
PLC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console Appendix E
Peripheral Port
Display Startup Mode
A PRCN Mode on Programming Console’s mode switch
PRG PROGRAM mode
MON MONITOR mode
RUN RUN mode
Value (hex) Low Battery Voltage
Detection
Interrupt Task Error
Detection
A C000 Do not detect. Do not detect.
8000 Do not detect. Detect.
4000 Detect. Do not detect.
0000 Detect. Detect.
Value (hex) EM File Memory Conversion
A 0000 None
0080 EM File Memory Enabled: Bank No. 0
0081 EM File Memory Enabled: Bank No. 1
0082 EM File Memory Enabled: Bank No. 2
81@@@@
A
Address
128@@@@
A
Address
136@@@@
A
Address
144@@@@
A
B
Address
Value (hex) Data bits Stop bits Parity
A 00 7 bits 2 bits Even
01 7 bits 2 bits Odd
02 7 bits 2 bits None
04 7 bits 1 bit Even
05 7 bits 1 bit Odd
06 7 bits 1 bit None
08 8 bits 2 bits Even
09 8 bits 2 bits Odd
0A 8 bits 2 bits None
0C 8 bits 1 bit Even
0D 8 bits 1 bit Odd
0E 8 bits 1 bit None
644
PLC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console Appendix E
Peripheral Port
Note Set 0000 to 0009 hex for standard NT Links and 000A hex for high-
speed NT Links.
Peripheral Port
Peripheral Port
Value (hex) Communications mode
B 00 Default (Rightmost 2 digits ignored.)
80 Host link
82 NT link
84 Peripheral bus
85 Host link
145@@@@
A
Address
Value (hex) Baud rate
A 0000 9,600 bps
0001 300 bps
0002 600 bps
0003 1,200 bps
0004 2,400 bps
0005 4,800 bps
0006 9,600 bps
0007 19,200 bps
0008 38,400 bps
0009 57,600 bps
000A 115,200 bps
147@@@@
A
Address
Value (hex) Host link Unit No.
A0000 No. 0
0001 No. 1
0002 No. 2
to to
001F No. 31
150@@@@
A
Address
Value (hex) NT Link Mode Maximum Unit No.
A0000 No. 0
0001 No. 1
to to
0007 No. 7
645
PLC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console Appendix E
RS-232C Port
RS-232C Port
Note Set 0000 to 0009 hex for standard NT Link and 000A hex for high-
speed NT Link. Set 0000 hex for standard Serial PLC Link and 000A
hex for high-speed Serial PLC Link.
160@@@@
A
B
Address
Value (hex) Data bits Stop bits Parity
A 00 7 bits 2 bits Even
01 7 bits 2 bits Odd
02 7 bits 2 bits None
04 7 bits 1 bit Even
05 7 bits 1 bit Odd
06 7 bits 1 bit None
08 8 bits 2 bits Even
09 8 bits 2 bits Odd
0A 8 bits 2 bits None
0C 8 bits 1 bit Even
0D 8 bits 1 bit Odd
0E 8 bits 1 bit None
Value (hex) Communications mode
B 00 Default (Rightmost 2 digits ignored.)
80 Host link
82 NT link
83 No-protocol
84 Peripheral bus
85 Host link
87 Serial PLC Link Polled Unit
88 Serial PLC Link Polling Unit
161@@@@
A
Address
Value (hex) Baud rate
A 0000 9,600 bps
0001 300 bps
0002 600 bps
0003 1,200 bps
0004 2,400 bps
0005 4,800 bps
0006 9,600 bps
0007 19,200 bps
0008 38,400 bps
0009 57,600 bps
000A 115,200 bps
646
PLC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console Appendix E
RS-232C Port
RS-232C Port
162@@@@
A
Address
Value (hex) No-protocol mode delay
A0000 0 ms
0001 10 ms
to to
270F 99,990 ms
163@@@@
A
Address
Value (hex) Host link Unit No.
A0000 No. 0
0001 No. 1
0002 No. 2
to to
001F No. 31
Value (hex) No-protocol Mode End Code
A00 00
to to
FF FF
Value (hex) No-protocol Mode Start Code
B00 00
to to
FF FF
164@@@@
A
B
Address
647
PLC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console Appendix E
RS-232C Port
RS-232C Port
165@@@@
A
B
C
Address
Value (hex) No-protocol Mode reception data volume
A00 256
01 1
to to
FF 256
Value (hex) No-protocol Mode end code setting
B 0 None (Specify the amount of data being received)
1 Yes (Specify the end code)
2 End code is set to CF+LF
Value (hex) No-protocol Mode start code setting
C0 None
1Yes
166@@@@
A
B
C
Address
Value (hex) Maximum Unit No. in NT Link/Serial PLC Link
Mode
A0000 No. 0
0001 No. 1
to to
0007 No. 7
Value (hex) Number of link words in Serial PLC Link
(Polling Unit) Mode
B0 10
11
to to
A10
Value (hex) Link method in Serial PLC Link (Polling Unit)
Mode
C 00 Complete link method
80 Polling Unit link method
Value (hex) Scheduled interrupt time unit
A 0000 10 ms
0001 1.0 ms
0002 0.1 ms (CJ1M CPU Units only)
195@@@@
A
Address
648
PLC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console Appendix E
Value (hex) Instruction Error Operation
A 0000 Continue operation
8000 Stop operation
Value (hex) Minimum Cycle Time
A 0000 Cycle time not fixed
0001 Cycle time fixed: 1 ms
to to
7D00 Cycle time fixed: 32,000 ms
Value (hex) Watch Cycle Time
A 0000 Default: 1,000 ms (1 s)
8001 10 ms
to to
8FA0 40,000 ms
Value (hex) Fixed Peripheral Servicing Time
A 0000 Default (4% of the cycle time)
8000 00 ms
8001 0.1 ms
to to
80FF 25.5 ms
Value (hex) Slice Time for Peripheral Servicing
A 00 Disable Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode.
01 to FF 0.1 to 25.5 ms (in 0.1-ms increments)
Value (hex) Slice Time for Program Execution
B 00 Disable Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode.
05 to FF 5 to 255 (in 1-ms increments)
197@@@@
A
Address
208@@@@
A
Address
209@@@@
A
Address
218@@@@
A
Address
219@@@@
A
B
Address
649
PLC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console Appendix E
Value
(hex)
Unit/Port for Priority Servicing
A 00 Disable Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode.
10 to 1F CPU Bus Unit unit number (0 to 15) + 10 hex
20 to 7F CPU Special I/O Unit unit number (0 to 96) + 20 hex
FC RS-232C port
FD Peripheral port
Value
(hex)
Unit/Port for Priority Servicing
B 00 Disable Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode.
10 to 1F CPU Bus Unit unit number (0 to 15) + 10 hex
20 to 7F CPU Special I/O Unit unit number (0 to 96) + 20 hex
FC RS-232C port
FD Peripheral port
Value
(hex)
Unit/Port for Priority Servicing
A 00 Disable Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode.
10 to 1F CPU Bus Unit unit number (0 to 15) + 10 hex
20 to 7F CPU Special I/O Unit unit number (0 to 96) + 20 hex
FC RS-232C port
FD Peripheral port
Value
(hex)
Unit/Port for Priority Servicing
B 00 Disable Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode.
10 to 1F CPU Bus Unit unit number (0 to 15) + 10 hex
20 to 7F CPU Special I/O Unit unit number (0 to 96) + 20 hex
FC RS-232C port
FD Peripheral port
Value
(hex)
Unit/Port for Priority Servicing
A 00 Disable Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode.
10 to 1F CPU Bus Unit unit number (0 to 15) + 10 hex
20 to 7F CPU Special I/O Unit unit number (0 to 96) + 20 hex
FC RS-232C port
FD Peripheral port
220@@@@
A
B
Address
221@@@@
A
B
Address
222@@@@
A
Address
Not used.
650
PLC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console Appendix E
Addresses 227 through 231 are the same as 226.
Value (hex) Power OFF Interrupt
Task
Power OFF Detection
Delay Time
A0000 Disabled 0 ms
0001 1 ms
to to
000A 10 ms
8000 Enabled 0 ms
8001 1 ms
to to
800A 10 ms
225@@@@
A
Address
226@@@@
A
Address
Value
(hex)
Special I/O Unit Cyclic Refreshing 0: Yes 1: No
Unit number
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
A00000000000000000000
00010000000000000001
00020000000000000010
00030000000000000011
00040000000000000100
00050000000000000101
to
FFFF1111111111111111
Value (hex) Pulse Output 0 Use Origin
Operation Setting (Origin Search
Function)
A 0 Disabled
1 Enabled
Value (hex) Pulse Output 0 Limit Input Signal
Operation
(CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later)
B 0 Search only
1Always
Value (hex) Pulse Output 0 Speed Curve
(CJ1M CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later)
C 0 Trapezium (linear)
1 S-shaped
256@@@@
A
B
C
Address
651
PLC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console Appendix E
Value (hex) Origin Search Operating Mode
A 0 Mode 0
1 Mode 1
2 Mode 2
Value (hex) Origin Search Operation Setting
B 0 Inverse 1 (Reversal Mode 1)
1 Inverse 2 (Reversal Mode 2)
Value (hex) Origin Detection Method
C 0 Method 0
1 Method 1
2 Method 2
Value (hex) Origin Search Direction
D 0 CW direction
1 CCW direction
Value (hex) Origin Search/Return Initial Speed
A 00000000 0 pps
00000001 1 pps
to to
000186A0 100,000 pps
Value (hex) Origin Search High Speed
A 00000000 0 pps
00000001 1 pps
to to
000186A0 100,000 pps
Value (hex) Origin Search Proximity Speed
A 00000000 0 pps
00000001 1 pps
to to
000186A0 100,000 pps
257@@@@
A
B
C
D
Address
258@@@@
259@@@@
A
(Lower)
(Upper)
Address
260@@@@
261@@@@
A
(Lower)
(Upper)
Address
262@@@@
263@@@@
A
(Lower)
(Upper)
Address
652
PLC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console Appendix E
Value (hex) Origin Compensation Value
A 80000000 −2,147,483,648
to to
00000000 0
to to
7FFFFFFF 2,147,483,647
Value (hex) Origin Search Acceleration Rate
A --- 0001 1 pulse / 4 ms
to to
CJM1 CPU Unit
Ver. 2.0
07D0 2,000 pulses / 4 ms
Pre-Ver. 2.0
CJ1M CPU Unit
FFFF 65,535 pulses / 4 ms
Value (hex) Origin Search Deceleration Rate
A --- 0001 1 pulse / 4 ms
to to
CJM1 CPU Unit
Ver. 2.0
07D0 2,000 pulses / 4 ms
Pre-Ver. 2.0
CJ1M CPU Unit
FFFF 65,535 pulses / 4 ms
Value (hex) Limit Signal Input Type
A0 N.C.
1N.O.
B Origin proximity input signal class (Same as for limit input signal.)
C Origin input signal class (Same as for limit input signal.)
264@@@@
265@@@@
A
(Lower)
(Upper)
Address
266@@@@
A
Address
267@@@@
A
Address
268@@@@
A
B
C
Address
653
PLC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console Appendix E
Note The settings for origin search 1 (addresses 274 to 287) are the same
as for origin search 0 (addresses 256 to 269).
Value (hex) Positioning Monitor Time
A 0000 0 ms
to to
270F 9,999 ms
269@@@@
A
Address
654
PLC Setup Coding Sheets for Programming Console Appendix E
655
Appendix F
Connecting to the RS-232C Port
on the CPU Unit
Connection Examples
The wiring diagrams for connecting to the RS-232C port are provided in this appendix. In actual wiring, we rec-
ommend the use of shielded twisted-pair cables and other methods to improve noise resistance. Refer to Rec-
ommended Wiring Methods later in this appendix for recommended wiring methods.
Connections to Host Computers
Note Connections to a computer running the CX-Programmer are the same as those shown here.
1:1 Connections via RS-232C Port
Note The maximum cable length for an RS-232C connection is 15 m. RS-232C communications specifica-
tions, however, do not cover transmissions at 19.2 Kbps. Refer to documentation of the device being
connected when using this baud rate.
IBM PC/AT or Compatible Computer
RS-232C
RS-232C
port
CPU Unit Computer
RS-232C
interface
Signal
name Signal
name
RS-232C
interface
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
Pin
No.
Pin
No.
656
Connecting to the RS-232C Port on the CPU Unit Appendix F
1:N Connections via RS-232C Port
Note 1. We recommend using the following NT-AL001 Link Adapter Connecting Cables to connect to NT-
AL001-E Link Adapters.
XW2Z-070T-1: 0.7 m
XW2Z-200T-1: 2 m
The recommended cables should be wired as shown below. Each signal wire should be twisted with
the SG (signal ground) wire and placed in a shielded cable to prevent the effects of noise in noise-
prone environments. The 5-V wires can also be twisted with the SG wire to increase noise immunity.
RS-232C RS-422A
RS-232C
RS-232C
5-V (+)
Shield
CPU Unit
(See note 2.)
Personal Computer
Signal
name
Signal
name
Signal
name
Signal
name
Signal
name
Signal
name
Signal
name
Signal
name
Signal
name
RS-232C
Interface
NT-AL001 Link Adapter
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
power (–)
DIP Switch Settings
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON
(terminating resistance)
Pin 3: OFF
Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: OFF
DIP Switch Settings
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: OFF
Pin 3: OFF
Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: ON
D-sub, 9-pin connector
(male)
RS-232C
Interface
RS-232C
Interface
(See
note 1.)
(See
note
2.)
(See
note 1.)
(See
note
2.)
D-sub, 9-pin connector
(male)
Communications Board/Unit NT-AL001 Link Adapter
DIP Switch Settings
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON
(terminating resistance)
Pin 3: OFF
Pin 4: OFF
Pin 5: OFF
Pin 6: ON
NT-AL001 Link Adapter
Pin
No.
Pin
No.
Pin
No.
Pin
No.
Pin
No.
Pin
No.
Pin
No.
Pin
No.
NT-AL001
RS-422A/485
RS-232C
RS-232C RS-232C RS-232C
NT-AL001
terminating
resistance ON, 5-V
power required
Terminating resistance ON
RS-232C ports
657
Connecting to the RS-232C Port on the CPU Unit Appendix F
Although this wiring is different from that shown in the example above, it can be used to increase
noise immunity if required.
2. When the NT-AL001 Link Adapter is connected to the RS-232C port on the CPU Unit, 5 V is supplied
from pin 6, eliminating the need for a 5-V power supply.
3. Do not use the 5-V power from pin 6 of the RS-232C port for anything other than an NT-AL001, CJ1W-
CIF11 Link Adapter, or NV3W-M@20L Programmable Terminal. Using this power supply for any other
external device may damage the CPU Unit or the external device.
4. The XW1Z-@@0T-1 Cable is designed to connect the NT-AL001 and contains special wiring for the
CS and RS signals. Do not use this cable for any other application. Connecting this cable to other
devices can damage them.
DIP Switch Settings on the NT-AL001 Link Adapter
There is a DIP switch on the NT-AL001 Link Adapter that is used to set RS-422A/485 communications param-
eters. Set the DIP switch as required for the serial communications mode according to the following table.
Note Turn OFF pin 5 and turn ON pin 6 when connected to a CJ-series CPU Unit.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
FG
SD
RD
RS
CS
5V
DR
ER
SG
FG
1
3
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
RD
SD
RS
CS
5V
DR
ER
SG
FG
PC NT-AL001
Shell
Not
used.
Shield
Shell
Signal
name
Signal
name
Wiring with XW2Z-@@OT-1 (10 conductors)
Internal signals
Arrows indicate signal directions
Returned
Returned
Pin
No.
Pin
No.
Pin Function Default setting
1 Not used. (Leave set to ON.) ON
2 Internal terminating resistance setting.
ON: Terminating resistance connected.
OFF: Terminating resistance not connected.
ON
3 2-wire/4-wire setting
Both pins ON: 2-wire communications
Both pins OFF: 4-wire communications
OFF
4OFF
5 Communications mode (See note.)
Both pins OFF: Always send.
5 OFF/6 ON: Send when RS-232C’s CS is high.
5 ON/6 OFF: Send when RS-232C’s CS is low.
ON
6OFF
658
Connecting to the RS-232C Port on the CPU Unit Appendix F
Connection Example to Programmable Terminal (PT)
Direct Connection from RS-232C to RS-232C
• Communications Mode: Host Link (unit number 0 only for Host Link)
NT Link (1:N, N = 1 Unit only)
• OMRON Cables with Connectors:
XW2Z-200T-1: 2 m
XW2Z-500T-1: 5 m
Serial PLC Link Connection Examples (CJ1M CPU Units Only)
This section provides connection examples for using Serial PLC Link. The communications mode used here is
Serial PLC Link.
Connecting an RS-422A Converter (CJ1W-CIF11)
Note The CJ1W-CIF11 is not insulated, so the total transmission distance for the whole transmission path is
50 m max. If the total transmission distance is greater than 50 m, use the insulated NT-AL001, and do
not use the CJ1W-CIF11. If only the NT-AL001 is used, the total transmission distance for the whole
transmission path is 500 m max. Refer to the wiring examples in Appendix G CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A
Converter for wiring diagrams and settings when combining the CJ1W-CIF11 with the NT-AL001. When
the CJ1W-CIF11 is combined with the NT-AL001, however, the total transmission length is 50 m max.
RS-232C
CPU Unit PT
PT
Host Link or NT Link (1:N)
Hood
Hood
RS-232C port
Signal
name
Signal
name
RS-232C
Interface
RS-232C
Interface
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
D-sub, 9-pin
connector (male)
Pin
No.
Pin
No.
CJ1M CPU Unit
(Polling Unit)
RS-422A Converter
CJ1M CPU Unit
(Polled Unit #0)
CJ1M CPU Unit
(Polled Unit #1)
RS-232C port
RS-232C port
RS-232C port
RS-422A Converter RS-422A
Converter
Serial PLC Link
(Total transmission length: 50 m max.)
659
Connecting to the RS-232C Port on the CPU Unit Appendix F
Connection with an RS-232C Port
RS-232C connection is also possible when using a Serial PLC Link to connect two CJ1M CPU Units.
Connection Examples
FG 1
SD 2
RD 3
RS 4
CS 5
5V 6
DR 7
ER 8
SG 9
1FG
2SD
3RD
4RS
5CS
65V
7DR
8ER
9SG
RS-232C
RS-232C
Signal Pin No. Pin No. Signal
CJ1M CPU Unit CJ1M CPU Unit
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
RDA−
RDB+
SDA−
SDB+
FG
RDA−
RDB+
SDA−
SDB+
FG
RDA−
RDB+
SDA−
SDB+
FG
CJ1M CPU Unit (Master)
CJ1W-CIF11
DIP switch
Pin No. 1: ON
(With termination resistance.)
Pin No. 2: OFF (4-wire type)
Pin No. 3: OFF (4-wire type)
Pin No. 4: OFF
Pin No. 5: OFF (No RS control for RD.)
Pin No. 6: OFF (No RS control for SD.)
RS-422A/485 interface
CJ1M CPU Unit (Slave No. 0)
CJ1W-CIF11
DIP switch
Pin No. 1: OFF
(No termination resistance.)
Pin No. 2: OFF (4-wire type)
Pin No. 3: OFF (4-wire type)
Pin No. 4: OFF
Pin No. 5: OFF (No RS control for RD.)
Pin No. 6: ON (With RS control for SD.)
RS-422A/485 interface
CJ1M CPU Unit (Slave No. 1)
CJ1W-CIF11
DIP switch
Pin No. 1: ON
(With termination resistance.)
Pin No. 2: OFF (4-wire type)
Pin No. 3: OFF (4-wire type)
Pin No. 4: OFF
Pin No. 5: OFF (No RS control for RD.)
Pin No. 6: ON (With RS control for SD.)
RS-422A/485 interface
Signal
name
Signal
name
Signal
name
Shield
Pin
No. Pin
No.
Pin
No.
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
RDA−
RDB+
SDA−
SDB+
FG
RDA−
RDB+
SDA−
SDB+
FG
RDA−
RDB+
SDA−
SDB+
FG
CJ1M CPU Unit (Master)
CJ1W-CIF11
DIP switch
Pin No. 1: ON
(With termination resistance.)
Pin No. 2: ON (2-wire type)
Pin No. 3: ON (2-wire type)
Pin No. 4: OFF
Pin No. 5: OFF (No RS control for RD.)
Pin No. 6: ON (With RS control for SD.)
CJ1M CPU Unit (Slave No. 0)
CJ1W-CIF11
DIP switch
Pin No. 1: OFF
(No termination resistance.)
Pin No. 2: ON (2-wire type)
Pin No. 3: ON (2-wire type)
Pin No. 4: OFF
Pin No. 5: OFF (No RS control for RD.)
Pin No. 6: ON (With RS control for SD.)
CJ1M CPU Unit (Slave No. 1)
CJ1W-CIF11
DIP switch
Pin No. 1: ON
(With termination resistance.)
Pin No. 2: ON (2-wire type)
Pin No. 3: ON (2-wire type)
Pin No. 4: OFF
Pin No. 5: OFF (No RS control for RD.)
Pin No. 6: ON (With RS control for SD.)
Signal
name
Signal
name
Signal
name
Shield
RS-422A/485 interface RS-422A/485 interface RS-422A/485 interface
Pin
No. Pin
No.
Pin
No.
660
Connecting to the RS-232C Port on the CPU Unit Appendix F
Recommended Wiring Methods
We recommend the following wiring methods for RS-232C, especially in environment prone to noise.
1. Use shielded twisted-pair cable for communications cables. The following RS-232C cables are
recommended.
2. Use a twisted-pair cable for each signal line and SG (signal ground) to connect the CPU Unit to a
communications partner. Also, bundle all the SG lines at the Unit and at the other device and connect
them together.
3. Connect the shield line of the communications cable to the hood (FG) of the RS-232C connector at the
Unit. Also, ground the protective earth (GR) terminal of the Power Supply Units on the CPU Rack and the
CJ-series Expansion Racks to a resistance of 100 Ω or less. The following example shows connecting
SD-SG, RD-SG, RS-SG, and CS-SG for Serial Communications Mode using a twisted-pair cable using
the peripheral bus.
Note The hood (FG) is internally connected to the protective earth (GR) terminal on the Power Supply Unit
through the CPU Rack or CJ-series Expansion Rack. FG can thus be connected by connecting the pro-
tective earth (GR) terminal on the Power Supply Unit. The hood (FG) is also electrically connected to pin
1 (FG), but the connection resistance between the shield and the FG is smaller for the hood. To reduce
contact resistance between the hood (FG) and the FG, connect the shield both to the hood (FG) and to
pin 1 (FG).
Model Manufacturer
UL2464 AWG28×5P IFS-RVV-SB (UL approved)
AWG28×5P IFVV-SB (not UL approved)
Fujikura Ltd.
UL2464-SB (MA) 5P×28AWG (7/0.127) (UL approved)
CO-MA-VV-SB 5P×28AWG (7/0.127) (not UL approved)
Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
XM2S-0911-E
Hood
Shield
SG signal line
CPU Unit External device
Signal
name
Pin
No.
Signal
name
Actual wiring
SG signal lines
bundled together
Aluminum foil
POWER
PA205R
DC24V
AC240V
OUTPUT
RUN
INPUT
AC100-240V
L2/N
L1
GR
CONTROLLER
CJ1G-CPU44
SYSMAC
PROGRAMMABLE
ERR/ALM
RUN
COMM
INH
PRPHL
OPEN
PERIFHERAL
BUSY
MCPWR
PORT
CPU Unit
Power Supply Unit
Ground to 100 Ω
or less
Shield and GR connected
internally.
The hood will be grounded
if the GR terminal is
g
rounded.
661
Connecting to the RS-232C Port on the CPU Unit Appendix F
Wiring Connectors
Use the following procedures to wire connectors.
Preparing the Cable
Lengths for steps in the procedure are provided in the diagrams.
Connecting the Shield Line to the Hood (FG)
40 mm (RS-232C)
10 mm
5 mm
1. Cut the cable to the required length, leaving leeway for wiring and laying the cables.
2. Use a razor blade to cut away the sheath, being careful not to damage the braiding.
3. Use scissors to cut away all but 10 mm of the exposed braiding.
4. Use wire strippers to remove the insulation from the end of each wire.
5. Fold the braiding back over the end of the sheath.
6. Wrap aluminum foil tape over the top of the braiding for one and a half turns.
Aluminum foil tape
662
Connecting to the RS-232C Port on the CPU Unit Appendix F
40 mm (RS-232C)
5 mm
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Not Connecting the Shield to the Hood (FG)
Cut the cable to the required length, leaving leeway for wiring and laying the cables.
Use a razor blade to cut away the sheath, being careful not to damage the braiding.
Use scissors to cut away the exposed braiding.
Use wire strippers to remove the insulation from the end of each wire.
Wrap electrician's tape over the top and end of the cut sheath.
Electrician's tape
Not Connecting the Shield to the Hood (FG)
1 mm
Soldering 1. Place heat-shrinking tubes over all wires.
2. Pre-solder all wires and connector terminals.
3. Solder the wires.
Heat-shrinking tube
(inner dia. 1.5, l
l
= 10)
Soldering iron
4. Move the heat-shrinking tubes onto the soldered area and shrink them into place.
Heat-shrinking tube
663
Connecting to the RS-232C Port on the CPU Unit Appendix F
• Always turn OFF the power supply to the PLC before connecting or disconnecting communications cables.
• Tighten the communications connector attachment screws to 0.4 N·m.
Assembling the Hood
Assemble the connector hood as shown.
FG Connection
Ground plate
Aluminum foil tape
No FG Connection
Connections to the CPU Unit
664
Connecting to the RS-232C Port on the CPU Unit Appendix F
665
Appendix G
CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Converter
The CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Converter connects directly to a CS/CJ-series RS-232C port and converts RS-
232C to RS-422A/485.
Specifications
General Specifications
RS-232C Connector
Note The hood will have the same electrical potential as the connector on the other end of the cable.
Item Specification
Dimensions 18.2 × 34.0 × 38.8 (W × H × D)
Weight 20 g max.
Ambient operating temperature 0 to 55°C
Ambient storage temperature –20 to 75°C
Ambient operating humidity 10% to 90% (with no condensation)
Rated power supply voltage 5 V (Supplied from pin 6 of the RS-232C connec-
tor.)
Current consumption 40 mA max.
Operating atmosphere No corrosive gases
Vibration resistance Same as SYSMAC CS/CJ Series.
Shock resistance Same as SYSMAC CS/CJ Series.
Isolation method Not isolated
Maximum communications dis-
tance
50 m
Connector Pin Arrangement for
RS-232C Port
SG (0 V)
Pin number Signal
1FG
2RD
3SD
4CS
5RS
6+5V
7, 8 NC
9SG (0 V)
Hood NC
666
CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Converter Appendix G
RS-422A/485 Terminal Block
Block Diagram
DIP Switch Settings
Note 1. Set pins 2 and 3 to the same setting. (ON for the two-wire method or OFF for the four-wire method.)
2. To prohibit echoback, set pin 5 to ON (with RS control).
3. When connecting to several devices using the four-wire method in a 1:N connection, set pin 6 to ON
(with RS control). When connecting using the two-wire method, set pin 6 to ON (with RS control).
Signal
RDA–
RDB+
SDA–
SDB+
FG
SD
RS
CS
RD
ER
DR
SG (0 V)
FG
SW.6
SW.5
SW.2SW.3 SW.1
SDB(+)
SDA(-)
RDB(+)
RDA(-)
FG
+5 V
Pin
number
Function ON OFF
1 Terminating resistance With (at both ends of the commu-
nications path)
Without
2 Two-wire/four-wire method selec-
tion (See note 1.)
Two-wire method Four-wire method
3 Two-wire/four-wire method selec-
tion (See note 1.)
Two-wire method Four-wire method
4 Not used. --- ---
5 Selection of RS control for RD
(See note 2.)
With RS control Without RS control (always ready
to receive)
6 Selection of RS control for SD
(See note 3.)
With RS control Without RS control (always ready
to send)
667
CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Converter Appendix G
Dimensions
DIP Switch Settings, Wiring, and Installation
The DIP switch settings must be changed to perform communications according to settings other than the
default settings.
1. Remove the DIP switch cover using a flat-bladed screwdriver in the way shown below.
Note Press the cover gently while removing it to prevent it from popping out suddenly.
2. Using a fine pair of tweezers or other tool with a fine point, change the settings of the DIP switch pins to
match the desired communications conditions.
3. Be sure to remount the cover after finishing the DIP switch settings.
All the pins are factory-set to OFF.
38.8 18.2
5.8
34.0
1
2
3
4
5
6
O
N
O
N
668
CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Converter Appendix G
Wiring the RS-422A/485 Terminal Block
• Use either two-wire or four-wire shielded cable.
Recommended cable: CO-HC-ESV-3P×7/0.2 (Hirakawa Hewtech)
• Connect the shield wire at both ends of the cable carrying RS-422A/485 signals to ground, and ground the
ground terminal on the Power Supply Unit of the CPU or Expansion Rack to 100 Ω max.
1. Taking care not to damage the shield, strip between 30 and 80 mm of sheath off the end of the cable.
2. Carefully twist the shield mesh together to form a single wire, and carefully cut off the material surrounding
the signal wires and any unnecessary signal wires.
3. Strip the sheath off the signal wires to a length sufficient to attach crimp terminals. Apply vinyl tape or heat–
shrinking tube to the sheathes and stripped parts of communications lines.
4. Attach sticktype crimp terminals to ends of the signal lines and crimp them using a crimp tool.
• Recommend crimp terminals:
Phoenix Contact
AI Series
AI-0.5-8WH-B (serial number: 3201369)
• Recommended crimp tool:
Phoenix Contact ZA3
With four-wire cables, insert two signal lines into each crimp terminal together before crimping.
• Recommend crimp terminals:
Phoenix Contact
AI Series
AI-TWIN2×0.5-8WH (serial number: 3200933)
• Recommended crimp tool:
Phoenix Contact
UD6 (serial number: 1204436)
5. Connect the signal lines and the shield line to the RS-422A/485 terminal block.
30 to 80 mm
669
CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Converter Appendix G
Mounting to the Unit
Mount the Converter to the RS-232C port (D-Sub, 9-pin) of the Unit to be connected in the following way.
1. Align the Converter’s connector with that of the Unit and push it into the Unit’s connector as far as possible.
2. Tighten the mounting screws on either side of the Converter. (Tightening torque: 0.3 N⋅m.)
As an example, connection to a CJ1 CPU Unit is shown below.
Wiring Example (CJ1M CPU Units Connected via Serial PLC Link)
Wiring for Four-wire Cable
CJ1M CPU Unit (master)
Serial PLC Link
CJ1M CPU Unit (slave 0) CJ1M CPU Unit (slave 1)
CPU Unit's
RS-232C port
RS-422A
Converter
(CJ1W-CIF11)
CPU Unit's
RS-232C port CPU Unit's
RS-232C port
RS-422A
Converter
(CJ1W-CIF11)
RS-422A
Converter
(CJ1W-CIF11)
RDA-
RDB+
SDA-
SDB+
FG
RDA-
RDB+
SDA-
SDB+
FG
RDA-
RDB+
SDA-
SDB+
FG
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
SW6
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
SW6
NT-AL001
DIP Switch Settings
Not used. (ON)
Terminating resistance
Two-wire/four-wire
Two-wire/four-wire
Transmission Mode
Transmission Mode
CJ1M CPU Unit
(master)
ON
ON
OFF (four-wire)
OFF (four-wire)
OFF (Always send)
OFF (Always send)
CJ1M CPU Unit
(slave 0)
ON
OFF
OFF (four-wire)
OFF (four-wire)
OFF (
sends when CS is "H")
ON (
sends when CS is "L")
CJ1M CPU Unit
(slave 1)
ON (with)
OFF (four-wire)
OFF (four-wire)
OFF
OFF (without)
ON (with)
CJ1W-CIF11
DIP Switch Settings
Terminating resistance
Two-wire/four-wire
Two-wire/four-wire
Not used.
RD control
SD control
670
CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Converter Appendix G
Wiring for Two-wire Cable
Note Refer to Serial PLC Link Connection Examples (CJ1M CPU Units Only) on page 658 for wiring diagrams
and settings when using CJ1W-CIF RS-422A Converters only.
RDA-
RDB+
SDA-
SDB+
FG
RDA-
RDB+
SDA-
SDB+
FG
RDA-
RDB+
SDA-
SDB+
FG
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
SW6
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
SW6
NT-AL001
DIP Switch Settings
Not used. (ON)
Terminating resistance
Two-wire/four-wire
Two-wire/four-wire
Transmission Mode
Transmission Mode
CJ1M CPU Unit
(master)
CJ1M CPU Unit
(slave 0)
CJ1M CPU Unit
(slave 1)
ON
ON
OFF (two-wire)
OFF (two-wire)
OFF (
sends when CS is "H")
ON (
sends when CS is "L")
ON
OFF
OFF (two-wire)
OFF (two-wire)
OFF (
sends when CS is "H")
ON (
sends when CS is "L")
ON (with)
OFF (two-wire)
OFF (two-wire)
OFF
OFF (without)
ON (with)
CJ1W-CIF11
DIP Switch Settings
Terminating resistance
Two-wire/four-wire
Two-wire/four-wire
Not used.
RD control
SD control
671
Index
Numerics
100-V AC Input Units, 549
24-V DC Input Units, 540
24-V power supply, 134
A
Access Error Flag, 436
addresses
memory map, 637
allocations
See also I/O allocations
Always OFF Flag, 437
Always ON Flag, 437
applications
precautions, xli
arc killers, 586
Auxiliary Area, 391, 597
read/write section, 621–631
read-only section, 597
B
B7A Interface Unit, 197
background execution, 448
settings, 292
special flags, 412
background processing, 292
backing up data, 154
backup files, 152
Basic I/O Units, 93
available models, 183
basic I/O errors, 515
dimensions, 188
error information, 401
fuse status flags, 392
I/O allocations, 345
I/O response time, 333, 392, 469, 601
specifications, 106, 537–551
wiring, 262
Basic I/O Units with Connectors, 186
battery, 147
Battery Set, 98
battery-free operation, 17
compartment, 147
error, 515
error flag, 403, 615
low battery error detection, 291, 336
service life, xxii, 532
voltage indicator, 533
Battery Error Flag, 615
BKUP indicator, 143
block programs
instruction execution times, 492
built-in I/O
allocations, 348
specifications, 593
C
C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console, 161
cables, 99, 102, 104, 169, 252, 267
CX-Programmer, 163
See also I/O Connecting Cables
Carry Flag, 436
CIO Area, 371
description, 377
CJ Series
definition, xxix
CJ1 CPU Units, 140
CJ1-H CPU Units, 140
features, 13–14
CJ1M
functions, 67
CJ1M CPU Units, 140
CJ1W-MD233, 555
CJ-series Basic I/O Units
wiring, 263
CJ-series CPU Bus Units
See also CPU Bus Units
clock
clock data, 404, 610
clock instructions
execution times, 491
clock pulses
flags, 438
communications, 65, 112
baud rate, 309
Communications Port Enabled Flags, 634
data, 94
distances, 129
errors, 516
flags, 408
instruction execution times, 490
network instruction execution times, 490
networks, 125
overview, 128
protocol support, 114
protocols, 114
serial communications, 6
specifications, 129
system expansion, 112
Communications Port Enabled Flags, 634
comparison instructions
execution times, 476–477
compatibility with previous PLCs, 21
CompoBus/S, 127
components
CPU Unit, 90, 141
672
Index
Power Supply Units, 171
CompoWay/F, 119
Condition Flag
saving and loading status, 437
Condition Flags, 436
connecting
PLC components, 247
connectors, 264
connector pin arrangement, 167
RS-232C connectors, 661
Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Units, 267
Contact Output Units, 565–566
contact protection circuit, 586
control panels
installation, 230
Controller Link, 126
cooling
fan, 228
Counter Area, 425
counters
execution times, 475
CPU Bus Area, 134
CPU Bus Unit Area, 384
capacity, 134
CPU Bus Units, 93
data exchange, 364
error information, 403
errors, 515
I/O allocations, 347, 385, 427
Initialization Flags, 393, 608
memory area, 384
refreshing, 15, 364
related flags/bits, 635
Restart Bits, 393, 621
setting area capacity, 134
settings, 441
setup errors, 516
specifications, 112
CPU Rack
CJ Series, 95
CPU Racks
description, 95
maximum current consumption, 129
troubleshooting, 524
CPU Unit
capabilities, 92–93
components, 90, 141
connections, 94
CPU errors, 505
dimensions, 148
DIP switch, 91, 144
indicators, 91
initialization, 448
operation, 445
process settings, 312
RS-232C port connections, 655
settings, 290
CPU Units, 140
comparison, 54, 73
CQM1-PRO01-E Programming Console, 160
CS Series
definition, xxix
current consumption, 129
tables, 131
CX-Programmer, 161, 215
peripheral servicing, 447
cycle time
computing, 457–471
effects of online editing, 468
errors, 512
example calculations, 467
maximum cycle time, 394, 602
present cycle time, 394, 602
related settings, 295
setting, 295, 340
settings, 339
Cycle Time Too Long Flag, 403, 613
D
data areas
forcing bit status, 376
overview, 371
status after fatal errors, 376
status after mode changes, 377
status after power interruptions, 377
data control instructions
execution times, 486
data forms
converting, 18
Data Link Area, 383
data links, 383, 387
data movement instructions
execution times, 478
Data Registers, 434
data registers
sharing, 17, 375, 394, 435
data shift instructions
execution times, 478
data tracing
related flags/bits, 395
DC Input Units, 542–543, 545, 547–548
DC Input/Transistor Output Units, 553, 555, 559, 561
debugging
flags, 395
debugging instructions
execution times, 491
decrement instructions
execution times, 479
Index
673
DeviceNet, 126
DeviceNet Area, 388
dimensions
B7A Interface Unit, 207
Basic I/O Units, 188
CPU Racks, 89
CPU Unit, 148
installation, 232
Memory Cards, 156
Power Supply Units, 173
DIN Track, 251
DIN track, 249
DIP switch, 91, 144, 280
pin 6 status, 392
display instructions
execution times, 491
DM Area, 425
changing settings, 219
settings, 210
DR00 Output for Background Execution, 412, 422
ducts
wiring, 231
E
EC Directives, xlv
electrical noise, 276
EM Area, 427
current EM bank, 635
EM bank
current EM bank, 635
EM file memory, 149, 428
initializing, 152
PLC Setup settings, 336
starting bank, 610
emergency stop circuit, 226
environmental conditions
checking, 523
Equals Flag, 436
Equals Flag for Background Execution, 412, 422
ER/AER Flag for Background Execution, 412, 422
error codes, 612, 633
Error Flag, 436
error log, 500–501, 632
Error Log Area, 399, 500, 598, 632
error messages, 505
errors
basic I/O errors, 411
communications error flags, 408
CPU Bus Units, 403
CPU Rack, 524
CPU standby errors, 506
error codes, 612, 633
error log, 10, 399, 500–501, 632
error messages, 505
Programming Consoles, 503
Expansion I/O Rack, 524
FAL/FALS flags, 399
fatal errors, 507
flags, 436
flash memory, 400
Input Units, 526
memory error flags, 400
non-fatal, 513
Output Units, 527
PLC Setup errors, 411
programming error flags, 411
settings, 291
Special I/O Units, 411
status after fatal errors, 376
troubleshooting, 499, 501–523
user-programmed errors, 500
Ethernet, 125
execution settings, 290
execution times, 472–497
Expansion I/O Racks
troubleshooting, 524
Expansion Racks
CJ Series, 103
connecting, 252
maximum number allowed, 104
external interrupts
response time, 471
F
fail-safe circuits, 226
failure diagnosis instructions
execution times, 492
FAL Error Flag, 399
FAL errors, 513–514
flag, 616
FAL/FALS Number for System Error Simulation, 399
FALS Error Flag, 399
FALS errors, 512
flag, 613
fatal errors, 507
fatal operating errors, 507
features, 3
CJ1-H, 14
CJ1M, 22
overview, 2
file management
overview, 8
file memory, 8, 149
converting EM Area to file memory, 428
file names, 151
initializing, 152
instruction execution times, 490
674
Index
related flags/bits, 395
file memory instructions
execution times, 490
file names, 151
FINS commands, 121, 123, 363, 365
FINS messages, 123
First Cycle Flag, 393, 455, 599, 633
first Rack word
Programming Console display, 356, 359
flags
table, 597
flash memory
data dates, 407
errors, 400
Flash Memory Error, 400
floating-point math instructions
execution times, 483
flowchart
environmental conditions check, 523
error processing flowchart, 503
I/O check, 522
overall CPU operation, 445
PLC cycle, 457
power supply check, 517
Forced Status Hold Bit, 392, 621
Fujitsu-compatible connectors, 186, 264
functionality, 58
functions
CJ1M, 67
G
general specifications, 88
general-purpose inputs
input time constant settings, 321
Greater Than Flag, 436
Greater Than or Equals Flag, 436
grounding, 258
H
hardware
specifications, 88
high-speed counters, 22
PLC Setup settings, 316
high-speed inputs, 23
Holding Area, 390
Host Link
settings, 299, 308
Host Link System, 115, 121
I
I/O
built-in, 22
checking, 522
settings, 135
I/O allocations, 343
status, 392
I/O Area, 377
initializing, 378
I/O Bus error, 508
I/O Control Units, 181
I/O Interface Units, 181
I/O interrupts
response time, 470
I/O memory, 145, 368
addresses, 637
areas, 638
effects of operating mode changes, 451
holding
settings, 333
structure, 369
I/O refreshing, 447
I/O response time, 469
Basic I/O Units, 392
calculating, 469
I/O table
registering, 210, 215
I/O Table Setting error, 511
I/O tables
error information, 361
registering, 351
I/O Terminals, 267, 270
connecting, 193
immediate refreshing
input bits and words, 379
output bits and words, 381
increment instructions
execution times, 479
index register
sharing, 434
index registers, 9, 428
sharing, 17, 375, 394
indicators, 91, 143
CPU Unit, 91, 143
error indications, 501
indirect addressing
DM Area, 426
EM Area, 428
index registers, 429
inductive load surge suppressor, 276
Initial Task Execution Flag, 393
Initial Task Flag, 633
Initial Task Startup Flag, 599
initialization
CPU Bus Units, 608
CPU Unit, 448
file memory, 152
Index
675
I/O Area, 378
input bits, 378
input devices
wiring, 272
input instructions
execution times, 473
input operation settings
IN0 to IN3, 319
input time constant
settings, 321
Input Units
specifications, 106, 537
troubleshooting, 526
inspection
procedures, 530
installation, 210, 212, 225
control panels, 230
DIN Track, 249
environment, 228
ambient conditions, 228
cooling, 228
fail-safe circuits, 226
precautions, xli, 228
instruction errors
treatment, 339
instruction execution times, 472–497
instructions
DI(693), 454
EI(694), 454
execution times, 472
failure diagnosis, 10
index registers, 9
loops, 9
ranges, 9
records and tables, 10
stacks, 9
steps per instruction, 472
table data processing instructions, 484
text strings, 9
interrupt control instructions
execution times, 487
Interrupt Input Unit Position Error Flag, 402
Interrupt Input Units, 184–185, 550
errors, 402
response time, 470
Interrupt Task error, 514
Interrupt Task Error Cause Flag, 636
interrupt tasks
detecting errors, 336
error flag, 636
error information, 401
errors, 514
interrupts, 22, 184
interval, 296
Power OFF Interrupt Task, 296, 341
processing times, 394
response time, 470–471
IOM Hold Bit, 392, 621
IORF(097) refreshing
input bits and words, 380
output bits and words, 382
IR/DR Operation between Tasks, 394
IR00 Output for Background Execution, 412, 422
J-L
leakage current
output, 275
Less Than Flag, 436
Less Than or Equals Flag, 437
linear approximations, 18
Link Area, 383
load short-circuit protection, 588, 590
Local Network Table, 441
logic instructions
execution times, 482
loops
instructions, 9
M
maintenance
procedures, 532
memory
capacities, 92–93
memory block map, 145
memory map, 638
See also data areas
memory addresses, 637
memory allocation
settings, 292
memory areas, 367
See also memory
Memory Cards, 149
dimensions, 156
initializing, 152
installing, 156
installing in a personal computer, 158
overview, 8
procedures, 153
removing, 157
memory error, 508
Memory Error Flag, 400, 614
memory map, 637
MIL connectors, 186, 264
Mixed I/O Units
specifications, 108
momentary power interruption, 452
MONITOR mode, 449
676
Index
monitoring
remote monitoring, 7
N
Negative Flag, 436
network instructions
execution times, 490
networks, 125
Controller Link, 126
DeviceNet, 126
Ethernet, 125
multilevel, 6
multilevel networks, 6
overview, 128
related flags/bits, 408–410
new instructions, 17
noise
reducing electrical noise, 276
non-fatal operating errors, 513
no-protocol communications
settings, 302
Not Equal Flag, 436
NT Link, 117
settings, 301, 309
NT Links, 117
maximum unit number, 301
O
online editing
effect on cycle time, 468
Online Editing Flags, 599
Online Editing Wait Flag, 635
related flags/bits, 395
operating environment
precautions, xl
operating modes
description, 449
effects of mode changes on counters, 425
effects of mode changes on data areas, 377
effects of mode changes on timers, 424
operations allowed in each mode, 450
operation
CPU Unit, 445
preparations, 210
testing, 211, 220
origin return function
PLC Setup settings, 330
origin search function
PLC Setup settings, 321
origin searches, 23
output bits, 381
output instructions
execution times, 474
Output OFF Bit, 395, 621
Output Units
specifications, 107, 538
troubleshooting, 527
Overflow Flag, 436
P
parallel processing, 15, 446
parallel processing modes, 313, 446
settings, 313
Parallel Processing with Asynchronous Memory Access,
446, 461
Parallel Processing with Synchronous Memory Access, 446,
462
Parameter Area, 368, 439
Parameter Date, 407
parts
replacing parts, 532
performance, 3
peripheral bus
settings, 301
peripheral devices
See also Programming Devices
peripheral port
communications error, 516
connecting a personal computer, 99
related flags/bits, 410, 612
settings, 308, 337
specifications, 167
peripheral servicing, 447
cycle time too long, 403
priority servicing, 602, 648–649
setting, 314–315, 340
settings, 314, 340
Peripheral Servicing Cycle Time, 394
Peripheral Servicing Priority Mode, 602, 648–649
Peripheral Servicing Too Long Flag, 403
personal computer
connecting, 99
installing a Memory Card, 158
PLC Setup, 11, 210, 439
coding sheets, 639
error information, 400
errors, 515
overview, 286
settings, 288
PLCs
cooling, 228
power consumption, 129
Power Holding Time, 453
Power Interruption Disable Setting, 392
power interruptions
CPU operation for power interruptions, 451–457
disabling, 392, 454
Index
677
effects on data areas, 377
information, 405, 622
momentary interruptions, 452
Power OFF Detection Delay Time, 296, 341
power OFF interrupt task, 296, 341
settings, 296
power interrupts
holding time, 453
power OFF detection delay, 453
Power OFF Detection Time, 453
power OFF interrupts
response time, 471
power OFF processing, 451–454
power supply, 175
checking, 517
CPU processing for power interruptions, 451
specifications, 88
Power Supply Units, 170
dimensions, 173
emergency stop, 226
grounding, 258
wiring AC Units, 255
wiring DC Units, 257
precautions, xxxvii
applications, xli
general, xxxviii
handling precautions, 531
interlock circuits, 227
operating environment, xl
output surge current, 275
output wiring, 275
periodic inspections, 530
safety, xxxviii
safety circuits, 226
printing, 223
Program Error Flag, 613
program errors, 509, 636
PROGRAM mode, 449
Programmable Terminals, 117
RS-232C connection example, 658
programming, 210, 219
capacity, 92–93
error flag, 613
errors, 509
instruction execution times, 472
program capacity, 92–93
program error information, 398
program errors, 636
remote programming, 7
saving the program, 223
See also tasks
symbols, 5
transferring the program, 210, 220
Programming Consoles, 98, 160
connecting, 101
error messages, 503
peripheral servicing, 447
PLC Setup coding sheets, 639
See also Programming Devices
Programming Devices, 158
connecting, 99
connections, 62
peripheral servicing, 447
Windows, 11
protocol macros, 6, 118–119
system configuration, 118
protocols, 114
pulse frequency conversion, 24
pulse inputs, 70
Pulse Output 1 settings, 325
pulse outputs, 22, 68, 71
Q
Quick-response Input Units, 551
R
range instructions, 9
record-table instructions, 10
refreshing
I/O refreshing, 379, 381, 447
immediate refreshing, 379, 381
IORF(097), 380, 382
Relay Network Table, 441
relays
service life, 586
remote I/O communications
CompoBus/S, 127
response time
settings, 298
Restart Bits
CPU Bus Units, 393
peripheral port, 410
RS-232C port, 411, 422
Special I/O Units, 393
Routing Tables, 440
RS-232C port
communications error, 516
connecting a personal computer, 99
connection examples, 655–658
pin arrangement, 167
recommended wiring methods, 660
related flags/bits, 411, 611
settings, 299, 337
specifications, 167
RS-422A Converter, 665
RUN mode, 449
RUN output, 255
specifications, 88
678
Index
S
safety circuits, 226
safety precautions, xxxviii
scheduled interrupts, 24
response time, 471
time units, 296, 339
self-maintaining bits, 390
sequence control instructions
execution times, 474
serial communications
communications information, 411
protocols, 114
See also communications
system configuration, 112
serial communications instructions
execution times, 490
Serial PLC Link Area, 387
serial PLC links, 24, 71
settings, 306
Service Life Expectancy, 586
setup
initial setup, 210
preparations for operation, 210
short-circuit protection, 275, 589–590
simulating system errors, 399
Special I/O Unit Area, 386
Special I/O Units, 93
data exchange, 362
disabling cyclic refreshing, 342
error information, 411
errors, 515
I/O allocations, 346
Initialization Flags, 393, 608
Restart Bits, 393, 621
settings, 297
setup errors, 516
specifications, 109
words allocated to Special I/O Units, 386, 426
special math instructions
execution times, 482
specifications, 75
B7A Interface Unit, 198–199
Basic I/O Units, 537
built-in I/O, 593
C200H-ID217, 563
CJ1W-IA111, 549
CJ1W-IA201, 548
CJ1W-ID211, 540
CJ1W-ID231, 542
CJ1W-ID232, 543
CJ1W-ID261, 545
CJ1W-ID262, 547
CJ1W-IDP01, 551
CJ1W-INT01, 550
CJ1W-MD231, 553
CJ1W-MD261, 559
CJ1W-MD263, 561
CJ1W-MD563, 563
CJ1W-OA201, 567
CJ1W-OC201, 565
CJ1W-OC211, 566
CJ1W-OD201, 568
CJ1W-OD202, 578
CJ1W-OD21, 570
CJ1W-OD212, 580
CJ1W-OD231, 571
CJ1W-OD232, 581
CJ1W-OD233, 574
CJ1W-OD261, 575
CJ1W-OD263, 577, 584
CJ-series Special I/O Units, 109
communications, 129
CS1 CPU Bus Units, 112
functions, 83
general, 88
Input Units, 106
Mixed I/O Units, 108
Output Units, 107, 538
performance, 76
peripheral port, 167
RS-232C port, 167
Special I/O Units, 109
specificationsCJ1W-CIF11, 665
stack instructions, 9
execution times, 485
stack processing
execution times, 485
standby errors, 506
standby operating errors, 506
startup condition setting, 290, 507
startup mode
setting, 290, 335
settings, 335
Step Flag, 599
step instructions
execution times, 487–488
subroutine instructions
execution times, 486
subroutines
execution times, 486
Support Software
See also personal computer
switch settings, 212
CPU Unit, 144
Power Supply Units, 171
See also DIP switch
symbol math instructions
execution times, 479
Index
679
system configuration, 75, 182
expanded, 112
Host Link, 115
NT Link, 117
serial communications, 112
T
task control instructions
execution times, 494–495
Task Error Flag, 607
Task Flags, 435
Task Started Flag, 393
tasks
description, 4
instruction execution times, 494–495
related flags/bits, 394
See also interrupt tasks
Task Flags, 435
Terminal Blocks
connecting, 191
terminal blocks, 263
text strings
instruction execution times, 494
instructions, 9
Timer Area, 423
timers
execution times, 475
timing
settings, 295
Too Many I/O Points error, 511
TR Area, 422
tracing
data tracing, 11
See also data tracing
Transistor Output Units, 568, 570–571, 574–575, 577–
581, 584
Triac Output Units, 567
troubleshooting, 499
overview, 10
TTL I/O Units, 563
two-wire DC sensors, 274
U
Underflow Flag, 436
Units
available models, 183
connectability, 104
lists, 96
settings, 298
Units Detected at Startup, 392
user memory, 145
User Program Date, 407
V–W
Windows, 100
wiring, 210, 212, 225, 255
AC Input Units, 274
Basic I/O Units, 262
DC Input Units, 272
I/O devices, 272
I/O Units with Connectors, 263
installing wiring ducts, 231
power supply, 255
precautions, 228
interlock circuits, 227
output surge current, 275
procedure, 265
recommended RS-232C wiring methods, 660
wire size, 265
Work Area, 389
work bits, 389
work words, 389
680
Index
681
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the
previous version.
Revision code Date Revised content
01 April 2001 Original production
02 October 2001 New products added to the manual, including the new High-speed CPU Units (CJ1-H
CPU Units). (Extensive changes too numerous to list.)
03 July 2002 New product (CJ1M CPU Unit) added to the manual. (Extensive changes too numerous to
list.) Added information on Serial PLC Link, Built-in I/O, and Quick-response Input Units.
Changed abbreviation of Programmable Controller from “PC” to “PLC.” throughout man-
ual.
Page xxi: Added two new precautions.
Page 3: Changed CX-Programmer version information. Changed information on PLC
instruction times.
Page 4: Added information on Expansion Racks.
Page 11: Added information on binary refreshing.
Section 12: Added information on internal clock.
Appendix B: Added Built-in I/O specifications.
Appendix C: Added information on new addresses in Auxiliary Area.
04 February 2003 Mixed I/O Units (CJ1W-MD231/MD261/MD233/MD263/MD563) and B7A Interface Units
(CJ1W-B7A14/B7A04/B7A22 were added at various places throughout the manual. Other
changes are as follows:
Pages xv and xix: Precaution added.
Page 110: Note added to table.
Page 125: Model number changed to CJ1W-@D@6@.
Pages 128 and 129: Headings reworked for addition of new models.
Page 130: Section added on B7A Interface Units.
Page 161: Page reworked and new models added.
Pages 180 and 181: Connection patterns added for new models.
Page 190: Note changed.
Page 191: Note changed.
Page 208: Settings added.
Page 377: CPU reset column added to table.
Page 381: Note added.
Page 393: Top left box in flowchart changed.
Page 408: Notes added.
Pages 61 and 100: HMC-EF861 and HMC-EF571 removed and other Memory Card
model numbers corrected.
Page 87: Consumption of DeviceNet Unit corrected.
Page 97: Page reworked.
Page 177: Tables expanded.
Pages 206 and 207: Baud rate settings changed and note added.
Page 437: “A” and “B” removed from graphic.
Page 490: Note added.
Cat. No. W393-E1-14
Revision code
682
Revision History
05 September 2003 Basic I/O Units (CJ1W-ID201/OD203/OD204/OD262/MD232) and Analog I/O Units
(CJ1W-DA08V/MAD42) were added at various places throughout the manual. Extensive
changes throughout the manual include corrections, changes, and additions on the follow-
ing pages:
Page 38: Corrected bits “A53102” and “A53103” to “A53108” and “A53109,” respectively.
Page 39: Added note on transmission length
Page 44: Corrected current consumption from “0.82” to “0.99” and from “0.78” to “0.91.”
“Asynchronous” corrected to “synchronous” in common specifications table.
Page 48: Changed EM Area to “7 banks max.: E0_00000 to E6_32767 max.”
Page 52: Changed information for Serial PLC Link.
Page 59: Changed “left” to “right” in note.
Page 61: Corrected “32 Kwords” to “64 Kwords” for CJ1G-CPU43H/CPU42H data mem-
ory size.
Page 66: Changed “CPU Rack” to “Expansion Rack” in rack configurations table.
Page 67, 124: Corrected “DC” to “AC” in specifications for AC Input Units.
Page 68: Changed “output” to “input” in Note 2.
Page 87: Removed “CX/Programmer” from table.
Page 88: Removed note from CJ-series Communications Adapters table.
Page 89: Corrected “Output” to “Input” for AC Input Units.
Page 108: Corrected “right” to “left” in step 2.
Page 109: Corrected “Remove” to “Install” in step 4.
Page 124: Added new Units to table and removed output specifications for Transistor Out-
put Unit.
Page 126: Removed “CJ1” from subheading of Application Precautions.
Page 135, 136: Corrected “G79-I@-@-DI” to “G79-O@-@-D1” and also changed final “I” to
“1” in other Connecting Cable model numbers.
Page 143: Corrected “n+4” to “n+3” in table.
Page 171: Corrected “100 to 240” to “24” for the CJ1W-PD025.
Page 185: Changed “CPU Unit” to “I/O Interface Unit” in diagram.
Page 187: Corrected “28-15x4.5” to “28-25x4” in diagram.
Pages 191, 192, 193, 195: Changed “M3.5” to “M4” self-raising terminals.
Pages 195, 196: Corrected “Power Supply Unit” to “I/O Unit” for information on crimp ter-
minals.
Page 196: Changed “3.5 mm” to “M3” in diagram and changed related sentence above.
Page 198: Changed “32” to “64” for CJ1W-OD261
Page 207: Changed “AC/DC” to “DC” and “voltage current” to “voltage” in diagram.
Page 214: Swapped ON/OFF functions for pin 4 and also for pin 6.
Pages 253, 254: Changed “0 (OFF)” to “1 (ON)” in bottom right box of bottom diagram.
Page 293: Changed “CIO 0079” to “CIO 0159,” “007915” to “015915,” and “1,280 (80
words)” to “2,560 (60 words).”
Page 307: Changed “A08915” to “A06915” in address for Basic I/O Unit Status Area, and
changed description.
Page 355: Removed “RUN” from note 2.
Page 358: Changed note.
Page 362: Modified diagram
Page 368: Corrected “DC” to “AC” in table for CJ1W-IA201
Page 374: Changed top diagram.
Page 408: Corrected “CS1” to “CJ1” in diagram
Page 423: Changed diagram.
Pages 439, 440: Reworked tables and added notes.
Page 442: Changed diagram and added note.
Pages 443, 445, 447, 448, 449: Changed and added notes.
Pages 449, 450: Corrected “100 V DC” to “500 V DC” in table.
Pages 452, 453, 455, 457, 459, 461, 463, 464: Added/changed notes
Pages 464, 465, 466: Corrected “100 V DC” to “500 V DC” in table.
Pages 466, 467: Added notes.
Page 468: Diagram changed.
Pages 470, 471, 473,475, 478: Changed and added notes.
Page 474: Changed diagram. Corrected “62” to “64” in heading.
Page 486: Corrected “3.0 s” to “3.0 µs” in diagram.
Page 487: Corrected “open collector inputs” to “open collector outputs.”
Page 527: Corrected “Bank C” to “Bank 7” in diagram.
Page 530: Added row to table and note.
Page 548: Added note and information on RS-232C port connections.
Page 555: Added block diagram.
Page 559: Changed diagram.
Revision code Date Revised content
Revision History
683
06 December 2003 Information was added on CPU Units Ver. 2.0, on the CJ1M-CPU11/CPU21, on the
CS1W-CIF31, and on the PLS2(887) throughout the manual (see 1-3-7 for overview).
Pages xiii to xxii: PLP information updated.
Section 7: Reworked to include settings for CPU Units Ver. 2.0.
Section 8: Completely reworked.
Page 22: Upper right cell of table corrected.
Page 71, 88, 89, 91, 369, and 370: New products added.
Page 84: Communications specifications added.
Page 218: Note added.
Page 317: Day of month specifications corrected.
07 July 2004 Extensive changes too numerous to list in detail were added for new functionality and new
models.
Page xv: Added information on Loop-control CPU Units.
Pages 17 to 18 and Section 1-4: Added information on CJ1H/CJ1M CPU Unit version
3.0 upgrade.
Sections 2-3 and 3-1: Added new CPU Unit model CJ1H-CPU67H.
Sections 2-5: Added information on Serial Gateway.
Section 3-2: Added information on comment memory.
Section 7-1: Added FB communications instructions settings and Serial Gateway set-
tings.
Section 8-2: Added precautions when changing I/O allocation.
Section 9-11 and Appendix C: Added Free Running Timer (A000 and A001) and func-
tions block information (A34500, A580 to A582) to Auxiliary Area.
Section 10-5: Added new instructions TXDU(256) and RXDU(255), model conversion
instructions XFERC(565), DISTC(566), COLLC(567), MOVBC(568), and
BCNTC(621) and special function block instruction GETID(286). Function block instance
execution time and the number of function block program steps was also added.
08 December 2004 Revisions and additions were made throughout the manual for functionality supported by
Power Supply Units with CS1W-PA205C/PD022, including the following changes.
Page xxiv: Changed table of reference manuals.
Pages xxviii, xxxi, and xxxii: Added precautionary information.
Pages 12 and 14: Added information on battery replacement notification.
Page 22: Added diagram
Pages 89, 97, 104, 127, 164, 217, 228, 490, and 503: Added information to table.
Pages 90, 214, and 272: Added notes.
Page 165: Added diagrams and information on components and dimensions diagrams.
Page 166: Added dimensions diagrams, information on power supply confirmation, and
added models to table.
Page 167: Added models to table and added a new sub section on battery replacement
notification.
Pages 222 and 223: Added dimensions diagrams.
Page 237: Changed diagram and added model number to information on power supply
capacity.
Page 238: Changed diagram.
Page 239: Changed diagram, and added information on power supplies and new models.
Page 241: Added information on alarm output.
Page 359: Corrected address from “CIO 23189” to “CIO 3189” for the Serial PLC Link
Area.
Pages 419, 421, and 422: Added information on power OFF operation and power inter-
ruptions.
Page 538: Changed diagram.
09 October 2006 Information was added on CJ1M CPU Units with unit version 4.0.
Information was added on CJ1-H CPU Units with unit version 4.0.
Descriptions and contents were improved.
The 15-Mbyte flash memory was deleted.
10 April 2007 Information was added on the CJ1H-CPU@@H-R CPU Units.
11 October 2007 Page xi: Added sentence at top of page and added two lines to table.
Page xv: Added note and changed reference to note in table.
Page 54: Changed right two column entries for Overhead time.
Page 76: Corrected EM bank number in fourth column for Extended Data Memory.
Page 109: Corrected number of outputs for Analog I/O Units.
Page 187: Added CJ1W-MD23@ 32-point Units.
Page 206: Removed dot from figure.
Page 207: Corrected wiring diagram.
Page 371: Corrected addresses at the end of the I/O Area.
Page 404: Added paragraph at the bottom of the page.
Page 438: Added columns for names on Programming Console.
Page 439: Corrected symbols in figure and added two minor sections.
Page 512: Removed “CYCLE TIME OVER.”
Page 537: Corrected output specification in next to last row of bottom table.
Page 563: Corrected voltage for input current of input section.
Page 665: Added “(0 V)” to signal name.
Page 666: Corrected two signal names at lower left of block diagram.
Revision code Date Revised content
684
Revision History
12 January 2008 Added information on unit version 4.1 of the CJ1H-CPU@@H-R CPU Units (CJ1-H-R).
Page x: Added row to table.
Page xv: Added information to note.
Page xvii: Changed unit version in top table. Added note and information on specifica-
tions change.
Page xviii: Added note on CX-Programmer versions.
Pages 13 and 277: Added note.
Page 438: Added information to high-speed clock pulse table.
13 August 2008 Page x: Added unit version 4.2.
Pages xv: Changed note 2.
Page xvii: Changed note 2 and changed unit version to 4.2.
Page xviii: Changed note 2 and added sentence at top of page.
Page xxix: Added the CJ2 CPU Units.
Pages xxx and xxxi: Changed name of W446, W447, W464, and W463, and removed
version number from description of W447.
Page 13: Changed note.
Page 45: Removed note.
Page 57: Changed “input comparison” to “symbol comparison.”
Page 79: Changed programming specifications.
Page 86: Changed remote programming and monitoring specifications.
Page 88: Removed “at room temperature” from some of the inrush current specifications.
Page 163: Added XW2Z-200S-V and XW2Z-500S-V.
Pages 184 and 187 to 190: Changed headings and callouts.
Page 303: Removed last line of table.
Page 307: Replaced screen capture
Page 438: Changed lower left cell of table.
Page 539 and other pages: Added “5 V DC:” or added a colon to the internal current con-
sumption specifications for all Units.
Pages 557, 577 to 579: Added “load” to “short-circuit protection” in callouts.
14 September 2009 Page xxx: Updated manual W340 to W474.
Pages xliv and 657: Updated note on pin 6.
Page 85: Added serial communications modes.
Pages 97, 131, 258, 405, 406, 629, and 630: Added notes.
Page 103: Removed information from first paragraph and notes added.
Page 105: Changed first paragraph.
Page 133: Changed current consumption for Ethernet Unit.
Pages 134 and 168: Changed note.
Pages 150 and 151: Added note and reference to it.
Page 164: Changed model numbers under “Cable 1.”
Pages 256, 257, 260, and 262: Changed information on crimp terminals.
Page 264: Added “/F” to two model numbers.
Page 288: Added paragraph.
Page 338: Added information to note.
Pages 370 and 371: Added note and references to it.
Page 377: Changed bottom two cells in table.
Page 454: Added text to figure and changed table.
Page 464: Changed I/O refresh time for CJ1W-NC321/233 for CJ1.
Pages 546, 548, 559, 561, and 563: Changed time in note.
Page 628: Added A6000 to A6007.
Revision code Date Revised content
Authorized Distributor:
In the interest of product improvement,
specifications are subject to change without notice.
Cat. No. W393-E1-14
Printed in Japan
1009
© OMRON Corporation 2001 All Rights Reserved.
OMRON Corporation Industrial Automation Company
OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
One Commerce Drive Schaumburg,
IL 60173-5302 U.S.A.
Tel: (1) 847-843-7900/Fax: (1) 847-843-7787
Regional Headquarters
OMRON EUROPE B.V.
Wegalaan 67-69-2132 JD Hoofddorp
The Netherlands
Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388
Contact: www.ia.omron.com
Tokyo, JAPAN
OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.
No. 438A Alexandra Road # 05-05/08 (Lobby 2),
Alexandra Technopark,
Singapore 119967
Tel: (65) 6835-3011/Fax: (65) 6835-2711
OMRON (CHINA) CO., LTD.
Room 2211, Bank of China Tower,
200 Yin Cheng Zhong Road,
PuDong New Area, Shanghai, 200120, China
Tel: (86) 21-5037-2222/Fax: (86) 21-5037-2200
Terms and Conditions of Sale
1. Offer; Acceptance. These terms and conditions (these "Terms") are deemed
part of all quotes, agreements, purchase orders, acknowledgments, price lists,
catalogs, manuals, brochures and other documents, whether electronic or in
writing, relating to the sale of products or services (collectively, the "Products")
by Omron Electronics LLC and its subsidiary companies (“Omron”). Omron
objects to any terms or conditions proposed in Buyer’s purchase order or other
documents which are inconsistent with, or in addition to, these Terms.
2. Prices; Payment Terms. All prices stated are current, subject to change with-
out notice by Omron. Omron reserves the right to increase or decrease prices
on any unshipped portions of outstanding orders. Payments for Products are
due net 30 days unless otherwise stated in the invoice.
3. Discounts. Cash discounts, if any, will apply only on the net amount of invoices
sent to Buyer after deducting transportation charges, taxes and duties, and will
be allowed only if (i) the invoice is paid according to Omron’s payment terms
and (ii) Buyer has no past due amounts.
4. Interest. Omron, at its option, may charge Buyer 1-1/2% interest per month or
the maximum legal rate, whichever is less, on any balance not paid within the
stated terms.
5. Orders. Omron will accept no order less than $200 net billing.
6. Governmental Approvals. Buyer shall be responsible for, and shall bear all
costs involved in, obtaining any government approvals required for the impor-
tation or sale of the Products.
7. Taxes. All taxes, duties and other governmental charges (other than general
real property and income taxes), including any interest or penalties thereon,
imposed directly or indirectly on Omron or required to be collected directly or
indirectly by Omron for the manufacture, production, sale, delivery, importa-
tion, consumption or use of the Products sold hereunder (including customs
duties and sales, excise, use, turnover and license taxes) shall be charged to
and remitted by Buyer to Omron.
8. Financial. If the financial position of Buyer at any time becomes unsatisfactory
to Omron, Omron reserves the right to stop shipments or require satisfactory
security or payment in advance. If Buyer fails to make payment or otherwise
comply with these Terms or any related agreement, Omron may (without liabil-
ity and in addition to other remedies) cancel any unshipped portion of Prod-
ucts sold hereunder and stop any Products in transit until Buyer pays all
amounts, including amounts payable hereunder, whether or not then due,
which are owing to it by Buyer. Buyer shall in any event remain liable for all
unpaid accounts.
9. Cancellation; Etc. Orders are not subject to rescheduling or cancellation
unless Buyer indemnifies Omron against all related costs or expenses.
10. Force Majeure. Omron shall not be liable for any delay or failure in delivery
resulting from causes beyond its control, including earthquakes, fires, floods,
strikes or other labor disputes, shortage of labor or materials, accidents to
machinery, acts of sabotage, riots, delay in or lack of transportation or the
requirements of any government authority.
11. Shipping; Delivery. Unless otherwise expressly agreed in writing by Omron:
a. Shipments shall be by a carrier selected by Omron; Omron will not drop ship
except in “break down” situations.
b. Such carrier shall act as the agent of Buyer and delivery to such carrier shall
constitute delivery to Buyer;
c. All sales and shipments of Products shall be FOB shipping point (unless oth-
erwise stated in writing by Omron), at which point title and risk of loss shall
pass from Omron to Buyer; provided that Omron shall retain a security inter-
est in the Products until the full purchase price is paid;
d. Delivery and shipping dates are estimates only; and
e. Omron will package Products as it deems proper for protection against nor-
mal handling and extra charges apply to special conditions.
12. Claims. Any claim by Buyer against Omron for shortage or damage to the
Products occurring before delivery to the carrier must be presented in writing
to Omron within 30 days of receipt of shipment and include the original trans-
portation bill signed by the carrier noting that the carrier received the Products
from Omron in the condition claimed.
13. Warranties. (a) Exclusive Warranty. Omron’s exclusive warranty is that the
Products will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of
twelve months from the date of sale by Omron (or such other period expressed
in writing by Omron). Omron disclaims all other warranties, express or implied.
(b) Limitations. OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ABOUT NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABIL-
ITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS.
BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE
PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR
INTENDED USE. Omron further disclaims all warranties and responsibility of
any type for claims or expenses based on infringement by the Products or oth-
erwise of any intellectual property right. (c) Buyer Remedy. Omron’s sole obli-
gation hereunder shall be, at Omron’s election, to (i) replace (in the form
originally shipped with Buyer responsible for labor charges for removal or
replacement thereof) the non-complying Product, (ii) repair the non-complying
Product, or (iii) repay or credit Buyer an amount equal to the purchase price of
the non-complying Product; provided that in no event shall Omron be responsi-
ble for warranty, repair, indemnity or any other claims or expenses regarding
the Products unless Omron’s analysis confirms that the Products were prop-
erly handled, stored, installed and maintained and not subject to contamina-
tion, abuse, misuse or inappropriate modification. Return of any Products by
Buyer must be approved in writing by Omron before shipment. Omron Compa-
nies shall not be liable for the suitability or unsuitability or the results from the
use of Products in combination with any electrical or electronic components,
circuits, system assemblies or any other materials or substances or environ-
ments. Any advice, recommendations or information given orally or in writing,
are not to be construed as an amendment or addition to the above warranty.
See http://www.omron247.com or contact your Omron representative for pub-
lished information.
14. Limitation on Liability; Etc. OMRON COMPANIES SHALL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUCTION OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY
WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS
BASED IN CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY.
Further, in no event shall liability of Omron Companies exceed the individual
price of the Product on which liability is asserted.
15. Indemnities. Buyer shall indemnify and hold harmless Omron Companies and
their employees from and against all liabilities, losses, claims, costs and
expenses (including attorney's fees and expenses) related to any claim, inves-
tigation, litigation or proceeding (whether or not Omron is a party) which arises
or is alleged to arise from Buyer's acts or omissions under these Terms or in
any way with respect to the Products. Without limiting the foregoing, Buyer (at
its own expense) shall indemnify and hold harmless Omron and defend or set-
tle any action brought against such Companies to the extent based on a claim
that any Product made to Buyer specifications infringed intellectual property
rights of another party.
16. Property; Confidentiality. Any intellectual property in the Products is the exclu-
sive property of Omron Companies and Buyer shall not attempt to duplicate it
in any way without the written permission of Omron. Notwithstanding any
charges to Buyer for engineering or tooling, all engineering and tooling shall
remain the exclusive property of Omron. All information and materials supplied
by Omron to Buyer relating to the Products are confidential and proprietary,
and Buyer shall limit distribution thereof to its trusted employees and strictly
prevent disclosure to any third party.
17. Export Controls. Buyer shall comply with all applicable laws, regulations and
licenses regarding (i) export of products or information; (iii) sale of products to
“forbidden” or other proscribed persons; and (ii) disclosure to non-citizens of
regulated technology or information.
18. Miscellaneous. (a) Waiver. No failure or delay by Omron in exercising any right
and no course of dealing between Buyer and Omron shall operate as a waiver
of rights by Omron. (b) Assignment. Buyer may not assign its rights hereunder
without Omron's written consent. (c) Law. These Terms are governed by the
law of the jurisdiction of the home office of the Omron company from which
Buyer is purchasing the Products (without regard to conflict of law princi-
ples). (d) Amendment. These Terms constitute the entire agreement between
Buyer and Omron relating to the Products, and no provision may be changed
or waived unless in writing signed by the parties. (e) Severability
. If any provi-
sion hereof is rendered ineffective or invalid, such provision shall not invalidate
any other provision. (f) Setoff. Buyer shall have no right to set off any amounts
against the amount owing in respect of this invoice. (g) Definitions. As used
herein, “including” means “including without limitation”; and “Omron Compa-
nies” (or similar words) mean Omron Corporation and any direct or indirect
subsidiary or affiliate thereof.
Certain Precautions on Specifications and Use
1. Suitability of Use. Omron Companies shall not be responsible for conformity
with any standards, codes or regulations which apply to the combination of the
Product in the Buyer’s application or use of the Product. At Buyer’s request,
Omron will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying
ratings and limitations of use which apply to the Product. This information by
itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the Prod-
uct in combination with the end product, machine, system, or other application
or use. Buyer shall be solely responsible for determining appropriateness of
the particular Product with respect to Buyer’s application, product or system.
Buyer shall take application responsibility in all cases but the following is a
non-exhaustive list of applications for which particular attention must be given:
(i) Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical
interference, or conditions or uses not described in this document.
(ii) Use in consumer products or any use in significant quantities.
(iii) Energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation
systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equip-
ment, and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations.
(iv) Systems, machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or prop-
erty. Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to this Prod-
uct.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCT FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS
RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY OR IN LARGE QUANTITIES WITHOUT
ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO
ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON’S PRODUCT IS PROP-
ERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE
OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
2. Programmable Products. Omron Companies shall not be responsible for the
user’s programming of a programmable Product, or any consequence thereof.
3. Performance Data. Data presented in Omron Company websites, catalogs
and other materials is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitabil-
ity and does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of Omron’s
test conditions, and the user must correlate it to actual application require-
ments. Actual performance is subject to the Omron’s Warranty and Limitations
of Liability.
4. Change in Specifications. Product specifications and accessories may be
changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons. It is our prac-
tice to change part numbers when published ratings or features are changed,
or when significant construction changes are made. However, some specifica-
tions of the Product may be changed without any notice. When in doubt, spe-
cial part numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for
your application. Please consult with your Omron’s representative at any time
to confirm actual specifications of purchased Product.
5. Errors and Omissions. Information presented by Omron Companies has been
checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no responsibility is assumed
for clerical, typographical or proofreading errors or omissions.
OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC •
THE AMERICAS HEADQUARTERS
Schaumburg, IL USA • 847.843.7900 • 800.556.6766 • www.omron247.com
OMRON CANADA, INC. • HEAD OFFICE
Toronto, ON, Canada • 416.286.6465 • 866.986.6766 •
www.omron247.com
OMRON ELETRÔNICA DO BRASIL LTDA • HEAD OFFICE
São Paulo, SP, Brasil • 55.11.2101.6300 • www.omron.com.br
OMRON ELECTRONICS MEXICO SA DE CV • HEAD OFFICE
Apodaca, N.L. • 52.811.156.99.10 • 001.800.556.6766 •
mela@omron.com
OMRON ARGENTINA • SALES OFFICE
Cono Sur • 54.11.4783.5300
OMRON CHILE • SALES OFFICE
Santiago • 56.9.9917.3920
OTHER OMRON LATIN AMERICA SALES
54.11.4783.5300
© 2009 Omron Electronics LLC
Cat. No. W393-E1-14 09/09 Specifications are subject to change without notice. Printed in U.S.A.

Navigation menu